seceteasiiittitits datebelatgians ie ih a oe a a oae eh P 93 Raah esiiiieeesetheit : A Bases Se iaEs we a aH | HEHE Be i aS 3 pe) 33348 is 7s ; t i She: geute ae eetsagA iy staat! eee: Ld Ae “- ix nee Cia vases are: “ee Pane ewe ny le oy wee ber vee i ta: - aestashaxtstet 2 eit sti 3 + fai aise 4 ee PEL ES eee ty Baveee ry at 3 He: afaterets as via ets eas543 eiiaies a ie ast rt eee ret Peseet Peeeeer eee at tt fabiasts Ser staiate esata ie ist : | Heer aseceetbgie eM Eistiaristesaseeattsesat Pabete 33 telttgee? ) ae + : 7 Ee Wet ot oe oe) ; te east 28 : eerie srarass geeshel! A neat ssedtaesesisedis ¥ ; s3 pees Ot ae 232 aay ra) aSF : oe Pet bey Tetes gaye fe gsse 28, ese eyes? eiepepeiece re st ee a rs beet Sie e phate Soak 7 + rHP aaaats oes either 4£0%2312932 eye a4] 3 i paaag hn fupithinis etehities tegstteseees ape ahensz iach Reread shisttegat bene ats sietetce eafetarguctctitasitelieseastetanneserietate casi) agit . aetetabelt trsst CHEE HAH BH Bats Seiristadstogedeted-feltacesgiibed G2 4-8-803-t02apethansiecineceaaaesug tt rpiass, sSabsteledetsts) Spigetsteisiat pitas ajaanseashieiages Hibs tsictatcsraresigaseteigtchunstasanatctdsisiodssdatetasatatesntadeatttistscataraeass anetete sheasgsgesans ite! sEttatatstetastracerasetettesy2s tet Hey : 5 Era whys Wilks iar tih tetas We res A aaneteat uget e¥oestadieagseater ett etiy $18.65 5302 e28050% nSatnszerSits US tal We VE aoe bes Seat ee eee ee eS hast oa SRR Es for be 40 tat) a P esteeeeessbe esa eaestatetasyta 3b geg tee rit ebatssscitetetes Siesta akatetesshacatriisseating segseee tate atetahatatede talaga; here Be yee a ats Seateisasesistoestetogesisatete ateteest $ret ee - fae PFDs re eee EST eat TSC eS PEPE Oh ak Ge ene a? ata aseSe ae ; HS; 5 ei tty) Sebeatn pe atacatacesa ck” apelsiegelcttieapesasani ests ee ye iy re Pee ered Gat Peery ot Piotr tie Sh ts ; ‘ Store tuererttetiee sa) Bl233 sagestechah 438 3 Le Bh ee ed bod Sil ed be PLE ot et ae Ree east | Age papetise = a atats BEALALULSLS ae statataletnietanassten sts sateen ht FSS et ee Oe) Ey eeewe hy) * Bess atpe ssp eyS, Sus, enSytah sages aeese paths ceetad: Stacks aged spagegsesaesete Nee Ott oF Se ae PT UT ITE SEROUS A eth ee reed 324032 GAs aS At r SES DRG ha Bod he Sle BRHF aed 5 sae ase agitpe ses tise ribet re tra ey bebe rd sie true Cree ree trl hd Cond Se be ed beet in AEE LY pap rere fe ot ates chat tbe ye here ststass ; piutabersahassavcatiecttsa4ra erat st sfetecstalesee ss NT ATBARARA DT OTS TA Bp Aaag Aa Ne praae Baha danatahntadaes t agae iy abba t eee Seistatetepsisye q apy iis $ seyrtateas wanes peg tahesssad ths Pate) Sh ea ey trey = Page Khe Fd et ed oe VE * aS cars 423 AB sas ge s3ei! 355,8 32 eters tess cee eseet fisztibacatasscetatat 7 Siete) $o8a8n Fite Mote t alae ant asa teehee tates ob shane tas Y: e] . x : gop ts yeasasae segs fats fay Peesgesetate eis agateteta eisielalelate! gis Su state ratab ales = TRL GT OF ENE $e Teter eet abate stg fg has soggy} Ms 34 af = ry +) S,Spacd bee eter ers ste ele sthtetatelstetetetatagetefeias-tsneser ese s$anteas eters Rak SSS tere St; te 2 ert yereen ARS g-3.5.3 Aoiese5e tie dess3-ahst $= Pet etry tertae es Sain si aigtststete FTE ee aE TERETE oo et Te atgee CR Heer ye Bee ee Oe ee es 333 Merb ret sa thts Pe A ete? ot x ty eos tele pete iepefetsi-de2=tedits eatatedad Pot od Sout bt statetr byte oP ats iw ea rerery St 2 Raa neater x o95 Sahat e226 tS 428 8628.61 452544858545 * 3. IH ITH te 42% 595% ararataseeasies ts gietetite: peasatntansns t aBysisematatets 22 Se tes ete te tater eg. 35555528. ed a! wi eytsseaeesiest top {ssiesese 328282 Sd 5S eaGatatatntasedadsiaeits ots 014, 35355,85 atzGbehtac adress aes ay erat yt ys tet rt Tre ree Me Beast sts ee ere re ae 3,322 aoe 452: ae gS entats bx 5 Rete 2 teeth tate nia ee * te ie ry) Boba Ass *: i rs gos esta tients #333 Zt es abate : ts tS rS ry a See geee Pat yee 2-8 are Be Bispessssgetes tgsatacutssal ise Faistalajeiaiedaretetaleie coer eset yt) aja tet eRe ab sre pete densa hac 3a De : fates gst? $328 Statets Ere Pree the fapehs eee erry Bath eetesrecitateeiter ee beers eet es it *3 tibstetecetetetss peebeiegshecsseatace Brace a Reasa kewl ates ReksePaiepaga pada sannsaa’ pagoy ta satesedetns at adalesahale lect loogs wt tathtet asses titessatese Sisteseiesss \pesereiecelepact ees b Sraseetgteeabatahstaigeseyi sea scsake2 ars BeAzezeats Dae paket tata ads Sak aSate sad eenieasatbasess asetage Eee ee eet TEP Eee Erte FETA T Te pi See PUREE TESST Ite rte oT Pere ee PTE ee be tT at baht oes Sindar a st does eg tate tet tess eas a tagseatas rte ets beet statayer ste, DIP ITI RTA ery? ee SET RTO TIE ree Pt Pert eke ee rere rege te Park os Pree Te ett yet tt et Wd bt rh ed Gl eee ee ee eS Pes Soe 5 aigtitatetatassia sa 3 eH He et a x $n25Sa8a2 02 xy ‘Se ghee heh Bahay bgt igh go 55 gb oe S253 35-2 4a) 22! aga% Po Pee et ee re ITT ed ee at ee oe ee Pee etree re ret et bt ee be he et bee te ee ee 2 rte PEPE TRIESTE TT Ste See Te Petree Gs Lees aritetatzcasata ST te ert nate hada hat fe ee Pd tt ~~ PS ee EP PCE et el toys oo SPE PU PEI PP a Sel ee be TS Te eh a yt et ee oe Sa Pat ee el Sf be oe) Pid Sa bt Fh be tal ted tel ST Sceck ataos erate ty ak geet nta* eat st at aia secs 85}. 4, Fs ; Feet) ao eatatets é Pid Pte ae TE Be es The ot ey 4-4 be eH Se ot et pt ee et ee Pe ee a5 258, 858-3% Beta ets 4.48,2 Beno sete Gh Sat sl aha scale Fats Ave Vio hoe ed be eee hee ee IS 7 SSeRAS* Lele zezes pistes ots S28a%atetara a tester i ras a x * ate i Ag eat ee Saas eee gt geen? y* aS sie eres els? # rf get rt ee rere aegatasgtesstacegsi eats yt hd bt tt : ’ , . . pes VyAgt ber ete see Ee Re Re Pt ied ee GR ee ot ee ee et ed AAA TI ea es Bast Veet eee Te ye oe ‘ : : 4 ; : poate ease PLES re ate PE tee tie Per Le ttre et ahghs: Ba eee Satateeuss by ‘ * ‘ tt} vor ; : ; sra a eR bs ey Be et ee et od et ee Prerhess 18 Hf tttbtes pistiitett eee Aa prAn cada tabs ee Th WES % TRS Se : 7 . egetetasetBeoa: apassbitssdistasiiscicicas tebtestetgiststeisgigiststes ST OES PRT SRE eed eee ee et er PU Tee er er Oren Pre : graces ya enwe any awavetatatcsats Si Sata te tee O. Siti tg totTea ei see see ta sss tees tT hs) : ahegateacatassan Sst sa Br 8eell eats ; Oi kptatite =e tetataint 2 hae abed coed ea hao este Se spate Paapese gst a 2 Sate Pa titi pats 5 94952 y3 58 i 9.02% ro Perera Per rere reel bf pe he bt be be oe ad Ue Se bee pe ae - 3 Pass fele sages eee Se Foe esas hye, t etek r ; > FA od et dt ee er breaks Tet u ; stapes Teahabebepegecoassezate tie Lpsts a4 Reet wy fare weedahitetetad Perastet prtst es Seats akeaeereete® eiateteletatats Bee h05ba8,tgS.bebg tater atata a sasan tes tay h gt a2 nie te wad t : sane 53 aRaSss cSiSe See gr aeatssr eats etatacat stateless ieteteaseasa 233 a starssetergegseactehebestioctansagassci syh tasate na tetennraiaia soe ,F,3, RATT HAD retary | Acgrpitttatatetatates gutntstatetatssuratasizaeateriscsiteaitatneseesitacess seagehgrgtertutestaritetsteribatitstie tease osegagipatgsecssc soak. csotonasee tata taaateracgnte aaaien Sra tarry mana tabtenas ints sta eebetattiesss ut reitatagaitstsy esatieates 4 > yy = & 9 We * J > 7 3 ‘ - s a ry - - rere S te) abeleegterScbotare gs acatasesadssstisasatas tbs a Baga sp rte BerSaca andsAtOnSa Ri Sarntatata sees tekgtasgsaanestatstiepigssta®statadats tastes SaRegei gi atecstatatel~lacslscess sings leh e ea t>e* Rexeses ad Peer PE Pre ert? brn apace tg sesplasetatesetata a eS elehatelalstalace lala lsitis ta sisi bia 2 oeie bes = “ eS a» s B, r a : a 3 2 s an8 Si2abatnted, iadadetei : hades beater eri rts Crespeertse re reperere ge re Pret eset se ert pee neat geatn Seat et oe bt oe ee et Beara ses er Sadatatss as Pp a be bt at pe tt oe oe es g23% 35%) ri PEE Pra a? el Be Sry 4 Pe he ots erst yt ot | ,*2%,4 nats 6 Bréeaaki i sab epAasabeds - abatecstgialiietetstelas siahnigis $533 ee etaSh pute pata te tata re téte eet ates Shy F tah gt ahah en Its be el ad ee ae He ey eB 2dres i2n23 © be tre ete tat ate Pt ya 34 Fe 5 F ae Sy Pet Pe 2c% fyis7 33 oe Rott ot pee ht Rt et te Pere he ae} oe heat Far } CA ee ee ees eS Ct tare ert baht Pe Pa Te he ee hk tee es Ds Beta a ef eee et rere hs a tt ee dS rt) ty ‘ Sel ece =5* - yea) APs a OS SS ere Se ye Pe 2 % as era ’ ad Sat aS ee aS ay rf 405%. 28a * 35458 \S teh ats es Ie eo BeM aXe . a*e*:"2 3 ¥ ats) sesssetesacitsetys ats alate seta sat hate ssthedriascietebstersts “* r . - * rp. 2/3 -=3* . r 232 : asbesistarsistens rire y phir ar or $s Mt NH Phe preted $4 tia St eee Pee ee ere re ry yt : = 2a er ee > tlds ‘eta s/ BGaltie tet rere ot tepte yt H yt arn 44 Pn nT ATAG Sg? weatetatgenye Rn Sti at ors et Tt Pee Gal - : ae BeREN 2 343 Ct ee ee Fy pate ae ys ae a5 5 Rake be tang tate weg caterer aratsl esate 22 3 eas * : a® oe! 2 aene goseies* ate aoe me irre, te ey) 4 ans Kaa aa Sedafu stele? ga Pir Deseo REP HEH 38 926 - ae ist iad, ta sate Mate a be Pe ett) Et ee ett oy ee Ste *% ats . , a dud PET et ee oe ee ES et ee eres g238 ene ee Raen : 4 5 puhang. 0. 2<5 na Psa TUBES paibeh bisteletstelatites : ; gees at ae : \* ats a." a hes 1. St a * oe be te et ee Pe ee wor ,& A Set x 3 ce % pe ne v4 ab tp Fir is yey ere a eeeeesezeret a gs ot ee a sd =A a 4 me an a, % taht tg ay ie ae ae pd et Fe sz sAa*aash iene l at a Re r as 4 8 “4 =) sang Batateta® ey atau atate ee ere .s3404% atsehes rath aa satan s a: a3 } ¢ 3: ott cere 3 Pn Stiepeter nish re ree Reger ri ame a = " r Ge od ~s rt rt 2 rere at es s* + > sou 24 78 att Zee Tso} f 3339 A 33 3? ere ot St ais ; a. . seed eee oe at =e bt sy 3a S peas Sn abéts See aBalns a: 2% . teh 2k eae aa ys ; goat haseks a* as mae é 4 a2 ABBSAS? - ATA, 283 Sa4aha 2 a saz +t vente is s¥2 <2 Ae steers. “ ta oar #s es phase, hs ; tiath ta 4! ; s° % eo oo : = sa ~ ai ne Se eee < . y a* FAGRSRS gig Baha WI bLY Te ye 24 Pa tet ey oy: a>) 915803 a® Pb tet Ptr 3 F age? 32 : 43 aiererelaiel et thd te ty, 2% mt e® R ; fy Pes +,%a* tata a aE Re + os p85, 5, 45° A - sae re apeskeey ss eati ties ve yt =) : ae" ry. Heat aes bt Patattagts ry * pea sstatelita, #2 & tatty ss gf te 4 i. » ad se 5 tata ata al a oy ey slo, .8 +~ - - reed rata paaentets By ; eb tt at +x. Mea piesa ay erate 4 Y + TEL PTE Soe oe a fetetahs AS fas Cake ae his tates 2. a eas aoe A A SAZ45*54 2918558 Bete p tees tate tht ates eA ee Pe a atk 22 A a's Paks ans eaten ct 132% ne eee O04 4 9 gt ge r vd bed et ba : pratat ate thabseadotata nacht ¢: Aone sad resets ee otig pene Peres st EsbeGa tence caantetensseate $433 t4543424 neAR stem Ets neat =jey> ets wor 23 gaeyee® oa 45 Pt sae eats oat y*atshs m* xbs$a5n2 MR ee ete rt SA Fe #53 tats mata’ eye ee etrert ys arr oe =. 354nqa959 aoa er Sr ae =, Sa*s Tay — : Py BS ty $592 Re * ry es ~~ S$. 4.838 ate og 2% 2 34 q pest ; 3 Bat a 4% 5 an A *. 32 +. - rf ts . 35 ; een : cae rn zn a rs ot ms) re — i a = + sa : ; 3°28 ty sf c 7 were Thy tet. fe .w be ee + de Per! a pers- AC ee Os eae ee eS el ip ean oe q aa » We ; ae Fe paneer ay BP AspIr™” 4 | scuit : , ear hae 7 ¢ v TL a fie ‘\ * 4 an a® |! Rye re EN ad PA. Aan Sly any in ata RAaAnat AS > or 8 aS ee 7 Rete | ron a “ih otter Vn e Aapann, GAREALDEP gaa. Pal ~~ ae ‘3 ABBRNIDNG HPL APRS) VAM NS ! Thea | , : g whoae < aa 2” el, 2. ae th 47 Vi { : ‘i res “at é peed Baas “~ANQ UIN ‘s. ft aa all i 4 a6 Py | LYS Nene SY Dashade |. sl), ki Ss | RS BASRA IRR DAIS fae . AA ihe J aay. ae o gy » et “Mpa =a 7 ~V~ \ a4 {| | neat eel Wiel! Ww ITT gue ehios as | pr AD ap MA SaRAsrlG MN | ae man way ed a © mye iT ny Pay y 2 si, Ne | et tht iy OP snannaanea’ PL at er ha Qi 70nd) eegdec™ a» me > K @ Ar . ap Bg xe saan Ay Nap a” tnt | | 2 a? ’ mn be a” are seaagAai AeA Apne ri \ ee Yh Ld de 1° OU meena ig A Wn Bkb.ra aan Pag ae “aa | ae 7 a kW ene vu a wYy) aBA ane -— : _. , gene Mie, Behl | Llane 1 eel ie) 1h caeenesenn abglalaaasnn f om. wy BM, HLL | eee ee \ _ amar TTT mA aa Mal, tL af B. ik | a : a Ee raalaieel raft n> et iy in. = WN ~ Sen mie an aid her 1 TTA ny maar y “mip | Lala ve ee! a “ARR ; mec iataadtie! | Tia f \ e "ve } ve <> PA ute whe Wye WA Mn _ ROR R ew Nas - | a aan 4a as -4 y | me ial Yas Gas a, a deat | | k (ou eer oe ion) St aan a erry ||| Seid a fie Wy = ®~a 4 =F ee 4 lad UeANue PY | hey elt seen a An Nua ger LLYN uy * Agee hr la el lad corre “0b Ay an, ’ Nesta we ) rade Sand me Donen pata“ nanan _ mma’ ae male mM aavara yy | See haat Ween in hee he Piedad E cf | gs {Ty Gewetu een Piaeray 4 al wT oo ay ag iP + vers Seon ‘Nin ay @eta int sae? dan ee May af? ; A ty ‘h ae print ith cael pdt Lb 4 itaanar rae x ie : | ? re ‘hp gel’ As ag ; iad, », tm loll ‘ av Al 2 } ; aye al. ha BONA | ‘ rps Nan ; ye? | Wan @™YRuwa,_-~ ty aaa? ynienrsdirsies te) a ~ab v at oy or Be ke { j a i ay aan eaanh Jue Niphe ace sie pa Abate (ap Re Concerned T Pa Pichi thie ‘x call al maenen tt, remE ahh AvKa ong Ae TT AAs Rian | koe yp Sa" a ‘ ‘ Dineen 7 oe oan hese agen ALLL eel ah mia ev, Ay ny af 8 sis : La shan or ae yoh aN anes Apa. Xa. ov aN , , > s+! a, is a re he ey al ere PREC REG aingiain Raa UNL) | em af he wa 4 Bap Qa 6% , “a gyttRRagay AeA ae Anan" asPAa siplilagsan, a Aiba) ant*® Vyas og yor yp Aaanan ry TT eee el alattticainiainl il as®tan’@ pA: saaokstiat ia Poel | WN gyuonn ee na ste a stiait int ne ~ = cheat aia » = ‘ ] eqs ge uae dag ni i Mlasia on aj hdl” “tabi N ji __ = az ——e _ = - —* 4 WP eK CAS DAA bs 3 4 aki, SMa ay, rena eee pe see ehtiees sa Pipe it Aayld> Dass a\4 ’ : appear: pw aa ee a TW. Ree md Breng.— st) bas id \ \ou" x: Pabethe | ns s445-*” soos guaieatl © as ah es ke 5 met :% | -7.e ‘S\ . =l,- \ ages’ Wee “A figs an! Me pienegtatease on Tt Thay ened Pre 1 OY | | \ Wah Thapdt dy { BRAY in Hie ale | UT ' NaN My ill ae% a | ine > do. ee AA RNS EEE A TT at | BRENNA ayaL A emronaneep aaa meetehn rine maped’ | i PAY ee Secu FT ¥ i A r.qg-y4y Ff J Wananasarmisg, Pe | Rise Shel] YYYYy DIRSINNAG, OPN sory Se py badd pean Pat Vii ne ae - ag >? anih) TEN LL et sears yy ni | Ss mai Ah Seay" tod aa NM, \ ind PP el Wye pap eee Aaya! SAN SPM Va el iaw ayy" POET a i ¢ ier. ; , vy a eis panna) deb Raee lanl ad HINA MAL anyiive,. Cleeve pnenn Wim nein se pe ANA Ayn f Ddast? , 4 = NA ~~ Svc ® Toren Tuts se gabe. sae te eet MA tea Maonhe’, ine. =) | 4 ey we a Ww into Ht y | Ap ee ery Pe > if Dob Dt ine 2 a * ya? a han ‘ nal aay » ree Aa, rv eee VRAIN del ELEC ( > : a . ee ak Alen ima. Abi Ve UA ReN, a ~~" ae pe 28 ASRans ‘R- we hoon Samad gas e ap he NALD on a a ONT. epg! ooge maluillys) ‘ A A Bay | | an an gtttnnanae en Renerennarsipliasenn, Ae um aon) ‘yy aot’ , & ba 4 ‘ hic iit eee iitsdadd ms TE er ee oP a* ~h » CO ge TT fh, Aa. HP halle - =\& ps 0 Lr aos é . Relining, sents de acinar. ~ ‘4 r =" ~f@ » m= o fora < x Xp_1 Proof.—By definition Rigi = ty x? F(x)dx (2) R. = { X mace (3) '‘ Received November 12, 1930. 17 18 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 2 = ie F(x)dx (4) Ri = [x P@dx ("y PQday (5) = ie i xy F(x) F(y)dydx (6) Raber HAL [rey Fo aydx + ("[ Fox F@ayaxt (7 2 (° (ce + ¥9 FW Fo ayds 8) By comparison of equations (6) and (8) it is seen that for every term xy F(x) F(y)dydx in R?, there is a corresponding term > (+ y?) Ft) FG) dydx in Re Re Now x and y being both real, we have j@ — 9) 50 (9) x? —-2xy +y>0 (10) BOG ae) Ss oy (11) the equal sign applying only in the special case that x = y. Hvery term in (8) being positive and greater than or at least equal to the corresponding term in (6), it follows at once that Re keen (12) the equality sign being here excluded, since in the double integral, in general, x ¥ y. The result (12) may also be written Raced J 2 Ws Rae he@siXn gy = Xa (13) which proves the theorem. 3. Theorem.—The mean x, of the distribution x" f(x) approaches the value b as n increases, if f(x) = O for all values of x greater than b. Proof.—From the theorem (2) it is clear that x, must either increase indefinitely as n increases, or else must tend continually to an upper limit. JAN. 19, 1931 LOTKA: MOMENTS OF FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTIONS 19 We may split up the expression for x, b ie x+1 f(x)dx i x"+1 f(x)dx pee eal eae Se 4) i x" f(x)dx ii x" f(x)dx + i x2 {(x)dx a a p 2) ee es (15) Now it is clear that for any assigned value of p < b, we can always, by choosing n large enough, make the ratios I.,/I,» and Jap»/Jp» less than any assigned positive valuee. Hence, in the limit, for sufficiently large n, we have : b | x2+1 f(x)dx Xx, = Ipp BE ZINE Bs PIR (16) b ie ii mt fds p where p may be made (less than but) as nearly equal to b as we please. But in the limit, as p approaches b, (16) reduces simply to b= +1 f(b)dx pm ptf) dx oe which proves the theorem. 4. Theorem.—The median between the limits x = a and x = bof . the distribution F(x) = x" f(x) moves in the direction of increasing X as N increases. Proof.—The median é of F(x) is defined by the relation £ b \ F(x)dx = i F(x)dx (18) It follows at once that : b ii x F(x)dx < \ x F(x)dx (19) since each term on the right of the inequality (19) is obtained from the corresponding term in the right hand member of the equation (18) by multiplication with a value of x > &, while each term on the left is 20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 2 similarly obtained [from the corresponding term in the left hand member of the equation (18) by multiplication with a value of x < ¢. b In order, therefore, to divide the integral _ XE(x)dx into equal parts, we must add something to the first inicenal of the inequality (19), and deduct something from the second. But this means that in the defining equation for the median of x F(x) {x F(x)dx = (x F(x)dx we must haven > é, that is, the median of x F(x) lies “to the right of”’ that of F(x). This proves the theorem. 5. Theorem.—The mode of the distribution F(x) = x" f(x), where x and f(x) both assume only positive values, moves in the direction of increasing X as N increases. Proof.—The mode of F(x) is defined by dF(x) _ be while that of x F(x) is defined by ~ GF o&) ss eee F(x) = 0 di i F(x) (ae x Now according to hypothesis, F(x) and x are both positive. Hence the mode of x F(x) falls at a point at which the curve for F(x) has a downward slope, that is, to the right of its mode. ‘This proves the theorem, for unimodal frequency curves lying entirely in the plus x field. If the curve has two or more modes, we can divide it into sections having only one mode and then apply to each section the argument set forth above. Summary.—lf f(x) is a frequency distribution and if both x and f(x) assume only positive values, then the mean, median and mode of x" f(x) all move in the direction of increasing x as n increases. JAN. 19, 1931 SPUNAR: FERMAT’S LAST THEOREM 21 MATHEMATICS.—On Fermat's Last Theorem, III’. Vau. Mar. SPuNAR, Chicago, Ill. (Communicated by Epagar W. WooLaARD.) In the attempt to show that Dy tee SS ce leh che (1) n being any positive integer, cannot be solved in integers all different from zero if n > 2, it is sufficient to consider the case in which 2g, y, z are relatively prime and n is an odd prime } = 3.2. One method of attack that has been employed is to exclude certain values for either by more or less general criteria or by direct computation; and some results obtained by this method have been presented in the two preceding papers? by the present writer. It is the object of the present paper to extend the results of Dickson‘ and of Beeger®, who have, respectively, proved Fermat’s Last Theorem forn < 7000 andn < 14,000. It has been established that any value of \ for which is satisfied by integers not divisible by \, must satisfy eas ek MGUY Nie hehe ue, (3) ror) — 2°; 37: 58: 11 and 17°; and also 7, 13, and 19 if X = 5 (mod 6), l.e.,\ = 64 — 1.1° Thus, (2) is impossible in integers prime to d for all prime values of \ that do not satisfy (3) for all the preceding values ofr. It may be noted that (3) will likewise be satisfied by the product of these numbers, each raised to any power, Viz., 90.30.5°-74- 115-13! -17 9-194, in which a, 6, c,...,2 may each be any positive integer or zero unless \ = 6k + 1 in which case we must taked =f =h=0. The follow- ing generalization of these results appears to be new: 1 Received June 30, 1930. 2 CARMICHAEL, Theory of Numbers, p.91. New York, 1914. ’ This JOURNAL, 18: 389-395. 1928;19: 395-401. 1929. 4 Quar. Jour. Math. 40: 27-45. 1908. 5 Mess. Math. (2), 55: 17-26. 1925. § WizeFeERIcH, Crelles Jour. fiir Math., 136: 293-302. 1909. 7 MrrRIMANOFF, Crelles Jour. fiir Math., 139: 309-324. 1911. 8 VANDIVER, Crelles Jour. fiir Math., 144: 314-318. 1914. ° FROBENIUS, Sitz. Berl., 1914, pp. 653-681. 10 FROBENIUS, loc. cit. 22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 2 Theorem.—If, in M = m > + N, 2 be an odd prime, m any integer prime to A, and M and WN both satisfy (3), then this value for \ is excluded from (2).. The proof requires the following Lemma: If r is an integer, not zero, prime to any odd prime 2 2 8, and satisfies (8), then obviously [md — (md + 1)]*-! = 1 (mod 22), whence, upon expanding by the bi- nomial theorem, we find that — (A — 1) md (mA + r)*-? + (md41r)*"1 = 1 (mod 22); consequently, it is impossible that (mn £7)" = 1 Gnod 45.2 ae (4) Thus, no value of \ which satisfies (4) can satisfy (8), nor, therefore, (2). Now, if we put meh = VME UNG oo se (5) where , m, M, N, are all prime to each other, and N is any number r that satisfies (3), then since mA = (mA +r) + r,wehaveM = md +7; and if also d Morea (mod: \2) 7) 0 (6) 1.e., Gah oe = A Gmod Ina then by the Lemma, \ cannot satisfy (3) nor (2). That is, if m\ can be expressed as the sum or difference of two numbers both of which satisfy (8), then Fermat’s Theorem is true for this value of \. E. g,, taking m = 1 for convenience, we have 7013 = 7-10? + 138, whence Fermat's Theorem holds for } = 7013; similarly 7019 = 7-108 + 19, 7027 = 52-172 — 2-32-11, and so on. The writer is now engaged in constructing tables of such results which will prove Fermat’s Theorem for \ < 50,000. The result 2rA+1 Go. < Dy <2 established in the first paper™ shows that for \ = 50,021, the solutions, if any exist, must be such that 10 <7 < DO) KB 1! This JOURNAL, 18: 395. 1928. JAN. 19, 1931 FISHER: NEW BEETLE FROM COSTA RICA 23 The Theorem of the present paper likewise holds form = m’ \*, if m’ be prime to d, and M and WN are both perfect \*-th powers. The more general identity + md = (rmd +n) ¥[(r — 1) mA +n] may also be used; e.g., \ = 8311 = 27-11-17 — 5& = 23,936-15,625 is in the form \ = (8A — p) — (24 — p) ordA = (24 + n) — (A +n) where foie — op — 1000, n — 7al4. The writer has obtained a proof, to be published shortly, that (2) has no solution in integers at allif \ = 6k — 1 and xyz =4 0 (moda) ENTOMOLOGY .—A new longhorn beetle from Costa Rica (Coleoptera: Cerambycidae).1 W.S8. FisHer, Bureau of Entomology, United States Department of Agriculture. (Communicated by Haroip MorRISON.) Cosmotoma fasciata, new species Elongate, and moderately robust; head and antennae reddish-brown, the latter becoming darker toward apices; pronotum reddish-brown anteriorly, becoming dark-brown on basal half; scutellum and elytra black, the latter with a broad, transverse, reddish-brown fascia in front of middle, which is more or less interrupted at the sutural margins, and the surface ornamented with white pubescent markings; beneath brownish-black, with the legs dark reddish-brown. Head with the front quadrate, feebly convex, slightly concave between the antennal tubercles, which are slightly elevated, the surface densely, finely punctate, and sparsely clothed with long, recumbent, yellow hairs; eyes rather small, very deeply emarginate, with the upper lobes very small and narrow; antenna considerably longer than body, the fourth joint armed on the upper surface with a thick tuft of long, black hairs, the second, third, and fifth joints with thin pencils of hairs at their tips, and clothed with a few long hairs similar to the other joints, first joint slightly expanded toward apex, about three-fourths as long as the third joint, which is slightly shorter than the fourth, the following joints becoming gradually shorter toward tip of antenna. Pronotum slightly wider than long, strongly constricted along base and anterior margin, the sides with a slight conical protuberance near middle; disk with a large obtuse tubercle on each side of middle; surface densely, obsoletely punctate, a few large, coarse punctures in the transverse apical and basal constrictions, rather densely clothed with long, recumbent, yellow pub- escence. Scutellum elongate, finely, densely punctate, and rather densely clothed along margins with recumbent, white pubescence. Elytra nearly three times as long as pronotum, slightly wider than it at base; humeral angles broadly rounded and feebly elevated; sides nearly paral- lel to apical fourth, then arcuately narrowed to the apices, which are obliquely truncate internally; surface densely, obsoletely punctate, with a few scattered coarse punctures intermixed, rather densely clothed with short, black pub- escence, which has a pinkish tinge in certain lights, with numerous long, erect, stiff, black hairs, and each elytron ornamented with white pubescent markings 1 Received November 21, 1930. 24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 2 as follows: three narrow, transversely oblique fasciae on the transverse red- dish-brown area in front of middle, the fasciae more or less connected toward the sutural margin, and a narrow transverse fascia near apex, and armed with a median basal crest, which is clothed with long, black hairs. Body beneath densely, obsoletely punctate, and rather densely clothed with short, recumbent, silvery-white pubescence; last abdominal segment rather coarsely punctate toward apex, and clothed with long, semierect hairs. Length, 5-7.5 mm.; width, 2-3.2 mm. Type locality — Hamburg farm, Costa Rica. Type and paratype.—Cat No. 43174, United States National Museum. Paratypes.—Collection Ferd. Nevermann. Described from four examples (one type), all of which were collected at the type locality, April 2, 1925, by Ferd. Nevermann. This species is very closely allied to rubella described by Bates from the Amazon region, but it differs from that species in having the sides of the pronotum more obtusely angulated, dorsal tubercles on the pronotum more feebly elevated, base and apex of the elytra entirely black, and the elytra not so abruptly angulated at the apices. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES | THE ACADEMY 235TH MEETING The 235th meeting of the AcapEmy was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club at 8:15 P.M. on Thursday, November 20, 1930. President Bowie introduced as the speaker Dr. ApotpH H. Scuuutz of the Johns Hopkins Medical School, who delivered the seventh of the series of lectures upon origin and evolution. About 175 persons were present. Program: ApoteH H. Scuuutz: Man’s place among the primates. (Il- lustrated with lantern slides.)—All the investigators agree that man must be assigned to the order of primates but there exist widely differing claims in regard to man’s exact place within this mammalian order. The evidence supporting these claims includes a wide variety of specialities ranging from fetal membranes to blood-serum reactions. Skulls and teeth of primates have been studied in much greater detail than other bodily parts, adult animals and men have been examined much more frequently and thoroughly than physio- logical studies. In the address some of the less widely known evidence was used for the reconstruction of the primate family tree and of the exact place thereon of the human branch. The author discussed chiefly growth, the skeleton and varia- tions, with lantern slides illustrating a very heterogenous mass of data to emphasize the necessity of representing a pedigree as a compromise between the results from many different fields of investigation. The theme that man has a definite place among the primates was developed and illustrated by lantern slides showing size, growth, the recapitulation theory, tail, nasal cartilages, shoulders and neck, nipples, arm proportions, limb proportions in general, variations; skeleton: spine, sternum, pelvis and foot. This was followed by a comparative study of hair and its distribution in the group. JAN. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 25 The data were marshalled to show that man is not only a member of the mammalian order of primates but resembles most closely the large anthropoid apes, which must have had one and the same ancestor with man; that in many respects man is still more primitive than his simian cousins, which have be- come more highly specialized in regard to the conditions of the spine, the sternum, etc.; that in other respects man has departed farther from the com- mon ancestral condition than have the apes, but the difference between man and some apes is rarely greater than the difference in the same feature between that ape and some other ape. Man’s greatest specializations exist chiefly in those parts which had to be changed with (and by) the assumption of an erect posture. This is clearly evident in man’s pelvis, foot, skull, and length of lower limb. . Many evolutionary changes consist in the loss of a structure which pre- viously had served a definite purpose. Examples were cited: the third eyelid, or nictitating membrane, and loss of the thumb in monkeys in America and Africa. Sometimes new characters appear, such as extreme webbing between the second and third toes. Some evolutionary changes are observed right now if we examine large series of individuals, such as loss of third molar. The same evolutionary trend prevails independently in the American spider monkey, among which 15% lack 3rd molars. This was shown in slides on variations in monkey skulls, human fetuses, relative ear sizes, etc., which are variations that run in families (are hereditary). Such variations are al- ready present before birth. EXverywhere we turn we find ample material for selection in the form of individual variations of a congenital nature. The author concludes that 99 out of every 100 variations are indifferent in regard to value to their owner. Most variations have no selective significance by themselves. Nevertheless, evolutionary changes can occur with such indifferent but selected variations as stepping stones. This is possible and even unavoidable because different variations of one and the same body are correlated to one another as clearly shown by the modern study of human constitutions. We have learned to recognize distinct constitutional types by their definite combinations of variations. One type, for instance, has long limbs, a slender trunk and little body hair on the chest and limbs. Many investigations have demonstrated that one type is more susceptible to certain diseases than the other type. These diseases are clearly selective agencies, which select not only relative immunity to a disease but with it relative length of limb and amount of hair. Weare just beginning to realize that some constitutional types thrive better in a tropical climate than do other types. There are many other factors which might select the different constitutions. Such types are not restricted to man but have been demonstrated among primitive monkeys, shot in their native jungles. Malaria and other diseases are known to be shockingly prevalent among these monkeys. It is not at all unlikely, though not yet proved, that different constitutions in monkeys, as in man, are differently susceptible to some diseases and that in this way one type may gradually become eliminated from the population of the species. In this way we can understand that variations in limb length, ear size, hairiness, etc. become selected not because they are directly advantageous but because they happen to be combined with physiological variations, which cause a different resistance to disease, climate, or diet. “The problem of man’s place among primates includes two separate ques- tions: (1) What is this place? and (2) How did man come to occupy such a place? The first question I have tried to answer on the basis of careful 26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 21, No. 2 comparisons between man and other primates, that is, by the approved taxonomic methods. Such comparisons force us to the conclusion that man is most nearly related to the anthropoid apes. The second question is far more complicated and difficult to answer and one has to deal mostly with possibilities and probabilities. I have given you ample evidence for the con- - clusion that evolution is not only a theory but a philosophy without which no student of nature can understand nature. We cannot escape the evidence from all scientific observations that species have changed in the past and are continuing to change today, and that man does not form an exception to this rule. I have not been able, however, to tell you definitely how and why these changes take place. A great deal more work will have to be done before we can prove the exact working method or the many methods of evolution. We can demonstrate with certainty that there exists a constant and abundant supply of variations from which to select new forms. ‘The working of these selections is still a matter of speculation and an inducement for future intensive research.” (Author’s abstract.) CHARLES THOM, Recording Secretary. GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 467TH MEETING The 467th meeting of the Society was held in the Assembly Room of the Cosmos Club, Wednesday evening, October 29, 1930, President G. R. MAns- FIELD presiding. Informal communications: Davip WHITE reviewed the autumn meeting of the National Academy of Sciences. He called attention to papers by Davis on limestone caves, SETCHELL on the activity of algae in limestone formation, MILLIKAN on the radioactivity of glacial drifts and the rate of elevation of the Hudson Bay country and by LyMann on pre-Cambrian bacteria. Discussed by Messrs. THompson and CookgE. R. C. WELLS announced a series of round-table discussions of geochemistry which are being held fortnightly in the Chemical Laboratory of the U. 8. Geological Survey. Program: Curt TxEIcHERT, University of Freiburg, Germany: Recent German theories. (A paper on this subject appears in this JouURNAL21: 1-12.) Discussed by G. R. MANSFIELD. E. G. Zres: The geologist and analyst—a study in coéperation.—A plea was entered for better codperation between geologist and analyst. Evidence was presented which brought out the wide variation in results obtained when a synthetic silicate was submitted for analysis to a number of chemists actively engaged in such work. The composition of this material had previously been accurately determined both by synthesis of the pure materials and by analysis of the final product. It was further shown that accurate chemical and phys- ical methods were available for determining the various constituents. Much of the difficulty is caused by the fact that analysis can quite easily become a deadly routine, utterly devoid of creative possibilities if the analyst neither has nor is given an interest in the application of his results to the prob- lem which is being investigated. A great amount of poor work is being done by the chemist and accepted by the geologist because there is no mutual under- standing of their respective problems. JAN. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 27 Analysis at its best is a science, an art, and a state of mind. Following RUSKIN, it is a science because we should not talk before we know, an art because we should not talk before we do, and it is a state of mind because the analyst should not undertake an analysis unless he feels confident that his methods and his ability will serve the purpose in hand. The geologist should know how to appraise the analyst and how to evaluate the results. Further- more, the geologist must know the requirements of his problem so that the analyst can determine whether the required accuracy is within the limitations of his methods. Such coéperation will encourage the analyst to search for more accurate methods in the event that the present ones are too crude for the purpose in hand. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. WELLS and RuBEY. 468TH MEETING The 468th meeting of the Society was held in the Assembly Room of the Cosmos Club, Wednesday evening, November 12, 1930, President G. R. MANSFIELD presiding. Informal communications: A. C. SPENCER called attention to a probable rock glacier in a small tributary of Difficult Run which joins the Potomac River from the west a short distance below Great Falls. Discussed by Messrs. Mrertizx and THOMPSON. C. W. Cooke: Radial calcite concretions in marine beds in Georgia. Several years ago, while examining the section of the Marks Head mar] at Porters Landing, Savannah River, Georgia, I found a hard lump which at first glance appeared to be a fossil organism, perhaps a coral or a calcareous alga. I broke it open in order to examine the internal structure and was surprised to find that it consists of a mass of radiating acicular crystals. Some of the crystals appear to be curved, but the apparent curvature is probably due to the interpolation of shorter crystals toward the periphery rather than to actual bending of any one crystal. The crystals are crossed by unevenly spaced con- centric white to brownish color bands which are not everywhere at right angles to the longer axes of the crystals but which follow the somewhat uneven con- tour of the surface of the nodule. The mineral effervesces freely with hydro- chloric acid and, according to Mr. Nouan, has the optical properties of calcite. Although the nodule was lying loose on the bank of the river it had evi- dently fallen from the fine gray sand of the Marks Head marl which contains calcareous nodules as large as 2 feet in diameter. Most of the nodules show no evidence from the outside that their structure is crystalline, but all that I broke open proved to consist of radial crystals. The one exhibited had evi- dently been rolled around enough to fracture the ends of the crystals and produce a rough surface somewhat like that of a calcareous alga. Calcareous concretions have been known at Porters Landing since at least as long ago as 1908, when EARLE SLOAN described the section there, but nobody seems to have noticed anything unusual about them. There are similar concretions in the Upper Cretaceous Eutaw formation at Ochillee, Chattahoochee County, Georgia. Both the Eutaw formation and the Marks Head marl are marine. (Author’s abstract.) A. C. SPENCER showed radial concretions of pyrite, barite and a carbophos- phate and suggested that the carbophosphate concretion was pseudomorphous after barite. S. F. TurRNER exhibited a concretion of radiating crystals of aragonite from the Cave of the Winds, Colorado; a chalcedony replacement of aragonite 28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 2 crystals from the gravels of the Canadian River in Texas; and aragonite crystals from the Pierre shale of Colorado. The communications on concretions were discussed ey Messrs. WHITE, REsSER, GOLDMAN and SCHALLER. W. R. Atwoop showed three specimens from a single log found in the Petrified Forest of Arizona. ‘The specimen from one end was a silica replace- ment, but the specimen from the other end was lignite. The intermediate portion of the log was partly silica and partly lignite. Discussed by Messrs. WHITE, GOLDMAN, and SPENCER. Program: C.H. Dane: Uncompahgre Plateau and related structural features.— The Uncompahgre Plateau is a topographic elevation closely coincident with an anticlinal uplift, oval in shape, some 90 miles in length with its longer axis extending northwest to southeast. Most of the uplift is within the State of Colorado but the plunging north end extends into Grand County, Utah. The folding occurred at the close of the Cretaceous period and the pre-Cambrian granitic and metamorphic core of the Plateau uplift acted as a bulwark, the direction of which is reflected by parallel smaller folds to the southwest. The Plateau is located along the western margin of an ancient land mass which ex- tended southeastward through western Colorado into northern New Mexico during Pennsylvanian, Permian, and lower Triassic time. The northern limit of this old land area is concealed beneath the Cretaceous and Tertiary sediments of the Uinta Basin. An estimate of the volume of clastic sediments derived from the erosion of this land suggests that it may have been a mountain range, the crest of which stood at least a mile above the margins although the land was less than one hundred miles in width. The coarseness of the conglomer- atic sediments deposited near the margins suggests a rugged topography com- patible with the probable great height of the old range. Although the range was peneplained before or during upper Triassic time, sediments deposited during the Jurassic period thin toward the area of the old land and are missing over parts of it. The area was completely submerged by the marine invasion of the Upper Cretaceous, but the post-Cretaceous folding which formed the Uncompahgre Plateau anticline followed the trend of the old land and uplifted part of its western margin. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. W. R. ATwoop, SPENCER, BAKER and GOLDMAN. W.R. Atwoop: Mid-Tertiary glacial deposits in southern France.—In the vicinity of Mt. Aigoual at the southern margin of the great Central Massif of France, distinct evidence of an ancient glaciation has been found in the form of tillite and striated bed rock. The tillite is characteristically physically and lithologically heterogeneous and is firmly consolidated wherever it has been recently uncovered. ‘The stones found in the matrix vary in size from very small pebbles, to large boulders more than a meter in diameter. The larger boulders are predominantly of gray granite porphyry originating in the immediate vicinity. They are rarely striated, probably because they were not carried far, or because they disintegrate rapidly. The smaller stones that are less than a foot in diameter are not always typically glacial in form, but they are almost invariably well striated. The scarcity of glacial phenomena; the entire absence of the topographic situations where alpine glaciers could have formed; and the fact that the tillite has no topographic expression in the landscape—a landscape which has been but slightly changed since mid-Tertiary time—would indicate that the streams of that period had quite thoroughly removed the glacial debris and destroyed the glacial topography before the close of the mid-Tertiary erosion period. JAN. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 29 Had the glaciers that deposited the tillite been Pleistocene in age, the abun- dant debris, which must have been present, could not have been so nearly removed without appreciably altering the mid-Tertiary landscape. The glaciers that left the tillite must have been mountain glaciers that originated in Oligocene or early Miocene mountains which are known to have existed in this region following the uplift and faulting which took place during Oligo- cene time. A review of the literature shows that PsETuRSSON reports Miocene glacial deposits in Iceland, ScHarpt reports Miocene glaciation in Italy, Mazzuoui also reports Miocene in Italy and the present author, in collaboration with Wa.uace W. Atwoop, has twice reported positive proof of Eocene or Oligo- cene glacial deposits in western United States. Glaciation during the mid- Tertiary is therefore recognized in several localities, and it is logical to believe that in the Cevennes we have another proof of this ancient glacial epoch. (Authors abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. Mmrtre, ALDEN, SEARS, SPENCER and RuBEY. 469TH MEETING The 469th meeting of the Society was held in the Assembly Room of the Cosmos Club, Wednesday evening, November 26, 1930, President G. R. MANSFIELD presiding. Informal communications: JAMES GILLULY discussed a recent paper by EDWARD GREENLY on Folzation and its relation to folding in the Mona complex at Rhoscolyn, Anglesey. G@REENLY attributes monoplanic schists to flat- angled overthrusting—the common occurrence of folded monoplanic schists to later warping of the planes of schistosity. GILLULY pointed out that the stretching phenomena shown by the monoplanic schists of the Adirondack region do not support a similar interpretation but seem to indicate the origin of a foliation concomitant with its warping. Discussed by Mr. HEss. M. I. GoLpMAN showed specimens of polygonal columns formed by weather- ing of a silty grit in Permian red beds cropping out on an anticlinal nose which extends eastward from the Harz Mountains, Germany. A photograph of the outcrop was shown as a lantern slide. Discussed by Messrs. BripGe and HUBBARD. Program: F. L. Hess: A unique Bolivian tungsten deposit. Discussed by Mr. BurcHARD. B. R. Hupparp, S. J., Univeristy of Santa Clara, California: Geologic features of Aniakchak and Veniaminof craters, Alaska.—Aniakchak and Veni- aminof craters were discovered by a Geological Survey party under R. H. SARGENT in 1922, and W. B. Smits, geologist of the party, entered Aniakchak crater. In a second expedition in 1925 R. 8. KNapprn was geologist of the party. Aniakchak Crater, latitude 56° 45’, longitude 158° 9’, is situated mid- way along the Alaska Peninsula and has a base circumference of approximately 100 miles. Starting at sea level it rises to an elevation of 4,200 feet and has a rim whose perimeter is 21 miles. It appears to be an explosive crater that ejected about 19 cubic miles of material. Bombs with texture similar to rocks within the crater are found 25 miles away and the Aniakchak River cuts through ejected material all the way to Aniakchak Bay. Many interesting phenomena subsequent to the great explosion are found in the 30-square-mile area within the crater walls. A rift begins in Bering Sea and extends across the crater. Thence it traverses the block of sedimentary rocks that comprises 30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 2 the mountains through which the Aniakchak River has cut a canyon somewhat in the form of an attenuated letter S. This rift might account for the depres- sion on the west side of the crater and the V-shaped notch of the eastern rim out of which the river flows. Fossiliferous Jurassic strata form part of the walls to the left of the V-shaped entrance. Lava muds and basalts top the crater walls. A minor cone, here called Vent Mountain, has a crater 1,000 feet in diameter and rises 2,200 feet above the main floor. Surprise Lake, 24 miles long, is formed by the impounding of water by deltas. Two lava cones and soda-iron bicarbonate springs occur at the head of the lake. Iron soda springs rise likewise from the lake bottom. Two explosion pits lie below the general level between Vent Mountain and Black Nose. In the western side of Aniakchak Crater a crescentic sub-crater about two miles in diameter contains a cinder cone from which as a center radiate lava flows that have concentric arcs of flowage lines. Near this cinder cone are several active fumaroles. Obsidian with columnar structure protrudes from the wall of the subcrater in many exposures. Here, too, active fumaroles, whose vapors come out under pressure, occur along fissure lines. A lava cone whose crater is filled with water, and a second cinder cone are found near the depression of the rim at the western wall. Veniaminof Crater southwest of Black Lake is approximately 100 miles in circumference at the base and rises to a rim about 20 miles in circumference at an elevation of 8,400 feet. It contains a crater glacier that spills over the depressed rim and extends over a wide area for 25 miles towards Perryville. The ice also escapes through notches in the walls and forms lesser glaciers, notably Cone Glacier and Crab Glacier. A cone which smokes and throws ashes and black sand down its sides rises over a thousand feet above the ice. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. SARGENT and Capps. K. O. Uuricu: Highlights of the past two seasons’ work. I. Origin and stratigraphic horizon of the zinc ores of the Mascot district of Hast Tennessee. In April, 1929, Drs. Burrs, Bripcse, Captain Ponp, and I devoted about a week to the study of problems connected with the stratigraphic position, origin, and probable areal distribution of zinc ores in what we formerly knew as the Knox dolomite of Kast Tennessee. The Mascot mine is the most nota- ble and successful of the zinc mines in the Appalachian Valley and is one which has earned more than the operators put into it. We began our investigation at Jefferson City where extensive but shallow deposits were successfully worked, many years ago. In recent years prospect drilling along the strike of the rocks has disclosed some promising deposits that are now showing good ore. Our studies were not concerned so much with the prospects and mines themselves as with the reasons for their being, that is, why such deposits happen to occur here; and what relation the mineral- ized zones bear to stratigraphic horizons, character of country rock, and other conditions that may have been responsible for the local enrichment of the favoring zones to commercial proportions. The formerly generally prevailing and still commonly entertained inter- pretation of these deposits is that they occur in fault breccias and that the mineral-bearing solutions travelled upward along the fault planes. In essen- tial respects then they would fall in the category of fissure veins. In my opinion they are neither fissure veins, nor connected with real faults—either of normal or thrust types, and the solutions did not come from below. Of course I shall not go into details of the complicated processes of mineral deposi- JAN. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 31 tion. It must suffice to state my opinion that the minerals come from the country rock and were carried in solution by ground waters which, when sur- charged with surface-derived organic acids, tended to precipitate as ores in favorable spots. Two conclusions may be reached from the facts observed: 1. All the commercially valuable and the as yet unproved deposits of sphalerite in the belt extending from Knoxville to Morristown were found at a definite stratigraphic horizon—namely, in a rather fine-grained, low-magne- sian limestone zone with a maximum thickness of about 100 feet. This lime- stone apparently is exceptionally favorable to replacement by sphalerite. It carries fossils that place it in the horizon of the Jefferson City dolomite of Mis- souri where, as in Tennessee, the corresponding formation is underlain by the Roubidoux formation and overlain by the Cotter formation. In Tennessee as in the Ozark region, the underlying and overlying formations are character- ized by profuse development of secondary chert on weathering and by easily distinguishable fossils faunas. Formerly, I was inclined to the belief that the horizon of the ore was at the unconformable contact between the Ozarkian and Canadian systems but that proved to be in error for it lies well up toward or rather above the middle of the Canadian, in the lowest of the five or six formations now recognized as constituting the sequence of Upper Canadian deposits. 2. The second conclusion is that the highly soluble Upper Canadian lime- stone was first honey-combed with sinkholes and caverns. Earthquakes and minor movements of the stratified crust caused fracturing and ‘‘spalling’’ of the roof and walls of the caverns, the pieces of rock making the accumulations of mainly angular fragments commonly referred to by geologists as breccia. Under favoring conditions, these accumulations of broken rock were cemented and in varying degrees replaced metasomatically by crystalline minerals. Often, as at Jefferson City, the greatest development of the ores occurred beneath the old sink holes whose position is indicated today by fossiliferous residual material of the Cotter formation which has slumped down into the horizon of the Jefferson City formation. As far as observed, the mineral- ization is largely and perhaps entirely confined in the areas of east Tennessee under consideration to the lower only very slightly cherty formation. In conclusion, in the mines at Mascot and in the vicinity of Jefferson City the ores are confined to a definite stratigraphic horizon and this fact is simply and positively fatal to the conception that they occur in anything like true fissure veins or in fault breccias. (Author’s abstract.) i Discussed by Messrs. Hess, MENDENHALL, R. C. WELLS, GILLULY, GOLD- MAN, BurRcHARD, Misr, C. 8S. Ross, HEwertt, BRIDGE. 470TH MEETING The 470th meeting of the Society was held at the Cosmos Club December 10, 1930, President G. R. MANsFIELD presiding. Vice President MErINzER took the chair during the presentation of the presidential address: Problems of the Phosphoria formation in the Rocky Mountains. 38TH ANNUAL MEETING The 38th annual meeting was held at the Cosmos Club after the adjourn- ment of the 470th regular meeting, President G. R. MANSFIELD presiding. The annual report of the Secretaries was read. The Treasurer presented his annual report showing an excess of assets over liabilities of $1122.09 on De- 32 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 2 cember 8, 1930. The auditing committee reported that the books of the Treasurer were correct. The results of balloting for officers for the ensuing year were as follows: President: O. E. MuInzER. Vice Presidents: F. L. Hrss and R. C. WE.Lzs. Secretaries: C. H. DANE and A. M. PirEr. Treasurer: C. WYTHE COOKE. Members-at-Large of the Council: W. H. Brapuey, Jos1aH BRIDGE, JAMES GiLtLuLy, W. D. Jounston, Jr., J. B. MmrRrTin, JR. Nominee as Vice President of the Washington Academy of Sciences ve senting the Geological Society: G. R. MANSFIELD. JAMES GILLULY, C. H. DANg, Seeremmes SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS Because of the greatly increased activities of the Water Resources Branch of the Geological Survey, Joun C. Hoyt has been relieved of his administra- tive duties in order to permit him to render expert services along technical engineering phases of water-resources investigations and to serve as a con- sultant to the Director and Chief Hydraulic Engineer. Cari G. PAULSEN succeeds Mr. Hoyt as Chief of the Division of Surface Water. The vacancy in the position of Division Engineer in charge of the Pacific Division of the Topographic Branch of the Geological Survey caused by the death of T. G. GmRpDINE has been filled by the transfer of H. H. Hopexzson. Col. GLENN 8. Situ, for some time past on occasional duty status, succeeds Mr. Hopacsson as Division Engineer in charge of the Central Division. The Carnegie Institution of Washington is sending a group of scientists to Guatemala to explore the geology, flora, and fauna of that part of the little- known Peten District which is accessible from the camp of the Institution’s Division of Historical Research at Uaxactun. The party will include Prof. H. H. Bartuert, chairman of the department of botany of the University of Michigan; Dr. C. WyTHE Cooke, geologist, U. 8. Geological Survey; Dr. A. MuRIE, assistant curator of mammals, University of Michigan; and Dr. J. VAN TYNE, assistant curator of birds, University of Michigan. They sail January 23rd from New Orleans to Belize, British Honduras, whence they proceed by river boat to El Cayo, and thence by pack train to Uaxactun. Dr. C. G. Apsot, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, has been named a member of the National Council for Intellectual Cooperation, which represents the United States in the newly organized Inter-American Institute of Intellectual Cooperation. The purpose of this institute is to mobilize the intelligence and the culture of the three Americas by organizing in each of the 21 American republics a council for promoting such policies as the interchange of students and research workers, the removal of prejudiced statements from geographies and histories, and finding ways and means of making available to all the information resources of the different countries. cu ee tA ee SS ee Sen re ie cfu eck - oe ee | Ae oe ap ty - = ey i eee ee ee ep LEN rt i By si ei Be . as oa ay e: ee Oy oe OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS Tuesday, January 20 The Anthropological Society The Historical Society Wednesday, January 21 The Society of Engineers The Medical Society Friday, January 23 The Geographic Society Saturday, January 24 ‘The Biological Society Wednesday, January 28 The Geological Society The Medical Society Friday, January 30 The Geographic Society Saturday, January 31 ~The Philosophical Society Tuesday, February 3 The Botanical Society ~ Wednesday, February 4 The Society of Engineers The Medical Society \ The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: Witit1AM Bowrn, Coast and Geodetic Survey. Corresponding Secretary: L. B. TuckprMAN, Bureau of Standards. Recording Secretary: CuarLes THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. The Se nln eee tees Shrencte Nores wom News.. oe - . es R « - WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES : BOARD OF EDITORS C. WrtuE Cooxr CHARLES DRECHSLER Hues L. Drypen Uv. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. PETERS Haroup MorRIson PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A, GoLpMAN G. W. Strosz BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY AGNES CHASE J. R. SWANTON BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY hee Rocsr C. WELLS ei. ’ CHEMICAL SOCIETY ] * ~ 3 ee PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY as EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY “~ BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES es Mr. Rorat aNp GUILFORD AVES. af es : BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. of = ne __date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished This J OURNAL, the official o organ a Ge he Wa: (1) short original papers, written or commu proceedings and programs of meetings of t of events connected with the scientific life o hit sib on the fourth and nineteenth of each mont . t app pears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres . es ication is an essential feature; a manuscript re twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on requ of the JOURNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth M anuscripts may be sent to any ‘member « of the F clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing editors cannot undertake to do more than oO 0 should appear only as footnotes and should i the work of both the editors and printers it is sugg th _ serially and submitted on a separate manuscript PARE.) Pocus eM Aes llustrationg in limited amount will be accepted, ‘draw gs that1 by zine etchings being preferable. ee he - Proot.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof wi — unless requested. - It is urged that manuscript be submitted 1 in fina. will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. _ 5 ae Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be is bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with nel ance with the following schedule ‘or. pute “ te oe ae Copies = 4pp. 8p PP. pp. 10S OCS “BB — 260° oe a 8) 1 gt gee ; 200 1.15 ose oe cela for abe reprints with the athe Ss name corner may be obtained at the following “prices. ‘First 100, As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for ext should invariably be attached to the first page of his ee The rate of Subscription per volume is. Teas cits a Sete es a NemiE-monthly: numbers: 7. nas ee Soe eee 2 Monthly numbers (July, August, and See ene Nos os. 43, ‘14, “and Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy. addressed to the rN, H.G. ne, Coast aa Cece ee | _ Missing Numbers will be faes without Sonus provided that ale : thirty days after date of the following i issue. . . JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou: 21 FEBRUARY 4, 1931 No. 3 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY.—Adsorption and base exchange.! P. G. NvuttinG, Geological Survey. - One substance is adsorbed by another when it is not removable by a neutral solvent. Dyes are adsorbed by textile fibers, salts by soils, dark components of petroleum by filtering clays, so that they cannot be washed off by solvents, such as water, alcohol or gasoline. In a more general sense, a substance is adsorbed when its fugacity is lowered from what it would be were the second substance not present, its con- centration increases and its vapor and solution tensions decrease as the adsorbing surface is approached. Adsorption is not necessarily limited to the visible surface and in some cases shades off into true chemical reaction in stoichiometric proportions or into true solution, long before molecular dimensions are reached. Adsorption is naturally very sensitive to changes in temperature and pressure (or concentration) but reaches a true reversible equilibrium given time enough. In a few cases, a slight rise in temperature is sufficient to remove all or nearly all the moisture adsorbed on salts or minerals or the organic vapors adsorbed on charcoal. In compara- tively few cases also, lowering the concentration (vapor or solution) may remove an adsorbed film. In general however adsorption-temper- ature and adsorption-concentration relations present the widest variety of forms and ranges. The material adsorbed may be either molecular or ionic, positive ions depositing on an electronegative particle and vice versa. Polar molecules are adsorbed with like ends attached to the adsorbing sur- face, presenting a new adsorbing surface of the same charge as the 1 Published by permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. Received December 11, 19380. 33 34 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 3 original one. Similarly positive and negative ions may pile up in alternate layers. In the case of adsorbed water, H and OH constitute the alternate layers and in thick films are indistinguishable from ad- sorbed molecular water. In crystallization from solution ions are adsorbed in pairs. Nonpolar molecules also vary in concentration near a surface of discontinuity but this is a purely physical pheno- menon, the seat of surface tension and adhesion. This form of sur- face film yields readily to solvents and is not considered adsorption proper. Base exchange is concerned with single layers of adsorbed ions, practically in chemical combination with the surface and in extreme cases, with every combinable atom present, whether the dispersion be partial or complete. It is not unusual to find one base completely replaceable while another is only partly replaceable in the same granu- lar substance. Weak bases are replaced by stronger ones, and every other base by H by means of an acid treatment. The mass law holds and equilibrium constants may be found without great difficulty. Particles settling out carry adsorbed charges down with them. ‘Table 1 shows the complexity of the behavior of even the simplest water suspensions. Since two or more of these are usually present in any given sample of soil colloid, it is to be expected that conflicting results would be ob- tained in working with such samples. Table 1 is somewhat idealized, for in water at room temperature the adsorption is probably many pairs of ions deep in all cases. How- ever, the innermost layer is by far the most effective and dominates the behavior of the micelle. At higher temperatures, the outer less strongly held layers would be set free and this may account for the better results sometimes obtained at elevated temperatures in practi- cal filtration, dyeing, ete. | Oil sands sometimes but rarely consist of well formed quartz crystals free from adsorbed coatings. Such sands usually consist of ill-formed, rough quartz grains, coated with ferrous or ferrous-aluminum sili- cates or with adsorbed black hydrocarbon which cannot be washed off with even the most powerful solvents. Grain coatings of car- bonates (Fe, Ca, Mg) are not uncommon. ‘The well known Bradford oil sand is coated first with colloidal iron, then with black hydrocarbon. The Tensleep oil sand is pure quartz heavily coated with a hydrocar- bon. The pore walls of oil-bearing limes are black with hydrocarbon. FEB. 4, 1931 NUTTING: ADSORPTION AND BASE EXCHANGE 30 It is possible to peel off these two layers from a Bradford sand and even to restore them. The hydrocarbon is removed with chromic acid (‘‘wet combustion’’), the iron with ordinary acids. The grains thus peeled are active and if thoroughly washed and dried will re- adsorb coatings of either iron (from dialized iron in dilute suspension) or hydrocarbon from crude oil in a few hours. It was found easily possible to activate even sea sand or the faces of a quartz crystal by first attacking with alkali, then washing with acid, then with water, and drying. Such an activated silica surface, freed from H and OH by heating to 200°C., will freely adsorb all kinds of positive ions, even TABLE 1. Cuasses or WATER SUSPENSIONS Class Micelle Surface Exchangeable ion Dispersing eifect i Negative H H Acid Z Positive OH OH Alkaline 3) Negative OH inner H Alkaline H outer 4 Positive H inner OH Acid OH outer 1. Silica gel, acid clay, humus. 2. Colloidal Ca3(POx)2, dialized iron (?). 3. Calcium permutites, zeolites, neg. Al(OH);. 4. Electropositive Al(OH);. amphoteric colloidal alumina and probably anything less negative than silica. Well-aged dialized iron is inert toward even strong acids or alkalis, but even a very dilute suspension (1 part per million) is readily ad- sorbed by active silica. Iron stains in old bath tubs are readily ex- plained if it be supposed that the long-continued drip of fresh water on the porcelain leaches out sufficient alkali to leave an active alkali silicate surface to adsorb the very dilute iron from tap water. There is abundant geological evidence for the solution and redeposition of silica by water, hence it is not surprising to find oil sands generally activated and coated as well as silica cemented. Classes 1 and 3 of Table 1 after thorough drying make good clarify- ing filters for mineral oils such as petroleum but do not filter vegetable 36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 3 oils or mineral fats containing OH. If the normal hydrogen has been replaced by an alkali (K, Na), the filter must first be acid treated. On the other hand classes 2 and 4, or clays containing these in excess, make the best filters for animal and vegetable oils. That the presence of the hydroxyl ion is the vital factor is readily shown by adding a ~ little alcohol, linseed oil or glycerine (all rich in OH) to a crude petro- leum; filtration is inhibited. One filtering clay is known which filters all three classes of oils about equally well. Chemical analysis shows this to contain a little alkali, enough to give it an amphoteric dispersing character ; SiO, 69, Al,O; 13, Fe.O3 8, (Ca, Mg)O 2, and (K,Na).O 2.5 per cent, the rest chiefly water. All good filtering clays retain 12 to 22 percent of water when room- dry at low humidities and part with most of it only on heating to well over 150° or 200°C. ‘This is as it should be with H and OH firmly adsorbed. Driving these off as water would leave open bonds ready to attack the more basic colored constituents of oil. If they be not driven off (moist filter), only bases stronger than H and OH and there- fore capable of replacing them would be adsorbed and filtered out. It is found that a filter not thoroughly dried will filter black petroleum to a yellow but not to water white as a dry filter will. Since adsorbed moisture leaves an active silicate surface only at high temperatures, a high-temperature (250°C.) water treatment is a means of producing an active surface on silica or a silicate. The H and OH bonds (toward silica) are in a labile state at such temperatures provided the water is confined to prevent its escape. Release of that pressure leaves the bonds open. Even a carbonate may be converted to a hydrate by high-temperature steam treatment if the CO, is al- lowed to escape while the supply of H,.O is maintained. Many other colloidal oxides besides silica and the silicates may be prepared as good filters. Their action is similar in principle as regards adsorption and base exchange even when the micelle is electropositive. The writer has prepared three (Fe, Al and Si) so powerful as to crack even paraffin and heavy laxative oils, reducing them from clear to a black condition. This is done by preparing the gel in maximum dilu- tion. Active colloidal iron, in the form of a dark red-brown powder, will even filter dialized iron from a very dilute yellow suspension, leaving clear water. This form of autoadsorption between colloids is akin to crystallization (adsorption of ions in pairs). The deposit of colloidal iron on and near the surface of siliceous pebbles in stream beds is very common. FEB. 4, 1931 GAHAN: HYMENOPTEROUS PARASITES 7 ENTOMOLOGY .—Two new hymenopterous parasites of Tachypterellus consors Dietz.1 A. B. GaHan, U. 8. Department of Agriculture, Bureau of Entomology. (Communicated by Harotp Morrison.) Two species of Chalcidoidea which appear to be new to science are herewith described. These were reared by Gnorce M. List of the Colorado Agricultural College in connection with his studies of their host, a curculionid which is said to be causing considerable injury to cherries in the vicinity of Fort Collins, Colorado. Mr. List intends to describe the host insect as a new variety of T. consors Dvetz. Family PTEROMALIDAE Habrocytus lividus, new species This resembles H. piercet Crawford in size and shape but may be dis- tinguished by the darker, less metallic color of the body and the dark brown or black tibiae, by the shorter ocellocular line which is barely longer than the diameter of an ocellus, and by the shorter propodeum which is without a distinct neck. Differs from H. obscuripes Ashmead by the differently colored body and legs, by the more strongly transverse head, and by the less strongly sculptured propodeum. Female.—Length 2.6 mm. Antennae inserted at middle of head; scape cylindrical, extending a little above the vertex; pedicel about twice as long as broad, slender; two ring-joints distinct but transverse; first funicle joint about as long as and a little thicker than the pedicel, not quite twice as long as broad; second to fifth funicle joints each distinctly longer than broad, sub- equal in length to pedicel, the sixth barely longer than broad; club short ovate, one half wider than the sixth funicle joint and about as long as the fifth and sixth combined. Head strongly transverse, thin antero-posteriorly at vertex, concave behind, reticulate-punctate all over, the sculpture a little finer on vertex and cheeks than on frons and face; ocellocular line very slightly longer than the diameter of a lateral ocellus; eyes bare, malar space equal to about half the height of eye; right mandible four-toothed, the left three- toothed but with the inner tooth broadly truncate and a little concave at apex. Thorax sculptured like the head but with the punctures appearing a little deeper; mesoscutum broader than long, the parapsidal grooves absent on posterior half; scutellum and axillae a little more finely sculptured than the mesoscutum; propodeum short, with a median carina, the lateral folds more or less incomplete, represented at base by deep fossae on either side of the middle and at apex by similar fossae, the two fossae on each side sometimes joined to each other by a very weak longitudinal groove; spiracular groove deep and distinct, spiracles elliptical; propodeum medially with weak reticu- lation, usually with some foveae along the anterior margin, outside the folds practically smooth. Marginal vein of forewing twice as long as stigmal, the post-marginal very slightly shorter than marginal; discal cilia absent behind submarginal vein. Abdomen twice as long as thorax and about as wide as 1 Received December 22, 1930. 38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 3 thorax, conic ovate, sessile, the first tergite occupying less than one fourth the length of abdomen, smooth, following tergites weakly reticulated. Gen- eral color bluish black; scape yellowish testaceous; flagellum dark brown; wings hyaline, venation pale brownish; coxae bluish, all femora and tibiae brownish black, the knees narrowly, extreme apices of hind tibiae and all tarsi yellowish testaceous; abdomen mostly black but with the basal tergite metallic blue green. The head, propodeum, underside of thorax, and the hind femora show strong steel-blue tints in some lights. Male.—Length 2 mm. Similar to the female except that the antennal pedicel is hardly twice as long as thick, the club is very little broader than the preceding joint, the tibiae are brownish testaceous with the same color pattern as the female but not so dark, and the abdomen is not longer than the thorax. | Type-locality.—F ort Collins, Colorado. Type.—Cat. No. 48263, U. 8. N. M. Host.—Tachypterellus consors Dietz. Two females and five males received from G. M. List with the statement that they were reared from the above-named host infesting cherry. The type bears the date July 17, 1929, while other specimens bear dates ranging from July 13 to July 17, 1929. One male paratype was returned to the collector. Family EHULOPHIDAE Entedon tachypterelli, new species This species is similar to #. occzdentalis Girault but differs by having the clypeus much smaller and less prominent, by having the post-marginal vein distinctly a little longer than the stigmal, and by having the abdomen dis- tinctly conic-ovate and longer than the head and thorax combined. The first funicle joint is also shorter than in EL. occidentalis and the hind tibiae are less extensively black. | Female.—Length 3 mm. Antennae inserted nearly on a line with the lower extremities of the eyes; consisting of eight joints and a very short terminal spine; scape cylindrical, slightly curved and attaining the level of the front ocellus; pedicel about two and one-half times as long as thick and somewhat more slender than first funicle joint; one small ring-joint; funicle three-jointed, the first joint a little more than two and one-half times as long as broad and slightly longer than the pedicel, second joint shorter than the first but longer than the third, the latter usually slightly less than twice as long as broad; club 2-jointed, about as long as first funicle joint, ovate and terminating in a very short spine. Head viewed from above four times as broad as long; vertex perpendicu- larly truncated behind; ecciput very slightly concave; eyes large, conspicu- ously hairy; ocelli in an obtuse triangle, the ocellocular line very slightly longer than the diameter of lateral ocellus; frontovertex strongly rugoso-punc- tate; face below antennae, cheeks, and temples more finely rugulose-punctate; clypeus not prominent, its anterior margin not reflexed. Thorax robust; prothorax short, much narrower and on a much lower level than the mesono- tum; mesoscutum convex, coarsely rugoso-punctate, the punctures somewhat coarser on posterior half of the median lobe than elsewhere, the parapsidal FEB. 4, 1931 COCHRAN: NEW BAHAMAN REPTILES a9 grooves complete and each terminating posteriorly in a deep depression; scutellum rather large, convex, sculptured like the mesoscutum, usually with a broad shallow transverse depression near the middle; axillae broadly sepa- rated and sculptured like the scutellum; propodeum shining, more or less weakly reticulated, the median carina distinct but without a foveolate furrow along either side of it, lateral folds represented by very broad deep furrows or depressions which cause that portion of the propodeum between these folds to appear as an elevated area with sharp lateral margins; propodeal spiracles round, the spiracular areas appearing as rather large tubercles or raised areas surrounded by deep grooves; marginal vein longer than submarginal and dis- tinctly somewhat thicker at base than at apex; postmarginal longer than the stigmal; hind coxae dorsally rather coarsely reticulated, laterally and beneath more finely sculptured. Abdomen conic-ovate, subsessile, about one-fourth longer than the head and thorax together, usually slightly narrower than the thorax, the first, second, third, and fourth tergites weakly reticulated; first, sixth, and seventh tergites subequal in length and each a little longer than any of the other ter- gites; ovipositor originating at or very near base of abdomen and not extend- ing beyond the apex. Head, thorax, all coxae, and first tergite bluish green, occiput black; anten- nal flagellum brownish black, the scape bluish green; mandibles black, with their apices brown; all trochanters, all femora, a band of varying width (some- times embracing half their length) on the middle and hind tibiae near base, and the anterior and posterior margins of front tibiae, dark bluish to black; knees, all tibiae except as indicated, and all tarsi pale yellow; abdomen except first tergite bronzy black; wings hyaline with the venation dark brown. Male.——Length2.5mm. Similar tothe female but with the scape distinctly though not greatly thickened, the flagellum somewhat more tapered toward apex, the club more distinctly separated into two joints, the ocellocular line equal to the diameter of a lateral ocellus, abdomen not longer than the thorax, elliptical in outline, distinctly petiolate, the petiole about as long as broad. The color agrees with that of the female except that the front is deep purplish. Type-localitty—Fort Collins, Colorado. Type—Cat. No. 43262, U. S. N. M. Host.—Tachypterellus consors Dietz. Described from eight females and eight males received from Gro. M. List of the Colorado Agricultural College with the information that they were reared from the above named curculionid. One paratype of each sex returned to the collector. HERPETOLOGY.—New Bahaman reptiles. Doris M. Cocuran, U.S. National Museum. (Communicated by C. WyTHE CooKE.) During the summer of 1930 an extensive collecting trip through the Bahama Islands was carried out by Dr. Paut Bartscu of the United States National Museum, supported by the WALTER RATHBONE Bacon Scholarship Fund. Islands which no naturalist had hitherto visited 1 Received December 29, 1930. Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. a 40 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 3 were explored for the first time scientifically. Excellent series of lizards obtained from many localities have already proved valuable in studies of variation among species which before have been poorly represented in any museum collection. Leiocephalus inaguae, new species Diagnosis.—A distinct lateral fold; four scales (an internasal and three prefrontals) between the rostral and the supraorbital ring; the second prefron- tal large and in contact with its fellow; body scales moderately large, 70 to 82 dorsals between occiput and beginning of tail, 16 to 20 in the distance be- tween end of snout and occiput; males with a row of large squarish black blotches on the shoulder region, continuing down the sides and fading out rapidly; faint traces of two more rows of squarish blotches on the back. Type .—U.S. N. M. Cat. No. 81277, an adult male from Man of War Bay, Great Inagua Island, collected August 8, 1930. Leiocephalus carinatus punctatus, new subspecies Diagnosis.—Closely resembling the Cuban Lezocephalus carinatus, but differing from it in having a larger scale at the upper anterior region of the ear as well as in possessing a more vivid color pattern with a somewhat differ- ent arrangement of light and dark pigment especially on the head. Type.—U.8. N. M. Cat. No. 81560 (collector’s number 135), a male taken on the north shore of the bay at Jamaica Wells, Acklin Island, July 6, 1930. Cyclura carinata bartschi new subspecies Diagnosis.—Nasals broadly in contact with the rostral and with each other; a pair of supranasals also closely in contact with each other; the scales of the prefrontal region quite uniform in size and shape, and grading into the smaller frontal and parietal scales; supraorbital semicircles barely differentiated by an occasional somewhat enlarged scale; scales of the supraocular region distinctly smaller than the other supracephalic scutes; two to four enlarged vertical canthals on each side of the head; nuchal and caudal crests widely sepa- rated from the dorsal crest, which is 12 mm. high (in adult males) and is com- posed of 60 to 73 spines (average in 6 specimens, 63.5); nuchal crest composed of 16 to 20 spines (average 17.1), the highest of which measures 15 mm.; 4 vertical rows of small scales between the fifth and sixth verticils of the tail; 8 supralabials (rarely 9) to a point below the center of the eye; rostral wider than the mental; three to four enlarged tibial scales equaling the vertical diameter of the tympanic membrane. Type.—U. 8. N. M. Cat. No. 81212 (collector’s number 172), an adult male from Booby Cay, east of Mariguana Island, Bahamas, collected July Zi, 1930, Anolis leucophaeus mariguanae, new subspecies Diagnosis.—Similar to Anolis leucophaeus Garman, but differing from it in coloration. Ground color drab gray above, lavender-gray beneath, often with a wide clove-brown lateral band which originates on the loreal region, passes through the eye and above the ear, and widens above the shoulder continuing onto the base of the tail and gradually fading out; a light area | usually bounding its lower border; a second dark lateral stripe beginning on the malar region just behind the mental, continuing back beneath the ear and FEB. 4, 1931 CHITWOOD: SPERMATOZOA IN A NEMATODE 4] merging in front of the shoulder with the upper lateral stripe in some cases, in other cases widening and suffusing the entire side of the throat and upper- arm region with a dusky mottling; skin of gular fan lavender-gray, the scales white or olive-yellow. The young have dark latero-ventral reticulations, and the throat usually has a series of dark longitudinal lines. In adult males the tail fin is large and its upper edge is indistinctly mottled with dark in the region of the rays. Limbs sometimes unmarked, sometimes with wide, irregu- lar dark bars. Scales on limbs a little smaller than in lewcophaeus proper; seales of tail a little larger. Type.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 81346, an adult male from Mariguana Cay, taken July 18, 1930. ZOOLOGY .—Flagellate spermatozoa in a nematode (Trilobus longus).! B. G. Cuitwoop, The George Washington University. (Com- municated by PauL BARTSCH.) The spermatozoa of nematodes are usually thought of as ameboid, Ascaris having been the example studied for years. Yet Professor Figure 2. A testis of a male Trilobus longus showing the flagellate spermatozoa. X415. EK. B. Witson in 1925? says ‘‘In others such as those of Ascaris, the Sperm may be regarded asa much shortened and thickened flagelliform cell with a relatively large amount of cytoplasm and a very short and non-vibratile tail.’’ If his conception is correct, one would expect to find among the free-living nematodes forms in which the spermatozoa retain their tail and are capable of movement. While examining collections from the beach sand at White Lake, North Carolina, attention was drawn to the rather obvious spermato- zoa ot T'rilobus longus. They may be readily seen in living specimens of both male andfemale. The spermatozoa (Fig. 1) are approximately 60. long. The head is blunt and expanding quickly posteriorly, and of oval outline in transverse section. The small nucleus is situated 1 Received November 6, 1930. 2 The cell in development and heredity, p. 298. 42 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 3 at the extreme anterior end of the head. The tail is long and tapering. From a casual observation of both living and sectioned testes (Fig. 2), I am inclined to believe that spermatogenesis is normal. Primary and secondary spermatocytes as well as spermatids are present. W hen a living specimen is mashed and the spermatozoa liberated on the slide they move with a slow serpentine motion. Spermatozoa thus freed are short-lived, lasting at best only about three minutes. In the female the activity of the spermatozoa is best observed. When mature females are examined, these almost always contain a somewhat twisted ball-shaped mass of spermatozoa in a definite place in each uterus, the spermatheca. Here they may be seen slowly squirming over one another. Probably many other nematodes have flagellate spermatozoa. Trilobus longus is described by Dr. N. A. Cops in Ward and Whipple’s Fresh Water Biology, a book available to most zoologists. The nema- tode is widespread, common on the sandy bottom of lakes and streams between the depths of six inches and two feet. The cytologist might find the spermatogenesis of Trzlobus an interesting problem. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 1004TH MEETING The 1004th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, March 15, 1930, President LAMBERT presiding. Program: W. J. Roongy: Karth-resistiity survey at Huancayo, Peru, and relation of resistivity to earth-current potential records.—This survey, carried out near the Huancayo (Peru) Magnetic Observatory of the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism in the high Andes, is one of a series of earth-resistiv- ity surveys made in connection with the study of earth-currents at observa- tories where potential gradient registration is in progress. The general re- sistivity of the region and its variation with position, depth, direction of current flow and rainfall, were determined. All may affect potential records and are indicative of the geological structure. The resistivity of soil near the surface varied from over 100,000 to less than 2000 ohm-cm., depending on the character of the overburden. The mean values tended to converge to a value around 10,000 ohm-em., as earth to depths of 200 to 300 meters was included in the measurements. These results are typical for an underlying structure of sedimentary rocks. A local area of high resistivity (values three times the mean for the region as a whole) was found near one earth-current line and explains the high-potential gradient records obtained from that line. The results were found to be independent of the orientation of the survey lines, indicating that the region is laterally isotropic. The seasonal variation was small and relatively unimportant. (Author’s abstract.) FEB. 4, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 43 Discussed by Messrs. GisH and LAMBERT. C. B. Watts: The transit instrument and the synchronous motor.—A new driving mechanism for the traveling-wire micrometer of a transit instrument has been developed at the Naval Observatory. It consists of a small syn- chronous motor, weighing only a few ounces, mounted on the micrometer and geared directly to the screw. The speed at which the traveling wire moves is adjusted to suit the declination of the star under observation by changing the frequency of the current which drives the motor. A true alternating current is not required to run the motor, and it has been found convenient in practice to change a direct current by means of a rapidly revolving commutator into a rough approximation to a two-phase alternating current. The commutator is made to revolve at a speed corresponding to a particular declination by means of a friction drive. The observer can also cause the brushes which take the current from the commutator to rotate slowly in one direction or the other and thus alter the frequency by such amounts as are necessary to keep the star bisected. This auxiliary apparatus is controlled by means of a push button in the observer’s hand. By this means very satisfactory results have been secured, the probable error of a single observation, including errors of star places, being 0°.12. The possibility of applying similar motors to a photographic transit instru- ment is also being investigated, the plate being moved in such a way as to compensate as nearly as possible for the motion of the starimages. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. WHITE, KRAcEK, CURTIS, and LAMBERT. R. E. Gipson and L.H.Apams: Thevolume change of rubber under pressure.— Direct measurements were made of the, fractional change in volume under- gone by samples of rubber when subjected to pressures up to 12,000 mega- baryes. The samples investigated were:—hard rubber containing 27 percent of sulphur, and two specimens of soft rubber containing 10 and 5 percent of sulphur, respectively. Between 1 and 12,000 mb. the changes in volume for the specimens in descending order of sulphur content are 13.3, 16.1 and 18.5 percent of the volume at 1 mb. respectively. The compressibilities of the samples arranged in like order fall from 19.2, 35.2 and 36.6 at 1 mb. to 6.3, 5.9 and 6.3 at 12,000 mb. The compressibilities are fractional volume changes expressed in parts per million per megabarye. The course of the compressibility curve for soft rubber is strongly suggestive of that of a liquid. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. CANFIELD, GisH, HAWKESWORTH, DRYDEN, KRACEK, L. H. Apams, and CurrTIs. 1005TH MEETING The 1005th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, March 29, 1930, President LAMBERT presiding. Program: C. G. MclIuwraits: Radio frequency standards: Discussed by Messrs. BROWN, CRITTENDEN, HumMPHREYS and TUCKERMAN. H. Diamonp: Radio aids to air navigation—Research work on a visual- type radio-beacon system for use on the airways of the United States has been under way at the Bureau of Standards during 1926-1929. Asa result of this work a system has been developed which fulfills the requirements for course navigation on the civil airways. A directional transmitter is employed on the ground making possible the use of simple apparatus on board the air- 44 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 3 plane. A single receiving set is sufficient to make use of all the radio aids provided. Visual indication is provided by means of a tuned-reed course indicator. The pilot observes the vibration amplitudes of two reeds. On the course, the amplitudes are equal. Off the course, they are unequal, the reed vibrating with the greater amplitude being on the side to which the airplane has deviated. Two types of beacon transmitters are described, the double-modulation and the triple-modulation. The former is capable of serving either two courses at 180° with each other or four courses at arbitrary angles. The latter serves twelve courses at arbitrary angles, and is better adapted for use at airports located at the junction of a large number of airways. Reed indi- cators for use with the double-modulation and triple-modulation beacons are described. A discussion of the receiving set and receiving antenna system employed is included. Airplane engine ignition shielding is also discussed. A marker-beacon system has been developed whereby the pilot is given visual indication of his exact position at definite intervals along the route. Special adaptations of the beacon system are described for facilitating landing in fog. (Author’s abstract.) 1006TH MEETING The 1006th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, April 12, 1930, Vice President Curtis presiding. The program consisted of five illustrated papers discussing various phases of the scientific work during the seventh cruise of the Carnegie. ‘The discussion of the papers was deferred until they had all been presented. Program: J. A. Furmrinec: Terrestrial magnetism.—Of the 110,000 nautical miles planned for the seventh cruise of the Carnegie, nearly one-half had been completed since her departure from Washington, May 1, 1928, upon her arrival at Apia, November 28, 1929. The work done has realized practically in every detail the extensive scientific program planned to determine magnetic secular- variation, to extend the atmospheric-electric survey, and to undertake more comprehensive work in physical and chemical oceanography and in marine biology and meteorology. An outstanding feature had been the successful development of the practical technique and instrumental appliances for ocean- ographic work on a sailing vessel—an accomplishment of which Captain AULT and his men had good reason to be proud. During the first six cruises chief emphasis was placed on the magnetic and electric programs, with only a mod- erate amount of atmospheric-electric and meteorological observations. In Cruise VII those high standards planned under the energetic directorship of Dr. Bausr and his coworkers, and so well developed by the vessel’s first commander, W. J. Prtmrs, and his successor, Captain J. P. AULT, were being maintained. But Cruise VII was tragically the last of the seven great adventures repre- sented by the world-cruises of the Carnegie. It was shortly after one o’clock November 29, 1929, while in harbor at Apia, Western Samoa, and completing the storage of 2,000 gallons of gasoline, that an explosion took place as the result of which Captain AuuT and Cabin-Boy Kouar succumbed, the engi- neer, mechanic, and three seamen were injured, and the vessel with all her equipment was destroyed by the resulting fire. Thanks to that characteristic promptness of Captain Auut, however, all records, reports, and samples obtained to arrival at Pago Pago, American FEB. 4, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 45 Samoa, November 18, 1929, had been mailed or forwarded by freight from that port, and all have now been received in Washington. The standard instruments for the program in terrestrial magnestism were the collimating-compass for declination, the deflector for horizontal intensity, and the marine earth-inductor for inclination. Mr. F. M. Souug, one of the scientific staff on Cruise VII, had been carrying on experimental work aboard during the cruise with the inductor for the determination of horizontal in- tensity, and the progress made which will be described elsewhere gives prom- ise that this method will ultimately be more reliable than the deflector method. The summary of the ship’s log and magnetic observations during May 1928 to November 1929 shows that in a total of 376 days actually at sea 44,877 sea miles had been covered by the vessel, and that the magnetic declination, horizontal intensity, and inclination had been determined at 520, 175, and 174 stations, respectively. Shore observations were also obtained at repeat- stations in Iceland, Barbados, Easter Island, Peru, Western Samoa, Guam, Japan, and California, including intercomparisons of magnetic standards at the following observatories: Seddin (Germany), Huancayo (Peru), Apia (Western Samoa), and Kakooka (Japan). The preliminary values of the magnetic elements and the average annual- changes based on over 100 intersections with previous cruises of the Carnegie in the Atlantic and Pacific oceans have been published. The values obtained through September 1929 have been utilized by the United States Hydro- graphic Office in preparing its revised isomagnetic world-charts for the epoch 1930 only recently issued. The annual-change values show that the recent isomagnetic charts are substantially correct. The agonic line, however, is nearer the western coast of South America than indicated on the charts. The area of rapid increase in magnetic inclination in the western Caribbean and off the coast of northwestern Peru extends westward to the line of no annual change passing from the Gulf of Alaska past the neighborhood of Samoa. The annual-change values of horizontal intensity are not quite so consistent as are those of other elements—a condition to be expected in view of the greater difficulty in precise determinations of this element. In view of the fact that the Institution’s magnetic-distribution survey of the oceans has been practically completed in the work already done by the Carnegie and because of the large sum—probably twice the original cost— which would be required to construct and equip a second and like non-mag- netic ship, the trustees of the Carnegie Institution of Washington have de- cided not to replace the Carnegie. It is hoped, however, that steps may be initiated through cooperation of oceanographic interests in the United States for a ship specially designed for oceanographic researches including occa- sional magnetic and electric observations in all oceans in continuation and development of the plans which were being executed on the Carnegie. It is in this way chiefly that the experience and technique acquired in many years of preparation, of development of instruments, and of cruising could be capi- talized to benefit future oceanographic research. The high esteem and regard for Captain AuLT and his work have been demonstrated by the many cablegrams, letters, and resolutions of condolence received from all parts of the world. These too have furnished much addi- tional evidence of that universal good-will which has, throughout the cruises of the Carnegie and her predecessor, the Galilee, so marked these activities. (Author’s abstract.) 46 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 3 F. N. Souue: Oceanography.—The actual work of observation and collection in the field of physical oceanography on Cruise VII of the Carnegie consisted of the collection of bottom-samples and the measurement of depths, temperatures, and salinities. Various bottom-sampling devices were used. Depths were measured with thermometers, wire lengths, and sonic-soundings. ‘Tempera- tures were measured by means of deep-sea reversing thermometers, and water- samples were collected with Nansen water-bottles. Salinities were measured by the conductivity method using the Wenner salinity-bridge. The extent of the work is described as well as the method of collection and measurement. (Author’s abstract.) H. W. Grawam: Biology and chemistry—The biological program of the Carnegie was designed for the study of the planktonic organisms in the upper 100-meter layer in the open ocean. Silk nets were towed at the surface, at 50 meters, and at 100 meters for the capture of qualitative samples, and a Pettersson plankton-pump was operated at the same levels to obtain samples for quantitative studies. The chemical program was confined to a study of the conditions affecting the distribution of organisms in the sea. All water-samples collected were analyzed for hydrogen-ion concentration, phosphates, silicates, and dissolved oxygen. The results in the Pacific show that the waters may be divided into three general layers: An upper layer where an active plant and animal life is maintained, a middle layer in which a decomposition of organic remains is taking place, and a lower layer which represents water that has been conducted from polar regions. The upper layer shows high values of dissolved oxygen but low values of phosphates, silicates, and hydrogen-ion concentration. The middle layer is low in oxygen but high in phosphates and silicates, and is relatively less alkaline. The lower layer tends toward conditions at the sur- face with again higher values of dissolved oxygen and lower of phosphates, silicates, and hydrogen-ion concentration. (Author’s abstract.) J. H. Pauu: Meteorology.—An abbreviation of the usual magnetic investi- gations made it possible to undertake a complete meteorological program during Cruise VII of the non-magnetic vessel Carnegie. In addition to the ordinary observations, a study of several special problems in atmospheric circulation over the oceans was initiated. Temperature and humidity lapse rates from quarter-deck to masthead were recorded automatically by a Hart- mann and Braun electric-resistance multi-thermograph with three pairs of thermal elements (wet and dry) at various heights. Continuous thermograms of sea-surface temperature were obtained by a bulb-and-capillary recorder. Continuous humidity measurements were also obtained by a recording aspira- tion psychrometer of Negretti and Zambra manufacture for immediate use aboard and as a control on the multi-thermograph. These instruments were all interecompared with standard thermometers daily. A continuous record of atmospheric pressure was kept by an aneroid barograph which was daily checked by readings on standard mercurial barometers. In addition to these records, soundings of the upper air were made almost daily in the Pacific with hydrogen-inflated pilot balloons for direction and velocity of the air currents to great heights. Measurements of the rate of evaporation were carried out when conditions were favorable. Projected studies in total solar and sky radiation, although of great interest, had to be abandoned because of the difficulties encountered in working on a vessel with lofty sails and be- cause of pressure of other work. FEB. 4, 1931 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS _ 47 The great interest of meteorologists in the work of the Carnegie is due to the fact that she sailed in regions from which data is very scanty and was working with instruments whose accuracy is known, something one can not claim for the commercial vessels from which ocean observations are ordinarily obtained. (Author’s abstract.) O. H. GisH: Atmospheric electricity—Work on previous cruises of the Carnegie has shown not only that satisfactory measurements of the elements of atmospheric electricity could be made on a moving vessel at sea but also that the electrical state of the atmosphere over ocean areas is little affected by local factors such as give a confusing complexity to these phenomena over land. It was due to this circumstance that 8. J. Maucuuy was able to con- clude, from the comparatively small amount of data obtained on Cruises IV, V, and VI, that the regular change during the day of the electric intensity, or potential gradient, over the oceans proceeds on a universal schedule every- where. This important discovery has been verified by the extensive data obtained on Cruise VII. Much encouraged by the outcome of earlier cruises a more intensive and elaborate program was planned for Cruise VII, general facilities and sundry instrumental features were improved, a photographic recorder for potential gradient was installed at Washington (May 1928) and a recorder of conductivity at San Francisco (August 1929), an additional in- strument for measuring the penetrating radiation and of a different type from that used on the Carnegie since 1915 was provided. These and an Aitken “‘dust’’ counter constituted the new instrumental equipment. As a measure of the work accomplished, the following is significant: Aside from over 200 complete daily programs and a number of diurnal-variation series (24 consecutive hours each) not completed due to the development of bad weather, the number of complete diurnal-variation series with eye-reading instruments were obtained as follows: conductivity, 22; ionic-content, 20; mobility (indirect), 20; penetrating radiation, 26; condensation nuclei (with Aitken dust counter), 15; and with photographic recorders satisfactory com- plete daily records of potential gradient, free from negative potential, were obtained for 194 days and of conductivity for 56 days, the latter from San Francisco to Apia. The diurnal-variation series by eye-readings were ob- tained at about twice the rate for previous cruises, and the recorder yielded satisfactory data at more than tenfold the rate previously attained by eye- reading methods. The gratifying success of this program is in a great meas- ure due to the enthusiasm, diligence, and skill of W. C. PARKINSON, senior scientific officer, who was in charge of the work on board throughout the cruise, and O. W. TorreEson, executive officer, from Washington to San Francisco, and 8. E. Forsusu, executive officer, San Francisco to Apia, who assisted in some aspects of the work. (Author’s abstract.) The papers were discussed by Messrs. Heck, PETERS, SVERDRUP, CURTIS and HAWKESWORTH. Oscar 8S. Apams, Recording Secretary SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS GEORGE Otis SmitH, Director of the Geological Survey since 1907, re- signed December 22, 1930 to accept appointment as Chairman of the Federal Power Commission. Watter C. MENDENHALL, formerly chief geologist, has been designated acting director by the Secretary of the Interior. T. W. 48 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 3 STANTON is now acting chief geologist; Joun B. Rensipn, Jr., is acting geologist in charge of the section of paleontology and stratigraphy; and H. D. Miser has been designated acting chairman of the committee on geologic names. Messrs. RensiIpE and WILLIAM W. RuBery have been added to the committee. H. G. Barser of Roselle, New Jersey, has been appointed a specialist in Hemiptera in the Bureau of Entomology and placed in charge of the collec- tion in the National Museum. Dr. Wn. A. Horrman, of the Porto Rican School of Tropical Medicine, and Dr. JosepH Brequazrt, of the Harvard University Medical School, were visitors at the Division of Insects of the National Museum in December. Dr. CARLETON R. Batu, formerly principal agronomist in charge of the Office of Cereal Crops and Diseases, Bureau of Plant Industry, U. S. Depart- ment of Agriculture, went to California early in January to take charge of a survey of federal, State, and local (county and city) relationships in the diverse agricultural activities in that State. The survey of agriculture, which is the first of a series planned to cover these relationships in all human activi- ties in California, is conducted by the Bureau of Public Administration of the Department of Political Science of the University of California at Berkeley with funds from the Rockefeller Foundation. It is hoped to complete and publish the agricultural survey in 1931. Dr. Davin G. FarIRcHILD, botanist and agricultural explorer now attached to the Office of Foreign Plant Introduction of the Department of Agriculture, has been awarded the GrorcE RoBeRtT WHITE medal by the Massachusetts Horticultural Society. @Obituary GEORGE GoopING AINSLIE, of Knoxville, Tenn., since 1908 connected with the U. 8. Bureau of Entomology, died suddenly in Washington December 19, 1930. He was born in Rochester, Minn., March 7, 1886. He studied at the University of Minnesota, where he was assistant to the State Entomologist from 1906 to 1908. During 1909-1910 he was assistant in entomology at Clemson College. ) | FREDERICK J. PRITCHARD, plant physiologist of the Bureau of Plant In- dustry since 1910 and a member of the Academy, died suddenly at his office January 13, 1931. He was born at Camanche, Iowa, December 24, 1874. He received the degree of bachelor of science from the University of Nebraska in 1904 and later served as instructor in botany and bacteriology at the North Dakota Agricultural College, where he became assistant professor in botany and pathologist at the college experimental station in 1905. In 1907 he was made assistant in plant breeding at Cornell University and in 1909 became botanist at the Wisconsin Experimental Station while an agent of the Department of Agriculture. He specialized in breeding disease-resisting varieties of tomatoes. te ae The Geoaaptec Society 4. The Philosophical Society = _ The Anthropological Society: OO Sa Sarena te. “onthe orcieaee Society ete : ae ie . The So reiety of Engineers pd Tae as fs aoe The Medical Society < Ags ae ae i ae bo" a S ‘The Academy Pe at igwet ‘the affiliated societies Fills appear on = page if one ee eleventh and twenty day of each month. | : sais OFFICERS or THE ae 8 Bue es oF = oa ; ie oe and Geodetic Survey. =e ae jee : 3 2 ae Phils aoe Soni. sessnsseeesessesssssseeecsttnens a ScreNTrIFIC Notes AND , NEWE.«. Ra ete: FEBRUARY 19,1931 ~ No. 4 oe ‘c o; 4 2 OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS _C. Wytur Cooxr CHARLES DRECHSLER Hues L. Dryrpen U. 8. GHOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. PETERS Haroup MorRIson PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GOLDMAN G. W. Strosr BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GBOLOGICAL SOCIETY Agnes CHASE J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Roger C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr, Roya anp Guitrorp AVEs, BaLTIMORE, MARYLAND t Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for ‘mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. ; “This J OURNAL, abe oftei (1) short original ‘papers, proceedings and programs of events connected with - monthly, on the fourt ( it appears on the nineteenth or _ publication is an essential feature t entieth of dea m« ena or . \ Mansonaee wey be sent to any m Nenber 6 ed ee clearly typewritten and in suitab : form rit editors cannot undertake to do more than correc should appear only as footnotes and should | the work of both the editors and printers it is _ serially and submitted on a separate m: ee liustrations i in limited amount ave zinc etchings being preferable. — ‘ ”. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publ. ~ unless requested. iti is urged that _ will exercise due care in seeing that co] ee: . _ Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without | ae - bearing, the name of the author and title of the : _ date of issue, and additional reprints, will be fu ance with the genic: Fohognie A ane | o ne 8 cy A Tawlpek for tie ee ce fhe others name e and ad ress printed i hie ay Seg per may ‘be ae at the following prices. First 100, 0; addi Aa a ‘As an author wt not ordinarily see proof, his. request. for extra should invariably be attached to the first Bee a = nee The rate of Subscription per volume LS aes oats ee tee: Semi-nionthly numbers 36 i. Gea a se - Monthly numbers (July, ‘August, and September, Nos. 1B 14 _ Remittances”should be made payable to ‘Washington Renda : | addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Surve Was _Eaxchanges.—The J OURNAL does not exchange with other publi sh oe NG issing Numbers wil be replaced without charge provided that. claim i 3 thirty days after date of the following issue. Aes Volume I, habeas, from June 19, 1911 to ‘Dsodutbee 19, 1911, syill ee nk for $3. Be . are given to ae of scientific eiiseshs in affiliated with the me. ? JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21 Frepruary 19, 1931 No. 4 BOTANY.—A new spiral-orchid from the southern states... Epaar T. Wuerry, University of Pennsylvania. While studying the soil-reaction relations of native plants in the south, I have repeatedly observed in boggy pinelands a spiral-orchid (ladies-tresses) not corresponding to any species included in Small’s Flora.2 It is closely related to the Slender Spiral-orchid [Jbidium gracile (Bigel House)], and search for morphological differences be- tween them has not been particularly successful. They are, however, more or less distinct in flower color, sepal length, habitat, range, and blooming period, and show no evident intergradation. The southern plant is accordingly here described as a new species. Lateral sepals little exceeding the bend in the green-centered lip; growing in moderately acid grassy fields, S. C. to Tex. and northward to N. S. and lai lOOMING IM. SMIMMENs 2.6... wk ce ee ne Ibidium gracile Lateral sepals decidedly exceeding the bend in the yellow-centered lip; grow- ing in strongly acid moist pine-lands, Fla. to Tex. and northward to eoneral >. ©.; blooming m-spring: o>... 6... e eee. Ibidium floridanum Ibidium floridanum Wherry, sp. nov. FIG. 1. I. gracili similis, sed floribus vernalibus et labii medio intense flavo. Resembling J. gracile; roots several; principal leaves basal, appearing in autumn and withering the following summer, more or less petioled, the blades elliptic, 1 to 4 em. long and 5 to 20 mm. wide; stem 15 to 40 cm. tall, bearing 4 to 7 remote scale-like leaves; raceme 3 to 10 em. long, single ranked, often strongly spiralled; flowers usually opening in March or April (occasionally as early as mid-December or as late as mid-May); color creamy white with the middle of the lip deep yellow [in this respect resembling I. plantagineum (Raf.) House]; lateral sepals about 5 mm. long, often projecting rather markedly beyond the bend in the lip; callosities stubby, 1 mm. long. 1 Contribution from the Botanical Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania. Received November 26, 1930. ? Flora of the Southeastern United States. 319. 1903. 49 50 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 4 Type in U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,466,427, collected by Edgar T. Wherry April 14, 1930, near Loretto, Duval County, Florida. Named from the fact that it is widespread and abundant in this state, specimens having been seen from the following counties: Broward, Duval, Flagler, Gadsden, Lye AG Jackson, Lake, Lee, Marion, Orange, Pinellas, St. Johns, and alton. Noteworthy specimens are as follows: FLORIDA: Tampa Bay, Burrows, 1834; the earliest known collection (New York Botanical Garden) Fig. 1. [bidium floridanum Type locality. Natural size. Fort Myers, Standley, December 14, 1919; an unusually early blooming date (United States National Herbarium) Fort Lauderdale to Miami, Small & Carter, February, 1911; the southern- most known station (N. Y. B. G.) GEORGIA: Milledgeville, Boykin, 1836 (N. Y. B. G.). Wrightsboro, Chapman (N. Y. B. G.) SOUTH CAROLINA: Anderson, Davis, April 9, 1919; the northernmost known station (U. 8S. N. H.) ALABAMA: Mobile, Mohr, May, 1868 (U.S. N. H.) Mississippi: Koshtaw, Tracy, May 20, 1898. (N. Y. B.G.) LOUISIANA: Alexandria, Hale, April. (N. Y. B. G.) Texas: Houston, Hail, April 1, 1872; the westernmost known station (N. Y. B. G.) FEB. 19, 1931 KELLUM: NAMES OF THREE FOSSILS 51 The southernmost occurrences of I. gracile represented among specimens seen are: SOUTH CAROLINA: Aiken, Ravenel, September, 1869 (U.S. N. H.) ALABAMA: Auburn, Pollard & Mazon, July 9-11, 1900 (U. 8. N. H.) ARKANSAS: Texarkana, Heller, August, 1898 (N. Y. B. G.) The ranges of the two species thus barely overlap. PALEONTOLOGY.—Revision of the names of three fossils from the Castle Hayne and Trent marls in North Carolina! L. B. KELLUM, University of Michigan. (Communicated by C. WYTHE COOKE.) In Professional Paper 143 of the United States Geological Survey, 1926, the writer described a number of new species of invertebrate fossils from the Castle Hayne and Trent marls of North Carolina. His attention has since been called to the preoccupation of two of the specific names used in that paper, and to an earlier description of a species which he described and named as new. The names incorrectly used in Professional Paper 143 are Cassidulus berry: Kellum, applied to an echinoid from the Castle Hayne marl, Terebratula crassa Kellum, for a brachiopod from the Trent marl, and Macrocallista minuscula Kellum, applied to a mollusk from the Trent marl. New specific names are therefore proposed for the first two of these fossils and an earlier name replaces the third. Cassidulus (Pygorhynchus) sabistonensis Kellum, nom. nov. New name for C. berryi Kellum, 1926, described and figured in U. 8. G.S. Prof. Paper 143: 15, pl. 1, f. 4-7. The specific name berry was used by M. W. TwitcHeEtu in 1915 for a Cassidulus occurring in the Waccamaw mar! at Neills Eddy Landing, Cape Fear River, N. C. This was published in U. S. G. S. Monograph 54 on The Mesozoic and Cenozoic Echinodermata of the United States. As the name is therefore preoccupied in this genus, I propose the specific name sabistonensis for the form collected two miles north of Jacksonville, Onslow County, N. C. on the farm of E. W. SaBISsTON. Terebratula posteriora Kellum, nom. nov. New name for 7. crassa Kellum 1926. The specific name crassa is pre- occupied in this genus, having been used by D’Arcutac in 1846. The writer’s attention was called to this fact by WitL1am Heauny DALL in a letter dated October 20, 1926. Dr. Dau says: ‘““Now there is an earlier Terebratula crassa of D’Archiac 1846; see Soc. Geol. France mém. 2me ser. 2, p. 318, pl. 18, figs. 8a-d, 9—according to Carus and ENGLEMANN.”’ As this new species from North Carolina has been found at only one local- ity and all specimens collected are broken along the anterior margin, the new name posteriora is indicative of the part of the shell usually preserved. Callista (Callista) nuesensis (Harris) Synonym: Macrocallista minuscula Kellum 1926. This species was de- scribed and figured by G. D. Harris in 1919 in the Bulletin of American 1 Received December 17, 1930. 52 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 4 Paleontology vol. 6, No. 31, p. 186, pl. 48, figs. 4-7, 10, as Meretrix neusensis In February 1927, KATHERINE VAN WINKLE PALMER in a monographic study of the Veneridae of Eastern America, Vol. 1, No. 5, assigned this species to the genus Callista. ‘The specimens figured by these authors are casts of the interior and exterior, except for one pseudomorph. ‘The valve figured by the writer in Prof. Paper 143, pl. 10, figs. 1-2, is an almost perfectly preserved shell. . PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES THE ACADEMY 236TH MEETING The 236th meeting of the AcapEmy was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club on Thursday, December 18, 1930. About ninety persons were present. President Bowie called the meeting to order at 8:15 and introduced the speaker of the evening, Prof. A. M. Banta of Brown University and Re- search Associate of the Carnegie Institution. Program: A. M. Banta: What the crustacean tells us about evolution.— Studies in parthenogenetic inheritance in Cladocera have revealed the occur- ence of certain mutations—some morphological, others physiological in their effects. By means of selection some of these changes have been progressively increased or decreased in accord with the direction sought in selection. Since selection and return selection have been successful in whichever direction attempted, it appears that further genetic changes (new mutations) are occurring. Such derivation of two different and relatively stable types from a single ancestor seems to represent evolution in its simplest form and it is believed that these studies may throw some light upon one of the methods of evolution. As one of the results of the study of some of the mutant characters in Daphnia longispina in sexual reproduction it was found that the characters studied were inherited, as anticipated, in typical mendelian fashion. An unexpected result of the studies in sexual reproduction was the finding of evidence that many physiological mutations occur during parthenogenesis. Further studies on this point have shown that after a long and uninterrupted succession of parthenogenetic generations, numerous lethal, sublethal and other physiological recessive mutations (not present or present in very limited numbers in the early parthenogenetic generations) have accumulated during the long period of parthenogenesis. ‘This was demonstrated by (1) inbreed- ing among the members of a parthenogenetic pure line or clone early in its parthenogenetic history and (2) again after the lapse of a large number of parthenogenetic generations. Few of these recessive lethal and other phy- siological characters manifest themselves in the early inbreeding; many mani- fest their presence in the later inbreeding experiments. One character, ‘‘thermal,’’ which appeared in the inbreeding of a clone long parthenogenetic was of more than usual interest. It is a recessive which presumably occurred as a mutation during parthenogenesis but in simplex or hetorozygous condition and manifested itself only when it became duplex or homozygous in one of the sexually produced offspring derived from inbreeding the clone involved. Individuals of this derived thermal clone were more resistant to high temperatures, less resistant to lower temperatures, had a FEB. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 53 higher optimum temperature and in other ways manifested their thermal character as contrasted with individuals of other related but non-thermal clones. Such an origin of thermalness offers the possibility of explanation of the origin of thermal races in nature by mutation rather than by a long period of acclimatization as we have been wont to assume. (Author’s abstract.) 237TH MEETING The 237th meeting of the AcapEmy, being the 33rd annual meeting, was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club at 8:15, on Thursday, Janu- ary 15, 1931, with 125 persons present. | Vice-President J. M. Coopmr called the AcapEmy to order at 8:15 and introduced the retiring President, WILLIAM Bow1z, who addressed the AcapEMy upon, Shaping the earth. At the close of the address the Vice-President announced the annual business meeting and declared a recess, with the request that members of the AcapEMy remain. Then President Bowie called the meeting to order. The minutes of the 32nd annual meeting were read by the Recording Secretary and approved. The report of the Corresponding Secretary, L. B. TUCKERMAN, recorded an addition of 31 new members during the year 1930, and the election of Dr. Frank WiGGLEsSworTH Cuark, Dr. Wituiam H. Houmes and Dr. Letanp O. Howarp as honorary members. The members of the AcapEmy stood for a moment in respectful memory of the following members who died during the year: E. C. Cuincotrr Louis MAcCKALL ASAPH HALL WILuiAM A. ORTON OLIVER P. Hay DANIEL W. SHEA FRANK J. Katz The membership was summarized for the year as 18 honorary members, 3 patrons, 1 life member and 560 members. Total membership 582, of whom 381 reside in or near the District of Columbia. The report of the Corresponding Secretary was approved. The report of the Recording Secretary showed that 8 meetings had been held, of which one was a joint meeting with the Geological Society. Seven of the meetings were devoted to the series of lectures upon Origin and evolu- tion. ‘The names of the speakers and titles were given. The minutes of these meetings and abstracts of the addresses given had been prepared for publication in the Journal. The report of the Recording Secretary was ordered accepted. The Treasurer, H. G. Avrers, reported in full upon the investments, receipts and expenditures of the Acapemy. ‘The summary showed receipts during the year, $7,805.34. Bank balance January 1, 1930, $2,798.70. Total to be accounted for, $10,604.04. Disbursements, $9,584.35. Bank balance, December 31, 1930, $1,019.47. FINANCIAL STATEMENT ASSETS | LIABILITIES CHS 9 ee ames ce, ek Me $1,019.47 Dwesiprepaidhawne ke as. $20.00 Imvestments.... 2.5.55. 21,133.87 Subscriptions prepaid..... 294 .70 Accounts receivable....... 50.00 Accounts Payable (Esti- Duestunpaid (2l)/2. 220. 105.00 TAGE) Sees eee! A 350.00 $22 308.34 Estimated net worth...... 21,643.64 $22, 308 . 34 54 JOURNAL OF THE “WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 4 The report of the Auditors was received and both reports were declared approved. Professor E. W. Woouarp, Senior Editor, reported for the JourNAL of the Acapremy that volume 20 consists of 520 pages, including 85 half-tones and 47 line-cuts. It contains 56 original papers occupying 418.6 pages and representing 14 different branches of science; the proceedings of the AcADEMY and affiliated societies occupy 74.4 pages; notes and news, and obituaries occupy 19 pages. The total cost of producing and distributing the Journal was $3531.52. The report of the Editor was approved. An informal report of the Meetings Committee was given by Dr. W. J. HUMPHREYS. L. VY. Jupson, Chairman of the Board of Tellers, announced the election of the following officers for 1931: N. A. Coss, President Cyrus ADLER and W. D. COOLIDGE, Nonpesilent Vice-Presidents Pau. E. Hows, Corresponding Secretary CHARLES THoM, Recording Secretary H. G. Avers, Treasurer. L. B. Tuckerman and N. M. Jupp, Managers for the term of three years ending January, 1934. | The Corresponding Secretary then read the nominations for Vice-Presi- dents of the AcapEmy as received from the affiliated societies, and the Re- cording Secretary was authorized to cast one ballot for the AcapEmy, electing the following members as Vice-Presidents: Anthropological, Dr. Joun M. CooPEr Archaeological, Dr. WALTER HouGH Bacteriological, Dr. L. A. Rocurs Biological, Dr. ALEXANDER WETMORE Botanical, Dr. H. B. HuMpHREY Chemical, Dr. R. E. Gipson Electrical Engineers, Dr. G. W. VINAL Engineers, Mr. W. E. PARKER Entomological, Dr. Harotp Morrison Foresters, Dr. F. C. CRAIGHEAD Geographic, Dr. F. V. CoviLuE Geological, Dr. G. R. MANSFIELD Helminthological, Dr. Paut BarTscH Historical, Mr. ALLEN C, CLARK Mechanical Engineers, Mr. H. L. WHITTEMORE Medical, Dr. Hpnry C. MacaTEE Military Engineers, Colonel C. H. BirpsEYE Philosophical, Dr. H. L. Curtis At the close of the business meeting, President Bow1E appointed Past- President W. J. HumMpHREY to escort President-elect N. A. Cons to the Chair. The new President spoke briefly, and there being no further business, de-’ clared an adjournment at 10:25. CHARLES THom, Recording Secretary. PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 1007TH MEETING The 1007th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, May 10, 1930, President LAMBERT presiding. FEB. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 55 Program: G. H. KnuLtecan: Measurement of the elastic hysteresis by means of tuning forks—The damping of the vibrations of a tuning fork when freely suspended is due mainly to elastic hysteresis, provided that the material of which the fork is made has negligible elastic afterworking. The damping, therefore, can be predicted from pure statical results provided that the stati- cal flexure of the forks differs very little from that realized during the free vibrations. Statical and dynamical data obtained for a U-shaped fork of Armco-iron illustrate this point. This investigation makes it possible to measure elastic hysteresis by means of a freely vibrating fork instead of the tedious, time-consuming and less sensitive statical method. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. TucKERMAN, Brown, and HawKESWORTH. L. V. Jupson: New instruments and methods in length measurements of high precision.—An extensive program of intercomparisons and calibrations of grad- uated meter and decimeter bars has been carried out at the Bureau of Standards during the past three years using the new high-precision longitudinal com- parator made by the Société Genevoise d’Instruments de Physique. The author described the comparator and discussed the measurements made with this instrument. He pointed out that in the case of standards with good sur- faces and lines, the residuals generally average less than 0.05 micron, and that the probable errors of the computed values for the differences in length of two standards or for the relative lengths of the subintervals of a standard are rather consistently of the order of 0.02 or 0.03 micron. The manner by which the corrections to intervals as short as 0.1 mm. are determined using as the basis the U. S. national prototype meter was briefly outlined. Allusion was made to computations, still in progress, to determine the reliability of the several possible methods of obtaining the corrections to the subintervals of a graduated scale. It was pointed out that the measurement of angles is a natural extension of measurements of length as the same general fundamental principles govern and somewhat similar equipment is used. With the Bureau’s one-meter circular dividing engine several circles have been graduated and one 9-inch circle has been tested in some detail using the circle-testing equipment of the Bureau. With this latter instrument consistent and repeated settings and calibrations are possible to 1 second or better, and in the case of the circle just referred to, no errors in the graduation of the circle were found in excess of 2 seconds. It was concluded that these two instruments, both made by the same Swiss firm as the length comparator, are, like that comparator, in- struments of high precision. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. Hryt, Curtis, BROMBACHER, and FERNER. 1008TH MEETING The 1008th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, May 24, 1930, President LAMBERT presiding. Program: Paut R. Hey: The place of reason in nature—Most thinking persons, especially scientific men, hold reason in the highest esteem. There are, however, several schools of thought that regard it differently. These are the philosophy of pessimism, one branch of theology, the pragmatic philosophy of Peirce and William James, and the irrational philosophy of Bergson. It was pointed out that while reason is undoubtedly equal to all quantita- tive demands, there may be criticisms of a qualitative nature made against it. (Author’s abstract.) 56 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 4 1009TH MEETING The 1009th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, October 11, 1930, President LAMBERT presiding. Program: M. F. Peters: An investigation of the effectiveness and reliability of electric sparks in automotive cgnition.—The effectiveness of ignition sparks was determined by measuring the volume (or mass) of hydrogen and of oxy- gen which combines at low pressures. The sparks were generated by a magneto and an ignition spark coil. It was found that with constant energy the amount of reaction increases as the capacitance component of the spark increases. The use of a series spark gap may decrease or increase the amount of reaction, the effect depending upon the amount and the distribution of capacitance in the circuit. So far as the work has progressed, it has been found that sparks reported by other investigators as being most efficient for igniting lean mixtures cause the largest amount of reaction. Differences between the amount of reaction with a magneto spark and an ignition spark coil were noted. The method appears to offer a means of determining the most efficient spark generator for internal combustion engines as well as determining a relation between the character of spark, energy and effective- ness in igniting inflammable mixtures. Further details of this investigation are given in a report which is to be issued as National Advisory Committee for Aeronautics Technical Report No. 369. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. HuLBURT, WHITE, and SILSBHE. W. G. BRoMBACHER. Temperature coefficient of the modulus of rigidity of instrument-diaphragm and spring materials.—In cooperation with the National Advisory Committee, the Bureau of Standards is determining experimen- tally the temperature coefficient of the elastic moduli of commonly used spring and diaphragm materials in the temperature range —50° to +50° Centigrade. Such data are of particular interest in determining the effect of temperature on the performance of air-craft instruments. The temperature coefficient m is defined by the relation a La Gy Tae da in which G and G, are the moduli of rigidity at temperatures T°C. and 0°C. The description of the apparatus and the methods of procedure were presented for determining this coefficient by means of the torsion pendulum. Results were given for monel metal, brass, phosphor bronze, coin silver, nickel silver, oil-tempered steel, piano wire, chromium-vanadium steel, chromium-molybdenum steel and a stainless steel and also the effect of heat treatment on the coefficient for a number of the materials. A full description of the work is given in National Advisory Committee for Aeronautics Technical Report No. 358. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. CANFIELD, HUMPHREYS, WHITE, and MEHL. 1010TH MEETING The 1010th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, October 25, 1930, PrEsIDENT LAMBERT presiding. Program: C. L. GARNER: An outline of the expanded program of geodetic work of the Coast and Geodetic Survey—To explain the future program for geodetic work, it is necessary to review some of the events leading up to the present. In 1925, Congress passed the Temple Act, which authorized the FEB. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 57 completion of the topographic map of the United States in a period of twenty years. This Act apparently implied that appropriations would be made from year to year, as required to carry on the work. Topographic maps are a result of cooperative surveys of the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Geological Survey, the former Bureau performing that part of the work known as control surveys, consisting principally of first-order triangulation and leveling. Upto this fiscal year, there was no increase in the funds annually made available for the Coast and Geodetic Survey, and the Bureau did not take any part in the program, other than to extend such control surveys as its limited funds per- mitted. The appropriations for the current year carried an increase of some $240,000 for the execution of control surveys as the Coast Survey’s initial part of the program for completing the topographic map of the United States. For the most part these control surveys will consist of first-order triangulation and leveling, the triangulation being the means of determining the latitudes and longitudes of marked stations, and the azimuths and distances between them, while the leveling furnishes the elevations of bench marks. Approximately 27,000 miles of triangulation, measured along the axes of the various schemes, have been completed, and the work under the new pro- gram is to divide the open areas by a sufficient number of arcs so that few places in the country will be more than twenty-five miles from a triangulation station. Schemes of first-order triangulation will generally be about one hundred miles apart, while second-order schemes will be run midway between the first-order arcs, thus placing the ares or bands of triangulation at intervals of about fifty miles. Other arcs of triangulation, at right angles to those described, will be run at intervals of about one hundred miles for the purpose of coordinating the entire scheme in one rigid framework, for purposes of adjustment. This additional work will require about forty thousand miles of triangulation, as measured along the line of progress, consisting of about equal amounts of first- and second-order work. During the earlier work, arcs of triangulation were extended mostly over mountainous or rolling country where long lines could be used to extend con- trol as rapidiy as possible with the cash outlays available. The difficulty of transporting the parties and equipment into isolated sections also contributed toward the same end. As a result long lines over 100 miles in length were very ordinary, while some were in excess of 170 miles. After the Atlantic and Pacific Coasts were connected and there were other ares sufficient for adjustment purposes, long lines were no longer important. Further than this, with the extension of triangulation into the more settled and developed regions, which are also on comparatively level ground, it is impossible because of the curvature of the earth, and in many places because of tall trees, to secure long lines even though it were desired. Considering the fact that schemes with short lines do not decrease the accuracy of triangulation when extended across country, and to the further fact that short lines have the effect of placing a larger number of stations in any unit area than where long lines are used, the value of the stations to local engineers or surveyors is in- creased correspondingly. It is difficult and expensive for a local engineer to connect to a triangulation station which is a considerable distance from any particular project he has in mind, while it is comparatively simple and inex- pensive to make connections to stations which are nearby. For that reason, the lengths of future lines of first and second order triangulation will be held to an average of between 10 and 12 miles, with few lines exceeding 15 miles in length except in mountainous regions where due to topography and 58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 4 transportation it may be impracticable to hold to this lower limit. In such cases it may be necessary to allow a few lines with lengths of about 25 miles. Recent accomplishments of first-order triangulation are the completion of five moderately short arcs during the summer of 1930, as follows: From La Crosse to Fond du Lac, Wis., from Columbus, Nebr., to Joliet, Ill., and three arcs radiating east, north and west from Cairo, IIl., to Nashville, Tenn., to the 39th-parallel triangulation in the vicinity of Belleville, Ill., and to Poplar Bluff, Mo., respectively. Other arcs to be started in the near future and due to be completed by June 30, 1931, are from Fort Smith, Ark., south to Port Arthur, Tex., from Shreveport, Tee. to Forest, Miss., and from Mobile, Ala., closely ‘paralleling the Gulf Coast, to Corpus Christi, Tex. All of this work is particularly important because of the need for an adjustment of the triangu- lation network of the United States east of the 98th meridian. An adjust- ment of the triangulation net of the United States west of the 98th meridian was made in 1927. ‘These two adjustments, when completed, will be based on a large network strong and securely tied together at frequent intervals, and will cover the entire country with the most reliable positions obtainable. These will be held final, and on all future arcs of triangulation it will merely be necessary to adjust them between the junction points with ares of the above framework. It should be said that in first-order triangulation average triangle closures of 1 second or less are required, while the maximum allowable closure for a single triangle is 3 seconds. On second-order work the average closure is required to be 3.0 seconds or less, while the maximum closure of a single triangle should not exceed 8.0 seconds. ‘The experience of over one hundred years of observations shows clearly that where maximum single triangle closures are not allowed to exceed 3 seconds, the average closure for a season will very seldom exceed 1.0 seconds, and consequently this criteria is used in classifying the order of triangulation. In the extension of first-order levels, the same principle holds regarding distribution of marks as with the triangulation stations, that is, for few places in the country to be further than 25 miles from a bench mark. Lines will be run largely along the important lines of communication, such as railroads and highways, in areas which have not been given attention before. Bench marks and triangulation stations are of most value when they are readily accessible at or near the highways, and while it is not practicable to establish all triangulation stations along a railroad or highway, it is entirely possible to so locate the bench marks, and this has been the custom throughout the history of leveling. Incidentally it may be mentioned that formerly the leveling of the country was extended almost wholly along the railroads. This was because of the easy grades encountered and the resultant increased prog- ress and correspondingly reduced cost of the work. As leveling is extended into the intermediate regions, however, it is seen that railroads will, in the majority of cases, not be available, and it will be necessary to extend the lines along highways or even totally unimproved roads.. Work of this character is slow and expensive as the grades are much steeper than along railroads, and this requires many more instrument stations and slows up the work. At the same time, the marks are perhaps of more use to the average citizen than in other areas, as in many cases the lines will be along avenues of development where engineering or surveying projects are in operation and where the eleva- tions of the marks will be of immediate use. Approximately 60,000 miles of first and second order leveling will be re- quired to complete the program. First-order lines will be run at intervals of FEB. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 09 about 100 miles, while such intervals will each be divided by one line of second- order levels. It is believed that this program will be complete in about twelve years. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. Lirrrock, Priest, Bowirn, RAPPLEYE, CANFIELD, HumpuHreys and MArMER. F. S. Borpren: Recent developments in the hydrographic work of the Coast and Geodetic Survey with special reference to the survey of Georges Bank. Of the four major classes of transportation, namely: rail, water, highway and air, it can be said that the first mentioned is the only one which has reached real standardization. The highway is making rapid strides in that direction but it will probably be many years before water transportation reaches the high degree of standardization the railroad now enjoys. It will be still longer in the case of the newest means of travel, that by air. The question may well arise as to why water transportation, one of the. earliest methods known to man, has not yet reached the degree of standard- ization of the railroad and that which we can foresee for the highway. One of the reasons would seem to be that the ocean liner has no well defined path to follow along the shortest practicable route such as has the express train or the automobile. Instead, on each of its journeys a new path must be deter- mined and, under favorable conditions, this is seldom the shortest practic- able route and quite frequently not the safest. If an automobilist passes a cross-road onto which he should have turned off, he is only slightly incon- venienced, but should the navigator at some critical point along his route, determine and steer an erroneous course, the result would undoubtedly be disaster with possible loss of life. The principal aid to the navigator in keeping his vessel on the track which he desires to follow and on one which will avoid the numerous dangers that beset his path, is his chart. The extent to which his chart serves this purpose depends on the detail and accuracy of the information shown thereon and, in this respect, much is demanded by the present-day scientifically equipped navigator. In order to bring our charts into keeping with the resources of modern science, it has been necessary to devise new and improved methods of survey- ing those extensive areas which lie out of sight of land but still fall on the shelves which border our coasts. On the Pacific Coast these methods have been well standardized and rapid progress is now being made toward the completion of a new series of standard charts. On the Atlantic Coast the standardization of methods has been somewhat slower, but this process is now reaching the final stage and we can foresee within a few years the same rapid progress that is being made on the Pacific Coast. I hope to be able with the aid of a few slides to show the reason for the demand for more adequate surveys, and the steps we are taking to meet this demand, some of the difficulties encountered, and finally an outline of the methods actually employed on one of our most recent projects. Slide No. 1 The old and the new—a month or more to cross the Atlantic as compared with a few days—wooden sailing vessels drawing 15 feet as compared with steam vessels of steel drawing 40 feet. Aids to navigation, very limited, as compared with those of the modern liner having precise sextants, gyro com- passes, electric logs, echo soundings, radio bearings and powerful lighthouses. And, in order to obtain the maximum usefulness and the highest degree of security from these present-day resources, the liner must have a modern chart. 60 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 4 Slide No. 2 Echo Sounding—Proceeding at full speed, the modern ocean liner has a continuous record of the depths over which it is passing. If the chart shows the configuration of the bottom accurately and in sufficient detail, these records can be used in fixing the position of the ship. On the other hand, if the chart does not portray a true contour map of the ocean bottom, the position of the ship becomes uncertain. This uncertainty means greater precautions, slower voyages, delayed arrivals and increased operating ex- penses. This new device has had considerable to do with the increased demand not only for more accurate and more detailed surveys but also for the extension farther seaward of such surveys. Slide No. 3 _ QOne type of echo sounding device—the Fathometer—and the one used principally on the surveying vessels of the U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey. This slide shows the recording part of the instrument. Into it comes the impulse of the echo from the ocean bottom transmitted from an oscillator on the vessel. The impulse is received by a hydrophone in the bottom of the vessel and is amplified sufficiently to cause a red flash on the revolving dial, measuring the elapsed time of sound travel to and from the ocean floor, but calibrated to read the depth directly in fathoms. The dial of this particular instrument revolves at a speed of 246 revolutions per minute corresponding to a velocity of sound of 820 fathoms (4920 feet). Slide No. 4 The velocity of sound in salt water varies over an extreme range of from about 790 fathoms to about 870 fathoms per second depending on the tem- perature, salinity and pressure of the water through which the sound travels. Roughly, it may be stated that the velocity increases 0.2 of one per cent for every increase of 1° in the temperature, is augmented 0.11 per cent for every 100 meter depth and increases 0.1 per cent for every 1 per cent increase in the salinity. On any surveying project, sufficient measurements are made of the salinity and temperature at various depths to correct the echo soundings. Slide No. 5 Comparison between the frequency and speed of echo and hand-lead soundings. | Slide No. 6 Installation on the Lydonia—The Fathometer there provides both the navi- gator and the hydrographer with an excellent method of obtaining depth, but the concern of the hydrographer does not stop here. For every practical purpose, a charted sounding must be considered as having three dimensions. A measurement of depth is of value not simply in proportion to the accuracy with which it was made, but equally in proportion to the accuracy with which we locate the point on the ocean’s surface from which it was made. A group of accurate soundings plotted on the chart in their correct positions relative to each other will give an accurate indication of a submarine valley or any other characteristic feature suitable for use by the navigator in fixing his position. The same soundings incorrectly placed with reference to one another may give a seriously erroneous picture. Let us consider that the depth determination furnishes us with the first dimension of our sounding and FEB. 19, 1931 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 61 turn to the second and third dimensions, it being assumed that we are out of sight of land and can not depend on shore objects to fix the sounding vessel’s position. Slide No. 7 Again we make use of the transmission of sound through water, in this ease horizontally. Here we have a depth bomb of TNT fired from astern of the vessel. The sound travels to a hydrophone planted near the shore, the position of which is accurately known. Here the impulse is picked up and amplified and automatically and instantaneously passes through the shore station back to the vessel by radio. The time interval, as recorded on the tape of the sounding vessel’s chronograph, between the reception of the bomb and _ the returning signal from the shore station plus the time it has taken the sound to travel from the bomb to the ship’s hydrophone gives a measure of the distance between the bomb and the shore station hydrophone—and we have our second dimension of the sounding taken at the time the bomb was dropped. Slide No. 8 And adding a second shore station to our equipment, we, in the same way, obtain the third dimension of our sounding. Slide No. 9 Shore Station on the Pacific Coasi—Unfortunately we can not boast of any such shore stations on the Atlantic Coast or that we have thus far been able to employ the exact methods of obtaining the second and third dimension that work so successfully on the Pacific Coast and in Alaska. However, we learned very definitely during the past summer that the method can be used, at least off the New England Coast, provided floating stations are substituted for the shore stations and are anchored in sufficient depths of water. The slides from now on, in so far as the hydrophone station is con- ene, pertain to a floating station rather than to a shore station as shown ere. Slides Nos. 10-27 Georges Bank Project—Showing methods employed in the survey of Georges Bank and a slide of the submarine valley found along its southeastern edge. The valley is 2 miles wide and cuts back into the shelf for a distance of 8 miles. It makes an ideal submarine landmark for westbound transatlantic steamers approaching Georges Bank. (Author’s abstract.) ‘4 Discussed by Messrs. Hick, CANFIELD, Curtis, DorsEy, Hazarp, and ERAN. Oscar 8. Apams, Recording Secretary SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS Dr. Davin Wuits, senior geologist of the Geological Survey and home secretary of the National Academy of Sciences, was awarded the Penrose Medal of the Society of Economic Geologists at the Toronto meeting in December, 1930. This medal is given not oftener than once every three years “in recognition of unusually original work in the earth sciences.” 62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 4 Miss Frances Densmore, Bureau of Ethnology, who has been in Wash- ington for a few weeks, has left for Florida to study the music and songs of the Seminole Indians. Dr. Norman L. Bowen of the Geophysical Laboratory has been awarded the Bigsby medal of the Geological Society (London) in recognition of the value of his study of the physical chemistry of igneous rocks. The last recipient of the medal in the United States was the late Coartes D. WaucoTtT who was awarded it in 1895. CORRECTIONS TO 1930 “RED BOOK” The following corrections to the list of AcapEMy members are arranged, so that if desired they may be cut out and pasted in the Red Book. ASHLEY, George H., State Capitol, Harrisburg, Pa. A Gl BARTLETT, Edward P., Dupont Ammonia Corp., Wilmington, Del. A BROWN, Thomas B., 155 Scituate St., Arlington, Mass. AP CURTIS, Heber, D., Detroit Observatory, Ann Arbor, Mich. A HARPER, D. R., 3rd, 222 Gladstone Rd., Pittsburgh, Pa. A HRDLICKA, Ales, National Museum. 2900 Tilden St. A An M HUNNEWELL, F. A., Coast Guard. 14 W. Irving St., Ch. Ch., Md. AE JACOBY, Henry S., 3000 Tilden St. AE JARDINE, William M., Tower Bldg., 14th & K Sts. The Mayflower. A The following name appears twice: LOHR, L. R., 160 N. LaSalle St., Chicago, IIl. A In place of the first, substitute: LOEB, Leo, Wash. Univ. School of Medicine, St. Louis, Mo. A MICHELSON, Truman, Smithsonian Institution. 1710 Que St. A An PIENKOWSKY, Arthur T., Bureau of Standards. 2923 Tilden St. AE PINCHOT, Gifford, Milford, Pike County, Pa. ASBE SCHULTZ, Eugene S., Bureau of Plant Industry A SHAPOVALOV, M., University of California, Berkeley, Calif. A SMITH, Charles Meldrum, 424 Allison St. A SMITH, George Otis, Federal Power Commission. 2137 Bancroft Place. AE G Gl STEBINGER, Eugene, 710 Edificio Banco Boston, Buenos Aires, Argentina A Gl WHERRY, Edgar T., University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa. AC Gl [UNICATIONS Pc. oo a : 2en ~ ene =f] sae ‘ - a 5 oo. ees os ; ms pos bis er teu * _ AxwouNomm7s oF ‘Meenas The Geographic Society _ The Biological Society te Neer The ‘Helminthological ey Sees tru 25 The Geological Society o& nt | | _ The Medical Society — ron eS Saeee k eae s , Febru _ The Geographic Society ares | ay Gass 28 - The Philosophical Society ey March 3 __ ae _ The Botanical Society - The Society of Engineers siph Paee OA Be The Medical Society © # oh Ca ( Meee Saat pee og ‘of the 1 pr of the affiliated aocetion 5 will appear on this page a aaa the sek ar and twenty-fifth day ni each month. Bt Pat ate \ ABereke a Plant aur ea care E. Hows, Bureau of Animal Teauetiy i : witty Bureau of ee and Soils. —A new spiral-orchid iy oe : eneree ! ROE | ARCH 4, ee No. 5 OF THE — OF SCIENCES gee BOARD OF EDITORS CHARLES DRECHSLER Hues L. DrypEn BURBADU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ies ASSOCIATE EDITORS __ W. J. Peers Haroip Morrison sss PHILOSOPHICAL SOCTETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GotpMAN G. W. Stosr _ BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Aanes CHASE J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Rocer C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY “EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THB - WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. RoyaL AND GUILFORD AVES, a _ Bautimore, MARYLAND te es tered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the ‘ez Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailin g at aspecial rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. ree - st S ee zine etchings being preferable e. . ournal of ‘ th Wa — ‘This J OURNAL, athe petal organ of the (1) short original } ‘papers, written or co: ‘e) proceedings and programs of meetings. of t 6 of events connected with the scientific life of Was) monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of it appears on the nineteenth only. Volum publication is an essential feature; @ Manuscr twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, - of the JourNAL for the following fourth « or ni Manuscripts may be sent to any member of - clearly typewritten and in suitable form for pri editors cannot undertake to do more than should appear only as footnotes and should _ the work of both the editors and printe: serially and submitted on 2 separate m Illustrations in limited amount will be Proof.—In tees to ane © Pe she ers ga ; Pee ahr eo. oe Re pet 100. S00), Re 150. 90 08 ea 250 = 1.65 oe Binvalopes for imadine Sopa eith: the ey 3 name eanal corner may be obtained at the following prices. : First 100, $4 te As an author avail: not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra co) should invariably be attached to the first Page. of a Se The rate of Subscription per volume 18. Sea hate fees Semii-monthhy swum bers, 40.22 ies ee ee Monthly numbers (July, August, ‘and ad, Ne os, 13 Remittances should be made payable to ‘Washington Academy of addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Exchanges.—The Journau does not exchange with other publi Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that el im sme thirty days after date of the following issue. Ps oa ; * Volume I, however, from J une 19, 1911 to Decdities 19, 4911, will hy sent for $8.00. Spee lrates en are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the wee is ; JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21 Marca 4, 1931 No. 5 BOTANY .—Plants new to Arizona. (An annotated list of species added to the recorded flora of the state or otherwise interesting).* By THOMAS H. Kearney, Bureau of Plant Industry. Arizona has a rich and remarkable flora. The great diversity of natural conditions produces a corresponding diversity of life forms and floral elements. There could scarcely be a greater contrast than that between the Sonoran flora of the hot deserts of the southwestern part of the state, only a few hundred feet above sea-level, where cacti and other xerophytic forms predominate, and the arctic-alpine flora of the summit of San Francisco Mountain, with an altitude of nearly 13,000 feet. The mean annual rainfall ranges from 3.5 inches at Yuma to 30 inches at Crown King in Yavapai County. Several floral provinces meet and overlap in Arizona. On the grass- covered plains of the eastern section, there are numerous species characteristic of the Great Plains region from Kansas to Texas. The Rocky Mountain flora is well represented on the higher mountains. The Great Basin region of Utah and Nevada shares many of its species with northern Arizona. Constituents of the flora of the Mohave Desert region are found in large number near the western edge of the state. In southwestern Arizona there are many species that occur elsewhere only along and near the Gulf of California. A large number of Mexican and Central American species, more or less tropical in their affinities, just cross the southern border of the state. There are even, in southeastern Arizona, a few species whose main center of distribution is the Atlantic and Mississippi Valley States. Finally, of course, many Old World species have become established as weeds. During the past five years, extensive collections of the flowering plants and ferns of Arizona have been made by members of the Bureau of Plant Industry, U.S. Department of Agriculture, whose headquarters *Received February 6, 1931. 63 64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 5 are the U. 8. Field Station at Sacaton, on the Gila River, some 45 miles southeast of Phoenix. This group includes George J. Harrison, Robert H. Peebles, Harold F. Loomis, Harold J. Fulton, Chalmers J. King, and the writer.. Frank A.Thackery, A. R. Leding, and M. French Gilman of the Bureau of Plant Industry and W. J. Osborn of the Forest Service, with headquarters at Flagstaff, also have contributed materially to the Sacaton collection. A list of the flowering plants and ferns of Arizona, with keys to the families, genera and species, is being compiled by Ivar Tidestrom of the Bureau of Plant Industry, with the collaboration of other botanists. The time therefore seems opportune to publish notes on plants collected by the Sacaton botanists, many of which, so far as the writer can ascertain, have not been recorded hitherto as occurring in Arizona. Our collections have added some 55 species and varieties to the known flora of the state, of which 18 were found only in the region lying between the Gila River and the Mexican frontier and between the Baboqtivari Mountains and the Colorado River. This is the country of the Papago Indians and includes much of the territory known to the early Spanish missionaries as ‘“Papaguerfa.”’ The addi- tions to the flora discovered in this region are chiefly species that occur in Lower California and the adjacent Colorado Desert of California or in Sonora and other parts of Mexico. The relative inaccessibility of much of this area and the rarity of sufficient precipitation to permit the growth of plants make it likely that other species not known to belong to the flora of Arizona and of the United States will be discovered there in the future. In our explorations of southwestern Arizona we have observed a tendency to the rapid eastward spread of species mainly characteristic of the region near the mouth of the Colorado River. Such are Aristzda californica, Sphaeralcea orcuttii, Asclepias erosa, and Palafoxia linearis. All of these plants have readily disseminated seeds. Since they have been noticed chiefly along the highway from Yuma to Phoenix, it may be conjectured that paved roads and automobile traffic have aided their dispersal. , The area centering in the Pinal Mountains, a few miles north of the Gila River, has yielded several additions to the recorded flora. The southeastern part of the state, between the Baboquivari Mountains and the New Mexican boundary, has been much explored by other botanists, but we have found there a good number of species not hith- erto recorded as belonging to the Arizona flora. The area north of the Gila River, between longitude 112° and the Colorado River, like the MARCH 4, 1931 KBARNEY: PLANTS NEW TO ARIZONA 65 southwestern corner of the state, is difficult of access and is charac- terized by very low and very sporadic precipitation. Exploration of this region on the rare occasions when conditions have been favorable to plant growth, is likely to reveal the presence of many species of southeastern California and southern Nevada that have not yet been collected in Arizona. Ten of the 99 species and varieties listed in this paper are not known to occur elsewhere than in Arizona. The principal distribution of the others, outside this state, may be summarized as follows: Pacific coast region (Washington to Lower California).............. 10 Salnernin deserts (Colorado, Mohave, ete.)...........6.20.00000. 6 Gulf of California region (Lower California, western Sonora)....... 14 Mexico (not confined to the preceding region) and southward..... oo Rio Grande region (western Texas, southern New Mexico and ad- ree erste) ites 4 Act, Vantaa | ak pattie ue tee Cen a & corde ise ig. 4 Pane ICWPOM yest eg ths lth Mids ake eae dais HABE ORs 4 enone mone Mansas, Texas, 660.) ii. 2. 6 4.8 Pac beeen Gils ok es 2 pelemuceana. Mississippi Valley States. . 2). ec. s!la. ote. oe a lenee 5 Oiorld-and indigenous in Arizona... ... 2.0. es fo ee ee 1 Siaavoriad (introduced Species)... 2... snk oko elec D8 oe che ie wees 9 Mrapiea) America (introduced species)... . 0.2... 0.622... de see 1 _ It will be noted that the distribution outside of Arizona, of nearly half of the species and varieties listed is in the Gulf of California region or elsewhere in Mexico and tropical America. ‘This does not signify a corresponding preponderance of these elements in the flora of Arizona, but merely that our explorations have been carried on largely in portions of the state where they are likely to be found in the greatest numbers. Fascinating problems in plant geography are encountered in studying the Arizona flora. One of these is the occurrence, well toward the center of the state and especially in the Pinal Mountain region, of species identical with or very closely related to constituents of the chaparral of the mountains and coast of California. Such are Dryop- teris arguta (Kaulf.) Watt, Grossularia quercetorum (Greene) Cov. & Britt., Cercocarpus douglasit Rydb., Rhus ovata Wats., Rhamnus cali- fornica Eschs. (represented by R. ursina Greene), Rhamnus crocea tlicifolia (Kellogg) Greene, Ceanothus integerrimus H. & A. (represented by C. mogollonicus Greene), and Lonicera interrupta Benth. None of these are found in the intervening deserts. Another remarkable case of interrupted range is afforded by a few species having their main center of distribution in the Atlantic States and the Mississippi Valley and occurring also in southern Arizona but apparently not in west- 66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 5 ern Texas and southern New Mexico. Examples are: Phytolacca americana L., Crotalaria sagittalis L., Clitoria mariana L., Isanthus brachiatus’ (L.) B. 8. P., and Galiuwm pilosum Ait. In the following list, species and varieties which, so far as the writer knows, have not been recorded in a previous publication as occurring in Arizona are indicated by a single asterisk. Double asterisks indi- cate that the plant is believed to be new to the recorded flora of the United States, also. Four of the species listed were described for the first time from our collections. None of these is known to occur outside of Arizona. ‘The assistance of authorities who have identified some of the plants, as mentioned in the footnotes, is acknowledged with gratitude. POLY PODIACEAE! ASPLENIUM PALMERI Maxon. Collected on the western side of the Babo- quivari Mts. in Pima Co. by Harrison in 1927. This is considerably farther west than the previously known station in Arizona, the Mule Mts. in Cochise Co., where it was collected by L. N. Goodding. This fern also occurs in the Organ Mts., New Mexico.? It is chiefly a Mexican species, of rare oc- currence in the United States. CETARACH DALHOUSIAE (Hook.) C. Chr. (Asplenium alternans Hook). Collected on the western side of the Baboquivari Mts. by M. French Gilman, thus extending the known range considerably to the west, the only previously recorded stations in Arizona, both in Cochise Co., being the Huachuca Mts. (J. H. Ferris) and the Mule Mts. (L. N. Goodding). This fern is not known to occur anywhere else in the western hemisphere, but is found in the Hima- layas and in Abyssinia. This remarkable distribution has been discussed by W. A. Poyser, J. H. Ferris, and W. N. Clute.’ CHEILANTHES LENDIGERA (Sav.) Sw. Collected by Peebles and Loomis in Cave Creek Canyon, Chiricahua Mts., Cochise Co. The only locality previously known for this fern in Arizona and in the United States is the Huachuca Mts., in Cochise Co., where it was collected by J. G. Lemmon and by M. E. Jones. The species is widely distributed in tropical America. CHEILANTHES VILLOSA Davenp. Collected in the Sierra Estrella, south of Phoenix, Maricopa Co., by Kearney, Harrison, Peebles, and Loomis in 1926. ‘This is considerably farther west than the stations previously known in Arizona, which are the Santa Catalina, Santa Rita, Huachuca, and Chiri- cahua Mts.4 Occurs also in New Mexico, western Texas, Chihuahua, and Coahuila. 1 Tdentified by W. R. Maxon, who supplied much of ithe information given in the notes on this family. 2 W.R. Maxon in Am. Fern Journ, 18: 105. 1921. 3 Fern Bull. 19: 33-42. 1911. See also W. R. Maxon in Am. Fern Journ. 3: 110. 1913. Similar distribution of another fern was noted by C. W. Hope (Bull. Torr. Club 26: 58-62. 1919), who considers Asplenium glenniei Baker, found in the Huachuca Mts., Arizona, and in Mexico, to be identical with A. exiguum Bedd., of India and southern China. 4See W. R. Maxon in Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash. $1: 142-4. 1918. MARCH 4, 1931 KEARNEY: PLANTS NEW TO ARIZONA 67 *DRYOPTERIS ARGUTA (Kaulf.) Watt. Collected by Harrison in Devils Canyon, near Superior, in Pinal Co., in 1926. Known previously to occur only from southern California to western Oregon.® PHANEROPHLEBIA AURICULATA Underw. Collected on the west side of the Baboquivari Mts., Pima Co., by A. R. Leding in 1925, and previously in the same mountains by Forrest Shreve. These stations are considerably farther west than any known hitherto for this fern in Arizona. WoopsIA PLUMMERAE Lemmon. Collected near Prescott, Yavapai Co., by Harrison in 1927, extending the known range considerably to the north- west. POACHAE TRIPSACUM LANCEOLATUM Rupr.® (7. lemmoni Vasey). Collected by Harrison and Kearney in the Mule Mts. near Bisbee, Cochise Co., and by Loomis near Patagonia, Santa Cruz Co. These are apparently the only collections of this grass in Arizona and in the United States, except that of Lemmon in the Huachuca Mts. (type of T. lemmonz). ‘The species is widely distributed in Mexico. , **PANICUM LEPIDULUM Hitche. & Chase.’ Collected by Kearney and Harrison near Nogales, Santa Cruz Co:., in 1927. Mrs. Chase informed the writer that ours was the first collection of this species in Arizona and in the United States. It was previously known only from Mexico (Chihuahua, Durango, and near Mexico City). **SCHISMUS BARBATUS (L.) Chase (S. marginatus Beauv.).’ Thoroughly naturalized and apparently spreading rapidly in Maricopa and Pinal counties; first collected by,Loomis and Peebles in 1926. This Old World grass had not previously been reported as occurring in the United States. CYPERACEAE *CYPERUS WRIGHTII Britton.’ Collected by Kearney and Harrison in the Huachuca Mts., Cochise Co., and by Kearney and Fulton in the Santa Rita Mts., Pima Co., apparently for the first time in Arizona. The range of the species, as previously known, is Texas, southern New Mexico, and Chihuahua. RAFFLESIACEAE PILOSTYLES THURBERI Gray. ‘This interesting little parasite on the stems of a leguminous plant, Parosela emoryi: (Gray) Heller, was found in 1930 by Harrison and Kearney and by Peebles and Loomis in considerable abundance between the north end of the Gila Mts. and the Gila River, Yuma County, beginning to flower about the first of April. The locality is probably very near the place where the plant was first discovered by Thurber in 1852. There seems to be no record of the occurrence of P. thurberz elsewhere east of the Colorado River, but J. B. Norton told the writer that he had found the plant in the Colorado Desert, Calif., in 1927. 5 For the characters distinguishing D. arguta from the related D. filiz-mas see W. R. Maxon in Am. Fern Journ. 11: 3, 4. 1921. 6 Identified by J. R. Swallen. 7 Identified by Agnes Chase. 8 Identified by A. 8. Hitchcock. ° Identified by N. L. Britton. 68 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 5 POLYGONACEAE *POLYGONUM CAMPORUM Meisn.!° Collected by Kearney, Harrison, and Peebles at a roadside in the Colorado River Valley below Yuma. In a letter to the writer, Dr. Small states that our plant ‘‘seems to be most closely related to Polygonum camporum, where I would place it, at least for the time being. It is true the akene is rather small, but we have never had enough material of P. camporum to properly understand the species.”” The range of the species, as previously known, is Nebraska to Louisiana and New Mexico, and in South America. Apparently it has not previously been collected in the United States west of El Paso, Texas. *PERSICARIA FUSIFORMIS Greene. Collected by Kearney at the edge of running water in Sabino Canyon, Santa Catalina Mts., Pima Co. This is apparently the first collection in Arizona, although the species was described from specimens collected on the Colorado River, in California. The Arizona specimens have less pointed akenes than the California specimens, but other- wise are similar. NYCTAGINACEAE *MIRABILIS JALAPA L. Collected by Kearney and Harrison.in Cave Creek Canyon, Chiricahua Mts., Cochise Co., in 1929, where the plants were growing wild although possibly as an escape from cultivation, this being the common four-o’clock of gardens. Apparently the first collection in Arizona, the pre- viously known range of the species in the wild being from southern Texas through Mexico to Central and South America. *BOERHAAVIA GRACILLIMA Heimerl. Collected in Baboquivari Canyon, Pima Co., by Loomis, and previously by M. E. Jones in the Huachuca Mts. The recorded range of the species is southwestern Texas and southern New Mexico to Oaxaca and Lower California. PHYTOLACCACEAE *PHYTOLACCA AMERICANA L. (P. decandra L.) Collected in shaded alluvial ground along the Sonoita near Patagonia, Santa Cruz Co. Although the plants grew wild, their progenitors may have been introduced by man, this species, the common pokeberry of the eastern states, not having previously been known to occur farther west than Texas. PORTULACACEAE *CALANDRINIA AMBIGUA (Wats.) Howell. (C. sesuvioides Gray). This species was collected by Peebles and Harrison in 1928 near Dome, Yuma County, and previously in Arizona, probably by J. J. Thornber, but ap- parently the plant has not been recorded as occurring outside the Colorado Desert, in California. SILENACEAE *SILENE ANGLICA L. (S. gallica L.). Collected by Peebles on hillsides along Salt River below the Roosevelt Dam in Maricopa Co. and previously, probably by J. J. Thornber, in the Santa Rita Mts., Pima Co. Although ex- tensively naturalized on the Pacific Coast, this European plant apparently has not been recorded as occurring in Arizona. 10 Identified by J. K. Small. MARCH 4, 1931 KEARNEY: PLANTS NEW TO ARIZONA 69 *SaPONARIA OFFICINALIS L. This Old World species, thoroughly natural- ized in many parts of the United States, is well established in the vicinity of Prescott, where a peculiar form with inflated calyx was collected by Fulton. BRASSICACEAE *LEPIDIUM DRABA L. Collected near Prescott by Loomis, presumably for the first time in Arizona. Introduced from Europe and naturalized in many parts of the United States. *SISYMBRIUM IRIO L. Abundantly naturalized near Sacaton and Casa Grande, Pinal Co., and in the Salt River Valley, Maricopa Co. Introduced from Europe. *LYROCARPA COULTERI Hook. & Harv. Found by us at several stations between Maricopa and Yuma, growing among bushes in partial shade. There are specimens in the Gray Herbarium of Harvard University collected in Arizona by Palmer and either in Arizona or northern Sonora by Pringle, but the occurrence of the species in this state seems not to have been definitely recorded hitherto. The range outside of Arizona is California (Colorado Desert) to Lower California and Sonora. CRASSULACEAE GRAPTOPETALUM ORPETTII E. Walther.!! Collected in 1926 by Harrison on the high plateau between Superior and Miami, in Pinal Co. The type of the species is a subsequent collection by Ed. Howard, at or near the same locality. *TILLAEA ERECTA H. & A. Collected by Peebles and Loomis in Baboqui- vari Canyon, Pima Co., and by Kearney, Harrison, and Peebles in Paradise Valley, Maricopa Co., where it was rather abundant at a roadside. This represents apparently the first collection of any species of the genus in Arizona. The range of 7’. erecta, as previously recorded, is Oregon to Lower California, and in Chile. GROSSULARIACEAE *GROSSULARIA QUERCETORUM (Greene) Coville & Britton.2 Collected by Harrison and Fulton on Superstition Mountain, northern Pinal Co., at an elevation of about 4,000 feet. Previously collected by J. J. Thornber in the Sierra Estrella, Maricopa Co., and on Superstition Mountain by L .N. Good- ding. These Arizona collections, as Dr. Coville points out, greatly extend the range of the species which previously had been known only from middle California to Lower California. ROSACEAE *CERCOCARPUS DOUGLASII Rydb.¥ Common in Devils Canyon near Su- perior, Pinal Co., where it was collected by Kearney and Harrison. This locality is far outside the previously recorded range of the species, which is California and southern Oregon, near the coast. 11 Walther, Eric. A new species of Graptopetalum. Journ. Cactus and Succulent Soc. Amer. 1: 183-186. 1930. 12 Identified by Frederick V. Coville. 13 Tdentification confirmed by P. A. Rydberg. 70 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 5 MIMOSACEAE MIMOSA LAXIFLORA Benth." The first collection of this species in Arizona and in the United States appears to have been by the late Professor J. Arthur Harris at Quijotoa, in the Papago Indian Reservation, Pima Co., in 1925. Harrison subsequently found it to be rather abundant in a wash near Sells, (Indian Oasis), in the same reservation, growing as a much branched shrub about 4 feet high. The species was previously known to occur only in Chi- huahua, Sonora, and Sinaloa, Mexico. CAESALPINIACEAE HOFFMANSEGGIA MICROPHYLLA Torr. Rather abundant on rocky foot- hills of the Gila and Tinajas Altas Mts., in Yuma County, where it was col- lected by Harrison in 1927. The range as previously recorded is southern California (Colorado Desert) to Lower California and Sonora. FABACEAE *CROTALARIA SAGITTALIS L. Collected by Kearney and Harrison in Garden Canyon, Huachuca Mts., Cochise Co. and in a sandy ‘“‘wash”’ near the Pata- gonia Mts., in Santa Cruz Co. Previously collected in Arizona by T. E. Wil- cox in the Huachuca Mts." and by J. C. Blumer in the Chiricahua Mts., Co- chise Co. The range of the species in the United States, as previously recorded, is New England to Minnesota, Florida, and Texas. Apparently it does not occur in western Texas and New Mexico, but many specimens col- lected in Mexico and Central America have been identified as C’. sagzttalis. The Arizona plant looks very different from the common form of the eastern United States, having shorter stems, shorter and relatively broader leaves, inconspicuous or obsolete and not decurrent stipules and smaller pods. It has been given a different species name, but since this name appears not to have been published it is omitted here, in order not to increase the synonymy of this perplexing group. Occasional specimens of C.. sagittalis from east of the Mississippi, e.g. specimens collected by Oakes at Plymouth, Mass., are practically identical with the Arizonaform. Very similar specimens collected in Mexico are: C. Wright 1019, from Santa Cruz, Sonora; #. Palmer 712, from Alamos, Sonora; and Townsend & Barber 307, from near Colonia Garcia. **T UPINUS SUCCULENTUS BRANDEGEI C. P.Smith.!” Collected by Kearney, Harrison, and Peebles near Camp Creek, Maricopa Co., and near Roosevelt, Gila Co., in 1928. These collections represent a great extension of range of the variety brandegez:, known previously only from Lower California. Speci- mens of a more typical form of L. succulentus Doug., were collected by Miss Alice Eastwood near Roosevelt, Ariz.!® **TRIFOLIUM AMABILE H. B. K. Collected in Garden Canyon, Huachuca Mts., Cochise Co., by Kearney in 1928, and previously in the same vicinity by F. X. Holzner. These appear to be the only collections in Arizona and in 14 Tdentification confirmed by N. L. Britton. 15 Tdentification confirmed by J. N. Rose. 16 Britton, N. L. and Kearney, T.H., Jr. Anenumeration of the plants collected by Dr. Timothy E. Wilcox, U.S. A., and others in southeastern Arizona during the years 1892-1894. Trans. N. Y. Acad. 14: 21-44. 1894. In this publication the species is listed doubtfully as C. rotundifolia (Walt.) Poir. 17 Tdentified by Charles Piper Smith. 18 ©, P. Smith in Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 49: 203. 1922. MARCH 4, 1931 KEARNEY: PLANTS NEW TO ARIZONA 71 the United States of this species of clover, which is widely distributed in Mexico and Central America. *PAROSELA JAMESII (Torr.) Vail. Collected near Sonoita, Santa Cruz Co., by Peebles and Loomis in 1928, presumably for the first time in Arizona. The range as previously recorded is Kansas and Colorado to New Mexico, Chihuahua and Coahuila. *PETALOSTEMON STANDLEYANUS Rydb.!? Collected near Prescott by Har- rison, Peebles, and Kearney in 1927, presumably for the first time in Arizona. The species was known previously only from northern New Mexico. SPHINCTOSPERMUM CONSTRICTUM (Wats.) Rose. Collected near Nogales by Kearney in 1927 and previously at Tucson by J. J. Thornber. These apparently are the only localities in the United States where this interesting little annual, with curiously constricted seeds, is known to occur. It is found also in Sonora and Lower California. ZORNIA DIPHYLLA (L.) Pers. Specimens collected by Kearney, Harrison, and Peebles near Nogales, Santa Cruz Co., differ from the form commonly occurring in Arizona in their long, very narrow, long-acuminate leaves, longer and more acuminate bracts, and absence of pubescence except on the margins of the bracts. Similar specimens have been collected in Mexico and Central America. MBIBOMIA GRAMINEA (Gray) Kuntze. This species, characterized by long, narrow, unifoliolate leaves, was collected in Baboquivari Canyon, Pima Co., by Kearney, Harrison, and Peebles in 1925. Apparently the only previous collection in Arizona was that of the type of Desmodium gramineum Gray by C. Wright on Sonoita Creek, in what is now Santa Cruz County.?° The species ranges southward, to Costa Rica. Its occurrence in New Mexico is mentioned by Miss Vail,?! but it is not included by Wooton and Standley in their flora of that state.” *MEIBOMIA WRIGHTII (Gray) Kuntze. Collected in Baboquivari Canyon by Kearney, Harrison, and Peebles in 1925. The range of this species, as previously recorded, is Texas, New Mexico and Mexico. aaa "Why “tips. ag JOURNAL ke Pe, WASHINGTON Sotae | _ OF SCIENCES 3 . BOARD OF EDITORS : C. Wyte Cooxe Caries DREcHSLER Hues L. Drypen . cA Uv, 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS “a ASSOCIATE EDITORS i W. J. Peters Harotp Morrison ‘arte PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY ‘< ‘ E. A. GoLDMAN G. W. Stosse BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY i: Aanes CHASE J. R. Swanton & BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY rf Roger C. WeEtts as CHEMICAL SOCIETY 4 a PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY e EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY ve BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Roya anp GuiItrorp AVEs, mA BALTIMORE, MARYLAND My a Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for ‘mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on Juiy 3, 1918. Tee es : Ieereth. of the month will ordinarily appear, on re | of the J OURNAL for the following fourth or nineteent clearly. typewritten and in suitable form for printing without editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious mi should appear only as footnotes and should include year of pub the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested t. ‘serially and submitted on & separate manuscript page. —> _ by zine etchings being preferable. _ will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost wh ance with the following schedule of prices: EN oe ‘proceedings and programs of meetings of the A . of events connected with the scientific life of Wa monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of eac! This J OURNAL, ‘the official o org nof qd) short original papers, written or co it a pears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspot blication is an essential feature; a manuscript peach * Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the ‘Boal or ] Illustrations i in limited amount will be accepted, ‘drawing t at m a Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication 1 no pl | unless requested. Iti is urged that manuscript be submitted ir in Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inc Copies 4 pp. a PP coeee i ecece Gi eeccie. 100 Ee a ie i 150 000 1 a aok eae 00) SO et a ee 2500-165 2.00 2.10 1260 “You ateoe: for deiiaseenanie with the author’ s name and addr corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4. 00; ad Lit As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra a copies 0 reprin’ lawl invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. The rate of Subscription. per datipia Gali ey a semi-monthly numbers. : 45 les i sich ek uke hs es <0 eel unin meds ie ener Monthly numbers (July, ‘August, and September, Nos. 2B, 4, and 1). Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sei ”? anc addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Was hingt D, D _ Exchanges.—The JOURNAL does not exchange with other publications, Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge ie thatjclaim is is. smade w tk thirty days after date of the following issue. | * Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, 1911, will ee et for $3.00. Sree rates are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with ay Anademys JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21 | Marcu 19, 1931 No. 6 GEOPHYSICS.—Shaping the earth.:. Witu1aAmM Bowig, United States Coast and Geodetic Survey. _ THE CRUST OF THE EARTH It is generally recognized that the earth has had a surface of solid material for something like a billionandahalf years. At the beginning of this time, the earth’s surface was irregular and there have been vertical and horizontal changes occurring continuously during this long interval. These changes have been due to erosion and sedimenta- tion and to forces which are acting on the materials forming the outer fifty or one hundred miles of the earth. If the earth’s material were in a liquid or highly plastic condition, and if there were no rotation, its surface would bea truesphere. With such a body undergoing rotation, the surface would be a spheroid. It has been found by geodetic measurements that the shape of the mean sea level surface approximates very closely a true spheroid. The deviations between the spheroid and the water surface, or geoid, are probably not greater than 100 meters. These forms are, of course, due to the continuous gravitational attraction of the particles of the earth for each other. The earth’s surface is irregular because of the presence of material of different densities near the earth’s surface. Under the continents the densities are less than they are for the material under the oceans. There is rigidity in the outer portion of the earth for otherwise there would be a slumping down of the high areas and the moving material would fill up valleys and ocean basins and bring the earth’s surface to a true spheroid. 1 Presidential address delivered before the AcapEMy, January 15, 1931. Received February 9, 1931. 103 > --aeb b+ - a — .< .c2<) Sif: caged cae 7. M. hirsuta. Bracts oblong; flowers red or pink. Apex of bracts acuminate, tipped by a mucro 2 to 3 mm. long 8. M. lindavii. Apex of bracts rounded, tipped by a mucro 0.5 to 1 mm. long 9. M. killipii. Stem glabrous or inconspicuously pubescent near the nodes with short- appressed hairs. Bracts oblong; corolla about 6 em. long.......... 10. M. pedunculata. Bracts ovate; corolla 3.5 em. long or less. Stem quadrangular, the angles narrowly winged. racist sto) When done. ea.» tates So ae lee o 11. M. glabra. Petes 2) 10) cb CWI ION ose | abo emia erg ihe =a 12. M. tarapotana. Stem terete or subterete. Bracts elliptic to obovate......... en ice Fis a 13. M. tessmannii. PACs OVALS... Se epate eas strays wp Rife @ 4% 14. M. sprucei. 1. Mendoncia klugii Leonard, sp. nov. Stem terete, densely tomentose with yellowish-brown hairs; petioles 1 to 1.5 em. long, densely tomentose; leaf blades ovate to elliptic, 6 to 11 cm. long, 4 to 7 em. wide, abruptly acuminate at apex and tipped by a mucro 1 to 2 mm. long, rounded or obtuse at base, both surfaces densely pilose with erect curved hairs 1.5 mm. long; flowers axillary, 2 to 4 in each axil; pedicels slender, 1 to 1.5 em. long, densely pilose with spreading brown hairs up to 2 mm. long; bracts thin, veiny, oblong-ovate, up to 2 em. long and 1.5 cm. wide, obtuse at apex and tipped by a mucro 1 mm. long, rounded at base, densely pilose with spreading dark-brown hairs up to 2 mm. long, glabrous within; calyx 5 mm. long, pilose with brownish hairs, deeply lobed, the lobes linear-lanceolate, 4 mm. long, 1 mm. wide at base, acuminate; corolla 3 em. long, glabrous, “yellowish white” (Klug), the tube 2 mm. wide, the throat 5 mm. wide, the lobes orbicular, 4 mm. in diameter; filaments 1 mm. long; anthers sagittate, 12 to 13 mm. long, acute at apex and tipped by a filiform appendage 0.5 mm. long, the lobes bearing a longitudinal band of papillae, slightly unequal and puberulent at the base; ovary lepidote; style about 2 cm. long, glabrous; stigma disk-shaped, slightly 2-lobed; fruit not seen. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,456,166, collected in forest near Iquitos, Mishuyacu, Department of Loreto, Peru, altitude 100 meters, March 26, 1930, by G. Klug (no. 1115). Klug’s no. 581, collected in the same locality, is also of this species. This is unique in its well developed calyx lobes. It is further marked by the dense covering of curved brown hairs, more or less spreading on the leaves, pedicels, and bracts, but matted on the stem. 2. Mendoncia smithii Leonard, sp. nov. Herbaceous vine; stem terete or subquadrate, appressed-pilose; petioles 3 to 10 mm. long, appressed-pilose; leaf blades ovate to oblong-ovate, up to 7 cm. long and 4.5 em. wide, acuminate or acute at apex, the tip itself rounded and terminating in a mucro 1 to 2 mm. long, rounded or acute at base, the upper surface somewhat scabrous and puberulent with minute ascending 146 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 7 hairs, each arising from a raised stellate base, the midrib and nerves clothed with longer appressed hairs, the lower surface velvety-pubescent with closely appressed hairs; flowers axillary, one or two in each axil; pedicels 2 to 4 em. long, velvety-pubescent with closely appressed hairs; bracts ovate, 25 to 28 mm. long, 14 to 15 mm. wide, obtuse at apex and tipped by a small mucro, rounded at base, softly pubescent with closely appressed hairs of a bright yellowish-brown color (when dry), the midvein prominent; calyx annular, glabrous; corolla rich pink or red, glabrous, 2.5 em. long, 5 mm. wide near base, 9 mm. wide at middle of tube, narrowed to 7 mm. at throat, the lobes 2.5 mm. in diameter, shallowly emarginate; filaments 2 mm. long, glabrous; anthers sagittate, 9 mm. long, flat and acute at apex, the basal lobes unequal; ovary glabrous; style about 2 cm. long, glabrous, persistent; stigma 2-lobed; fruit glabrous, 17 mm. long, 7 mm. wide, 5 mm. thick, flattened and oblique at apex, dull purple when ripe. Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,460,767, collected in woods at Iquitos, Department of Loreto, Peru, altitude about 100 meters, August 3, 1929, by E. P. Killip and A. C. Smith (no. 26953). Additional specimens examined: Dept. Loreto: Forests of Mishuyacu, near Iquitos, alt. 100 meters, Klug 2. Vicinity of Iquitos, alt. 120 meters, Williams 3643. This species is characterized by glabrous fruit, velvety bright yellowish bracts, and a relatively broad corolla. It is probably nearest M. coccinea Vell., of eastern South America. 3. Mendoncia schomburgkiana Nees in DC. Prodr. 11: 50. 1847. Stem quadrangular, appressed-hirsute; petioles 1 to 3 cm. long, appressed- strigose; leaf blades elliptic, 5 to 11.5 em. long, 3 to 7.5 em. wide, abruptly acuminate at apex and terminated by an awn 2 to 4 mm. long, acute to ob- tuse at base and slightly decurrent on petioles, scabrous-hirsutulous above, the hairs arising from stellate bases, the lower surface sparingly strigose but not scabrous, the midrib and nerves appressed-hirsute on both surfaces, prominent beneath; flowers 1 or 2 in each axil; pedicels slender, 4 to 7 cm. long, appressed-strigose; bracts linear-oblong, subfalcate, 3 cm. long, about 8 mm. wide, abruptly acute or acuminate at apex, rounded or slightly nar- rowed at base, rather densely pubescent with appressed or ascending, curved, tawny hairs about 0.5 mm. long; corolla bright red, 4 cm. long, 3 mm. wide at base, gradually enlarged to 5 mm. at throat, the lobes 5 mm. long, 3 mm. wide, emarginate; ovary finely puberulent; style about 3 cm. long, finely puberulent below, glabrous above; fruit obliquely obovate, slightly com- pressed, about 15 mm. long, 8 mm. in diameter, narrowed at base, acute at apex, and tipped by a portion of the persistent style, sparingly puberulent. Type collected on banks of the Pomeroon River, British Guiana, by Schom- burgk (no. 1431). Rance: British Guiana; Venezuela; Peru; Brazil. Specimen examined: Dept. Cuzco: Coshipata, Weberbauer 6946. A species marked by thin veiny subglabrous leaves, slender pedicels, and narrow subfalcate bracts. APRIL 4, 1931 LEONARD: THE GENUS MENDONCIA 147 4. Mendoncia aspera (Ruiz & Pav.) Nees in DC. Prodr. 11: 51. 1847. Mendozia aspera Ruiz & Pav. Syst. Veg. Peruv. Chil. 158. 1798. Stem appressed-pubescent; petioles 1 to 3 cm. long, appressed-pubescent; leaf blades broadly elliptic, 5 to 12 em. long, 3 to 6.5 em. wide, acuminate at apex, usually tipped by a mucro 1 to 4 mm. long, rounded or narrowed at base, the upper surface pubescent with appressed hairs (about 0.5 mm. long), each arising from astellate base, the lower surface rather densely and softly pubescent with appressed yellowish-brown hairs about 1 mm. long; flowers 1 to 3 in each axil; pedicels 2 to 6 ecm. long, appressed-pubescent; bracts oblong-ovate or lanceolate, 3 to 3.5 em. long, 1.2 to 1.5 cm. wide, often sub- faleate, acute at apex and ‘tipped by a short mucro, rounded at base, densely sericeous-hirsute with closely appressed yellowish-brown hairs; corolla bright red, 3.5 em. long, the throat 8 mm. wide; ovary puberulent; style glabrous; fruit deep purple, 1.5 mm. long, 10 mm. in diameter, compressed, sparingly puberulent. Type collected in Peru by Ruiz and Pavon. RanGE: Surinam; Venezuela; Peru. Specimens examined: Dept. Loreto: Iquitos, alt. 100 meters, Killip & Smith 27309. Yuri- maguas, lower Rio Huallaga, alt. 135 meters, Killip & Smith 27946, 27954; Williams 7842. Santa Ana, upper Rio Nanay, Williams 1236. Dept. JuNiN: In dense forest, Puerto Bermudez, alt. 375 meters, Kullip & Smith 26412. The distinguishing characters of this species are its large oblong-ovate silky bracts and the rather dense pubescence of yellowish-brown appressed hairs. 5. Mendoncia aurea Leonard, sp. nov. Stem terete, faintly striate, densely pubescent with appressed golden- brown hairs, or becoming glabrous below; petioles 1 to 2 em. long; leaf blades ovate to elliptic or obovate, 9 to 13 em. long, 5 to 8 em. wide, abruptly acu- minate or obtuse at apex and tipped by a short mucro, the upper surface pubescent, the hairs 0.5 mm. long, arising from stellate bases, the nerves and midrib appressed-pilose, the lower surface rather densely pubescent with golden-brown hairs, these thickest on the nerves and midrib; flowers axillary, 1 to 3 in each axil; pedicels 3 to 4 cm. long, stout, densely tomentose with golden-brown hairs; bracts lanceolate, slightly faleate, 3.5 to 4 em. long, 1.2 to 1.7 em. wide, acuminate at apex, rounded at base, densely tomentose with golden-brown hairs without, glabrous within; calyx annular, 1.5 mm. long; corolla dark red, glabrous, 4.3 cm. long, 7 mm. wide at base, narrowed to 4mm. above base, then enlarged to 8 mm. at throat, the lobes erect, obovate, 5 mm. long, 4mm. wide, rounded and shallowly emarginate; filaments 2 mm. long, glabrous; anthers sagittate, 13 to 15 mm. long, 2 to 3 mm. wide (the upper slightly smaller than the lower), the basal lobes unequal, bearded, the tip acuminate; ovary 2 cm. long, puberulent; style 3.5 cm. long, glabrous; stigma 2-parted, the lobes disk-shaped ; fruit oblong, compressed, flattened and acute at apex, puberulent. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,455,671, collected at Mishu- yacu, near Iquitos, Department of Loreto, Peru, altitude 100 meters, Decem- ber 16, 1929, by G. Klug (no. 673). 148 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 7 Additional specimens examined: Dept. Loreto: Dense forest, Mishuyacu, near Iquitos, alt. 100 meters, Killip & Smith 29994. La Victoria, Amazon River, Williams 3089. Near M. aspera, but differing in the thick tomentose pubescence of the bracts and pedicels. 6. Mendoncia peruviana Leonard, sp. nov. Herbaceous vine; stem terete or subquadrangular, appressed-pilose, the hairs 0.5 to 0.75 mm. long; petioles 1 to 3 cm. long, appressed-pilose; leaf blades ovate, up to 10 cm. long, 5 cm. wide, acuminate at apex, obtuse to acute at base and decurrent on the petioles, thin, the upper surface pubescent, the hairs arising from stellate bases, the lower surface rather sparingly pubes- cent with appressed hairs 0.5 mm. long; flowers 1 to 2 in each axil; pedicels 2 to 2.5 cm. long, pilosulous, the hairs appressed or spreading; bracts ovate or elliptic, 2 to 2.5 em. long, 1 to 1.5 cm. wide, rounded at apex, tipped by a short mucro, veiny, densely pubescent with fine minute hairs intermixed with larger stiffer ones, these 0.5 mm. long to 1 mm. long on the margins; calyx an- nular; corolla cream-white, 3 to 4 cm. long, 6 mm. wide at base, narrowed to 4 mm. about 1 cm. above base, and then enlarged to 8 mm. at throat, the lobes obovate, about 7 mm. long, 5 to 6 mm. wide, emarginate; filaments 3 mm. long, glabrous; anthers sagittate, about 10 mm. long, 1.5 mm. wide, the basal lobes unequal, bearded, acute at tip; ovary densely pilosulous; style 2.5 em. long, pilosulous below, glabrous above; stigma 2-parted, disk-shaped; fruit not seen. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,460,309, collected in thickets along river at Puerto Yessup, Department of Junin, Peru, altitude 400 meters. July 11, 1929, by E. P. Killip and A. C. Smith (no. 26357). This species has the facies of M. puberula of northern and eastern South America, but differs in the closely appressed pubescence of the stems and the strongly sculptured marking at the bases of the hairs on the upper leaf surfaces. 7. Mendoncia hirsuta (Poepp. & Endl.) Nees in DC. Prodr. 11: 52. 1847. Mendozia hirsuta Poepp. & Endl. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 3: 10. 1845. Mendoncia perrottetiana Nees in DC. Prodr. 11: 53. 1847. Mendoncia angustifolia Poepp.; Nees in DC. Prodr. 11: 52. 1847. Stem sparingly hirsute with spreading hairs 1 to 3 mm. long; petioles 1 to 3.5 em. long, hirsute; leaf blades elliptic, 6 to 14 em. long, 3 to 7 cm. wide, tapering or abruptly narrowed to a slender acuminate tip, narrowed at base, membranous, rather sparsely hirsute on both surfaces; pedicels 2 to 3 cm. long, hirsute with tawny spreading hairs; bracts oblong-elliptic, rounded at base, rounded or obtuse at apex, apiculate, thin, veiny, hirsute with spreading hairs 2 to 4 mm. long; corolla white; fruit 15 to 17 mm. long, 9 to 10 mm. in diameter, compressed, the tip flat, oblique, obtuse, or rounded, glabrous. Type collected near Yurimaguas, Peru, by Poeppig. Rance: French Guiana; Colombia; Surinam; Peru; Bolivia. Specimens examined: Dept. Loreto: Lower Rio Huallaga, Williams 4675. Yurimaguas, lower Rio Huallaga, Williams 7871. Lower Rio Nanay, Williams 550. APRIL 4, 1931 LEONARD: THE GENUS MENDONCIA 149 This is readily recognized by the thin veiny leaves, the long spreading pu- bescence, and the large, thin, oblong bracts. 8. Mendoncia lindavii Rusby, Mem. Torrey Club 4: 241. 1895. Stem angled or grooved, ferruginous-pilose with spreading hairs; petioles 0.5 to 1.5 em. long, pilose; leaf blades ovate to broadly oval, 5 to 10 cm. long, 2 to 5.5 em. wide, acuminate and awn-tipped at apex, rounded at base, mem- branous, the upper surface scabrid, sparsely pilosulous, the lower surface rather densely and somewhat velvety ferruginous-pilose; flowers 1 or 2 in each axil; pedicels stout, densely ferruginous-pilose; bracts oblong to oblong-lan- ceolate, 3 to 4 cm. long, 1 cm. wide, acuminate at apex and tipped by an awn 2 to 3 mm. long, subfalcate, densely ferruginous-pilose; corolla red, 4 to 5 em. long, 6 to 7 mm. wide at throat, the lobes 4 to 5 mm. long, entire; ovary densely pilose; style about 4 cm. long; fruit oblong-obovate, strongly com- pressed, keeled, 2 cm. long, 1 cm. in diameter, oblique, tipped by a portion of the persistent style, densely brown-puberulent. Type collected at Yungas, Bolivia, by M. Bang (no. 532). RANGE: Guatemala; Costa Rica; Panama; Colombia; Peru; Bolivia. Specamens examined: Dept. Loreto: Pinto-cocha, Rio Nanay, Williams 791. Pebas, Amazon River, Williams 1785. A species easily recognized by its dense indument of spreading ferruginous hairs. It is apparently of wide distribution. 9. Mendoncia killipii Leonard, sp. nov. Herbaceous vine, sometimes woody at base; stem terete, sulcate, rather densely pilose with spreading or retrorse yellowish hairs 1 to 2 mm. long; petioles 0.5 to 1.5 em. long, densely pilose with spreading hairs; leaf blades oblong-ovate to elliptic, up to 10 cm. long and 5.5 cm. wide, acuminate at apex and tipped by a short mucro, rounded or obtuse at base, rather firm, the upper surface bearing numerous hairs, each arising from a stellate base, the lower surface velvety pubescent with ascending hairs about 1 mm. long, these denser and more spreading on the midrib and nerves; flowers one or two in each axil; pedicels 2 to 3 em. long, densely pilose with spreading yel- lowish hairs about 2 mm. long; bracts oblong-ovate, 2 to 2.8 em. long, 1 to 1.3 cm. wide, obtuse or rounded at apex, tipped by a minute mucro 0.5 to 1 mm. long, rounded at base; calyx annular, pilose, the lobes low; corolla deep red, glabrous, cylindric, 3 cm. long, 5 mm. wide at base, slightly narrowed above and then enlarged to 7 mm. at throat, the lobes orbicular, 5 mm. in diameter; filaments 2 to 3 mm. long, glabrous; anthers sagittate, 8 to 12 mm. long, acuminate at apex, the basal lobes unequal, sparingly puberulent; ovary densely pilose with straight hairs; style 2 em. long, sparingly pilosulous; stigma 2-parted, the lobes disk-shaped; fruit (mature?) obovoid, 2 em. long, 1 em. broad, 0.6 em. thick, flattened and slightly oblique at apex, tipped by a portion of the persistent style. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,358,982, collected at edge of woods on the Schunke Hacienda, above San Ramén, Department of Junin, Peru, altitude 1,400 to 1,700 meters, June 8, 1929, by E. P. Killip and A. C. fos (no. 24622). Collected at same locality by C. Schunke (nos. 1436, 1443). 150 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 7 Additional specimens examined: Dept. Loreto: Woods, Yurimaguas, lower Rio Huallaga, alt. 135 meters, Killip & Smith :28060. Dept. Junin: Dense forests, Pichis Trail, Yapas, alt. 1,350-1,600 meters, Killip & Smith 25460. Near M. coccinea, but easily distinguished from that species by its spread- ing pubescence. 10. Mendoncia pedunculata Leonard, sp. nov. Stem terete, sulcate, the tips sparingly puberulent with appressed hairs above, glabrous below, the nodes slightly swollen; petioles 2 to 3 em. long, glabrous; leaf blades elliptic, 10 to 16 cm. long, 6 to 10 cm. wide, abruptly acuminate at apex and tipped by a mucro 1 to 2 mm. long, obtuse at base and decurrent on petiole, both surfaces glabrous; flowers 1 to 4 on axillary pe- duncles 1.5 to 2.5 em. long, the pedicels 5 to 7 mm. long, both pedicels and peduncles covered with minute appesssed hairs; bracts oblong, 4 em. long, 1.4 to 1.8 cm. wide, rounded at apex and tipped by a short mucro, rounded at base, inconspicuously pubescent with minute appressed hairs without, glabrous within; corolla white, marked with reddish brown within, glabrous, 5 to 6 em. long, the tube curved, 2.5 cm. long, 4 mm. wide at base, narrowed to 3 mm. near throat, 1 cm. wide at throat, the limb 3 cm. wide, the lobes oval, 1 to 1.5 em. long, 8 to 10 mm. wide; upper pair of stamens about 8 mm. above the lower; filaments 5 to 7 mm. long, glabrous; anthers sagittate, 12 to 15mm. long, 2 mm. wide, the basal lobes unequal and minutely bearded, acuminate at tip; ovary sparingly puberulent; style about 5 cm. long, glabrous, the lobes about 5 mm. long; fruit not seen. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,455,658, collected in forest, Mishuyacu, near Iquitos, Department of Loreto, Peru, altitude 100 meters, December 13, 1929, by G. Klug (no. 659). Klug’s no. 682, collected in the same region, belongs to this species. This differs from other Peruvian members of the genus in its large glabrous leaves, large oblong bracts, showy corolla, and peduncled flowers. 11. Mendoncia glabra (Poepp. & Endl.) Nees in DC. Prodr. 11: 52. 1847. Mendozia glabra Poepp. & Endl. Novy. Gen. & Sp. 3: 10. 18485. Plant essentially glabrous throughout; stem subquadrangular; leaf blades elliptic-ovate, 5 to 8 cm. long, 2.5 to 4 em. wide, acuminate at apex, rounded or acute at base; bracts ovate, 1.6 em. long, 1.4 cm. wide; pedicels about 2.5 em. long; corolla narrow, tubular; filaments 1 mm. long; anthers 7 mm. long. Type collected at Tocache Mission by Poeppig; also collected in Peru by Ruiz and Pavon. No Peruvian material has been seen by the writer. 12. Mendoncia tarapotana Lindau, Bull. Herb. Boiss. II. 4: 313. 1904. Plant glabrous throughout; stem quadrangular, the angles narrowly winged; petioles 2 to 3 em. long; leaf blades elliptic or elliptic-ovate, up to 12.5 em. long and 6.5 cm. wide, acuminate at apex, rounded at base, subcoria- ceous; flowers single or paired in the axils of the leaves; pedicels about 2 cm. long; bracts oblong, 2.5 em. long, 1 em. wide, rounded at both ends, the apex APRIL 4, 1931 LEONARD: THE GENUS MENDONCIA 151 tipped by a short mucro; corolla white, 3.5 em. long; style 4 cm. long; fruit oblong, 1.5 to 2 cm. long, 1 cm. in diameter, deep purple. Type collected at Tarapoto, Department of Loreto, Peru, by R. Spruce (no. 4620). Rance: Peru. Specimens examined: Dept. Loreto: San Antonio, Rio Itaya, alt. 110 meters, Killip & Smith 29473. Pebas, Amazon River, Williams 1769. The larger bracts, rounded at the apex, distinguish this from its near relative M. glabra. 13. Mendoncia tessmannii Mildbr. Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 9: 982. 1926 Stem sparingly pilose with appressed or ascending hairs; petioles 2 to 3 cm. long, sparsely pilose or glabrous; leaf blades elliptic or ovate, 5 to 11 cm. long, 6 to 6.5 cm. wide, acuminate and apiculate at apex, rounded or obtuse at base, glabrous or bearing a few short appressed hairs; peduncles quadrangular, 3 to 4 em. long, sparsely and minutely pilose; bracts oblong-elliptic to slightly obovate, 15 to 17 mm. long, 10 to 11 mm. wide, rounded and apiculate at tip, rounded at base, minutely and sparingly pilose; corolla white, 2.5 em. long, the throat 7 mm. wide, the lobes about 1 cm. long and 0.8 em. wide, shallowly emarginate; ovary glabrous; style about 17 mm. long; fruit obovate, slightly flattened, 15 mm. long, 9 to 10 mm. in diameter, glabrous. Type collected at Boca de Yarina, Department of Loreto, Peru, by Tess- mann (no. 3505). Photograph of type collection in U. 8S. National Her- barium. RancGE: Colombia; Venezuela; Peru. Specimen examined: Dept. Loreto: Wooded banks of lower Rio Huallaga, alt. 130 meters, Killip & Smith 29252. Distinguished by its subglabrous leaves and firm obovate bracts. 14. Mendoncia sprucei Lindau, Bull. Herb. Boiss. 5: 647. 1897. Stem subterete, striate, sparingly appressed-hirsute; petioles 1 cm. long; leaf blades elliptic, 5 to 9 em. long, 2.5 to 4.5 cm. wide, obtuse or rounded at base, acuminate and apiculate at apex, both surfaces sparingly pubescent with scattered appressed hairs about 0.5 mm. long; flowers solitary in the axils; peduncles slender, 3 to 6 em. long, sparingly pubescent with short appressed or ascending hairs; bracts ovate, about 20 mm. long, 10 to 12 mm. wide, rounded at base, rounded or acute at apex, sparingly covered with appressed hairs 0.5 mm. long; flowers not seen; fruit purplish black, glabrous, 17 to 20 mm. long, 10 to 11 mm. in diameter, somewhat flattened and oblique at apex, subterete below. Type collected near Sao Gabriel de Cachoeira, on the Rio Negro, Brazil, by R. Spruce (no. 2332). | Rance: Venezuela; Peru; Brazil. Specimens examined: Dept. Loreto: Lower Rio Huallaga, alt. 155 to 210 meters, Wzlliams 4390. Dept. JunIN: Dense forest, Pichis Trail, Yapas, alt. 1,350-1,600 meters, Killip & Smith 25455. 152 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 7 The fruits of Walliams 4390 are replaced by peculiar conical growths 4 to 5 cm. long, about 4 mm. in diameter at base and gradually narrowed to 2 mm. at tip. ‘This growth may possibly have been caused by the sting of some gall-producing insect. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY The Anthropological Society of Washington at its annual meeting held on January 20, 1931, elected the following officers for the ensuing year: President: Joan M. Cooper, Catholic University of America; Vice-President: Matruew W. STIRLING, Bureau of American Ethnology; Secretary: FRANK H. H. Roperts, Jr., Bureau of American Ethnology; Treasurer: Hunry B. Couns, Jr., U.S. National Museum; Members of the Board of Managers: Dante Foikmar, JoHN P. Harrineton, J. N. B. Hewitt, H. W. Kriecer, GEORGE S. DuNcAN. The Secretary submitted the following report for the year. Membership: Tbidie META ERS: iinet one fe atin alot, cd ae agen RES ACULVEeAMeMbERS 35 80 ow eee a ts a er oT Associate members. «sce iye cate ues oo ee i eee 9 Honorary mem bers. cae gua. oad. dc ae ge ee ee 27 Correspondine mem bers, eics cee wa co de ho ee 22 Potala eye Het aM Uk ka ahi ee 120 Deceased during year.....2: .. ARR OL Ce a ee See 5 esveme Oye anar ys Le eee oe Lei 3 New active members 072 22100 6 eee a ee 2 New associate members... 0. 0000 68 2 ee 3 During the year the Society sponsored a special series of evening lectures. The subjects dealt with the evolution and cultural history of mankind. The topics and speakers were: January 7, 1930. The Coming of Man, by Dr. Fay-Coorrer Cougs, Profes- sor of Anthropology at the University of Chicago. January 21, 1930. The Differentiation of Man Into Races and His Spread Over the Earth, by Dr. ALES Hrpui¢éKa, Curator, Division of Physical An- thropology, U. 8. National Museum. February 4, 1930. The Culture Area, by Dr. CLARK WISSLER, Curator of Anthropology, American Museum of Natural History; Professor of An- thropology at Yale University. February 18, 1930. The Civilizations of Middle America, by Dr. HERBERT J. SPINDEN, Curator Department of Ethnology, Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences. March 4, 1930. Prehistoric Pueblos and Cliff Dwellings of the Southwest, by Mr. Num M. Jupp, Curator of American Archeology, U. 8S. National Museum. Papers presented before regular meetings of the Society were as follows: March 18, 1930. Some New Facts on the Creek Social Organization, by Dr. JoHN R. Swanton, Ethnologist, Bureau of American Ethnology. April 15, 1930. First Contacts of White Men, Indians and Negroes on Espanola, by Dr. C. L. G. ANDERSON, retiring president of the Society. APRIL 4, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: BOTANICAL SOCIETY 153 October 21, 1980. Current Anthropological Work in the United States, by Mr. M. W. Stiruine, Chief of Bureau of American Ethnology. November 18, 1930. Some Cheyenne and Arapaho Notes, by Dr. TRUMAN MicHeEtson, Ethnologist, Bureau of American Ethnology. December 16, 1930. Pottery Making in the Province of Cocle, Panama, by Mr. Henry B. Rozserts, Carnegie Institution of Washington and Peabody Museum at Cambridge, Mass. December 19, 1980. Scotch Sword Dances and Other European War Dances, by Prof. Frantisek Pospisiu, Director of the Section of Ethnography of the Regional Museum of Moravia. This was a special meeting of the Society. All of the meetings, with the exception of the five special lectures and that given by Prof. Pospisit, were held in Room 42-43 of the New National Museum. The other meetings were held in the auditorium of that building. The Society was unfortunate in the loss by death of five of its members. Dr. J. WALTER FEWKES, a past president, died on May 31, 1930. Mr. Henry W. HensHaw, also a past president, died August 1, 1930. Dr. Lovis Macxkatu died July 27, 1980. Mr. JAmus M. Sprar died October 24, 1930. Mr. F. M. Tryon died in December 1930. Frank H. H. Rosperts Jr., Secretary. BOTANICAL SOCIETY 228TH MEETING The 228th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club November 4, 1930. Program: Reports on the Botanical Congress at London: E. A. AucutEr: The horticultural program. C. L. SHear: The fungus foray—The British Mycological Society, which consists of several hundred members, held its autumn Fungus Foray for 1930 at Whitby, England. Some sixty persons were present includ- ing members and guests. The party spent the week in collecting in various wooded areas in the vicinity. An abundance of material was found, especially of Agarics and other fleshy fungi. Collections made during the day were named and spread out on tables for exhibition each afternoon and evening. All the members present, many of whom were amateurs, showed a remarkable familiarity with the genera and species collected, and all participated in the work with much enthusiasm. Such gatherings of mycologists for field work are of the greatest importance in stimulating an interest in the subject and in accumulating a knowledge of the occurrence and distribution of the fungi in any region, and the example of our British colleagues might be followed with great advantage in this country. (Author’s abstract.) A. 8. Hircucock: The sessions on nomenclature.—In preparation for the sessions a “blue book,” giving changes proposed from the International Rules, together with the articles to be changed, was sent out to members of the Interim Committee on Nomenclature for their vote. Upon the returns was based a “‘yellow book,”’ which contained the amendments considered by the Congress. The proposal to omit the rule requiring a Latin diagnosis of new genera, species, or other groups, was lost, though names published with descriptions in other languages up to 1932 were declared valid. Later homo- nyms are not tenable except as conserved in the list of Nomina Conservanda. The type concept, governing the application of names, is incorporated in the Rules. A permanent International Committee on Nomenclature was ap- pointed with power to act on proposals referred to it, such as additions to the list of conserved genera, interpretation of the rules and the typification of genera. 154 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 7 N. E. Stevens: Social Aspects of the congress. D. B. JoHNSTONE-WALLACE: Competition as a factor in the success of grass and clover mixtures.—In mixtures of forage plants for hay or pasture it is not enough to consider the value of each constituent growing in pure culture but the behavior of these plants when subjected to competition must be taken into account. Italian rye-grass alone will outyield perennial rye-grass but when seeded in mixture with red clover the total yield is greatest where perennial rye-grass is used. ‘The reason is that the ranker growth of the Italian rye-grass suppresses the red clover while the latter is able to make a good growth when competing with perennial rye-grass. Italian rye-grass is of great value in pasture mixtures where its strong early growth affords herbage which is not allowed to shade out the slower growing plants because it is constantly grazed down. The best practice in England today, therefore, is to so select the constituents of a mixture as to provide early, medium and late species or varieties which will succeed one another and will accommodate themselves to the existing competition. For this purpose some of the wild varieties of forage plants are better suited than the cultivated varieties. This is especially true of the wild white clover. It is more persistent than the cultivated white Dutch clover and has a beneficial effect on the accompanying grasses. (Abstract by A. J. PIETERS.) SPECIAL MEETING A special meeting of the Botanical Society. was held at the Cosmos Club November 19, 1930. Dr. J. G. Dickson presented motion pictures illustrat- ing his travels in Russia, especially in the region of the Caucasus and in the mountains of Armenia, where he found the wild wheat, Triticum dicoccordes, first discovered by AARONSON on Mount Hermon. 229TH MEETING The 229th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club December 2, 1930. Program: Thomas H. Kearney: Cotton from a botanist’s point of view.—At- tention was called to the obscurity surrounding the origin of cultivated cot- tons and the difficulty of making a satisfactory classification of them. Lantern slides illustrated the structure of the cotton plant in general and of the flower in relation to fertilization, the taxonomy and geographical distribution of the wild and cultivated species of Gossypium, the behavior of interspecies and intraspecies hybrids and the inheritance of particular characters. (Author’s abstract.) L. H. Furnt, Recording Secretary. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS On his way to join the “China unit” of the trans-Asiatic expedition, the Rev. Father TrErLHarRD DE CHARDIN, paleontologist, visited Dr. GILBERT GROSVENOR, president of the National Geographic Society, which is co- operating with the French explorers. The trans-Asiatic expedition is one of the most comprehensive geographical explorations of our times, and it will employ all the aids of modern science and a diverse personnel of specialists in its study of the little-known tribes, geology, zoology, plant life and other aspects of secluded inner Asia. A. Wetmore has been elected an Honorary Member of the Orthnitho- logische Gesellschaft in Bayern. See: & CADEMY oF SCIENCES AND i cS as at ‘eae the Baavian eee. ae ‘The Geological Society. = The Medical Society. cs ead mA re The Chemical Society. ia ene fg eh ON ae eee __ The Philosophical Soret BP fino x cee fan _ The Institute of Electrical Se Pe he - - The Society of lat at | | ; : P The Medical Society. a iin EG aa Re See ages The . Academy. - i bese a si ee | ‘ The Biological Society” See es | = Sas ‘The oe Societe Nees a a . : at. Oe 7 % . ‘s ‘A Avens,¢ Coost and Geodetic e Survey. Se ae - Geology — (Mfiocene) Botanical | Society... foie “ : : oe - 3 ee - oe a ee aoe the Tn = S OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS ° C. Wyte Cooke CHARLES DRECHSLER Hua L. DrypEN U. 8, GHOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. Perers Haroup Morrison PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY BE. A. GonpMAN G. W. Stosr BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCINTY Aa@nes CHASE J. R. SWANTON BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCINTY Roger C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THH WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Royat AND GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND ‘Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for In section 1108, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences _ nes This JOURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, ee (1) short original ‘papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes — of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued semi- rs monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or en Aes twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in thei Issue of the JournaAt for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors: they should eS clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes pe eee serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. a Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced by zine etchings being preferable. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Author’s Reprints—Fifty 1 reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. ‘Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and — date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in seuerds : ance with the following schedule of prices: | Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers 50 aes OF SERENE See eee $2. 00 100 $ .50 $ .55 $ .690 $1.10 2. 50 150 . 90 1.00 1.10 1. 60 3. 00 200 £15 1.50 1.60 ~ 2.10 3. 50 250 1.65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints should invariably be attached to the first page of _ manuscript. The rate of Subscription ner votumeds: seo Gass eae eee Sree ae $6.00* pF Semi-monthly numbers 2.4 (25. se feces ve so a ee. ( eS SA Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15)..... Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and — addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C. Exchanges.—The JOURNAL does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made within thirty days after date of the following issue. * Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rate are given to members of scientific societies "affiliated with the Academy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21 Apri 19, 1931 No. 8 BOTAN Y—New grasses from China Y. L. Kmne,? U. 8. National Herbarium. (Communicated by A. 8. HrrcHcocx.) During the course of my studies in preparation of a monograph on the grasses of China, I have found two undescribed species in the Andropogoneae, and one new Arundinella. So little work has hitherto been done on the Chinese grasses that it is probable that as my study progresses further unknown species will be brought to light. I take pleasure in expressing my appreciation of the assistance given me by Prof. A. S. Hitchcock, Mrs. Agnes Chase, and their colleagues. Ischaemum lanceolatum Keng, (Sect. Polliniopsis) sp. nov. Perenne, caespitosum; culmi erecti, ad 40 cm. alti, graciles, multinodiis, nodis inferioribus confertis ramosi, iis 2 superioribus longe remotis; vaginae arctae, superiores internodiis breviores, inferiores iis longiores, equitantes, superne carinatae, glabrae vel apice pubescentes; ligula membranacea, firma, 2-3 mm. longa, saepe 2-partita, in vaginam decurrens; laminae lanceolatae, 3-8 cm. longae, 6-10 mm. latae, basi subito v. sensim angustatae, acuminatae, summa multo abbreviata v. subulata, patentissimae, rigidae, glabrae, virides v. glaucescentes, marginibus scabrae; racemi in apice culmi ramorumque 2-3-ni, 3-6 cm. longi, subgraciles, fulvi v. purpurascentes; rhacheos articuli spiculis sessilibus paulo vel dimidio breviores, leviter plano-convexi, ciliati; spiculae sessiles lanceolato-oblongae, 5-6 mm. longae, callo obtuso pilis circ. 1 mm. longis dense barbato; gluma prima chartaceo-membranacea, 4—7- nervis, medio distincte sulcata, apice integra v. bidenticulata; gluma secunda d-nervis, primam paulo superans, acuta; lemma inferius oblongum, hyalinum, l-nerve v. enerve; ejus palea brevior, binervis; lemma superius in $ superiore bifidum, inferne.3-nerve, membranaceum, e sinu aristam perfectam 8-10 mm. longam emittens; spiculae pedicellatae iis sessilibus similes v. rudimentariae, glumis primis 5—7-nervibus, secus nervos scaberulis; pedicelli articulis similes sed breviores. : Perennial; culms tufted, suberect, up to 40 em. high, multinoded, branched 1 Received March 17, 1931. * Fellowship student of the Rockefeller Foundation, from the National Central University, Nanking, China. 155 156 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 8 below, slender and wiry above; sheaths tight, equitant at the lower nodes, keeled above, striate, glabrous or pubescent at the junction with the blades; ligule membranaceous, firm, 2-3 mm. long, usually 2-lobed, decurrent into the margins of the sheaths; blades lanceolate, 3-8 cm. long, 6-10 mm. wide, acute or acuminate, constricted at base, glabrous, rigid, glaucous, the margins scabrous, the uppermost much reduced or subulate; racemes 2—3-nate, erect, 3-6 cm. long, slender, brownish or purplish; rachis joints compressed, ciliate, subequalling or $ shorter than the sessile spikelets; sessile spikelets 5-6 mm. long, lanceolate-oblong, the callus obtuse, densely bearded with hairs about 1 mm. long; first glume chartaceo-membranaceous, 4—7-nerved, distinctly grooved between the median nerves, entire or bidentulate, the keels scaberu- lous above; second glume 3-nerved, acute, alittle longer than the first; lower lemma oblong, hyaline, 1-nerved or nerveless, pilose, with a shorter 2-nerved Fig. 1. Ischaemum lanceolatum Keng.—1-2, dorsal and ventral views of first glume, < 5; 3, side view of second glume, X 5; 4-5, lower lemma and its palea, X 5; 6-7, upper lemma and its palea, X 5; 8-9, views of a single joint and the binate spikelets, X 33. palea; upper lemma 2-cleft to below the middle, the lobes acute, pilose, the portion below the insertion of the awn membranaceous, 3-nerved; awns 8-10 mm. long, geniculate about in the middle; pedicellate spikelets similar to the sessile or rudimentary, shortly awned or awnless, the first glume 5—7-nerved, the nerves scaberulous; pedicels ciliate as in the joints but usually shorter. Type in U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1501523, collected from Yunnan, China, altitude 2800-3000 meters, by E. E. Maire (no. 7039); duplicate type in the Herbarium of the University of California, no. 388785 (ex-herb. G. Bonati). This species is apparently an intermediate form between Hulalia (section Leptatherum) and Ischaemum, belonging to Hackel’s section Polliniopsis or Stapf’s Coelischaemum of the latter genus. It approaches the Indian species Ischaemum petiolare, but differs in the more slender and smaller habit, much shorter and subsessile blades, and in the fewer racemes. APRIL 19, 1931 KENG: NEW GRASSES FROM CHINA 157 Rottboellia laevispica Keng, (subgen. Coelorachis) sp. nov. Planta annua; culmi 1 m. v. plus alti, 3 mm. crassi, striati, glabri, basi plus minusve geniculati, nodis inferioribus radicantes, ramis floriferis erectis, solitariis, simplicibus, uninodiis, lateri complanato culmi appressis; vaginae saltem inferiores laxae, superne leviter carinatae, laeves v. cum tuberculis scabrae, inferiores internodiis longiores, superiores lis breviores, apice inter- dum sparse barbatae; ligula rotunda, brunneo-membranacea, 0.5-1 mm. longa, ciliata; laminae lineari-lanceolatae, 15-40 cm. longae, 8-16 mm. latae, acuminatae, basi angustatae v. subrotundae, scaberulae v. inferne laeves, glabrae v. superne versus basin sparse papillato-pilosae, virides v. saepe glaucescentes, flaccidae, margine serrulato-scabrae; racemi ad 15 cm. longi, 2-3 mm..- crassi, laeves, robusti, versus apicem attenuati, demum longe exserti; articuli virides v. brunnescentes, plerumque pedicellos et spiculas sessiles aequantes, fragiles, apice valde excavati; spiculae sessiles biflorae, pallide virides v. brunnescentes, callo glabro circ. 1 mm. longo e gluma prima suleo membranaceo separato 7-10 mm. longae; gluma prima lanceolato- oblonga, chartaceo-membranacea, dorso plana v. nervis elevatis striata, carina infra apicem angustissime alata et supra medium scaberula; gluma secunda primam aequans, 9-11-nervis, acuta, carina superne scaberula; lemma inferius glumam primam aequans, membranaceum, 3—5-nerve, palea rigidiori binervi, flore masculino, antheris 2-3 mm. longis; lemma superius paulo brevius, 3- nerve, palea angustiore, binervi; styli distincti, stigmata aequantes; spiculae pedicellatae plerumque ad glumam primam minutam reductae, rarissime basi racemi evolutae et fertiles, pedicellis tenuibus, planis, articulo arctissime appressis v. superne liberis. Annual; culms 1 m. or more high, 3 mm. thick, striate, flat or channelled on one side, glabrous, more or less geniculate and rooting at the lower nodes, the floriferous branches erect, appressed to the flat or channelled side of the culm, 1-noded, solitary and simple; sheaths, at least the lower ones, loose, slightly keeled above, smooth or roughish with papillae, the lower longer, the upper shorter than the internodes, sometimes sparsely bearded at apex; ligule rounded, brownish-membranaceous, ciliate, 0.5-1 mm. long; blades linear- lanceolate, 15-40 cm. long, 8-16 mm. wide, acuminate, the base narrowed or somewhat rounded, scaberulous or smooth beneath, glabrous or sparsely papillose-pilose towards the base above, green or often glaucescent, flaccid, the margins serrulate-scabrous; racemes finally long-exserted, up to 15 em. long, subcylindric, 2-3 mm. thick, smooth, stout, narrower with imperfect spikelets towards the apex; rachis green or brownish, fragile, the joints mostly equalling the pedicels and sessile spikelets, strongly hollow towards the base, the summit deep concave; sessile spikelets 7-10 mm. long, 2-flowered, pale-green or brownish; callus glabrous, about 1 mm. long, separated from the first glume by a membranaceous furrow; first glume lanceolate-oblong, chartaceo-mem- branaceous, dorsally flat or striate with slightly elevated nerves, the keels narrowly winged at apex and scaberulous above the middle; second glume as long, chartaceous, 9-1l-nerved (the nerves netted above when seen under transmitted light), acute, the keel seaberulous above; lower lemma as long as the first glume, membranaceous, 3—5-nerved, with a firmer but 2-nerved palea, usually staminate; upper lemma a little shorter than the lower, 3- nerved, with a narrower 2-nerved palea; anthers 2-3 mm. long; styles distinct, as long as the stigmas; pedicellate spikelets mostly rudimentary, rarely well- developed and fertile at base of the raceme; pedicels thin, flat, broad at the base, closely appressed to the rachis joints or free above. 158 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 8 X , eae } B; pp Yy 4 ieee - SS ZED VA Fig. 2. Rotiboellia laevispica Keng.— 1, plant, 2 natural size; 2, sessile spikelet with first glume removed, showing the pistil, occasionally seen in the lower floret, X 3; 3-4, views of joints with sessile and pedicellate spikelets, X 14; 5-6, dorsal and ventral views of the first glume, X 14; 7-8, lower lemma and its palea, X 14; 9-10, upper lemma and its palea, X 13; 11, inner surface view of the second glume under transmitted light, X 12. APRIL 19, 1931 KENG: NEW GRASSES FROM CHINA 159 Type in U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1105524 and 1346303, collected on prairie, West of Chu-chow, Anhwei, altitude 160 meters, September 24, 1921, by J. B. Griffin and A. N. Steward (no. 996); the same species collected in shady woods, South of I-shing, Kiangsu, August 21, 1929, by Y. L. Keng (no. 2550). A distinct species of the subgenus Coelorachis, probably closely related to R. exaltata L. f., from which it is distinguished by the smooth green or brown- ish racemes, lanceolate-oblong sessile spikelets, and the thinner pedicels mostly equaling the rachis joints. It differs also in the glabrous sheaths, the sheaths of R. exaltata being coarsely hispid. Fig.3. Arundinella bidentata Keng.—1, part of raceme with 4 pairs of spikelets, X 23; 2-3, ventral and dorsal views of the first glume X 7; 4-5, ventral and dorsal views of the second glume, X 7; 6-7, ventral and dorsal views of the lower floret, X 7; 8-9, ventral and dorsal views of the upper floret, X 7. Arundinella bidentata Keng, sp. nov. Perennis; culmi erecti, 50-70 cm. alti, glabri, 3-5-nodes, simplices v. a nodis inferioribus ramosi; vaginae laxiusculae, teretes, striatae, papillo- hispidae v. eae superioribus glabrae, nodis dense barbatis; ligulae membrana- ceae, 0.5-1 mm. longae, ciliatae; laminae e basi aequilata a vagina v. subro- _tundata lineares, subulato-acuminatae, 10-22 cm. longae, 2.5-5 mm. latae, papillo-pilosae y. inferne glabrae, firmae, saepe in sicco involutae; paniculae oblongae, 12—20 em. longae, ramis erectis, solitariis v. iis inferioribus 2-3 nis; spiculae binatae, unilaterales, 5-6 mm. longae, pedicellis altero 1-5 mm. altero 160 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 8 3-10 mm. longis, scaberulis, versus apicem hispidis; gluma prima ovata, mucronata, 3-4 mm. longa, valde 3-nervis, hispida, subviolascens; gluma se- cunda circo 5mm. longa, ovato-lanceolata, subulato-acuminata, 5-nervis, dorso pilosa; lemma inferius lanceolatum, tenuiter 5-nerve, superne pilosum, glumam primam subaequans, paleam acuminatum bicarinatam floremque masculam fovens; lemma superius oblongum, callo obtuso barbato 3mm. longum, tenuiter 3—-5-nerve, dorso scaberulo-punctatum, bidentatum, lobis laciniatis, dorso pilosis, e sinu aristam circo 6 mm. longam infra medium geniculatam exserens; palea lanceolata, ejus lemma aequans, marginibus inflexis, superne pilosis; antherae lineares, 1.2-1.8 mm. longae, saturate violascens; styli interdum 3, distincti, stigmatibus plumosis violascentibus breviores. Perennial; culms, erect, 50-70 cm. high, 3—-5-noded, glabrous, simple or branched at lower nodes; sheaths loose, terete, striate, papillose-hispid or the upper ones glabrous, usually shorter or the lower ones longer than the internodes, the nodes densely bearded with erect stiff hairs; ligule membrana- ceous, truncate or somewhat rounded, 0.5-1 mm. long, ciliate; blades linear, 10-22 cm. long, 2.5-5 mm. wide, subulate at apex, continuous with the sheaths or rounded at base, papillose-pilose or glabrous beneath, firm, usually involute when dry; panicle erect, oblong, 12-20 cm. long, the main axis angular, scaberulous, the branches solitary, simple, subsessile, or the lower ones 2-3- nate, with a few short branchlets, naked at base; rachis trigonous, scaberulous or ciliate along the angles; pedicels of the paired spikelets unequal, one 1-5 mm. the other 3-10 mm. long, erect, scaberulous, usually hispid towards the apex; spikelets binate, unilateral, 5-6 mm. long; first glume chartaceo- membranaceous, ovate, mucronate, 3-4 mm. long, strongly 3-nerved, hispid, dark purple; second glume about 5 mm. long, ovate-lanceolate, subulate- acuminate, 5-nerved, dorsally pilose; lower lemma lanceolate, membranaceous, about equaling the first glume or slightly longer, the margins hyaline, pilose above, with a narrower 2-nerved palea, staminate; upper lemma oblong, 3 mm. long,. faintly 3-5-nerved, dorsally scaberulous-punctate, bidentate, the lobes laciniate, dorsally pilose; callus obtuse, bearded with hairs about 1 mm. long; awn arising between the lobes, about 6 mm. long, twisted below, geniculate about one-third above the base, scaberulous; palea equaling its lemma, lanceo- late, 2-nerved, the margins inflexed, hyaline, pilose above; anthers linear, 1.2- 1.8 mm. long, dark purple; styles sometimes 3, distinct, shorter than the plumose dark purple stigmas. Type in U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1270758, collected on moist hillsides and open lands, Kuliang, Fukien, altitude about 800 meters, July 30, 1919, by J. B. Norton (no. 1154); the same species collected on Sharp Peak, mouth of Min River, Fukien, June 1924, by F. P. Metcalf and T. C. Chang (no. 60). A distinct species, differing from all others in the upper lemma bidentate at apex, with the geniculate awn between the two laciniate pilose lobes. The species probably comes near to those of the subgenus Mzlzosaccharum, espe- cially the common Asiatic species A. setosa Trin., in which, besides the awn there are two lateral setae. Except that A. setosa is usually glabrous, these two species resemble each other. APRIL 19, 1931 COOK: ANTIQUITY OF MAN IN OKLAHOMA 161 ANTHROPOLOGY—The antiquity of man as indicated at Frederick, Oklahoma: A reply... Harotp J. Cook, Cook Museum of Natural History, Agate, Nebraska. (Communicated by J. W. GIDLEY.) In this JouRNAL, 20: 475, 1930, Dr. O. F. Evans has contributed a criticism which brings up some points of interest in regard to the age of the deposits at Frederick, Oklahoma, wherein were found fossils and human artifacts, which we originally reported; and he has reached some conclusions which we feel do not accord with a comprehensive understanding of all the known evidence. His description of the old stream bed in which were found the fossils and artifacts described in previous papers, is in close agreement with my original descriptions, in most respects, but he diverges widely in some of his conclusions on the age of these beds, and the value of their included fossils and artifacts as valid evidence; and in his interpreta- tion of the time at which the stream which formed these beds, was active. Some of the evidence which he cites as being conclusive on points which he makes, is quite as susceptible of other interpretation and so, at best, cannot be conclusive. Likewise some of his conclusions are based on inaccurate or unproven premises; and so, are either distinctly in error, or open to serious question. To be specific. First, Dr. Evans recognizes three distinct phases of deposition in this old stream bed, (as we did, also) and says, ‘This (bottom) cross-bedded sandstone and conglomerate represents the early and normal period of the old stream’s history.”’ Then, “Above this old river bottom is a middle layer, ten or twelve feet thick... . .”’ Following, ‘‘Above this layer of water-deposited sands and gravels is an upper layer of several feet of material which appears to be partly water and partly wind deposited.”’ Anyone examining the extensive cuts in this bed at the Holloman quarries must be impressed that this division is present, and real. Yet in his conclusion Dr. Evans states: First; ‘It is a stream deposit,”’ and second; ‘‘As a stream it was subject to disturbance at any time up to the time the stream left the valley.”’ Obviously this implies that the division of the phases of the deposits he has just recognized are not determinable. Further, he infers that, since the coarse materials in the middle bed show that an increase in velocity has occurred, it therefore follows that an uplift must have occurred to produce it. A much simpler 1 Received March 7, 1931. 162 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 8 solution of the cause that would produce these effects is far more prob- able; namely; that a temporary climatic change occurred, with in- creased precipitation and increased stream run-off,—which is quite in line with well recognized habits of climatic cycles and fluctuations. Now, let us return to the phases of stream deposit, and their portent. First, after over two years’ intensive study of the large fauna found in these beds, which Dr. Hay and I recently reported upon, we found no difference in the age of the fossils from the various layers in this old stream bed. They obviously pertain to a relatively short period of time, and represent a comparatively contemporaneous fauna. Dr. Evans speaks of other gravel deposits in various other localities near the present Red River, which “contain numerous animal remains simi- lar to those of the Holloman pit, such as tusks, thigh bones, etc., which appear, on casual examination to be what are generally referred to as of Pleistocene age.’’ Does he mean to suggest that such casual examination and identification is of weight and value, comparable to the results obtained as a result of comparative studies by specialists, as a means of identifying the age of beds? I might suggest that “‘tusks, thigh bones, etc.,’’ which, ‘‘on casual examination appear to be similar to those in the Holloman pit’’ occur in beds in stream deposits in which the writer has worked for over twenty years with Dr. W. D. Matthew, and other specialists, and date back anywhere from the early part of Pliocene times, some five or six million years ago, to well up through the Pleistocene. Casual examinations are of no value in com- parisons of this sort; while exact comparisons, based on an extended fauna, may become rather precise in their import. | Dr. Evans suggests a Post-Pleistocene age for this stream. Without stopping to analyze all of his evidence, let us consider one point. According to all available evidence, modern races of mammals have existed back that far, showing little change in that length of time. According to the most exact comparisons Dr. Hay and I have been able to make, not one single bone found in these deposits, which rs definitely determinable, 1s referable to a modern species. The closest relations and comparisons are with fossils known to have lived in the first half of the Pleistocene (to put it conservatively). So, if this were a Post-Pleistocene stream, the fossils would, of necessity, have been preserved as fossils some half million years or more before the “Frederick River’’ rewashed them into its bed, (as it must have done under that hypothesis). Likewise, it is safe to assume that they would have become fossilized in the first half-million years, and have been excessively fragile, even as when found now. To anyone familiar with APRIL 19, 1931 COOK: ANTIQUITY OF MAN IN OKLAHOMA 163 stream deposits and with such fossils, the extreme improbability of their withstanding redeposition after fossilization, and still remaining in the condition in which we find them, is obvious, especially in the case of large and fragile specimens such as the Glyptodon carapace in the Oklahoma museum, which Evans cites. Instead of proving, as he evidently believes, that the lack of skeleton inside this shell proves redeposition, it actually proves the exact reverse! As any accurate field observer knows, who is familiar with the processes in life, such a dead animal would be eaten out of its shell, or the flesh would have decayed, as with modern turtles, and while yet tough and its bony segments firmly held by animal matter, it might be washed with little further damage into the muds of a stream and buried, as this specimen was found; but once there, for any length of time, it is utterly impossible that any erosion could move the specimen without scattering the parts of the shell, or losing and destroying them. The scattering and erosion of the bones found in this bed is that common to all similar stream deposits,—in which whole skeletons are rare finds. ‘The bones found are, so far as determinable, of mammal species known to be characteristic of the early Pleistocene, and a homogeneous assemblage. Aside from other evidence to the contrary, if that ‘‘Frederick River’ only a few thousand years ago, ran on what is now a high hill-top, then we must commend the wonderful selective wisdom it displayed in choosing for preservation in its bed only mammals characteristic of early Pleistocene times, and by no chance including the remains of any modern species, which surely must have lived along its course. Dr. Evans states that reasoning from the finding of fossils and arti- facts in the same bed “‘seems to be a case of trying to apply a line of reasoning that does not apply at all in the case of stream deposits.”’ This statement is hardly in accord with known facts. It is true that in order to evaluate evidence found in stream channels, it is necessary to take into consideration all types of specialized evidence, including all geological and paleontological data available, with more care than in marine deposits; consequently these problems are primarily of a nature whose solution must inevitably be sought by specialists in the field concerned, and by those who do not loosely relegate all stream deposits, and all fossils casually examined, to the catagory of useless evidence. As to the ‘‘Post-Pleistocene uplift,”’ or disturbance, which Dr. Evans first postulates, and then uses as a basis for proof,—the existence of such an uplift is far from a settled fact. We know much of the general history of such streams, and the effects that widespread elevation 164 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 8 and disturbances of the levels of the earth’s crust have had upon them; and while some such disturbances did occur, there yet remains much to be worked out regarding their history and effects. There is much excellent evidence available, however, to indicate that a general uplift did occur in the whole area, and extended for hundreds of miles, but that it occurred at a much earlier date than Post-Pleistocene, namely, about mid-Pleistocene time. We expect to cite and publish some of this evidence in another place. The statement made by Dr. Evans that the kinds of metates and arrows found in these beds are of recent age, and are as good evidence of the age of the beds as are the fossils, is based on unproven presump- tion, from one angle, and lack of consideration of known facts, from another, if we leave present evidence out of consideration. May I inquire the nature of the evidence that is available to the school of thought above illustrated, from which it may be stated what the people of Pleistocene times in America, (assuming they existed here) did or did not use, or what was the extent of their knowledge or lack of it? Where has such evidence been discovered, outside of deposits of this character? As previously pointed out, analogies with the cultures of Europe are interesting; speculations may lead to important discoveries; but such considerations are not proof or evidence of demonstrable fact. In view of the endless examples of both precocious and persistent primitive races among animals known to vertebrate paleontologists, we see no reason to believe that such conditions may not equally well apply to mankind. With this in mind, on present evidence, who can say that a precocious hunting race of nomadic people may not have developed, and, following the abundant game of Pleistocene times, have used the natural, obvious implements that such a life would develop,—much as did modern nomadic plains Indians—and then, satisfied with that state, have maintained it as a nearly static cultural state indefinitely, while conditions permitted? The term “‘metate”’ as applied to the type of stone artifact found in the ‘Frederick River”’ gravels is perhaps misleading. Whenever any primitive people under- took to store food, it is obvious that drying to cure and preserve meats, roots, fruits, etc:, would inevitably be the first and natural method. It follows, equally well, that, after it had dried until hard, such food would be difficult to eat, and it obviously follows that such people found that by placing hard, dry food on one stone and pounding it with another, the food could be rendered more palatable. This discovery, inevitably, would lead to the use of just such primitive “metates’? as we find here. This method must have originated APRIL 19, 1931 COOK: ANTIQUITY OF MAN IN OKLAHOMA 165 independently many times in human history; and by no means can be considered conclusive proof of a modern culture. As to the statement that calculations based on rates of erosion have no value,—this statement is, of course, absolutely arbitrary, and in excess of the facts. It is true that much is yet unknown as to the rates of erosion of this type, and the many factors which influenced it, but a good deal that is certainly significant and strongly indicative of the probable rates of erosion, is very definitely known. If such evidence is to be arbitrarily thrown out because it is incomplete,— then the same logic applied to anthropological evidence bearing on pre-basket maker races in America would leave it a rather desolate field. It seems to me that the facts are more likely to be arrived at, finally, if we give all evidence in all subjects that may bear on our problems, most careful consideration; and not attempt to rule out, arbitrarily, factors not in accord with our personal views, which, after all, may be wrong. CONCLUSIONS Dr. Evans cites some interesting data on possible river piracy, that may have affected the early history of the ‘“‘Frederick River’’ and which should be carefully worked out and studied. His conclusions as to the unimportance of the evidence from the standpoint of fossils is certainly in error, as are also his conclusions that no reliable data can be had on the age or association of beds of this character, by the data they furnish. The statement of his conclusion that the artifacts found are neces- sarily modern, is based on inference, and not on definite knowledge,— and so is indeterminate. The statement that metates and artifacts of the same type are now found on the surface of that region, has no determinable value, pro or con. It is certain that quite similar arti- facts have been used into modern times. It is also true that a large part of the old “Frederick River’’ bed has already eroded away, and that any old artifacts that might be in such a deposit, would, in all probability be found, picked up, as erosion exposed them at the surface, and, not improbably, used by any modern Indians that found them; and so, be scattered. Therefore, the finding of such artifacts on the surface proves nothing as to the age of these deposits, either way. Dr. Evans’ conclusions on a ‘‘Post-Pleistocene uplift’’ in this region are certainly open to serious question, and, from evidence at hand, are believed to be in error; hence it follows that conclusions based on this supposition are highly questionable. The implication that the fossils of this bed must have been rede- 166 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 8 posited in their present state, is out of the question as a probability, as any one with long field experience with such deposits and fossils will know. y We have seen no evidence to disprove a far greater antiquity for this deposit than the Post-Pleistocene upon which Dr. Evans insists. There is abundant evidence, (such as the complete absence of modern mammals in this deposit, and the presence of a rich and diversified mammalian fauna, of extinct races typical of early Pleistocene times, and other confirmatory data) to support a distinct Pleistocene an- tiquity for this stream bed and its contents. The writer feels that until more evidence is assembled, it is prema- ture to say dogmatically that this is an Aftonian stream deposit, (though most of the evidence is suggestive of it), just as it is premature to callit modern. However, there is so much good evidence in favor of a Pleistocene antiquity for this bed, both from the standpoint of geology and paleontology, that it deserves the most careful, compre- hensive study, undertaken to find out the real facts, with due weight given to all evidence. BIBLIOGRAPHY Cook, Haroup J. New trails of early man in America. Scientific American. August 1927. Cook, Haroup J. New geological and paleontological evidence bearing on the antiquity of mankindin America. Nat. Hist. 27, No. 3. 1927. Cook, Haroup J. A new fossil bison from Texas. Proc. Colo. Mus. Nat. Hist. 8, No. 3. March 15, 1928. Cook, Haroup J. Notes on an interesting juvenile lower jaw of Elephas. of jeffersoni. Proc. Colo. Mus. Nat. Hist. 8, No.5. May 2, 1928. , Cook, Haroup J. Further evidence concerning man’s antiquity at Frederick, Oklahoma. Science, N.S.67. April6, 1928. Cook, Haroxtp J. Evidence of human artifacts in the American Pleistocene. Science, N.S. 62. November 20, 1925. Cook, Haroutp J. The antiquity of man in America: Who were the first Americans? Scientific American. November 1926. Cook, Haroup J. Glacial age manin New Mexico. Scientific American. July, 1928. Coox, Haroup J. More evidence of the ‘‘Folsom Culture’ race. Scientific American. February, 1931. Coox, Haroup J. and Hay, O. P. Fossil vertebrates collected near, or in association with, human artifacts at localities near Colorado, Texas; Frederick, Oklahoma; and Folsom, New Mexico. Proc. Colo. Mus. Nat. Hist. 9, No.2. October 20, 1930. Evans, O. F. The antiquity of man as shown at Frederick, Oklahoma: A criticism, This JOURNAL 20: 475. 1930. Fiaeins, J.D. The antiquity of manin America. Nat. Hist. 27, No.3. 1927. GouLp, Cuartes N. On the recent finding of another flint arrow-head in the Pleistocene at Frederick, Oklahoma. This JouRNAL 19: 66. 1929. Hay, O. P. On the antiquity of the relics of man at Frederick, Oklahoma. Science, N.S. 27. April 27, 1928. Hay, O. P. On the recent discovery of a flint arrow-head in early Pleistocene deposits at Frederick, Oklahoma. This JouRNAL19: 93. 1929. APRIL 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 167 Spier, Lesuie. Concerning man’s antiquity at Frederick, Oklahoma. Scientific News Letter, 67, No. 1728. February 10, 1929. Spier, Lesuiz. A note on reputed ancient artifacts from Frederick, Oklahoma. Science, 68, No. 1726. August 1928. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES THE ACADEMY 238TH MEETING The 238TH meeting of the AcaDEMY was held at the Cosmos Club, Febru- ary 20, 1931, Vice-President Curtis presiding. Program. Dr. M. A. Tuve of the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism of the Carnegie Institution of Washington spoke on the subject, Artzficial -radium-rays from high-voltage tubes. The address was illustrated with lantern slides. All physical objects in the universe are made up of atoms, and the different kinds of atoms are made up of different numbers of electrons surrounding a heavy kernel or core called the atomic nucleus. Fairly complete information about these external atomic electrons has been obtained from studies of spectrum-lines and from other types of investigations, but there is only scanty knowledge about the nucleus. Most of what is known about atomic nuclei has been learned from two types of investigation, (1) from studies with radium and other radioactive substances, and (2) from measurements of the masses of individual atoms in the “‘mass-spectrograph,”’ which gives informa- tion as to the components in the nuclei and their energies of binding. All available evidence clearly indicates that there are two fundamental atomic “‘building-blocks,”’ namely, electrons and protons, the latter being hydrogen atom-nuclei. ‘Quanta’ of electromagnetic radiation (light-waves) should justly be included as a third elemental building-block of the universe. Radium and other radioactive elements emit three types of rays: Alpha- rays, which are the nuclei of helium atoms shot out with high velocities; beta-rays, which are high-speed electrons; and gamma-rays, which are very penetrating X-rays. The alpha- and beta-rays from radium have energies (represented by their velocities) as great as they would acquire had they been accelerated from a state of rest by electric potentials ranging in magnitude from one hundred thousand to several million volts. The gamma-rays have energies of the same order of magnitude although they are electromagnetic waves and have velocities identical with that of light. By studies of these rays and their interaction with other atoms much information of a funda- mental nature has been obtained concerning atomic nuclei. In the lecture typical experiments, including the recent ones of Pose, were described and their interpretation indicated. Since radium and other radioactive sources are available only in limited quantity and, what is more important, the energy- range of the emitted rays is distinctly limited, it has been clear for many years that the development of a controllable artificial source of such rays would greatly extend the scope of such studies. An effort to develop such a source of artificial ‘‘radium-rays’’ was under- taken in the Department of Terrestrial Magetism, of the Carnegie Institu- tion of Washington, in 1926 by Dr. Gregory Breit of the AcapEmy and the lecturer, using the potentials of several million volts produced by Tesla coils. Messrs. L. R. Hafstad and O. Dahl of the Department’s staff have 168 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 8 taken a large part in the work. The development of suitable vacuum-tubes for such high voltages was finally achieved along lines similar to those first used by Dr. W. D. Coolidge, namely, by dividing the voltage among separate vacuum-tubes connected in cascade, with an inner hole extending through all tubes. Some of the technical difficulties encountered in operating vacuum- tubes at very high voltages were described. During the past year such tubes have been used in the laboratory of the Department with Tesla voltages up to approximately two million volts, and measurements have been made to verify the production of artificial beta- rays (high-speed electrons) and gamma-rays (very penetrating X-rays) by the tubes. The beta-rays were measured by their deflection in a calibrated magnetic field. ‘The maximum speed of the electrons measured in this way checked the measurement by the capacity potentiometer-method of the maxi- mum voltage applied to the tubes, thus verifying the previous voltage- measurements on the Tesla coils. The gamma-rays from the tubes were measured through one, two, and three inches of lead, using a Geiger-Miiller tube-counter. With a peak-voltage of 1,300,000 volts on the tube the absorp- tion-coefficient of the gamma-rays from the tube after filtering through one inch of lead was found to be very nearly the same as the absorption-coefficient of the gamma-rays from radium after passing through the same filter. Since most of the beta- and gamma-rays from radium have voltage-equivalents under 1,000,000 volts, and nearly all lie under 2,000,000 volts, the artificial production of beta- and gamma-rays practically covering the radium-spectrum has been achieved. The artificial production of the alpha-rays (high-speed helium nuclei) has not been attempted. Instead, experiments on high- speed protons (hydrogen nuclei) are in progress because results with them will be even more directly interpretable than similar results with helium nuclei. (Author’s abstract.) CHARLES THom, Recording Secretary. PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 1012TH MEETING The 1012th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium on November 22, 1930, President LAMBERT presiding. Program: Matcotm P. Hanson: Radio with the Byrd Antarctic Expedi- tion.—With the aid of about sixty lantern slides, the speaker described experi- ences and conditions encountered on the Byrd Antarctic Expedition during its various phases, with particular reference to radio communication and research. After pointing out the difference between the Antarctic pack ice belt, the Ross Ice Barrier or, more appropriately, the Ross Ice shelf, and the saltwater Bay ice, the speaker described the establishment of “Little America” ten miles from the water’s edge, which required the transporting of five hundred tons of supplies over this distance of rough ice through months of dog sled hauling. Construction of the radio towers and other radio facilities around the camp was described, and the extensive use of radio shown to be of fourfold use to the Expedition, namely for safety, efficiency, scientific research, and morale of the personnel. The speaker showed how the long winter night was spent in thorough preparation for the spring’s coming exploration activi- ties; improved light-weight sledges were built, harnesses and clothing pre- pared, foodstuffs weighed out and packed, airplanes and radio facilities im- proved, and many other things accomplished. The peculiar radio conditions APRIL 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 169 encountered during this period, such as rapid fading and multiple echoes, were studied largely by means of oscillograms. Determinations of height and condition of the Kennelly-Heaviside layer were instituted by transporting and setting up the receiving equipment and oscillograph on several trips, five to ten miles from Little America, and taking runs over at least 24 hours on special signals sent out from the base, over a wide frequency range. The need for ski practice and a certain amount of outdoor exercise despite the darkness and temperatures which went to —72.8°F., caused installation of a powerful beacon light atop one of the radio towers to help guide anyone back to camp who might get lost in darkness or blizzard; a group of additional small flashing lights was in everyday use and conveniently showed the location of camp to men out walking. Ryme, fog, and even a light rain were experi- enced in sub-zero weather, and ice crystals in the air gave rise to many beautiful phenomena. Daily radio messages and news bulletins from various parts kept the expedition in touch with the world and radio concerts were frequently received and helped to break the monotony. With the coming of spring, in October, the supporting party laid down depots every fifty miles for two hundred miles to the south, and with the newly-constructed portable radio equipment, deriving its transmitting power from batteries or from a little hand-operated generator, was able to maintain regular radio contact with the base. The snowmobile party, which followed in its tracks, had a breakdown 85 miles from home, and had to walk back, pulling a sledge with their sleeping bags, tent, and emergency rations behind them. The geological party made a long dog sled trip to the south, covering over eleven hundred miles in three months, while maintaining regular radio communication with their portable set. Many airplane flights were made for exploration and aerial mapping pur- poses, the chief ones being the base laying flight, the south polar flight, the eastern flight to King Edward and Marie Byrd land, and the western flight over the Ross Barrier. The speaker showed the radio equipment with which the planes maintained radio communication with the base during these flights, and explained the special radio safeguards at Little America consist- ing of a directional radio beacon and of a radio compass, both of which would have been of great assistance in guiding the planes back in case of thick weather. Such a condition, fortunately, never arose during a flight, thanks to the expert weather predictions of our meteorologists. In addition to frequent poor visibility due to lack of shadows or horizon in overcast weather the greatest difficulties in flying operations were the uncertainty of snow surface for take-offs when away from the base, and the need for laborious heating of each engine and its oil before it could be started. The ski landing gears functioned admirably, except on a few sunny days in mid-summer when the temperature rose to near the melting point and caused the runners to stick to such an extent that a scheduled photographic flight was postponed for colder weather in order to preclude damage on landing. The unusually heavy pack ice belt prevented the expedition vessels which had set out from New Zealand from reaching the barrier party until the end of the summer, when the City of New York managed to get through the pack and, caught in a heavy storm, was carried 400 miles off her course to the westward before reaching Little America. In passing through the pack she had observed the ice already to be freezing together again due to the late season, so in order to minimize the chance of being caught in the pack she remained at the Barrier only long enough to take aboard the men, dogs, and 170 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 8 the most essential supplies, before heading north again. The planes, houses, and most of the supplies had to be left behind. The scientific radio records brought back include some 1500 oscillograms and about 2000 radio log sheets, besides a great number of fading records which were taken in New Zealand. A detailed analysis of these data is now under way, and when completed should throw considerable light upon many phases of radio wave propagation. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Mr. H&cx. 1013TH MEETING The 1013th meeting, constituting the 60th annual meeting, was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, December 6, 1930, President LAMBERT presiding. The treasurer reported expenditures of $2578.55 for the year, including the purchase of a real estate note and an item of $312.31 for printing the article on the 1000th meeting. He stated that the number of active members is 227. The Secretaries reported that the following new members were elected dur- ing the year: Miss G. Back, E. 8. Betors, R. H. Canrretp, G. W. GARDINER, L. W. Harstep, H. D. Harrapon, J. P. Lusuensn, R. J. Seucur, K. L. SHERMAN, F. M. Soutsz, O. W. Torruson, C. B. Watts. The death of ASapH Haut was reported. The following officers were declared elected for the year 1931: President, H. L. Curtis; Vice Presidents, L. B. TucKERMAN and O. 8. Apams; Recording Secretary, G. R. Wart; Treasurer, N. H. Heck; Members-at-large of the General Committee, C. Hurr and W. D. SuTcuirFs. At the conclusion of the business meeting Dr. P. R. Hryu spoke on A re- port on the redetermination of the constant of gravitation—Three sets of measure- ments of the constant of gravitation were made, using the torsion balance in vacuum, with small masses of gold, platinum and optical glass. The results with the gold balls are open to some uncertainty because of an absorption of mercury vapor derived from the manometer in connection with the apparatus. The mean results are as follows: Gold 6.678 -0.003 Platinum 6.664 +0.002 Glass 6.674 +0.002 Weighting these in the ratio 1:3:3 the final mean is 6.670 +0.005. The difference between the values for platinum and glass is not to be ascribed to a variation of the constant of gravitation with the material. A special experiment to test this point was carried out with one platinum and one glass ball, using the method of Edtvés. No difference was found as great as one part in 10 million. (Avwthor’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. PawLinc, LAMBERT, HAWKESWORTH, GISH, WRIGHT, and HuMPHREYS. Oscak 8. Apams, Recording Secretary. 1014TH MEETING The 1014th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, Saturday evening, January 3, 1931, President Curtis presiding. The address of the evening was given by the retiring President, W. D. LAMBERT, on The variation of latitude. G. R. Wait, Recording Secretary. APRIL 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 171 ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 422ND MEETING The 422nd regular meeting of the Entomological Society of Washington was held at 8 p.m., Thursday, October 2nd, in Room 43 of the U.S. National Museum, ex-president J. A. Hystor presiding. There were present 27 mem- bers and 20 visitors. The first communication on the regular program was a paper by AusTIN H. CiaRK entitled Notes on the behavior and migration of the milkweed butterfly. — The milkweed butterfly (Danais plexippus), which is normally not very com- mon in the District of Columbia and immediately adjacent region, appeared in great numbers on September 17th and 18th in the meadows west of Cabin John following a heavy rain on September 16th. The individuals were ob- served to devote themselves wholly to feeding, becoming increasingly sociable, for about three days. On September 20th they became restless and a few were seen high in the air passing toward Great Falls (west) before a moderate wind. Their numbers in the fields had decreased, and those that remained showed a desire to rest on trees instead of among the goldenrods and asters as they had done previously. On September 24th they appeared in Washing- ton, becoming frequent in all parts of the city on the following day. On September 26th only about a dozen were found in the fields, and all of these had certainly been less than a week on the wing. Nothing in these observa- tions indicates any departure from the normal life of the adult of this butter- fly—about three days of intensive feeding followed by a much longer period of wandering and later of reproduction combined with wandering. At any time during the summer the insects may be observed, as individuals, flying at a great height. From this general region two migrations have been reported. In one the butterflies were flying south against the wind and in the other they were flying north with the wind. ‘Those we saw were flying west with the wind. Most of the migrations which have been reported, however, have been southerly, especially in the central part of the continent. It was suggested that the migrations of this butterfly are in reality mere aimless wanderings having their inception in the simultaneous appearance of large numbers of individuals which happen to reach the wandering stage at the same time, and further that these migrations take their direction primarily from the prevail- ing meteorological conditions of the season and secondarily from geographical features, especially rivers and the sea coast. In other words, the migrations of this insect are simply the mass expression of the normal habits of the indi- vidual at all times. It was pointed out that the butterflies commonly seen in groups on muddy spots—in this region especially Colzas philodice and Kurema -lisa and not far away also Catopszlia eubule and Eurema nicippe—are almost exclusively fresh males, and that with the coming in of a new brood the insects appear in numbers on mud before they do in the fields. In the exceptionally dry summer of 1930 when all butterflies were scarce, no butterflies frequented the puddles at Cabin John, whereas in the previous normal year puddle butter- flies had been common, even soon after a rain. It was deduced from the evidence that the butterflies about puddles are surplus males which have been driven out of the fields by persecution by older males at the time—immedi- ately following emergence from the pupa—when they normally occupy them- selves chiefly in intensive feeding, and that the appearance of puddle butter- flies is therefore caused by overcrowding in the areas where the food plant is found and wherein the females more or less constantly remain. In the absence of the rivalry incited by the presence of females the young males of these 172 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 8 pierids become gregarious. A large proportion of these males probably go back to the fields as the older males die off. But there is an unassimilible surplus, and it is probably from this unassimilible surplus, consisting of males that have been driven out into the regions devoid of females that the migrating swarms of these and related pierids are composed. ‘These swarms fly in a more or less straight line against the wind just as single traveling males of the species concerned are often seen to do. On the Atlantic seaboard in the late summer Catopsilia eubule is sometimes observed migrating northward at the same season when, and in the same places where, Danais plexippus is migrat- ing southward. In the fields at Cabin John where Danais plexippus was noticed going west with the wind toward Great Falls Catopsilia eubule is occasionally seen at the same season flying directly east against the wind. Unless the migrations of these pierids and the danaid are to be explained as a collective expression of the normal actions of the individuals of the species concerned, it is difficult to understand why two primarily tropical species— Danats plexippus and Catopsilia eubule—should migrate in opposite Use at the same season. (Author’s abstract.) This paper was discussed by Hystop, Larrimer, Buscx, Fiend and HOLLAND. The second communication on the program was given by S. A. RoHWER and was entitled Remarks on the present status of some «insect pests which are subject to federal quarantine.—By the use of lantern slides the speaker discussed outstanding events connected with regulatory and control work on the Mexican fruit worm, Gipsy moth, Satin moth, Japanese beetle, Mediterranean fruit fly, and the European corn borer. In discussing the work on the Mexican fruit worm he pointed out that no infestation of this pest was known to exist in the United States. The last incipient infestation was discovered in Brownsville on November 19, 1929 and was confined to a few trees on two residential properties. Following this discovery intensive control and cleanup work was inaugurated and spraying operations were carried on in United States until March, 1930, and are still being carried on in Matamoros in codperation with the Mexican Government. ‘Traps are being used as an aid in detecting presence of the fly both in the United States and in Mexico. Referring to the work on Gipsy moth, the speaker discussed briefly the infes- tation which was found on Long Island in November 1929, adding that this infestation was now under control and that no recent evidence of infesta- tion had been found. He also stated that shipments made from the nurseries where infestation was known had all been traced and only one showed evi- dence of infestation and that was a single dead egg cluster which was located at Interlaken, New Jersey. Work done during the summer indicated that the Satin moth occurred over a considerably larger territory and that in some areas it has caused a rather intensive defoliation. A map showing localities where the Japanese beetle had been found as a result of scouting during the summer was also exhibited and explained in some detail. In discussing work on the Mediterranean fruit fly the speaker explained methods used in making inten- Sive inspections over the State and stated that no infestation had been found since two pupae were discovered in soil under fallen fruit in a yard at St. | Augustine on July 25, 1930. ‘To show the thoroughness of the inspection work figures indicating the number of specimens which were referred for identifica- tion were given. It was pointed out that these specimens consisted largely of dipterous larvae which could not be separated from Mediterranean fruit fly larvae by any one other than a specialist. In discussing the work on the European corn borer the author used maps showing the distribution of the _ APRIL 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 173 corn borer as determined by scouting which was done during the summer of 1930. The apparent reduction in abundance of the corn borer in the area in which it was known to occur was also briefly discussed. (Author’s abstract.) This paper was discussed by LARRIMER. Remarks were made on invitation by Dr. W. J. Hatt, a visitor from the British South African Company of Rhodesia, S. Africa, who expressed his pleasure at being with us and who gave us a brief resume of his work during the past four years on insect pests of citrus plants in South Africa. The major pests discussed by him were the citrus thrips, Scirtothrips aurantit Faure, and the Citrus aphis, Aphis taveresia Del. Wg.; red scale, Aonzdiella aurantii Mask.; the cotton bollworm, Heliothus obsoleta Fab.; and the Mediterranean fruit fly, Ceratitis capitata Wied. He also made mention of some of his ento- mological work covering a seven-year assignment in Egypt. His itinerary included visits to Florida and California and an extensive study of our research and quarantine work on citrus pests. Dr. Morrison reported briefly on the recent safe arrival at the National Museum of the famous Barnes collection of Lepidoptera concerning which a more detailed discussion will be given later in the year,—probably by Mr. BUSCcK. Brief greetings also were extended to the society by two other visitors, Professor FRENcH, State Entomologist of Virginia, and Dr. M. W. Buackman, formerly of Syracuse University, Syracuse, N. Y., now of the U. 8S. Bureau of Entomology, Washington, D. C. Dr. J. M. Aupricu discussed briefly the present procedure of our society in publishing its minutes in the Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences rather than in the proceedings of the Entomological Society of Wash- ington, and stated that he would discuss this matter more fully at a subse- quent meeting. 423RD MEETING The 423rd meeting of the Entomological Society of Washington was held at 8 p.m., Thursday, November 6, 1930, in Room 43 of the new building of the National Museum, President J. E. Grar presiding. There were present 42 members and 385 visitors. The following individuals, all connected with the Bureau of Entomology, were admitted to membership: Mrs. Marcarretr C. Mansuy, Miss Louise M. Russevt, Miss Ipa Wecxerty, Dr. M. W. Buackman, and Mr. P. W. OMAN. The first communication on the regular program was given by RospErt E. SNODGRASS and was entitled From an egg to an insect. The paper comprised a resumé of the principal facts on record concerning the subject. A consider- able number of slides were shown and explained in detail. The paper was dis- cussed by McINpboo. The second communication on the program was a talk by Prof. S. W. Frost of Pennsylvania State College on Animal life on Barro Colorado Island. —Barro Colorado is the largest island in Gatun Lake, Panama. It was set aside by the governor of the Canal Zone in 1923 as a preserve where any qualified scientist could have an opportunity to study the wild life of a typical rain-drenched tropical jungle. ‘The island is conveniently reached by train from Panama City or Colon. Descending at the little waystation, Frijoles, where bananas are usually in evidence, the scientist is taken by launch across the canal, a distance of about three miles, to Barro Colorado Island. Here the scientist finds shelter, a comfortable bed, good food, tables and all the 174 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 8 necessary equipment for general investigation. Knowing that all the essen- tials and comforts of life are abundantly provided for, he can direct his entire time and attention to the sole purpose for which he came. Botanists, orni- thologists, entomologists, zoologists and many others have availed themselves of the excellent opportunities made possible through the efforts of the local custodian, Mr. James Zetek, and through the zeal of Dr. Thomas Barbour and others who have spent unlimited time in planning and developing the labora- tory. In addition to the two story laboratory building, there is a guest house for visitors, and Dr. Frank Chapman has a small house of his own. At the far side of the Island, on the Drayton and Allison Armour trails, one-room shacks have been built, known as termite houses for they are a part of a proj- ect to determine the resistance of different building materials to termite injury. They also serve as shelters when one is working on this side of the island. They are stocked with provisions, provided with cots and blankets and ready to serve the scientist at any time. Here the writer was the first to sample tea after the rainy season and being very thirsty drank a cupful almost in one draught only to find that it was miserably musty. This, however, was offset by a fine fish hooked just a few feet from the steps of the shack. He did not recognize the fish and no one will ever know what species it was. The island has an area of about six square miles and is, for the most part, densely covered with vegetation. A small clearing has been made near the laboratory where bananas, pineapples and a few other plants are grown. The western half of the island is virgin forest of the finest description. ‘The elevation at the center is only 452 feet above the level of the lake; still one finds travelling strenuous enough on some of the trails and impenetrable in places, when off the trails. ‘There are over twenty-five miles of trails leading from the labora- tory to various points on the shore line. The trails are named after scientists as ‘‘Wheeler,” ‘‘Barbour,’”’ ‘“‘Zetek,”’ ‘Shannon,’ or after benefactors as ‘‘Allison Armour.’ They are uniquely marked every ten meters by a metal tag fastened to a tree. This makes it very easy for visiting scientists to find their way and convenient in reporting things of interest, along the trails. The large trees always attract attention. Bombacopsis sometimes attains a circumference of 190 feet at the base, including the great buttresses, and towers 150 feet above the forest floor. Here the howlers like to roost far from the danger of other animals. Adjacent to the laboratory a magnificant group of trees rise 100 feet from the edge of the lake. The American Museum of Natural History features a habitat group which does justice to these trees with their twining lianas and abundant bird life. It was here that the writer had his first glimpse of Barro Colorado Island. Great clumps of epiphytes, aroids, bromeliads and orchids frequently adorn the bare limbs of trees. From the laboratory we could see a limb supporting a world of life itself. Indi- vidual plants, some perhaps new to science, could be distinguished with field glasses, but the tree was too tall and too remote in the jungle to be conven- iently reached by man. The plants of special interest to the writer were the hosts of leaf-mining insects. They ranged from the low growing weeds to the tallest trees. Nearly three hundred specimens were brought back and twenty- five new plant records added to the flora of the island. Animals and birds were abundant and, as hunting was prohibited, they were unusually tame. From the laboratory alone, two or three species of monkeys were frequently seen. The coati often came to feed at the garbage pile or climbed the papaya to steal fruits. The puma was heard not far distant from the laboratory on several successive nights and finally took its own picture by flash light for Dr. Chapman. The birds were too numerous and interesting to pass with a APRIL 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 175 few words. Some made indelible impressions on our minds that will last forever. The familiar sound of the dropping of heavy dew from the trees at dawn or the notes of the goat sucker will always recall mornings when we awoke refreshed for our work. The muffled notes of the owls greeted us as Dr. Chapman remarks, ‘‘bidding the day ‘Good night’.’’ Along the trails the noisy toucans and guans frequently startled us. The wrens and the oro- pendulas provided us with more pleasant music. ‘Towards the close of day the parrots and parakeets amused us as they flew from tree to tree getting ready to settle down for the night. He who travels cautiously on the trails is sure to see and hear many animals and birds even though he be an entomologist with his whole nervous system fastened on a tiny insect just ready to take flight. The coati was seen more frequently than any of the other animals. One day in making a turn on Fairchilds trail the writer came upon three coati feeding upon the inner fleshy pulp that surrounds the seeds of the monkey comb (A peiba aspera). Some other animals, possibly parrots, had been feed- ing there before and had split open many of the pods. The seeds missed by the parrots and avoided by the coatis, yielded a new species of Bruchid for the entomologist. The collared peccary. was seen on many different occasions. One day the writer watched about twenty-five file across the trail fifteen feet ahead of him. As the last animal passed, the writer raised his insect net, the animal paused for a moment then slowly walked away. At the next bend in the trail he came upon the same herd of peccaries. They were travelling nearly in a straight line while the writer was following the crooked trail. Again he waited for them to pass and at the same time took a few motion pictures. The larger animals as the puma, the tapir and the deer are seldom seen. Dr. Frank Chapman has the distinction of being the only one that has seen a puma on the Island. He has however taken many excellent pictures of pumas, ocelots and tapirs in the low wet places on the Island. Whoever spends a little time on the Island soon becomes acquainted with the monkeys. The howlers take to the tree tops and are more frequently heard than seen. The passing airplanes disturb their peace and they set up a terrific roar. The white faced monkeys are encountered more often. They are inquisitive little fellows and are as anxious to see their peculiar relatives as we are to view them. By remaining quiet they would play about the branches for a long time, peer down at us and even descend to a lower level in hopes of getting a better view. A little noise or motion disturbs them and they go scampering over the tree tops with more agility than man walks on the ground. Along the shores of the island the basalisks and iguana were seen frequently. The basalisks were especially numerous. They were difficult to locate for they had the habit of remaining perfectly quiet for a long period of time and blended well in color with their background. When disturbed they skipped over the water with tremendous speed. With a little care one could paddle a cayuca within eight or ten feet of them. There is no doubt that one can see more tropical life on Barro Colorado Island than by penetrating the average jungle, for the trails are used by animals as well as man and further permit man to travel noiselessly and easily to remote parts of the island. It is remarkable to think of sucha comparatively small bit of land housing such a large fauna and flora. All visiting scientists have found its climate enticing and its resources unlimited. Several reels of motion pictures were shown covering various phases of animal and plant life on the Island. 424TH MEETING The 424th regular meeting of the Entomological Society of Washington was held at 8 p.m., Thursday, December 4, in Room 43 of the new building of the 176 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 8 National Museum, President J. E. GraF presiding. There were present 31 members and 11 visitors. Mr. W. D. Resp, of the U. 8. Entomological Laboratory at Danville, Va., was elected to membership on recommendation of the Executive Committee. A motion was offered by Dr. J. M. Aupricu as follows: Moved, that the Executive Committee be instructed to arrange for the publication of the minutes of our meetings in our own Proceedings hereafter, beginning with the January meeting. In commenting on the motion, Doctor AupRicH stated that the minutes of the society for several years past have been published in the Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences and that such procedure appeared inconsistent with the fact that our only publication was entitled “‘Proceedings.”’ He read some comparative figures regarding space require- ments and publication costs, and indicated that he for one would be willing to aid pro rata in whatever increased cost of publication the adoption.of this motion might entail. After comments by Ewinc, Hystop, and Rouwer, the latter speaking against the motion, the society voted 12 to 11 in favor of the motion. The following were elected officers of the society for 1931: President: A. C. Baker; First Vice-President: F. C. BisHopp; Second Vice-President: C. T. GREENE; Recording Secretary: J. 8S. WapE; Editor: W. R. Wauton; Corre- sponding Secretary-Treasurer: 8. A. Ronwer; Representative of the Washing- ton Academy of Sciences: H. Morrison; Executive Commitiee: The officers and T. E. Snyper, A. N. CaupE.1, W. H. Larrimer. During intervals in the election of officers, a note was presented by Dr. W. D. Prerce on The mango weevils.—A number of species of weevils breed in the seed of mango in the Orient, and as they have not all been listed in their proper genus it is well to publish the following notes on the synonymy of the genus Sternochetus to which four of the mango weevils belong. Genus Sternochetus (Kolbe) Hubenthal (1915) Sternochetus (Kolbe) Hubenthal (1915) Ent. Mitt., 4: 128, type mangiferae Fabricius. Below is cited the synonymy of the mango weevils which may be assigned to this genus: Sternochetus mangiferae (Fabricius) Hubenthal Curculio mangiferae Fabricius (1792) Ent. Syst., 17: 432, No. 161. Rhynchaenus mangiferae Fabricius (1801) Syst. Eleuth., 2: 473, No. 173. Cryptorhynchus mangiferae Schénherr (1826) Cure. Disp. Meth., p. 282; Boheman (1837) Schénherr’s Gen. et Sp. Cure., 4: 91. Sternochetus mangiferae Hubenthal (1915) Ent. Mitt., 4, No. 4-6, pp. 128, 129; Pierce (1917) Manual of Dangerous Insects, p. 144, fig. 72. Originally described from seeds of mango in India orientalis. Recorded by Boheman from India orientalis, Bengalia, Java, He-de-France, Madagascar. According to Lefroy is confined to Southern India and Ceylon. This is the species most commonly known as the Mango Weevil. It has ben written about by many authors and its habits are pretty well known. It breeds in the seed of the mango. Sternochetus gravis (Fabricius) Pierce Curculio gravis Fabricius (1792) Ent. Syst., 12: 485, no. 172. Cape of Good Hope. Rhynchoenus gravis Fabricius (1801) Syst. Eleuth., 2: 481, no. 203. APRIL 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 177 Cryptorhynchus gravis Stebbing (1914) Indian Forest Insects, p. 436, fig. 289. Sternochetus gravis Pierce (1917) Manual of Dangerous Insects, pp. 1438, 144, fig. 71. Stebbing calls this the Northern Mango Weevil of India. The larvae first feed in the pulp and then enter the seed. Habitat: United Provinces, Bengal, Assam. Sternochetus frigidus (Fabricius) Pierce Curculio frigidus Fabricius (1787) Mant. Ins. App., p. 381. Curculio chinensis Olivier (1790) Encyce. Meth., Ins., 5: 507, no. 166. Rhynchaenus frigidus (chinensis) Fabricius (1801) Syst. Eleuth., 2: 470, 471, no. 158. Rhynchaenus chinensis Olivier (1807) Entomologie, 5, no. 83, p. 175; tab. 8, fig.97. The plate is referred to by Olivier (1790) and Fabricius (A801). Cryptorhynchus frigidus Rosenschoeld (1837) Schénherr’s Gen. et Sp. Curc., As hl 5. Cryptorhynchus frigidus Faust (1894) Ann. Mus. Genova, ser. 2, 14 (34): 287. Fabricius records from Amboina; Rosenschoeld from India orientalis, Bengal, Java, Madagascar, New Holland; Faust from Burma. Faust records it as bred from fruit of mango. Sternochetus oliviert (Faust) Pierce Cryptorhynchus oliviert Faust (1893) Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., 61: 518, 519. Cryptorhynchus oliviert Faust (1894) Ann. Mus. Genova, ser. 2, 14 (34): 287. Faust (1893) recorded it from Saigon and (1894) from Schwegoo (Burma). It attacks mango in Java, material having been received from Buitenzorg, collected by Paul Vandergoot. Sternochetus poricollis (Faust) Pierce Cryptorhynchus poricollis Faust (1894) Ann. Mus. Genova, ser. 2, 14 (34): 287, 288. Recorded from Burma. I have no definite host record on this species. (Author’s abstract.) ' Doctor ALpRIcH mentioned receiving a letter from one of his acquaintances in the British Museum in London, advising that the entomological section recently has moved into new quarters on the ground floor, in which twice as much room is now available for entomological work. This was commented on by Hystop. J. G. SANDERS, of Philadelphia, and E. A. RicHmMonp, of SEE tay Mass., both visitors, on invitation greeted the society and expressed pleasure at being with us. Mr. GrarF referred to the recent publication of a book by Doctor Howarp, entitled A history of applied entomology, and this was discussed very briefly by LARRIMER and EwIne. Austin H. Ciark commented briefly on some recent work performed by him in making photographs of butterfly wings and showed several specimens of his work. Comments were made on his remarks by Grar, Morrison, RouWER, PIERCE, and Hystop. The first communication on the regular program was given by Dr. H. E. EwInG and was entitled The distribution and host relationships of ectoparasites, with special reference to chiggers.—The distribution of fleas in North America was discussed and a map presented showing the localities in the United States 178 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 8 from which specimens of the human flea, Pulex irritans Linnaeus, have been taken. This flea occurs generally throughout the more humid parts of the Mississippi Valley, along the Pacific slope and in a restricted area in the Middle Atlantic States. The probable reasons for its absence from more than half the area of our country were discussed. Preliminary results of an ectoparasite survey of amphibians, reptiles, birds and mammals, of the South Atlantic Slope of the United States, were presented. This showed amphibians to be the most heavily parasitized of the four classes with chiggers, the per cent being 23.8. Mammals, on the other hand, had the highest percentage of infestation with all ectoparasites (57.1 per cent). The degree of infestation with ectoparasites for the four classes of vertebrates considered was shown also by plotted curves. Recent advances made by others concerning the distribution and host relationships of parasites were mentioned and discussed. Live specimens of some of the more important natural hosts of our common chigger, Trombicula irritans (Riley), were exhibited. (Author’s abstract.) A considerable number of slides and specimens of various animal forms were shown. The paper was discussed by Hystop, WapLny, BisHopp, ALDRICH, and PIERCE. J.S. Wapku, Recording Secretary. (Editor’s Note.—In accordance with action taken at the 424th meeting, further pro- ceedings of the Entomological Society will be published in the Proceedings of the Ento- mological Society of Washington.) GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 471ST MEETING The 471st meeting was held at the Cosmos Club January 14, 1931, President MBINZER presiding. Program: Symposium on drought of 1930. A. H. Horton: The Potomac River and the drought of 1930.—The Potomac River is one of the larger streams in the United States which drain into the Atlantic Ocean. Its drainage area is larger than that of the Connecticut, Hudson, Delaware, James, or Savannah Rivers and about half as large as that of the Susquehanna River. The drainage area of the Potomac River at Great Falls is about 11,500 square miles—about 10 per cent less than the combined area of Massachusetts and Connecticut. The altitude of the basin ranges from sea level at Washington to about 3,000 feet at the divide on the south and west. The North Branch is considered the main stem of the river even though the drainage area of the South Branch is somewhat larger. The average or normal annual precipitation of the basin is about 40 inches. The maximum annual precipitation of about 47 inches occurred in 1891. The minimum previous to 1930 was about 31 inches in 1895. Records of the flow of the river at Great Falls or at Point of Rocks are available since 1896. During this period of about 33 years there were five large floods ranging from 175,000 second-feet to 265,000 second-feet, the largest of these being the flood of May, 1924. The maximum known flood, however, was that of June, 1889, which was caused by a rainfall on the basin of 5.3 inches in three days. The maximum discharge of this flood was about 390,000 second-feet at Great Falls, roughly 50 per cent larger than the flood of May, 1924. Storms with much greater rainfall have occurred along the Atlantic Coast, but fortunately they have missed the Potomac basin. The rainfall on the Potomac River basin in 1930 was approximately 22 APRIL 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 179 inches, about 55 per cent of the normal and about 35 per cent less than in the driest year previous to 1930. The mean daily flow at Great Falls for the lowest 7-day period in 1930 was 821 second-feet in August, 25 per cent less than the previous record, and the mean daily flow for the lowest month in 1930 was 870 second-feet in October, about 45 per cent less than the previous record. During the 33 years of record from 1897 to 1929, the flow at Great Falls was less than 1,000 second-feet for only 38 days, while in 1930 the flow was less than 1,000 second-feet for 83 days during the period August to October. This flow was almost wholly from underground sources for there was but little surface runoff, as the small amount of precipitation during these months was mostly absorbed by vegetation. The supply of ground water has probably been seriously depleted and unless precipitation occurs this year under conditions favorable for replenish- ing the ground-water supply, the flow of the Potomac River during the low- water period of 1931 will probably be less than for 1930. In this connection, it should be noted that the flow for the minimum week of 821 second-feet was at least five times the amount needed for the city of Washington. (Author’s abstract.) Miss M. D. Fostrer: The effect of the drought upon the quality of the water of the Potomac River—Two charts compare the fluctuations of discharge, turbidity and total hardness of the water of the Potomac River for a normal year (October, 1928-September, 1929) and for the period October, 1929 to December, 1930. Ina normal year (as shown in the first chart) the discharge is relatively low in the fall, rises in the winter, with several high stages in the spring, decreases in June and July, and is again low in the late summer and fall. The turbidity, which is relatively proportional to the material in sus- pension, follows in a general way the discharge; any disagreements may be attributed to local rains which erode parts of the drainage basin more or less than an average amount. The hardness, plotted to indicate changes in quality, varies inversely with the discharge—being relatively high in the fall, low in the spring and increasing again in the late summer and early fall. The second chart shows that the whole period—October, 1929 to December, 1930—was abnormal; high stages of the river in the fall, lower peaks than normal in the spring (a maximum of about 35,000 second feet in 1930 as com- pared with a maximum of 173,000 second feet in 1929), and after the middle of July a uniformly low discharge of 800-900 second feet until the last of Decem- ber. With the earlier decrease in discharge the hardness of the water began to increase at an earlier date than usual and continued high longer, reaching a maximum of 136 parts per million, as compared with a maximum of 111 parts per million in the fall of 1929. The drought continued until the 27th day of December, when the hardness was 134 parts per million. On December 28, the hardness dropped to 31 parts per million, simultaneously with a rise in discharge greater than since April and with a great increase in turbidity. The increase in hardness with decrease in discharge may be attributed to the greater proportion of spring water present. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Frercuson, E. 8. Hopkins, and Davip WHITE. Caru J. Lauter: Effect of the drought on filtration processes for the Washing- ton water supply. Discussed by Hrss and BrabDLey. W.N. Waite: Effects of the drought on wells and springs. Discussed by Mztnzrr, Rusry, Laurer, McQuEEn, and THOMPSON. H. B. Humpurey: Influence of vegetation on stream flow during the drought.— During the period September 1 to October 12, inclusive, daily observations on the rate of stream discharge were carried on by the author at his home in 180 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 8 Cabin John, Md. The stream, fed by springs, lies in a deep ravine and dis- charges into a small reservoir. In this ravine there were growing and drawing upon the water supply, at the time the readings were made, 32 trees of various species and sizes plus a fairly dense undergrowth of shrubs and annuals. It was observed that between 2:30 p.m. and 7:30 p.m. no water was discharging from the stream. Beginning at about 7:30 p.m. there was a mere trickle and the rate of discharge increased hourly until between 5:00 and 7:00 a.m. when it attained a maximum of 4.78 quarts per minute. This maximum flow was maintained until about 9:30 a.m. when it began to decline, ceasing altogether at 2:30 p.m. It was subsequently shown that this diurnal variation in stream discharge was directly related to the transpiration carried on by the dependent trees and associated plant growth. Factors, such as light and tem- perature, affected the water intake of the vegetation and registered their effect on the rate of stream discharge. Later, when the leaves fell from the trees and transpiration processes had ceased, the stream discharge rose to 6 quarts per minute and this rate has prevailed with occasional fluctuations due to rains. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by MEINzER, SPENCER, HeckmMErR, MisEr, and W. N. Wuire. M. I. Goupman: Some brologic effects of the ‘drought an tributaries of Chesa- peake Bay.—The paper was based on a report by Truitt and Algire, to the State Conservation Department of Maryland, on an unusual mortality of fishes in the Severn and Magothy Rivers. This report was very generously placed at the disposal of the speaker by Doctor Truitt. The object of the paper was to bring out the fact that events like the drought of 1930 which, from the geological point of view, may be regarded as inherent factors in an environment rather than as catastrophic events, may account for sudden high mortalities of organisms such as might result in stratification surfaces covered with the remains of fishes or other organisms. The drought resulted in an upstream shift of salinity in Chesapeake Bay and its tributaries which, in the Susquehanna River amounted to about 30 miles, in the Potomac to about 16 miles. In small tributaries with small watersheds like the Severn and Magothy rivers the effect was even more pronounced. The mortality occurred between the 5th and 19th of November, 1930. The investigation by Truitt and Algire showed an increase of the salinity of these waters, (as indicated by the specific gravity) to about eight times normal, equivalent to a salinity about half that of normal sea water. Turbidity, pH, and other chemical and physical factors appeared normal. Seine hauls in areas in which fresh water fishes ordinarily abounded yielded only marine fishes which appeared perfectly healthy. ‘The fishes affected were all fresh water forms. Parasitic marine isopods were found attached to the gills of most of the dead or dying fishes. There appears to be little doubt that, directly or indirectly, abnormal salinity, resulting from the drought, was responsible for the death of the fishes. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Heckmer, Truitt, Hopkins, and THOMPSON. 472ND MEETING The 472nd meeting was held at the Cosmos Club on January 28, 1931, President Mxtnzer presiding. Informal communications: W. H. BrapLey compared certain fine-grained non-calcareous laminated marine sediments with recent laminated sediments of lacustrine origin, followed Rubey in interpreting the laminations in the marine sediments as probably varves resulting from a maximum summer pulse in the production of planktonic organisms, and pointed out that according to APRIL 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 181 this interpretation the laminations form a basis for estimating rates of sedi- mentation and intervals of geologic time. M. I. GotpMaAN called attention to two outstanding sets of joints which control the course of the Potomac River near Great Falls, this effect of jointing being disclosed by a stereo-photograph compiled from airplane views. Program: C. 8. Ross: The Valles Mountain volcanic crater, New Mexico. Discussed by Cross and MmrtIE. ApoupH Knorr: The Engels copper district, California. Discussed by SHorT, LOUGHLIN, R. C. WELLS, and GREIG. 473RD MEETING The 473rd meeting was held at the Cosmos Club on February 11, 1931, President MrInzeEr presiding. Informal communications: W.C. ALDEN described large ripple marks occur- ring on the upstream end of a silt bar at the confluence of the Flathead River and one channel of the Stillwater River, 3 miles southeast of Kalispell, Mon- tana. These marks were 5 to 15 feet from crest to crest by 8 to 12 inches deep, and were likened to forms described by Kindle as current ripples or mammoth ripples. Discussed by MATTHES. G. R. MansrFretp showed a polished specimen of Tempskya knowltont, a fern, from the Wayan formation of Cretaceous age in the Lanes Creek quad- rangle, southeastern Idaho. The common fossil form consists of hundreds of stems entwined in a dense root net, the whole resembling fossilized wood. Discussed by Hzss. Program: F.C. Kracexk: Recent studies of alkali silicate systems. Discussed by GILLULY. P. J. SHENON: The Flathead mine, Montana, an unusual silver deposit.— The Flathead mine is located 10 miles west of Flathead lake in Flathead County, Montana. It has produced over a million ounces of silver and con- siderable lead, and development work indicates even a greater future produc- tion. The region is underlain principally by flat lying Belt rocks of Algonkian age. Ten isolated patches of voleanic rocks, principally latite and trachyte tuffs and flows, rest upon the Belt rocks and two small exposures apparently represent outcrops of intrusive rocks. The latter are porphyrytic latites and enclose the ore at the mine. The most unusual feature of the intrusive rock is the size of its orthoclase phenocrysts, many of which are more than three inches long. In the ore many of the feldspar phenocrysts have been removed and are now represented by empty casts or casts which are partly filled with barite, silica, and in lesser amounts, a clay mineral and limonite. The ore occurs as an irregular body, 150 feet wide by 400 feet in length at its greatest dimensions. On the upper levels the ore body is roughly elliptical in hori- zontal plane. Vertical cross-sections show that the ore body somewhat resembles a molar tooth with one or more roots pointing downward. Inclu- sions of Belt rocks and irregular patches of brown nontronite mud occur through the ore. The hypogene ore minerals include galena and a complex sulphide of silver, antimony, and bismuth, as well as pyrite and a little enargite. Argentite, covellite, and marcasite occur as supergene sulphides. Barite, quartz, clay, and alunite constitute the principal gangue minerals. More than one period of mineralization is evident. Quartz and pyrite first formed in the wall rock. Fractures were then developed which were healed principally by fine grained quartz, barite, and sulphides, in order of deposition. The evidence shows 182. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 8 that the deposit formed at a depth of less than 400 feet and probably nearer 200 feet below the land surface and that the outline of the cellular ore approxi- mates the outline of the hypogene mineralization. Secondary enrichment has been a very important process in the formation of the commercial ore. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by TuNELL, Hewert, LOUGHLIN, and NoLaAN. K. O. Utricu: Highlights of the past season’s work in early Paleozoic strati- graphy. C. H. Danz, ArtHur M. Pipmr, Secretaries SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS The twelfth annual meeting of the American Geophysical Union and of its Sections will be held April 30 and May 1, 1931 at the headquarters of the National Academy of Sciences, Washington, D. C. A seventh Section, known as the Section of Hydrology, has been formed in the past year and will hold its first meeting under the chairmanship of O. E. Mrernzmr. The American Geographical Society, Carnegie Institution of Washington, Norwegian Geophysical Institution, Wood’s Hole Oceanographic Institution and the Cleveland Museum of Natural History are cooperating in the prep- arations for scientific work to be undertaken by the Wilkins-Ellsworth Trans-Arctic Submarine Expedition. Dr. J. Barres, Professor of Physics at the Forstlicher Hochschule of Eberswalde, Germany, who has been appointed a research associate of the Carnegie Institution of Washington for one year, will arrive in Washington, April 8. Dr. Barress will undertake a study in the Department of Terres- trial Magnetism of the interpretation of terrestrial-magnetic and electric data and laboratory methods. S. L. Seaton, former observer and radio operator on the CARNEGIE, expects to leave during the summer for the Huancayo Magnetic Observatory, Peru, to install equipment for an experimental radio station for which an appropriation has now been made by the Carnegie Institution of Washington. Obituary Capt. Henry Martyn Paut, U.S.N., retired, died on Sunday, March 15, following a long illness. Born at Dedham, Mass., in 1851, he graduated from Dartmouth College in 1873 and from Thayer School of Civil Engineering in 1875. He served as assistant astronomer at the Naval Observatory from 1875 to 1880 and again from 1883 to 1899. In the interim he was professor of astronomy in the Imperial University, Tokyo, Japan. It is believed that he was the first to introduce the study of astronomy into a Japanese University. In 1899 he was assigned to duty in the Bureau of Yards and Docks and in 1905 he was ordered to the Naval Academy, where he taught mathematics until shortly before his retirement in 1913. Capt. Pauu was a fellow of the American Association for the Advancement of Science and a member of the Washington Academy of Sciences and of the Philosophical Society of Washington. OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS _--~_-—s- THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND 2 ms ne | AFFILIATED SOCIETIES g Pe 7 aa : ANNOUNCEMENT OF MEETINGS 2 - Tuesday, April 21 The Anthropological Society ee The Historical Society ae Wednesday, April 22 The Geological Society i The Medical Society Saturday, April 25 The Philosophical Society _ Wednesday, April29 The Medical Society a peas May 2 The Biological Society es iy ‘The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if ce Sho: caitore by the eleventh and,twenty-fifth day of each month. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: N. A. Coss, Bureau of Plant Industry. _ Corresponding Secretary: Paut E. Hows, Bureau of Animal Industry. ae Recording Secretary: Cuartes Tom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. Treasurer: Hunry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. + The wees we eases cee The Patoriolosios! Sack ieee we a The Geological Sovlsty ects. seu ScrEnTIFIC Notes AND NEWS......++.5 OBITUARY wa wibais-o aires } cease vga Coy dees cowie ete C cers men cae e ‘ No, 9 WASHINGTON ACADEMY MS tee xe te ee et _ ee ee. Sn) it Rel ee Ba ey ites: | pig) 3 * ~~ a y, be apa ds f ne OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS C. WrtHeEe Cooke CHARLES DRECHSLER Hues L. DrypEen U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. Perers Harotp Morrison PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GoLpMAN G. W. Stross BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY AGNES CHASE J. R. SWANTON BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY RoagerR C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY. PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Roya anp GUILFORD AVEs. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as Second Ciass Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. Journal of the ee Academy of Sciences - ee This JourNAL, the official oe of the Washington Academy of Sciences, Sabie (1) short original ‘papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes — of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNALis issued semi- — monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer when | it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt — publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in ie issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. . Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors: they ante o” : clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. ‘The | editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References — should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered — serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced — by zine etchings being preferable. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors — will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Author’s Reprints—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers» bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and — date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord- ance with the following schedule of prices: . : Copies 4pp 8 pp 12 pp 16 pp Covers FW Bae ag ane rs, Sep Mag Me CI aS RRs hs MES RE oe rh $2. 00 100 $ .50 $ .55 $ .60 $1.10 2.50 150 90 1.00 1.10 1.66 3.60 260 orS 1.50 1. 60 2.10 3. 50 250 1.65 2.00 2.10 2. 60 4.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in one i corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints | < should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. The rate of Subscription per volume Se ern irene SE Dee eee “eh 00* Semi-monthlhy ‘numbers. 3.032. ie Gow ed kes Cae soe a ee oe Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15)..... Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’ and addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C. Exchanges.—The JourRNAL does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made within ; thirty days after date of the following issue. * Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rate are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21 MAY 4, 1931 No. 9 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY.—The influence of pressure on the solubil- ity of sodium chloride in water. A new method for the measurement of the solubilities of electrolytes under pressure. L. H. ApAms and R. E. Hatt, ‘aici Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of Washington. In this paper is described a method for the determination of the sol- ubility of a salt or other electrolyte under pressure. ‘The method in- volves (1) a means for measuring the concentration of a solution in a place inaccessible to direct observation, as in a pressure apparatus, without disturbing the equilibrium between solid and liquid, and (2) a simple arrangement for obtaining saturation in a vessel that can not be shaken and is not provided with a mechanical stirrer. The con- centration is determined by measuring with sufficient precision the electrical resistance of the solution, and saturation is attained by using a cell in which convection-currents readily produce complete equilib- rium between solid and liquid. This method has been applied to the study of the system, NaCl-H;O, under pressure, and some measure- ments on the effect of pressure on the solubility of sodium chloride have been made. Apparatus. The conductivity cell, alee in Fig. 1, was constructed of Kavalier glass with platinum electrodes sealed dhnoueh the sides of the narrow part of the cell, which was about 5 mm. inside diameter and about 4 em. between electrodes. In order to obtain with saturated salt solu- tions a resistance that was not inconveniently low, especially in a cell small enough to go into the pressure apparatus, small ring-shaped elec- trodes were used. These were made by bending platinum wire of 0.4 mm. diameter into circular loops about 3 mm. outside diameter and then closing the loop by soldering with gold. The electrodes were 1 Received March 25, 1931. 183 184 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 9 coated with platinum black in accordance with the usual procedure? for conductivity measurements. Outside the cell the platinum wires were fused on to gold wires in order to have the resistance of the leads as low as possible. Near the top and at the bottom of the cell, as shown in the diagram, were placed several crystals of the salt under investigation, the remainder of the space inside the cell, up to within 1.5 cm. of the top, being filled with saturated solution. The enlarged portion at the lower end of the cell was fitted with a ground joint to facilitate the placing of crystals at the bottom. It was expected that convection currents in the cell would operate in such a way as to keep the solution always saturated. Thus, if at any time the concentration were less than the equilibrium value, solid would tend to dissolve, and the more concentrated, denser, solu- tion would sink toward the bottom of the cell. This action would continue until the solution became com- pletely saturated. On the other hand, if for any reason the solution became supersaturated, salt would crystallize out, and the less concentrated, lighter, solution produced at the bottom of the cell would rise toward the top, until as before equilibrium was attained. Furthermore, it was expected that the at- tainment of equilibrium in a cell of the size and shape shown in the diagram would be sufficiently rapid to make the method a convenient one. How well this supposition was justified will be evident from some preliminary experiments, which will be described be- low. 7 ! In order to use the electrical conductivity for deter- mining the solubility of an electrolyte’ at various pres- = sures it is necessary to know the conductivity over a Fig. 1—Con- range of concentrations in the vicinity of saturation ductivity cell for 5 Ses aieiming: satu: and also over the range of pressures at which it is rated solution under pressure, 2 KoHLRAUSCH and Housporn. Das Leitverm6égen der Elektro- (about natural lyte, p. 9 (Leipzig, 1898). size). 3 The application of conductivity to the analysis of solutions has been discussed in detail by KoHLRauscH and HOLBORN (op. cit.). Conductivity methods have been used to determine the progress of chemical reactions at atmospheric pressure by WALKER and Kay (J. Chem. Soc. 71: 489. 1889) and by WaLKER (Proc. Roy. Soc. 78 A: 157. 1908), and at higher pressures by CoHEN and Kaiser (Zeit. phys. Chem. 89: 338. 1915). MAY 4, 1931 ADAMS AND HALL: SOLUBILITY OF SODIUM CHLORIDE 185. desired to work. Some measurements have already been made by previous investigators on the effect of pressure on the conductivity of solutions of various salts including sodium chloride, but the pres-— sure-range was not large enough, and sufficient attention was not given to the nearly saturated solutions. Even at atmospheric pressure, although the conductivity of dilute solutions has been thoroughly in- vestigated, the available data for concentrated solutions are so meager that they are practically valueless for measuring concentrations. Additional measurements were therefore required. The detailed results of the investigation on the conductivity of sodium chloride solu- tions under pressures up to 4000 bars (metric atmospheres) and the complete description of the apparatus will be published in another paper. The conductivity-cell, surrounded by sulphur-free oil, was subjected to pressure in a steel bomb, which was placed in a thermostat, with kerosene as the liquid. The temperature was maintained at 30°, because of the inconvenience of running the thermostat at a lower temperature during the summer months. The maximum variation in temperature of the thermostat was 1 or 2 thousandths of a degree. Pressure was generated by means of a hand-pump and pressure-in- tensifier, and was measured with a resistance-gauge. The cell was connected to insulated leads at the top of the bomb and thence to a slide-wire bridge, which was supplied with alternating current at 1000 cycles per second. A telephone receiver served to determine the bal- ance-point of the bridge. On account of the tendency to heating- effects in the type of cell that was used, the maximum current that could safely be passed through the cell was about 0.5 milliampere. When the limiting current is so small, sufficient sensitivity can not be obtained with the telephone alone; but by connecting a two-stage electron-tube amplifier between the bridge and the telephone* there is no difficulty in making the bridge-setting to within one-tenth of a division, which corresponds to a precision of 1 part in 50,000 in the resistance-measurement. This precision is quite satisfactory for elec- trolytic solutions, although, of course, much greater refinement is possible in the measurement of metallic resistances, with which direct current can be used. Test of saturation in the convection-cell. Prior to the determination of solubility under pressure, a preliminary experiment was made to find out how well saturation would take place in the chosen type of cell. For this purpose it was sufficient to alter the conditions so that the solubility of a particular salt would be increased or decreased and to 4 Hatuand Apams. Journ. Am. Chem. Soc. 41: 1515-1525. 1919. 186 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 9 observe the course of the conductivity with time. The simplest way to alter the solubility is by changing the temperature, and for conveni- ence a Salt with a large temperature-coefficient of solubility should be chosen. Accordingly the saturation-test was conducted as follows: The cell was nearly filled with saturated CuSO, solution, crystals of the salt being at the top and bottom, as shown in Fig. 1. It was then placed in the bomb just as it was for the measurements under pressure, — and the thermostat adjusted to a temperature around 30°. After equilibrium was attained, as shown by the resistance of the cell reaching a constant value, the temperature was changed somewhat (usually one-half to one degree) and the resistance of the cell again measured at suitable intervals of time. This procedure was repeated at several temperatures so that equilibrium would be approached from both above and below and at two different temperatures. The first and large effect observed after each change of temperature was that due to the temperature-coefficient of resistance, but since the tempera- ture had probably become quite uniform as well as constant in one- half hour or less, the subsequent drift in resistance was due to the change in concentration of the solution. Apparently this change takes place approximately according to a simple exponential relation with respect to time, so that saturation, following a rise in temperature, proceeds about half way to equilibrium in 2 hours, and is sensibly complete in 24 hours. On the other hand, after a drop in temperature about 5 hours is required for the change in concentration to reach one- half the final amount, and about 2 days to be completed. . This differ- ence in behavior in the two cases is probably connected with the way in which equilibrium is attained within the convection-cell. When the solution is unsaturated, as for example immediately after a rise in temperature, the solution proceeds to saturate itself by dissolving salt at the top, but, when it is supersaturated, salt crystallizes out at the lower end. Probably the rate at which salt will dissolve at the top is considerably greater than that at which it will crystallize at the bottom. In Table I are summarized the results of the preliminary test of the convection-cell. The first column gives the equilibrium temperature; the second, the change in temperature immediately preceding the maintenance of constant temperature; and the third, the final value for the resistance. Each of the 8 series of measurements was continued for 2 to 8 days in order to make sure that the resistance had become constant. The average of the 4 equilibrium values at 30.05° is 247.700 ohms, and of the 4 at 30.95° is 242.240. From the fourth column of MAY 4, 1931 ADAMS AND HALL: SOLUBILITY OF SODIUM CHLORIDE 187 Table I, which shows the deviation in resistance from the correspond- ing average, it is evident that equilibrium was attained to a very satis- factory extent. The average deviation (without regard to sign) is 0.010 ohm, and the uncertainty in the equilibrium value is therefore only about twice the uncertainty in the resistance measurements them- selves. It is important to determine what this degree of precision means in terms of the concentration of salt in the solution. From conductivity data’ it may be calculated that at 30° with a saturated solution of CuSO, (19.6 per cent) a decrease in salt content of 1 per cent—1.e., from 19.6 to 18.6 per cent—will cause a fractional increase in resistiv- ity of 0.0238, which with a cell of 240 ohms resistance gives 5.5 ohms change for 1 per cent change in concentration. From this it follows that an uncertainty of 0.010 ohm in resistance corresponds to 0.002 TABLE I.—SummMary oF RESULTS OF SATURATION TEST Temperature Previous temperature Resistance at equil. Deviation of resist. GCs) change (ohms) from av. 30.05 —0.90 247 .683 —0.017 ae +0.49 247.711 7 LE - —0.90 247 .695 — 5 oi +0.35 247 .710 + 10 30.95 —0.60 242 . 235 — 5 i +0.90 242 .230 — 10 ES +0.90 242.260 + 20 o —0.57 242 .236 _ 4 per cent CuSO,, and that on the average the cell came to within 0.002 per cent of the equilibrium concentration of the salt. Even with the maximum discrepancy (0.020 ohm) the uncertainty is only twice as large. These results showed quite definitely that it was feasible to obtain complete equilibrium between salt and solution in the convection-cell, and they indicated that the cell could be used with confidence in de- termining the solubility of a salt under pressure, because, in whatever 5 KOHLRAUSCH and HOLBORN. op. cit., p. 151. 6 It is interesting to note the relative effects of increased temperature and increased concentration on the resistance of a cell containing a saturated solution. At 30° an increase in temperature of 1° increases the solubility of CuSO, 0.25 per cent; the cell resistance would therefore decrease 0.25 x 5.5 or 1.4 ohm due to the solubility change. Since the temperature coefficient of the resistivity of a 19.6 per cent CuSO, solution at 30° is —0.019, the decrease in resistance due to temperature change alone is 0.019 x 240 or 4.6 ohms, which is over three times the change due to increased solubility. This illustrates the importance of maintaining the temperature constant to about 0.001°. 188 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 9 way the solubility were altered, by pressure as well as by changes in temperature, the cell would maintain saturated solution between the electrodes. Experimental results with NaCl under pressure. As mentioned above, the first step was to determine the effect of pressure on the conductiv- ity of sodium chloride solutions at constant composition. An exten- Sive series of measurements at pressures up to 4000 bars, at various concentrations, and at a temperature of 30°, was made with the same cell as was used in the solubility experiments, except, of course, that no solid salt was placed in the cell. The method and results for the effect of pressure on conductivity will be published in detail elsewhere. TABLE II.—Resutts For THE EFFECT OF PRESSURE ON THE SOLUBILITY OF NaCl at 29.93° Pressure He mosey of Bene ae —AR LNG yucroase Group Averages in bars soln. satd. | “soln. under | (= Ry — Rs) AC Sen? under pressure Rae per cent P AC 1 58.19 (58 . 18.) (—0.004) 0.41 0.00 1 0.00 293 58 .40 58 .49 0.09 .36 .26 307 58 .42 58.51 .09 .36 .26 oe 28 412 58 .52 58 .63 11 .30 32 412 .o2 812 59 .03 59.17 14 .28 ol 877 59.13 59.27 14 27 93 a ve 1258 59.76 59.90 14 21 .68 1266 59.77 59.91 14 21 .68 1218 59.70 59.83 13 22 .60 ey wD 1293 59.82 59.96 14 21 .68 1437 60.08 60.22 14 .19 15 1429 60.07 60.21 14 19 15 1428 15 1419 60.05 60.19 14 19 15 1911 61.05 61.18 13 13 1.01 1911 1.01 1 58.187 aes ea Be ve 3649 65.77 65.58 —.19 = — 3637 65.75 65.55 — .20 as a Next, the cell was filled with a saturated solution of NaCl, crystals of NaCl placed at the top and bottom, and the cell put in position in the bomb which was then supported in the thermostat at (or near) 30°. Pressure was then applied and held constant while readings of the cell resistance were made at suitable intervals of time until equilibrium was attained, as shown by resistance becoming constant, after which the pressure was increased and the same procedure followed. Usually, less than 24 hours was required for the attainment of equilibrium; the time required obviously depends on the preceding increment of pressure, which ordinarily was not large. The results are presented in Table II, the second column of which shows the equilibrium resistance, MAY 4, 1931 ADAMS AND HALL: SOLUBILITY OF SODIUM CHLORIDE 189 R, (in ohms), of the solution when saturated at the pressures indicated in Column 1. By interpolation from the results of the previous in- vestigation on the conductivity of NaCl solution under pressure, the resistance, R,, of a 26.48 per cent solution in the same cell at the various pressures was determined, as shown by the values in the third column. The difference, AR, is the change in resistance caused by the change in solubility of NaCl at the given pressure. These changes of resistance were evaluated in terms of concentra- tion by using the values of the resistance-concentration gradient at the various pressures, as calculated from the results of the preceding in- vestigation. For this purpose the resistances at three concentrations were determined at even values of pressure by interpolation. These values are shown in Table III and Fig. 2. For each pressure the values of R and C (concentration in weight per cent) were fitted to an TABLE III.—Tue Errect or PRESSURE ON THE RESISTANCE OF CONCENTRATED SoututTions oF NaCl at 29.93° Resistance, R, of a cell with solution of concentration C Pressure in bars (wt. per cent) SE trom eqn. (at C = 26.48) C = 20.26 Ci— 25.02 C = 26.48 1 64.31 59.85 58.19 —0.41 1000 64.54 60.70 59.46 —0.25 2000 65.74 62.29 61.38 —0.11, 3000 67 .66 64.43 63.77 0.00 4000 70.16 67.08 66.60 Qi@?) equation, and the resistance-concentration gradient, dR /dC, was then determined by differentiating the equation. This operation involved much greater difficulties than had been anticipated, principally be- cause R as a function of C departs so much from linearity, especially at high pressures, that it is not easy to decide what type of equation to use. Measurements at a larger number of concentrations in the re- gion near saturation should have been made, but this fact was not fully appreciated until after the apparatus had been dismantled. The last column of Table III shows the values of dR /dC (at saturation) obtained by fitting the results to the parabolic equation | R=a+0C + @C in which a, b, and c are constants. It may be seen that the equation demands that RF pass through a minimum and that at the higher pressures this minimum occurs at a concentration less than saturated. Hence, for pressures above 3000 bars, and in concentrated solutions, the resistance may actually increase with increasing concentration of 190 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 9 NaCl. This seemed rather surprising until it was noted that even at atmospheric pressure the resistivity of many salt solutions (e.g. CaCl.) passes through a minimum at high concentrations. Several other types of equation also were tried. The hyperbola, KR =aC+6+4c/C, gave results not very different from those obtained with the parabola, and, like it, gives a minimum in RF at a finite con- centration. But it seems probable that the simple parabola gives the RESISTANCE IN OHMS 25 WEIGHT BERCEA NaC/ Fig. 2.—Resistance of the cell as a function of concentration at various pressures. At high pressures and in nearly saturated solutions the resistance increases with concen- tration. best representation of the data, and, since it is somewhat more con- venient to use, this type of equation was adopted. Two other three- constant equations, the hyperbola, RC = a + bC + cR, and the exponential, R = a + be “°°, were tried and rejected when it was real- ized that this would require the values of R to be asymptotic to the C axis, and that this would be an arbitrary and unreasonable restraint. The resistance-concentration gradients shown in the last column of Table III were plotted against pressure, and the values of this gradient MAY 4, 1931 ADAMS AND HALL: SOLUBILITY OF SODIUM CHLORIDE 191 for the various pressures, as read from the graph, are given in the fifth column of Table II. With sufficient accuracy for the present purpose the gradient at a given pressure can be considered constant through- out the small range of concentrations encountered with NaCl solu- tions under pressure. Therefore, from the values of AR and AR/AC the change of solubility is readily obtained by simple division. The solubility of NaCl in water at 30.00° and atmospheric pressure was measured by shaking a mixture of solution and salt in a mechani- cal shaker operating within a thermostat, withdrawing a sample of the saturated solution and analyzing it by evaporation and careful drying. ‘The average of 4 determinations, in which equilibrium was approached in both directions, was 26.470 per cent, the maximum de- viation from the average being 0.007 and the average deviation being 0.004. Hence, the solubility will be taken as 26.47 per cent, and since the change for 1° temperature increase is only 0.01, 26.47 is the solu- bility also at 29.93°. The most concentrated solution used in the measurements on the pressure-coefficient of resistivity was, therefore, very slighty supersaturated (by 0.01 per cent). Moreover, its con- centration, 26.48 per cent, was the reference point for the values of Ak. Therefore, in order to determine the change of solubility from the values of AR in Table II, it is necessary to divide by AR/AC and to add 0.01. The results of this operation are given in Column 6 and are the respective amounts by which the stated pressure has increased the solubility above the initial 26.47 per cent. In the last two columns of Table II the values of P and AC for those pressures which are nearly the same have been averaged together to give a single pair of values for each group. These averages are plotted in Fig. 3, which shows graphically the effect of pressure on the solu- bility of NaCl in water at 30°. It may be observed that although a resistance measurement of the saturated solution was made at 3600 bars this result was not evaluated in terms of solubility-change. This was because of the uncertainty connected with the value of the resist- ance-concentration gradient (OR /dC)>p for the nearly saturated solu- tions at the higher pressures. With increasing pressure the gradient decreases rapidly and changes sign at about 3000 bars. This unex- pected circumstance makes it difficult to obtain an entirely satisfactory set of values of (0R/0C)p from the present data. Measurements of f& should have been made at much smaller intervals at C close to the | saturation-concentration, but the full importance of this was not appre- ciated until after the apparatus had been dismantled. It is interest- ing to note, however, that the value of AR, 0.20, at 3600 bars, as given 192 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 9 in Table II, is consistent with other measurements. The solubility change AC’ at 3600 bars is known to be 1.2 (see below). Hence AR/AC is 0.16, which is not inconsistent with the values of this coeffi- cient as determined directly from the conductivity measurements and as shown in the last column of Table III. The system NaCl-H,.O turns out to be a peculiarly unfavorable system by which to try out the method here described for determining the change of solubility under pressure. This is on account of the Oo @ INCREASE IN SOLUBILITY, AC {e) o 1°) ‘S 0.2 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 PRESSURE IN BARS Fig. 3.—The change of solubility of NaCl with pressure. Some results of other in- vestigators are included for comparison. above-mentioned inversion in (0R/0C)p and also on account of the small change in solubility. Nevertheless, the results with this system are believed to be useful, and they quite justify the value and con- venience of the method. Comparison with previous determinations. In Fig. 3 there are also plotted. the results obtained by Cohen et al.? and by Sill. Cohen 7 Conen and Stnnicz. Zeit. phys. Chem. 67: 432. 1909; Conn, Inouye, and Ev- WEN. Jbid.75: 257. 1911. 8 Sinu. Journ. Am. Chem. Soc. 38: 2632. 1916. MAY 4, 1931 ADAMS AND HALL: SOLUBILITY OF SODIUM CHLORIDE 193 and his collaborators used an electromagnetic stirrer within the pres- sure bomb. After equilibrium beween solid and solution had been attained, the bomb was quickly opened and a sample of the solution withdrawn for analysis. Sill, on the other hand, had an arrangement for shaking the bomb, which was connected to the remainder of the pressure-apparatus by means of a piece of flexible copper tubing. A sample of the saturated solution was obtained by opening a valve while the contents of the bomb were still under pressure. The methods and results of other earlier investigators? on solubility under pressure are of little value for comparison here, because of an inadequate pressure-range, and insufficient precision in the measurements. The curve in Fig. 3 represents the unpublished determinations (by one of the present authors) of the change in solubility of NaCl under pressure at 25° by an indirect thermodynamic method. ‘This indirect method involves the use of the compressibility and certain other prop- erties of NaCl solutions and solid NaCl, and will be described fully in a forthcoming paper. The various results shown in Fig. 3 are not strictly comparable, since the present results were obtained at 29.93°, those of Cohen et al. at 24.05°, and those of Sill at 25.0°. On the other hand, there are good reasons for believing that in this system a few degrees change in tem- perature will not have much effect on the increase in solubility caused by a given increment of pressure. Probably the correspondence of the three sets of results would not be altered noticeably by correcting them to the same temperature. From the diagram it may be seen that on the whole the agreement between the various determinations is satisfactory. The average dis- crepancy of the results by the present method is probably not as much as 0.05 gram of NaCl per 100 grams of solution. Since the principal uncertainty is in the resistance-concentration gradient, more complete measurements on the electrical conductivity of nearly saturated solu- tions would make worth while the recording of one more digit due to change of solubility, and would therefore considerably increase the accuracy of the results. Furthermore, with a number of other elec- trolytes it should be possible to obtain easily an accuracy of better than 0.005 gram per 100 grams of solution. Summary. A method has been developed for determining the effect of pressure on the solubility of salts and other substances without the °e.g., Favre. Compt. rend. 51: 827, 1027. 1860; Mortirr. Ann. Phys. 117: 386. 1862; Sorpy. Proc. Roy. Soc., 12: 538. 1863, Phil. Mag. 27: 145. 1864; Brown. Ann. Phys. 30: 250. 1887. Zeit. phys. Chem. 1: 258. 1887; von STACHEL- BERG. Zeit. phys. Chem. 20: 337. 1896. 194 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 9 use of a mechanical stirrer or shaking device. Essentially the method consists in measuring the electrical resistivity of the saturated solution in a special type of conductivity-cell in which a small amount of the solid is placed at the top and at the bottom and in which saturation takes place merely by convection. Preliminary experiments at atmospheric pressure having shown that with solubility-changes induced by changes of temperature, equilib- rium in the cell was attained within a reasonable time, measurements at pressures up to about 4000 bars (metric atmospheres) were made on the system, NaCl-H.O, at 30°. The choice of this system turned out not to be a very happy one, because the resistance-concentration gradient (at constant pressure) in the saturated solution decreases rapidly with pressure and changes sign at 3000 bars; but although the data for the highest pressures could not be completely evaluated, the final results for the solubility-change agree satisfactorily with previous determinations by other means, and indicate that the present method is convenient and accurate. BOTANY.—The eastern short-stemmed leatherflowers.1. EpaGar T. Wuerry, University of Pennsylvania. In current botanical manuals two species of short-stemmed broad- leaved leatherflowers are listed as present in the eastern United States, Clematis ochroleuca Aiton and C’. ovata Pursh. Field studies of this group of plants in the Appalachian shale-barrens? and elsewhere have indicated that their relationships and ranges have been to some ex- tent misinterpreted, as the data here recorded may serve to show. The principal diagnostic features of the plants in question are pre- sented in the accompanying key. Certain characters often regarded as significant have proved to be inconstant and variable, and have ac-. cordingly been omitted from consideration. For instance, leaf-termina- tions range from obtusish to acutish or even acuminate from one branch to another on a single plant. Again, the violet tinge on the outside of the sepals may be intense on one individual and almost lacking on another growing beside it, with intermediates elsewhere in the vicinity. Finally, dimensions of sepals and of achenes vary by 25% within any large clump, depending on the degree of maturity attained by the particular branch on which they are borne. 1 Contribution from the Botanical Laboratory of the University of Pennsylvania. Received March 2, 1931. 2 This JOURNAL 20: 46. 1930. may 4, 1931 WHERRY: LEATHERFLOWERS 195 KEY TO THE EASTERN SHORT-STEMMED LEATHERFLOWERS (Clematis spp.) Plant sparingly branched and small leaves relatively few; head of fruit tend- ing to be spherical, about 6 cm. in diameter; achenes nearly symmetrical. Under side of leaves glabrate to moderately pubescent; hairs of achene- appendages deep, or exceptionally pale, yellow; range chiefly at altitudes below 1000 feet, mostly in Piedmont....C. ochroleuca ovata Under side of leaves moderately to densely pubescent; hairs of achene- appendages pale, or exceptionally deep, yellow; range chiefly at alti- tudes above 1000 feet, mostly in Blue Ridge. ...C. ochroleuca sericea Plant copiously branched and small leaves relatively numerous; leaves glab- rate. Head of fruit nearly spherical, about 5 cm. in diameter; achenes fairly symmetrical, their appendage-hairs brown.............. C. viticaulis Head of fruit spheroidal, about 4 cm. high and 6 em. broad; achenes rather unsymmetrical, their appendage-hairs whitish....C. albicoma Clematis ochroleuca Aiton.—This plant varies in a number of respects from one clump to another, but the only features in which such variation shows any recognizable geographical relationships are those enumerated in the key. Two extreme variants with respect to degree of leaf-pubescence have received specific names, but in view of the complete gradation between them only varietal distinction seems justified. It is accordingly here proposed to divide this species into two varieties, as follows: Clematis ochroleuca ovata (Pursh) Wherry, status novus? C. ovata Pursh, not of current manuals C. integrifolia a ochroleuca Kuntze. The specimen on which Pursh based his specific name is preserved in the Sherard Herbarium at Oxford University, having been collected by Catesby and labelled by him with a citation from Plukenet, followed by the words “negroes head.”’ The latter has been regarded as a locality,‘ but as Catesby did not in general add place-names to his labels, and as ‘‘nigger-head’’— in allusion to the globular mass of kinky plumes—is the term universally applied to the leatherflowers by laymen in the south, it is believed to repre- sent a common name instead. In his work on the Natural History of Carolina, etce., Catesby did not men- tion this plant. Pursh® supposed it to have been obtained in South Carolina, Small* in that state or Georgia. It could equally well have come from Vir- ginia, which was also visited by Catesby, as shown by the following quotation:’ “Tn the Year 1714 I travelled from the lower Part of St. James’s River in Virgina to that Part of the Apalatchian Mountains where the Sources of that 5 “Status novus’’ is believed to express the situation more accurately than the more frequently used ‘‘combinatio nova.’’ | * Britton, Mem. Torr. Bot. Club 2: 28, footnote. 1890; Small, Flora Southeastern WS. 439: 1903. ’ Pursh, Flora Amer. Sept. 2: 736. 1814. 6 Small, loc. cit. 7 Catesby, Nat. Hist. Carolina, ete. 1: v. 1731. 196 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 9 River rise, . . . At the Distance of twelve Miles from the Mountains we left the River, and directed our Course to the nearest of them.”’ The specimen in question was examined by Asa Gray, who stated® that it “appears to be C. ochroleuca, Ait.” It was later compared by Messrs. Vines and Druce with material from a West Virginia shale-barren sent to England for the purpose by Dr. N. L. Britton,? and was concluded by them to be iden- tical with this. Their interpretation has been adopted in current manuals, but as there is no evidence that Catesby ever reached the shale-barren region, its reconsideration seemed desirable. Accordingly, at my suggestion, Dr, and Mrs. Francis W. Pennell kindly obtained data on the specimen in Octo- ber 1930, and their description of it indicates clearly that it does not repre- sent the shale-barren plant after all. In lacking small-leaved branches, and having relatively large leaves and a spherical head of achenes with pale yellow appendage hairs, it corresponds exactly to the plant of the Virginia and Carolina Piedmont. The range of this variety is indicated by the following county records :° GEORGIA. DeKalb: Stone Mt., Ashe, not dated (N) SOUTH CAROLINA. Abbeville: Abbeville, Porcher, Aug. 1898 (U) NORTH CAROLINA. Alamance: Graham, Biltmore, May 26, 1902 (U) Caldwell: Lenoir, Biltmore, May 17, 1902 (U) Davie: Farmington, Biltmore, Aug. 27, 1895 (U) Guilford: High Point, Canby, June 1868 (N) _ Halifax: Weldon, Williamson, April 16, 1897 (N, P) Iredell: Statesville, Hyams, June 1898 (N, U) Polk: Lynn, Peattie, April 19, 1919 Randolph:———., Ashe, June 1895 (N) Rowan: Salisbury, many collectors and dates (N, P, U). VIRGINIA. Arlington: many localities north of Alexandria (G, N, P, U) Dinwiddie: Petersburg, Twomey, not dated (P) Fairfax: many localities south of Alexandria (G, N, P, U) Fauquier: Buckland, Meredith, May 25, 1922 (P, U) Greensville: Belfield (now Emporia), Heller, June 19, 1893 (G, N, P, U) Henrico: Richmond, Burk, July 25, 1887 (P)¥ Spotsylvania: .Fredericksburg. Ward, May 3, 1872 (U). 8 Gray, Curtis’s Bot. Mag. [3] 37: pl. 6594. 1881. ® Britton, loc. cit. 10 The following abbreviations are used for names of herbaria: G, Gray Herbarium; N, New York Botanical Garden; P, Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia; U, U.S. National Herbarium. 1 This specimen is especially similar in leaf outline and pubescence to the type of C. evata; as Catesby would have started his 1714 trip in the vicinity of what is now Rich- mond, it is quite possible that they came from the same station. MAY 4, 1931 WHERRY: LEATHERFLOWERS 197 PENNSYLVANIA. Chester: London Grove (old record; no specimens seen). NEW YORK. Queens: Brooklyn, Carry, May, 1841 (G, N) Richmond: many localities on Staten Island (G, N, P, U). Clematis ochroleuca sericea (Michaux) Wherry, status novus. C. sericea Michaux. C. ochroleuca 8 Torrey and Gray. C. integrifolia « ochroleuca 2 tomentosa Kuntze. Fig. 1. Clematis albicoma Wherry West of Covington, Virginia, June 10, 1930. This is the variety of C. ochroleuca which occurs at the higher elevations. It is characterized by its tendency toward tomentose pubescence on the leaves and pale hairs on the achene appendages. The most extreme material seen is that from Botetourt county, Virginia; the remaining records here cited are of specimens more or less transitional to the other variety. GEORGIA. Stevens: 5 miles west of Toccoa, Wherry, April 7, 1930 (P). NORTH CAROLINA. Forsyth: Salem, Schweznitz, not dated (P). 198 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 9 VIRGINIA. Botetourt: Eagle Rock, Lewis, April 27, 1929 (P, Va. State Herbarium). Roanoke: Roanoke, E.G. Brittonand Vail, May 16-27, 1892 (G, N, P, U). Clematis viticaulis Steele!” This species is known thus far only from the type locality, where it occurs on shale slopes along the railroad west of the tunnel. The characters listed in the key amply differentiate it. VIRGINIA. Bath: West of Millboro, Steele, Sept. 3, 1906 (N, U); Wherry, June 11, 1930 (P). Clematis albicoma Wherry, nomen novum C. ovata of current manuals, not Pursh So far as recorded this plant was first collected on Kates Mountain by Gus- tav Guttenberg in 1877. The way it came to be identified with Pursh’s C- ovata has been discussed above. It differs from that, however, in the respects enumerated in the key, and accordingly requires a new name, which is appro- priately derived from its most unique character, the whitish hairs on the achene-appendages. It occurs on various shale-barrens, and has been col- lected from the following: VIRGINIA. Allegheny: 14 miles west of Covington, Wherry, June 10, 1930 (N, P). Bath: Hot Springs, Hunnewell, May 11 to July 3, 1911 (G) | Southwest of Hot Springs, Wherry, June 10, 1930 (P). WEST VIRGINIA. Greenbrier: Kates Mountain, many collectors and dates (G, N, P, U). This is to be taken as the type locality of the species, and as type specimen should be designated: Guttenberg, July 31, 1877 (U). ZOOLOGY .—A report on some amphibians and reptiles from New York and New Jersey.1 Cuartes E. Burt,? Trinity University. (Communicated by Doris M. Cocuran.) : During the academic year of 1929-1930, while I was a member of the herpetological staff of the American Museum of Natural History, I took the opportunity to make occasional studies of the local amphib- ians and reptiles, both in New York and New Jersey; and, as a conse- quence of this, the following locality data and ecological annotations have been gathered. With future continuation of the phenomenal constructive activity at present in progress in the New York City region, it is evident that 12 Steele, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 13: 364. 1911. 1 Received March 13, 1981. 2 Professor of Biology, Trinity University, Waxahachie, Texas. MAY 4, 1931 BURT: AMPHIBIANS AND REPTILES 199 great ecological pressure will be brought to bear on the local fauna and that progressive extermination or succession of animal communi- ties at many points must inevitably follow. In view of this, concise locality data on the local fauna, as opposed to generalized records, are especially needed. Noble (1927) in his “Distributional List of the Reptiles and Amphibians of the New York City Region,’ which presents only a preliminary statement of the general range of each of the local species, called attention to this need by writing that “Ex- act locality records of practically all our species are greatly desired. It is only when they are brought together that a clear picture of the distribution of our local species can be obtained.”’ ; SALAMANDERS Triturus viridescens viridescens (Rafinesque).—On April 12 a small red eft, the land form of the common newt, was obtained 4 miles north of Alpine, Bergen County, New Jersey, among soggy, dead leaves near a semi-stagnant streamlet, which was found to contain developing egg masses of the wood frog, Rana sylvatica. On April 19 another example was secured near this point in the water of a stagnant, leaf-filled roadside ditch; and on this same date two others were taken 3 miles north of Engelwood, Bergen County, New Jersey, in a swampy area where they were sheltered by crevices in the rocks. Plethodon cinereus (Green).—This salamander was commonly found in woods under stones and in or under rotting logs or other objects when suffi- cient moisture was available. It appears that in the spring there is often too much moisture for cznereus in the valleys, but too little on the more exposed hilltops. At this time the maximum abundance is found on the hillsides where moisture and protection are more nearly at the optimum. Later, if the summer brings drying, a migration into the valleys or a disappearance into subterranean retreats probably takes place. In New Jersey, both dark and red-backed phases were common. On April 7 and April 12 small series were secured 4 miles north of Alpine, Bergen County, from under stones and from rotted wood on a timbered hillside above a small stream, but on April 19 a total of 114 specimens was secured here within a period of about two hours. On the latter date cinereus was found to occur 3 miles north of Engelwood, Bergen County. On October 12-13 speci- mens were collected 1 mile north of Island Heights and at Lakehurst, in Ocean County. At the last locality individuals were found in damp situations under pieces of tin, cardboard and cloth, as well as under damp bark and leaves. In New York, a small individual secured at West Haverstraw, Rockland County, on April 12, was found to have a perfectly developed red-backed color pattern. It measured 15 mm. from snout to anus, and the tail was 10.5 mm. long (total length, 25.5 mm.). In the laboratory this small creature showed a tendency to get a running start before making the characteristic jump of the species, demonstrating this method several times. The jumps 200 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 9 were only about an inch in length. Additional New York representatives of this salamander were obtained 1 mile south of Harriman, Orange County; 12 miles southwest of the St. George Ferry, Staten Island, Richmond County; 2 miles north of Rockland Lake, Rockland County; and at Grassy Sprain Reservoir, Westchester County. The last place was visited on June 11 and specimens were found to be scarce because of a drying of the woods. Plethodon glutinosus (Green).—Several specimens of this form were removed from under flat rocks on a wooded hillside 4 miles north of Alpine, Bergen County, New Jersey, on April 12 and April 19. In this vicinity glutinosus apparently occupies the same general situations as the much more abundant cinereus. : Pseudotriton ruber ruber (Sonnini).—On April 7 the red salamander was found 4 miles north of Alpine, Bergen County, New Jersey; and on April 19 it was taken 3 miles south of Piermont, in the same county. At both places the species was dislodged from under flat rocks near the edge of shallow, clear, cold bodies of running water, and in each instance individuals attempted to escape by diving downward toward crevices among the rocks at the bed of the stream. Eurycea bislineata bislineata (Green).—On April 7 two-lined salamanders were discovered under rocks at the border of a small stream 4 miles north of Alpine, Bergen County, New Jersey, and on April 19 others were found in a similar situation 3 miles south of Piermont (Bergen County, New Jersey). These attempted to escape by lodging under rocks in the water below. On April 12, examples were secured among soaked leaves in the pathway of seep- age from a spring near a small stream 1 mile south of Harriman, Orange County, New York, and on April 16 specimens were taken in a similar habi- tat at Grassy Sprain Reservoir, Westchester County, New York. Desmognathus fuscus fuscus (Rafinesque).—The dusky salamander was found in very moist situations under rocks or leaves near streams or pools and, upon being disturbed, it usually tried to escape by rushing toward the water. In Bergen County, New Jersey, the species was procured on April 7 near a streamlet 4 miles north of Alpine, and on April 19, near a larger flow of | water 3 miles south of Piermont. The New York specimens of fuscus were all collected on April 12. They were found 1 mile north of Lake Tiorati, near the ‘‘Seven Lakes Drive,” and 1 mile south of Harriman, both localities being in Orange County; and under rocks near a small stream on the north slope of Dunderburg Mountain, in Rockland County. TOADS Bufo americanus Holbrook.—On April 19 this toad was taken 1 mile north of Leonia, Bergen County, New Jersey. On this cold evening many indi- viduals were calling from an extensive fresh-water swamp in the vicinity, but only a few clasping pairs were located. ‘The female of one such pair was lay- ing eggs and females transferred to the laboratory deposited eggs during the night. An examination of a series of these toads revealed some with distinct black MAY 4, 1931 BURT: AMPHIBIANS AND REPTILES 201 spots below and others without such markings; but most of them had at least a few faint black spots or slaty patches on the upper chest. Bufo fowlert Garman.—Bufo fowlerx GARMAN, Bull. Essex Inst., 16: 42. 1884 (type locality, Massachusetts).—Bufo terrestris BURT and BURT (not of Bonnaterre), Amer. Mus. Novitates, no. 381, 1929, p. 2 (reports from Louisiana, Texas, and Arkansas).—Through the courtesy of Mr. J. T. Nichols I had the opportunity to hear the call of Bufo fowler: at Garden City, Nassau County, New York, in June 1930. I recognized it at once as the same “‘goat-like”’ cry that I had heard in the Mississippi Valley the year before. The latter toads were doubtfully reported by Burt and Burt (1929) as Bufo terrestris on structural characters alone, but I am now convinced that they are B. fowleri—vocally at least! To this latter category the report of B. woodhousi Burt and Burt (1929) from 6 miles south of Vinton, Calcasieu County, Louisiana, which are based on young specimens, should probably also be placed. FRoGs Acris gryllus (Le Conte).—A cricket-frog was captured on October 13 at the edge of a shallow pond, 12 miles southwest of the St. George Ferry, Staten Island, Richmond County, New York. Hyla crucifera Wied.—Hyla crucifer WIED, Reise Nord-Amer., 1°: 275. 1838 (type locality, Catonment Leavenworth, ‘‘Kansas’’).—Hyla crucifera MYERS, Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. for 1926, 36: 338. 1927—Spring-peepers were singing in Bergen County, New Jersey, on April 7, 19, and 28. They were abundant 1 mile north of Leonia, 1 mile north of Oradell, and at Harring- ton, particularly in flooded meadows where they clung to grass stems. Several specimens from the last locality had broken or incomplete crosses on their backs. In New York, crucifera was secured at the edge of a shallow pond 12 miles southwest of the St. George Ferry, Staten Island, Richmond County. Hyla triseriata Wied.—Hyla triseriata WIED, Reise Nord-Amer., 1}: 249. 1838 (type locality, Mt. Vernon, Ohio River, Indiana).—Pseudacris triseriata STEJNEGER and BARBOUR, Check List N. Amer. Amph. Reptil., ed. 2, 1923, p. 29.—In an area of flooded grass-land 1 mile north of Oradell, Bergen County, New Jersey, it was found that frogs of this species were much more wary and harder to secure than those of Hyla crucifera (April 19). Rana catesbeiana Shaw.—On April 28 a bullfrog was found sitting in the water of a pond 1 mile north of Leonia, Bergen County, New Jersey, but the song of the species was not heard at this time. Rana clamitans Latreille—Green-frogs are common in the vicinity of the larger of the small streams at the localities given below, as well as about small lakes and ponds. On April 20 they were very hard to secure at Garfield, Bergen County, New Jersey, where they often escaped by diving. Specimens were taken in the daytime from under flat stones near streams at Queensboro Lake and 1 mile north of Lake Tiorati, in Orange County, New York, on 202 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 9 April 12, and on October 13 several examples, including a tadpole, were col- lected 12 miles southwest of the St. George Ferry, on Staten Island, Richmond County, New York. Rana halecina Linnaeus.—fhana halecona LINNAEUS, Syst. Nat., ed. 12, pt. 1, 1766, p. 356 (first latinized binomial name for Kalm’s sillhoppetosser, type locality, New Jersey) —BOULENGER, Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sciences, 55: 433. 1920.—BURT, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 44: 13. 1931.— Rana pipiens SCHREBER, Der Naturforscher, 18: 182, pl. 4. 1782 (type locality, Pennsylvania).—Leopard frogs were calling in Bergen County, New Jersey, on April 19, where they were secured at Garfield and 1 mile north of Leonia. Rana sylvatica Le Conte. On April 7 woodfrogs were not in full song at Harrington, Bergen County, New Jersey, but their notes were occasionally heard. Large egg masses were seen in a flooded meadow in this vicinity, and this indicated that the height of the mating season had passed. Examination of clusters revealed living embryos in various stages of development. On June 11 adult woodfrogs were obtained in Donald Park, Westchester County, New York, where they sought concealment by hopping into masses of green vegetation. A pond near here sheltered Rana clamitans, as attested by the characteristic “‘zoom’’ which came from that quarter. LIZARDS Sceloporus undulatus undulatus (Latreille)—On the sunny afternoon of October 12 pine lizards were very abundant about logs 1 mile west of Lake- hurst, Ocean County, New Jersey. Leiolopisma laterale (Say).—One of these little skinks was taken near a pile of brush 1 mile west of Lakehurst, Ocean County, New Jersey, in the same general habitat as Sceloporus undulatus undulatus. SNAKES Lampropeltis triangulum triangulum (Lacépéde).—On June 11, 1930, a young specimen of this king-snake, probably of the 1929 brood, was found in the open road in Donald Park, Westchester County, New York, where a stone pile at the side of the highway probably served as its home. Natrix sipedon sipedon (Linnaeus).—This water snake was captured near a stream in the vicinity of the railroad station at Tappan, Rockland County, New York, on April 15. Thamnophis sirtalis sirtalis (Linnaeus).—On the sunny afternoon of Oc- tober 13, one of these snakes wandered into the road from its abode at the margin of a salt marsh 1 mile west of Matawan, Monmouth County, New Jersey; and here it was easily captured. BIBLIOGRAPHY BouLencer, G. A. A monograph of the American frogs of thegenus Rana. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sciences, 55: 413-480. 1920. Burt, CHartes E. A report on some amphibians and reptiles from Kansas, Nebraska, and Oklahoma. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 44: 11-16. 1931. * MAY 4, 1931 SWANTON: CADDO SOCIAL ORGANIZATION 203 Burt, Cuarues E., and Burt, May Danuerm. A collection of amphibians and reptiles from the Mississippi Valley, with field observations. Amer. Mus. Novitates, 381: 1-14. 1929. Myers, Grorae 8. Notes on Indiana amphibians and reptiles. Proc. Indiana Acad. Sci. 36: 337-340. 1927. Myers, GrEorGE 8S. Amphibians and reptiles observed in the Palisades Interstate Park, New York and New Jersey. Copeia, 173: 99-103. 1980. Nosue, G. K. Distributional list of the reptiles and amphibians of the New York City region. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Guide Leaflet Series, 69: 1-9. 1927. ETHNOLOGY.—The Caddo social organization and its possible his- torical significance... JOHN R. Swanton, Bureau of American Ethnology. A large number of Indian tribes, as is well known, were divided internally into social groups called clans, gentes, or sibs. ‘These usually, though not invariably, bore the name of some animal, plant, or natural feature, and where this was not the case they often maintained special relations with such organisms or objects. Associations of this kind constitute what we know as totemism and have been the occasion of endless discussion. A striking characteristic of these tribal subdivisions is the fact that they were usually perpetuated either in the male line or the female line exclusively, and the terms above mentioned have been given technical definitions accordingly, a clan referring to a social group perpetuated in the female line, a gens to one perpetuated in the male line, while stb is employed when one wishes to indicate either indifferently. Often the sibs in any given tribe form larger groupings for which the terms phratry and moiety are used, the latter mainly restricted to the very common condition where there are but two major classes such as are represented among the Iroquois, Choctaw, and Haida. Divergencies from the standard are numerous, and it is always interesting to discover one of these since atypical forms usually throw more light upon the origin of the institution than those which fall into the classic categories. When the writer was among the Caddo Indians near Anadarko, Oklahoma, about twenty years ago, he elicited some interesting in- formation of this sort, but it has lain in manuscript because he was not then able to follow up the matter or check it. While he has not been able to verify this since, it seems worth while to make it a matter of record as there is no reason to doubt its substantial accuracy, and it suggests some important conclusions. The living Caddo consist of remnants of two considerable con- 1 Received March 25, 1931. 204 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 9 federations of five or six tribes each and two or three unattached tribes, which together occupied a large territory in parts of Louisiana, Texas, and Arkansas, where the three states meet. The speech of the two main groups differed only in a few words and some easily recognized sound shifts. ‘The tongue, or tongues, of the isolated tribes were, on the other hand, widely divergent, but they have been long extinct and do not here concern us. Some years before the writer’s visit, Mr. James Mooney, also of the Bureau of American Ethnology, spent a short time with the Caddo and he obtained a few notes regarding their clan divisions—for de- scent was usually reckoned by them in the female line—which were incorporated into the article on the Kadohadacho or Caddo proper, in the Handbook of American Indians. He learned the names of ten clans, as follows: Sun, Thunder, Eagle, Panther, Raccoon, Beaver, Crow, Bear, Wolf, and Bison. Caddo Jake, the oldest Indian of the tribe living in 1912 when the writer visited them, stated that this list was correct so far as it went, but he thought it was not sufficiently extensive. At an earlier period he believed there had been still other clans. However, particular interest attaches to information obtained from a second Caddo named White Bead whose age was almost equal to that of the man just mentioned. According to him there were but five clans, arranged in something of a caste system, with the animal esteemed most powerful at one end and the weakest at the other. In order of “strength” these clans were: Bison, Bear, Panther, Wolf, Beaver. Another irregularity was the fact that a man could marry a woman of his own clan, and vice versa, but this was evidently necessary if the facts regarding clan intermarriage were as reported. Thus, it was said that in case of marriage between a woman of a “stronger’’ clan and a man of a ‘weaker one,” all of the children belonged to the former, while in case of marriage between a man of a strong clan and a woman of a weak one, the boys were allocated with their father’s people and the girls with their mother’s. If marriages be- tween clans had been frequent, it is evident that the stronger ones would have gained constantly on the weaker ones to the probable extinction of some of the latter. White Bead added that, when inter-clan marriages of this kind took place, the near relatives on each side could make fun of, and play pranks upon, each other. Nothing was thought of it if persons con- nected in this way used the most outrageous expressions. If a man saw another bearing this relation to him mounted on a good horse, he MAY 4, 1931 SWANTON: CADDO SOCIAL ORGANIZATION 205 could order him to dismount and ride away on it himself, leaving his victim to get even at some future time as best he could. Anciently each clan had its particular story, and all of these were supposed to fit together so as to make one narrative. The disagreement between White Bead’s information and that of Caddo Jake is not as important as might at first appear because White Bead belonged to one of the tribes of the western Caddo, the old Hasi- nai confederation, while Caddo Jake came from the Natchitoches tribe, from the easternmost part of the former Caddo country. These were separated sufficiently to have had quite diverse social systems. It is also to be remembered that the Natchitoches, who seem to have preserved the stricter clan system, were not far removed from tribes similarly organized, such as the Creeks and Chickasaw. In historic TABLE [| Caddo Creek Chickasaw Bison tanaha (N)? yanasa yannash tana’ (A) Bear namtsi (N) nokost nita nawotsi (H) Panther kishv? katca kot Wolf tdsha yaha nashoba Beaver iclaok (N) itcha’swa kinta tlaox (H) Eagle imi (N) lamhi Onsst iwi (H) Raccoon ot wotko shaur times the latter were less remote geographically but there is reason to think that they had borrowed their own organization from the Creeks. Under such circumstances it is particularly interesting to find certain striking resemblances between the Creek and Caddo names for those animals which both employed as designations of clans. To appreciate the force of this comparison the two are placed side by side in the sub- joined table along with the Chickasaw, and it is to be remembered that, when all three tribes were first known to Europeans, the Caddo and Creeks were entirely separated from each other by the Chickasaw and Choctaw (the Choctaw language being almost identical with Chickasaw). Where the Natchitoches and Hasinai languages em- ployed different terms for the animals in question, both have been in- serted and distinguished by the letters N and H. The first of the above comparisons may be left out of consideration because one word for “bison,” with slight variations, is used throughout 2 In these words, accents and most diacritical marks have been omitted, tc is em- ployed for English ch, x for German ch; 7 indicates that the preceding vowel is nasalized, and / that the preceding consonant has an explosive sound. 206 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 9 the Gulf area in languages wholly unrelated. Of the remaining six there is only one, the term for “wolf,” in which the Chickasaw form seems to be somewhat nearer that employed in Caddo. The remaining terms speak for themselves. Further indication of a former more westerly location of the Creeks is furnished by the Tunica language, spoken by a small tribe between the Chickasaw and Caddo, in which the word for “bear” is identical with that of the Creeks, and still another is supplied by the Creek migration legend which refers their origin to some point west of the Mississippi. The Caddo migration legend strengthens this by assigning Caddo origins to the region about Hot Springs, Arkansas, or the territory immediately southwest of it. What we know of the ceremonial mound system of the Creeks seems also to fall in line with the theory since it was of a type found along the lower Mississippi. But if the clan system, as exemplified particularly by the eastern Caddo, suggests Creek contact, the caste features of the Hasinai recall the old Natchez system and may indicate that the western Caddo were once on Red River south of their kindred. | CONCLUSIONS There are indications that the clan systems of the eastern and west- ern Caddo differed, and that they grew up in contact with the clan system of the Creeks, probably in the territory now embraced in the State of Arkansas, but certain features of the western Caddo system suggest contact with tribes of the Natchez group, probably in what is now Louisiana. This last point is left in considerable doubt by lack of confirmation of the writer’s data regarding western Caddo social organization, but that does not affect the rest of the argument. It may be found to have a bearing on the origin of the higher forms of culture on the lower Mississippi associated with the peoples loosely called ‘“‘Mound Builders.” SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS Resignation of Joun E. Grar as assistant chief of the Bureau of Entomol- ogy of the Department of Agriculture, to become associate director of the National Museum was announced recently. 8S. A. RoHwer, assistant chief of the plant quarantine and control administration, was appointed to fill the vacancy caused by the resignation of Mr. Grar. The Hillebrand prize of the Chemical Society of Washington has been awarded to Dr. CLaups 8. Hupson, professor of chemistry at the National Institute of Health of the Public Health Service, for his work on the ring structure of sugars. OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES : ANNOUNCEMENT OF MEETINGS Tuesday, May 5 The Botanical Society Wednesday, May 6 ‘The Medical Society Thursday, May 7 The Entomological Society Saturday, May 9 The Philosophical Society Tuesday, May 12 The Institute of Electrical Engineers Wednesday, May 13 The Geological Society The Medical Society Thursday, May 14 The Chemical Society Saturday, May 16 The Biological Society The Helminthological Society Tuesday, May 19 The Historical Society The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: N. A. Cops, Bureau of Plant Industry. Corresponding Secretary: Paut E. Howe, Bureau of Animal Industry. Recording Secretary: Caartes THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. Treasurer; Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. This Tonaan te indeaet'in tho eee sues é , n ast “ al + : a ~ e 2 ee A ¥ “ eT DE OD. iY & Wd 3 May 19, 1931 No. 10 WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS C. Wrtue Cooke CHARLES DRECHSLER Huas L. DrrpEen U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. Perers Haroutp Morrison PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GotpMAN G. W. Srosz BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Agnes CHASE J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Roger C, WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE is alba ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Rorat anp Gurnrorp AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the ac at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24,1912. Acceptaitce for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on Take 3, 1918. a Journal ¢ of the : AA ay: lon einen ‘papers, i ~ proceedings and programs of me of events connected with the fie | rhe monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth. ch mon: 1, except ¢ it appears on the nineteenth only. - Volumes id t publication i is an essential feature; a manus - twentieth of the month will ordinarily ap + at the JOURNAL for the following fourth or M anuscripts may be sent to any member fs) DO Ke deny typewritten and in suitable form for pri g without e Cheat ng thtare cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious m ior bo 0". shouldia appear only as footnotes and should inelt ; CE the work of both the editors and aga A ae fh e oot Me serially and submitted on a separate nu Ot Illustrations i in limited amount will be Lpsee drawings by zine etchings being preferable. es Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication : no proo: ° alors requested. Iti is urged that manuscript be submitted in i will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ‘ 3 _ Author’s Reprints—Fifty reprints without covers. will be UrT shed g1 bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with ISIVe ] _ date of issue, and additional reprints, will be rote + gad at cosi wh n ord 3 ance with the following schedule “a ee ee, CPO. n Conics 4 pp. 8 pp. i 12 PP. 16 aon ~—60 A oe RAEN SEAN Uebpeee PG, weer : 100s $50 $55 aS . 60 $1.10 Se CEO DE CaN, Opa 1, 10% 1.60 — ee AU ah aan OG a oe hi a Pe 160. oie ae ce 250 ‘1. 65 —s_ 2.00 2. 10. ce 2.60 ‘Rewelopes for insiting ener with te palhne s name ane nadiede pri corner may be obtained at the following prices. — First 100, $4. 00; additione As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copi should invariably be attached to the first Beee of He Pi a ae : a The rate of Subscription per volume AS Trae, rete ee ee eee e eee Sermi-monthly MOMbDETS “yi Ge eet bo een ole MA Convent oes Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, 'No Os. i3, 1“ and 15) _ Remittances should be made payable to “W: ashington Academy of. addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Was Exchanges. —The JouRNAL does not. exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replied without hares provided that claim is aah thirty days after date of the followingissue. (Pisa 3) * Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, 1911, will he sent for $3. 00. _ Special are given to members of scientific societies mE yciene with La, e Academy tee JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21 May 19, 1931 No. 10 ZOOLOGY.—On a collection of Copepoda made in El Salvador by Samuel F. Hildebrand and Fred J. Foster of the U. S. Bureau of Fisheries... C. Dwiacut Marsu. This collection consisted of 15 bottles which were collected by Mr. Hildebrand and Mr. Foster in January and February, 1924. They were taken from the following lakes: Ahuachapan, Chalchuapa, Cha- mico, Coatepeque, Guija, Ilopango, and Olomega. Ilopango, Coate- peque, Chamico, and Chalchuapa may be classed as deep lakes; Olo- mega and Ahuachapan as shallow. Hildebrand, 1925, (3),? found a depth of 83 meters in L. Coatepeque; he states that Chalchuapa and Chamico are quite deep, that Ahuachapan is shallow, and that Olomega has an average depth of 2 meters. He took a deep water temperature in Lake Guija at a depth of 16 meters; this may have been the maxi- mum depth. Juday, 1915, (4), gave descriptions and sketch maps of lakes Ilopango and Coatepeque. He found a maximum depth of 215 meters in Ilo- pango. In Coatepeque he found a maximum depth of 110 meters. All the collections were made from surface waters. Following is a list of the species found. Lake Ahuachapan Cyclops tenwis Marsh: Diaptomus marshi Juday Lake Chalchuapa Cyclops tenuis Marsh; Diaptomus marshi Juday Lake Chamico Diaptomus siciloides Lilljeborg Lake Coatepeque Cyclops leuckarti Claus; Cyclops tenuis Marsh Lake Guija Cyclops albidus Jurine; Cyclops tenuis Marsh; Diaptomus sp. all immature. 1 Received April 1, 1931. 2 Numbers in parenthesis refer to papers cited in the bibliography. 207 208 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 Lake Ilopango Diaptomus siciloides Lilljeborg Lake Olomega Cyclops leuckartt Claus; Diaptomus marshi Juday. It will be noticed that very few species were found, but it must be remembered that the collections were made within a short period of time and can be considered as representative of only the January and February fauna. The fact that the collections were all made at the surface must also be considered, for under certain conditions most of the mature copepods are found beneath the surface. This is shown in Juday’s (1915, p. 247) report of Lake Atitlan, in which no mature forms were found in the 0—5 meter collection, while large numbers appeared between 5 and 30 meters. The special interest of these collections is in the addition to our knowledge of the distribution of these species. Juday’s paper, 1915, is the only preceding paper dealing with the Copepoda of El Salvador. - Norres IN REGARD TO THE SPECIES No importance attaches to the presence of Cyclops albidus and Cyclops leuckartt. Both species are cosmopolitan, and may appear in any collections. CycLops TENUIS Marsh This is the first record of C. tenuzs in El Salvador. The species was de- scribed from material collected at Calabasas, Arizona. It is closely related to C. leuckarti from which it is distinguished by being smaller and more slender, with few (generally four) ova in each egg sac, lack of armature of the terminal segments of the female antennae, and the form of the receptaculum seminis. It was found in many localities in the Panama Canal Zone, Marsh 1913, (5), Dodds, 1926, (2), and was considered one of the most characteristic species of that region. It was found in Lakes Ahuachapan, Chalchuapa, Coatepeque, and Guija. Itis to be presumed that eventually it will be found in other localities in Central America and Mexico. DIAPTOMUS SICILOIDES Lilljeborg Juday, 1915, has already reported D. siciloides from Lake Ilopango and Lake Coatepeque. Inthe Hildebrand and Foster collections it was found not only in these lakes but also in Lake Chamico. As shown by Marsh, 1929, (7), it is very widely distributed in the central and western United States. Since that publication it has been reported by Bajkov, 1930, (1), in Lake Winnepegosis, and has been found by Wright in Lake Erie. El Salvador is the most southern location and it has not been reported between that region and Texas. In the United States, D. szczloides is found generally in small bodies of water. Possibly it may be somewhat significant that in El] Salvador, it has, so far, appeared only in deep lakes. DIAPTOMUS MARSHI Juday Juday, 1915, reported D. marshi from Puerto Barrios and Los Amates, Guatemala, and wrote his description from material collected at those local- MAY 19, 1931 NELSON AND GOLDMAN: THREE PUMAS 209 ities. Marsh, 1913, (5), reported it in the Panama Canal Zone and in 1919 (6), from Honduras. In the El Salvador collections it was found in Lakes Chal- chuapa, Olomega, and Ahuachapan, and Pearse, 1915, (8), found it in Col- ombia. Diaptomus columbiensis Thiebaud 1914, (9), also collected in Colombia, isa synonym of D. marshi. So far as our present knowledge is con- cerned, it has a somewhat limited distribution, being confined to Guatemala on the north and Colombia on the south. While not found in all localities, it is not a rare species and in Lake Ahuachapan occurred in large numbers. Its preferred habitat is in shallow water or pools, while D. sicilozdes, as stated above, is found, in El Salvador, in deep bodies of water. BIBLIOGRAPHY 1. Basxov, ALEXANDER. Biological conditions of Manitoban lakes. Cont. Can. Biol. and Fisheries. N.S. Vol. V, No. 12, pp. 165-204. 1930. 2. Dopps,G.S. Entomostraca from the Panama Canal Zone with description of one new species. Occasional papers of the Museum of Zoology, Univ. Mich., No. 174. 1926. 3. HILDEBRAND, SAMUEL F. Fishes of El Salvador, Central America. Bull. U. 8. Bur. Fisheries, Vol. XLI, Doc. 985. 1925. 4. Jupay, Cuancey. LIimnological studies on some lakes in Central America. Trans. Wisc. Acad. Sci., Arts and Letters, Vol. XVIII, Part I, pp. 214-250. 1915. 5. Marsy, C. Dwicut. Report on fresh-water Copepoda from Panama, with descrip- tions oJ new species. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections. Vol. 61, No. 3. 1913. 6. Marsx, C. Dwicut. Report ona collection of Copepoda made in Honduras by F. J. Dyer. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 55: 545-548. 1919. 7. Marsx, C. Dwicut. Distribution and key of the North American copepods of the genus Diaptomus, with the description of a new species. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. Vol. 75, Art. 14, No. 2785. 1929. 8. PrarsE, A. S. An account of the Crustacea collected by the Walker Expedition to Santa Marta, Colombia. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., Vol. 49, No. 2123, pp. 531-556. 1915. 9. TureBaup, M. Voyage d’exploration scientifique en Colombia. Copépodes de Co- lombia et des Cordilleres de Mendoza. Mém. Soc. Neuchdteloise Sci. Nat., 5?: 160-175. 1914. ZOOLOGY .—Three new pumas.! E. W. NEtson and E. A. GoLpMAN, Biological Survey, U. 8S. Department of Agriculture. Further study of the large American cats assigned to Felis concolor Linné has resulted in the segregation of three geographic races which, in addition to those recently characterized by the authors (Journ. Mamm., 10: 345-350, November 11, 1929), seem worthy of distine- tive names. Felis concolor kaibabensis, subsp. nov. Kaibab Mountain Lion Type.—From Powell Plateau, Grand Canyon National Park, Arizona - (altitude 8,700 feet). No. 171186, &@ adult, U. S. National Museum (Bio- Bee Survey collection), collected by J. T. Owens, April 15,1911. X num- er 8432. 1 Received April 15, 1981. 210 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 General characters.—A large, long-haired, pallid subspecies, with dark median dorsal area comparatively ill defined, the general tone, merging with less contrast than usual into that of sides of back, owing in part to a reduction of the overlying black wash present in most forms of the group; skull large, narrow, and elongated. Most closely allied to F. c. hippolestes, but gen- erally paler, the dark median dorsal area less clearly defined; skull narrower. Larger than F’. c. azteca, and differing otherwise in about the same characters as from hippolestes. Differing from fF’. c. californica in larger size, paler color, and relatively narrower skull. Closely resembling F. c. brownz in color, but larger and cranial characters distinctive. Color—Type: ‘Top of head, neck, and rather poorly defined median dorsal area to base of tail light tawny, very thinly and inconspicuously overlaid with black, the tawny element deepest along lower part of back and rump, paling gradually through cinnamon buff on sides of neck, shoulders, along flanks and on outer surfaces of limbs to pale pinkish buff on feet ; lips, lower part of cheeks, chin, throat, chest, and inguinal region white; under surface of neck suffused with pinkish buff; belly overlaid on sides with pale pinkish buff, becoming whitish along median line; inner sides of limbs dull white, the drab basal color show- ing through; face in general buffy gray, with large whitish, supraorbital spots; blackish areas at base of vibrissae on sides of muzzle rather inconspicuous; ears blackish externally, broadly edged with gray extending also in a band across middle, thinly clad internally with white hairs; hairs around pads on feet brownish black; tail above light tawny, becoming dull pinkish buffy below to tip which is black, the black extending forward about three inches on upper side. Skull.—Very similar to that of F. c. hippolestes, but narrower and relatively more elongated, less rounded in general outline as viewed from above; zygomata less widely spreading; interpterygoid fossa narrower; dentition about the same. Similar in general to that of F. c. azteca, but larger and differing otherwise in the same proportions as from hippolestes. Larger and more elongated than that of F. c. californica, with flatter frontal region and relatively less widely spreading zygomata. Approaching that of F. c. browns in narrowness, but decidedly larger, with heavier dentition. _ Measurements.—Skull of type (no reliable measurements of body available) : Greatest length, 216.8 mm.; zygomatic breadth, 141.6; interorbital breadth, 43.4; least width between outer walls of interpterygoid fossa, 29; alveolar length of upper canine-premolar series, 62.4; crown length of upper carnassial, 22) Remarks.—The mountain lions of the Kaibab plateau north of the Grand Canyon of the Colorado River in northwestern Arizona, southwestern Utah and central and eastern Nevada, assigned to this subspecies, are closely allied to F. c. hippolestes which has an extended range from north to south in the Rocky Mountain region. While the differential characters are comparatively slight they are exhibited so consistently by the material examined that separate recognition by name seems necessary in order to clarify the relation- ships of neighboring forms. Felis concolor anthonyi, subsp. nov. Venezuelan Puma Type.—From Playa del Rio Base, Monte Duida, Territorio de Amazonas, southern Venezuela. No. 76935, o& adult, American Museum of Natural History, collected by Olalla Brothers, November 22, 1928. | MAY 19, 1931 NELSON AND GOLDMAN: THREE PUMAS 211 General characters.—A large, short-haired, rusty reddish subspecies, with a massive skull. Similar in size to F. c. wavula, but type somewhat darker in general tone than specimens referred to that form, and skull differing in im- portant details. Differing from F’. c. bangsi and F. c. séderstromz in more rufescent coloration and cranial features. Color.—Type: Upper surface of neck and median dorsal area to base of tail near ferruginous or hazel, moderately mixed with black especially on the rump, becoming light tawny on sides of neck, shoulders, along flanks and outer sides of limbs, paling to near light pinkish cinnamon on feet; lips, except near base of vibrissae, chin and throat white; under surface of neck suffused with light pinkish cinnamon; chest, inner sides of limbs, inguinal region, and med- ian line of abdomen dull white; sides of abdomen invaded by irregular light tawny spots; top of head ferruginous mixed with black; face in general buffy brownish; a conspicuous black area at base of vibrissae; ears black externally, thinly clothed internally with whitish hairs; hairs around pads on feet black- ish; tail above buffy brownish, with a blackish median line, below dull buffy becoming black all around at tip which is tufted. Skull—Size large and structure massive. Similar in general to that of F. c. bangst, but much larger; interpterygoid fossa much broader; auditory bullae larger; dentition similar, but heavier. Not very unlike that of F. c. séderstromi, but larger; ascending branches of premaxillae ending on maxillo- nasal suture (premaxillary endings slightly deflected outward and incising maxillae in séderstromz) ; jugal reaching farther posteriorly, well into plane of glenoid fossa; auditory bullae larger; dentition similar but heavier. Com- pared with that of F. c. wavula the skull is broader; frontal region much broader; nasals more highly arched, less flattened anteriorly; ascending branches of maxillae less compressed, or ‘‘pinched in” laterally; interpterygoid fossa much broader; auditory bullae large as in wavula; dentition similar, but upper carnassial with internal cusp less prominent. Measurements.—Type: Total length, 1720 mm.; tail vertebrae, 725; hind foot, 245. Skull (type): Greatest length, 205; zygomatic breadth, 143.5; interorbital breadth, 41.2; least width between outer walls of interp- terygoid fossa, 33.3; alveolar length of upper canine-premolar series, 62.5; crown length of upper carnassial, 23.5. Remarks.—Although based on a single specimen, a fine adult male, the characters presented by the type of F. c. anthonyi seem clearly beyond the range of individual variation in any of the forms described. From the Monte Duida region, near the upper Orinoco River, it may range into much of the upper Amazon Valley. The width of the interpterygoid fossa is remarkable and equalled in the known forms of the group only in F. c. pearsoni and F. c. puma which are widely different in other respects. This new puma is named for Mr. H. E. Anthony, Curator of Mammals, American Museum of Natural History, in recognition of his extensive explorations and research on the mammals of South America, and to whom we are indebted for the privilege of describing it. Felis concolor greeni, subsp. nov. East Brazilian Puma Type.—From Curraes Novos, Rio Grande do Norte, Brazil. No. 249896, ¢ adult, U. 8. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by Edward C. Green, November, 1930. 212 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 General characters.—A small, short-haired, rich rusty reddish subspecies, with small but robust skull and remarkably small teeth. Apparently not very closely allied to any known form. Similar in general to Felzs concolor concolor, but much smaller, and cranial characters distinctive. Not very unlike F. c. wavula and F. c. osgoodi in color, but much smaller and skull quite different. Color—Type: ‘Top of head, neck, and median dorsal area to base of tail rich cinnamon rufous, very thinly mixed with black, the general rufescent tone most intense along lower part of back and rump, becoming light tawny on sides of neck, shoulders, along flanks and on outer surfaces of limbs, paling gradually to near light pinkish cinnamon on feet; lips, except near base of vibrissae, chin and throat white; chest, inner sides of limbs, and inguinal region dull whitish; abdomen whitish, the sides with irregular but rather dis- tinct light tawny spots; face in general buffy brownish; ears blackish exter- nally, thinly clothed internally with whitish hairs; hairs around pads on feet brownish black; tail above ochraceous tawny rather heavily mixed with black along the median line, below ochraceous buffy, the tip tapering and lacking a distinct black terminal tuft. Skull.—Skull small, short, rounded and rather heavy. Similar in general to that of F. c. concolor, but much smaller; frontal region actually as well as relatively broader and flatter; nasals relatively narrower, more pointed posteriorly, less decurved along median line anteriorly; interpterygoid fossa relatively narower; auditory bullae relatively much smaller, more flattened, less inflated in front of meatus; jugal extending posteriorly to plane of glenoid fossa about as in concolor; dentition similar but much lighter, the individual teeth much smaller, except vestigial premolars and molars which are rather large. Compared with that of F. c. wavula the skull is smaller; frontal region broader; ascending branches of maxillae not compressed or ‘‘pinched in”’ laterally as in wavula; interpterygoid fossa narrower; auditory bullae smaller, less inflated anteriorly; dentition much lighter; upper carnassial with internal cusp less developed. In general form the skull somewhat resembles that of F. c. osgoodi, but is much smaller and differs in detail, the rostrum being less compressed laterally, the auditory bullae relatively smaller and dentition much lighter. Measurements.—Skull of type (no measurements of body available): Greatest length, 189 mm.; zygomatic breadth, 132.6; interorbital breadth, 43.1; least width between outer walls of interpterygoid fossa, 26.6; alveolar length of upper canine-premolar series, 52.8; crown length of upper carnassial, Remarks.—Felis c. greeni from extreme eastern South America requires no very close comparison with any known form. In essential characters, how- ever, it agrees so closely with the other subspecies that the use of a trinomial name seems fully warranted. It is readily distinguished by small size and remarkably small teeth. The canines are especially short and weak. The new form is named for the collector of the type, Mr. Edward C. Green, a collaborator of the Biological Survey for many years. MAY 19,1931 GAHAN: PARASITES OF GRAIN INSECTS 213 ENTOMOLOGY .—On certain hymenopterous parasites of stored-grain insects.1 A. B. Ganan, Bureau of Entomology. (Communi- cated by Harotp Morrison.) The recent untimely death of my good friend and colleague, Dr. James Waterston of the British Museum, brought to an end a corre- spondence and in later years a warm personal friendship covering a period of more than ten years, during which time Dr. Waterston’s whole-hearted and efficient cooperation was a source of very great helpfulness and pleasure to me. Shortly before his death in April, 1930, we became mutually interested in solving the identity of certain parasites of stored-grain insects and had made considerable progress when the project was interrupted. Fortunately the assistance of Dr. Ch. Ferriere, of the Imperial Bureau of Entomology, has made it possible to complete the investigation, in part at least, and the results which deal with certain species of Bethylidae are deemed worthy of publication at this time. BETHYLIDAE Plastanoxus westwoodi (Kieffer) Figs. 1; 2, and 3. Cephalonomia formiciformis var. Westwood, Trans. Ent. Soc. London, 1881, p. 127, pl. 6, fig. 4; male, female. Cephalonomia westwood: Kieffer, Das Tierreich, Bethylidae, 41 Lieferung, 1914, p. 248. The species Cephalonomia formiciformis, which is type of the genus Ceph- alonomia, was described by Westwood in 1833? from specimens reared from a fungus growing in the neighbourhood of London. In 1833, Westwood re- published the description and figured both sexes of the species. In his re- marks he stated that he had received specimens of both sexes collected in Indian corn from Africa. In addition to figuring the winged and wingless forms of the female as well as the male of typical formiciformis, he published without further comment figures of the head, antenna, and wing of a male obtained from Indian corn. Apparently on the basis of Westwood’s figures, Kieffer recognized the form from Indian corn as different from typical formici- formis and gave to it the name Cephalonomia westwoodi Kieffer. Both the British Museum and the United States National Museum had accumulated a considerable number of specimens of Bethylidae reared from various lots of grain infested by beetles and some of this material obviously belonged to the genus Cephalonomia. Waterston found what he believed to be two species of this genus among his material and I discovered what I believed to be the same two forms in the material of the United States 1 Received March 24, 1931. * Mag. Nat. Hist., 6: 421, fig. 55. 1833; female. 214 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO AS Se = = - SS yS- =: =) = = =-- aon Ss OQ Bip iis hie a iy py pte" EOS Ger. a yee Shey ppt ll lt CSS pe ean a Nig ps fi fee 2) Mijn / Set 2 FSS Ye se en ? ZZ / My oe ae oy v\ MPA TITAN Fig. 1. Copy of Westwood’s original figure of the wing of Cephalonomia formicifor- mis, variety from Indian corn, later named Plastanoxus westwoodi by J. J. Kieffer. Fig. 2. Plastanoxus westwoodi (Kieffer). Forewing as it actually is. Fig. 3. Plastanoxus westwoodi (Kieffer). Head of female. . 10 —— MAY 19, 1931 GAHAN: PARASITES OF GRAIN INSECTS 215 National Museum. One of these species we recognized as being C. tarsalis (Ashmead). The other seemed to agree rather closely with Westwood’s figures and Kieffer’s description of C’. westwoodi Kieffer. In order to settle the identity of this species the writer suggested to Waterston that he endeavor to see the type of C. westwoodi, which was believed to be in the Hope Museum at Oxford. Through the cooperation of Prof. E. B. Poulton of Oxford the desired specimens were located and turned over to Waterston for study. The types, which were easily identified by the labels, consisted of two females and a single male mounted on cards. After a preliminary examination of these types Waterston wrote me in January, 1930, as follows: ‘‘I have struck rather a snag regarding Cephalonomia. ‘There appears to be some slight difference between the antennae of the African type specimens and the ex- amples which you and I have gathered. I am quite convinced, however, that our gatherings contain the same forms, and I shall send you my collec- tion whenever I have come to a definite conclusion on the matter”. In Febru- ary he again wrote me, saying, ‘‘I have obtained permission from Prof. Poul- ton to send you one of the original examples of Cephalonomia first described by Westwood asa variety of the common British form and later described by Kieffer. I do not think that this Westwood material is identical with our gatherings but I should like you to see the insect and form your own opinion. I am also sending you my own grain-pest material of the genus which is quite comparable with the material you have been collecting. It may interest you to see what I have’. This material arrived later in good shape and proved very interesting. At first examination the Westwood specimen, a female, appeared to be a Cephalonomia but did not seem to agree with either of the two species of that genus represented in the grain-pest material before me. The specimen was glued to the card in such a way that the wing venation was only partly visible. By moistening one wing very slightly it was found possible to raise it from the card without detaching it from the specimen. When examined in its original position on the card, the venation appeared almost exactly as figured by West- wood, but when raised from the card it immediately became evident that this specimen at least had a long radial vein which was entirely lacking in the figure. Since the radial vein is lacking in typical Cephalonomia this specimen was run through Kieffer’s key to the genera of Bethylidae and found to run directly to Plastanoxus Kieffer, the genotype of which is P. chittendeni (Ashmead). Fig. 4. Cephalonomia waterstoni Gahan. a, forewing: b, hind wing. Fig. 5. Cephalonomia waterstoni Gahan. Head of female. Fig. 6. Cephalonomia tarsalis (Ashmead). Forewing. Fig. 7. Cephalonomia tarsalis (Ashmead). Head of female. Fig. 8. Rhabdepyris zeae Waterston. a, forewing: b, hind wing. All figures greatly enlarged. Drawings were made by, ELEANOR A. CARLIN, artist of the Bureau of Entomology. 216 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 When compared with the types of chittendeni, which are in the United States National Museum collection, the specimen proved to be congeneric but a different species. However, a review of Westwood’s original remarks revealed the specific statement that his figures of the insect from grain were drawn from the male. The question then presented itself whether the male figured by Westwood (and therefore the holotype of the species) and the female examined by me were in reality the same species. Not having seen the male type I was in no position to answer this question. In the meantime Waterston’s fatal illness developed and he passed away. Fortunately Mr. Ch. Ferriere located the male specimen in question among other material on Waterston’s desk, and he has recently informed me that he has compared this specimen with the female and found them to be specific- ally identical in venation as well as otherwise. ° It is certain therefore that the figures by Westwood of the insect from In- dian corn are incomplete (see Figs. 1 and 2) and that the so-called Cepha- lonomia westwood: Kieffer is not a Cephalonomia but belongs in the genus Plastanoxus. The species is very similar to Plastanoxus chittendeni but may be easily distinguished. The following key will suffice to distinguish. the three known species of the genus Plastanoxus Kieffer. Only P. west- woodi is known to be a parasite of stored-grain pests.® Kerry To THE KNOWN Species oF Plastanoxus KIBFFER 1. Forewing with median and submedian cells complete and distinct. Pro- podeum with a very distinct and complete median longitudinal carina. Radial vein extending fully two-thirds of the distance to wing-apex. P. laevis (Ashmead) Forewing with median and submedian cells effaced. Propodeum without longitudinal carina. Radial vein reaching less than two-thirds of dis- tance to apex of wing. 2. Radial vein extending a little more than half the distance from its origin to the apex of wing; head of the female viewed from in front fully one and one-half times as long as broad, about 18:11, its sides nearly paral- lel; female antennae short, none of the flagellar joints except the api- cal one longer than broad, the first and second flagellar joints distinctly broader than long, apical joint ovate and nearly twice as long as broad; male head 13:12; male antennae longer than in the female, the flagellar joints except the first and second all slightly longer than broad, first and second nearly quadrate, apical joint twice as long as broad. Eyes in both sexes situated much nearer to the mouth than to the vertex. Pronotum distinctly more than twice as long as mesoscutum; propo- deum-twice aslong as'scutellum 2.36 se. : P. westwoodi (Kieffer) Radial vein extending distinctly less than half the distance from its origin to apex of wing. (Female unknown.) Head of male scarcely longer than broad, about 15:14, its sides rounded; antennae longer, all 3 The species Bethylus musculus Say which is referred to Plastanoxus by Kieffer is known only from the original description. It may or may not belong here. It appar- ently differs from all of those included in the key by having the ‘‘feet honey-yellow.”’ - may 19, 1931 GAHAN: PARASITES OF GRAIN INSECTS 217 flagellar joints distinctly a little longer than broad, the first and sec- ' ond not or scarcely shorter than the others, apical joint more than twice as long as broad. Eyes not or very little nearer mouth than ver- tex. Pronotum not twice as long as mesoscutum; propodeum not quite twice as long as scutellum............ P. chittendeni (Ashmead) Plastanoxus kiefferi is a slender species, 1 to 1.25 mm. in length, wholly black except the tarsi which are yellowish; head wholly smooth, impunctate, and shining; pronotum, mesoscutum, and scutellum also polished, parapsidal grooves absent; propodeum longer than broad, finely and distinctly punctate OAT a NY Miyagi ff ts i Be Le ei ey @ i LE ii os Gj, jy il an Fig. 9.—Adult female of Cephalonomia tarsalis Ashmead. (Greatly enlarged.) Drawing by H. Braprorp. basally, the dorsal apex mostly polished; abdomen practically smooth, the tergites beyond the first very faintly reticulated. In addition to the type female already mentioned, the writer has seen the following material: Fourteen specimens (2 males and 12 females) in the United Station National Museum, reared at Washington, D. C., from the pupal cell of Laemophloeus (Cryptolestes) pusillus Schénherr, by R. T. Cotton March 16, 1925; one male in the British Museum tentatively identified by Waterston as Cephalonomia sp. in Reports of the Grain-Pests (War) Commit- 218 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 tee, No. 9, and shown in that report (see page 51, No. 324) to have been collected at Plymouth, England, from a shipment of grain from Sydney, Australia, which was infested by several different species of beetles, one of which was the species above named; one previously unidentified specimen, also in the British Museum, bearing the number 381, which number un-- doubtedly refers to the shipment of grain mentioned in the above-named re- port (see page 48, No. 381) as having been received at Sunderland, England, from Freemantle, Western Australia, and which was likewise infested by several species of beetles of which L. puszllus was one. Apparently then P. westwoodi is a widely distributed species, probably occurring in Africa, Australia, and North America, and parasitic upon Laemo- phloeus pusillus. Cephalonomia tarsalis (Ashmead) Figs. 6, 7 and 9. Ateleopterus tarsalis Ashmead, Bul. U. S. Nat. Mus., 45: 45. 1893. Neoscleroderma tarsale Kieffer, in Wytsman’s Gen. Ins., 76: 41. 1908. Neoscleroderma tarsale Kieffer, Das Tierreich, 41: 270. 1914. Neoscleroderma tarsalis Brues, Conn. Geol. Nat. Hist. Surv. Bul. 22, Hy- menoptera, 1917, p. 610. Neoscleroderma tarsalis Washburn, 17th Rept. Sta. Ent. Minn., 1918, p. 205. Cephalonomia kiefferr Fouts, Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash., 22: 71. 1920. Ateleopterus tarsalis Back and Cotton, Jour. Agr. Res., 33: 449. 1926. ? Cephalonomia sp. Myers, Bul. Ent. Res., 20: 428. 1929. Cephalonomia tarsalis Gahan, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 77: 11, art. 8. 1930. This species, although closely resembling the following new species, is easily distinguished from it by the presence of a complete and distinct median cell in the forewing (Pl. I, Fig. 6). It is also slightly larger, the head is not parallel-sided but distinctly broader at middle than at either vertex or mouth, the eyes are situated at or very near the middle of head, the antennae of female longer with at least the 10th and 11th joints slightly longer than broad and the 12th about two and one-half times as long as broad. | Female.—Length 1.7 to 2mm. Shining black, the antennal scape black, flagellum brown to brownish black, all tarsi and usually the anterior tibiae reddish yellow; wings hyaline, the venation brownish. Head pronotum, mesoscutum, and scutellum with fine shallow reticulate- punctate sculpture; propodeum dorsally very distinctly and nearly uniformly reticulate-punctate and with a very distinct and usually complete median longitudinal carina; abdomen as long as thorax, ovate, smooth, the third, fourth, and fifth tergites each with an arcuate depression before the apex, this depressed area defined anteriorly by more or less of a ridge which is more prominent laterally than at middle. Male.—Similar in every way to the female except that the antennae are entirely black, more slender than in female, joints 3 to 11 each twice or nearly twice as long as broad, joint 12 three times as long as broad; abdo- men shorter than the thorax, ovate. MAY 19, 1931 GAHAN: PARASITES OF GRAIN INSECTS 219 Redescribed from the types and 40 additional specimens in the United States National Museum. Cephalonomia tarsalis was originally described from specimens reared from Oryzaephilus surinamensis (Linnaeus) collected at Lafayette, Indiana, and Washington, D. C. The above cited references by Kieffer, Brues, and Washburn are for the most part merely repetitions of this original record. Back and Cotton record the species from Washington, D. C., reared from the same host and also from Texas from an unidentified host. The types of C. kiefferc Fouts, which species was synonymized with tarsalis by Gahan in 1930, were reared from Sztophilus oryzae (Linnaeus) at Wellington, Kansas. The national collection contains specimens reared from O. surinamensis at Vienna, Virginia, by R. A. Cushman, and from Columbus, Ohio, by O. E. Gahm. Other specimens without definite host records are from Fresno, Cali- fornia, collected by J. C. Hamlin, Sept. 24, 1924, and W. D. Reed, Sept. 7, 1925; Saticoy, California, S. E. Flanders; Bozeman, Montana, R. A. Cooley; and Agricultural College, Michigan, D. B. Whelan. I have also seen numer- ous specimens, now in the British Museum, collected from shipments of infested grain during the World War and listed in Reports of the Grain Pests (War) Committee, No. 9, 1921, pp. 50-52, under the name Cephalonomia sp. and comprising lots numbers 201, 206, 222, 324 (in part), 358, 371, 378, 382, and 387 as there enumerated. All of these shipments of grain seem to have originated in Australia and in practically every instance either Oryzaephilus surinamensis or Sitophilus oryzae were found to be present in the shipment. In most instances both of these species were present along with other species of Coleoptera which infest stored grain. It appears certain from the above records that C. tarsalis occurs in both Australia and North America and it seems highly probable that it will be found to be practically cosmopolitan. The records show only Oryzaephilus suri- namensis and Sitophilus oryzae definitely established as hosts of. the species but it is not improbable that other related grain-infesting beetles may be attacked. The interesting account by J. G. Myers of Cephalonomia sp. attacking Silvanus in Australia, cited above, very probably involves this species and may also involve the following species. Myers states that Waterston recog- nized the species as identical with the species collected by the Grain Pests (War) Committee. Waterston, I believe, was not aware at that time that this material included two species and it is impossible to tell from Myers’s ac- count which species he had under observation. Cephalonomia waterstoni, new species Figs. 4 and 5 Readily distinguished from C. tarsalis by the absence of a complete median cell in the forewing, the more nearly parallel-sided head, and the fact that the eyes are situated below the middle of the head. 220 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 Female.—Length 1.6 mm. Black and shining; mandibles, pedicel, and first flagellar joint more or less, and all tarsi yellowish; antennal flagellum and the tibiae brownish black; wings hyaline or with a very faint discal cloud. Head viewed from in front longer than broad (20:16), the sides nearly parallel or very slightly convex; eyes situated much nearer to mouth than to vertex, about their own length below vertex; ocelli distinct, in an equilateral tri- angle; whole head finely reticulate-punctate. Antennae inserted at clypeus, 12-jointed; scape two and one-half to three times as long as broad, pedicel about one and one-half times as long as broad, joints 3 to 11 subquadrate, joint 12 about twice as long as broad. Thorax flattened dorsally and with reticulate-punctate sculpture like the head; pronotum about three times the length of mesoscutum, much narrower anteriorly than posteriorly; mesoscu- tum without longitudinal grooves; scutellum distinctly longer than mesoscu- tum, with a short groove or pit on either side of base; propodeum flat, in the same plane as scutellum, as long as pronotum, distinctly narrower at apex than at base, sculptured like the thorax, finely margined laterally and at apex of dorsum, a very delicate median longitudinal carina present or ab- sent, the lateral and posterior faces sculptured like the dorsum. Wings (see Pl. I, Fig. 5) well-developed, the prostigma and pterostigma very small, other veins except the submarginal effaced, the forewing without basal cells. Legs normal, the femora moderately swollen, the hind tarsi longer than their tibiae. Abdomen ovate, a little broader than the thorax and subequal to it in length, smooth and polished, the third tergite with a barely perceptible suggestion of a depression on each side of the middle. Male.—Unknown. Ty pe-locality.—Australia. Type.—Cat. No. 48361, U.S. N. M. Described from 11 female specimens taken at quarantine in Washington, D. C., by E. A. Back from a shipment of grain the original source of which was said to be Australia; also four females collected from stored corn at Baton Rouge, Louisiana, November 12, 1928, by C. O. Hopkins, and bearing Louisi- ana Agricultural Experiment Station No. 1511; also one female taken at Urbana, Illinois, January 26, 1927, by W. V. Balduf. I have likewise seen numerous specimens now in the British Museum, the same being those listed in the Royal Society’s 9th Report of the Grain Pests (War) Committee, 1921, listed under the name Cephalonomia sp. _ (p. 50) and comprising the lots numbered 247, 262, 266, 347, 348, 349, 370, 384, 386, 389, and 390 of that report. According to that report one or more of the following species of Coleoptera were present in each of these shipments of grain: [Calandra] Sitophilus oryzae (Linnaeus), [Calandra] Sztophilus gra- naria (Linnaeus), Tribolium castaneum (Herbst), T. confusum Duval, Rhizo- pertha dominica (Fabricius), [Szlvanus] Oryzaephilus surinamensis (Linnaeus), Laemophloeus pusillus (Schénherr), Anthicus floralis (Linnaeus), Carpophilus dimidiatus (Fabricius), Tenebroides mauritanicus (Linnaeus), and [Cathar- tus| Ahasverus advena (Waltl). The species has not been associated with any definite host but is in all probability parasitic upon one or more of the Coleoptera which infest stored grain. It is apparently established in Australia and North America and probably occurs elsewhere. . MAY 19, 1931 GAHAN: PARASITES OF GRAIN INSECTS 221 As pointed out in discussion of C. tarsalis, the account by J. G. Myers of Cephalonomia sp. in Australia may possibly involve this species. Cephalonomia meridionalis Bréthes Cephalonomia meridionalis Bréthes, An. Mus. Nae. Hist. Nat. Buenos Aires, 24: 87. 1913. This species is unknown to the writer. It is said to be parasitic upon [Silvanus| Oryzaephilus surinamensis (Linnaeus) in Argentina. It apparently differs from both of the foregoing species by having the coxae testaceous. Cephalonomia sp. Cephalonomia sp. Grandi, Bol. Lab. Ent. R. Ist. Super. Agr. Bologna, 2: 301-314, figs. 1-9. 1929. Grandi describes and figures a species reared from Sztodrepa panicea Lin- naeus in Italy as Cephalonomia sp. He was unable to identify this insect specifically. This species is evidently different from either C. tarsalis or C. waterstonz7. The head resembles that of waterstoni, but the venation is more reduced, the prostigma and pterostigma apparently effaced in the alate male, while the female is wingless. Rhabdepyris zeae Waterston Rhabdepyris zeae Waterston, 9th Rept. Grain Pests (War) Committee, Roy. Soc. Lond., 1921, p. 27, figs, 14 and 15; Gahan, Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus., fi ie art. 8. 1930. Originally described from a specimen taken at Liverpool, England, in a shipment of grain from Africa. The writer has recently recorded its occur- rence in stored grain at Lafayette, Indiana, and Baton Rouge, Louisiana, as a probable parasite of Tribolium confusum. Five specimens more recently received were reared from stored grain at Brownwood, Texas, by J. L. Gardiner. The wings of this species are figured for comparison with the other species (see Pl. I Fig. 8). i Parepyris sylvanidis Bréthes Parepyris meridionalis Bréthes, An. Mus. Nac. Nat. Hist. Buenos Aires, 2287. 19138. This species is unknown to me. It is said to be parasitic upon [Szlvanus] Oryzaephilus surinamensis in Argentina. Parepyris is characterized by Bréthes as a new and monobasic genus. At about the same time Kieffer (Boll. Lab. Zool. Portici, 7: 108. 1913) proposed Parepyris as a new genus with Hpyris interruptus Kieffer as the genotype. Parepyris Kieffer and Parepyris Bréthes are apparently different genera but the writer is unable at present to determine which has priority, as the exact date of publication of Kieffer’s paper is not clear. 222 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 ENTOMOLOGY .—Notes on Gypona octolineata (Say). J. W.Scriv- ENER, Bureau of Entomology, U. 8. Department of Agriculture. (Communicated by J. S. WADE.) In connection with the investigations of leafhoppers that are being carried on by the Bureau of Entomology at Arlington Experiment Farm (post office, Rosslyn, Virginia), some seedling apple trees grown on the experiment farm and apparently infested with some species of leafhoppers were brought into the greenhouse January 10, 1930. By Fig. 1—Nymph of Gypona octolineata on apple stem at A. When.this nymph was photographed it had not settled down to feeding, so the head is not in contact with the stem; neither is the abdomen curved outward from the stem in the usual manner, in which position the mimicry of the stipules is most pronounced. January 28 a number of nymphs of Gypona octolineata? had hatched out on them. These were kept upon seedling apple plants in cellu- loid cages in order that their development might be studied. The entire nymphal development of a single individual of this species was observed. It covered 38 days—from February 26 to April 5. The 1 Received March 27, 1931. 2 Adults of this material were kindly identified as Gypona octolineata Say, var. striata Burm., by Dr. Herbert Osborn. MAY 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: PSEUDOPITYOPHTHORUS 223 temperatures in the greenhouse during this period ranged from 75° to 85°F. As stated, the leafhopper was confined upon the host plant in a small celluloid cage, but in order that it might have reasonably good host material, it was moved to a fresh leaf every four or five days. The duration of the five nymphal stages, increasing in length with each instar, were 1, 4, 5, 10, and 18 days, respectively. The main purpose of this brief article is to record the apparent pro- tective mimicry which is enjoyed by the nymphs of this species when they follow their normal feeding habits. When placed upon the plants many of them soon found their way to the base of the petioles of the leaves and at this point they so closely resembled the stipules (Figure 1, A) that anyone unaccustomed to looking for them would have had considerable difficulty in finding them. They moved about very little after they had settled down for feeding on the stem. In one instance an individual was known to have fed for three weeks in the same position. ‘This was determined from microscopic sections of the plant material to which this individual was exposed during the period. Feeding on the stem takes place with the head downward and with the abdomen pointing upward and curving outward from the stem. In this position the leafhopper is very similar in appearance to the stipules of the plant, which are of the same green color as the nymphs. ENTOMOLOGY .—A revisional study of the genus Pseudopityoph- thorus Sw. in North America.1. M. W. Buackman, Bureau of En- tomology, U. S. Department of Agriculture. (Communicated by Haroutp Morrison.) In a former paper on the genus Pityophthorus Eichh. and its allies in North America the writer (1928) treated in detail the taxonomy of the genera Myeloborus Blackm., Pityophthorus Eichh., Pityoborus Blackm., and Pityophilus Blackm., gave keys to the genera of the Pityophthori (which includes Conophthorus Hopk., Pseudopityoph- thorus Sw., and Gnathotrichus Eichh. in addition to those just men- tioned), and discussed in a general way the relationships of these vari- ous genera. The present paper should be considered as a continuation of the larger paper and deals with the genera Pseudopityophthorus Sw., while another paper on Gnathotrichus Eichh. will follow immediately. This paper is based upon a study of the Scolytid material in the National Museum and in the writer’s own collection. 1 Received April 16, 1931. 224 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 The Genus Pseudopityophthorus Swaine The genus Pseudopityophthorus was described by Swaine (1918) as follows: ‘The antennal club with strongly arcuate sutures, the distal segments much wider than the first; the tibia coarsely serrate; the elytra not striate, irregularly finely punctulate; the intercoxal process of the prosternum elongate; the male with the front clothed with long arcuate yellow hairs. Allied to Pityophthorus Eichh., in which it has been included.”’ 7 This description applies with exactness to the type species which is designated as P. minutissimus Zimmermann (1868) and applies reason- ably well to all of the species in Division AA of the key on a succeed- ing page of the present paper. However, it does not apply in its entirety to the species in Division A, only one of which (P. asperulus Lec.) was known at the time Swaine’s genus was erected. The mem- bers of this division differ in being usually smaller, with a more slender body, with the elytral punctures sparser and either in regular or nearly regular strial rows, with the declivity less strongly impressed, and with the septa of the antennal club subtransverse. ; Before the erection of the genus Pseudopityophthorus by Swaine (1918) several species had been described and had been assigned to various genera by different authors. P. pubipennis was first described by LeConte (1860) under the name of Bostrichus pubipennis from San Jose, Calif. Later LeConte (1868) referred it to the genus Cryphalus Er. and still later (1876) to Pityoph- thorus Eichh. | P. minutissimus Zimm. was described in 1868 as of the genus Cryp- turgus Er. LeConte (1868) transferred it to Cryphalus Er. and later (1876) to Pityophthorus. | P. asperulus Lec. was described by LeConte (1868) under the name of Cryphalus asperulus. Water the same author (1876) transferred it — to Pityophthorus. Eichhoff (1878) retained it in Pityophthorus and placed it close to the other forms now included in Pseudopityophthorus. Schwarz (1886) referred to this species as Gnathotrichus asperulus and later writers, including Swaine (1909, 1918), have followed him. Pseudopityophthorus gracilus Blackm. described by the writer in 1921 should be regarded as a synonym of asperulus Lec. P. pruinosus was described by Ejichhoff (1878) from “Carolina’”’ as of the genus Pityophthorus. Pityophthorus querciperda described by Schwarz (1888) is identical, as has been pointed out by Eichhoff and Schwarz (1896). MAY 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: PSEUDOPITYOPHTHORUS 225 Pityophthorus tomentosus was described by Ejichhoff (1878) from “America borealis.”’ This species has never been recognized with certainty since, and to the present writer it seems probable that it was based on an aberrant specimen of P. pruinosus. The form described as Cryphalus pilosus (pilosulus) by LeConte (1868) was by him later (1876) transferred to Pityophthorus, in which it was retained by Eichhoff (1878) and Swaine (1909). In 1918 Swaine placed it among the species in his genus Pseudopityophthorus. An examination of the type of this species indicates that it belongs to neither Pityophthorus nor Pseudopityophthorus. Harris (1837) described Tomicus pusillus. LeConte (1868) sug- gested that this species may be identical with minutissimus Zimm.., and Eichhoff (1878) placed the latter name as a synonym of Pityoph- thorus pusillus Har. The species described by Harris can not be recognized at the present time. The description is rather general and might equally well be applied to several small Scolytids occurring in the Northeastern States and in fact has been used by various authors for species in several genera of bark beetles. The single speci- men from which the description was prepared never formed a part of Harris’s own collection and has apparently long since been lost. KEY TO THE SPECIES OF PSEUDOPITYOPTHORUS Sw. A. Body more slender, more than 2.9 times as long as wide; elytra moder- ately to narrowly rounded behind, the punctures sparse to moderately numerous, in regular or nearly regular rows; declivity with second inter- space weakly flattened; antennal club with septa of sutures 1 and 2 subtransverse. B. Front of head in male narrow, flattened, not fringed with long hairs; that of female with a frontal elevation; antenna with club nearly twice as long as funicle; pronotum more than 1.2 times as long as wide; smaller, less ham. (25 mim: lome' s+ ..). .i.)30- Saeed was asperulus Lec. BB. Front of head in male fringed with long hairs; antennal club less than 1.7 times as long as funicle; pronotum less than 1.15 times as long as wide; larger, more than 1.3 mm. long. C. Elytra narrowly rounded behind; sides of pronotum not strongly constricted before the middle; antennal club with segments 2 and 3 subequal in width. D. Smaller, less than 1.4 mm. long; pronotal summit not markedly lighter in color; elytral hairs nearly uniform, fine, short, semi- Sheer Ee SOMMeCAStEr Oba LES ).1 ead qaiisy lowe ce gte fagi, n. sp. DD. Larger, more than 1.7 mm. long; pronotal summit notably lighter in color; elytral hairs more abundant, those fom the interspaces coarser, longer, and more erect. kK. Pronotum with dise moderately shining, distinctly pubescent; elytra with hairs from the interspaces very long; declivity without granules; Southeastern States...... pubescens, n. sp. EE. Pronotal dise brightly shining, subglabrous; elytra with inter- spacial hairs moderately long; declivity with interspaces finely eranulate; Southwestern States............ granulatus, 7. sp. 226 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 CC. Elytra moderately rounded behind; sides of pronotum arcuate behind, strongly constricted before the middle; antennal club widest through thirdsseementis:y. 4 «ea. ates hen ae eee agrifoliae, n. sp. AA. Body stouter, less than 2.8 times as long as wide; elytra moderately to broadly rounded behind, the punctures irregular, very fine and close; declivity distinctly, often strongly impressed at each side of suture: antennal club with septa of sutures 1 and 2 strongly arcuate except in minutisstmus. B. Smaller, less than 1.85 mm. long; eee moderately rounded behind; pubescence very fine, short, appressed; antennal club with segments 2 and 3 subequal in width. C. Elytral pubescence uniform, not notably different on declivity; declivity faintly impressed at each side of suture; front of head broadly plano-concave; antennal club with septa of sutures 1 and 2 weakly arcuate; Eastern States............ minutissimus Zimm. CC. Elytral pubescence broader and more scalelike on the declivity; declivity distinctly impressed at each side of suture; front of head broadly plano-convex; antennal club with septa of sutures 1 and 2 moderately arcuate; Southwestern States...... ', .pulvereus, n. sp. BB. Larger, more than 1.85 mm. long; elytra broadly rounded behind, pubescence coarser and longer, with longer hairs on certain discal inter- spaces and on the declivity; antennal club widest through the third segment, with septa of sutures 1 and 2 strongly arcuate. C. Front of head in male with an impunctate, shining, median ¢allus; pronotum with sides feebly constricted before the middle, anterior margin very broadly rounded, disc moderately to brightly shining, more deeply, less closely punctured. D. Elytral pubescence dense, rather short and stout, that on the declivity longer on the first and third interspaces; smaller; BasternStabeg scl) ee Us) Ee eas pruinosus Eichh. DD. Elytral pubescence less dense, longer and more slender, the longer hairs on the declivity slender, long, and conspicuous, but often abraded; usually much larger; Western States. E. Dise of pronotum brightly shining, more sparsely punctured, devoid of pubescence; elytra less densely punctured, pubescence sparser; declivital hairs longer, finer, and more abundant; female frons with faint longitudinal carinal line yavapail, n. sp. EE. Disc of pronotum moderately shining, rather closely punctured, — with very short hairs; elytra densely punctured and pubescent; declivital hairs shorter, coarser, and less abundant; female frons with small impunctate area above epistomal margin pubipennis Lec. CC. Male frons without median callus; pronotum with sides strongly constricted before the middle, anterior margin narrower, the disc — opaque, more closely and deeply punctured; elytra with the longer hans -of deehivahy; ravhenystoul nee aie ohn. opacicollis, n. sp. Pseudopityophthorus asperulus Lec. Figs. 1 and 2. Description of the adult male-—Dark brown to black with the summit of the pronotum reddish-brown; 1.14 to 1.4 mm. long, slightly more than three times as long as wide. MAY 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: PSEUDOPITYOPHTHORUS 227 Fig. 1. Fore tibia of Pseudopityophthorus asperulus Lec.—Fig. 2. Antenna of P. asperulus Lec.—Fig. 3. Antenna of P. fagi n. sp.—Fig. 4. Antenna of P. pubescens n. sp.—Fig. 5. Antenna of P. granulatus n. sp. male, 5a female.—Fig. 6. Fore tibia of P. minutissimus Zimm.—Fig. 7. Antenna of P. minutissimus Zimm.—Fig. 8. Antenna of P. agrifoliae n. sp.—Fig. 9. Fore tibia of P. pulvereus n. sp.—Fig. 10. Antenna of P. pulvereus n. sp.— Fig. 11. Fore tibia of P. yavapaii n. sp.—Fig. 12. Antenna of P. yavapaii n. sp.—Fig. 13. Antenna of P. pruinosus Hichh.—Fig. 14. Antenna of P. pubi- pennis Lec.—Fig. 15. Antenna of P. opacicollis n. sp. All figures were made by the writer from preparations mounted in balsam, using a compound microscope and a camera lucida. All are magnified about 112 diameters. 228 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 Front of head flattened on a semicircular area, shining, finely, not closely punctured, with fine, sparse, rather short, cinereous pubescence. Lye finely granulate, rather broadly and deeply emarginate. Antenna lighter in color; the club 1.9 times as long as funicle, 1.32 times as long as wide, segments 2 and 3 subequal in width, septa of sutures 1 and 2 feebly arcuate, subtransverse. Pronotum one-fourth longer than wide, widest on the posterior half, with the sides weakly arcuate posteriorly, very faintly constricted before the middle, moderately narrowly rounded in front, with the anterior portion extending well beyond the front of the head; anterior margin rather strongly, regularly serrate; anterior area strongly asperate; summit moderate, much lighter in color, anterior to the middle, with a moderately well-developed, transverse impression posterior to it; posterior area moderately shining, finely, sparsely punctulate, median longitudinal line rather broad, feebly elevated. Elytra subequal to pronotum in width, 1.8 as long as wide; the sides sub- parallel, rather narrowly rounded behind; surface shining; strial punctures minute, in fairly definite rows, each bearing an extremely minute hair (not usually visible) ; interspaces scarcely punctured on the disc, but on sides and declivity moderately punctured, with very fine erect hairs of moderate length. Declivity convex, the second interspace very feebly flattened. The female is similar, but the front of the head is more roughly punctured, has a median elevation, and the hairs are smaller. Pseudopityophthorus gracilus Blkm., described by the writer from Mis- sissippi, is on the average slightly more slender and more finely punctured than the average P. asperulus Lec. but apparently falls within the range of variation of this species. The specific name should bé submerged. The writer has studied specimens of this species from Maine, Massa- chusetts, Connecticut, New York, Pennsylvania, District of Columbia, West Virginia, North Carolina, Florida, Mississippi, Louisiana, and Texas. The various species of Quercus occurring in this wide territory most commonly serve as hosts, but specimens have also been studied from Castanea dentata and Betula populifolia. Pseudopityophthorus fagi, new species Fig. 3. Description of the adult male—Dark reddish-brown; 1.37 mm. long, 3.0 times as long as wide. | Front of the head rather narrow, convex, slightly flattened below, the median area shining, impunctate or nearly so, densely punctured above and at the sides, and ornamented with rather long yellowish hairs which are strongly incurved and directed toward the center. Hye finely granulate, the inner line strongly emarginate. Antenna considerably lighter in color, club more than one-half longer than funicle, about one-third longer than wide, second and third segments subequal in width, septa sub-transverse. Pronotum 1.15 as long as wide, the sides subparallel, faintly constricted in front of the middle, broadly rounded in front; anterior margin slightly extended, with numerous, subequal, regular serrations; anterior area finely asperate; summit moderately elevated, with the transverse impression posterior to it feebly developed; posterior area feebly shining, finely but rather deeply punctured, median longitudinal line scarcely elevated. Elytra about equal in width to pronotum, 1.8 times as long as wide; the - MAY 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: PSEUDOPITYOPHTHORUS 229 sides subparallel as far as the origin of the declivity, rather narrowly rounded behind; surface moderately shining, finely rugulose; strial punctures very fine, in slightly irregular rows; interspaces rugulose, very finely punctured. Declivity convex, very faintly flattened, interspaces 1 to 3 very minutely granulate-punctate. Elytral pubescence only slightly better developed on the declivity, more abundant than in asperulus, the hairs from the interspaces slightly longer, coarser and more erect, especially on the declivity. The female is similar in size and proportions, with the front of the head wider, convex, shining, and impunctate in the median area, closely and finely punctured at the sides and above, with a few inconspicuous hairs; declivital granules absent. Type.—Cat. No. 43423, U.S. N. M. Type, allotype, and four paratypes bear the labels—‘‘Hopk. W. Va. 7142 aa;A.D. Hopkins, Collector; Midland Farm, Morgantown, W. Va.; Nov. 26, 96; Fagus.”’ The type series of six specimens are all that have been seen by the writer. Pseudopityophthorus pubescens, new species Fig. 4. Description of the adult male—Dark reddish-brown, almost black, except the summit of the pronotum which is light reddish-brown; 1.8 mm. long; 2.9 times as long as wide. Front of head plano-concave on an approximate circle extending from eye to eye, surface moderately shining, finely punctured, granulate-rugulose, more strongly and closely punctured at the periphery, and ornamented with a fringe of long, coarse, yellow hairs directed meso-ventrally and masking the frons. Hye rather finely granulate, moderately broadly and deeply emargi- nate on the inner line. Antenna much lighter in color, the club 1.65 longer than funicle, 1.32 longer than wide, third segment slightly wider than second and much wider than first; septa of sutures 1 and 2 subtransverse, weakly arcuate. Pronotum 1.13 times as long as wide, the sides on the posterior half weakly arcuate, feebly constricted in front of the middle, rather broadly rounded in front; anterior margin with numerous, very broad, low serrations; anterior area with approximately concentric rows of broad, low asperities; summit reddish-brown, moderately low, central in position, with a moderately strong, transverse impression posterior to it; posterior area moderately shining, with very fine, moderately close punctures; median longitudinal line not elevated; sides and anterior area with rather long upright hairs, those on the disc less conspicuous, sparser, shorter, and finer. Elytra subequal in width, one and three-fourth times as long as wide, the sides subparallel, moderately narrowly rounded behind; surface feebly shining, rugulose; the strial punctures very fine, in fairly definite rows, with short, reclinate, cinereous hairs; punctures of interspaces still more minute, more numerous, irregular in arrangement, giving origin to much longer, erect, fine hairs. Declivity convex, faintly impressed at each side of suture; strial hairs broad and more scalelike, the longer hairs shorter and thicker than on the dise and sides. The female is similar, but the front of the head is not so strongly and broadly flattened, the punctures and pubescence are more evenly distributed, and the hairs are shorter and much finer. Type.—Cat. No. 43424, U.S. N. M. Type and one paratype bear the labels—‘“‘Hopk. U.S., 3040; Tryon, N. C.; 230 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 Castanea dentata; W. F. Fiske, Collector;” allotype and two paratypes— “Hopk. U.S. 2546-b; W. F. Fiske, Coll.; Tryon, N. C.; Dec. 16, ’03; Quercus rubra;’’ six paratypes—“‘Hopk. U. 8., 575; Carter Bridge, Va., White oak.” Pseudopityophthorus granulatus, new species Figs. 5 and 5a. Description of the adult male.—Very dark brown to black, with the summit of the pronotum light reddish-brown; 1.8 mm. long, 3.1 times as long as wide. Front of the head broadly flattened, feebly concave at the center, finely, moderately sparsely punctured, with a few, fine, moderately long, cinereous hairs, the frons more or less masked by a wisp of coarser, longer, bright yellow hairs originating from the top of the head and extending downward. Eye finely granulate, the inner line rather deeply emarginate. Antenna lighter in color, the club 1.6 times as long as the funicle, 1.4 times as long as wide, the second and third segments subequal in width, the septa subtransverse. Pronotum 1.1 times as long as wide, widest on the posterior half, the sides subparallel behind, scarcely at all constricted before the middle, moderately broadly rounded in front; the anterior margin with numerous subequal, fine, regular serrations; anterior area finely asperate; summit low, with scarcely any transverse depression posterior to it, bright reddish brown, contrasting sharply with the very dark brown to black of the rest of pronotum and elytra; posterior area brightly shining, moderately finely punctured, median impunc- tate line slightly elevated. Elytra about equal in width to pronotum, 1.9 times as long as wide; the sides subparallel as far back as the declivity, rather narrowly rounded behind; the surface moderately shining, finely rugulose; the strial punctures very minute, in regular rows, each bearing a short, semierect hair; the interspaces with the punctures more sparse, still more minute, the hairs longer, more erect, and coarser. Declivity convex, the suture scarcely elevated, with a sparse row of fine but distinct granules; second interspace slightly flattened, for the most part smooth, but with from two to four small granules in each; third interspace with four to six granules; the interstrial hairs only slightly longer on the declivity. | Type.—Cat. No. 48425, U.S. N. M. Type allotype, and 54 paratypes bear the labels—‘‘Prescott, N. F., Ariz., VI-10-30; M. W. Blackman collector; Hopk. U. 8. 20404 R,; Quercus:”’ one paratype—‘‘S. Rita Mts., 13-6, Ar.; coll. Hubbard and Schwarz.”’ The type series of more than 50 specimens does not show the usual second- | ary sexual differences. The frons in all of the specimens is flattened and ornamented as described above, with but little differences in the sculpture and pubescence. It would seem nearly certain, however, that both sexes are represented, as all but one specimen were taken by the writer from recently started burrows in oak twigs. Certain specimens are, however, slightly smaller, show slightly finer sculpture, have a smaller antennal club and slightly sparser frontal pubescence, and these are believed to be females. Pseudopityophthorus agrifoliae, new species Fig. 8. Description of the adult male-—Dark reddish-brown; 1.97 mm. long, 2.95 times as long as wide. Front of the head convex, slightly flattened below; with moderately fine, MAY 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: PSEUDOPITYOPHTHORUS 231 deep punctures, with long, incurved, yellow, frontal hairs arising principally from the peripheral area at the sides and above. Hye finely granulate, moderately emarginate. Antenna much lighter in color, club 1.69 times as long as funicle, 1.3 times as long as wide; widest through the third segment, the second and first progressively narrower; septa subtransverse. Pronotum 1.06 times as long as wide, widest behind the middle, the sides decidedly arcuate, distinctly constricted in front of the middle, moderately broadly rounded in front; anterior margin with numerous, regular, low serrations, those at the sides at least as coarse as those near the middle; anterior area with numerous asperities in slightly irregular concentric rows, becoming much smaller toward the summit; summit slightly higher than in minutissimus, with the transverse impression stronger; posterior area mod- erately shining, closely, very finely punctured, and finely rugulose; median line rather feebly elevated. Elytra as wide as pronotum, 1.8 times as long as wide, with the sides sub- parallel as far back as the declivity, moderately rounded behind; surface moderately shining, finely rugulose; minutely and subregularly punctured, with indications of strial rows on the disc and sides, the pubescence cinereous, fine, short, often abraded. Declivity convex, suture feebly elevated; second interspace flattened, devoid of pubescence in the middle third, pubescence on declivity slightly longer. Type.—Cat. No. 43426, U.S. N. M. Type and two paratypes bear the labels—“‘Hopk. U.S., 112; A. D. Hopkins, coll.; Golden Gate Park, Cal.; Apr. 20, 1899; Quercus agrifolia.”’ Pseudopityophthorus minutissimus Zimm. Figs. 6 and 7. Description of the adult male—Dark reddish-brown; about 1.5 to 1.86 mm. long, 2.77 times as long as wide. Front of head very broadly plano-concave on a subcircular area extending from eye to eye, surface very finely and densely reticulate, the central portion impunctate, punctured peripherally, and ornamented with rather coarse, long, incurved yellow hairs; epistomal margin broadly emarginate. ye finely granulate, inner line emarginate. Antenna somewhat lighter in color, club 1.75 times as long as funicle, 1.4 times as long as wide, segments 2 and 3 sub- equal in width, the first much narrower, septa of sutures 1 and 2 subtransverse. Pronotum slightly longer than wide, the sides behind subparallel, feebly arcuate, feebly constricted before the middle, rather broadly rounded in front; anterior margin with numerous sharp, regular serrations; anterior area strongly asperate, summit rather low, usually concolorous, with the transverse impression weak; posterior area subopaque to moderately shining, surface finely reticulate, very finely punctured, median longitudinal line feebly elevated. Elytra as wide as pronotum, 1.68 times as long as wide, the sides sub- parallel, moderately rounded behind; surface feebly shining, finely rugulose; irregularly, minutely punctured, with little evidence of arrangement in strial rows, each puncture bearing a fine, short, reclining, cinereous hair, often abraded. Declivity convex, the suture narrow and feebly elevated, faintly flattened at each side; pubescence not notably longer or coarser. The female is of about the same size and proportions, with the frontal serrations and asperities slightly finer; front of head not so widely or strongly flattened, finely and densely punctured and ornamented with very fine cinereous pubescence of moderate length, which is shorter and sparser in the median epistomal area. 232 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 This species is widely distributed and varies considerably in various localities and hosts but a long series from one locality will often show nearly the entire range of variation. As a usual thing specimens from a colder climate seem to be larger as shown by a series from West Point, New York, and another from Ute Pass, Colorado. At West Point the maximum size of 1.86 mm. is attained and the average of the series of 24 specimens is well above 1.7mm. _ In series from farther south only occasional specimens exceed 1.6 mm. in length. : The writer has studied many hundreds of specimens from Massachusetts, Connecticut, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Colorado, Maryland, District of Columbia, West Virginia, Virginia, Tennessee, Mississippi, North Carolina, and Georgia. This bark beetle breeds most commonly in the various species of Quercus, but specimens have also been studied from Castanea, Betula, Fagus, Carpinus, Ostrya, Hicoria, Cornus, Hammamelis, Amelanchier, and Pinus ) Pseudopityophthorus pulvereus, new species Figs. 9 and 10. Description of the adult male-—Dark reddish-brown; 1.67 mm. long, 2.76 times as long as wide. Front of the head broadly plano-convex, weakly, transversely impressed above the epistomal margin, with a median shining callus, finely and closely punctured at the sides and above, and ornamented with long, rather coarse, yellow hairs masking the frons. Lye finely granulate, the inner line strongly emarginate. Antenna somewhat lighter in color, the club twice as long as wide, the second and third segments subequal in width, the septa mod- erately arcuate. Pronotum 1.1 times as long as wide, the sides subparallel on the posterior half, feebly constricted before the middle, broadly rounded in front; anterior margin with numerous, rather broad, low serrations; anterior area moderately asperate; summit low and the posterior transverse impression very weak; posterior area shining, very finely, rather sparsely punctulate, the median longitudinal line feebly elevated. Elytra about as wide as pronotum, 1.68 times as long as wide, the sides subparallel, moderately rounded behind; surface subopaque to feebly shining, finely rugulose, closely, irregularly, minutely punctured, with no evidence of strial rows; each puncture on the disc and sides bearing a fine, short, reclining hair. Declivity convex, the suture slightly elevated, the region of the second interspace distinctly impressed; pubescence flattened and more scalelike. The female is similar in size and proportions, but with the front of the head less strongly flattened, without a shining callus, finely, moderately closely punctured and ornamented with very fine, moderately long, cinereous hairs of nearly uniform length. | Type.—Cat. No. 43427, U.S.N.M. The type and three paratypes bear the labels—‘‘Hopk. U. 8. 5580; Nov. 11, 07; J. L. Webb coll.; Chiracahua Reserve, Ariz.; Quercus: allotype—‘‘S. Rita Mts., 26.5, Ar.; coll. Hubbard and Schwarz.” Pseudopityophthorus pruinosus Hichh. (Pityophthorus querciperda Sz.) Figs. 13 and 14. Description of the adult male:.—Reddish-brown; 1.93 mm. long, 2.79 times as long as wide. may 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: PSEUDOPITYOPHTHORUS 233 Front of head broadly flattened, the median area elevated, shining, im- punctate, densely punctured at sides and above, and ornamented with a dense fringe of long, moderately coarse, yellow, converging hairs which mask the frons. Hye finely granulate, narrowly emarginate. Antenna con- siderably lighter in color, the club 1.75 times as long as funicle, 1.37 times as long as wide, the third segment wider than second and nearly twice as wide as first, the septa strongly arcuate. Pronotum 1.1 times as long as wide, the sides subparallel, faintly arcuate behind, slightly constricted anterior to the middle; moderately broadly rounded in front; the anterior margin with numerous fine serrations; anterior area finely asperate, the asperities finer and reddish toward the summit, which is low; posterior area rather sparsely, finely punctured, moderately shining, nearly glabrous. Elytra scarcely wider than pronotum, the sides subparallel, broadly rounded behind, surface finely, irregularly, rather densely punctured, with the abun- dant pubescence short and stout, less abundant near suture and more slender toward the sides of the disc. Declivity convex, distinctly impressed at each side of the suture, the pubescence longer and more erect on all the interspaces except the second. | The female is similar in size, proportions, and general appearance, but with the front of the head more convex, finely, closely punctured, and ornamented with very slender, rather short, cinerous hairs. The above description is based partly upon a specimen from Eichhoff’s type series of P. prutnosus and partly upon the type series of P. querciperda Schwarz. In connection with these the author has studied hundreds of Specimens in the United States National Museum collection and in his private collection. This species is widely distributed over the eastern portion of the country from Michigan and New York to Texas and Florida. The writer has studied specimens from Michigan, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, District of Columbia, West Virginia, Tennessee, North Carolina, South Carolina, Georgia, Mississippi, Louisiana, Texas, and Florida. The various species of Quercus most commonly serve as the hosts, but specimens from Castanea, Fagus, Hicoria, Carpinus, Ostrya, Acer, and Pinus (?) have been examined, and all come within the limits of the species. Probably Pityophthorus tomentosus Eichh. should also be considered as a synonym of P. pruinosus Eichh. from which it was said by Eichoff to differ especially in the pronotum being sub-inflated posteriorly. Such variations are not uncommon in long series of pruinosus. Pseudopityophthorus yavapaii, new species Figs. 11 and 12. Description of the adult male-—Dark reddish-brown with the dise of pronotum cen that of elytra lighter in color; 2.23 mm. long, 2.69 times as long as wide. Front of the head broadly flattened from eye to eye, transversely impressed above the epistomal margin, with a median, shining, impunctate callus; the peripheral portion finely, closely punctured, and bearing hairs, those toward the center cinereous, rather fine, and of medium length, those from the outside, 234 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 bright yellow, coarser, much longer, and converging over the frons so as to mask it. Hye finely granulate, the inner line deeply and broadly emarginate. Antenna much lighter in color; the club 1.75 times as long as funicle, 1.38 times as long as wide; widest through the third segment, with the second and first progressively narrower; septa strongly arcuate. Pronotum slightly longer than wide, the sides subparallel, weakly arcuate behind, feebly constricted before the middle, broadly rounded in front; anterior margin with very low serrations (weaker than in pubipennis); anterior area with the numerous asperities very broad and low, summit low, and transverse impression weak; posterior area brightly shining, the punctures fine, more sparse than in pubzpennzs, the disc glabrous, the pubescence on the sides and in the asperate area short and much sparser than in pubipennis; median longitudinal line broad, not elevated. Elytra nearly equal to pronotum in width, 1.68 times as long as wide; the sides subparallel, broadly rounded behind; surface shining; finely, moderately closely, irregularly punctured (more coarsely and less densely than in pubi- pennis); the pubescence similar to. that of pubipennis but sparser. Declivity similar to pubipennis, but with the erect hairs longer, finer, and more numer- ous; the suture scarcely elevated, with a sparse row of minute granules. The females average slightly smaller than the males, are similar in general proportions and sculpture, but have the long hairs on the declivity not so well-developed; the front of the head is less broadly flattened, devoid of the median impunctate callus, but with faint indications of a median, longitudinal carina; the hairs are finer, shorter, and evenly distributed. Type.—Cat. No. 48428, U.S.N.M. Type, allotype, and 112 paratypes bear the labels—‘‘Prescott, N. F., Ariz. VI-10-30; M. W. Blackman, collector; Hopkins U. S. 20404-Q; Quer- cus: 19 paratypes—“Hopk. U. 8. 5580; J. L. Webb, collector; Chiricahua Reserve, Ariz.; Live oak:” two paratypes—‘‘Hopk. U.S. 7189; M. Chrisman, collector; Bred, 8-9-08:” three paratypes—‘‘Hopk. U. 8. 7706; M. Chrisman, collector; Sta. Catalina Mts., Ariz.; Black Jack:” two paratypes—‘‘S. Rita Mts., Ariz., 6-6; coll. Hubbard and Schwarz:’’ one paratype—‘‘Chiric. Mts., Ariz. 19-6; coll. Hubbard and Schwarz:’’ one paratype—‘‘Arizona, Morrison; coll. Hubbard and Schwarz.” | Pseudopityophthorus pubipennis Lec. Fig. 14. Description of the adult male-—Reddish-brown to nearly black; 2.1 to 2.38 mm. long, 2.75 times as long as wide. | | Front of head broadly flattened, with a median, shining, smooth callus, the periphery finely, densely punctured and ornamented with a dense fringe of long, rather coarse, yellow hairs which extend downward and converge, masking the frons. Hye finely granulate, the inner line deeply and widely emarginate. Antenna somewhat lighter in color, the club about twice as long as funicle, about one-third longer than wide, widest through the third segment, with the second and first progressively narrower; the septa arcuate. Pronotum slightly longer than wide, the sides rather weakly arcuate posteriorly, faintly constricted well before the middle, broadly rounded in front; anterior.margin with numerous rather broad low serrations; anterior area with numerous broad low asperities; summit low with only a weak transverse impression posterior to it; summit and dise much lighter in color; posterior area moderately shining, finely, moderately closely punctured with a few very short hairs (often abraded on the disc), the sides with longer hairs; median longitudinal line broad, scarcely elevated. may 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: PSEUDOPITYOPHTHORUS 235 Elytra about equal in width, 1.66 times as long as wide, the sides sub- parallel, broadly rounded behind; surface feebly shining, irregularly, very finely and densely punctured, rather densely clothed with cinereous recumbent hairs, with a few, longer, more erect ones, becoming more numerous and longer on the declivity. Declivity convex, moderately abrupt, slightly depressed at each side of the suture. The female is similar in general proportions, but with the frons not so broadly flattened, and ornamented with rather fine cinereous hairs of moderate length, evenly distributed except on a small, shining, impunctate area just above the epistomal region. The foregoing description was prepared from specimens compared with LeConte’s type series. This species is western in its distribution, the type series having been collected in California. The writer has examined several hundreds of specimens from California, Oregon, and Washington. All are from the various western species of Quercus. Pseudopityophthorus opacicollis, new species Fig. 15. Description of adult male——Dark brown; 2.18 mm. long, 2.7 times as long as wide. Front of the head flattened from eye to eye, without median callus but with a median, impunctate, shining area just above the epistomal margin, the rest of the frons punctured and bearing hairs, those at outside much longer, coarse, and yellow, converging over and masking the frons. Eye finely granulate, rather deeply and widely emarginate. Antenna lighter in color, club more than twice as long as funicle, 1.5 times as long as wide; the third segment slightly wider than second, the first much narrower; septa strongly arcuate. Pronotum scarcely longer than wide, widest behind the middle, with the sides subparallel on the posterior half; strongly constricted before the middle, moderately rounded in front; anterior margin with numerous rather broad, low serrations; anterior area with approximately concentric rows of rather coarse asperities, which are gradually reduced to concentric rugae on the rather low summit; posterior area subopaque, closely, finely, and deeply punctured, slightly more coarsely and sparsely on the sides; median longi- tudinal line scarcely elevated behind, more strongly anteriorly in the broad, shallow, transverse impression; pubescence on anterior area and sides mod- erately short, that on the disc shorter and finer. Elytra similar in width to pronotum, 1.7 times as long as wide; the sides sub- parallel, moderately rounded behind; surface subopaque or feebly shining, rugulose; the punctures fine, rather dense, iregular, with no indications of strial lines on the disc; pubescence short, rather stout, reclining, with a very few, longer, more erect hairs on the suture and region of third interspace. Declivity convex, impressed at each side of the slightly elevated suture; suture and third interspace bearing longer, coarser, more erect hairs. The female is of similar proportions, but the front of the head is not so strongly flattened, the median area just above the epistomal margin shining and impunctate, rather closely and finely punctured, and ornamented with fine hairs of moderate length at the sides and above. This species is rather closely allied to both pubipennis Lec. and yavapazz, 236 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 new species, but is readily distinguished by the shape and sculpture of the pronotum, the character of the longer elytral hairs, and by other differences brought out in the descriptions. Type.—Cat. No. 43429, U.'S.N.M. Type, allotype, and four paratypes bear the labels—‘‘Hopk. U. S. 5644; reared Sept. 1, 08; J. L. Webb, colr.; Sta. Catalina Mts. Ariz. ;Querecus:”’ five paratypes—“Hopk. U. 8S. 7199h, 4-15-08; M. Chrisman, colr.; Sta. Catalina Mts., Ariz.; Quercus:” 23 paratypes—“‘Hopk. U.S. 10366-b; reared Sept. 25, 18; M. Chrisman, colr.; Sta. Catalina Mts., Ariz.; Quercus emoryi:” three paratypes—“‘Hopk. U. 8. 10387; M. Chrisman ecolr.: Sta. Catalina Mts., Ariz.; Sept. 18-13, Quercus emoryi:’’ seven paratypes—‘‘Hopk. U.S. 10519a; reared July 28, 713; M. Chrisman, colr.; Sta. Catalina Mts., Ariz.; Black jack and Buck acorn.” BIBLIOGRAPHY Buackman, M. W. Description oj eight new bark beetles from Mississippi. Miss. Agr. Exp. Sta., Tech. Bull. No. 10, pp. 1-16, 2 pls. 1921. BiackMan, M. W. Mississippi bark beetles. Miss. Agr. Exp. Sta., Tech. Bull. No. 11, 130 pp., 18 pls. 1922. . Buackman, M. W. The genus Pityophthorus Hichh. in North America: A revistonal study of the Pityophthori, with descriptions of two new genera and seventy-one new species. Tech. Publ. No. 25. N. Y.S. Coll. Forestry, 182 pp., 11 pls. 1928. Fitrcu, A. Fourth report on the noxious. insects of New York. N.Y.State Agr. Soc. Ann. Rept. 1857, pp. 687-814. 1858. EicuuHorr, W. Ratio, descriptio, emendatio Tomicinorum. Mem. Soc. Roy. Sci., de Liege VIII, 531 pp. 5 pls. 1878. EicHuHorr, W., and Scuwarz, E. A. Remarks on the synonymy of some North American Scolytid beetles. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., XVIII, pp. 605-610. 1896. Harris, T.W. Characteristics of some previously described North American Coleopterous insects and descriptions of others which appear to be new, in the collection of Mr. Abraham Halsey. Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Hartford. 1836. Hopkins, A. D. Sexual characters in Scolytidae. Canad. Ent., 26: 274-280. 1894. Hopxins, A. D. List of generic names and their type species in the Coleopterous super- family Scolytoidea. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 48: 115-136. 1914. Hopkins, A. D. A new genus of Scolytid beetles. This JouRNAL 5: 429-433. 1915. Hupparp, H. G., and Scuwarz, E. A. Coleoptera of Florida and Michigan. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., 17: 353-472 and 593-669. 1878. LeConte, J. L. Zoology: Report upon insects collected on the survey. Rept. Pac. R. R. Expl. & Survey Ins., No. 1, pp. 1-72, 2 pls. p. 59. 1860. LeConts, J. L. Appendix to Zimmerman’s synopsis of Scolytidae. Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., 2: 150-178. 1868. LeContet, J.L. The Rhynchophora of America north of Mexico. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., XV, No. 96, pp. 455. 1876. Packarp, A.S. Insects injurious to forest and shade trees. V. Rept. U.S. Ent. Comm., pp. 1-955. 1890. Scuwarz, E. A. Remarks on North American Scolytids. Ent. Amer., 2: 40-42. 1886. Scuowarz, E.A. Remarks. Ent. Soc. Wash. Proc.,1: 56. 1888. Swaine, J.M. Catalogue of the described Scolytidae of America north of Mexico. N.Y. State Mus., Bull. 134, pp. 75-194. 1909. Swaine, J. M. Canadian bark beetles. Dom. Ent. Br. Dept. Agr., Bull. 14, Pt. II, pp. 1-143. 1918. ZIMMERMANN, C. Synopsis of the Scolytidae of America north of Mexico. Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., 2: 141-149. 1868. MAY 19, 1931 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 237 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 630TH MEETING The 630th meeting of the Anthropological Society of Washington was held on February 17, 1931, in room 42-43 of the U. S. National Museum, President Cooper, presiding. Program: Henry B. Co.tiins, JR., assistant curator of Ethnology, U.S. National Museum: Archaeological explorations on St. Lawrence Island, Alaska.—From June 20th to October 20th excavations were carried on at the sites of five abandoned Eskimo villages within a mile of Gambell, at the north- western extremity of St. Lawrence Island, Bering Sea. The villages are situated on a gravel spit which extends westward from Cape Chibukak (Sevuokok). A series of old beach lines shows the manner in which the spit was built up, and the positions of the several old villages in relation to these former beach lines and the present sea affords preliminary evidence of their respective antiquity. The oldest site was not known to the present Eskimos. It was on the lower slope of the mountain and was completely covered over with sod, moss, and rocks. It proved to be a site of pure Old Bering Sea Culture, a very old Eskimo culture previously known only from a relatively few elaborately decorated objects of ivory that had been found at various places in northern Alaska and northeastern Siberia. Situated on the gravel spit immediately below this old village and within the three earliest beach lines, was the next oldest site, known to the Eskimos as Miyowagha- meet. The lower strata of the midden yielded only Old Bering Sea material, but above it were found objects decorated in the Punuk style, which in 1928 and 1929 had been recognized as an intermediate stage between the Old Bering Sea art and the modern. The next oldest villages, Ievoghiyogameet and Seklowaghyoget had only Punuk art; there was likewise evidence of a pro- gressive simplification in harpoon heads. At the latest site, which was not entirely abandoned until about 40 years ago, simplification of harpoon types continued, resulting finally in the modern form; art was also of the modern type. Ten houses were excavated, one or more at each old village, showing that three types of houses had been in use on St. Lawrence Island in pre- historic times. Additional evidence of the relation of the Thule and Old Bering Sea cultures was afforded by the finding of Thule harpoon heads only at the three latest villages. (Awthor’s Abstract.) Frank H.H. Roperts JR., Secretary. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS A. WETMORE has been elected an honorary member of the Societé Orthol- ogique et Mammalogique de France. The Langley Gold Medal for Aerodromics has been presented by the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution to Admiral EvELYN Byrp. Through a cooperative arrangement between the Physikalische-Technische Reichsanstalt and the National Bureau of Standards, an exchange of per- sonnel has been arranged for the purpose of promoting work on fundamental 238 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 10 standards. Dr. F. HENNING of the Physikalische-Technische Reichsanstalt is studying at the Bureau of Standards the proposal of the Bureau thatthe emission from a black body at the freezing point of platinum be adopted as the primary standard of light. Dr. Hennrne will take part in measurements of the emission of a black body at the freezing point of platinum and also at the freezing point of iridium, if such an extension is found desirable. Dr. G. W. Vinat of the staff of the Bureau of Standards is proceeding to the Reichsanstalt to engage in intercomparisons of the national standards of electromotive force and in work on the improvement of standard cells. There have just been published the first three volumes of the series The Physics of the Earth as bulletins of the National Research Council by the Divi- sion of Physical Sciences with the cooperation of the Division of Geology and Geography and the American Geophysical Union. The volumes already published include Volcanology, The Figure of the Earth, and Meteorology. There is also in press a fourth volume of the series on The Age of the Earth, which will be issued about the middle of April. The submarine Nautitus, formerly the U. 8. 8. O-12, was christened by Lady WI.xkins at the Brooklyn Navy Yard on March 24, 1931, there being about 800 guests present to witness the ceremony. It will be recalled that this vessel is to be used by the Wilkins-Ellsworth Trans-Arctic Submarine Expedition during the coming summer. - With the cooperation of the Mountain States Telephone and Telegraph Company and the American Telephone and Telegraph Company, there is being installed at the Tucson Magnetic Observatory by the U. 8S. Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism of the Carnegie Institution of Washington recording apparatus for measuring earth- currents. W. J. Roonry of the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism is installing the apparatus at the Observatory. The two lines involved ex- tend northward from Tucson approximately 35 miles in an air-line to Mam- moth and eastward approximately 56 miles in an airline to Wilcox. The American Physical Society held meetings April 30 and May 1, 1931, at the Bureau of Standards, Washington, D. C., and May 2 in the National Academy-Research Council Building, Washington, D. C. The American Section of the International Scientific Radio Union held a meeting in the National Academy-Research Council Building, Washington, Dp. C.; on May de alGak: OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ANNOUNCEMENT OF MEETINGS Wednesday, May 20 The Medical Society Thursday, May 21 The Academy Saturday, May 23 The Philosophical Society Wednesday, May 27 The Geological Society The Medical Society Saturday, May 30 The Biological Society Thursday, June 4 The Entomological Society The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: N. A. Coss, Bureau of Plant Industry. Corresponding Secretary: Paut E. Howe, Bureau of Animal Industry. Recording Secretary: Cuarites THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. e in El Salvador “brand and Fred a Foster bs the > U. 8 Br Bigs America. M.W. ‘Sues ee eee meee ers enee ‘ “WASHINGTON ACADEMY r: JUNE 4, 1931 No. 11 JOURNAL OF THE Sng Vai a Hr, OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS C. WrtTHEe Cooke CHARLES DRECHSLER Hues L. Drrpen U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. Perers Haroup Morrison PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GoLpMAN G. W. Stosz BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Aanes CHASE J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Roger C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Roya anp GUILFORD AVEs. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Solendes, pabtiekess (1) short original ‘papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; 2)> proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes — of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNnazis issued semi- monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer when — it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt — publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or the — twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the —* of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. . i Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors: they should fe : clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References — should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered. Se serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page, Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be fenemieen | by zine etchings being preferable. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors — unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors get will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. a Author’s Reprinis—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers Bes: bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and | date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord- ance with the following schedule of prices: Copies 4pp 8 pp 12 pp 16 pp Covers 5b mart en Geen came hE Wun or ea Sage aA pe tS $2.00 100 $ .50 $ .55 $ .60 $1.10 2. 50 150 90 1.00 1.10 0 3.00 200 1.15 1.50 1.60 2.10 3.50 2950 1.65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints a should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. Bagh The rate of Subscription per vVolwme 18. 600 oe eeseerccctec secs teeetes® Sopa $6.00* Semi-monthly numbers 2.2 5 se 5 0 0B vies 2 oe oi See de ot ee ee S 20s, Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15).. . 50 Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C. Exchanges.—The JourNnAL does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made within thirty days after date of the following issue. * Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Ber rates are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou,.21 JUNE 4, 1931 IN Ose alL GEOPHYSICS.—T dal phenomena in Long Island Sound EMBERT A. LeLacuevr, U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey. (Communi- cated by W. D. SuTcLIFFE.) The earliest tide observations on record in Long Island Sound were made in 1835. ‘Tidal currents were first observed in this waterway in 1845. 22.7 | —1.8 10 — 500 ria Wie ea Dee dates ote ate al ‘ 10 os 212 | ees * —510 ERE ACO, IRE SUM Piotdeons' ISEE Le a0 25 1 2328 1) = teW 16 —590 FGCU aur Mihir toate. ct 13 5 2° —_ BE = PO Deas, CRUE MY 5 on am 16 i Ch tl ee Oe ce a CONOR Nan hee CRM te 7 er 20 es 18 — |-—10.6 — — EF LSEE ai ORAL ae REI a 23 “ + 10.2 | —11.4 12 — 3820 Pimiaeiegee iPr: 1.8 acpi lie ky oy is 1 12.8 | —10.5 - — 3520 Site is AR See Rasen oat of s 4 13.0 | —10.4 i — 3490 NR Mee Aare se Mey Rertay 50 ml. . 5 —9.7 — — Se MARL Again Te Be Sey Ah een DB) 10 1 10.8 | —12.9 12 — 3740 RL ORI ae eae cle tem Us os Ral 1 11.1 | —12.6 es — 3650 Ry A TRA RARE ND ar nih am my 2 as rs 15 13 10.4 | —11.7 is — 3220 Ea EER UR SEAT a SAIN ORM PIRESE AS 20 2 12.4 | —10.3 16 — 3800 FEMALE PS LN Nt CE Cte Dk ee be ai if 24 13.9 | —10.4 4 — 3830 POUR ie Me vabar il ls ety meus me 25 4 14.4 | —9.6 7A| — 3940 POT ony 2 eee te cry Se Meee ie $ s 14.0 | —8.6 zi — 3530 AGN) a eee EA aE 25 YY ‘ 16.0 | —9.0 ra — 3800 Fes ek aay A Digan oats LMM cs 5 13 16.2 | —8.6 : — 3630 TBO ee cha Coens 23 5 4 22) Nase 2 87 — 6320 Te hl ale aN a el i oD 25 2 215. | 350 rane — 6600 MeC@lo=GH Os scien bee 23 5 1 26.3 | +3.5 16 +914 2 roNia C2 DIGI re eae i . 4 LG SSiu ln av — — i H SLA aM ge rea ot 10 | 1 14.0 | —7.5 — — os f pai est amas eure es es 5 14 14.5 | —7.0 — — 1 bs Cae wiup tog) ak, Vb RAG COR 35 25 th 20.8 | —4.9 18 — 1900 TTA ei aes termes 8 Sas ih o 4 16.2 | —7.5 20 — 3070 Teh Oeics WU Rat ice a te Ns ayia ee ne 14 19.1 | —5.9 19 — 2330 SOE. SOD OU eon ee a 4 19.7 | —38.5 18 — 1320 ATOM arene Os ergy) cape oe % i ch 22 BN es 17 —950 74 TSS Ae cee tae Sao ae aa eae ae ete Bn sf ie S 7 Ven Ca i 4 | —720 Aarne O)S eee Go aaR ae 23 10 13 18.5 | —4.5 e — @ Stirring difficult. 5 Beaker. some cases, as well as to lack of information in regard to the specific heat of the solutions, the figures for the molecular heat of solution must JUNE 4, 1931 RICHARDSON AND WELLS: HEAT OF SOLUTION 245 be considered as somewhat preliminary, but they indicate the direction of the heat effect. The molecular heat of the salt-anhydrite mixtures refers to the soluble salt only. From Table 2 it appears that polyhalite (2CaSO,-MgS0O,-K,SO,-- 2H.O), langbeinite (2M gSO,-K.SO,) and kainite (MgSO,- KC1-3H,O) evolve heat when mixed with water. Polyhalite is rather slowly de- composed, but the heat effect follows that of MgSO, rather than that of K.SO,. With carnallite (KCl-MgCl,-6H.O) the fall of tempera- ture caused by the KCl outweighs the rise due to MgCl,-6H,O, and a net cooling effect results. Although anhydrite alone shows no ap- preciable heat effect under these conditions a mixture of anhydrite TaBLE 2.—HeEat oF SoLuTION oF Some PotasH MINERALS (5-GRAM SAMPLE) Final Change | Mois H20 | Molecular Diameter)’ 10 Time | temper- | in tem- | per mol of| heat of Mineral ees (grams) | (min.) ae een dascolved a L002) a a 23 5 > 26.0 | +0.9 |. 35 (+834) LEAs Shah 35 rj 5 22.9 | +2.4 24 +5,600 MES le ei ss, anh acs 4 25 - 24.0 | +1.2 39 +2 ,900 SVC ES er % .25.0 | +1.0 35 +1,520 COSC G | 23 5 i 16.8 | —5.9 8 —2,900 Oo a As ee 35 25 * 21.5) —2.0 39 —3,300 PMMA OVE ke x oc cw ewe « a oe x — —0.0 — — rd SUPE 5 @) Rt ae ee ee 10 13 13.8 | —9.1 17 —3,600 Fsrey SOS a hy Se ae Eee BM 25 oy 20.7 | —4.8 42 —4,200 LLG) Ste PLES ene ee en ee 10 1 18.8 | —4.1 Al —5,200 oe OEE ae le aE ea 35 25 3 22.7 | —2.2 | 100 —4,900 << ¢ ae ea BE Ae * re S 21.6 | —2.0 27 —1,200 and sylvite (KCl) seems to give a proportionately greater cooling effect than sylvite alone. This may be caused by the low specific heat of anhydrite (0.1753) or it may indicate a metathetical reaction. In view of the opposite directions of some of the heat effects, as well as variations caused by the proportions and kinds of minerals, it is obvious that the heat effect with an unknown mixture of potash minerals will not bear any simple relation to the K,O content. Some samples might have a positive heat of solution, some a negative, and some none. On the other hand, in specific mixtures the heat of solu- tion might give definite information—for example, in a mixture con- sisting only of sylvite and halite. In Table 3 some figures are given for two sections of core, mainly 246 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 11 sylvite in halite, from Blanchard well No. 3 of the United States Potash Co., in Sec. 10, T.21 8., R.29 E., Eddy County, New Mexico. Ground samples of 3-inch portions were prepared, and the tests were made with 25 grams of water as given for langbeinite in Table 2. One section shows a fairly uniform change in the heat effect from top to bottom; the other shows extreme irregularity. Without more de- tailed information about each sample, calculations of the K.O con- tent are practically impossible. : The whole section from 791’ to 795’ averaged 3.58 per cent K,O, with increasing proportions of clay toward the bottom. For the TABLE 3.—F ALL IN TEMPERATURE RESULTING FROM SOLUTION OF SAMPLES OBTAINED FROM SUCCESSIVE 3-INCH PorTIONS OF Two SECTIONS OF CORE FROM BLANCHARD WEL No. 3 Depth Fail Pa Dea Fall in eee 791’0”—791'3” 3.7 794’9”—795'0” Lek 791'3”—791'6” 2.9 791'6”—791'9” 2.0 834’ 6” —834’9” 1.6 791'9” —792'0” 1.6 834’9”—835'0” 19 792'0”—792'3” 2.0 835’0”—835/3” 2.3 792'3”—792’6” 1.2 835'3” —835/6” 2.1 792'6”—792'9” 1.8 835'6”—835'9” aha 792’9” —793’0” 1.4 835'9” —836’0” 2.9 793'0”—793/3” We 7h 8360” —836'3” 2.0 793'3”—793'6” 1.6 8363” —836’6” 2.4 7936” —793'9” al: 836’ 6” —836'9” 1,6 793'9”—794’0” 1.3 836’ 9” —837'0” 278 794’0”—794'3” 12 837'0” —837'3” PTE 794'3”—794'6” Leal 837'3” —837'6” 1.9 794’6”—794'9” Ssh 837'6” —837'9” 2.0 sample at 794’6” the insoluble matter was 16.03 per cent; the H,O at 110°, 2.62 per cent. For the sample at 794’9” the insoluble matter was 9.26 per cent; the H.O at 110°, 1.73 per cent. The section from 834'6” to 837'9” averaged 9.55 per cent K,O. As each tenth of a degree change in temperature corresponds to nearly 3 per cent of KCl the variation in the material is very evident, but calculation of the total potash content of the section by addition of the 13 separate results, taking 1.6° fall as representing zero per cent of KCl gives far too little total KCl, so that some factor has evidently not been given due consideration, though what this factor is has not yet been determined. The field of usefulness of the calorimetric method of analysis of potash minerals is therefore limited to certain special combinations, JUNE 4, 1931 — RICHARDSON AND WELLS: HEAT OF SOLUTION 247 and even these will require careful standardization to give quantita- tive results. The second question of interest is the geologic application of the heat of solution. Lang? has discussed the low geothermal gradients in the area of western Texas and southeastern New Mexico known to be underlain by salt and anhydrite. Although he concludes that the thermal conductivities of the rocks are too poorly known to warrant any definite discussion of the problem, it may be of interest to consider further some of the factors that have been mentioned as responsible for the gradients. Radioactivity of the potassium minerals cannot be a major factor, or at least the heat effect thus produced is in the wrong direction Are water-soluble salts dissolving in ground water or deep solutions at a rate that would cause sufficient cooling to explain the low gradients? In the absence of any simple direct answer to this question it is proposed to make certain assumptions that appear to be too liberal and show that even so the corresponding effects would be insufficient to explain the gradients observed. For example, let us assume that soluble material is being dissolved at a depth at the same rate at which it is carried off in the surface run- off. This would mean that there would have to be some channel ways or permeable strata for the accession of fresh water and the escape of mineralized water, as simple calculation shows that mere diffusion of the salts from a depth of around 2000 feet would be insufficient to supply the soluble material in the run-off, even if there were enough pore space to insure a continuous aqueous medium.’ The quantity of dissolved matter removed annually by the Pecos, Brazos, and Colorado rivers,‘ which drain a part of the area underlain by salt, is of the following order: e Recosviniver near Comstock, “Texas... 0.000000 Je 2 ,400 ,000 tons Pemocmnver at Waco, Pexass. i... 2. case by. 2 ,070 ,000 tons ColocadopRiveraty Austin, Vexas. a. 20. sinter 2s 580 ,000 tons 3,050 ,000 tons Unfortunately the proportion of potash in all of this material is 2W.B.Lang. Note on temperature gradients in the Permian basin. This JOURNAL 20: 121. 1980. 3 Such solution as might occur owing to the lowering of the water-table in the earth on account of erosion at the surface or emergence of the area as a whole from sea level would not yield a significant heat effect. * Computed from data given in U. S. Geol. Survey water-supply papers. 248 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 11 not known, so that it is necessary to pursue the inquiry in terms of sodium chloride and calcium sulphate, which are the principal con- stituents. The substitution of sodium chloride for potassium chlor- ide does not alter the essential conclusions, in spite of the fact that the solution of potassium chloride gives several times the cooling effect of that of the same weight of sodium chloride. It is estimated from analyses of the water that the total annual runoff includes at least 1,300,000 tons of calcium sulphate and 2,800,000 tons of sodium chloride. Assuming that the calcium sulphate comes from the hy- dration and solution of anhydrite, rather than from gypsum, we have: as corresponding heat effects with a large excess of water the evolution of 38 X 10 calories for the solution of the anhydrite and an absorption of 100 x 10” calories for the solution of the sodium chloride, leaving a net absorption of about 62 x 10” calories. Here again, then, we encounter heat effects that are in opposite directions. Such compen- sating effects make it more difficult but oat not impossible to reach definite conclusions. As the area involved covers about 90,000 square miles, the net heat effect last mentioned reduces to an average of 0.027 calories per square centimeter, or, if concentrated in a single layer 1 cm. in thickness to 0.027 calorie per cubic centimeter. But under a geothermal gradient of 0.000117° C. per cm.,> and with rock having the conductivity of anhydrite (0.0123), there would be annually a flow of 45 calories of heat per square centimeter normally escaping from the earth. It is obvious that the heat effect calculated for the solution of anhydrite and sodium chloride would be negligible as explaining the present geo- thermal gradients. Even if the assumed area of action were contracted to 1,000 square miles the heat of solution would be scarcely significant, amounting to less than 3 calories a year. Expressed differently, .to produce the present gradients sodium chloride would have to be dis- solved at depth at the rate of a layer nearly a centimeter thick each year, a rate that is incompatible with the known geologic age of the deposits. In other words, the figures indicate that the quantity of heat nor- mally flowing through the rocks of the earth’s crust is large in compari- son with the heat of any chemical changes that are likely to take place under nearly static conditions due to such transformations as hydra- tion, solution, carbonation, silicification, and replacement. > Equivalent to 1°F.in 159 feet. This gradient is based on the average for eight wells _ in the area under discussion, reported in Harth temperatures in oil fields, American Petro- leum Institute Bull. 205; computed by C. E. Van Orstrand, of the U.S. Geological Survey. JUNE 4, 1931 GOLDMAN: NEW DESERT FOXES 249 MAMMALOGY.—Two new desert foxes... E. A. GoLDMAN, Biological Survey, U. S. Department of Agriculture. The accession of specimens in recent years has materially extended the known range of the desert foxes of the Vulpes macrotis group. Forms of this section of the genus occur in suitable areas from the Pacific coast east to the basin of Great Salt Lake, Utah, and the Rio Grande Valley in New Mexico and western Texas, and from the Snake River Valley, Idaho, south to southern Lower California, Sonora, and Chihuahua. Two hitherto unrecognized geographic races are described below. Vulpes macrotis arizonensis, subsp. nov. Arizona Long-eared Desert Fox Type.—From two miles south of Tule Tanks (near Mexican Boundary), Yuma County, Arizona. No. 202959, & adult, U. S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by E. A. Goldman, December 9, 1913. Original number 22357. Distribution.—Desert region of southwestern Arizona and adjoining parts of Sonora. General characters —A small, light buffy subspecies with short pelage lack- ing much of the silver white usual in the group. Skull slender and delicate. Closely allied to Vulpes macrotis arsipus, but usually smaller, the winter pelage shorter, brush smaller, and dorsum less heavily overlaid with silvery white; skull differing in detail. Similar in general to V. m. neomexicana, but decidedly smaller and dentition much lighter. Color.—Type: Upper parts in general buffy brownish, purest on head, less pronounced along median line, paling to light ochraceous buff along flanks, the dorsum rather thinly overlaid with silvery white producing a somewhat grizzled effect; dorsal pelage with narrow subterminal white bands, and black tips so short and inconspicuous the general tone is scarcely affected; middle of face buffy grayish; chin, throat, median line of abdomen, inguinal region and inner sides of limbs nearly pure white; sides of neck, a narrow band across lower part of neck, anal region, sides of abdomen, and areas conspicuously invading upper parts behind shoulders light ochraceous buff; outer sides of forearms and hind legs, and external base of ears rich ochraceous tawny; feet whitish, the hind feet becoming light ochraceous buff on soles; sides of muzzle and lips, except anteriorly, dusky; outer sides of ears buffy-brownish, inner sides thinly clothed with white hairs; tail grayish, becoming light ochraceous buffy on basal half below, the tip black all around. Skull—Closely resembling skulls of small individuals of arsipus, but sides of brain-case converging in more nearly straight lines (tending more dis- tinctly to bulge outward anteriorly in arszpus) ; interpterygoid fossa narrower; anterior processes of frontals broader, more prolonged, meeting ascending branches of premaxillae (frontal processes separated from ascending branches of premaxillae by a distinct gap along maxillo-nasal suture in arszpus); auditory bullae small and dentition light much as in arszpus. Similar 1 Received April 7, 1931. 250 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 11 to that of neomexicana, but decidedly smaller, slenderer and more delicate; . dentition relatively lighter. | Measurements.—Type: Total length, 784 mm.; tail vertebrae, 315; hind foot (c.u.), 120. An adult male from Vicksburg, Arizona: 765; 300; 116. An adult female topotype: 735; 270; 115. An adult female from Yuma, Arizona: 712; 270; 117.5. Skull (type): Greatest length, 111.5; condylobasal length, 108.4; width of braincase, 42.5; zygomatic width, 56.4; least width of rostrum, 15.4; interorbital width, 21; maxillary toothrow (front of canine to back of last molar), 52.5; upper carnassial, crown length of outer side, 10, crown width anteriorly, 4.3. Remarks.—V. m. arizonensis is closely allied to V. m. arsipus from whose range it appears to be separated by the barrier of the Colorado River. It appears to intergrade with V. m. neomexicana in southeastern Arizona. The reduction of the white over the dorsum in the winter pelage seems to be a differential external character worthy of note. Specomens examined.—Total number, 6, from Arizona as follows: Tacna, 1; Tule Tanks (type locality), 2; Yuma, 2; Vicksburg, 1. Vulpes macrotis nevadensis subsp. nov. Nevada Long-eared Desert Fox Type.-—From Willow Creek Ranch, near Jungo, Humboldt County, Nevada. No. 213103, & adult, U.S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by Mike Gill, December 14, 1915. X catalogue number ~ il 32oar Distribution.—Desert regions from the Humboldt and Snake River valleys of northern Nevada and southwestern Idaho east to the basin of Great Salt Lake, Utah. General characters.—A subspecies of medium size with long, full, and com- paratively dark pelage. Skull with large, fully inflated braincase. Closely allied to V. m. arszpus, but less silvery white, the black tips of hairs more in evidence over dorsum, and cranial characters distinctive. Similar to V. m. neomexicana, but somewhat darker and skull different. Color.—Type: Upper parts in general a coarsely grizzled mixture, the dorsal pelage light brown below, the individual hairs with rather broad sub- terminal white bands and only moderately conspicuous black tips, becoming light ochraceous buff along flanks; middle of face grayish; chin, throat, median line of abdomen, inguinal region and inner sides of limbs nearly pure white; sides of neck, a narrow band across lower part of neck, anal region and sides © of abdomen light ochraceous buff; light areas behind shoulders ochraceous buffy, but rather inconspicuous; outer sides of forearms and hind legs and external base of ears rich ochraceous tawny; feet whitish, the hind feet becoming ochraceous buffy on soles; sides of muzzle and lips, except an- teriorly, dusky; outer sides of ears buffy brownish, inner sides thinly clothed with white hairs; tail grayish, heavily overlaid with dusky along median line near base above, washed with light ochraceous buff below, a black tip doubtless present in life, broken off. Skull—Similar to that of arstpus, but broader, more robust; braincase larger, more fully inflated; nasals usually broader, more abruptly tapering posteriorly; dentition similar; auditory bullae small as in arstpus. Compared with that of neomexicana the skull is somewhat smaller, but relatively broader; braincase broader, more fully inflated; auditory bullae smaller; dentition similar. _ JUNE 4, 1951 SHAMEL: BATS FROM THE BAHAMAS 251 Measurements (no body measurements available).—Skull (type): Greatest length, 113.7; condylobasal length, 110; width of braincase, 45.6; zygomatic width, 62.8; least width of rostrum, 17; interorbital width, 22.5; maxillary toothrow (front of canine to back of last molar), 52.8; upper carnassial, crown length of outer side, 9.7, crown width anteriorly, 4.6. Remarks.—The range of V. m. nevadensis marks the northern limit of the V. macrotis group. ‘This subspecies is most closely allied to V. m. arsipus but is somewhat darker, less silvery whitish in color of upper parts and the skull is distinguished by the larger, more fully inflated braincase. Specimens examined.—Total number, 14, as follows: Idaho: Grandview (20 miles south), 1 (skull only). Nevada: Adelaide (near Golconda), 3 (skins only); Carson Sink (10 miles east of Fallon), 1 (skull only); Fallon (between Old River and Soda Lake), 1 (skin only); Jungo (type locality), 5 (4 skins only); Sodaville, 1 (skin only); Sulphur Cow Creek, Humboldt County, 1 (skin only). Utah: Low, 2. MAMMALOGY.—Bats from the Bahamas.1. H. Harotp SHAMEL, U.S. National Museum. (Communicated by JoHN B. REESIDE, JR.) An interesting collection of bats was made during the summer of 1930 in the Bahama Islands by Dr. Paul Bartsch, Curator of the Division of Mollusks in the U. 8. National Museum. ‘These speci- mens, 98 in number, are from islands hitherto unrepresented by any mammals in the national collection. ARTIBEUS JAMAICENSIS PARVIPES (Rehn) 1902. Artibeus parvipes Rehn, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, vol. 54, p. 639. December 8, 1902. Twenty-four specimens were taken on Great Inagua Island and four speci- mens at Abrahams Hill, Mariguana Island. This bat has hitherto been known only from the island of Cuba. Its capture in the Bahama Islands bears out, in part, a belief of Andersen,” the recent reviser of this genus, who said he believed that it would be found throughout the Bahamas and as far north as southern Florida. MACROTUS WATERHOUSII COMPRESSUS (Rehn) 1904. Macrotus waterhousii compressus Rehn, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadel- phia, vol. 56, p. 484. June 30, 1904. Three specimens collected at Salt Point, Jamaica Bay, Acklin Island. The specimens are perfectly typical of, and match in every detail those from the Island of New Providence, the type locality, and from Nassau Island, the only two known localities for this bat. 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- ceived April 23, 1931. 2K. ANDERSEN. A monograph of the Cheiroptera genera Uroderma, Enchisthenes, and Artibeus. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 262, 1908. 252 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 11 Macrotus waterhousii heberfolium subsp. nov. Type.—Adult male in alcohol, No. 255651, U. 8. National Museum, collected by Dr. Paul Bartsch at Kingston, Providencialis Island, July 23, 1930. Diagnosis.—Larger than true M. waterhousiz, with darker, distinetly tri- color fur. Color—The fur and membranes are dark; fur smoky-gray at base; this area followed by a narrower band of whitish gray; the tips a rich coppery brown, but rather sparse; the gray shows through to such an extent that it is nearly the predominant color. Character—One outstanding external character is the broad, bluntly rounded nose leaf. In all other specimens of Macrotus examined the nose leaf. is rather slender and more acutely pointed. Skull.—The skull is like that of the typical form, except that there is no ridge on the occiput. This ridge is well developed in true M. waterhousii as a downward continuation of the occipital crest. The zygomatic breadth, inter- orbital breadth, greatest length of mandible, and breadth of braincase are slightly greater than these same measurements in skulls from Hispaniola. Measurements.—(Measurements in parentheses are the extremes of 5 speci- mens of Macrotus waterhousi waterhousit from Hispaniola.) Type: Head and body, 68.0; tail, 33.8 (24.2-32.5); tibia 24.0 (21.0—23.0); foot, 14.2 (11.0- 12.6); forearm, 57.4 (54.0-55.2); thumb, 8.6; third metacarpal, 44.8 (42.0— 43.3); fifth metacarpal, 47.2 (42.6-45.6); ear from meatus, 29.6 (26.2—28.6); ear from crown, 24.6 (21.2—23.2); width of ear, 18.5 (16.2-17.5); total length of skull, 26.6; zygomatic breadth at base of zygoma, 13.2 (11.8—-12.4) ; interor- bital constriction, 4.6 (4.2-4.5); breadth of braincase, 10.0 (9.2-9.6) ; greatest length of mandible, 18.4 (16.8-18.0); maxillary toothrow, 9.8. Only one specimen of this bat was secured in a cave on the island. I am informed by Doctor Bartsch that it was the only occupant of this cave. Its nearest relative is Macrotus waterhousii waterhousi from Hispaniola, as one would expect from the geographical position of its habitat. There are so many differences in its external measurements, and the color is so unlike that in any known Macrotus from the West Indies that there can be little doubt that it represents a new form. The fur on the back in other West Indian forms is bicolor, whitish basally with much paler brownish tips. Erophylla planifrons mariguanensis subsp. nov. Type.—Adult male in alcohol, No. 255593, U. S. National Museum, col- lected by Dr. Paul Bartsch at Abrahams Hill on Mariguana Island, July 20, 1930. Diagnosis.—A larger, darker form with smaller teeth than true Erophylla planifrons. Color.—Fur at base gray, individual hairs tipped with auburn (Ridgway, 1912). Ventral side drab-buff. The hairs at the base in L. planzfrons plani- frons are whitish when compared with the gray of specimens from Mariguana Island, and the tips of the hairs are much lighter. Skull.—The skull is like that of typical Hrophylla planifrons except for the smaller teeth and average greater length. After comparing eight skulls of this bat with the same number of true #. planifrons I find the following: maxillary toothrow, 8.2-8.8 as against 7.6— 8.2; total length of skull, 24.8-26.4 as against 24.2-25.5; condylobasal length, 22.2—-23.2 as against 20.8—22.2. JUNE 4, 1931 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 253 Measurements.—Type: Head and body, 65.8; tail, 13.4; tibia 22.4; foot, 15.0; forearm, 49.4; thumb, 12.0; third metacarpal, 41.5; fifth metacarpal, 41.6; ear from meatus, 20.6; ear from crown, 16.0; width of ear, 12.2; total length of skull, 26.4; condylobasal length, 23.2; zygomatic breadth, 10.6; interorbital breadth, 4.8; breadth of braincase, 10.2; occipital depth, 8.8; greatest length of mandible, 17.4; maxillary toothrow, 8.8; breadth of rostrum at m?, 7.0; mandibular toothrow, 9.2. There were no dry skins, but eight specimens which had been in alcohol since July were dried, and compared with 18 skins of Hrophylla planifrons planifrons from Nassau and.New Providence. This comparison shows that the southern form is considerably darker. ‘There were three skins from Nas- sau and New Providence which approached those from Mariguana and East Caicos in color, but such resemblance may be expected in forms so closely re- lated. However, the two forms were distinct when laid out in nearby series. From among eight skulls of each of the two races all except three could be separated by the differences in the size of the teeth. Fifty specimens were examined from Abrahams Hill, Mariguana Island, and 16 specimens from Stubbs Guano Cave, East Caicos. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS Because of the generally adverse economic conditions throughout the world, the organization committee of the Sixteenth International Geological Congress has decided to postpone until June, 1933, the meeting of the Congress which had been scheduled for Washington in June, 1982. The Smithsonian Institution has received from the estate of the late JamMES ARTHUR somewhat more than $50,000 to establish a yearly lecture about the sun. The remainder of the income from this fund is to be devoted to re- © searches relating to the sun. At the annual meeting of the National Academy of Sciences, which met in Washington on April 27, 28, and 29, the following officers were elected: _ President, WittiamM WALLACE CAMPBELL, director emeritus of Lick Observatory. Vice-President, Davin Wuits, U. 8. Geological Survey. Home Secretary, FRED E. Wricut, Geophysical Laboratory of the Carnegie Institution of Washington. Members of the Council, W. B. Cannon, Harvard Medical School, and Rocrr ApAms, University of: Illinois. E. O. Uxricu, geologist of the U. 8S. Geological Survey, has been awarded the Mary Clark Thompson medal “‘for the most important services to geology and paleontology.” The presentation was made by RupOoLPH RUEDEMANN, state geologist of New York, at the annual dinner of the National Academy of Sciences. 254 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 11 ApouFr Kwnopr, professor of geology at Yale University, a member of the AcaDEMy and a geologist of the Geological Survey, has been elected to mem- bership in the National Academy of Sciences. Prof. W. H. TwEnuHoFrEt of the University of Wisconsin has been elected chairman of the Division of Geology and Geography of the National Research Council, succeeding ARTHUR KrirH. He will take office July 1. The Alaskan Branch of the U. 8. Geological Survey is to make an intensive study of the mineral resources of the Alaskan Railroad this season, and will employ temporarily several additional geologists. R. W. Ricuarps of the Fuel Section and C. P. Ross, F. G. Wettis, J. C. Renn, and C. F. Parx of the Section of Metalliferous Deposits of the Geologic Branch have been trans- ferred to the Alaskan Branch for this purpose. J. M. Hinu and G. A. War- ING, former members of the geologic staff of the Survey, and J. C. Ray and RaupH Tuck have been appointed geologists for the Alaskan Railroad work. Prrry A. Davison, also, has been appointed junior geologist on the Alaskan Branch. Sir James H. Jeans, former secretary of the Royal Society of London and research associate of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, spoke on the subject Out in the depths of space at the National Museum on May 18, under the auspices of the Carnegie Institution of Washington. Pau. H. Onuser, for the past six years a member of the editorial staff of the Bureau of Biological Survey, succeeds Dr. Marcus BENJAMIN, retired, as editor of the National Museum. Roun E.. STEVENS has been appointed assistant chemist in the Geological Survey and has taken up the study of the chemistry relating to the origin of certain ore deposits. Serdang te ou E. s Hown, ee Avimal Industry. retary | CHARLES Tuom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils, TES: . << en . : . ie Geology. Orie heat of solution of some Oba ila R. C. WELLS ee soe esses eee este ets Screntiric Notes aNnp Ne ae SA reese oS ae SEE. . Wad ye. ae eal bac | in A . aa : - ty er 3 ; } a2 Ve t : ~s et Nl Vou. 21 WASH I NGTON C. Wrture Cooke U. 8S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY JUNE 19, 1931 JOURNAL OF THE OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS CHARLES DRECHSLER BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. Peters Haroutp Morrison PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY G. W. Stose GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GotpMAN BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY Aanes Cuase J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY Roger C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY Rsescieig-di IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN — BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Roya anp GuitForp AVEs. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND No. 12 Hues L. DrypEen BUREAU OF STANDARDS ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage Provided for 191 in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, ACADEMY Journal of the Washington Academy it Sciences This JOURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Suismuees sabes os (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. . The JourNALis issued semi- monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer when ~ it appears on the nineteenth only. . Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or the - twentieth of the month wil! ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in ihe issue eae of the JourNnAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. te Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors: they should be clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The — - editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References © should appear-only as footnotes and should inelude year of publication. To facilitate — the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered : serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. ; Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be predic by zinc etchings being preferable. Beat Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors Nua unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors a will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ge Author’s Reprints—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers Pa bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord- ance with the following schedule of prices: Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers Oe ey pean wien i) aia cutee nae ee heat $2.00 100 $ .50 $ .55 $ .60 $1.10 2. 50 150 SO 1.00 1.10 1. 60 3.60 200 1.15 1.50 1.60 2.10 3. 50 250 1.65 2.00 2.10 2. 60 4.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the : corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. — As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints a should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. Tike rate of Subscription per volume 08. Vee as Ce eee ins eee ee ++» $6. 00* Semi-monthly numbers. 204 2s. Bo fs a rn 22 Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15)..... . 50 Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences” and addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C. Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other publications, Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made within thirty days after date of the following issue. * Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21 JUNE 19, 1931 No. 12 CRYSTALLOGRAPHY .—The spinel structure: An example of variate atom equipoints.: Tom. F. W. Barro and E. Posnsax, Geo- physical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of Washington. The commonly accepted interpretation of the spinel structure is in some respects not in harmony with the general results of crystal analy- sis. For instance, it shows a distinct discrepancy with the assumption, which is well based on Goldschmidt’s? extensive work, that the struc- ture of a crystal is largely determined by the ratio of sizes of its constit- uent atoms (or ions). A few examples will readily show that in the spinel structure, with the general chemical formula X Y2Ou., the radius ratio Rx: Ry does not seem to be the important factor in determining the structure. For example, in MgAl,O, we have Rye: Ra, = 1.37, in GpbeO. Roa: Re, = 1.54; K.Cd(CN)., Rca: Re = 0.78, and in Mg, TiO,, Ry:Ry, = 0.82. Phenacite, Be,SiO., has a ratio Rgi:Rge = 1.15 which lies well between the aforementioned values, nevertheless this mineral crystallizes with trigonal symmetry, and not as a spinel. Another, and very disturbing feature of the spinel structure is that the law of constant atomic radii seems to be violated. For example, in the common spinel Mg has an apparent radius of 0.42 A, whereas it is supposed to have the value of 0.78 A—an enormous difference. In this connection one might think of the possibility of the spinel structure forming an atom lattice instead of an ion lattice. However, the com- parison of the differences of the spacings of various spinels which have one metal common (like MgAl,0.,—MgFe.0.; MgFe.0.—CdFe20,) shows definitely that we are dealing here with an ion lattice. Examinations of the X-ray data show conclusively that the only possible arrangements of the ions within the unit cell are (8f), (16c), and 1 Received May 16, 1931. 2 Cf. V.M. Goupscumipt. Geochem. Verteilungsgesetze VII, Vid. Akad. Oslo 1926, No. 2. 255 256 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 (32b). The parameter,? wu, of the oxygen ions had been determined and found to have a value close to 2. By choosing another value for the parameter it appeared possible to get interatomic distances that lead to more reasonable radii for the cations. However, re-calculations of the intensities show that it is hardly possible to move the positions of the oxygen atoms. In the case of MgAl.O,, for instance, the value for u appears to be good to less than + 0.01. The only assumption which leads to reasonable distances eanden oxygen and metal and at the same time is consistent with the observed intensity data is that the 16 equivalent positions in the unit cell are not occupied by chemically equivalent ions. Instead of having Mg in (8f) and Al in (16c) the spinel has 8 Al-ions in (8f) and 8 Al-ions + 8 Mg- ions in (16c).4 (This arrangement will be expressed further on by writing AlMgAIO, instead of MgA1.O,.) It was possible to test this assumption on spinels in which the two kinds of cations show a sufficient difference in their scattering power for X-rays. As such magnesium ferrite and magnesium galliate were selected. The results of the intensity calculations are given in Table 1 and prove that magnesium galliate and magnesium ferrite must have the structures GaMgGaO, and FeMegFeO,; all the decisive data are in good agreement with this assumption, whereas they are quite incom- patible with the formerly accepted spinel structure. It seems to us that the demonstration of this new spinel structure is of more than ordinary interest. It brings forward a new principle in crystal analysis, or rather it causes us to give up the old idea that struc- turally equivalent positions have to be occupied by chemically equiva- lent atoms. While in the case of mixed crystals it has long been known that chemically different atoms may enter into structurally equivalent positions, no extension of this idea to pure compounds had previously been considered necessary.> Our study of the structure of spinels thus 3 Determined on spinel and magnetite by W. H. Braae (Phil. Mag. 30, 305, 1915), and S. Nishikawa (Proc. Math. Phys. Soc. Tokyo 8, 199, 1915), A. Claasen (Proc. Phys. Soc. London 38, 482, 1926); on silver molybdate by R. W. G. Wyckoff and on various com- plex cyanides by R. G. Dickinson (Journ. Am. Chem. Soc. 44, 1922, pp. 1994 and 774 respeceinely)- 4 If one assumes that u = 0.378, the apparent radius of the Al-ions in (8f) 1 is 0. 46 A, while Al*** in coérdination number 4 should have a value of from 0.44 to 0.47 A. The average radius of the Mg + Al-ions in (16c) is 0.67 A, while the radius Mg + AI in co- 2 ordination number 6 should be 0.675 A. 5 A somewhat similar idea has been proposed by A. F. Westgren and G. Phragmén (Faraday Society, Crystal structure and chemical constitution, p. 382, 1929) to explain the structure of intermetallic compounds. JUNE 19, 1931 BARTH AND POSNJAK: THE SPINEL STRUCTURE 207 establishes a more fundamental application of this principle. A unit cell which contains different atoms at structurally equivalent points TABLE 1.2. INTENSITY Data FROM MAGNESIUM GALLIATE AND MAGNESIUM FERRITE Magnesium galliate Magnesium ferrite Indices Calculated : Calculated Se Observed > _____. Observed MgGar20s Ga(MgGa)Os MgFe204 Fe(MgFe) Os (11) i 0.1 0.5— 6 0.2 0.5 (113) 10 10 10 10 10 10 (133) 3 0 0 3 0 0 (333) (11 a 6 6 7 6 6 7 (135) 4 0 0 3 0 0 (335) 3 3 2 3 3 2, (155) (117) 2 0 0 2 0 0 (355)| 6 6 4 6 6 4 (137) f (555) (157) 3 3 Pe 3 3 3 (357) 1 0 0 1 0 0 (159) (377) 3 3 it 3 3 1! T° 4/ A+ B2 a The intensities were calculated according to the formula I = disregard- h2 _ k2 +- ]2 ing the variation of scattering with the angle. The scattering power of the atoms has been taken directly proportional to the number of electrons, i.e. the atomic number minus the valence. Only faces with all indices odd are shown in the table; for such faces the expression for VV A? + B? becomes 4v/2-X + 8-Yif one or all three of the indices is 3 (mod. 8) and 4y/2.X — 8-Yif one or all three indices is 1 (mod.8). (X and Y stand for the atoms in (8f) and (16c) respectively, and the parameter, u, of the oxygen atoms is taken as 0.375.) All other faces give approximately the same intensities for either arrangement, so it seemed unnecessary to incorporate them in this table. may be referred to as a cell with variate atoms in equivalent positions; or, to give it a short name, a cell with variate atom equipoints. The 258 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 introduction of this conception falls in line with, and extends Mach- atschki’s® ideas of the structures of silicates. The importance of this principle for crystal analysis may, e.g., be seen from Raaz’s paper’ on the structure of gehlenite. In working out this structure he used the formula Ca,Al,Si0O;, whereas its relation to akermanite, Ca,.MgSi.O;, would suggest that its structure possesses variate atom equipoints: Ca,Al(AlS8i)O;; in this latter case the 4e positions of D*,, would be alternately occupied by Al and Si-ions. All chemical evidence is in agreement with this arrangement. and the only reason for Raaz’s unwillingness to accept it was the fact that this assumption would be contrary to the traditional application of the theory of crystal analysis. SUMMARY Comparisons of the observed and calculated intensities on the spinels, magnesium ferrite and magnesium galliate, show that instead of having Mg in (8f) and Al in (16c), 8 Al-ions occupy positions in (8f) and 8 Al-ions + 8 Mg-ions are in (16c). The possibility that different atoms partly replace one another in structurally equivalent positions of a crystal is in all likelihood not confined to spinels, but very likely is a more general phenomenon. It is proposed to call unit cells of such crystals, cells with variate atom equipoints. 6 Cf. F. Machatschki. Zeitschr. f. Krist. 71,219. 1929; Centralblatt f. Min. Abt. A, 1930, 279. | 7F. Raaz. Sitzungsberichte Akad. Wiss. Wien, Abt. 1, 139,645. 1930. JUNE 19, 1931 SCHWARTZ: RESISTANCE TO NEMATODES 259 ZOOLOGY.—Resistance of rats to superinfections with a nematode, Nippostrongylus muris, and an apparently similar resistance of horses to superinfection with nematodes... BENJAMIN SCHWARTZ, JospepH FE. AuicaTa and JoHN T. Lucker, Bureau of Animal Industry, U. 8. Department of Agriculture. For the past twenty-five years parasitologists have been seeking evidence in regard to immunity in parasitic infections. By means of the known immunological technic developed in connection with the study of bacterial and related diseases, it has been possible to demon- strate more or less specific antibodies in certain diseases caused by metazoan parasites, particularly in schistosomiasis, hydatid disease, trichinosis, filariasis, and some of the worm infestations of the gastro- intestinal tract of various mammals. While the evidence obtained in the course of these investigations is of interest and of value, and shows that certain substances eliminated by the parasites involved are prob- ably absorbed by the host with the resultant elaboration of antibodies, it falls short of explaining how the host actually copes with the para- sites themselves, particularly in cases of superinfections. More recently a number of parasitologists have presented data, based on laboratory investigations, which appear to indicate that following the successive administration of infective nematode larvae to susceptible host animals, the latter ultimately become entirely refractory, or nearly so, to an infection with the particular parasites involved. The evi- dence presented in connection with the latter investigations has been in the main indirect, and has been based, for the most part, on informa- tion derived from quantitative studies in the form of counts, made at regular intervals of the number of worm eggs in definite amounts of the feces of experimentally infected animals, the rise and fall in the inten- sity of the parasitic infestations being judged by the relative number of parasite eggs present in definite quantities of feces. In the opinion of the present writers, however, evidence of this sort has definite useful- ness and value, and also definite limitations. It fails to give an accu- rate index to the total number of worms harbored by a host, since the evidence of egg counts takes cognizance only of female worms which have attained fertile maturity, and gives no direct or positive informa- tion in regard to males, immature worms, or senile females, which might be present in the host in considerable numbers. This limitation has been pointed out from time to time in the past, but even yet is not always taken into consideration or kept in mind. The significance 1 Received May 20, 1931. 260 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 of the possible presence of agamic parasites in a state of arrested development has been entirely overlooked in the past. The writers’ investigations on the life history of Nippostrongylus muris, a nematode parasitic in the small intestine of rats, and more or less closely related to pathogenic trichostrongyles occurring in domestic meat-food animals, have already brought to light facts which show rather conclusively that following the recovery from a single infection with this nematode, under rigorous experimental conditions which have precluded extraneous infections with this and with other parasites, the rat host is already in a state of relative resistance to superinfection. If exposed to a second infection or to subsequent infections, the development of the parasites is considerably retarded, but agamic worms commonly remain in the host and may ultimately come to fertile maturity, apparently a few ata time. As first shown by Yokagawa in 1925, the infective larvae of Nippo- strongylus muris may enter the host through the skin and be carried by the circulation to the lungs. In these organs the larvae develop for a time and then migrate to the small intestine in a manner similar to that of various species of human and carnivore hookworms, species of ascarids, and other intestinal parasites which undergo part of their development in the lungs. In about six to seven days after experi- mental infection with NV. muris, the worm eggs appear in the feces of infested rats. The writers’ investigations have shown that once the the eggs have appeared in the feces, their production, as followed by microscopic examination of the feces, rises rather rapidly at first, then declines gradually, and finally the eggs disappear from the feces alto- gether. Experimentally infected rats, killed from 13 to 16 days follow- ing infection, and about 7 to 10 days after the first appearance of eggs in the feces, contained fully grown, sexually mature worms, the females being, as a rule, at the peak of egg production, but sometimes already on the decline in production. Occasionally a few larvae, usually from three to five, have been discovered in the lungs of such rats. These larvae are worms which, for one reason or another, have failed to get into the intestine and have, therefore, been unable to develop beyaed the stage which these parasites can attain in the lungs. In experimental rats killed from 13 to 16 days following the first superinfection, subsequent to the disappearance from the feces of eggs resulting from the previous infection, the parasite picture discovered at necropsy was quite different from that noted at the corresponding stage in the course of the first infection. In some rats many of the worms from the second infection, in some cases 50 per cent or more, JUNE 19, 19381 SCHWARTZ: RESISTANCE TO NEMATODES 261 were still in the lungs as third-stage larvae; the worms recovered from the intestine were, for the most part, not fully grown and many of the females had not yet attained the egg-laying stage. Before being killed, the rats in question showed an insignificant number of eggs in the feces as compared to the large number of eggs present at a correspond- ing stage of development in the first infection. At necropsy, the egg- producing females from the second infection were found to contain relatively few eggs in the uterus. While direct evidence based on the finding of worms post-mortem, about two weeks after a second or a third superinfection of rats, is as yet unavailable, indirect evidence, based on the period required for eggs to appear in the feces following such successive infections, indi- cates that the prepatent period increases directly with the number of times that these host animals are exposed to re-infection. This is interpreted as indicating that with successive infections the host builds up an increasing resistance of a sort resulting in retardation of the growth and the development of these nematodes, possibly by elaborat- ing, either throughout the body or, what is, perhaps, more probable, in the tissues and organs with which these worms come in contact, a specific growth-inhibiting substance or substances which retard the develop- ment of the parasites. So far as the writers are aware, this is the first experimental demonstration of what appears to be the development by the host of a growth-inhibiting mechanism for keeping in check the development and propagation of a parasitic nematode. In connection with an investigation on the prevalence in horses of species of Habronema, heteroxeneous nematodes which are transmitted by flies, it was discovered that despite the absence of flies during the the winter months in the vicinity of the District of Columbia, agamic forms of Habronema species, in many cases no further advanced in development than that attained in their intermediate fly hosts, were present in the stomachs of horses during the months of December, 1930, to March, 1931 inclusive.2 In the light of the experimental results obtained with NV. muris, the writers interpret these findings in horses as probably falling within the same category of resistance as that discovered in connection with the superinfection experiments with the rat trichostrongyle discussed in this paper. It is not improbable that in cases of superinfections with other species of nematodes a growth-retarding mechanism, similar to that discovered in rats infected with Nippostrongylus muris, will be found. 2 These data were collected by Mr. Allan McIntosh, Assistant Zoologist, Bureau of Animal Industry. 262 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 ZOOLOGY.—A new species of Pinnotherid crab from Costa Rica.! Mary J. Ratusun, United States National Museum. ; In a collection of Costa Rican crabs recently sent to the United States National Museum by Prof. Manuel Valerio of San José, there is a Pinna different from any previously obtained. Fig.1. Pinnizxavalerii # holotype, carapace 9.8 mm. wide, dorsal and ventral views. Pinnixa valerii, new species Figures 1 and 2 Carapace and appendages covered with a short close pile. Carapace nearly twice as wide as long; anterior and anterolateral margins together forming a strongly convex arch, reaching to the line of the widest part of the cardiac 1 Published with the permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received May 4, 1931. JUNE 19, 1931 RATHBUN: NEW COSTA RICAN CRAB 263 region and meeting posterior margin at almost a right angle; posterior margin transverse at its middle for less than 4 of carapace width. Gastric and cardiac regions strongly delimited, the former the wider; three longitudinal, narrow gastric furrows, one median, short, reaching only half way back; branchial region crossed by five obliquely transverse furrows, the hinder one deep and parallel to posterior margin. A short dorsal hepatic furrow is directed inward and forward. Eyes minute. Fronto-orbital width less than 4+ width of cara- pace; below the level of the orbit the carapace is vertical; the antero-lateral margin is a smooth blunt ridge, separated from the sharp pterygostomian ridge by a broad depression. Chelipeds small, about as long as first leg, and fringed with long hair on upper margin and along middle of inner surface of carpus and manus. Chelae Fig. 2. Left outer maxilliped of Pinniza valerii & holotype, enlarged. thin, sharp-edged; palm nearly as high as long; fingers narrow, longitudinal, acuminate, gaping in proximal two-thirds. Legs stout, first pair with remark- ably short dactyl; third pair much stouter than the others, 14 times as long as second pair; merus widest at middle, narrowing toward either end. Male abdomen very long and narrow, overlapping buccal cavity; third, fourth and fifth segments regularly tapering, fourth and fifth equally long, sixth long and narrow, with parallel sides, seventh suboblong. Female abdomen, second to sixth segments subcircular, sixth rapidly tapering, seventh short with arcuate tip. Male, length of carapace 5.3, width of same 9.8, width of front and orbits 2.3, of transverse posterior margin 2.8 mm. Type-locality—Isla San Lucas, west coast of Costa Rica; Jan. 15, 1930; 1 male holotype, 1 female, Cat No. 63854, United States National Museum. 264 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 ENTOMOLOGY .—A _ revisional study of the genus Gnathotrichus Evchhoff in North America. M. W. Buackman, Bureau of Ento- mology, U. 8. Department of Agriculture. (Communicated by Harotp MorRRISON.) This is the third of a series of revisional studies of Pityophthorus Eichh. and its allies in North America. The one remaining genus of the group, Conophthorus Hopk., will perhaps serve as the subject of a future study. Gnathotrichus materiarius Fitch was described by Fitch in 1858 under the name Tomicus materiarius. In 1868 Zimmerman referred mate- riarius Fitch to the genus Crypturgus Er. and in the appendix to this same paper LeConte (1868) placed it in the genus Cryphalus Er. along with retusus, sulcatus, and asperulus described as new, and various other species now included in Pityophthorus Eichh., Pseudomityophtho- rus Sw., etc. Hichhoff in 1868 erected the monobasic genus Gnathotrichus to in- clude G. corthyloides described by him asnew. Ina footnote, however, he expressed his belief that this species might be identical with Tomicus matervarius Fitch. LeConte (1876) placed corthyloides Eichh. as asynonym of materiarius Fitch, which he included, along with the other North American forms described by him, as one division of the genus Pityophthorus Eichh. Eichhoff (1878) in his “Ratio Tomicinorum”’ placed corthyloides as a Synonym of materiarius Fitch, the type of the genus thus becoming Gnathotrichus |corthyloides] materiarius Fitch. In this same great work Ejichhoff described three additional species, G. longipennis, G. consobrinus, and G. nanus, all from Chile, and included a full rede- scription of the genus. Blandford (1895) redescribed the genus and added the two new spe- cies, G. consentaneus and G. bituberculatus from Central America. Hopkins (1902) referred to his manuscript species, occidentalis, which apparently has never been described, and in 1905 described G. mitidifrons Hopk. from Mexico. Thus the species listed by Hagedorn (1910) are 11 in number, but occidentalis MS Hopk. has never been described, and asperulus Lec. was correctly placed by Eichhoff (1879) in the section of the genus Pityophthorus Eichh. which was later removed by Swaine (1918) to form the new genus Pseudopityophthorus Sw. 1 Received April 16, 1931. JUNE 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: REVISION OF GNATHOTRICHUS 265 Swaine (1918) included in the North American members of the genus . Gnathotrichus not only materiarius Fitch, retusus Lec., and sulcatus Lec., but also asperulus Lec., which should have been placed under Pseudopityophthorus Sw. REVISED DESCRIPTION OF THE GENUS GNATHOTRICHUS EICHHOFF Body form cylindrical, elongate, more than three times as long as wide; the surface very smooth, finely reticulate, varying from subopaque to brightly shining with the punctures varying from fine to minute. Head with the front convex, either punctured, with the median area ele- vated, or convergently aciculate, with a few moderate hairs; the antenna with the club more than one and a half times as long as the five-jointed funicle, with segments 2 and 3 subequal in width, and sutures 1 and 2 septate, the females with long curved hairs on the outer border of both club and funicle; the mouth parts with slender hairs; the pregula either normal or protuberant. Pronotum with the sides not constricted before the middle; the anterior area with numerous very broad and low asperities; the summit anterior to the middle and marked by a sharply elevated, tranverse carina; the basal border without a well-developed, beaded margin, although traces of this are to be found in some specimens of all of the North American species. Elytra finely rugulose, with the strial punctures fine to minute and in definite rows, glabrous or subglabrous except on the posterior third; declivity weakly to strongly sulcate. The legs more slender than in its allies; the tibia rather narrow and grad- ually widened toward the distal end, which is ornamented with two socketed teeth and in one of the sub-groups by an additional tooth on the outer edge as in other Pityophthori; the tarsi longer and more slender than in Pityophthorus. The members of this genus occurring in the United States are readily recognized owing to their great similarity in general appearance. However, when studied carefully the group readily divides itself into two sub-groups separated by differences nearly as great as those separating other genera of the Pityophthori. These differences have to do with such structures as the front of the head, the pregula, the tarsi, and the tibia of the fore leg. In sulcatus Lec. and aciculatus, new species, the front of the head in both sexes is strongly, convergently aciculate over a greater portion of its surface; while in the other group which includes materiarius Fitch, denticulatus, new species, retusus Lec., and alnz, new species, the frons is punctured, with an impunctate, elevated area in the median line with either very faint or no aciculations. In sulcatus and aciculatus the pregula is normal, similar in general to the pregula of Pityophthorus and most of its allies. In the other group, however, the pregula is swollen and protrudes anteroventrally. The two groups of species also differ as regards the structure of the fore legs. The general shape of the tibia is rather similar in all of the species but in the sulcatus-aciculatus group the submarginal teeth are confined to the distal end and are only two in number, while in the group containing mater- iarius, denticulatus, retusus, and alni these submarginal teeth are three in number as in all of the other Pityophthori, the third tooth being placed on the outer edge of the tibia. Other differences are to be seen in the degree of development of the serrations on the outer edge of the tibia, the modification 266 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL: 21, No. 12 at the tarsal joint of the tibia in sulcatus and aciculatus to form a rudimen- tary subapical tooth, and in the greater length of the first tarsal joint in this same group. These differences might be considered great enough to warrant the separa- tion of sulcatus and aciculatus to form a new genus but the writer does not consider them of more than subgeneric value and believes the true relation- ship can best be expressed by dividing the genus Gnathotrichus into the sub- genus Gnathotrichoides, new subgenus, including sulcatus and aciculatus, and the subgenus Gnathotrichus, containing the other North American species. G. nitidifrons Hopk., described from Mexico, belongs to the true Gnatho- trichus, with the frons not aciculate, the pregula protuberent, and the fore tibia tridentate. The position of the other described species can not be de- termined with certainty, as the descriptions, while excellent in other respects, do not take cognizance of the structures which the present writer considers of greatest subgeneric value. However, on the basis of frontal characters G. consentaneus Bldfd. seems to fall into the subgenus Gnathotrichoides while G. longipennis Eichh., G. consobrinus Eichh., G. nanus Hichh., and G. bituber- culatus Bldfd. seem to belong to the true Gnathotrichus. Added note.—Since this paper was written in its final form, the article by K. Sched! (1931) on the Morphology of the bark-beetles of the genus Gnatho- trichus Eich. (Smithsonian Misc. Coll. Vol. 82, No. 10, Publication 3068; 88 pp., 40 figs.) has appeared. The author has worked out the comparative morphology of the three species known to him in accordance with a very admirable plan, and has added considerably to our knowledge of this group of Scolytidae. In most cases he has also constructed keys to the three species, based on the characters of each set of structures studied. For the most part his findings agree with those of the present writer, but in regard to the struc- ture of the fore-leg he is certainly in error when he says on page 45,—‘‘ They (the legs) do not vary strikingly from species to species, neither in form nor in sculpture.’ He therefore made all of his drawings and apparently all of the descriptions from G. materiarius. On page 48 he says regarding the tibia,— “The sinestral margin bears four to six low serrations, and three marginal teeth which are imbedded in sockets.’’ This is true of materiarzus Fitch and retusus Lec. and also of the new species denticulatus and alnz, described in the present paper, but is certainly not true of sulcatus Lec. and aciculatus, new species. These latter two species have but two ‘‘marginal”’ (really sub- marginal), socketed teeth on the fore tibia and this character serves as one of the principal differences in the subdivision of the genus as proposed by the present writer. There are also other differences in leg structure, as for instance in the greater relative length of the first tarsal segment and in a greater tendency toward the development of a subapical tibial tooth in the sulcatus group. But these differences are not tangible enough to lend them- selves readily to use in a key. KEY TO THE GENUS GNATHOTRICHUS EICHHOFF A. Front of head punctured at sides, the median area elevated; antennal club with septa of sutures 1 and 2 subtransverse or weakly arcuate; the pregula protruding antero-ventrally; fore tibia with three submarginal teeth. JUNE 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: REVISION OF GNATHOTRICHUS 267 Subgenus Gnathotrichus n. sub-gen. B. Median elevated area of frons smooth; pronotum with posterior area feebly shining, finely, sparsely punctured; elytra more narrowly rounded behind, declivity weakly or moderately sulcate, the sides feebly or moderately retuse; smaller species, less than 3.4 mm. long. C. Antennal club with septa of sutures 1 and 2 subtransverse; pronotum more narrowly rounded in front, flattened on a triangular area just posterior to summit, posterior area sparsely, very minutely punc- tured; the declivity feebly sulcate, the sides not distinctly retuse, with the granules nearly obsolete; eastern species materiarius Fitch. CC. Antennal club with septa weakly arcuate; pronotum moderately BB. rounded in front; the region posterior to summit not usually flat- tened, the punctures moderately fine and sparse; declivity distinctly suleate, the sides moderately retuse and distinctly denticulate; NVESUERIT SDGClGGr tre wm Ti aeee soak. ay vast. 2 ee denticulatus, n. sp. Median elevated area of the frons feebly aciculate in the males; poste- rior area of pronotum at least moderately shining, the punctures moder- ately fine and sparse; elytra moderately rounded behind, declivity strongly sulcate, the sides strongly retuse; larger species, more than 3.5 mm. long; western species. C. Slightly smaller, less than 3.8 mm. long; pronotum with carina mark- ing summit shorter, moderately arcuate, and slightly in front of middle; elytra with the declivital sulcus narrower, the sides less strongly retuse, and the granules finer; the posterior margin moder- ately extended; living in western coniferous trees...... retusus Lec. CC. Larger, usually about 4.0 mm. long; pronotum with carina longer, feebly arcuate, and more anterior in position; elytra with the declivital sulcus wider, the sides more strongly retuse, and the granules coarser; the posterior margin more strongly extended; Haya, “WESEGHI VANOT coos ov yo ccs onda s shen eneee saniece co's alni, n. sp. AA. Front of the head distinctly convergently aciculate; antennal club with septa of sutures 1 and 2 moderately to strongly arcuate; the pregula not protruding; fore tibia with only two submarginal teeth. Subgenus Gnathotrichoides n. sub-gen. B. Antennal club with septa of sutures 1 and 2 moderately arcuate; front BB. of head more coarsely aciculate, the punctures coarser and more evident; pronotum with the carina marking the summit moderately elevated and weakly arcuate, posterior area brightly shining, the punctures moderately fine; elytral declivity more abrupt, moder- ately strongly retuse, the granules coarser...... aciculatus, n. sp. Antennal club with septa strongly arcuate; front of head distinctly but finely aciculate, the punctures fine; pronotum with carina weakly elevated, straight and short; posterior area feebly shining, the punc- tures minute; elytral declivity more sloping, less strongly retuse, the SCUANIU LEST eae eke ois, oe SE TE Le! 2) sulcatus Lec. 268 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 Gnathotrichus materiarius Fitch Figs. 1, la, 2, and 3 Description of the adult female—Dark reddish brown; 3.03 mm. long, 3.29 times as long as wide. Front of the head plano-convex, rather coarsely, strongly, moderately sparsely punctured at sides and above, with moderately fine, short hairs, median area slightly elevated, impunctate, smooth or very faintly aciculate. Eye moderately granulate, the inner line broadly and deeply emarginate. Antenna considerably lighter in color, club 1.5 times as long as funicle, 1.29 times as long as wide, widest through the second segment, the septa sub-. transverse; with a few very long hairs on the outer margin of the club and funicle. Pregula protruding antero-ventrally. Pronotum 1.29 times as long as wide, widest near the posterior margin, the sides subparallel on the posterior half, then regularly curved to the rather narrowly rounded, slightly extended front margin, which is armed with rather low and broad serrations; anterior area with subconcentric rows of numerous, rather broad and low asperities; the summit modified to form a distinct, well- developed, arcuate, transverse carina, anterior to the middle; the surface posterior to it depressed to form a shallow, median, triangular impression which tapers posteriorly and is lost about half way between summit and posterior margin; posterior area feebly shining, the surface very finely reticu- late, minutely, rather sparsely punctulate, glabrous; the beaded marginal line feebly developed. Elytra nearly exactly twice as long as wide, the sides subparallel, narrowly rounded behind, with the posterior margin extended; surface moderately shining, rugulose; the strial punctures very fine, in fairly regular rows, inter- strial punctures still more minute, very sparse on the disc, which is nearly glabrous, more numerous, and bearing stiff erect hairs of moderate length on the declivity. Declivity convex, weakly sulcate in the sutural region, the suture flat, lateral elevations weak, with a few small, nearly obsolete granules. The male is similar in size, proportions, and sculpture, but with the pro- notum more broadly rounded in front, and the anterior margin not extended; it is readily distinguished by the absence of the longer hairs on the outer margin of the antennal funicle and club. The foregoing description of the female was prepared, with the exceptions of the measurements of the antenna, from a specimen now in the National Museum but obtained from the Fitch Collection and bearing the label © ~“Tomicus materiarius, Fitch” in Fitch’s own hand-writing. It is believed that this specimen served as the type for Fitch’s original description. This species is widely distributed over eastern Canada and the eastern part of the United States. The writer has examined several hundred speci- mens from the following States: Ontario, Canada, Maine, Vermont, Mas- sachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Michigan, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Nebraska, Maryland, District of Columbia, Virginia, West Virginia, North Carolina, South Carolina, Georgia, Florida, Mississippi, Louisiana, Arkansas, and Texas. ‘The hosts are the various species of Pinus, Picea, Larix, Abies, and T’suga occurring’ in its range. Other conifers used in plantations or as ornamentals are also subject to attack. JUNE 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: REVISION OF GNATHOTRICHUS 269 Figures.—1l. Fore tibia of Gnathotrichus materiarius Fitch;—la. fore tibia of same showing extra tooth on distal end.—2. Antenna of male G. materiarius.—3. Antenna of female G. materiarius.—4. Fore tibia of G. denticulatus n. sp.—5. Antenna of male G. denticulatus n. sp.—6. Antenna of female G. denticulatus n. sp.—7. Fore tibia of G. retusus Lec.—8. Antenna of female G. retusus.—9. Antenna of male G. retusus. All figures were made by the writer from preparations mounted in balsam, using a compound microscope and a camera lucida. All are magnified about 112 diameters. 270 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 Gnathotrichus denticulatus, new species Figs. 4, 5, and 6 Description of the adult female-—Reddish brown; 3.28 mm. long, 3.25 times as long as wide. Front of the head convex, similar to that of G. retusws but considerably more finely sculptured, with the median impunctate area wider and less elevated below; pubescence scanty and inconspicuous. Eye short oval, broadly and deeply emarginate, rather finely granulate. Antenna consider- ably lighter in color, club 1.6 times as long as funicle, 1.32 times as long as wide, the second segment slightly wider than the third, the septa of sutures 1 and 2 weekly arcuate, with longer hairs on the outer margin of club and funicle. Pregula protruding antero-ventrally. Pronotum 1.19 times as long as wide; widest just behind the middle, the sides slightly arcuate, feebly narrowed in front of the middle, moderately rounded in front; the anterior margin extended and armed with broad, low serrations; the asperities low and broad; summit anterior to the middle and marked by a sharply elevated, transverse, arcuate carina; the region posterior to it impunctate, not flattened or impressed; posterior area with surface subopaque or feebly shining, finely reticulate, the punctures moderately sparse, shallow, much finer than in retusus; the posterior margin with little evidence of a beaded line. Elytra about equal to pronotum in width, slightly more than twice as long as wide; the sides subparallel; rather narrowly rounded behind, with the posterior margin extended; surface shining, rugulose; the strial punctures fine but distinct, in fairly regular rows; interspaces nearly devoid of punctures on the dise but sparsely punctured on sides and declivity and ornamented with stiff, suberect hairs of moderate length. Declivity convex, abrupt; the sutural region moderately sulcate (much less so than in retusus), the lateral elevations moderate, with a row of denticles in the third interspace. The male is slightly smaller, with the pronotum not extended, broadly rounded in front and the serrations and asperities coarser; the front of the head is more coarsely and roughly punctured, and the antennae lack the long hairs on the outer margin. Type.—Cat. No. 43430, U.S. N. M. Type, allotype, and two paratypes bear the labels, “‘Hopk, U. 8S. 3984f; W. F. Fiske, Colr.; Clouderoft, N. M.; Pznus ponderosa: 10 paratypes collected from Pinus ponderosa at Cloudcroft, N. M. by W. F. Fiske: four paratypes, ‘“‘Hopk. U. 8. 3899; Davis Mts., Tex., W. F. Fiske, Colr.; Pinus edulis:’’ 18 paratypes collected by Hopkins and Webb at Flagstaff, Ariz., from yellow pine: 18 paratypes collected from Pinus ponderosa and Abies concolor, Sta. Catalina Mts., Ariz., by J. L. Webb: 11 paratypes collected from P. ponderosa, P. strobiformis, and P. chichuahuana by J. L. Webb, Chiricahua Mts., Ariz. Gnathotrichus retusus Lec. Figs. 7, 8, and 9 Description of the adult female—Dark reddish-brown, with the anterior part of pronotum and of elytra slightly lighter in color; 3.5 to 3.8 mm. long, 3.25 times as long as wide. JUNE 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: REVISION OF GNATHOTRICHUS Zul Front of the head convex, moderately punctured, with a triangular callus above, one angle of which is extended as a strongly elevated smooth ridge on the vertex; below, with an impunctate, shining, median, broad elevation end- ing in a small, acute epistomal process; pubescence rather scanty. Hye short-oval, moderately granulate, the inner line widely, rather deeply emargi- nate. Antenna somewhat lighter in color, the club 1.54 times as long as funicle, 1.23 times as long as wide; second and third segments subequal in width, the septa of sutures 1 and 2 rather weakly arcuate; with longer hairs on the outer margin of the club and funicle. Pregula protruding antero-ventrally. Pronotum 1.29 times as long as wide; the sides subparallel, feebly arcuate, moderately rounded in front, with the anterior margin slightly extended and armed with rather low, wide serrations; the asperities of the anterior area low and broad; summit anterior to middle and marked by an arcuate, rather strongly elevated, transverse, rather short carina, the surface posterior to it slightly flattened on a triangular area narrowing to a point about midway between summit and posterior margin; posterior area glabrous, with the surface finely reticulate, shining, the punctures moderately sparse, deep, and moderately fine; beaded marginal line feebly developed. Elytra very slightly narrower than pronotum, twice as long as wide, the sides subparallel, feebly converging, moderately rounded behind, with the posterior margin extended; surface shining, rugulose; the strial punctures fine but distinct and rather deep, in regular strial rows; interspaces nearly devoid of punctures on the disc, but on the sides and declivity with a few punctures similar in size to those of the striae and bearing stiff, suberect hairs of moderate length. Declivity rather abrupt, convex, strongly sulcate in the sutural area, with the sides strongly retuse and armed with a row of denticles. The male is similar, but with the median carinal area of the frons finely, weakly aciculate, the antenna with the longer hairs of the outer margin absent; the pronotum more broadly rounded and strongly serrate in front, and the sculpture in general slightly coarser. Specimens of this species examined by the writer were from British Co- lumbia, Washington, Oregon, California, Nevada, Idaho, and South Dakota. The hosts are Pinus ponderosa, P. jeffreyi, P. radiata, P. lambertiana, Pseudo- tsuga taxifolia, Abies magnifica, and Tsuga heterophylla. G. occidentalis Hopk. MS., mentioned by Hopkins (1902) but not described, appears to be identical with G. retusus Lec. Gnathotrichus alni, new species Figs. 10, 11, and 12 Description of the adult female-——Dark reddish-brown; 4.04 mm. long, 3.4 times as long as wide. Front of the head convex, with a triangular callus above, moderately punctured below, except on the elevated, median, carinal space which ends in a small sharp epistomal process, pubescence rather scanty and incon- spicuous. Hye short-oval, moderately granulate, the inner line broadly, moderately deeply emarginate. Antenna lighter in color, the club 1.8 times as long as funicle, 1.3 times as long as wide, second and third segments sub- equal in width, the septa of sutures 1 and 2 rather weakly arcuate; with a few longer hairs on the outer margin of club and funicle. Pregula lighter in color, except on the anterior margin, strongly protruding antero-ventrally. 272 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 Pronotum 1.26 times as long as wide, widest near the posterior border, the sides subparallel, feebly converging anteriorly; moderately rounded in front; with the anterior margin extended and armed with very broad, low serrations, asperities very low and broad; summit anterior to the middle, marked by an arcuate, rather strongly elevated carina, longer than in retusus, the surface posterior to it slightly flattened on a triangular area which narrows to a point about half way to the posterior border; posterior area glabrous, with the surface finely reticulate, moderately shining, the punctures moderately fine, rather deep, moderately sparse. Elytra slightly narrower than pronotum, 2.18 times as long as wide, the sides straight and feebly converging, moderately narrowly rounded behind, more narrowly than in retusus, with the posterior margin extended; surface brightly shining, rugulose, the strial punctures fine, rather deep, in regular strial rows; interspaces nearly devoid of punctures and nearly glabrous on the disc, more numerous on the sides and declivity, similar in size to those of the striae and bearing stiff, suberect hairs of moderate length. Declivity moder- ately abrupt, less so than in retusus, convex, strongly sulcate in the sutural area, more widely than in retusus, with the sides strongly retuse and armed with a row of denticles. The male is similar but has the carinal area of the frons weakly and finely aciculate; the antennae lack the longer hairs on the outer margin; the pro- notum is more broadly rounded and strongly serrate in front, with the an- terior margin not so much extended, and in general the sculpture is slightly coarser. Type.—Cat. No. 43481, U.S. N. M. Type, allotype, and three paratypes bear the labels—‘ Hopk. U. 8. 1868a; Burke, Colr., Hoquiam, Wn.; Alnus;’’? one paratype— ‘Hopk. U. S. 2020; Burke, Colr., Satspo, Wn.; Alnus oregona; ”? one paratype—‘Hopk. U. S§. 2369a, Hopkins, colr., Hoquiam, Wn.;” one paratype—‘Hopk. U.S. 4007a; Burke, Colr., Hoquiam, Wn.; Alnus oregona: ;’’ one paratype—‘Hopk. U.S 4217b; Burke, Colr., Miller Lg., Wn.; Alnus oregona:’’ one paratype— “Webb 116e; Sequim, Wash.; Alnus; J. ite Webb, Colr.”’ Gnathotrichus aciculatus, new species Figs. 13, 14, and 15 Description of the adult female——Dark reddish-brown; 3.54 mm. long, 3.24 times as long as wide. Front of head similar to that of G. sulcatus Lec. but with the aciculations coarser, more coarsely and evidently punctured, and not so deep. Hye broad oval, moderately coarsely granulate, the inner line broadly and deeply emarginate. Antenna somewhat lighter in color; the club 1.79 times as long as funicle, 1.3 times as long as wide, the second and third segments subequal in width, "the septa moderately arcuate, with the usual development of long hairs on the outer margin of club and funicle. Pr egula normal. Pronotum 1.28 times as long as wide, the sides subparallel, very feebly arcuate, the front margin distinctly extended, rather narrowly rounded, and armed with moderately broad low serrations, more numerous and sharper than in sulcatus; anterior area with the asperities low and broad but much stronger than in sulcatus; the transverse carina marking the summit mod- erately elevated, moderately short, weakly arcuate; the surface posterior to it not modified ; - posterior area glabrous, with the surface very finely reticulate, 273 JUNE 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: REVISION OF GNATHOTRICHUS S Ad hyp é a : : te (p, Cao “GZ, UWE 4) Vu Bie Cee NS z L d - s El eg NS ees. Ly)/ ; 4 LA . aie = Ss ER “| TEE it ios =e Nie alee oe \ = SS Sia? i; ¢. : i r. 7 ' 4 7, \ QR” SE v4 12\ y | 10 Hh! Wit > ANE ' ie al , et i i | \ EEE Ficures.—10. Fore tibia of Gnathotrichus alni n. sp.—11. Antenna of female G. aini n. sp.—12 Antenna of male G. alni n. sp.—13. Fore tibia of G. aciculatus n. sp.—14 Antenna of male G. aciculatus n. sp.—15. Antenna of female G. aciculatus n. sp.—16. Fore tibia of G. sulcatus Lec.—17. Antenna of female G. sulcatus.—18. Antenna of male G. sulcatus. See note to figures 1-9. 274 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 shining, the punctures rather sparse, rather deep, moderately fine; beaded marginal line feebly developed or lacking. Elyira slightly less than twice as long as wide, the sides subparallel, moder- ately narrowly rounded behind, with the posterior margin extended; surface brightly shining, densely rugulose; the strial punctures moderately fine, in nearly regular rows; interspaces nearly devoid of punctures on the disc; on the sides and declivity with a few punctures coarser than those of the striae and bearing moderately long stiff hairs more numerous than in sulcatus. In the fifth interspace a sparse row extends forward nearly to the middle of the elytra. Declivity convex, more abrupt than in sulcatus and with the sulcus deeper, the retusions higher and armed with coarser, more numerous granules. The male is slightly smaller and the anterior margin of the pronotum more broadly rounded, not extended, the sculptures slightly coarser, and the antennae show the usual sexual differences. Type.—Cat. No. 434382, U. 8. N. M. Type and one paratype bear the labels—‘‘Hopk. U. 8. 3986b, Cloudcroft, N. M.; Pinus ponderosa:” allotype— “‘Hopk. U. 8. 3988, W. F. Fiske, Colr. ; Clouderoft, N. M.; Pseudotsuga taxifolia;’ one paratype—‘Hopk. U. S. 3981b; Clouderoft, N. M.; Pseudotsuga taxifolia:’’ two paratypes—‘Hopk. U.S. 3984f; Clouderoft, N. M.; Pinus ponderosa: one paratype—‘‘Hopk. U. S. 5708b; J. L. Webb, colr.: Sta. Catalina Mts., Ariz.:” a series of 14 paratypes bearing various lot numbers collected by J. L. Webb, Sta. Catalina Mts., Ariz., from Pinus ponderosa, Abies concolor, and Pseudotsuga tazifolia: a series of 16 paratypes collected by J. L. Webb, Chiricahua Mts., Ariz. from Abies concolor, Pinus ponderosa, P. strobiformis, and Pseudotsuga taxifolia: three paratypes—‘Hopk. U. 8. 7160 & 7164, Rincon Mts., Ariz.; Pinus ponderosa: 54 paratypes collected by J. L. Webb, Black Hills, S. D. from Pinus ponderosa under various lot numbers: one paratype—‘Hopk. U. S. 12436q; W. D. Edmonston, Colr.; Waldo Canon, Colo.; Pinus scopulorum.” Gnathotrichus sulcatus Lec. Figs. 16, 17, and 18 Description of the adult female-—Dark reddish-brown 3.48 mm. long, 3.3 times as long as wide. Front of the head convex, strongly convergently aciculate, the median area broadly, indistinctly elevated below, weakly flattened at each side with fine punctures among the aciculations; above smooth, shining, with coarser, sparse punctures and with a distinct median carina on the vertex; ornamented with a few moderate hairs, directed downward. Hye broad oval, moderately coarsely granulate, the inner line broadly, moderately deeply emarginate. Antenna lighter in color, club 1.78 times as long as funicle, 1.33 times as long as wide; the second and third segments subequal in width, the septa strongly arcuate; with a few much longer hairs on the outer margin of the club and funicle. Pregula normal. Pronotum 1.27 times as long as wide, the sides subparallel, faintly arcuate, the front margin moderately broadly rounded, distinctly extended, and armed with very broad and very low serrations;. anterior area with the sub- concentric rows of asperities very low and very broad, the summit anterior to the middle and marked with a short, straight, feebly elevated, transverse carina, the surface posterior to it not flattened or impressed except occa- JUNE 19, 1931 BLACKMAN: REVISION OF GNATHOTRICHUS 279 sionally and then very weakly; posterior area subopaque or feebly shining, the surface very finely reticulate, glabrous, with the punctures shallow, very minute, almost obsolete, and moderately sparse, the beaded marginal line feebly developed, sometimes not to be distinguished. | Elytra twice as long as wide, the sides subparallel, very narrowly rounded behind with the posterior margin distinctly extended; surface feebly shining, densely, minutely rugulose; the strial punctures minute, in fairly regular rows; interspaces nearly devoid of punctures on disc, very minute, more numerous, and bearing stiff erect hairs of moderate length on the declivity. Declivity convex, the sutural region moderately sulcate, more strongly than in materia- rius Fitch, much less strongly than in retusus Lec., the suture not elevated, lateral elevations moderate, with a row of minute granules in line with the third interspace. The male is similar in general proportions, but with the pronotum more broadly rounded in front and the anterior margin not extended. It is also readily distinguished by the absence of the long hairs on the antennal club and funicle. Examples of this species have been studied from British Columbia, Wash- ington, Oregon, California, Arizona, New Mexico, and Mexico. It probably breeds in all of the coniferous trees within its range but specimens from the following hosts have been examined by the writer: Pinus ponderosa, Picea engelmanni, P. sitchensis, Tsuga heterophylla, T. mertensiana, Pseudotsuga taxifolia, Abies concolor, A. grandis, Sequioia sempervirens, S. washingtoniana, and Thuja _ plicata. The above description was prepared from material compared with Le- Conte’s types and found to be identical. REFERENCES CITED BuackMAN, M. W. Mississippi bark beetles. Miss. Agr. Exp. Sta., Tech. Bull. No. 11, 130 pp., 18 pls. 1922. BuackMaNn, M. W. The genus Pityophthorus EHichh. in North America: A revisional study of the Pityophthori, with descriptions of two new genera and seventy-one new species. Tech. Publ. No. 25., N. Y. 8S. Coll. Forestry, 182 pp., 11 pls. 1928. BLANDFORD, W. F. H. Family Scolytidae. Biol. Central. Amer., Coleoptera IV, Pt. 6, pp. 81-298, 6 pls. 1895. Fitcu, A. Fourth report on the noxious insects of New York. N. Y. State Agr. Soc. Ann. Rept. 1857, pp. 687-814. 1858. Ercuyorr, W. Neue Borkenkafer. Berl. Ent. Zeitschr., XII, pp. 273-280. 1868. Eicuyorr, W. Ratio, descriptio, emendatio Tomicinorum. Mem. Soc. Roy. Sci., de Liege VIII, 531 pp. 5 pls. 1878. Harris, T.W. Characteristics of some previously described North American Coleopterous insects and descriptions of others which appear to be new, in the collection of Mr. Abraham Halsey. Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Hartford, No. 1, pp. 65-91, 1 pl. 1837. Hopkins, A.D. Insect enemies of the pine in the Black Hills Forest Reserve. U.S. D.A. Bur. Ent. Bull. 32: 14. 1902. Hopkins, A.D. Notes on some Mexican Scolytidae, with descriptions of some new species. Proc. Ent. Soc. Wash., 7: 71-81. 1905. Hopxins, A. D. List of generic names and their type species in the Coleopterous super- family Scolytoidea. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 48: 115-136. 1914. 276 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 12 HupparD, H.G. The Ambrosia beetles of the United States. U.S. D.A. Bur. Ent. Bull 7: 1-30. 1897. LeConts, J. L. Appendix to Zimmermann’s synopsis of Scolytidae. Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc., 2: 150-178. 1868. LeConte, J. L. The Rhynchophora of America north of Mexico. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., XV, No. 96, 455 pp. 1876. PackaRD, A.S. Insects injurious to forest and shade trees. V Rept. U.S. Ent. Comm., pp. 1-955. 1890. Scuwarz, E. A. Remarks on North America Scolytids. Ent. Amer., 2: 40-42. 1886. Scowarz, E. A. Remarks. Ent. Soc. Wash. Proc. 1: 56. 1888. Swaine, J.M. Catalogue of the described Scolytidae of America north of Mexico. N.Y. State Mus., Bull. 134: 75-194. 1909. SwaIne, J. M. Canadian bark beetles. Dom. Ent. Br. Dept. Agr., Bull. 14, Pt. II, pp. 1-143. 1918. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 1015TH MEETING The 1015th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, Saturday evening, January 17, 1931. The meeting was called to order at 8:15 P.M. by President CuRTIS. Program: E. O. Huxupsurt: The zodiacal light (illustrated).—Variations in the zodiacal light, from the observations of Jones in 1853-1855 and of more recent observers, are shown to occur during magnetic storms. This indicates that the commonly accepted planet-dust theory of the zodiacal light is unten- able and opens the way to an atmospheric theory which is developed quanti- tatively. Neutral atoms and molecules sprayed out in all directions from the earth’s atmosphere are ionized at 50,000 to 70,000-kilometer levels by the ultra-violet light of the sun. Because of the wobble of the earth’s magnetic field with the rotation of the earth, ions near the equatorial plane stay for some time at these high levels to form a ring around the earth, and ions at high latitudes fall quickly back to the earth to give aurorae. The gravita- tional magnetic drift of the ions forces the ion ring into a long oval stretching out away from the sun to 10° kilometers. The pressure of the sunlight warps. the oval into the plane of the ecliptic and makes the ions stream out like a comet’s tail. The ions are fluorescent; they absorb the sun’s ultra-violet light and emit a part of the absorbed energy as visible light. The oval ring is the zodiacal light; the comet-tail ion stream is the gegenschein. The zo- diacal cones in December are somewhat to the south of the cones in June; the evening cone is south and north of the morning cone in March and September, respectively. These theoretical inferences are in accord with observation. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. WuitTn, GisH, and CURTIS. H. T. Wenset: The Waidner-Burgess standard of light and the freezing point of platinum (illustrated).—The unit of light is at present maintained by carbon filament lamps deposited in the various national laboratories. The unit of light is therefore subject to any drift that may occur in the brightness of these standard lamps. JUNE 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 207 Various sources, more or less reproducible from specifications, have been studied from time to time, but none has been found reproducible enough for use asastandard. The carbon lamps were adopted in 1909 primarily because it was felt that their drift with time would be sufficiently small so that it would be many years before the uncertainty in the unit would reach the magnitude of the uncertainties in the unit as represented by those sources, “‘reproducible”’ from specifications, which were then available. It was recognized, however, that in time the carbon lamps would have to be superseded by some reprodu- cible standard. In 1908 Waidner and Burgess suggested the use of a black body immersed in a bath of freezing platinum as a standard of candlepower. This suggestion has been experimentally carried out. The platinum was contained in cruci- bles of fused thorium oxide and heated in a high-frequency induction furnace. The immersed black body was made of fused thorium oxide. The source as set up was found, by comparison with standard carbon filament lamps, to be reproducible within the limits detected photometrically. The brightness of the immersed black body was found to be 58.84 candles per cm.? during the freezing of the platinum. Measurements of the tempera- ture with an optical pyrometer yielded 1773.5°C. From these results the least mechanical equivalent of light may be computed as 0.001603 watt per lumen. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Mr. WHITE. 1016TH MEETING The 1016th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, Saturday evening, January 31, 1931. The meeting was called to order at 8:15 P.M. by President CurRtTIs. Program: V.L. CHRISLER and W. F. Snyper: The measurement of sound absorption (illustrated)—The common interest of the acoustical laboratory, the architect, and the manufacturer of sound-absorption materials demands a measurement of the sound-absorbing qualities of the various materials. The term, coefficient of absorption, is used as a basis for comparison and is simply the fractional part of the sound energy absorbed at each reflection. There are two general methods of making sound-absorption measurements, —the tube and the reverberation method—each of which has several modifi- cations. The tube method is now practically obsolete because of inherent characteristics which fail to bring it into agreement with the more accepted reverberation method. Although Wallace Sabine of Harvard University had made many experi- mental determinations by the reverberation method it was not until 1911 that Jaeger developed a satisfactory mathematical analysis of the problem. The usual method of making these measurements has been by the ear— listening for the sound to decay from some definite intensity level to the threshold of audibility. To calibrate a room it is necessary to change the intensity of the sound and Sabine used one, two, three, and four organ pipes to make this change. Recent developments in loud speakers and amplifiers make it possible to work through a range of intensity shifts of several thou- sand; consequently the time differences are larger and the accuracy is in- creased. When using the ear it is necessary to make about 1000 stop-watch observations to determine the coefficient of absorption of a material at six frequencies. This is a rather laborious and time-consuming procedure. 278 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 The general equation can be put into a form that will yield an absorption value by measurement of the rate of decay of the sound in the room. Picking up the decaying sound with a microphone and recording it on an oscillograph has met with some success but it is also a time-consuming process. At pres- ent a purely instrumental method is being used at the Bureau of Standards. The initial intensity of sound and an arbitrary setting of the recording instru- ment determines two sound levels whose time difference is recorded by an electric clock that is automatically started and stopped. Very rapid observa- tions can be made and therefore a statistical method is possible. This is desirable in sound measurements. (Author’s abstract). Discussed by Messrs. Hnyt, Humpureys, TuckeRMAN, and CuRTIS. R. H. Canrretp: Internal friction in metals (illustrated).—This paper is a resumé of the author’s experiments and an account of his experimental methods. The property known as internal friction or elastic hysteresis is due to an imperfection in the elastic properties of materials, such that the stress is higher when the strain is increasing than it is when the strain is decreasing. Thus the stress-strain diagram of a specimen carried through a cycle of stress, varying from zero to +f to zero to —f to zero, is a loop instead of a straight line as it would be if Hooke’s law were precisely true. It is difficult to deter- mine the form of this loop by static tests and extensometer measurements. On the other hand it is easy to measure the area of the loop, since this is the portion of energy dissipated as heat during the stress-cycle. It has ordinarily been the custom to make this measurement by measuring the rate of decay of vibrations of an elastically controlled pendulum. The disadvantage of this method is that during the course of the experiment the stress-amplitude changes by a considerable amount, so that the value of the dissipation con- stant is an average over a range of stresses and not a unique value for a single stress. This is undesirable because, as the author’s experiments show, the internal friction undergoes rather abrupt changes at certain stress-amplitudes. The author’s method, without entering into details, uses the phenomenon of forced vibrations at constant amplitudes. Under these conditions the elastic pendulum is supplied with a fixed amount of energy at each vibration, this energy being exactly equal to the work dissipated by internal friction during one cycle. This energy is actually supplied by magnetic forces, and the principal experimental problem is to determine what the work done by these forces actually is. The present method of driving involves the use of a subsidiary pendulum loosely coupled to the main one and carrying contacts which contro] the admission of current into the magnet windings through a vacuum-tube valve circuit. Adjustable oil cups act on damping vanes attached to the subsidiary pendulum so as to permit the exact adjustment of the phase relation between the two vibrations necessary for maximum ampli- tude. The forces due to the magnetic field are determined once for all by . static measurements. The experimental results cannot be described in actual detail here. They show that it is possible to duplicate results with different pieces of apparatus and different-sized specimens of the same material. They also bring to light very interesting relations between the internal friction and the mechanical history. Such treatments as cold working, fatigue, and precipitation hard- ening, reveal themselves by marked changes in the internal-friction ‘‘diagram.”’ JUNE 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 219 The internal-friction diagram, just referred to, is considered by the author to be the most advantageous way of displaying his experimental results. The ordinate of a point on this curve, called the elastic stress, is the stress-ampli- tude of the cycle. The abscissa is the friction stress, defined as the half-width of the elastic hysteresis loop, considered to be a parallelogram such that its area is equal to the loss of energy for the stress-cycle in question. The dia- gram is often approximately linear. In such cases the cotangent of the slope angle is the ratio of internal-friction stress to elastic stress, and can be termed the coefficient of internal friction in complete analogy to the common definition of the coefficient of surface friction. (Awthor’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. Curtis, BROMBACHER, and BRICKWEDDE. 1017TH MEETING The 1017th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, Saturday evening, February 14, 1931. The meeting was called to order at 8:17 P.M. by President Curtis. Program: F. L. Mouter and C. BorcKNEerR: The radiation from metal surfaces under low-speed electron bombardment (illustrated) —A small probe surface in the highly ionized region of a discharge may draw an electron cur- rent of several amperes per cm.? at any positive potential relative to the sur- rounding space. Under such conditions the metal probe surface emits a con- tinuous spectrum radiation. This has been observed in helium, potassium, and caesium discharges and studied quantitatively in the last case. The spectrum of copper radiation at 7 volts shows an approximately equal energy distribution with an absolute value at 3700 AU of 3 * 10- ergs per cm.? per sec per unit frequency range for a current density of 1.4 amperes per cm.?. The intensity distribution remains nearly the same between 5 and 20 volts but below 4 volts has a frequency limit in the ultra-violet. This threshold frequency v, depends on the voltage V by the relation hy, =e (V+ W) where W (presumably the work function of the caesiated metal) has values of 1.95 volts for copper, 2.1 volts for silver, and 1.45 volts for tungsten. The intensity-voltage curves increase rapidly up to 7 volts and very slowly beyond. The radiation can be considered as analogous to the continuous X-ray spec- trum. The general equation for X-ray intensity as a function of voltage pre- dicts an intensity for Cu at 7 volts and 3700 AU of 1.85 X 10-" ergs in satis- factory agreement with the observed value of 3 X 10-4. A theoretical relation between the photoelectric effect and the converse process also leads to an agreement in order of magnitude with the observed intensities. (Au- thor’s abstract.) Discussed by BRICKWEDDE. F. E. Wriacut: Optical methods for reducing the effects of photographic-plate grain (illustrated) —The image on a photographic plate consists of clumps and aggregates of minute particles of silver scattered through the gelatine film. At points where the silver particles are closely packed, the plate is dark. In making measurements on photographic images, the accuracy of the setting depends on a number of factors, of which one of the most disturbing is the presence of a large grain or clump of silver particles. A more exact mea- surement could be made if this effect of prominent grains were suppressed, even if only partially. 280 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 In the case of spectral lines which are straight and parallel different optical methods can be used for suppressing or fusing the prominent grains: (1) The image itself can be made to vibrate rapidly parallel with the spectral lines (method of Linnik). (2) Each object point can be drawn out into an image line parallel with the spectral lines by means of a cylindrical lens (method of Anderson). (3) Each object point can be elongated into a short image line by inserting a tilted glass plate between the objective of the observing micro- scope and the photographic plate. (4) Each object point can be elongated into a short line in the image by use of a single or multiple narrow slit-dia- phragm above the objective. (5) Two images of each spectral line are pro- duced and the one is superimposed on the second, but slightly shifted along the spectral line (Wollaston prism method). (6) The plate is viewed under dark-ground illumination. Each silver grain or clump becomes a luminous image point on which it is easy to make an accurate setting. The fusing of grains that mark the position of the image of a star can be effected by reducing the resolving power of the imaging microscope objective either by the use of an iris diaphragm in the rear focal plane of the objective or by first forming a minified image of the plate and then observing this image under suitable magnification. In each case the resolving power of the optical system is so much reduced that silver particles separated by a short distance no longer appear as separate points in the image. Another method of fusion is to cause the image to vibrate in rapid circulatory motion; the diameter of the small vibration circle should be about equal to the average distance be- tween the silver particles in a star’s image. ‘This movement is most readily accomplished by use of a weak lens mounted in an iron ring suspended by three elastic wires in front of the objective. The iron ring is set in motion by two electromagnets set 90° apart and actuated by alternating currents, the phase of the two currents differing by 90°. The 60-cycle alternating current causes the ring to oscillate so rapidly that the image appears stationary and fused. These methods for decreasing graininess in special parts of a photographic plate enhance the accuracy of measurement several fold and at the same time decrease eye-strain to an appreciable extent. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Mr. HuMpuHREys. Two short informal communications were given by Messrs. TucKERMAN and DryYpDEN, and a report made by HUMPHREYS. 1018TH MEETING The 1018th meeting was held in the Cosmos Club Auditorium, Saturda evening, February 28, 1931. The meeting was called to order at 8:20 P.M. by President Curtis. Program: ¥. T. Davies: Aurora australis observed on the Byrd Antarctic Expedition (illustrated)—Observations of both aurora borealis and australis indicate an auroral zone in either hemisphere and a belt within each of the zones in which auroral displays are most frequent. In the north, this maxi- mum-frequency belt is situated at about 23° from the point in which the axis of the earth’s uniform magnetic field meets the surface. This point is not the magnetic pole, however. Analysis of the auroral records of antarctic expeditions shows that a similar distribution of auroral frequency occurs in the southern hemisphere centered approximately on the opposite projection of the earth’s magnetic axis. JUNE 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 281 In the northern hemisphere, observations have been made of aurora for a very long time and in many localities both north and south of the maximum- frequency belt. In the south, on the contrary, observations have been taken largely south of the maximum-frequency belt and these over a total period of some thirty years. Although the aurora australis has been seen occasionally in the countries of the southern hemisphere, these countries are separated from the antarctic by wide stretches of ocean, little traversed by ships, so that only exceptionally widely spread auroras are observed north of the antarctic maxi- mum-frequency belt. Thus in the study of the aurora borealis, the observa- tions of polar expeditions are supplemented by considerable observational data in temperate latitudes, while our knowledge of the aurora australis is derived chiefly from the records of the few expeditions that have wintered on the antarctic continent. The following expeditions made regular systematic auroral observations: The Borchgrevink Expedition, 1899, Cape Adare; the Scott Expeditions, 1902-03 and 1911-12, McMurdo Sound and Cape Adare; the German Ex- pedition under Drygalski, 1902, Kaiser-Wilhelm Land; Shackleton Expedi- tion, 1908, McMurdo Sound; the Mawson Expedition, 1912-13, Addie Land and Macquarie Island; and the Byrd Expedition, 1929, Bay of Whales. All of these bases with the exception of Macquarie Island were within the belt of maximum frequency. The aurora australis exhibits similar phenomena to the aurora borealis so that the terminology is the same for both. The fact that McMurdo Sound, the base for three of the above expeditions, is a considerable distance from the maximum belt, has given the impression that the aurora australis is much less brilliant than the aurora borealis. Mawson’s bases, the German base, and our own were also well within this zone but the Cape Adare observations show that the aurora australis as seen from that position is much brighter, more colored, and more active than as seen from any of the other positions. At Little America the aurora australis was first seen on the night of March 16-17, 1929. A regular 24-hour watch was instituted on April 3 and kept up for the remainder of the year. The observations taken at half-hourly inter- vals between April 3 and September 26 at which date an aurora was last seen, form the basis of analysis. A single observation included mention of time (165° meridian east of Greenwich); intensity of display on a scale 0-4, ‘‘0” meaning not seen and “‘4”’ brilliant; form, that is, glow, arch, curtain, rays and streamers, or corona; direction; altitude; and color. The amount of cloud and the intensity of moonlight were also noted. It was found that of all clear or only partly cloudy nights an aurora was seen on over 90 per cent of the time. A better estimate of occurrence, how- ever, is the proportion of half-hourly observations when an aurora was seen (1412 times) to the number when conditions of cloud and light were such as would allow it to beseen. This proportion was 48 percent. The comparable figures were: For the Scott Expedition, 1911, 36 per cent; for the Mawson Expedition, 1912-13, 52 per cent; and the second group of the Scott Expedition at Cape Adare, 1911, 64 per cent. Even though 1929 was a year near the maximum of the sunspot cycle the proportion is considerably below the Cape Adare proportion for a year near sunspot minimum. A marked feature of the observations of Little America was the progressive change throughout the period of observation of the following phenomena: (a) The average intensity of a display was greatest in April, least in Septem- ber, and decreased during the period between; (b) the ratio of the number of 282 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 12 displays seen to the number that could possibly have been seen (cloud and light permitting) was greatest in April and decreased throughout the period to September; (c) the proportion of displays at a high altitude was least in April and greatest in September, the proportion increasing slightly through the period; (d) although the majority of displays were seen in the eastern sky, the proportion of those seen in the west increased during the period from April to September; (e) the proportion of displays exhibiting ray-structure, although less than half the total from April to August, increased in September to more than half. Of the 1412 half-hourly observations, 24 were classed as brilliant, 60 as bright, 321 as moderate, and 1007 as weak or faint. Comparison of auroral character-numbers with the international magnetic character-numbers showed marked evidence for the occurrence of auroral maxima on the same day or one day after maxima in the magnetic character-curve. This has been suggested in a paper by E. O. Hulburt (Phys. Rev., July 15, 1929). A period of 27 to 28 days is evidenced, corresponding to the period of rota- tion of the sun and also a short period of about four days. Much has still to be done before complete analysis of the auroral data can be submitted. All members of the Expedition cooperated in the auroral observations. The general interest shown by observers made the direction of the work a very pleasant task. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. HutBurtT, Heck, Giso, and HUMPHREYS. E. E. Haausr, Jr.: The second principle of uncertainty. Discussed by Messrs. Gisson, GisH, and DRYDEN. G. R. Wait, Recording Secretary. Obituary Raout GAUTIER, a corresponding member of the AcapEMy, died in Geneva, Switzerland, on April 19, 1931. Previous to his retirement in 1927, he filled the chairs of professor of astronomy and of meteorology at the University of Geneva and was director of the Astronomical Observatory of Geneva. For many years he was a member of the Permanant Commission of the old Inter- national Geodetic Association and was largely instrumental in forming, during the World War, the “Association géodésique réduite entre états neutres.”’ Through his efforts, the results obtained at variation-of-latitude stations in California, Japan, and Italy were computed and made availabie for the use of astronomers. In addition to his other duties he was for many years president of the Swiss Geodetic Commission. His keen intellect, scientific attainments, and personal charm made him a powerful influence for several decades among geodesists of the world, and they, as well as the astronomers, mourn his death. _ OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND ; AFFILIATED SOCIETIES -aale on ag Paut £. Hows, Bureau of Anion industry. rding Secretary: CuarLes THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. rer? : HENRY G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic SUT Nae Tom. F. Ww. Barra a Poona . vetoes Zoology. —Resistance of rats to suy infections wi muris, and an apparently similar. resistance of hor nematodes. BENJAMIN ScHWARTz, Joserx E. ALIcaTA, Zoology - Fes. new r species of Pinnotherid crab p from Costa America, M. W. BLACKMAN. oe sse sce ef see The Philosophical Society fay a a : = 2 big ae Boe os es ot : ? OBITUARY: RAOUL Gautier. Ape hee ‘ . ; 506 73 Fou vk W227 Bike a OL. 2 JuLy 19, 1931 No, 13 JOURNAL. OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS C. WrtHEr Cooke CHARLES DRECHSLER Hvuau L. DrypeNn U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. Peters Haroup Morrison PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GotpMaAaN G. W. Stross BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Agnes CHASE J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Roger C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Roya anp GUILFORD AVEs. BatTIMoRE, MARYLAND Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of Seg dt provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. This i OURNAL, the official organ of fhe (1) short original papers, written or communic: ! _ proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affi of events connected with the scientific life of Washingto monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, exce it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching th ‘twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request f of the J OURNAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, Me anuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of B city typewritten and in suitable form for printing out editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious ami should appear only as footnotes and should include year ¢ the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested 12 serially and submitted on a separate manuscript pages Soe rte Illustrations i in limited amount will be. accepted, drawings that may | er prc by zine etchings being preferable. — eae __ Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted i in fi will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. | _Author’s Reprints—Fifty reprints without covers ell be forniched gra. | bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive _ date of issue, and additional reprints, will be ie at cost when | dered, ance hank the following schedule of Vaal a Copies ‘App. 8 pp. a 2 2p. ee 100 Be ON ae ae - "80 SE, 40 150 .90 a A 00 ni sR OSE MER Ws 200 5 es ba BOBO one" 260 sa dae { 8 250 11.65 2.00 | pre i 2.60 Envelopes for mailing reprints sony the author’s name and danse shied ir corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional 100, As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies ¢ or should invariably be attached to the first page of his Beatie ey ae The rate of Subscription per volume is.. Re gia vas CO eI a wk scene ode ae Semi-monthly numbers 10 Phd ess weiss ceca slak's cb one Olek MRO mie eee Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, te and By Bae Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy. of Silanes and addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, bia eo D. Wie Exchanges.—The JOURNAL does not exchange with other publications. — ‘A Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge eda that Laut is made within thirty days after date of the following issue. _— bs wiluie I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, ‘1911, will be sent for $3.00. __ Special rates. ro are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy sy | ‘ea JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Won. 21 JuLy 19, 1931 No. 13 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY .—Why the Mayan cities of the Petén Dis- trict, Guatemala, were abandoned.! C. WytHr Cooks, U. 8. Geological Survey. Two thousand years ago what is now the Petén District of Guatemala was the seat of a flourishing Mayan empire. Its massive temples and palaces still mark the sites of large cities which endured for many gen- erations but were finally abandoned. ‘Today, that once-populous region is, for the most part, totally uninhabited. The great cornfields which fed its people have reverted to the jungle, and the ruins of its public buildings lie hidden in a dense forest. The few permanent habitations are on the banks of perennial lakes and rivers along the main route of travel across the District. The remainder of the region is accessible only by means of narrow trails kept open by chicleros or cut by exploring archeologists. My acquaintance with the Petén District was gained in March and April, 1931, when I was sent by the Carnegie Institution of Washington to study the geology of the region accessible from the camp of the Institution’s Department of Historical Research at Uaxactun. I entered Guatemala at Yaloche, a customs house on the frontier, a day’s ride northwest of Cayo, British Honduras, travelled 3 days westward to Uaxactun, spent 10 days there, and proceeded southward past Tikal to Remate, a settlement at the eastern end of Lake Petén. From this lake I followed a well-travelled road northeastward past Lake Macanxé to Yaxha, a settlement between two lakes, thence to Tikan Sakan and down the valley of Rio San Felipe to Fireburn on the frontier of British Honduras. 1 Received June 5, 1931. Published by permission of the Acting Director of the U.S. Geological Survey. 283 284 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 13 Travel in the Petén is slow and tedious. The length of a day’s journey varies according to the season and is determined in large part by the distance between water holes, for there are few perennial streams and many of the water holes become dry after the end of the rainy season. Uaxacttin lies on or near the divide that separates the drainage systems of the Gulf of Honduras from those of the Gulf of Mexico. Streams east of Uaxacttin flow into Rio Hondo or into Belize River, which empty into the Gulf of Honduras, but water falling west of Uaxactun finds its way into tributaries of the Usumacinta, which flows into Campeche Bay. Because of the thick cover of forest which cuts off the view in all directions, it is difficult to visualize the topography of the Petén. The clearings around the camp at Uaxacttin, which are on the lowlands, show only a shallow depression containing a plant-covered water hole (aguada), a grassy flat, and hillocks about twenty feet high, beyond which the view is stopped by the edge of the forest. Even from the top of the highest temple, nothing can be seen but the enclosing jungle. But from the window of a ruined Mayan building which is perched on a mound at the edge of the upland 150 feet above the aguada, one can look eastward over the tree tops and the clearings, across a wide forested plain to low, broken ridges on the horizon. There are two very different kinds of topography in this part of the Petén—uplands and lowlands, or bajos. The uplands are hills and ridges of limestone which rise to a maximum height of several hundred feet above the bajos. They are barely covered by a thin soil of black clay, and are dotted here and there with sinks. In the neighborhood of Uaxactun, the highest hills stand 650 or 700 feet above sea level, and the bajos about 500 or 550 feet. The bajos are flat plains with almost no perceptible relief. ‘They are underlain by tough black carbonaceous clay. The uplands are clothed with a fairly open forest contaiming many tall, large trees, such as mahogany, chicle, and ceiba but com- paratively little underbrush. The bajos are covered with a tangled mass of low gnarled and twisted trees, such as logwood. Many of the trees in the bajos are small-leaved and thorny, and are festooned with large vines. During the rainy season the bajos are flooded; at the beginning of the dry season they are floored with deep tough mud which, later in the year, drys hard and cracks. At all seasons they are very unpleasant to travel through. 285 MAYAN CITIES COOKE: muy 19; 1931 "BIC IPLPINYS “MM ‘qd VY} LO} GossvJ] LOIPIG] puw Mousy-suvA “y Aq epeul dvul & UO posvg ‘SUINI UBAB] 9YVOIPUL So[sUBII} PI[OG “UOJSUTYSVAA JO UOTJNATYSUT oTsoUIvH 94 Jo UISTJOUSL]] [BIIJSe1IoT, JO yuou4Iedeqg 944 Aq A[[voTuUIOUOI4Se PouTUIJOJOp Useq Sey uOTzISOd o1ydeis -009 osOYM Sade] OVOTpUI SIeIG ‘sayv] puv sofeq SuIMOYsS B[vUIEZeNy Jo 4aed Jo dew yoyoyG “] ons y Sadpawo}ly 91 dVW X3ZdNI Saji, oF TVNVDS, . 3 Zz fe SVYNGNOH I “an 018 Q axueseW 7.731 WWa yo { Sh + OE aia 4. o —_ 5 IM3aTNC_>, oe 3 > HSILI¥8 \\ ey \USV ¥NGNOH N 286 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 13 The bajos evidently once were lakes. They are still lakes during the rainy season, but they have been so nearly filled with silt that a slight depression of water level due to run-off or evaporation reduces them to ponds or drains them completely. The source of the clay that fills them is the soil of the uplands—black, carbonaceous clay formed by the decomposition and solution of limestone and mixed with organic matter. The bajos are thickly scattered over the Petén (see figure 1), and some of them are very large. If the bajos were restored to their former condition, the Petén would be a region of many beautiful lakes. Travel in it would be easy, for one could go from place to place by boat, with only short journeys overland, from one lake to another, across country that offers little impediment to travel at any season. It is quite likely that many of the bajos are connected by waterways which carry off the surplus water during the rainy season, although others occupy enclosed basins from which the water drains away through underground channels. Some idea of what the country once was like can be gained from views of the beautiful lakes that still remain. Of these Lake Petén, about 18 miles long, is the largest and best known. Flores, the principal town of the district, lies on an island in Lake Petén and there are several smaller settlements on its banks. Many of the smaller lakes, such as the Laguna de Yaloche, are already silted up to such an extent that small fluctuations in water level cause great changes in area. How long ago these ancient lakes became filled with silt and converted into bajos can not be determined precisely. Doubtless the process was continuous and gradual although there may have been times when silting was more rapid than at others. Silting is still going on but probably very slowly because the uplands from which the silt is derived are thickly forested. It is quite possible that the transition from lake to bajo may have occurred during the time of the Mayan Empire, when much of the uplands must have been under cultivation. The Mayas were an agricultural people and needed much cleared land to raise the great quantities of corn required to feed their large popula- tion. The rate of erosion of the soil must have been enormously accel- erated when the forest was cut and the cultivated soil was exposed to the full force of the torrential rains. One may imagine the Petén when first occupied by the Mayas to have had a thick fertile black soil. During the many centuries of the Mayan occupation more and more of the soil was washed away until the bare limestone was exposed. PoE LO 1931 COOKE: MAYAN CITIES 287 Then the land was abandoned and reverted to the jungle, soil erosion was greatly retarded, and today, after the lapse of several centuries, the ground is covered by a thin but fairly even coating of black clay through which the rock still shows in many places. Soil is probably being formed now more rapidly than it is being washed away. One can scarcely imagine the Petén, in its present condition, as the home of a large permanent population. One difficulty is the lack of an adequate water supply. There are few permanent water holes in the Petén and some of the old Mayan town sites are without any obvi- ous present source of water. The Mayas may have depended upon stores of rain water to tide them over the dry season, just as Belize today gets its entire water supply from the clouds, but the rainfall is much more seasonal in the interior than at Belize. Another difficulty is the lack of transportation facilities. If the geography during the time of the Mayan occupation had been like the present, all the provi- sions and merchandise would have had to-be carried to or from the cities on the backs of men (for the Mayas had no beasts of burden), and the bajos would have offered almost impassable barriers to trans- portation during part of the year. If, however, the bajos were per- manent lakes during the time of the Mayan occupation, there was plenty of water throughout the whole year and commerce was speeded at all seasons by water transportation. Another way in which the transition from lakes to bajos may have influenced the occupation of the Petén is its effect upon the health and comfort of the people by the increase of mosquitoes. As long as the water remained deep near shore, mosquitoes probably were not very numerous, for their larvae would have fallen prey to fishes, but when the deep water was converted into swamps and marshes, swarms of mosquitoes must have plagued the people. If, about this time, malaria was introduced into the country, sickness and death may have taken their toll of the population. Some of the factors, then, that may have caused the decline of the Mayan Empire and the depopulation of the Petén are (1) erosion of _ the soil and the consequent scarcity of arable land, (2) silting of the lakes and the destruction of water transportation, (8) diminution of the water supply during the dry season, (4) increase in the number of mosquitoes, and (5) introduction or increase of malaria. 288 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 13 BOTANY .—Additional Costa Rican mosses, II... Epwin B. BARTRAM, Bushkill, Pennsylvania. Since the last paper on this subject was published the continued interest of Professor Manuel Valerio in the Costa Rican mosses has resulted in an accumulation of about 155 numbers, among which are some items of unusual scientific value. The appended list includes only the species not recorded in the two previous publications (1, 2), to which has been added the description of a unique moss collected by Mr. Standley, which not only adds a new genus to the moss flora of North America but at the same time again emphasizes the close connection between the mosses of Costa Rica and those of the Cordilleran regions to the southward. A complete series of specimens, including the types of the species described as new, has been deposited in the National Herbarium at Washington, D. C., and in the herbarium of the writer. DICRANACEAE DICRANELLA SUBINCLINATA Lor. Chitaria, Province of Cartago, alt. 700 m., Dec. 20, 1928, M. Valerio no. 239. Previously known from Florida, the Antilles, Mexico and Panama. SYMBLEPHARIS HELICOPHYLLA Mont. Syn.—Symblepharis Oerstediana C.M. Voledn Irazt, alt. 3300 m., April 7, 1929, M. Valerio no. 297. This is a decidedly more robust form than the plants I am familiar with in the southwestern United States and the leaf cells of the upper half of the blade are frequently in two layers. These characters are, however, by no means constant and it seems doubtful if the Costa Rican collections can be segregated from the type. CampyLopus Donne ui (Aust.) Lesq. & James. La Hondura, Province of San José, alt. 1400 m., Jan. 15, 1929, M. Valerio no. 261. There is no record of this species outside of Florida, as far as I am aware, so that its occurfence in Costa Rica is of uncommon interest. A single fruit- ing plant in the above collection is worthy of a brief description, as the sporo- phyte has, until now, been unknown. Sporophyte-bearing plant 2.5 cm. high; stem leaves erect-appressed, comose at summit; seta solitary, 5-6 mm. long, sinuose, smooth; capsule immature) erect, Symmetrical, 1 mm. long, slightly furrowed when dry; lid erect or slightly oblique, about 0.65 mm. high; peristome and calyptra unknown. 1 Received April 25, 1931. JULY 19, 1931 BARTRAM: COSTA RICAN MOSSES 289 POTTIACEAE MERCEYA AGOYANENSIS (Mitt.) Broth. Voledn Barba, alt. 2500 m., Dec. 16, 1930, M. Valerio no. 343. So far as I know, this is the first species of Merceya to be recorded from trop- ical North America. The plants are somewhat larger than those of the type collection of M. agoyanensis, of Ecuador, which I have seen through the kindness of Mr. R. 8. Williams, but the shape and structure of the leaves are identical in every particular. RHAMPHIDIUM MACROSTEGIUM (Sull.) Mitt. Chitaria, Province of Cartago, alt. 700 m., Dec. 20, 1928, M. Valerio no. 229a. Previously known from the Antilles and South America but new to Costa Rica. Leptodontium Orcutti Bartr., sp. nov. Figures 8-12 Dioicous? male flowers not seen. Stems up to 1.5 em. long, densely caes- pitose, yellowish-green above, pale-brown below, more or less pale-tomentose except at the tips, flexuose, simple or branched; leaves crowded toward the tips, more distant below, appressed with incurved slightly crisped points when dry, spreading to squarrose-recurved when moist, oblong-ligulate, sheathing at the base, carinate-concave above, abruptly acute, about 2 mm. long by 0.5 mm. wide; margin slightly reflexed in the middle, crenulate with projecting papillae, flat and spinulose-serrate above; costa pale-yellow, about 75u wide, vanishing just below the apex, convex and minutely papillose on the back above; basal leaf cells rectangular, smooth with yellowish pellucid walls, shorter and subquadrate at the margins, quickly becoming shorter and papillose upward, upper cells rounded-hexagonal, 7-10u in diameter, rather obscure, densely papillose with numerous low papillae, not or hardly incrassate except toward the margins where 4-6 rows are rather strongly incrassate with irregularly thickened pellucid walls; perichaetial leaves similar to the stem leaves, about 3 mm. long, the inner erect and strongly sheathing; seta about 12 mm. long, pale yellow; capsule erect or slightly inclined, cylin- drical, 1.5—2 mm. long, stramineous, exothecal cells rectangular, thin-walled, delicate and pale except 5-7 rows around the mouth which are subhexagonal or transversely rectangular with dark, reddish-brown incrassate walls; peri- stome about 0.2 mm. long, of 16 pale, obliquely papillose-striate teeth, divided to the base into 2 linear, somewhat confluent forks; lid erect, conic-rostrate, 0.5 mm. long; calyptra not seen; spores greenish-brown, granulose, 14-18u in diameter. Type: Mineral del Chico, State of Hidalgo, Mexico, May 16, 1925, C. R. Orcutt no. 6731. Other collections: Mexico: Pont de la Venta, Valle de Mexico, Bro. Arséne no. 1391. North Carolina; Chestnut Bald, Holz. Muse. Ac. Bor.-Amer. no. 264. Costa Rica; Volean Irazt, alt. 3300 m., M. Valerio no. 293. This species approaches L. flexifolium, of Europe, very closely but seems to be consistently distinct in several important particulars. The leaves are » 290 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 13 more broadly bordered with thick-walled cells often 5-6 rows wide, the cap- sule is paler in color, the exothecal cells are thin-walled, and the peristome teeth are obliquely papillose-striate. The plants collected by Dr. Grout in North Carolina, and issued by Holzinger as no. 264 of his exsiccati, under the name Didymodon flexifolius, while sterile, are indistinguishable from the Mexican and Costa Rican collections, and I am satisfied that they should be referred here rather than to the European species, which does not seem to occur in North America. Sterile plants of this species were received from my good friend M. Thériot as an undescribed species of Leptodontiwm, from Bro. Arséne’s Mexican collections, but as Orcutt’s specimen was in good fruiting condition M. Thériot generously suggested that his own name be suppressed. _Leptodontium filescens (Hampe) Mitt. var. denticulatum Bartr., var. nov. Figures 1-7 More robust than the species, with longer, more sharply denticulate leaves, more rounded upper leaf cells, and setae up to 18 mm. long. Type: Southern slope of the Volcdn de Turrialba, near the Finca del Voledn de Turrialba, Costa Rica, alt. 2000-2400 m., Feb. 22, 1924, Paul C. Standley no. 35160a. c. fr. Other collections: near the type locality, Standley no. 34953; near Finca la Cima, above Los Lotes, north of El Copey, Standley no. 42777; Volcan Pods, alt. 2500 m., M. Valerio nos. 284 & 285a. These Costa Rican specimens do not seem to differ structurally from the species but they are uniformly coarser. The stem leaves are up to 2.5 mm. long, sharply denticulate toward the apex, and the setae are about twice as long as in the type collection of the species from Colombia. Numerous axil- lary claviform or cylindrical, septate gemmae occur in all of the collections representing both the type and the variety. TORTULA MINIFOLIA (Sull.) Mitt. Chitaria, Province of Cartago, alt. 700 m., Dec. 20,1928, M. Valerio no. 221. Previously known from Cuba, Bolivia and Peru but new to Costa Rica. BRYACEAE STABLERIA OSCULATIANA (DeNot.) Broth. Voledn Irazt, alt. 3300 m., April 7, 1929, M. Valerio nos. 302 & 307. I have referred these collections to the above species rather than to S. tenella (Mitt.) Broth. as the setae are all decidedly longer than the leaves. Specimens of the latter species in the writer’s herbarium and in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden show considerable variation in this respect and it may, eventually, be necessary to reduce them to one species, in which event, S. osculatiana, being the older name, would be retained. MIELICHHOFERIA PRATICOLA Card. Volean Irazt, alt. 3300 m., April 7, 1929, M. Valerio no. 303. Previously known only from Mexico. JULY 19, 1931 BARTRAM: COSTA RICAN MOSSES A oe) E poe 9° as Boas b SS pos et IRR DOR weer OR 21 Figures 1-7. Leptodontium filescens (Hampe) Mitt. var. denticulatum Bartr., var. nov. 1.—Fertile plant X 1. 2.—Sterilestem X1. 3.—Stemleaf X9. 4.—Upper leaf margin < 240. 5.—Upper leaf cells X 240. 6 and 7.—Gemmae X 40. Figures 8-12. Leptodontium Orcutti Bartr., sp. nov. 8.—Fertile plant X 1. 9.— Stem leaf X 17. 10.—Part of peristome X 240. 11.—Lower leaf cells X 240. 12.— Upper leaf cells and margin X 240. ; Figures 13-19. Brachymenium filescens Bartr., sp. nov. novation X 5. 15.—Leaf of innovation X 40. 16.—Upper leaf cells x 240. 17.—Basal angle of leaf X 240. 18.=Capsule X 12. 19.—Part of peristome xX 80. Figures 20-25. Acanthocladium costaricense Dix and Bartr., sp.nov. 20.—Plant X 1. 21.—Stem leaf X 40. 22.—Basal angle of stem leaf X 240. 23.—Branchleaf X40 24.— Apex of branch leaf X 240. 25.—Basal angle of branch leaf * 240. 13.—Plants X 1. 14.—In- 291 292 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 13 Brachymenium filescens Bartr., sp. nov. Figures 13-19 Dioicous? male flowers not seen. Plants slender, loosely caespitose, sordid yellowish-green, slightly glossy. Stems short, radiculose below, with slender flexuose innovations up to 1 cm. long; leaves of the innovations appressed, ovate-oblong, acute, concave, 0.6—-0.7 mm. long by 0.3 mm. or less wide; upper leaf cells linear-rhomboidal, thin walled, 60-75 u long by 12-15u wide, nar- rower toward the margins but not forming a distinct border, shorter toward the base, several rows just above the insertion subquadrate; margin erect, entire below, usually minutely denticulate toward the apex; costa lutescent, percurrent or minutely excurrent; perichaetial leaves similar but slightly longer; seta red, slender, flexuose, about 14 mm. long; capsule erect or slightly inclined, 1.5-1.8 mm. long, claviform, reddish, gradually contracted to a slightly suleate neck; peristome double, the inner a yellowish papillose tube without segments, about one third the height of the linear, papillose, well spaced teeth, annulus present; lid obtusely conic, about 0.3 mm. -high; calyp- tra unknown; spores smooth, 10—12u in diameter. Type: Cebadilla, Province of Alajuela, Costa ey alt. 700 m., Nov. 14, 1928, M. Valerio no. 209. This species is probably nearest B. murale Schp. and B. vinulosum Card. from Mexico, in the Section Dzcranobryum, but differs from both in the long flexuose innovations with closely appressed leaves. The percurrent or excur- rent costa is also a distinctive character as compared with B. murale while the longer areolation and longer marginal cells preclude any confusion with the other species. Bryum CruGcErRI Hampe Chitaria, Province of Cartago, alt. 700 m., Dec. 20, 1928, M. Valerio no. 222. EUSTICHIACEAE EusTICcHIA SPRUCEANA (C.M.) Par. Piedra Blanca, Province of San José, alt. 2100 m., April 28, 1929, M. Valerio no. 310. This unique moss has very much the appearance of a Fissidens to the oaiked eye. Although it has been found in Ecuador and Bolivia, this seems to be the first record for North America. A critical comparison with EF. miradorica (C. M.) Par. would be very desirable but Dr. Reimers has informed me that, unfortunately, no specimen of the Mexican plant can be located in the her- barium of the Botanical Museum in Berlin-Dahlem. BARTRAMIACEAE BARTRAMIA COSTARICENSIS C.M. Voledn Irazit, alt. 3300 m., April 7, 1929, M. Valerio nos. 305-308. Both collections are sterile but the vegetative characters correspond very well with Miiller’s description. JULY 19, 1931 BARTRAM: COSTA RICAN MOSSES 293 PHILONOTIS CRASSINERVIA Broth. & Par. Santa Cruz, Province of Guanacaste, alt. 50 m., Dec. 24, 1928, M. Valerio no. 243; La Hstrella, Province of Cartago, alt. 1700 m., in water, Jan. 26, 1929, Valerio no. 260. Previously known only from Colombia. HOOKERIACEAE DALTONIA TENUIFOLIA Mitt. San José, Province of San José, alt. 1135 m., Nov. 30, 1928, M. Valerio no. 205a. An interesting northward range extension of a rare South American species. BRACHYTHECIACEAE BRACHYTHECIUM LAXIRETICULATUM Card. Voledn Irazu, alt. 3300 m., April 7, 1929, M. Valerio nos. 300 & 301. These collections match very closely the Mexican species to which they have been provisionally referred. FABRONIACEAE FABRONIA FLAVINERVIS C.M. Santa Ana, alt. 900 m., June 15, 1929, M. Valerio nos. 325, 326, 327, 328, PLAGIOTHECIACEAE STEREOPHYLLUM CULTELLIFORME Sull. Chitaria, Province of Cartago, alt. 700 m., Dec. 20, 1928, M. Valerio no. 238 New to Costa Rica. | In this connection an opportunity is offered to correct a signal error which Mrs. Britton has kindly called to my attention. The Honduras plants de- scribed under the name of Rhynchostegium patulum Bartr. (3) undoubtedly belong in Stereophyllum and are exceedingly close to and probably identical with S. cultelliforme. 'The inflorescence of this species is clearly autoicous and not dioicous as given by Brotherus in both editions of the Natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien. & STEREOPHYLLUM LEUCOSTEGIUM (Brid.) Mitt. Santa Cruz, Province of Guanacaste, alt. 50 m., Dec. 24, 1928, M. Valerio no. 242. SEMATOPHYLLACEAE APTCHELLA AMERICANA (Card.) Broth. Volean Barba, alt. 2700 m., Dec. 16, 1930, M. Valerio no. 350. Cardot originally described this species from Mexico. It was subsequently collected by Mrs. Britton in Jamaica and Prof. Valerio’s collection now extends its known range to Costa Rica. The characteristic propagulae at the tips of the branches are very abundant in the Costa Rican plants but the sporophyte is still unknown. 294 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 13 Acanthocladium costaricense Dix. & Bartr., sp. nov. Figures 20-25 Plants in extensive, pale yellowish-brown glossy mats. Stems elongate, wiry, prostrate, proliferously branched; branches ascending, bipinnate, the ultimate branches somewhat flattened, curved and crisped when dry; leaves dimorphous, stem leaves erect-appressed with slightly curved or subfaleate points, ovate, short-acuminate, entire or minutely denticulate, about 1 mm. long by 0.5 mm. wide; margin more or less narrowly reflexed, branch leaves rather complanate, much smaller than the stem leaves, oblong-lanceolate, bluntly acute, denticulate above the middle, 0.4-0.5 mm. long by about 0.13 mm. wide; leaf cells smooth, echlorophyllose, the upper linear, 35—40u long by 38—4u wide, a few rows at the extreme base shorter, slightly incrassate and porose, alar cells few, oblong, golden-brown or hyaline, supra-alar cells smaller, subquadrate to oblong, hyaline or colored, nerve very short and double or — wanting. Type: On tree, vicinity of Santa Maria de Dota, Province of San José, Costa Rica, alt. 1500-1800 m., Dec. 26, 1925—-Jan. 3, 1926, Paul C. Standley & Juvenal Valerio no. 43395. Although the fruit of this moss is unknown the general habit and vegetative characters correspond very closely to those of the genus Acanthocladium. If this inference is correct the extension of such a purely austral genus into the range of the North American moss flora is especially noteworthy. 330 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 14 Related to C. lerocarpum Steetz and C. anceps Greenm., and distinguished by its combination of strigose branches and crowded but not glomerate heads. Rudbeckia californica var. glauca Blake, var. nov. Folia glauca margine tuberculato-hispidula ceterum glabra; phyllaria margine hispidula ceterum glabra vel subglabra. OREGON: Just west of Cornutt, Douglas Co., 26 July 1918, W. EH. Law- rence 2102; Rogue River Valley, 12 July 1887, T. Howell; near Wimmer, Jack- son Co., 22 July 1892, H. W. Hammond 207; upland marshes near Waldo, 5 June 1884, 7. Howell. CALIFORNIA: One clump along brook, about 20 miles NE. of Crescent City, Del Norte Co., on road to Grants Pass, 30 Aug. 1927, S. F. Blake 10377 (type no. 1,488,180, U. S. Nat. Herb.); eight miles south of Waldo (Oregon), Del Norte Co., 14 June 1904, C. V. Piper 6103; Mt. Eddy, Siskiyou Co., 30 Aug. 1912, A. Hastwood 2047; same locality, 1 Sept. 1913, L. H. Smith 557; same locality, alt. 1675 m., 8 Sept. 1903, H. B. Copeland (distr. C. F. Baker 3862); railroad to Castle Lake, Siskiyou Co., 4 July 1913, L. E. Smith. Typical Rudbeckia californica A. Gray, with the leaves green and rather evenly pubescent on both surfaces, especially beneath, with soft or rough hairs, and with dorsally pubescent phyllaries, is confined, so far as indicated by the material in the U. 8. National Herbarium, to the Sierra Nevada of California from Tulare to Eldorado Counties. The form occurring on Mt. Eddy and in the Siskiyous appears very distinct in its usually glaucous and thicker leaves which are hispidulous on margin but glabrous on the surface, but in the absence of any observed distinctions in other characters, beyond a similar difference in the pubescence of the phyllaries, it does not seem to merit specific rank. In two sheets of the northern plant (Hammond 207 and Lawrence 2102) the leaves are sparsely strigose or hirsute on the costa beneath or on both sides and not obviously glaucous. All the specimens from Siskiyou County have somewhat thinner, coarsely dentate stem leaves; those of the other specimens cited, including the type, are thicker and entire or subentire. Wedelia ambigens Blake, sp. nov. Herbacea (?); caulis obtuse quadrangularis 4-suleatus in angulis strigil- losus; folia opposita ovata falcato-acuminata basi late rotundata triplinervia supra asperula subtus submolliter griseo-pubescentia crenato-serrata, petiolo tenui; capitula mediocria flava radiata pauca irregulariter cymosa; involucri ca. 7 mm. alti gradati phyllaria basi pallida indurata, apice herbaceo lanceo- lato acuminato squarroso subaequali; radii ca. 11, ca. 1.5 cm. longi; paleae rigide acuminatae; pappus‘coroniformis non stipitatus. Sometimes subscandent; stem pithy, about 3 mm. thick; internodes usually 7-16 cm. long; petioles strigose or strigillose and somewhat hispid, 1-3.5 cm. long; blades 9.5-15 cm. long, 5-8.5 cm. wide, usually unequal at base, crenate-serrate (teeth small, acute, usually 1.5-4 mm. apart), thin, above deep green, antrorse-hispid with slightly tuberculate-based hairs and minutely tuberculate-hispidulous, beneath paler green or in youth griseous, rather densely hirsute-pilose with antrorse or spreading hairs (denser and longer along the veins) and sessile-glandular, triplinerved 5-10 mm. above base (sometimes with 2-3 pairs of weaker veins below) and loosely prominu- AuG. 19, 1931 BLAKE: NEW AMERICAN ASTERACEAE Ba lous-reticulate beneath; cymes terminating stems and branches, irregular, 3-4-headed, the peduncles normally 1-flowered, 3-7.5 cm. long, densely strigose or erectish-pubescent, usually naked, slender; heads 2.5-3.5 cm. wide; disk about 6-8 mm. high, 1-1.2 cm. thick; involucre about 3-seriate, slightly graduate or subequal, the phyllaries lanceolate to lance-ovate, about 2 mm. wide, densely pubescent outside with subappressed hairs, the base . indurated, 3—-5-vittate, the squarrose herbaceous apex subequal or somewhat shorter; rays about 11, yellow, pistillate, the tube 1 mm. long, the lamina narrowly oblong, 2-dentate, sparsely hirsutulous at base and along nerves of back, 11—-13-nerved, about 15 mm. long, 3-5 mm. wide; disk flowers numerous, their corrollas yellow, hispidulous above, about 6 mm. long (tube 1.5 mm., throat funnelform, 3 mm., teeth elongate-triangular, acuminate, 1.6-1.8 mm. long); receptacle flattish ; pales of medium breadth, densely and minutely hispidulous on keel and above, ciliolate and sparsely hispid on margin above, firm, gradually narrowed into a stiff acuminate tip, about 5 mm. long; ray achenes plumply trigonous, minutely hispidulous at the subtruncate apex, 2 mm. long, 1.6 mm. wide, their pappus a thick denticulate crown about 0.3 mm. high; disk achenes plump, compressed, obovoid, broad-based, minutely hispidulous and obscurely biauriculate at the subtruncate apex, 2.3 mm. long, 1.8 mm. wide, their pappus a thick denticulate crown 0.3 mm. high; style branches tipped with subulate acuminate hispidulous appendages about 0.4 mm. long. VENEZUELA: Hills, vicinity of Cristobal Colon, 5 Jan-—22 Feb. 1923, W. E. Broadway 149 (type no. 1,188,477, U. S. Nat. Herb.), 591; Chacaito Gorge, around Caracas, 24 April 1921, alt. 800-1000 m., H. Pitter 9487; forming thicket in damp shady places, descent from Valera to Motatan Bridge, on road to Carvajal, Dept. Trujillo, 21 Nov. 1922, Pittier 10754. Like W. penninervia, to which it is not remotely related, this species has much the aspect of Wulffia. Itis readily distinguished from W. penninervia by its triplinerved leaves and different stem pubescence. From W. latifolia DC., of Colombia, with which W. heterophylla and W. symmetrica Rusby are probably identical, it differs in stem, involucre, pales, pappus, and pubescence. Wedelia penninervia Blake, sp. nov. Herba (?); caulis quadrangularis 4-suleatus dense breviterque patenti- hirsutus; folia opposita ovata majuscula acuminata base late rotundata crenato-serrata supra asperula subtus dense moliterque griseopilosa, petiolo nudo ca. 2.5 em. longo; capitula mediocria apice caulis ca. 5-6 irregulariter cymosa pedunculata; involucri ca. 3-seriati paullum gradati ca. 7 mm. alti appressi phyllaria late ovata acuminata dense subappresse pubescentia subherbacea; radii ca. 14, 9 mm. longa; paleae rigide acuminatae; pappus coroniformis non stipitatus. Stem ca. 3 mm. thick, obtusely 4-angled, usually deeply 4-sulcate, pithy, densely and rather harshly short-hirsute with spreading hairs about 0.7 mm. long, glabrescent below; internodes mostly 4-6 cm. long, sometimes greatly elongated; petioles pubescent like the stem, 1.5-2.8 em. long; blades 10—-17.5 cm. long, 4.5-7.5 em. wide, falecate-acuminate, broadly rounded and usually slightly unequal at base, crenate-serrate nearly throughout (teeth acute, small, mostly 2-5 mm. apart), subchartaceous, above deep green, evenly antrorse-hirsute on surface, more densely so on veins, with minutely tubercu- 332 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 14 late-based hairs, beneath densely and uniformly pilose with antrorse or erect minutely tuberculate-based hairs, featherveined, the ca. 8-10 pairs of chief veins and the secondaries impressed above, prominulous-reticulate beneath; pedicels densely pubescent like the stem, at first only 1.5-3 cm. long, at length 3.5-6 em.; heads hemispheric-campanulate, in anthesis 2.5 cm. wide; disk 8-9 mm. high, 1.5—1.8 em. thick; phyllaries somewhat glabrescent below, 2.5-3.8 mm. wide, slightly indurate at base; rays about 14, yellow, pistillate, the tube obscurely puberulous, 1.5 mm. long, the lamina elliptic-oblong, unequally 2-dentate, puberulous on back and hirsutulous on the 2 chief nerves, 9-11-nerved, 9 mm. long, 3.5 mm. wide; disk flowers numerous, yellow, their corollas hispidulous above, 6 mm. long (tube 1.7 mm., throat cylindrid- funnelform, 3.1 mm., teeth triangular-ovate, 1.2 mm. long); pales hispidulous on keel, ciliolate above, gradually tapering into the stiff subulate erect tip, about 7 mm. long; ray achenes plumply trigonous, 2.5 mm. long, 2 mm. wide, puberulous on the subtruncate apex, auriculate on the 2 outer angles at apex, the pappus at first of 3 toothlike awns about 0.5 mm. long and a lacerate crown of connate squamellae about half as long, at maturity reduced to a denticulate crown about 0.3 mm. high; disk achenes plumply quadrangular, 3 mm. long, 2 mm. wide, puberulous on the truncate-rounded apex, their pappus a lacerate crown about 0.3 mm. high, about a third as broad as apex of achene; style branches tipped with a subulate acuminate appendage about 0.7 mm. long. Cotomsia: Thicket in quebrada, Cordillera Oriental, east of Neiva, Dept. Huila, alt. 800-1000 m., 31 July 1917, H. H. Rusby & F. W. Pennell 410 (type in herb. N. Y. Bot. Gard.; photog. and fragm., U. S. Nat. Herb.); in quebrada, same locality and date, alt. 700-1500 m., Rusby & Pennell 513 (N. Y. Bot. Gard.). A plant suggestive of some forms of Wulffia in appearance, and distin- guished from related species of its region by its involucre and its penninerved leaves, which are densely and softly pubescent beneath. The smallerleaves are occasionally somewhat triplinerved through the enlargement of about the third pair of veins above the base. The type collection is described as a shrubby vine, the other collection as an herb. The plant is probably herbace- ous or suffrutescent and occasionally leaning or subscandent. Wedelia trilobata var. pilosissima Blake, var. nov. Planta habitu, foliis trilobatis, pedunculis brevibus, ete., formae typicae W. trilobatae (L.) Hitche. valde similis, differt caule densissime patenti- piloso pilis ca. 2 mm. longis. Peru: Pebas, July 1929, L. Williams 1913 (type no. 1,444,044, U.S. Nat. Herb.); La Victoria, Aug—Sept. 1929, Williams 2587; Caballo-Cocha, Aug. 1929, Wilkams 2313. All the localities cited for this variety are on the Amazon River in the Department of Loreto. Wedelia brasiliensis var. villosa (Baker) Blake. Wedelia paludosa var. villosa Baker in Mart., Fl. Bras. 6?: 181. 1884. A specimen without data collected in 1921 by the Mulford Biological Exploration of the Amazon Basin (no. 2172) agrees with Baker’s description eawesd'9 1931. BLAKE: NEW AMERICAN ASTERACEAE 309 of this variety. I have elsewhere shown’ that the name Wedelia paludosa DC. must be replaced by W. brasiliensis (Spreng.) Blake, based on Acmella brasilensis Spreng. Helianthus anomalus Blake, sp. nov. Herba, basi invisa; caulis albidus ramosus sparse breviterque tuberculato- hispida; folia alterna ovata v. lanceolato-ovate obtusa v. acuta basi cuneata integra 3-nervia crassa subcoriacea laete viridia tuberculato-hispidula, petiolo tenui longo; capitula 1-2 majuscula; involucri 2-seriati ca. 2 em. alti gradati phyllaria lineari-lanceolata acuminata sparse tuberculato-hispida ad basim subciliata erecta discum superantia; radii flavi ca. 10 ca, 2 cm. longi; corollae disci tenues, dentibus purpureis; achenia disci appresse pilosa; pappus e aristis ca. 18 inaequalibus 1.24.5 mm. longis caducissimis com- positus. Plant 30 em. high and more; stem stoutish, 4 mm. thick, leafy, rather sparsely short-hispid with white, tuberculate-based, upcurved conic hairs about 1 mm. long; internodes mostly 1.5-3 cm. long; petioles narrowly cuneate- margined at apex, 1.2-3.3 cm. long, pubescent like the stem; blades 4.5— 8 em. long, 1.2-3.2 cm. wide, cuneate or cuneate-rounded at base and then shortly and narrowly decurrent on apex of petiole, thick and rigid, evenly hispid or hispidulous on both surfaces with short conic tuberculate-based white hairs, those on the margin with extremely swollen bases; peduncles solitary at apex of stem and in the uppermost axils, 4-9 cm. long, slender, pubescent like the stem; heads about 5 cm. wide; disk hemispheric, about 1.5 em. high. 1.5-2 cm. wide, smaller in reduced heads; involucre 1.7—2.7 cm. high, of about 16 linear-lanceolate acuminate herbaceous phyllaries, indurate at extreme base, l-vittate, sparsely tuberculate-hispid and more or less definitely hispid-ciliate especially below, 1-2 mm. wide; rays yellow, 1.8-2.3 em. long, 6-9 mm. wide, 11—13-nerved, emarginate; disk corollas stipitate- glandular and sparsely hispidulous on tube, finely hispidulous on base of throat and teeth, greenish white with purple teeth, 6.8-7.5 mm. long (tube 1.5— 1.8 mm., throat cylindric-funnelform, 4.3-5.2 mm., teeth deltoid-ovate, 0.8 mm. long); pales scarious, hispidulous toward apex, usually 3-lobed, the lateral lobes merely small teeth, the median about 4 mm. long, acuminate, subulate-pointed, sometimes purplish-tinged at tip; ray achenes inane, their pappus much as in the disk; disk achenes oblong, plump, 4.5 mm. long, 1.8 mm. wide, mottled black and white, appressed-pilose with fulvous hairs; pappus of 2 slender hispidulous awns 44.5 mm. long and on each side between them about 6-8 similar unequal awns 1.2-3.5 mm. long, the whole caducous; style branches purplish, hispid dorsally, tipped with a linear-subulate obtusish hispidulous appendage about 0.8 mm. long. Urau: Desert south of Hawksville, Wayne Co., alt. 1370 m., 5 July 1930, W. D. Stanton 328 (type no. 1,487,743, U. S. Nat. Herb.; dupl. in herb. Brigham Young University, no. 4806). A very interesting plant, amply distinct in characters of foliage and in- volucre, and remarkably set off from all other known species by its pappus, which carries to an extreme the tendency found in various other species to produce additional squamellae between the two constantly present marginal awns. Further specimens showing the base of the plant are much to be desired. 7 Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 26: 250. 1930. 334 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 14 Enceliopsis covillei (A. Nels.) Blake. Helianthella argophylla Coville, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 4: 132. 1893, as to descr. only. (Not H. argophylla (D. C. Eaton) A. Gray.) Encelia grandiflora Jones, Proc. Calif. Acad. II. 5: 702. 1895. Not E. grandiflora (Benth.) Hemsl. 1881. Helianthella covillec A. Nels., Bot. Gaz. 37: 273. 1904. Enceliopsis grandiflora A. Nels., Bot. Gaz. 47: 483. 1909; Blake, Proce. Amer. Acad. 49: 354. 1913. : Oyedaea oxylepis Blake, sp. nov. Suffrutescens (?); Caulis strigosus; folia opposita elliptico-oblonga crenato- serrulata acuta basi cuneata penninervia supra aspera subtus hirsuto-pilosa ca. 8 cm. longa 3 cm. lata; capitula minuscula saepius solitaria terminalia breviter pedunculata; involucri 5-7 mm. alti subaequalis ca. 3-triseriati phyllaria ovato-lanceolata acuminata strigosa, apice herbaceo patente supra lepidoto-hispidulo. Stem (above) slender, brownish, striatulate, subterete, densely strigose or erectish-hirsute with slightly tuberculate-based hairs and between them sordid-pilosulous; upper internodes 3-6 cm. long; petioles about 3 mm. long, pubescent like the stem; blades (4) 6-8.5 cm. long (1.5) 2-3.2 em. wide, acute or acuminate, callous-tipped, above harshly pubescent with antrorse- curved hairs with persistent lepidote bases, antrorse-hirsute along costa, beneath evenly but not densely hirsute-pilose with spreading or antrorse- curved hairs and gland-dotted, crenate-serrulate above the entire cuneate base with about 5-9 pairs of apiculate depressed teeth (8-8 mm. apart). firm-herbaceous, the principal lateral veins about 6-12 pairs, with the minor veins prominulous-reticulate beneath; peduncles terminal in forks of stem and branches, 1(—2)-headed, naked or 1-bracteate, 1-2.5 cm. long, pubescent like the stem; heads 2 cm. wide; disk (as pressed) 9-10 mm. high, 7-10 mm. thick; involucre slightly obgraduate or subequal, the 2 outer series of phyl- laries lance-ovate, 2.5-3 mm. wide at base, strigose and strigillose, the some- what longer herbaceous apex spreading at least in age, lepidote-hispidulous above, the innermost series with short bluntish subherbaceous tips; rays about 8, yellow, neutral, the tube 2.5 mm. long, sparsely hirsutulous, the lamina narrowly oblong, emarginate, with 4 principal nerves, 11 mm. long, 3 mm. wide; disk corollas not very numerous, yellow, essentially glabrous except on teeth, 6.5 mm. long (tube 2.3 mm., throat slender-funnelform, 3.5mm., teeth © ovate, 0.7 mm. long, sparsely hispidulous at apex, papillose on margin within) ; pales narrow, acute, densely hirsutulous at apex, about 6 mm. long; disk achenes (submature) oblong, compressed, blackish, 3 mm. long, sparsely strigose on the faces, densely hispidulous-ciliolate on margin, very narrowly winged on one margin, scarcely at all on other; pappus of 2 slender fragile hispidulous awns 2.5-3 mm. long and on each side between them about 4-6 short awns, connate at base, mostly about 1.1 mm. long, the lateral ones sometimes up to 1.5 mm. long. Pru: ‘Weed”’ in forest, San Roque, Dept. San Martin, alt. 1350-1500 m., 7 Jan. 1930, Llewelyn Williams 6992 (type No. 629616, herb. Field. Mus.; dupl. No. 1,495,543, U. S. Nat. Herb.). A member of a group of half a dozen closely related Andean species, of which the closest is probably the Bolivian O. rusbyz Blake. In the latter the heads AuG. 19, 1931 BLAKE: NEW AMERICAN ASTERACEAE 335 are numerous and the phyllaries have much shorter and relatively broader bluntish herbaceous tips. Actinea helenioides (Rydb.) Blake. Picradenia helenioides Rydb., Bull. Torrey Club 28: 21. 1901. Hymenoxys helenioides Cockerell, Bull. Torrey Club 31: 481. 1904. Dugaldia helenioides A. Nels. in Coult. & Nels., New Man. Bot. Rocky Mts. 562. 1909. This species has continued to be known only from the type collection made at Sangre de Cristo Creek, south-central Colorado, alt. 2400-2700 m., 2 July 1900, by P. A. Rydberg and F. K. Vreeland (no. 5495). A considerable extension of range is shown by a specimen in the U. 8. Forest Service herba- rium collected on ridge running east from Castle Valley Ridge, about 5 miles southeast of Clearcreek, in the Manti Forest, Carbon Co., Utah, alt. 2930 m., 25 August 1914, by W. R. Chapline, Jr. (no. 80). Through the courtesy of Dr. E. D. Merrill, I have been able to compare with this specimen two sheets of the type collection in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden. In the original specimens the rays are not fully developed. Those of Mr. Chapline’s plant have the lamina 1.8—-2 em. long and 4-6 mm. wide. Dyssodia remota Blake, sp. nov. Fruticulus diffusus; caulis obscure hirtellus ramosus; folia opposita pin- natipartita ca. 2.56 em. longa, segmentis 5 lineari-ellipticis utrinque acutis glanduloso-crenatis glabris subcoriaceis; capitula terminalia solitaria medio- ceria flava radiata breviter pedunculata; involucri primarii 1 em. alti 2-seriati aequalis phyllaria oblonga obtusa ad apicem ciliolata libera glanduloso- notata, calyculo e. phyllariis ca. 5 parvis subulatis sistente praediti; pappi paleae ca. 15, quaque in aristas 24 dissecta. “Half-trailing’’ undershrub, several-stemmed, about 30 cm. long; stems oppositely branched; branches slender, obscurely hirtellous somewhat in lines, leafy; internodes 0.4-3.5 cm. long; petioles narrowly margined, 3-6 mm. long, glabrous, bearing toward base 1-3 pairs of setaceous lobes 2.5 mm. long or less; blades ovate in outline, 1-3.3 cm. long, 1-1.8 em. wide, divided to the narrowly winged rachis, the leaflets 3-5, the lateral 5-11 mm. long, 1- 2.5 mm. wide, the terminal 0.8-2 5 cm. long, 2-4 mm. wide, all sessile but usually contracted at base, crenate with 2-4 pairs of very rounded teeth, a round yellowish gland in each notch; peduncles 1—1.5 cm. long, slender, glabrous; heads about 2-3 em. wide; disk campanulate, 14 mm. high, 10 mm. thick; involucre double, the outer of about 5 narrowly subulate phyllaries 3- 5.5 mm. long, ciliolate, sometimes with 1 or 2 linear-lanceolate lobes toward base, the inner of about 9 equal 2-seriate phyllaries, these oblong, obtuse (the outer 3 mm. wide, the inner 4.5 mm.), ciliolate above, otherwise glabrous, erose below, substramineous, with indurated and thickened extreme base, 1-ribbed, finely several-vittate, bearing usually a pair of subbasal linear oil glands and 1 or 2 shorter subterminal ones; receptacle flat; rays about 5, yellow, fertile, the tube 4 mm. long, puberulous, the lamina elliptic, entire or 2-denticulate, 7-9-nerved, 7.5 mm. long, 3 mm. wide; disk flowers about 38, their corollas yellow, cylindric-funnelform, puberulous near middle and on teeth, 7 mm. long (tube 2.8 mm., throat 2.8 mm., teeth triangular, 1.4 mm. 336 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 14 long); achenes of ray and disk similar, linear-cylindric, subterete or somewhat flattened, 4 mm. long, densely hirsutulous; pappus 6 mm. long, straw-color, 1-seriate, of about 15 paleae dissected nearly to base into 2-4 slender hispidu- lous bristles, the lateral bristles somewhat-shorter than the inner; style branches with short deltoid obtusish subglabrous appendages. Perv: Half-trailing on grassy canyon ledges or slopes, Llata, Dept. Huan- uco, alt. 2135 m., 21 Aug. 1922, Macbride & Featherstone 2241 (type no. 518725, herb. Field Mus.; dupl. no. 1,186,055, U.S. Nat. Herb.). Nearest Dyssodia jelskiz Hieron., also of Peru, which is described as having cuneate-obovate merely dentate leaves and outer phyllaries (bracteoles) equalling the inner. Cirsium rhothophilum Blake, nom. nov. Carduus maritima (sic) Elmer, Bot. Gaz. 39: 45. 1905. Cirstum. marittmum Petrak, Beiheft. Bot. Centralbl. 35: Abt. 2: 288. 1917. Not Cirscum maritimum Makino, Bot. Mag. Tokyo 24: 249. 1910. Petrak’s reason for transferring Elmer’s name to Cirszwm, when at the same time he cited an earlier use of the name Cirszeum maritimum by Makino for a new species described from Japan, is not obvious. At any rate, this very distinct species, known only from the type locality at Surf, Santa Barbara County, California, must receive anewname. The one here given (from pé6os, the dash of waves) refers to its habitat on sand dunes on the seacoast. BOTANY.—The genus Lozanella.| E. P. Kiuurp and C. V. Morton U. 8. National Museum. Lozanella, a genus of Ulmaceae of the tribe Celtidoideae, was established by Greenman in 1905 and to it was referred a single species, L. trematoides, proposed at the same time and based upon a Pringle collection from Hidalgo, Mexico. Three years previously, however, Donnell Smith had described from Costa Rican material a species in the genus Trema, T. enantiophylla, which clearly is identical with Lozanella trematoides. In the course of studies of tropical American Urticaceae which the senior author has been making, several specimens have been observed in unidentified material referred to that family which, though evidently representing a single genus, did not belong to Urticaceae. Compari- son of these specimens with type material of Lozanella trematoides and Trema enantiophylla deposited in the National Herbarium shows that they represent two species of Lozanella, one the species described by Donnell Smith and by Greenman, the other new. 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Re- ceived June 1, 1931. auG. 19, 1931 KILLIP AND MORTON: LOZANELLA Oot Of special note is the fact that the additional collections of the original species were made at widely separated localities, in Guate- mala, in Costa Rica, in the Santa Marta Mountains and the Eastern and Western Cordilleras of Colombia, and in northern Peru. The second species has a more limited distribution, ranging from south- eastern Peru to central Bolivia. The tribe Celtidoideae is distinguished by its drupaceous fruit and curved embryos. Celtis and a few related genera are at once dis- TABLE 1. CHARACTERS OF CERTAIN CELTIDOIDEAE Lozanella Trema Parasponia | Aphananthe Gironniera Chaetacme Range Mexico to | Through- | Malay Japan, Eastern Africa Boliva out Old} Archipel-| Philip- Asia and and New| ago and | pine Is., | Pacific Is. World Pacific Australia Tropics Is. Cotyledons | Broad, Narrow, Narrow, | Narrow, | Narrow, Narrow, searcely recurved, | recurved | recurved | recurved recurved, curved, equal unequal equal Leaves Opposite, | Alternate, ; Alternate, | Alternate, | Alternate, | Alternate, serrate serrate serrate serrate entire or | entire serrate Stipules United Free United Free United United Inflores- Dioecious | Frequently | Frequently) Dioecious | Dioecious | Dioecious cence monoe- monoe- cious cious Aestivation | Imbricate | Valvate or | Imbricate | Valvate Imbricate | Valvate or slightly | slightly valvate imbricate above above Endosperm | Fleshy Fleshy Fleshy Thin or | Fleshy or | Practi- none none cally none Other char- | Branches 2 flowers 2 flowers | Spines acters all oppo- solitary ecymose or | present site solitary tinguished by their broad, contorted cotyledons. genera of the tribe have uncontorted narrower cotyledons. Trema, Parasponia, Aphananthe, Gironniera, and Chaetacme. The remaining They are: The relationship of Lozanella to these genera, which other than Tema are all Old World, is far from clear. They all have alternate leaves and narrow recurved cotyledons, whereas Lozanella has opposite leaves and broad, scarcely curved cotyledons. The united stipules of Lozanella are found also in Parasponia, Gironniera, and Chaetacme. 338 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 14 The opposite branches of Lozanella are characteristic. The various characters are summarized in Table 1. KEY TO SPECIES OF LOZANELLA Mature leaves densely pubescent beneath, the hairs yellowish; petioles and rachises densely pubescent; pistillate inflorescences simple or with short lateral branches, the flowers congested; perianth lobes much imbricate 1. L. permollis. Mature leaves not densely pubescent beneath, the hairs whitish; petioles and rachises sparingly pubescent; pistillate inflorescences conspicuously branched, the flowers solitary or clustered; perianth lobes imbricate below, becoming somewhat induplicate-valvate above...... 2. L. enantiophylla. Lozanella permollis Killip & Morton, sp. nov. Arbor inermis dioica; caules pubescentes; folia opposita, elliptica, petiolata, apice acuminata, basi late obliqueque cuneata, serrata, basi integra, supra scabra, subtus molliter lanata, nervis reticulatis, stipulis caducis, intraaxil- laribus, in ramis cicatrices circulares conspicuas reliquentibus; ~ inflores- centia cymosa, ramosa, floribus aggregatis, pedicellis brevibus, bracteatis; perianthium 5-partitum, laciniis imbricatis, carinatis, obtusis, ciliatis; stamina 5, perianthii laciniis opposita, hypogyna, sub disco piloso inserta, aestivatione erecta; filamenta subulata, exserta; antherae dorso supra basim adfixae, introrsae; @ inflorescentia axillaris, ramis lateralibus nullis vel brevibus; rachis dense pubescens; flores sessiles; perianthii laciniae aequales, oblongae, sub fructu persistentes; staminodia nulla; drupa parva, monosperma, stylis marcescentibus coronata; ovulum unum, pendulum. Dioecious tree about 8 meters high; branches of previous season terete, sparingly pubescent, leafless; branches of the season leafy, more pubescent, increasingly so toward the growing tip, the hairs dense, matted, ferru- ginous; stipules united around the stem, caducous, leaving conspicuous circular scars; petioles flattened, 1.5 to 4 em. long, densely spreading yellow- pubescent; leaves opposite, elliptic, broadest at middle, the blades 9 by 4 cm. to 17.5 by 8.5 cm., acuminate at apex, broadly cuneate and oblique at base, conspicuously serrate (teeth curving toward apex), entire near base, above dark green, prominently scabrous, the hairs white, pustulate, beneath paler, densely pubescent, the hairs appressed, long, yellowish, confined to the veins | and veinlets (young leaves velvety pubescent), conspicuously reticulate- venose beneath, 3-nerved from the base, the midnerve giving rise to about 3 pairs of secondary veins, the two outer nerves exteriorly to 7 or 8 secondary veins, the principal nerves impressed above; staminate inflorescences cymose, several in each leaf axil, divaricately branched, the flowers borne in small clusters, the peduncle about 1 cm. long, with dense pubescence similar to that of stem and petiole, the pedicel very short or subobsolete, bracteate; perianth 5-lobed, the lobes 3 mm. long, about 1.6 mm. wide, obtuse, scarious- margined, conspicuously carinate, free almost to base, prominently imbricate in bud, sparingly pubescent on both sides, long-ciliate; hypogynous disk present, densely long white-hairy ; stamens borne on border of disk, 5, opposite perianth segments; filaments 3 mm. long at maturity, subulate, glabrous, exserted; anthers erect from the beginning, introrse, oval, 1.2 mm. long; rudimentary ovary present, small; pistillate inflorescences several in each leaf axil, not divaricately branched, the lateral branches none or very short, AuG. 19, 1931 KILLIP AND MORTON: LOZANELLA 309 the peduncle about 1 cm. long, densely pubescent like the petioles, the flowers borne in sessile clusters along the pubescent axis; flowers sessile; perianth segments 5, equal, imbricate, oblong, 1 mm. long, about 0.7 mm. wide, obtuse, sparingly pubescent on both sides, ciliate, persistent and becoming fleshy in fruit, the base then rather stipitate; hypogynous disk present, fleshy, densely long white-hairy; staminodia none; fruit a drupe, about 1 mm. wide and long, compressed laterally, green, glabrous, the flesh thin; styles 2, conspicuously hairy, about 1 mm. long, persistent on the fruit; seed oval, compressed, yellow, the pericarp thin; ovule solitary, pendulous from the summit of ovary; embryo immature. Type of staminate plant in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,156,898, collected at Unduavi, South Yungas, Department of La Paz, Bolivia, Novem- ber, 1900, altitude 3100 meters, by O. Buchtien (No. 2814). Additional material of this collection, U.S. N. H. No. 1,044,987. Type of pistillate plant in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,156,897, collected at same time and place by O. Buchtien (No. 2815). Additional material of this collection, U.S. N. H. No. 1,044,988. Additional specimens examined: BOLIVIA: COCHABAMBA: Incachaca, Pro- vince of Sacaba, 2500 meters alt. Steznbach 5788 (F’), 5819 (F). Prrv: cuzco: Lucumayo Valley, Cook & Gilbert 1376 (N). Lozanella enantiophylla (Donn. Smith) Killip & Morton. Trema enantiophylla Donn. Smith, Bot. Gaz. 33: 259. 1902. Lozanella trematoides Greenm., Proc. Amer. Acad. 41: 236. 1905. Specimens examined: Mexico: H1pALGo: Near Honey Station, Pringle 8983 (N, type collection of L. trematoides). Barranca below Trinidad Iron Works, 1,550 meters alt., Pringle 13607 (N). GUATEMALA: CHIMALTEN- ANGO: Volcdin Acatenango, 2500 meters alt., Kellerman 6611 (F). Costa RICA: HERIDA: Cerros de Zurqui, northeast of San Isidro, 2,000—2,400 meters alt., Standley & Valerio 50357 (N). SAN José: Rio Pedregoso, near El Copey, 1800 meters alt., Tonduz (Donn. Smith 7517B, Inst. Nat. Costarie. 11734, N). carrago: Estrella, Cooper 325 (Donn. Smith 5949, N, type). El Mufieco, Rio Navarro, 1,400—-1,500 meters alt., Standley & Torres 51108 (N). CoLOMBIA: MAGDALENA: Santa Marta Mountains, H. H. Smith 1437 (N). SANTANDER: Las Vegas, 2,600 meters alt., Killip & Smith 16133 (N). caLpAs: Rio San Rafael, below Cerro Tatamd, 2,600-2,800 meters alt., Pennell 10373 (N). Perv: LiBERTAD: Rio Mishiolla Valley, Province of Pataz, 2,000 meters alt., Weberbauer 7049 (F, N). Standley notes that this is a shrub or tree, 3 to 5 meters high; Weberbauer that it is a shrub 7 meters high. The plant observed in the Eastern Cordil- lera of Colombia by Mr. Smith and the senior author was a tree 5 to 6 meters high, with a rather slender trunk and a rounded crown. 2 F, Field Museum of Natural History; N, U. S. National Herbarium. 340 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 14 NECROLOGY.—Raoul Gautier.. Gnrorcrs PrErrier, Secretary of the International Association of Geodesy. (Communicated by WiLuiAmM Bowie.) The International Association of Geodesy wishes to express, by my voice, the feeling of gratitude of all geodesists towards Raoul Gautier, their promise to treasure his memory faithfully while striving to follow his example. Grandnephew of Alfred Gautier, the founder and first Director of the new Observatory of Geneva, son of Emile Gautier, who was its Director from 1883 to 1891, Raoul Gautier continued the glorious tradition of his family. Even if his work was mainly astronomical, many branches of geophysics, for example meteorology, are indebted to him for notable contributions. But it was in geodesy that he played a role of particular importance. It is now forty years since, upon the death of his father, he joined the Swiss Geodetic Commission, created in 1861, forty years during which his geodetic activities have not flagged for a single instant. Accredited representative of Switzerland, after the death of Hirsch, to all of the general assemblies of the old International Geodetic Asso- ciation—Copenhagen (1903), Budapest (1906), London (1909), Ham- burg (1912)—he acquired an undisputed authority among all the geod- esists who attended these great tribunals of our science. Many of them are now gone but the survivors gladly recall these reunions, stamped with the impress of his kindly cordiality, where the geodesists formed one great, united family and where Gautier’s influence again and again asserted itself. Then came the somber days of the War, involving the dissolution of the old Association. It was a cruel blow to Gautier, who was pro- foundly attached to it but, with a few friends belonging to countries which, like Switzerland, were not involved in the terrible conflict, with admirable clear sightedness, he saw his duty plainly: to strive to maintain the spark which would later serve to rekindle the extinguished torch of international geodetic work. From this idea was born the Reduced Geodetic Association, created by the Neutral Countries, of which he became President and which carried on as far as possible the work of the vanished Association and, in particular, insured the con- tinuance of the observations and computations of the important Inter- national Latitude Service. 1 Address delivered at the funeral services of Prof. Raout GAUTIER, vice-president of the International Association of Geodesy, at the Protestant Church of Cologny, near Geneva, April 22, 1931. Translated by ADRIENNE Ervin. Received June 6, 1931. Prof. Gautier was a member of the Washington Academy of Sciences. AuG. 19, 1931 PERRIER: RAOUL GAUTIER 341 Moreover, after an international conference held by the Allies and Neutrals at Brussels in 1919, he made a reality of the lofty conception of new international scientific unions, branches of a supreme council, the International Research Council, and when Raoul Gautier went to Rome in 1922 to attend the first General Assembly of one of these unions, the International Union of Geodesy and Geophysics, he was unanimously elected Vice President of the Section (now called Associa- tion) of Geodesy, an office that he held until his death. Since that time, I have had the honor of collaborating intimately with him, as is shown by an active correspondence with him, which I shall never hereafter read over without emotion and heaviness of heart. The part played by Gautier was most difficult; to us geodesists of the succeeding generation he stood as the one who continued the tradi- tions of the old Association and as a bond between the past and the present. T can say that, always and everywhere, he was inspired by love of his country and by the higher interests of science. If the old Section of Geodesy of the Union, transformed to-day by the change of too modest a title into the International Association of Geodesy, now stands as a powerful organization that includes 37 civilized countries, it is due in large part to the mollifying influence and eminent authority of Raoul Gautier. Alas, most of our colleagues of the Association saw him for the last time, four years ago, at the General Assembly in Prague. Age and the prudence imposed on him by attacks of an illness which impeded his physical activity without in any way diminishing his mental ac- tivity were the reasons which, notwithstanding his sincere desire to attend the General Assembly at Stockholm last year, forbade his going there. We missed him greatly. His experience, his shrewd grasp on the realities, his poise, would have been very useful to us at a difficult period in the existence of our Association, the moment of the renewal of the Statutes. I recall with what interest he heard the account that I gave him of our work, as he judged with serene impartiality our dis- cussions and our decisions. In the address that we sent him when, on February 25, 1928, his colleagues and friends in Geneva organized a ceremony in his honor on the occasion of his retirement, we expressed the wish and the hope that, for many years to come, he might aid us by his eminent experience and his counsel. That hope has been denied, but the memory of his life so nobly lived will remain for us a very real inspiration. 2 342 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 14 My dear Vice President, I bid you farewell, in the name of our President, Mr. Bowie, of your colleagues, of our Executive Committee, and of the geodesists who were your friends and who, at this very moment, feel as a cruel shock the news of your death. Farewell! PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 631ST MEETING The 631st meeting of the Anthropological Society of Washington was held on Tuesday, March 17, 1931, at 4:45 P.M., in Room 42-43, National Museum, President Joun M. Coopnr, presiding. Program: Frank M. Srerzuer: The Mound-Builder cultures of the Upper Mississippt Valley (illustrated)—A review of the archeological cultures in Ohio, Indiana, Kentucky, Illinois and Wisconsin follows. In Ohio three important mound-building cultures have been established. Hopewell, the most spectacular, is characterized by extensive and complex earthworks in geometric forms covering from one to one hundred acres; by mounds varying in height from one foot to thirty feet, usually covering the remains of wooden structures; by burials, the majority of which are cremated, though a minority are extended type placed in prepared graves of earth and log structures. Artifacts with the burials are for the most part made of material foreign to Ohio—obsidian, copper, mica, tortoise shell, galena, grizzly bear teeth, and hematite. Platform pipes show a high degree of sculpture; terra cotta figurines depict the costumes of the people. The skulls are predominantly dolichocephalic and show no evidence of artificial cranial deformation. . The Fort Ancient culture is the most extensive of the Ohio group. The mounds are small, and numerous village sites have yielded the majority of artifacts. Most of the burials are in cemeteries. Artifacts are of bone and shell primarily, and of other indigenous materials. This is the only culture in Ohio in which European objects have been found, which leads Dr. Swanton to believe that one of the sites—Madisonville—was inhabited by the Monsopelia. : The Adena culture is now considered a group distinct from the Hopewell. The mounds are usually conical and occur singly and unaccompanied by earthworks. Burials are made throughout the mound, frequently an impor- tant central grave occurring below the base line. Materials from distant sources were extensively used, and copper was employed only for ornamental objects, such as bracelets, finger rings, and gorgets. Other artifacts were tubular pipes and projectile points of the unnotched stemmed type. In Indiana in the southeastern part a systematic survey and mound excava- tion revealed cultures similar to the Fort Ancient and Adena of Ohio. A mound in the southwestern part of the state exhibited characteristics evident in Lower Mississippi groups. Early reports indicate the possibility of a cul- ture related to Hopewell. aAuG. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 343 In Kentucky along the Ohio River are cultures closely allied to the Fort Ancient. In the mountainous region of eastern Kentucky the rock shelters and caves contain ash layers at the bottom of which is the most primitive culture of the Mississippi region yet found. Even though “hominy holes,’ charred corn and gourd shards indicate that agriculture was practiced, there is no evidence of pottery. On the surface, however, pottery, woven fabrics and well fashioned artifacts appear. This pottery closely resembles that of the historic Cherokee. The culture in the central part of the state is char- acterized by truncated and domiciliary mounds and stone boxlike graves, traits which belong to the Tennessee-Cumberland cultures to the south. In Illinois there are five cultures. The Cahokia, near St. Louis, is a northern extension of a southern culture, probably Etowah. Along the Illinois River there are two cultures, one known as the Bluffs, the other new and unnamed, which is likely the oldest in the state, characterized by an extremely long-headed people. Bordering the Mississippi River from Iowa to the junction of the Spoon River with the Illinois, there is a highly developed Hopewell culture. In the northwest corner of the state is the southern extremity of the effigy culture, which centers in Wisconsin. Wisconsin contains four distinct archeological groups. The most wide- spread is known as the Lake Michigan culture, of which the effigy mounds are a sub-group. We find clay pipes, stone altars, bone harpoons, needles, and scrapers. ‘The pottery strikingly resembles that of the eastern woodland Algonquin tribes. A rather extensive village-dwelling culture known as Upper Mississippi consists of triangular arrow points, snub nosed scrapers, flat stone grinding mortars, Siouan type of stone pipe, bone and shell imple- ments, burials in the flesh both extended and flexed. Historically known Win- nebago sites have produced exclusively pottery similar to the Upper Missis- Sippi ware. A close variant of the Cahokia pottery has been found at Aztalan. This site is characterized by truncated mounds, ear spools of bone, stone and pot- tery, large chipped hoes, disc beads, shells, three-notched triangular arrow- points and perforated shell implements. The pottery is painted and bur- nished; the vessels are of a great variety of shapes. Along the Mississippi River in the southwestern part of the state a variant of the Ohio Hopewell is found, consisting of large conical burial mounds, burials made in rectangular bark lined pits covered with poles and bark slabs, beneath the floor of the mound. Artifacts consist of large chipped imple- ments of obsidian and flint, pearl beads, copper beads, plates, ear spools, celt, and axes. Pipes are of the concave-based type. The pottery is surprisingly similar to that found in Ohio. The greatest need at the present time is to show the relationship between the Upper and Lower Mississippi cultures, and more especially the tie-up between the prehistoric and historic Indian tribes. (Author’s abstract.) 632ND MEETING The 632nd meeting of the Anthropological Society was held at the National Museum April 21, 1931. | Program: W. M. Wauker, Bureau of American Ethnology: Archeological reconnaissance in the Hawarian Islands (illustrated) —The island of Maui was chosen as representative of the culture prevailing in the Hawaiian Islands before the advent of the whites, and a survey of all existing ruins was made during a stay of nine months in 1928-29 under the provisions of a research Fellowship provided by the Bernice P. Bishop Museum of Honolulu. 044 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 14 Ancient evidences of Hawaiian culture are to be found only on the surface as there is little top soil covering the underlying lava formations on the sites of aboriginal occupation. There are indications of but one such occupation, although legendary accounts imply possibly two or more. Construction in stone made no use of cut or shaped blocks or mortar. Simple blocks and pieces of rough lava or water-worn stones were used where found to build the plat- forms and walled structures known as hezaw and used as places of worship. Some 230 of these sites were found on Maui, exhibiting a great variety of size, shape, and plan,—no two being exactly alike. Orientation toward the sea was a more important consideration than toward the cardinal points, and the site chosen was generally on some headland with a commanding view of the shore; if down in a valley the heiau was walled to provide greater privacy for the sacred ceremonies. The largest site found measured 425 feet long, 340 feet wide, and had a terraced slope 50 feet high where it extended over the edge of the hill. This temple is attributed to a Maui chief of the 16th cen- tury, which is as far back as any of the ruins can be dated with any accuracy, although it is believed at least 500 years have elapsed since the last great traditional period of voyages took place from the southern Polynesian islands. Besides the heiau, the villages contain house platforms on which the grass houses were built, platforms for other small buildings, animal pens, enclosures for canoes, terraces for the cultivation of taro, small patches for sweet pota- toes, gourds, etc. At many places by the shore small platforms of rocks and coral known as koa, or fishermen’s shrines were found. Four of the old grass houses in various conditions of decay are all that remain on the island. In the windy sections the houses had stone walls and only the roof was of thatch. Other archeological features included paved stone foot trails crossing the wildest and rockiest parts of the lava flows, and attributed to the genius of a legendary hero; artificial fishponds formed by building barriers of rock across a narrow bay or cove; playgrounds, such as tracks prepared down zrassy slopes for games of sled coasting, and bowling grounds for the game of maika played with stone discs; and battle sites such as impregnable rocky headlands and steep ridges, as well as battle fields in the sandhills, ete. Burials of important chiefs were made in inaccessible cliffs which are only discovered by chance as all knowledge of them is held in the greatest secrecy. Common people were buried in sandhills or in some deserted gulch, which is still the practice in many places. A detailed account of the reconnaissance will be published by the Bishop Museum of Honolulu. Frank H. H. Roserts, Jr., Secretary SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS THE JosepH HENRY LECTURESHIP OF THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY OF W ASHINGTON The Philosophical Society of Washington, through its General Committee, has decided to establish a lectureship in honor of its first President, JOSEPH Henry. Such action at this time is particularly appropriate, since 1931 is the centenary of the discovery of electromagnetic induction, a discovery which has brought honor not only to Henry, but also to Faraday. The purpose and scope of the Lectureship can best be shown by quoting the report of the special committee, which was adopted by the General Committee. AuG. 19, 1931 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 345 ‘‘(1) There is at present in the hands of the Treasurer a cash balance ; ., and the committee is in agreement that . . . . a portion of it be spent . . . . in some way which will advance the cause of science and reflect credit on the Society. (2) It is proposed that at suitable intervals of time a speaker be selected to address the Society on one of the broad aspects of some field of science, the speaker to review the recent developments or present status of a sub- ject included in or related to the Physical Sciences. (3) It is further proposed that the complete address be put in form for publication and submitted to the JouRNAL of the Washington Academy of Sciences. (4) It is further proposed that the aforementioned address shall be called the Joseph Henry Lecture in memory of the first President of the Philo- sophical Society. (5) It is further proposed that the first Joseph Henry Lecture be de- livered before the Society in the fall of 1931, and that thereafter the lecture shall be delivered annually before the Society in the spring of the year, starting in the spring of 1932. (6) It is further proposed that the expenses of the speaker incidental to a visit to Washington shall be borne by the Society and that in addition an Honorarium of one hundred dollars ($100) shall be presented to the lecturer at a suitable time during his visit. (7) The complete arrangements for any one meeting are to be made by a special committee of three who are to be responsible for selecting the speaker and securing the manuscript in form for publication. No member of the committee should have been a member of the immediately preceding similar committee.”’ The General committee further provided that the special committee for a given year shall be appointed before October 15 of the preceding year. In accordance with this action, the following committees have been appointed: 1931 1932 C. G. ABBOTT L. J. Briaes, Chairman L. H. Apams, Chairman J. H.'TAYtor R. E. Gipson F. E. WRIGHT A transcontinental excursion from New York or Washington to San Fran- cisco by airplane and return by train is being arranged for geomorphologists who will attend the International Geological Congress in 1933. The leader of the excursion will be Dr. A. K. Lopeck of Columbia University. Tais1A STADNICHENKO and ParKEeR D. Trask have been appointed asso- ciate geologists in the Geological Survey and assigned to the fuel section of the geologic branch. M. N. Sort, associate geologist of the Geological Survey, has been appointed professor of optical mineralogy at the University of Arizona. 346 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 14 Obituary Epwarp GoopricH AcHESON, of St. Petersburg, Fla., a member of the AcapDEmy, died in New York, July 6, 1931, after a brief illness. He was born at Washington, Pa., on March 9, 1856, and at an early age became interested in experimental work. He was employed in Edison’s laboratory from 1880 to 1882 in the development of filaments for the electric lamp. About 1891 he discovered a new chemical compound, silicon carbide, now known com- mercially as Carborundum, and in 1906 he devised a method of making colloidal graphite from it. For these and other discoveries, he was awarded many medals and prizes. The degree of Doctor of Science was conferred on him in 1909 by the University of Pittsburg. He was the founder and first recipient of the Acheson Medal, which is awarded by the American Electro- chemical Society for a distinguished contribution in electrothermics. FRANK WIGGLESWORTH CLARKE, a past president of the AcapEmy and for 42 years (1883-1925) Chief Chemist of the U. 8. Geological Survey, died at his home in Washington May 23, aged 84 years. He was born in Boston March 19, 1847, and graduated from Harvard in 1867. He was professor of chemistry at the University of Cincinnati from 1874 to 1883 and had also taught at Cornell and Howard universities. Prof. Clarke was recognized as an international authority on atomic weights and as one of America’s leading chemists. He was the recipient of several honorary degrees from universities both in this country and abroad. Prof. Clarke was one of the first to compile fundamental physical and chemical constants, and for many years he was chairman of the international committee on atomic weights. His Data of geochemistry, published in five editions by the Geological Survey, is a stand- ard reference work. He was a member of the National Academy of Sciences, the Philosophical Society of Washington, and of many other scientific organi- zations, and an honorary member of the Chemical Society of London, the Mineralogical Society of London, the Russian Mineralogical Society, and the Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society. In 1900 he was made Chevalier of the Légion d’Honneur. He was president of the American Chem- ical Society in 1901 and of the Cosmos Club during 1917. As an honorary curator of minerals in the National Museum he did much to bring the collec- tions to their present excellence. It was largely through his effort that this JOURNAL was founded in 1911. WILLIAM JASPER SPILLMAN, agricultural economist of the Department of Agriculture, died in Washington July 11, 1931. He was born in Lawrence County, Mo., Oct. 23, 1863, and studied at the University of Missouri, from which he received the degrees of bachelor of science (1886), master of science (1889), and doctor of science (1910). He was professor of science at the Mis- souri State Normal School (1887-89), Vincennes University (1889-91), and Oregon State Normal School (1891-94), and professor of agriculture at Wash- ington College (1894-1901). He became an agrostologist in the U. S. De- partment of Agriculture in 1902, and from 1905 to 1918 was agriculturist in charge of farm management investigations. Among Dr. Spillman’s best- known publications are Farm grasses of the United States, Farm science, and Balancing of the farm output. ; if page this S AND dustry and Soils. ad + XT io } | . ea a yer fe Nd mao pre as | ees 5 OP. fry Na | ‘33 en Saas oe Og 3s oO sce arpa: . = “338 © eee ah ke eS fo eee re TEAC ime py ho ad ie < NA oth an a of LE. A. Cons, Bur Secretary: Pa ~The Anthropological Society... ‘Soren tiRic Notes AND N EWS. . Onrrvanr: Epwarp Goopricz Acuson, Faank Wicousswonrn Cu xy Vou. 21 | SEPTEMBER 19, 1931 No. 15 JOURNAY OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS C. Wytue Cooke CHARLES DRECHSLER Huaeu L. DrypEN vU. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVHY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W.J. Peters Haroup MorRISON PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E,. A. GOLDMAN G. W. Sross BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Aanes CHASE J. R. SWANTON BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHRGPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Roger C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Roya anp GUILFORD AVES. BaLTIMoREe, MARYLAND Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued semi-~ monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or the ~ twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the issue of the JourNnaAL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors: they should be clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced by zinc etchings being preferable. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors : unless:requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Author’s Reprints—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord- ance with the following schedule of prices: Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers Be 5 Gg usc e eae Be tae $2. 00 100 $ .50 $ .55 $ .60 $1.10 2.50 150 . 90 1.00 1.10 1. 60 3.00 200 1.15 1. 50 1.60 2.10 3.50 250 1.65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. The rate of Subscription. per #OlWMNO 8 2 6c v's o von + cae cus aces tee oes «+--+. BO. 00* Semi-nionthly numbers «.sc5 cee ews cee wes ee hw ee ~20 Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15)..... . 50 Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences” and addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers,Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C. Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made within thirty days after date of the following issue. * Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy am awe ie et Mh Mela AON Fi a! 1 Bee iT ery > alae Wg eer Oe ee Oe Soa ee, ee JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21- SEPTEMBER 19, 1931 No. 15 BOTANY.—WNew plants mainly from western South America—ITI Exviswortu P. Kiuuip, U. 8. National Museum. Ten new species of plants are described in the present paper, and four transfers of species are made. Most of the novelties are in Valeriana, a highly critical genus well represented in the mountains of Peru. STENOPHYLLUS ARGENTINUS (Palla) Killip Bulbostylis argentina Palla, Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr. 57: 258. 1907. Specimens examined (U. S. National Herbarium): ARGENTINA: Cordoba, Stuckert (Kneucker Cyperaceae 195, type collection). Bajo de Aufama, Dept. Tafi, Prov. Tucumdn, 1800 meters, Venturi 3512. Cerro del Campo, Dept. Burreyero, Prov.. Tucumdn, 2000 meters, Venturz 7729. BoEHMERIA PALLIDA (Rusby) Killip Boehmeria diversifolia Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. Bot. 1: 202. 1854. Not Boehmeria diversifolia Miq. (1851). Phenax pallida Rusby, Mem. Torrey Club 4: 259. 1895. POUZOLZIA POEPPIANA (Wedd.) Killip Margarocarpus poeppigianus Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. Bot. 1: 204. 1854. Margarocarpus asper Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. Bot. 1: 204. 1854. Boehmeria discolor Poepp.; Blume, Mus. Bot. Lugd. Bat. 2: 206. 1856. Boehmeria aspera Blume, Mus. Bot. Lugd. Bat. 2: 206, footnote. 1856. te pee eie discolor Wedd. Arch. Mus. Paris 9: 408. pl. 13, A. f. 18-24. Pouzolzia aspera Wedd. in DC. Prodr. 16!: 233. 1869. Not Pouzolzia aspera Wight (1853). Recent collections from Peru show that the differences relied upon by Weddell to separate the two species treated in his final monograph as P. discolor and P. aspera are not constant, and that only a single species is represented. ne EEN | 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. For proceding parts, see this JoURNAL 16: 565-573. 1926, and 19: 191-195. 1929. Received June 1, 1931. oe SEP 2. 1931 : o- - wee FETT Pee) SO OW 048 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 Phthirusa triplinervis Killip, sp. nov. Parasitic shrub, glabrous throughout, the branches terete, very slender, rugulose; leaves elliptic-lanceolate, 5 to 9 em. long, 2 to 3 cm. wide, attenuate- acuminate at apex, acute at base (petiole 8 to 10 mm. long), triplinerved, verrucose-lenticulose; inflorescence paniculate, the main rachis terete, up to 5.5 em. long, very slender, the panicle 3- or 4-branched, the branches sub- angular, 2 to 3 cm. long, the flowers solitary, opposite, sessile; bracts triangu- | lar, about 1 mm. long, acute; bractlets similar but smaller; fruit ovoid, 6 to 7 mm. long, 4 to 5mm. in diameter. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, No. 1,444,051, collected at Hetuché4, Rio Orteguaza, Caqueta Territory, Colombia, July 24, 1926, by G. Woronow and 8. Juzepezuk (no. 6231). Duplicate in the Botanical Garden of the U.S. 8. R. Academy of Sciences. As this material is in fruit only, it is difficult to indicate the species’ precise relationship. The shape of the leaves is suggestive of P. theloneura, but in that species the leaves are l-nerved and the flowers are in racemes. Of the known species of the genus I find none described as having triplinerved leaves. Passiflora pilosissima Killip, sp. nov. Herbaceous vine, ‘‘up to 10 meters in length, profusely ramified;’’? stem subquinquangular, striate, the younger portions densely pilose; stipules narrowly linear-falcate, 3 to 4mm. long, 1 mm. wide at base, purplish, decidu- ous; petioles 5 to 15 mm. long, glandless, pilose, purplish; leaves ovate, 5 to 12 em. long, 2 to 7 cm. wide, 3-lobed at apex (middle lobe triangular, acute or subacute, cuspidate or mucronulate, much larger than the lateral lobes which often are reduced to mere cusps), rounded at base, entire, 3-nerved, obscurely ocellate beneath, membranous, densely appressed-pilose on both surfaces; peduncles in pairs; bracts narrowly linear, subverticillate or one borne just below the two others, 5 to 6 mm. long, 0.5 mm. wide, dark purple; flowers (only in bud in type specimen) ‘“‘greenish white; sepals ovate-lanceolate, obtuse, fleshy; petals ovate, obtuse, thin- membranous; corona filaments in 2 series, the outer linear-lanceolate, tapering gradually from base to apex, half as long as sepals, the inner filiform, minute; operculum closely plicate, denticulate; imen annular, prominent; ovary globose, densely hirsute. Type in the U.S. National Museum, No. 1,348,569, collected in dense damp forests between San Gregorio and Narifio, Department of Antioquia Colombia, altitude 1700 to 2100 meters, December, 1891, by F. C. Lehmann (No. 7630). In the list? of Lehmann’s Passifloraceae this collection is referred to P. mollis, but the nature of the indument shows at a glance that it is quite unlike typical forms of P. mollis. A specimen of this has recently been received by the U. 8. National Museum from the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, and I have thus had an opportunity of making a careful comparison with speci- mens of P. mollis from the type locality along the Quindio Trail. Although the flowers of this specimen are in bud only, the outer corona filaments are sufficiently developed to show an important difference between it and P. mollis; these filaments are linear-lanceolate, tapering from the base to the 2 Bot. Jahrb. Engler 18: Beil. 46: 5. 1894. sEPT. 19, 1931 KILLIP: NEW SOUTH AMERICAN PLANTS 349 apex, while in P. mollis they are liguliform or slightly fusiform. The leaf lobes of P. pilosissima are much sharper than in P. mollis, more nearly approximating those of P. cuspidzfolia, of the Eastern Cordillera of Colombia. Here probably belongs a sterile plant from La Crumbre, Department El Valle, Colombia (Killip 11342). The leaves are proportionately narrower, but are clothed with the same characteristic pubescence. Passiflora loretensis Killip, sp. nov. Herbaceous vine, essentially glabrous throughout; stem terete, striate stipules semi-oblong, 13 to 18 mm. long, 6 to 7 mm. wide, oblique, obtuse and mucronulate at apex, the midnerve slightly eccentric; petioles 1.5 to 2 em. long, bearing 2 pairs of subulate glands, one pair near apex, the other near middle, the glands 1.5 mm. long; leaves lanceolate, 10 to 12 em. long, 5.5 to 6 cm. wide, acuminate at apex, cordulate and subpeltate at base, entire, 7- nerved, reticulate-veined (nerves and veins strongly elevated beneath), coriaceous, scantily pilosulous on nerves beneath, concolorous; peduncles 1.5 to 3.5 em. long, articulate about 5 mm. from apex; bracts cordate-ovate, 2 to 2.5 cm. long, 1 to 1.5 cm. wide, acuminate or abruptly acute, mucronulate, membranous, light green, persistent; flowers about 5 cm. wide, pink (?); calyx tube broadly campanulate, about 6 mm. long, 10 to 15 mm. wide at throat; sepals oblong, 1.8 to 2 cm. long, 6 to 8 mm. wide, obtuse, cucullate toward apex, carinate, the keel terminating in an awn 4 to 5 mm. long; petals slightly shorter than sepals; corona filaments in 5 series, filiform, the 2 outer radiate, about 1.5 cm. long, pale pink, the inner compact, 4 mm. long, deep pink; operculum membranous, 5 mm. long, fimbriate to middle, deep pink; nectar ring a low ridge; limen tubular, 4 mm. long, closely surrounding base of gynophore, crenulate; ovary broadly ovoid; fruit globose, about 5 cm. in diameter, the exocarp coriaceous; seeds narrowly cuneate, 7 to 8 mm. long, 2 to 3 mm. wide, coarsely reticulate. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, No. 1,470,098, collected at La Victoria, on the Amazon River, Department Loreto, Peru, in August or September, 1929, by L. Williams (No. 3086). Duplicate in Field Museum. This is most closely related to P. oerstediz, and though the differences seem slight when stated in a key, these specimens of P. loretensis appear very un- like any material of P. oerstedit at hand. The leaves are much thicker and are green on both surfaces. The bracts are larger. The plant suggests also P. amabilis, which I know only from description and illustrations, but the shape of the petiolar glands and the coloring of the flowers are different, to mention only a few of the distinguishing characters. Clavija magdalenae Killip, sp. nov. Erect shrub, 2 to 3 meters high, the stem 8 to 20 mm. in diameter, castane- ous, lepidote-punctate, suleate, puberulous at end; petioles 2 to 5 cm. long, castaneous, puberulous, and subgeniculate at base, pale green and glabrous above; leaves ovate-elliptic or obovate, 15 to 30 cm. long, 8 to 12 cm. wide, acute or short-acuminate at apex, cuneate at base, decurrent on petiole, entire or remotely denticulate toward apex, conspicuously nerved and veined (midnerve stout, the principal lateral nerves 12 to 15 to a side, the venation closely reticulate), coriaceous, glabrous, drying yellowish green or pale green ’ 300 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 above, pale green beneath; staminate inflorescence loosely racemose, 12 to 15 cm. long, the rachis glabrous, the pedicels 2 to 3 mm. long, stout, clavate, recurved; flowers 5-merous; sepals united about halfway, suborbicular, 2 mm. wide, densely ciliate, orange-red, paler at margin; corolla orange-red, about 10 mm. wide, lobed about three-quarters of distance to base, the lobes ovate-spatulate, about 5 mm. wide, rounded, entire; staminodes 5, distinct, episepalous, 1 mm. long, flat; stamens united into a stout tube, barely 1 mm. long; pistillate inflorescence much reduced, the rachis (in fruit) up to 5 cm long; corolla orange-red, about 12 mm. wide, lobed nearly to base, minutely crenulate; stamens distinct, the filaments stout, 1 mm. long, the anthers sterile; ovary conical; fruit depressed-globose, 1.5 cm. long, 2 cm. in diameter, orange-yellow. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, Nos. 1,433,004 (staminate) and 1,433,005 (pistillate), collected at Pioj6, near Barranquilla, Department Atlantico, Colombia, altitude 400 meters, January, 1929, by Brother Elias (No. 684). The description of the fruit is based upon a specimen collected at Estrella, Lands of Loba, Department Bolivar, Colombia, by H. M. Curran (No. 323). Local names for the plant are huevo de morocot and membrillo. On the basis of the flat staminodes this species comes nearest C. tarapotana in Mez’ key. However, in shape and texture of the leaves the two are quite unlike. Clavija reflexiflora Killip, sp. nov. Shrub or small tree, 1 to 3 (extremes up to 6) meters high, the trunk simple, erect, leafy only at summit, castaneous, finely rufo-tomentose, at length glabrous; leaves elliptic-oblong, 15 to 35 cm. long, 6 to 12 cm. wide, broadest just above the middle, acute or acuminate at apex, tapering to a petiole 4 to 7 cm. long (petiole castaneous, finely rufo-tomentose and geniculate at base, glabrous, sulcate above), entire, subcoriaceous, thicker at margin, glabrous, bright green when dry, lustrous, sparingly lepidote-punctate be- neath, prominently nerved and veined, the midnerve coarse, the primary lateral nerves anastomosing 3 to 5 mm. from margin, the venation closely reticulate; inflorescence racemose, 7 to 8 cm. long, the rachis glabrous, the pedicels strongly reflexed, 3 to 4 mm. long, slender, glabrous; bracts triangu- lar, 1 to 1.2 mm. long, minutely puberulous, persistent; flowers (only stami- nate seen) 4- or 5-merous; sepals united about halfway, ovate-orbicular, 1 to 1.2 mm. wide, rounded, glabrous, minutely ciliate, pale at margin; corolla coalescent nearly to middle, 6 to 8 mm. wide, orange-red or orange-yellow, the lobes obovate, 2 to 3 mm. long, 1.7 to 2 mm. wide, minutely crenulate; staminodes 5, distinct, episepalous, claviform, about 1 mm. in diameter, fleshy ; staminal tube 1 mm. long, thick; fruit globose, 1.5 to 2 cm. in diameter, glabrous, orange-yellow or bright yellow. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, No. 1,462,724, collected in dense forest at San Antonio, on Rio Itaya, Department Loreto, Peru, altitude about 110 meters, September 18, 1929, by E. P. Killip and A. C. Smith (No. 29345). Additional specimens examined, all from the Department of Loreto, Peru: Mishuyacu, near Iquitos, Klug 219, 1320. Yurimaguas, Killip & Smith 27674 (in fruit). Between Yurimaguas and Balsapuerto, Killip & Smith 28112. Along Rio Marafién between mouths of Ric Pastaza and Rio Hual- laga, Killip & Smith 29191, 29203. Puerto Arturo, Killip & Smith 27916. SEPT. 19, 1931 KILLIP: NEW SOUTH AMERICAN PLANTS ool Clavija reflexiflora comes nearest C. lanczfolia in the key in Mez’ Mono- graph of Theophrastaceae, though the plant appears to be most closely related to C. parviflora. Clavija lancifolia has proportionately narrower leaves and smaller staminate flowers; C. parviflora has shorter petioles, erect pedicels, smaller flowers, and the staminodes are globose rather than claviform. The proposed species resembles also C. poeppigiz, of which Mr. Smith and I collected several specimens in this general region, but the under surface of the leaves and the inflorescence of that plant are pilose, and the leaves are, on the average, much larger. Funastrum ovalifolium (Rusby) Killip Philibertella ovalifolia Rusby, Deser. 8. Amer. Pl. 94. 1920. Specimens examined: CoLomBIA: MAGDALENA: Mamateca, H. H. Smith 1683 (U. S. Nat. Herb., type coll.). About 9 kilometers south of Santa Marta, Killip & Smith 21105 (U.S. Nat. Herb.). Valeriana oligodonta Killip, sp. nov. Erect herb, about 30 cm. high, from a thickened root, essentially glabrous; basal leaves long-petioled (petioles 7 to 8 cm. long), simple, unlobed, ovate, 4.5 to 7 em. long, 3 to 4 cm. wide, rounded at apex, abruptly narrowed, or tapering gradually to petiole, entire or undulate in upper half, irregularly crenate-dentate in lower, minutely ciliolate, obscurely flabellate-nerved, thin-membranous when dry; cauline leaves one pair, lanceolate, 2.5 to 4 cm. long, 1 to 1.5 em. wide, tapering to an obtuse apex, subsessile, irregularly serrate or shallowly lobed toward base; flowers borne in dense globose heads about 1 em. wide, their peduncles stout, those at the lower node about 2 cm. long, those at the upper node up to 1 cm. long or the heads subsessile; bracts linear, subentire, minutely ciliolate; bractlets linear-spatulate, 2 to 2.5 mm. long, rounded at apex; corolla tube funnel-shaped, 1.5 to 2 mm. long, the limb 4- or 5-lobed, 3 to 4 mm. wide. Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum of Natural History, No. 580434, collected on the hills of the Saxaihuamdn, Department Cuzco, Peru, altitude 3,500 to 3,600 meters, November 20, 1928, by F. L. Herrera (No. 2190). This differs from V. herrerae, to which it seems to be most closely allied, in having a more compact inflorescence, the corolla being fully three times larger, with a deeper lobation. ‘The leaves are much larger, and differently shaped. Valeriana maxima Killip, sp. nov. Coarse herb, 1.5 to 2.5 meters high, glabrous throughout except for a slight indument on the bracts; stem terete, up to 1 em. thick, striate; basal leaves unlobed, ovate-elliptic, 8 to 10 cm. long, 3 to 4 em. wide, acuminate, their petioles 7 to 10 cm. long; cauline leaves pinnatifid nearly to rachis (hence the rachis narrowly winged), up to 10 em. long, sessile or the lower with stout petioles about 3 cm. long and connate at base, the lateral segments 1 to 3 pairs, oblong or ovate-oblong, 1 to 3.5 em. long, 0.8 to 2 em. wide, obtuse or sub- acute, entire or undulate, the terminal segment ovate, 7 to 10 cm. long, 3 to 3.5 em. wide, acuminate; panicle diffuse, up to 75 cm. long, 25 cm. wide, the primary and secondary branches opposite, ultimately dichotomous; bracts triangular, 2 to 3 mm. long, pilosulous; bractlets linear, 1 to 1.5 mm. long; 352 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 corolla funnel-shaped, 1.5 to 2 mm. long, pure white; achenes lance-oblong, 2 mm. long, 3-nerved on one face, 1-nerved or other, pappose, the pappus tawny. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, Nos. 1,358,589-591, collected at Huacapistana, Department Junin, Peru, altitude 1,800 meters, June 5, 1929, by E. P. Killip and A. C. Smith (No. 24105). This belongs to the group of Valeriana represented in Peru by V.macbridez, V. bambusicaulis, and V. warburgit. From these it differs in the cauline leaves being merely deeply pinnatifid, with a winged rachis, rather than pinnately compound. It resembles somewhat V. dzpsacordes, also collected by Mr. Smith and myself (no. 24171) at Huacapistana, the type locality of the species, but in that plant the cauline leaves are unlobed. Valeriana asplenifolia Killip, sp. nov. Cespitose herb, glabrous except at the nodes of the inflorescence, the root- stock elongate, thick, branched toward apex; leaves mainly basal, forming a rosette, linear-lanceolate in general outline, 5 to 15 cm. long (including a petiole about half their length), 0.5 to 1.5 em. wide, pinnate, or pinnatifid toward apex, the leaflets 10 to 15 pairs, opposite or subopposite, ovate or lance-ovate, the lowermost up to 9 mm. long, 5 mm. wide, regularly crenate- serrate with 4 or 5 teeth to a side, obtuse, sessile and subdecurrent on rachis, the lower remote, the upper approximate and even imbricate; cauline leaves a single pair at base of inflorescence, much reduced, 5 to 7 mm. long, up to 2 mm. wide, pinnatifid at least toward base, sessile; stem up to 25 cm. high, the inflorescence racemose-paniculate, the flowers densely massed at the ends of short branchlets in subglobose heads up to 1 cm. wide; bractlets linear- oblong, 2.5 to 3 mm. long, 1 to 1.5 mm. wide, obtuse, dark green at center, pale at margin; corolla funnel-shaped, the tube 2.5 mm. long, 1.5 mm. wide at throat, white, the lobes linear, 1 mm. long, obtuse, greenish white; achenes narrowly lance-oblong, about 1 mm. long, dark brown, inconspicuously nerved, pappose, the pappus 10-rayed, brownish white. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, No. 1,357,123, collected in shade of rocks of puna on Mount La Juntay, near Huancayo, Department Junin, Peru, altitude 4,700 meters, April 27, 1929, by E. P. Killip and A. C. Smith (No. 22051). From V. thalictroides, which it resembles in general appearance, this species | is distinguished by the more prominent and more regular toothing of the leaves, much reduced cauline leaves, shorter bractlets, and narrower corolla lobes. The foliage greatly resembles the fronds of ferns in the group of Asplenium lunulatum. Valeriana rufescens Killip, sp. nov. Cespitose herb, rufo-tomentellous nearly throughout, drying black; root- stock woody, 5 to 7 mm. thick, branched toward apex; leaves mainly basal, forming a rosette, narrowly lanceolate in general outline, 8 to 10 cm. long (including petiole 2 to 4 em. long), 1.5 to 2 em. wide, pinnate in lower half (leaflets oblong or oblong-spatulate, up to 1 cm. long, 0.5 em. wide, obtuse, irregularly serrate with 2 or 3 serrations to a side, sessile), pinnatifid in SEPT. 19, 1931 KILLIP: NEW SOUTH AMERICAN PLANTS 300° upper half, the upper surface of the leaves densely rufo-tomentellous, the lower surface rufo-tomentellous on veins, otherwise glabrous; cauline leaves two pairs, pinnatifid, similar in texture and indument to the basal leaves, the lower pair short-petioled, the upper pair sessile; stem up to 20 em. high; inflorescence racemose-paniculate, 7 to 8 em. long, 2 to 2.5 em. wide, the flowers borne in subglobose heads on short (up to 8 mm.) branches; bracts broadly spatulate, 3 to 4 mm. long, 2 to 2.56 mm. wide, truncate, obsoletely crenulate; achenes oblong, trigonous, about 1.5mm. long, pappose, the pappus 8-rayed. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, No. 1,470,033, collected at Munna, Huallaga (Valley?), Peru, altitude 3,800 to 3,900 meters, by A. Weberbauer (No. 6786). Like the preceding, this is related to V. thalictrozdes; from both of these it differs in being clothed nearly throughout with a dense reddish-brown indu- ment. The leaves are not wholly pinnate, asin V. thalictrozdes, nor are the divisions regularly crenate-serrulate, asin V. asplenzfolva. Valeriana agrimonifolia Killip, sp. nov. Slender herb, up to 65 em. high, glabrous throughout, except fruit; stem reddish brown, terete; leaves all pinnate, the basal and lower ones 6 to 9 cm. long (including petiole about 1.5 cm.), the uppermost about 2.5 em. long, the leaflets coarsely and regularly crenate-serrate, membranous, the lateral ovate, 7 to 15 mm. long, 5 to 7 mm. wide, sessile or subsessile, the terminal leaflet ovate or obovate, slightly larger, short-petiolulate; inflorescence race- mose-paniculate, 40 to 45 cm. long, about 12 cm. wide (unusually regular for the genus), the primary and secondary branches opposite, the latter two or three times dichotomous, the flowers congested at the ends of the ultimate branches; bracts narrowly linear, about 4 mm. long; bractlets linear-spatulate, about 3 mm. long, green, purplish at tips; corolla tube narrowly funnel-shaped, 0.5 mm. long, cream-white, the lobes orbicular; achenes ovate, 1 to 1.5 mm. long, subfalcate, 3-nerved on one side, 1-nerved on other, pilosulous, pappose, the pappus 8-rayed, light green, purplish at base. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, No. 1,357,035, collected at Tarma, Department Junin, Peru, altitude 3,100 meters, April 22, 1929, by E. P. Killip and A. C. Smith (No. 21933). This probably is nearest V. warburgiz, but it differs in the size and toothing of the leaflets and the congested grouping of the flowers at the ends of the branches of the inflorescence. 304 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 HERPETOLOGY.—A new hzard (Anolis pinchoti) from Old Provi- dence Island. Doris M. Cocuran, U. 8. National Museum. (Communicated by C. WyTHE CooKE.)! In 1929 the United States National Museum received from Mr. Gifford Pinchot an exceedingly valuable collection of natural history specimens collected on various tropical islands touched at by the Pinchot South Sea Expedition. Among the preserved material was a pair of lizards from Old Providence, an island in the Caribbean Sea belonging to Colombia, which represent a species new to science. I take pleasure in dedicating the new species to the donor. Anolis pinchoti new species. Diagnosis.—Tail subcylindrical; dorsal scales keeled, considerably larger than those on the flanks; gular and ventral scales keeled; digital expansion strongly developed; occipital scale larger than ear-opening, separated from supra-orbital semicircles by two or three rows of scales; the semicircles separated from each other by one or two scales; median snout scales smooth or very faintly rugose, those nearing the canthus with slight irregular keels; enlarged supraoculars faintly keeled; anterior half of superciliary ridge with two elongate scales, the first the longest; one or two series of somewhat irregu- larly enlarged scales paralleling the infralabials below, and separated from them by two rows of smaller scales; tibia measuring more than four-fifths the distance from end of snout to posterior border of ear-opening; the ad- pressed hind limb reaching beyond the eye. Description of the type-—U.S. N. M., No. 76945, an adult male from Old Providence Island, Colombia, collected on April 23, 1929 by Dr. A. K. Fisher. Head one and three-fourths as long as broad, longer than the tibia; forehead slightly concave; frontal ridges nearly obsolete; upper head-scales medium in size, the inner ones practically smooth, those nearing the canthus faintly rugose; scales of supraorbital semicircles conspicuously enlarged, separated by two scales; supraocular disk composed of three large inner scales and four or five smaller outer scales, each with a single low keel, the inner ones separated from the supraorbital semicircles by one row of granular scales, the outer separated from the superciliaries by from one to three rows; occipital shield nearly round, larger than the ear-opening, separated from the semicircles by two or three rows of scales; canthus rostralis quite distinct, composed of five or six keeled scales, the anterior small, the fifth the longest, the sixth continu- ing backward in line with the two keeled superciliaries, the first of which is quite long; posterior half of the superciliary ridge granular; a series of enlarged, keeled suboculars, not reaching the lip, but in contact with several of the supralabials; about four rows of more or less rugose loreal scales; eight keeled lower labials to below center of eye; ear-opening moderate, vertically oval; dewlap moderate with a thickened edge of densely set, coarse scales, those on sides of appendage elongate, relatively large and set in regular rows; gular scales small, elongate, keeled; median dorsal scales keeled, somewhat smaller 1 Received June 20, 1981. Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smith- sonian Institution. sEPT. 19, 1931 COCHRAN: ANOLIS PINCHOTI 300 than the ventrals but distinctly larger than those on the flanks, the three median dorsal rows rather abruptly larger than the remaining dorsals, which are likewise keeled; no dorsal crest in evidence; a low nuchal crest; ventral scales moderate in size, imbricate, distinctly keeled like all the scales of the underside; scales on anterior surfaces of limbs somewhat larger than ventrals, keeled; tail sub-cylindrical, not verticilate, its lateral scales keeled, about the size of the ventrals, the median row above and the three or four median rows below being considerably enlarged and keeled; body compressed; adpressed hind limb reaching beyond the eye; a pair of greatly enlarged post-anals present. Dimensions.—Snout to vent, 44 mm.; snout to posterior border of ear, 13 mm.; head width, 7.5 mm.; tibia, 11 mm.; fore leg, 20 mm.; hind leg, 36 mm.; tail reproduced. Color (in aleohol).—Back and sides drab; limbs, snout, tail and under parts light russet brown; a few indistinct dark dots on the sides, and some dusky, ill-defined bands on the limbs and tail; a large sepia patch across the occiput; skin and scales of gular fan pale fawn color. Variation.—In comparison with the type, the only paratype, a female, U. 8S. N. M. No. 76946, from the same place, has the scales on the snout slightly more rugose. The occipital plate is somewhat smaller and conse- quently the ear appears much larger. A dark median dorsal stripe bordered by two narrow light dorso-lateral stripes appears in the female, while the cross-banding of the limbs is more accentuated. In the scalation of the loreal and supraocular regions, the two specimens are practically identical. The female is 7 mm. shorter than the male. Both unfortunately have lost their original tails. The new species is obviously related most closely to Anolis stigmosus from Taboga Island, Panama, as identified by Dunn.? The style of body and tail scalation is much alike in both species and the head plates are similar in arrangement. ‘The most striking difference is in the snout, which is relatively much longer in pinchotz than in stigmosus. The former likewise has a shorter tibia and slightly larger head- and body-scales. The color pattern of the head supplies another difference, for the dark patch of pinchoti is placed relatively farther forward on the occiput and is broader and rather ill-defined in outline, while the small dark spot found in most specimens of stigmosus is very distinct and placed farther backward on the nape. In April, 1884, the United States Fish Commission Steamer Albatross secured one Anolis on Old Providence. This specimen is now completely macerated, but it probably belonged to the species described above. 2H. R. Dunn. Notes on Central American Anolis. Proc. New England Zool. Club 12: 17. Aug. 7, 1930. 356 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 ZOOLOGY.—Chondronema passali (Leidy, 1852) n.g. (Nematoda), with notes on rts life history. J. R. Curistre and B. G. Currwoop, Bureau of Plant Industry. (Communicated by N. A. Coss.) Joseph Leidy (1852) found, near Carlisle, Pa., large numbers of larval nemas inhabiting the body-cavity of adults of the very common and widespread beetle, Passalus cornutus (family Lucanidae). Leidy suspected that the adult of this nema occurs as a parasite of some other animal, the beetles acting only as secondary host. He endeav- ored to rear adult nemas by feeding infested beetles to frogs (Rana pipiens) but failed. Since Leidy’s discovery, this parasite must have come to the attention of many entomologists; but his seems to be the only published record. We have studied several hundred adult specimens of Passalus cor- nutus from Maryland, Delaware, Virginia, North Carolina, Illinois and Louisiana, and found nearly all of them infested. (Leidy reports 90 per cent). Of the relatively few grubs examined, one-fifth were infested. ‘The nema was also found in the pupae, but too few were examined to determine the proportion infested. Most adult beetles harbor the parasites in large numbers (estimated at from 500 to 1000) and always in various stages of development, from very young to full grown individuals. Although the oldest larvae in the body-cavity are not sexually mature, they do not increase in size after leaving the host. Infested beetle grubs and pupae appear to harbor fewer para- sites. ; Passalus cornutus occurs in decaying wood, usually in galleries in partly decayed stumps and logs, and its eggs are evidently laid in these galleries, for here the young grubs develop and pupate. We thought it very improbable that this nema, in its adult stage, is a parasite of any vertebrate, for even if a vertebrate were able to find and eat the beetles, or otherwise become infested, the possibility of the eggs or larvae of the parasite getting back into the galleries of the beetle and bringing about such a widespread pronounced infesta- tion seems very remote. Furthermore the nema bears little resem- -blance to any known parasite of vertebrates. We therefore concluded that the entire life cycle probably takes place in or near the beetle galleries and that the adult nemas live free in the moist, decayed wood or frass; and, after many hours of tedious searching of such material, we finally discovered the adult nema. 1 Received May 30, 1931. Published by permission of the Chief of the Bureau of Plant Industry. SEPT. 19,1931 CHRISTIE AND CHITWOOD: CHONDRONEMA PASSALI 300 This nema seems most closely related to Allantonema, Bradynema, Howardula, Tylenchinema and their relatives. The large, lateral pores on the tail remind one of similar structures possessed by cer- tain parasites of earthworms, a matter which will be alluded to later. However, we do not deem it advisable to assign this species to any existing genus, and therefore propose the new genus Chondronema for it. Chondronema new genus Head with four well marked papillae. Dorsal esophageal gland (intestinal gland or Schlunddriise of some other authors) present. Amphidial openings lateral, slightly nearer mouth than papillae; amphidial glands large. Esopha- gus without bulb-like swelling. A pair (one right, one left) of large lateral pores (Phasmids?) on the tail. Male with slight bursa; two spicules, without gubernaculum. Testis reflexed. Vulva functionless unless used in copula- tion. Body of female degenerating into nearly structureless sack filled with developing embryos. Body-cavity parasites throughout larval development, but free-living throughout adult stage. Type species—Chondronema passali (Leidy 1852). Sphaerularia and Atractonema are at once differentiated by the presence of a prolapsed uterus. Chondronema is further differentiated from all other apparently related genera by the fact that the vulva, if it functions at all, serves only for the purpose of copulation, later becoming vestigial. It never serves for the extrusion of eggs or larvae. The larvae remain parasitic until full grown, and the adults remain free-living. Chondronema passali (Leidy, 1852) Body-cavity larvae: Head papillae in form of distinct elevations. Mouth minute, spear slender, 2u long, without basal swelling. Amphidial openings small, amphidial glands nearly filling body in head region. Lateral caudal pores large, conspicuous, with distinct ducts. Anus distinct. Tail with short caudal projection. Male: Head papillae not in form of distinct elevations. Spear degenerate or lacking. Amphidial openings distinct, amphidial glands with brownish pigment. Excretory pore and renette cell obscure. Lateral caudal pores present. Spicules nearly straight, 50u long; bursa inconspicuous, in front of anus. Female: Body retaining original shape but degenerating into nearly struc- tureless sack, filled, first with ova, later with motile larvae. Traces of mouth and anus sometimes visible. Vulva becoming vestigial. MORPHOLOGY Larvae from uterus of female. These larvae have a length of 0.2 mm. and a body diameter of 12u. The slender spear, 2u long appears to have two minute thickenings. The anterior end of the esophagus is faintly differentiated. The region of the body later to be occupied by the intestine is indicated by a somewhat coarser and darker granulation. pe nee 358 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21 Noy V5 0.05 mm Figs. 1-8. 1, Youngest body-cavity larva, lateral view. 2, Head of adult male, lateral view. 3, Gonad of young female larva. 4, Gonad of larva .87 mm. long, prob- ably amale. 5, Ova from body of mother nema. 6, Gonad from female larva 1.45 mm. long (somewhat older than in fig. 3). 7, Tail end of adult male, lateral view. 8, Gonad from male larva 3.2 mm. long. a, dark spots in dorso-ventral plane opposite anterior end of spear; amph, amphids; amph gl, ammphidial gland; an, anus; b, crescent-shaped element crossing spear in dorso- ventral plane; brs, bursa; cdl pr, caudal projection; ex cl, excretory or rennette cell; int, intestine; jct, junction of esophageal tube with duct from esophageal gland; Irv, larvae in body of mother nema; dum oe, lumen of esophagus, (esophageal tube); nrv 7, nerve ring; oe, esophagus; oe gl, esophageal gland; or, mouth; ov, ova; ovr, ovary; p ex, excre- tory pore; cdl por, caudal pore; ppl, papillae; sp, spear; tes, testis. . ee SEPT. 19,1931 CHRISTIE AND CHITWOOD: CHONDRONEMA PASSALI 309 Figs.9-17. 9, Tail end of last stage body-cavity female larva, lateral view. 10, Asin fig. 9, ventral view. 11, Posterior end adult female containing eggs, lateral view. 12, Same female as in fig. 11, anterior end, lateral view. 13, Posterior end adult female containing motile larvae, lateral view. 14, Head of male, body-cavity larva 1.1 mm. long, lateral view. 15, Last stage, body-cavity female larva, lateral view. 16, Last stage, body-cavity, female larva end view of head. 17, As in fig. 16, dorsal view of anterior end. 360 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15. hl aoe, Qike sso oe 2.9 Bo. HOLOMt Olas 3.0 The minute mouth is located on a distinct elevation. The slender spear is about 2u long. About one third the distance from the point to the base of the spear, it is crossed by a darkened, crescent-shaped structure, lying in a dorso-ventral plane, with the convex side anteriad, and each arm ending in a slight enlargement. This structure (fig. 14), together with the spear, gives the appearance of a miniature anchor. The esophagus, whose contour can be faintly seen, is nearly cylindrical, and has a diameter of about 6 to 7u; it is constricted at the nerve ring. On the dorsal side of the body, back of the nerve ring and between it and the anterior end of the intestine (fig. 1), is a large, finely granular, unicellular body with a large nucleus, the esophageal gland (intestinal gland of Goodey 1930, and Schlunddriise of Wilker 1923). An esophageal lumen, 1 to 1.5u in diameter with a cuticularized wall, extends from the pharyngeal region to the intestine. The renette cell, 32u long by 6u in maximum diameter and possessing a nucleus, lies on the ventral side of the body with its anterior end opposite the excretory pore, at the base of the esophagus. The tail endihas the form shown in fig. 1. On each side of the tail, about half way to the end is a relatively very large pore. These pores are similar to those found in last-stage larvae and will be described later. The genital primordium is located at about the middle of the body (fig. 1). The sexes at this stage of development were not distinguished. 0:26 4:36 7 5/67) Juve Os Le 2A A567 4586 2.6 Youngest body-cavity larvae. 0.38 mm. Last-stage body-cavity larvae. 0293.87 4:0. Juve", 2:05 hat (SSS Gs me 2105 3.3 mm. The males are easily distin- 3.9 mm. guished, being considerably more transparent than the females. _ In addition there is a difference in the developing gonads. In both sexes the body is nearly cylindrical, tapering slightly and gradually at the extremities. The head is nearly truncate and the mouth is not elevated as in very young larvae. Crossing the spear in a dorso-ventral plane is the crescent-shaped element as | described for the younger stage. Slightly in front of this crescent-shaped structure and also in a dorso-ventral plane may be seen two dark spots, one on either side of the spear (fig. 14). Around the mouth, on the outer-anterior margin of the head are four large papillae placed about equidistant from one another. The openings of the amphids are slightly nearer the mouth than the papillae and quite small. They are circular or possibly slightly ellipsoidal. Internally each amphidial tube leads to a large gland (fig. 17). The esopha- gus has an average diameter of from 15 to 20u, and is nearly cylindrical. It appears to be non muscular, is without bulb-like swellings, and is traversed throughout by a lumen with a diameter of from 1.5 to 2u and a heavily cuticularized wall. At the point where this esophageal tube enters the intestine there is a slight constriction followed by a small enlargement, a SEPT. 19,1931 CHRISTIE AND CHITWOOD: CHONDRONEMA PASSALI 361 character observed in larvae of all ages (fig. 15). The dorsal, esophageal gland is usually somewhat flattened against the anterior end of the intestine. From this gland a duct leads forward on the dorsal side of the body and empties into the esophageal tube near the base of the pharynx. The junction of the duct with the esophageal tube is easily seen, but its course posteriad is more difficult to follow (fig. 14). The well developed intestine is granular in appearance and possesses a lumen filled with a homogeneous and apparently more or less gelatinous sub- stance. The anus is a distinct opening leading into a short rectum. It probably does not function in extruding fecal material. When specimens are placed under pressure a droplet of a semi-gelatinous substance is some- times extruded through the anus. ‘The tail (figure 9) is terminated by a small projection about 3 to 4u long. Located on the sides, about half way from the anus to the tip of the tail, are the lateral, caudal pores, nearly a micron in diameter and surrounded by slightly protruding lips. A distinct duct leads inward, passing through a somewhat light-colored area 10 to 15. in diameter (figs. 9 & 10). This does not appear to be a gland nor could any glands be definitely associated with these structures. One is reminded of similiar organs on the tail of Dicelzs filaria (Dujardin and Ungella secta Cobb, both parasites of earthworms. In the case of the former species, as figured by Wilker (1926) the resemblance is especially marked. Many of the body-cavity larvae are characterized by having the body divided into what appears, under low magnification, to be long segments. These pseudosegments vary in number and length and in many cases are restricted to the anterior half of the body. They are formed by the darker periphery of the intestine or the tissue underlying the body wall, extending inward and constricting the clearer, inner portion of the intestine. This condition seems to have disappeared in the oldest body-cavity larvae, nor is it always present in the younger stages. Development of the gonads. In the youngest parasitic larva secured (fig. 1) the genital primordium was composed of a large, anterior, terminal cell and three slightly smaller posterior cells, each with a large nucleus. What is evidently an anterior cap cell (as described by Wiilker, 1923, for Allantonema mirable) was present although the corresponding posterior cap cell was not observed. The sexes were not distinguished at this stage. A slightly later stage of development is shown in figure 4, as found in a larva 0.87 mm. in length taken from a P. cornutus grub. It is composed of a large anterior terminal cell and a group of about 10 or 12 smaller posterior cells. A large, elongated cell occurs in front of what is designated above as the anterior terminal cell. It is also present in older stages of both sexes (figs. 3 and 6) and somewhat resembles a similiarly placed cell in the larva of Tylenchinema oscinellae which Goodey believes to be the primordium of what he calls the intestinal gland. In the present case, however, the esophageal gland is already formed. 362 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 In a larva 3.2 mm. long the male gonad has progressed to the stage shown in figure 8. It is composed of a large, anterior, terminal cell, a long, cylin- drical mass of small polyhedral cells of more or less uniform size, and five large posterior terminal cells with large nuclei, the last mentioned presumably destined to form the vas deferens. The gonad of the adult male (fig. 7) is markedly shorter than the develop- ing gonad in a larva 3.2mm. long. Wilker (1923) noted a similiar shortening of the testis of Allantonema mirable. He points out that as the maturing of the spermatozoa begins at the posterior end of the organ and progresses anteriad, the mature spermatozoa occupy less space than the cells from which they are formed, resulting in a shortening of the organ. A fairly young stage of the female genital primordium is shown in figure 3- It consists of an anterior terminal cell, a large, multinucleated ovarian cell and about three to five posterior cells. A further development of the female genital primordium, from a specimen 1.45 mm. long, is shown in figure 6. Adult female. All adult females obtained for study were filled, from one end to the other, with developing ova or, in older ones, motile larvae. The shape of the body remains about the same as that of the oldest body-cavity larvae. (See p. 360). Faint traces of the mouth and anus could sometimes be seen and in one case a rudimentary vulva 115y in front of the anus. All other internal structures were obliterated. The body is covered with small cuticular bosses, irregularly placed and somewhat more numerous in the head region. OD SO © PO ININ G4: Adult male. 1st specimen Te Sod 86 noo 2.0 mm. eon OMe UNI HO 2nd specimen 4-49 57 36 2.4 mm. | The mouth is small and without differentiated lips and the spear appears to be lacking. The amphidial glands, with brown pigment, cover the anterior end of the esophagus back for a distance of about 40u. The posterior part of the esophagus is twisted and the esophageal gland is apparently degenerat-_ ing. For the shape of the tail see figure 7. The nearly straight, equal, rather slender spicules, 50u long, taper slightly throughout to sharp points. The testis extends forward about 0.3 mm. and the blind end ‘is reflexed for about 0.15 mm. The small thin, transparent bursa is entirely in front of the anus. Caudal pores are present in essentially the same form as in the parasitic larvae, although perhaps not quite so conspicuous. The caudal projection has disappeared and in its place there is a small, rounded and slightly elevated scar. LIFE HISTORY The parasites enter the host as very young larvae. The method of entering is not known. It seems unlikely that such immature lar- sEPT. 19,1931 CHRISTIE AND CHITWOOD: CHONDRONEMA PASSALI 363 vae, possessing a small and apparently ineffective spear, are able to penetrate the hard exoskeleton of adult beetles. That beetles are being continually infected is indicated by the fact that very young parasites are present regardless of the age of the beetles or the time of the year when they are collected. It seems to us more probable that the larval parasites are taken per os while the beetles are feeding. The exceedingly heavy infestations encountered suggests the possi- bility that the mother nemas with their entire progeny may be swal- lowed. The young larvae moult once while still in the body of the mother nema and another moult probably takes place soon after emergence from the host. Experiments to discover the as yet unknown method of exit from the host by keeping beetles in confinement were inconclusive, but it was at least demonstrated that during the time of the experiments larvae were not escaping from the beetles in any considerable numbers. Whenever beetles were killed and placed in cultures of moist, decayed wood, all the body-cavity parasites died, which seems to render the possibility of the parasites being liberated through the death of the host as unlikely. The oldest of the body-cavity larvae were on many occasions removed from the beetles and placed in moist, decayed wood and various other types of cultures, but they always died, although in one instance such a larva was kept alive for ten days, at the end of which time the indication of an approaching moult seemed evident. Wilker (1923) when studying Allantonema mirable found that the larvae entered the intestine of the beetle from the body cavity and were passed out with the feces. When larvae were taken directly from the body cavity of the host to cultures they often lived for a considerable period but did not develop to sexual maturity. He concluded that the sojourn in the intestine of the host is necessary in preparing the larvae for a free-living existance. Fuchs (1929), work- ing with Parasitylenchus contortus, var. typographi, appears to have been more successful in rearing body-cavity larvae to maturity in cultures, and takes issue with Wilker on this point. Fuchs believes that failure was due to the fact that the larvae selected had not re- mained in the host long enough. Wiilker also points out that in the cases of Allantonema, Bradynema and Parasitylenchus, where the method of exit from the host has been studied, it takes place only at the time when the host insects are sexually active, i.e. egg-laying time. This is true for Howardula benigna Cobb, 1926 and apparently also for Tylenchinema oscinellae. Failure to secure free-living stages of Chondronema passali in cages 364 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 where the beetles were confined may have been due to the fact that the beetles were not sexually active at the time. LITERATURE CITED Cobb, N. A. Howardula benigna; a parasite of the cucumber-beetle. Contributions to a science of Nematology X., pp. 345-352, 8 figs. 1928. Fuchs, Gilbert. Nachschrift zu Wilkers Bemerkungén. Zeitsch. f. Parasit., Abt. F, 2 (2): 291-293. 1929. Goodey, T. On a remarkable new nematode, Tylenchinema oscinellae gen. et. sp. n., parasitic in the frit-fly, Oscinella frit L., attacking oats. Phil. Tr. Roy. Soe. London, 218 (series B): 315-3438, p. 22-26. 1930. Leidy, Joseph. Some observations on Nematoidea imperfecta, and descriptions of three parasitic Infusoriae. Tr. Am. Phil. Soc., Phila., n.s.10 (2): 241-244, pl. 11, fig. 42-51. 1852. Wiilker, Gerhard. Uber Fortpflanzung und Entwicklung von Allantonema und ver- wandten Nematoden. Ergebnisse und Fortschritte Zool. 5 (Hefte 4): 389-507, 53 figs. 1923. — Uber geschlechtsreife Nematoden im Regenwurm. Archiv. f. Schiffs-u. Tro- _ penhygiene 30: 610-623, fig. 1926. PALEONTOLOGY .—Indianites, new name for the Cambrian crusta- cean Indiana Ulrich and Bassler1| E. O. Ulrich and R. S. Bass- ler. Recently we published a work entitled Cambrian bivalved crustacea of the Order Conchostraca,? in which we endeavored to retain as many of the previously described genera and species of these interesting Cambrian fossils as possible by redescription and illustration. In emending the genus Indiana Matthew, 1902, we selected a new geno- type in place of the one that had been cited because the latter, which was inadequately described and figured, was found after careful preparation and study to be a good species of Bradoria. The other species referred to Indiana by Matthew proved to belong to a well. defined generic group, and so in order to preserve Matthew’s name we selected one of these, Indiana lippa, as its genotype and also proposed the new family Indianidae with Indiana based upon this selected species as its type genus. Prof. T. D. A. Cockerell, whose keen in- terest in nomenclatural questions as well as other branches of biology is well known, has called our attention to the fact that in spite of our good intentions we are violating the rules of nomenclature and sug- gested that we correct. this error. Therefore, we now propose the new name Jndianites as a substitute for Indiana Ulrich and Bassler, 1931, and the new family Indianitidae in place of the one previously named Indianidae. 1 Received July 22, 1931. 2 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. vol. 78, no. 2847, art 4, pp. 1-130, pls. 1-10, 1931. smpr. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 365 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 474TH MEETING The 474th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, February 25, 1931, President MEINzER presiding. Informal communications: W. P. Wooprine displayed by lantern slides two aeroplane views disclosing presumed earthquake cracks in the vicinity of the Elk Hills, San Joaquin Valley, California. The cracks, now nearly obliterated, are marked by trenches 1 to 2 feet deep and a few feet wide which cross drains and divides alike. They are presumably secondary earth cracks of the type described by Lawson as shatter cracks caused by the intense vibration. Discussed by Messrs. Hess and GILLULY. JOSIAH BRIDGE summarized recent studies of a fossil fauna from the Ellen- burger limestone of central Texas, and correlated the faunal horizons with the stratigraphic sequence of the Ozark region and of Wisconsin. The studies show that the Ellenburger fauna includes species from both eastern and western sources. Program: Pururr B. Kine: Geology of the Marathon District, Texas.—The Marathon uplift, lying immediately east of the Cordilleran ranges in western Texas, is a Cenozoic dome from which the Cretaceous cover has been stripped. The center of the dome reveals Paleozoic rocks that possess an Appalachian type of structure. Erosion of the Paleozoic rocks under arid conditions has etched out the weaker strata into broad flats and has left some layers of novaculite and other resistant beds standing out in sharp ridges as a skeleton of the ancient structure. The lowlands of Paleozoic strata are surrounded by escarpments in which limestones of Permian and Comanche age crop out. The Paleozoic rocks total 22,000 feet in thickness, and are subdivided as follows: Feet Permian series Dolomite, limestone, shale, and much con- glomerate, divided into six formations... 7,500 Pennsylvanian series Gaptank formation (conglomerate, limestone, (Possibly including Sandsvone, anGdesiale pean eek ek 1,800 some Mississippian Haymond formation (sandstone and _ shale, in lower part) with a boulder bed in upper part)....... 2,500 Dimple formation (limestone and shale)..... 700 Tesnus formation (sandstone and shale) .. 500-7 ,000 Devonian (?) system Caballos novaculite (including bedded chert).. 400 Ordovician system Mianavillasccliert: =. semeret eres a. eee 300 Wiooudspalollow, sale (ite sere metres a es. 500 Fort Pena formation (limestone, chert, and COMTIOMETALC yee eee. 150 NTisaice shales ioe ee ant aay tA peste ns 50 Marathonlimestones ss sens o, 800 Cambrian system Wazcer Hat sandstome. ss os4 422. 5. . exposed, 250 During the Paleozoic era the Marathon region was subject to intermittent crustal unrest and—as in the post-Paleozoic Coast Ranges of California— deposition and uplift went on simultaneously in adjacent areas, peculiar con- glomerates which indicate a complex tectonic history were deposited, and a relatively great thickness of siliceous rocks was deposited. Later orogeny 366 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 was prepared for as early as Cambrian and Ordovician time by the formation of a geosyncline in the Marathon region. The first great uplift in the area, approximately correlative to the Taconic movements farther east, occurred between Middle and Upper Ordovician time, when boulder beds containing rocks as old as Cambrian were formed. The lower part of the Carboniferous system consists of a monotonous alternation of sandstone and shale and re- sembles the Flysch of the Alps and Carpathians. In the upper part of this ‘“‘Flysch series” is a boulder bed that contains great exotic blocks and masses of fault breccia, which bear witness to the first strong diastrophism. The exotic blocks are probably contemporaneous with a system of folded over- thrusts exposed in the southeastern part of the district. The succeeding Gaptank formation consists of marine shales and limestones, interbedded with conglomerates which indicate another epoch of folding. These beds are similar to the Alpine Molasse. The Gaptank formation is itself deformed, and in the northwest part of the district is cut by a flat overthrust fault, not folded, on which there has been a displacement of more than 5 miles. The faulted Gaptank formation is overlain unconformably by Permian marine strata. These Permian rocks were laid down after the climax of the orogenic epoch, yet were deformed slightly at least three times before the Cretaceous period. When the Cretaceous seas advanced, the region had been worn down to a peneplain, indicating a period of crustal quiesence in early Mesozoic time. (Author’s abstract). ? Discussed by Messrs. Miser, Huss, and G. R. MANSFIELD. W. W. Rosey: The Illinois River, a problem in channel equilibrium.— Throughout its lower 250 miles the Illinois River exhibits many abnormal characteristics and its regimen differs greatly from that of nearby portions of the Mississippi and Missouri rivers. The slope or gradient is less than 2 inches to the mile,—somewhat less than the slope of the Mississippi from Memphis, Tenn., to the Gulf. This flat slope is not the result of a meander- ing round-about stream course. In fact, the Illinois follows a more direct route than the other streams of the region and the thalweg, or line of deepest water, has the almost unique characteristic of flowing close against the inside, not the outside, of the few curves. The flat slope probably explains the sluggish current and the fineness of the silt that is carried. The Illinois is also a much narrower and somewhat deeper stream than the Mississippi or Mis- souri, but the most surprising characteristic of the river is the stability of the present channel. Despite the great range between flood and low-water volumes, the Illinois does not shift its course perceptibly. Undercut banks are uncommon, there are very few abandoned meanders on the flood plain, and the remarkable similarity between early maps and channel measurements and those made recently all show that the channel is essentially adjusted or graded to present conditions. These peculiar features have not been caused by recent artificial modifica- tions of the river for they were all noted by the earliest travellers in the region. Nor are these peculiarities due simply to an inheritance by the present stream of a channel built by some ancient river. The Illinois has had a long and complex geologic history but the present river flows entirely within a wide flood plain made of its own deposits and distinctly younger than the Late Wisconsin terrace. However, it is significant that the bed-rock floor beneath the alluvial deposits, although more than 100 feet below the flood plain and so beyond the reach of present-day scouring, appears from scattered borings to have the same flat gradient as the present river. The essential equilibrium between the present channel of the river and the conditions of load, size of grain, volume, etc., cannot be explained solely sEPT. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 367 in terms of the familiar concept of graded stream slopes. The concept of adjusted channel cross sections, as pointed out by G. K. Gilbert and by canal engineers, is also essential. Alluvial streams tend to establish channels that are neither too deep nor too shallow. Semicircular cross sections oppose the least possible rubbing surface per unit area and hence give the maximum efh- ciency of channel; but natural streams, flowing in crooked channels between erodible banks, are unable to maintain so narrow a cross section. The ad- justed cross sections actually established are the deepest ones that the streams are able to maintain. Combining the two concepts, adjusted cross sections and graded slopes, the general conditions of dynamic stream equilibrium may be stated somewhat as follows: An underloaded stream tends to erode and an overloaded stream to deposit, either at the sides or the bottom of the channel. Erosion increases and deposition decreases the load. Erosion on the bottom lowers the slope and so decreases the velocity whereas deposition on the bottom has the oppo- site effect. Erosion at the sides widens the cross section and so reduces the efficiency of the channel whereas deposition at the sides has the opposite effect. Erosion, whether at the sides or on the bottom, increases the load and de- creases the velocity, and deposition in either place decreases the load and increases the velocity. These changes continue until an approximate balance s struck between load and capacity. The conditions of dynamic equilibrium may be summarized in an approxi- L°D* a where Sq = graded slope, = adjusted cross section or proportionate depth, L = quantity mate but convenient equation:—Sé4 X, » A of load transported, D = mean diameter of sediment transported, Q = dis- charge or volume of water, and a, b, c, and d are exponential constants. This approximate equation rests not only upon theoretical analysis but it can be derived from Gilbert’s general empirical formula of the transportation of débris by running water and it is supported by many other empirical relationships. The concept of adjusted cross sections seems to afford a basis for the rational interpretation of the peculiar regimen of the Illinois River. If slope and proportionate depth are adjusted to load jointly and not separately, then an over-steepened slope may be compensated by a relatively wide cross section and an over-flattened slope by a relatively narrow cross section. Perhaps the Platte River in Nebraska is an examp'e of the first type and the Illinois River of the second. By this interpretation the flat bed-rock floor was cut by some much larger Pleistocene river and subsequent aggradation in the Mississippi River has caused the present Illinois to build up a flood plain roughly parallel to this inherited bed-rock floor. In so doing, essential equi- librium has been maintained, despite the extreme flatness, by the greater proportionate depth of the present stream (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. MENDENHALL, MEINZER, and ALDEN. N. H. Heck, U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey: Some recent developments 1n the field of setsmology.—A broad view of the recent progress in seismological investigation was given. The annual earthquake activity of the United States and all the principal activity from the earliest times were shown by slides, and the new seismological stations and their relation to the various earthquake regions were demonstrated. New stations equipped with modern instruments are now being established at many places. Three types of instru- ments developed in the United States were described and their purposes 068 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 discussed. ‘These are the Wood-Anderson torsion seismometer, chiefly for near earthquakes; the Wenner seismometer, using galvanometzic registration for precise recording of all distant earthquakes, and the McComb-Romberg tilt-compensation seismometer, which is particularly suited to the earthquake at a moderate distance and which by means of an oil coupling eliminates the effect of tilt on the records. The special triangulation and level.ng work in California was briefly described and also the determination of tiJt in regions subject to strong earthquakes which has been the subject of an investigation in Japan with promising results in connection with the possible prediction of the approxi- mate time of severe earthquakes. The codperative nature of the work and the duty of the geologists to make use of the precise data obtained was stressed. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Mr. LouGHLIN. 475TH MEETING The 475th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, March 11, 1931, President MEINZER presiding. Informal communications: F. L. Hpss exhibited a radiograph showing the relative radioactivity of minerals in a specimen from Haliburton, Ontario. A certain purple fluorite was found to be most radioactive, uraninite less active, and apatite least active. Mr. Hess also discussed the paragenesis of the radioactive minerals, which partly replace the calcite filling of vugs in a pegmatite. The radiograph was made by covering a sensitive plate with colorless celluloid about 0.01 inch thick, placing thereon a polished section of the radioactive material, and leaving the section in contact for 24 hours. G. R. MANSFIELD summarized the history of test drilling in search cf potas- sium salts in the Permian basin of New Mexico and Texas. In the past five years at least 45 test holes have been put down by core drills; 20 holes have been drilled by the U. 8. Geological Survey and the U. 8. Bureau of Mines in cooperation, and 25 or more by commercial enterprise. One of the com- mercial organizations, the United States Potash Co., has sunk a shaft more than 1,000 feet deep, has drifted along beds of potassium salts, and has advertised its readiness to deliver ore containing 15 or 20 per cent K,O on February 15. The principal potassium minerais disclosed by this shaft are sylvite (Cl) and earnallite (KC], MgChk, 6H20). Other minerals discovered by the core drill are polyhalite (2CaSO., MgSOu., K:SO., 2H:,O) and lang- beinite (K,SO., 2MgS0O.), both of which promise to become commercial sources of potassium in the United States. Specimens of these minerals were exhibited. Discussed by Mr. PARKER. L. W. STEPHENSON showed by lantern slides a small duplex overturned fold in a limestone bed in the lower part of the Eagle Ford shale in Uvalde County, Texas. The folded portion of the limestone member was 2 inches thick; its maximum thickness elsewhere was 5inches. The original length of the folded portion was 123 feet; its shortened length was 43 feet. The folded limestone is enclosed in shale that is underlain by undisturbed Buda limestone. Discussed by Messrs. ATwoop, GoLpMAN, Rusny, and BRADLEY. Program: C. E. Van Orstranp: Results of some recent geothermal surveys in the United States. Discussed by Messrs. R. C. Weis, Mernzer, and RuBEY. C. E. Tinney, Cambridge University: Structure and metamorphism of the southern Highlands of Scotland. SEPT. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 369 476TH MEETING The 476th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, March 25, 1931, President MEINZER presiding. Informal communications: KE. T. McKnieut exhibited a specimen of ore from the Governor Eagle mine, 10 miles northwest of Yellville, Arkansas, that contained enargite as an accessory ore mineral. ‘This is the first dis- covery of enargite in any of the Mississippi Valley ore deposits. Discussed by Mr. LouGHLuIn. C. E. Resser showed an undescribed crustacean discovered by an amateur collector in the Middle Cambrian of the House Range, near Delaware, Utah. The crustacean is a primitive form ancestral to the eurypterids and not a trilobite. Program: C. P. Ross: The phystography of south-central Idaho.—Most of south-central Idaho was exposed to subaerial erosion from the close of the Paleozoic to the Oligocene or later. By the beginning of the Tertiary a pene- plain had been formed, but this was uplifted and youthfully dissected prior to being covered by the Challis volcanics. The summit peneplain or partial peneplain generally recognized in the present topography is in part cut across the Challis voleanics (Oligocene or Miocene). Part of the confusion as to the dating of this peneplain is removed by the discovery that the so-called “lake beds” are integral parts of the Challis voleanics and not restricted, as had been supposed, to certain valleys. The remnants of the summit peneplain in the northwestern part of south- central Idaho are more extensive and flatter than farther east, where the original topography was more rugged. They correlate with similar summit areas in the Clearwater Mountains regarded by several geologists as older than the Columbia River basalt of that district. Subsequent to the post-Challis peneplanation, the drainage pattern has been complicated by superposition and differential tilting with consequent piracy. The main tilting was toward the northwest. The Salmon River is made up of parts of several pre-existing streams. Itis impossible from present data to reconstruct the drainage pattern existing at any particular time in the Tertiary, partly because of the uncertainty as to the origin of the elongate ranges and their bordering valleys in the southeast part of the region. So far as present data go these may quite as well be products of erosion guided by ancient structures as the products of block faulting of the Basin Range type as some have regarded them. The numerous basins, which are mainly on the headwaters of the larger streams, are regarded as the products of an incomplete erosion cycle. There seems no reason to regard most of them as results of faulting, as has been postulated. Erosion in northern Idaho since the eruption of the ‘‘Columbia River basalt” (which there is regarded as Upper Miocene) has been interpreted as mainly confined to valley cutting with little lateral planation. This difference with the history of neighboring regions may result from retardation of erosion through subsidence related to the basaltic eruptions. In south-central Idaho there was glaciation in Nebraskan (?) and Wisconsin time and canyons more than 1,000 feet deep were cut in the interval between glaciations. One to four terraces in different places record pauses in this cutting. Locally the Snake River basalt, probably in the Pleistocene, dammed streams issuing from south-central Idaho onto the Snake River Plain. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. AtTwoop and Matruss. 370 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 G. F. Loueuuin: Geology of Leadville and vicinity, a review of old and recent studies.—This paper was a review of the main features of the geology and ore deposits of the Leadville district and vicinity as expressed in U. S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 148 and in more recent papers, published and unpub- lished, by Kirk, Behre, and Singewald. The outstanding changes in stra- tigraphy that have resulted from recent work are (1) the correlation of the Ordovician ‘“‘White”’ limestone with the Manitou rather than the Yule forma- tion, and (2) the recognition of the ‘‘Parting’”’ quartzite and the lower 75 feet of the Leadville or “Blue” limestone as Devonian, approximately equiva- lent to the Ouray limestone. New work on structural problems adds detailed information that confirms the conclusions set forth in Prof. Paper 148. The mineral composition and structural relations of ore deposits in the outlying areas indicate that they were formed by solutions derived from the main, or Breece Hill, source of the Leadville ores rather than from local sources. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. Hess, HEwntt and FERGUSON 477TH MEETING The 477th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, April 8, 1931, President MEINZER presiding. Informal communications: FRANK LEVERETT, of the University of Michigan and the U. S. Geological Survey, summarized his study of the Pensacola terrace or shore Jine in the eastern Gulf coastal States in the past two years. He pointed out that the altitude of the Pensacola shore line is more than 40 feet above sea level on the east coast of Florida, as shown by the Interlachen topographic quadrangle, near Jacksonville; also that its altitude is above 33 ‘feet at Tampa Bay on the west coast of Florida, above 22 feet on the east side of Mobile Bay near Fairhope, Alabama, and above 13 to 15 feet along the west side of Lake Pontchartrain, Louisiana. These altitudes show that the Pensacola shore line declines toward the west, that is, toward the delta of the Mississippi River. Leverett referred to the hypothesis that the tilting is due to yielding of the crust under the load of the delta and pointed out—as direct evidence of subsidence—that undoubted erosion forms in the head of small creeks near Baton Rouge are now in coastal swamps. He also recalled that a former shore line about Cuba is reported to decline toward the west and that the difference that may exist between the slope of shore lines on Cuba and on the mainland would indicate the magnitude of the subsidence due to delta load. The Pensacola beach is relatively very young. Discussed by Messrs. Mrrnzer, Hiss, RuBry, and WoopRING. Program: J. C. Rep and JAMES GILLULY: Heavy mineral assemblages an some plutonic rocks from eastern Oregon.—Plutonic igneous rocks constitute a large proportion of the pre-Tertiary terrane of the Blue Mountains of north- eastern Oregon. Gabbro, hornblende-quartz diorite, biotite-quartz diorite, trondhjemite, and albite granite are abundant. ‘The biotite-quartz diorite is notably less sheared than the other plutonic rocks and may belong to a later igneous cycle. On the other hand, it may belong to the same cycle as the other rocks and may be more massive because it was intruded near the close of the orogenic activity. Accordingly the correlation of the plutonic rocks is of major importance in the study of the regional geology. The heavy residues of nineteen samples of plutonic rocks were examined by a method similar to that used by A. W. Groves for correlating some of the rocks of the Channel Islands. sEPT. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY oll The study has shown that the biotite-quartz diorite contains a suite of heavy minerals that is quite as diagnostic as the essential minerals. How- ever, the heavy mineral suites of the more basic rocks are less trustworthy as a basis for classification, but if a number of slides of the heavy residue are studied it is generally possible to classify the rock. The fact that the distinc- tion between the several suites is less definite than in the case of the biotite- quartz diorite may strengthen the field hypothesis of consanguinity of the gabbro, hornblende diorite, trondhjemite, and albite granite. The fact that apatite is less abundant in the gabbro than in the diorite may mean that apatite does not always crystallize first, or that—because its crystals are usually small—the apatite is carried away from the larger sepa- rated crystals of augite and plagioclase by movements of the rest-magma. The zircon and apatite crystals cf the hornblende-quartz diorite and trondh- jemite commonly appear to be corroded. This fact gives some reason to question the commonly accepted idea that these minerals, because they are among the first to crystallize, are stable throughout the later magmatic history. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. Hess and GILLULY. A. M. Piprr: Observations in the Dalles region, Oregon, bearing on the history of the Columbia River.—The oldest erosion form of the Dalles region was originally a featureless plain where it was cut across the weak Dalles formation but was an undulating plain where it was cut across anticlines of the resistant Yakima basalt. Its existing remnants include Mount Hood Flat and other . extensive interstream tracts that are about 2,000 feet above sea Jevel 3 miles south of The Dalles and that rise southwestward about 50 feet in a mile. This surface is correlated tentatively with the Ochoco erosion surface of central Oregon, that Buwalda ascribes to the early or middle Pliocene. The Columbia River has cut down 2,000 feet below Mount Hood Flat in several partial erosion cycles of which the latest three formed intracanyon terraces along the river and its tributary creeks. These are designated the 300-foot terrace, the 150-foot terrace, and the 50-foot terrace, from their respective altitudes at The Dalles. The 300-foot terrace is cut on bedrock in the middle and upper reaches of the tributary canyons, but in the lower reaches is in part constructed of older alluvium. It includes two prominent wind gaps that cross the divide between Fifteenmile Creek and the river. The existing remnants of the terrace rise upstream 25 to 50 feet in a mile along the river and 50 to 100 feet in a mile along the tributaries. The older alluvium is fine-grained where it rests on the Dalles formation, but consists of coarse sand, gravel and boulders where it rests on the basalt. It is believed that much of this alluvium was trans- ported only a short distance from its source and that it was transported by and deposited in streams of moderate velocity. The older alluvium is 10 to 150 feet thick in the tributary canyons and thickens rapidly downstream, for it fills bedrock trenches that slope more steeply than the terrace and that follow the existing canyons. The older alluvium is tentatively correlated with the Sangamon stage of the Pleistocene. _ The 150-foot terrace is a bench from a quarter of a mile to nearly a mile wide cut on the basaJt along the south bank of the river near The Dalles. It forms discontinuous benches on one or both valley walls in the lowermost 1 to 3 miles of the tributaries but farther upstream forms the valley floors. The 50-foot plain comprises the bottom land of the river but is not devel- oped in the tributary valleys. 372 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 Two modes of origin of the terraces suggest themselves. The first is the usual! valley-within-valley sequence—that is, (1) a 300-foot plain was first cut on rock; (2) the streams then cut down to altitude 150 feet; and (3) the inner trench was filled by alluvium up to the 300-foot plain. The alternative se- quence is: (1) the streams first cut down to altitude 150 feet along their present courses; (2) this trench was filled up to or somewhat above an altitude of 300 feet; and (3) the streams planed laterally on both fill and bedrock to form the 300-foot terrace and the two wind gaps. From the pattern of the tributary streams in relation to the course of the river and te the two wind gaps it is postulated that the second sequence is the more likely. The later stages of the two modes of origin are the same, namely: most of the older alluvium was swept from the inner rock trenches, the 150-foot plain was cut by lateral planation, and finally the river cut down its valley to altitude 50 feet. Bretz classifies certain deposits of the older alluvium in the lower part of Fifteenmile Creek as bars composed of long deltaic foresets built in virtu- ally their present form by the Columbia River when it overflowed the two wind gaps during the hypothetical ‘Spokane flood.”” However, forset bedding seems generally to exist only within true beds less than 10 feet thick, even though the gravel is 150 feet thick. Moreover, patches of gravel occur on both walls of the valley and approximately up to the same altitude throughout the lower reaches of the tributaries. ‘ It seems unnecessary to resort to a cataclysm such as the ‘“‘Spokane flood”’ to account for any of the land forms of the Dalles region. Rather, those forms may be explained rationally as the product of several partial cycles of stream erosion. (Author’s abstract). Discussed by Messrs. Spars, PARKER, and GILLULY. R. C. Wetus: Van’t Hoff’s studies of minerals deposited from sea water.— Attention was called to solubility determinations made by van’t Hoff and his students showing the effect of one salt on the solubility of another salt, to the conditions necessary to obtain recrystallization of double salts, to the graphic representation of the composition of solutions of reciprocal salt pairs in equilibrium with different solid phases, and to the solid phases formed from solutions containing chlorides and sulphates of sodium, magnesium, and calcium at 25° and 83°C. The minerals that might separate on simple evapora- tion of sea water are aragonite, gypsum, anhydrite, halite, polyhalite, epsom- ite, kainite, kieserite, and carnallite. Rising temperature causes the separa- tion of water from several of these minerals and the possible formation of langbeinite and sylvite. Sylvite may also be formed by the solution of carnallite and other double salts and subsequent evaporation or cooling of such solutions. Thus the potash minerals found in New Mexico are probably the result of cycles of deposition and in part the result of subsequent altera- tion. (Author’s abstract.) C. H. Danze, ArtHUR M. PipEr, Secretaries BOTANICAL SOCIETY 230TH MEETING The 230th regular meeting was held on Tuesday evening, January 6, 1931, in the Conference room of the Administration Building of the Department of Agriculture, 102 members and guests being present. President N. HE. STEVENS presided. sEPT. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: BOTANICAL SOCIETY 313 The following were unanimously elected to membership: Dr. JuLius Matz, D. F. Fisopr, Paut V. Moox and Dr. FrRep J. STEVENSON. Program: Dr. E. F. Gatnus, cerealist at the Washington State College, gave an interesting account of his trip to England, Scotland, Denmark, Sweden and Germany. Although primarily interested in cereal breeding and diseases, Dr. Gaines did not confine his ta!k to that line, but happily mixed the more general topic of botany with personal experiences and impressions ebtained in visiting the various botanical and agricultural institutions. The second half of the program was devoted to reports by several members of the Society who had attended the meetings at Cleveland. Dr. CHarLEs Brooks reported on the phytopathological meetings, dwelling especially upon the DeBary program. He also gave some interesting side lights on the tobacco meetings. Mrs. ANNIE GRAVATT gave a summary of the papers presented on the Dutch Elm disease. Dr. E. V. Mruer reported on the physio- logical meetings, giving a brief resumé of the papers presented before that section. Dr. F. J. STEVENSON reported on the potato meetings, especially on the paper of Krantz on inbreeding of potatoes. Brief Notes and Reviews: Dr. Martin reviewed the recent book on plant physiological chemistry by R. B. Harvey, the only book of its kind in English. Dr. Norton cited the present trend of botany as exemplified by the current program of the meeting of the Maryland State Agriculturists. Twenty-five years ago the meetings were largely taken up by plant pathology and entom- ology, whereas now only one session was devoted to those topics. After adjournment, a social hour was enjoyed with “unemployed apples.”’ 231ST MEETING The 231st regular meeting was held on Tuesday evening, February 3, 1931, in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club. President N. E. Stevens presided; attendance about 150. Program: H. 8. Dean and Freeman Wetss: Informal report on the Nar- cissus and bulb conference.—Mr. Dean reviewed the history of the quarantine , and what it aimed to accomplish. Mr. Weiss gave his impressions of the conference, which seemed to indicate that there was a mutual desire for protection from the eelworm. Dr. R. F. Griaas: Five thousand miles for a liverwort—Dr. Griggs de- scribed his 1930 expedition to the Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes, illustrating his talk with excellently colored lantern slides. A motion picture taken on a previous trip was shown and this was followed by the one taken last summer. He reported that the valley is not the inferno it was ten years ago, but has cooled off to a great extent. The Liverwort alone seems able to establish itself upon the ash. Its source of nitrogen has not been determined, although Dr. Griggs is of the opinion that it may obtain 1t from the air. When the liverwort has built up sufficient organic matter on the surface of the ash, mosses and higher plants appear. In closing he expressed the hope that this great national park might be increased in size to offer better protection to the animals which have come back into the region. In adjourning the meeting, President Stevens called attention to the list of food materials taken on the expedition by Dr. Griggs. This was followed by a social hour with refreshments prepared by the students of Dr. Griggs under the leadership of Miss Nance. 374 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 232ND MEETING . The 232nd regular meeting was held on March 3, 1931, in the Court of the Administration Building of the Department of Agriculture. President STEVENS presided; attendance about 200. The following were unanimously elected to membership: CHArues B. Reap, Dr. RoLanp W. Brown, Dr. Paut L. Harpine, M. H. Hauser, Miss Anice M. ANDERSON, and Miss MiLtpRED PLADECK. Preliminary announcements were made regarding the outing of the Appa- lachian Trail Club in the Great Smoky Mountains in June and also regarding the conference on soil fertility at State College, Pennsylvania, in June. Program: Paut W. Bowman: Pollen and peat—The method of examining peat for pollen grains was described and the occurrence of various pollen grains in peat was illustrated by lantern-slide graphs. The paper was dis- cussed by Dr. Waite and Mr. Bowman. Brief Notes and Reviews: Dr. SHEAR called attention to six volumes con- taining original drawings and notes on fungi by James Bolton which are now in the Library. These were purchased from a dealer in Switzerland and are in a good state of preservation. Dr. Waits exhibited apple branches which had been injured by summer sun scald and compared them with the injury due to winter sun scald. Program: R. Kent Beattie: Botanical notes from Japan.—Mr. Beattie traced the origin of the Japanese people, described the character of the country and told of his experiences in collecting seeds and scions of chestnuts for im- portation to this country. Between 90 and 100 varieties of chestnuts are named in Japan as our fruits are named. In a certain part of the country, three crops of nuts are raised each year. The lecture was fully illustrated with lantern slides. The paper was discussed by Dr. Hitcucock. | An exhibit of azaleas, a part of eighty named varieties brought back by Mr. Beattie, was arranged in each side of the patio. The Japanese refreshments of rice, a meat concoction and tea which fol- lowed adjournment were commented upon by Dr. MILLER. ANNUAL DINNER A buffet dinner was served in the Court of the Administration Building of the Department of Agriculture, on March 24, 1931, at 7 P.M. At- tendance 170. After the dinner, President N. E. Stevens introduced H. L. Westover who gave an illustrated travelogue on Spain and Portugal where he was searching for varieties of alfalfa. Kk. A. Ryerson followed with a travelogue on Spain and particularly on Northern Africa, where he and Mr. Westover were looking for new varieties of fruits and alfalfa. The travelogues were followed by dancing in the Conference Room. 233RD MEETING The 233rd regular meeting was held in the Court of the Administration Building of the Department of Agriculture on April 7, 1931, Vice-president L. H. Furnt presided. Forty-one members and guests were present. Dr. VINNIE A. PEASE was unanimously elected to membership. Brief Notes and Reviews: Dr. WatTE explained by graphs and figures that the lateness of the vegetation this spring was due to the low daily maxima of temperature. Only on one day during March did the temperature exceed SEPT. 19, 1931 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 370 60°F. The average for the month was about normal, due to rather high daily minima. Program: E. 8. Scuuttz: Virus diseases of potatoes—He discussed and illustrated by lantern slides the various symptoms produced by virus infection. F. J. STEVENSON: Genetics in relation to potato breeding.—He brought out the difficulties which beset the breeder of potatoes, the progress made, and what it was hoped to accomplish. W. M. Peacock demonstrated a simple method for determining the pres- ence of reducing sugars in potatoes, which had been developed in cooperation with chemists. An exhibit of potato chips made from potatoes having various percentages of reducing sugars was explained by Miss Fuuuer. After adjournment, refreshments of potato salad and orangeade were served. 234TH MEETING The 234th regular meeting was called to order in the Dining Hall of the University of Maryland by President N. E. Stevens at 8 P.M., Wednesday, May 6, 1931. Ninety-six members and guests were present. Prior to the regular meeting, seme of the members visited the new buildings on the campus, and the remainder botanized in Cat-tail Hill bog where the rare climbing fern (Lygodiwm) was seen. Dinner was served at 7 P.M. The following were unanimously elected to membership: Miss FRANCES MarGareET Mitpurn, Mrs. Ciara JAMIESON WELD, Miss Jessig M. ALLEN, Mr. Y. L. Kenc and Mr. W. A. McCussin. Brief Notes and Reviews: Dr. Norton exhibited a book for amateur botan- ists by J. E. Harned of Oakland, Maryland, entitled, Wzld flowers of the Al- leghenies, and published by the author. Dr. WarrTe recalled a lecture before the Society by Dr. McKay on broken tulips and exhibited specimens taken from his own collection. The meeting then adjourned to the auditorium of the University where the regular program was begun. Attendance in the auditorium was about 140. Program: F. L. Gow: Glimpses of agriculture in southern Spain (illustrated). Dr. J. HENDERSON-SmMITH, in charge of virus diseases of plants, Rothamsted Experiment Station: Cytological studies of mosaic of tobacco—The lecture was illustrated by lantern slides and by a film in which the formation of cell inclusions was followed in the living undisturbed cell. The evidence indicates that the cell inclusions are not living but are aggregates of smaller particles which have coalesced. These aggregates, which are protein in nature, finally become vacuoled and crystallize. NaTHAN R. Situ, Recording Secretary. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS According to Industrial and Engineering Chemistry plans have been drawn and approved for a headquarters building for American pharmacy to be erected in Washington near the building of the National Academy of Sciences. About $817,000 has been collected or pledged for the undertaking, and actual construction is only awaiting completion of plans by the Federal Govern- ment for the development of that part of the city. The building will provide a permanent repository for historical material bearing on the profession of pharmacy as well as a library and facilities for research. It will also contain 3/6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 15 offices for the various activities of the American Pharmaceutical Association. An effort will be made to endow the building to the extent of one million dollars. It is expected that construction of the building will be completed by the close of 1932. The Divisions of Mineral and Mechanical Technology of the National Museum have been consolidated into a new division with the title Division of Engineering and including three sections, as follows: Section of Mechanical Technology, under the immediate supervision of Frank A. TAYLOR, assistant curator; Section of Aeronautics, PauL E. GaRBsr, assistant curator; and Section of Mineral Technology, which continues under the immediate charge of Cart W. Mirman, who has been appointed curator of the new division. Foster H. Bensamin, who has been engaged for the past three years in work on the Mexican orange worms and the Mediterranean fruit fly for the Plant Quarantine and Control Administration, has been transferred to the Bureau of Entomology and assigned to a position in the National Museum where he will devote a large part of his time to the identification of North American Lepidoptera. A. 8. Hircucock, senior agrostologist, Bureau of Plant Industry, and custodian of grasses, National Museum, has been elected a corresponding member of the Deutsche Botanische Gesellschaft. Raymonp C. SHANNON, who worked on Diptera in the National Museum some years ago and has since been continuing with mosquito work in Brazil under the International Health Board, returned to Washington August 3 and will remain in the United States about six months. He will devote most of this time to the study of mosquitoes. ALAN STONE has been appointed to the staff of the Bureau of Entomology as a specialist on mosquitoes and will take charge of the collection of mosqui- toes in the National Museum. @Obituary ArtHurR M. Farrineton died August 3 in Washington, D. C. He was born at Brewer, Maine in 1856, and practically his entire career was with the Bureau of Animal Husbandry. After serving as chief of various divisions he was appointed to the position of Assistant Chief of that Bureau, which posi- tion he held until his retirement in 1921. RussELL ARTHUR OAKLEY, a member of the AcapEmy, died August 6, in Monrovia, California. He was born in Marysville, Kansas, September 7, 1880, and was educated at Kansas State Agricultural College and at the University of Chicago. He became connected with the Bureau of Plant Industry in 1903, and for many years devoted himself to the study and im- provement of turf grasses. Silages and the photoperiodism of alfalfa were among the other subjects to which he devoted attention. For several years previous to his death he served as Principal Agronomist in charge of the Division of Forage Crops and Diseases. OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES “ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS Saturday, September 19 The Helminthological Society Thursday, October 1 The Entomological Society Saturday, October 3 The Biological Society The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: N. A. Cops, Bureau of Plant Industry. Corresponding Secretary: Paut E. Hows, Bureati of Animal Industry. Recording Secretary: CHARLES THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. Treasurer: Henry G. Avrers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. CONTENTS ORIGINAL PAPERS Page Botany.—New plants mainly from western South America—III. Ellsworth P. SG) Ty ORR paren GU OS OIE ES I a's ibd wed Soe bee kia keen ee . 347 Herpetology.—A new lizard (Anolis pinchoti) from Old Providence Island. Doris — WM Cochran: cee as Sees Fhe oe Cy Dele sea Oe 354 Zoology.—Chondronema passali (Leidy, 1852) n.g. (Nematoda), with notes on its life history. J. R. Christie and B.‘G. Chitwood:... os. 00. 0 oes . 356 Paleontology.—Indianites, new name for the Cambrian crustacean Indiana Ulrich QING PRBRET fo. Sewn ss 0b iw egies ho wale wk ou Oa" We ets Gia ee 0 aa 364 PROCEEDINGS The Geological Society. . 26.06 a Ss i eee . 365 The-Botanies! Society. ¢52.2.5 ac ek se es FaW'eb sie wel ainieleiele 6 ee . 312 Scrmsrurice Norms anp NBWsiiic5 5 oor sk oes Vceiccc eos Sach us cba sce oe tees 375 Oxrtuary: Arthur M. Farrington, Russell Arthur Oakley...............c..00000 376 This JouURNAL is indexed in the International Index to Periodicals Ng OcroBER 4, 1931 No. 16 o JOURNAL OF THE oo “WASHINGTON ACADEMY — OF SCIENCES } BOARD OF EDITORS C. WytTHE CooKkEe CHARLES DRECHSLER Huau L. Drypen Uv. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. Peters Haronip MorRIson PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GoLDMAN G. W. Stosre BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Aanes CHASE J. R. SWANTON BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIBTY 5 Roger C. WELLS ; . CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY : EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Royat anp Guiurorp Avzs. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND pn Bak io Entered as Second Class Matier, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October $, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. -_ Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JourNAt, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued semi- monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the issue of the JournaL for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. Rae Mee vam ee Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors: they should be . clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced by zine etchings being preferable. . Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. e Author’s Reprints—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord- ance with the following schedule of prices: Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers DO. oS a ee ae ee ee iS $2. 00 100 $ .50 $ .55 $ .60 $1.10 2.50 150 90 1.00 1.10 1. 60 3.00 200 1.15 1.50 1. 60 2.10 3. 50 250 1. 65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4:00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. The rate of Subscription per volume 7s. ves. vse es ccs ces stn ese nip eten sane $6. 00* semi-monthly ‘numbers. (0). oss ea cers oc Cees e Sep aie oes : Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15)..... .50 Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C. Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other publications, Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made within thirty days after date of the following issue. * Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates are given to members of scientific socicties affiliated with the Academy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21 OcToBER 4, 1931 No. 16 POPULATION ANALYSIS.—The extinction of families—I.! ALFRED J. Lorka, New York. The theoretical discussion of the chances of extinction of a line of descent was first given by H. W. Watson in 1889, following a sugges- tion of Francis Galton. Watson showed that the chances of ultimate extinction of a male line of descent, reckoned at the moment of birth of the first male in the line, is given by the positive root inferior to unity, if such a root exists, of the equation for x Ch— 16 ere re Cet HE hes (1) where C'y denotes the probability, at birth, that a male shall eventually have just N sons. From the nature of the coefficients C it is clear that ie (2) The same problem has also been discussed, essentially with the same results, by J. F. Steffensen (Mathmatisk Tidskrift 1930 p. 19). The theoretical treatment of the problem is thus available in the existing literature. But there remains to be established a working connection between the analytical formula and available statistical data. Probability of eventually having n children. If p(a) is the probability, at birth, of reaching age a, and if m, (a) is the rate at which nth chil- dren are born of parents of age a and of given sex, per head of popula- tion of age a and of that sex, then evidently, the probability that a newborn child of the given sex shall eventually have n or more chil- dren is given by | A= | pla) mila) da (m= 1,2,3,...) 8) ae 1 Received August 6, 1931. 377 378 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 and the probability that it will eventually have just n children is Ore, Aap eA (4) So far no attention has been paid to the particular sex of the original ancestor and the progeny under consideration. It is now necessary to take this into account, because the numerical values of the characteris- tics involved are different for the two sexes. Chief interest attaches to the male sex, because the family name is perpetuated in direct an- cestral male line. Now the published statistics for the United States do not give directly all the data required to form the products p (a) m, (a) for the male sex specifically. Itis necessary to obtain them by a series of indirect steps, as follows: Data available directly. The annual reports of births in the United States give explicitly a tabulation of total births? in the year of the report, classified by age of mother and by order of child at birth.* Another table gives the total births, irrespective of order of child, classified by age of father and of mother. On the assumption, admittedly approximate, that the relation be- tween the ages of father and mother is essentially the same for children of all orders, the data of the first-mentioned table were redistributed, for each order of child taken separately, in accordance with the ratios appearing in the second table, so as to give the number of births classi- fied by age of father and by order of child at birth. Having thus obtained figures for births classified by age of father and by order of child, these figures were then divided each by the cor- responding male population of the same age. ‘The result is what may be called the paternity frequency among males of specified age, count- ing only children of specified order, and of both sexes; it is the quantity denoted by the symbol m,, (a) in equation (3) above, in the case that we are considering the male parents. We are, therefore, now in a position to determine by (4) numerical values of the quantities c,, which measure the probability that a male just born shall eventually have just n children, counting both sons and daughters. One step now remains to be performed. From the series of values C, we must derive the corresponding probabilities Cy that a male just born shall eventually have just N sons. The process of deriving the values Cy from the set of c,’s is best ex- plained by reference to the accompanying Table 1. This is built up from the data appearing in the bottom line of the table, which are the 2 In the Birth Registration Area. For 1920 see Ann. Rep. p. 201, Table 7. ’ Counting all the liveborn children of the family, whether living or deceased. 4 For 1920 see Ann. Rep. p. 193, Table 6. oct. 4, 1931 LOTKA: EXTINCTION OF FAMILIES 379 values of the c,’s (probability, at birth of eventually having just n children), determined according to (4). Each figure appearing in this bottom line has been distributed over the entries in the column above, in accordance with the frequency with which N sons will occur among n children in the same family. ‘This frequency is given by the coefficient of p in (px + q)”, where p and q are, respectively, the probabilities of a birth being male or female. The exact numerical values of p and q for the sex ratio at birth in the general population are 0.515 and 0.485. It is not strictly permissible to use this same figure as representing the sex ratio at birth among children of one family, because within one TABLE 1.—Cuancess, PER 10,000, THat a NewBorn MALE Witt EvENTUALLY Have n CHILDREN, CoMPRISING N Sons United States White Males, 1920 n aha (ay ae 5je|7|s| 9 10 | 11] 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | a8 | = (2) | O |3686| 787) 319| 122) 44) 15] 5] 2) 1) | | 4981 1 788| 639] 364177| 77| 33| 14| 7| 3) 1 2103 2 319| 364\266 153) 82 43) 24 10/ 6| 2 1 1270 3 122|177|153)109| 73| 47| 24) 15} 6| 3] 1 730 4 44) 77| 82| 72| 58| 37) 26| 12} 6| 3) 1 418 5 15] 33] 43] 47) 36] 30] 18] 11] 5] 2) 1 241 6 5| 14| 24) 24] 26] 17] 12] 5] 3i 1] 1 132 7 | a 7| 10] 15] 12] 101 6 4) 2/1 69 8 etree ai aglelel elppea or Sy | 4 35 9 | | Po og Lae olymeet 2k beh bt al 15 10 | | | | By Oey pa 5 | | [eer el | (1) so isza.t277 972/708 490/349 263 216 147126 75) 53) 29| 17,8 | 5 | 2 | 1 |10,000 > (1): Chance that a newborn male shall have n children. 2 (2): Chance that a newborn male shall have N sons. family the sexes of the several children cannot be regarded as independ- ent or “‘uncorrelated.”’ There is a marked tendency, due undoubtedly to physiological causes, for some families to exhibit a marked prepond- erance of one sex, either male or female. But as a first approximation we may employ the values of p and g as observed in the general popu- lation, and, furthermore, it will greatly simplify our arithmetic if in place of the exact values 0.515 and 0.485 we employ the approximate values 0.5 and 0.5; that is, if we disregard the slight bias in favor of the birth of males.® > In the United States the average of the sex ratio at birth over many years is 106 boys to 100 girls. 380 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 After the body of the table has thus been filled in by distributing the figures from the bottom line over the corresponding columns, the figures in the last column are finally obtained by summing the figures in each horizontal line. The figures thus obtained, and shown in the last column of Table 1, are the values of Cy that is, the probability for a male, at birth, that he shall eventually have just N sons. We are now in a position to make numerical application of the funda- mental formula (1), in which we have Cy = 1 SAS 3 On = ly = aby ee (5) so that g=1—A, + (41 — A.) 2+ (4. —As) +. 2, (6) 1S Ay Ag Aa ee Bee, (7) Under ordinary conditions, if a root of (7) inferior to unity exists, it will be but little below unity. The solution of that equation is therefore best effected by introducing a new variable fl we (8) Making this substitution in (7) we obtain, after some simplification, PSRs Oe Oye On cid ae (9) where R, is the ratio of total male births in two consecutive genera- tions, namely R, = {pla my (@) aa (10) and where the coefficients Q take the form = pau A, é , > (12) The equation (9) is readily solved by successive approximations, since é is small. As applied to the data for the United States in 1920 it gave the following values for x, the probability of the male line of de- scent, from a newborn male, ultimately becoming extinct: First ap- proximation, .8930; second approximation, .8800; fifth and six ap- proximations, identical to four places of decimals, .8797. oct. 4,1931 ADAMS AND GIBSON: CUBIC COMPRESSIBILITY 381 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY.—The cubic compressibility of certain substances. L. H. Adams and R. E. Gisson. Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of Washington. In the course of several years we have accumulated results on the eubic compressibility of a number of unrelated solids and liquids. These compressibilities were determined directly at pressures ranging from 1 to 12,000 bars? by the piston-displacement method which has been used in the Geophysical Laboratory for the last fifteen years and which is described in detail elsewhere. The work leading to the es- timation of the compressibility of a substance by this method may be divided into three main parts. 1. The volume of the specimen, V., is accurately determined at atmospheric pressure. ‘This gives, incidentally, a reliable estimate of the density or the specific volume of the substance. 2. The accumulation of data necessary for the compilation of a table of (k —k’) at intervals of 1 kilobar from 2 to 12 kilobars.# The significance of k and k’ may be elucidated by brief reference to the actual experimental procedure. The specimen under investiga- tion is placed in a heavy-walled cylinder or bomb and immersed in n- butyl ether. The ether is then compressed between the walls of the bomb and the lower surface of a leak-proof piston which is forced into the bomb. The pressure is measured with an electrical pressure gauge and at even kilobars the displacement of the piston is read. From these readings, after the application of a few corrections, the change in volume of the contents of the bomb for each kilobar rise in pressure may be calculated. In order to eliminate the volume change due to the pressure fluid (butyl ether) and to the distortion in the bomb, a run is made under exactly similar conditions and in identically the same way with a standard material, Bessemer steel, whose compressi- bility is known. From these two series of readings it is possible to compute the relative change in volume per cm? of the specimen when the pressure is raised from atmospheric pressure to any pressure p. This relative volume change for which the name, the bulk compres- sion,®> or simply the compression, is advocated, is denoted by the symbol k. 1 Received August 5, 1931. 2 1 bar = 10° dynes per cm? or a c.g.s. atmosphere. 8’ Adams, Williamson, and Johnston. Journ. Am. Chem. Soc. 41: 12. 1919; Adams and Williamson. Journ. Franklin Inst. 195: 475. 1923. * 1 kilobar = 1000 bars = 1000 c.g.s. atmospheres. 5 See Parsons and Cook. Proc. Roy. Soc. 85: 332-48. 1911. 082 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 Hence k = -2 7» where V, is volume of specimen at pressure p VY, and V,is its volume at atmospheric pressure. For convenience in working we make measurements from an ar- bitrary zero of pressure, viz. 2 kilobars. The symbol k’ is used to denote shrinkage in volume per cm* produced when the pressure sur- rounding the substance is increased from 1 to 2000 bars. Hence (k — k:’) is the decrease in volume which one em? of the substance measured at atmospheric pressure suffers when its pressure is raised from 2 kilobars to any pressure p. 3. By the method of least squares (k — k’) is expressed as a function of the pressure and hence the compressibility 6 = oe is evaluated. In this communication we shall classify the results according to the substance examined, giving under each heading the object of the de- termination, the density of the material, tables of (k — k’) at different pressures, and the value of 6 which we consider most probable. The tables of results give & or (k — k’) as a function of pressure. In most cases an equation of the form (k —k’) =a + bp + cp? was fitted to the data by the method of least squares. The column labelled “least square residuals” gives the difference between the ob- served values of (k — k’) and those calculated from the appropriate quadratic equation whose coefficients a, b and c appear at the head of the table. This column illustrates how well the equation represents the data. Standard of comparison. The cylinder of Bessemer steel which has always been used for this purpose in this Laboratory served as the standard of comparison and Bridgman’s® value for the bulk compression of steel, viz. 10®°k = 59.9 p — 0.22 p?, was assumed as a basis on which to compute the results. Pyrex glass. Since piezometers and capsules made from pyrex glass are continually used in this Laboratory, it is desirable for practical reasons to have an accurate knowledge of the compressibility of this material. From measurements of the linear compressibility of pyrex glass, Bridgman’ gave the following value for the cubic compressibility : 10° 6 = 304.1 + 1.46 p reciprocal kilobars. A startling feature of this result was the increase in compressibility 6 P. W. Bridgman. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts Sei. 58: 174. 1923. an W. Bridgman. Am. Journ. Sci. 10: 363. 1925. ocT. 4,1931 ADAMS AND GIBSON: CUBIC COMPRESSIBILITY 383 with pressure exhibited by this glass. It was considered worth while checking this result by a direct determination of the cubic com- pressibility. : The sample of pyrex glass examined was in the form of a rod 3? inches in diameter and 4 inches long which was practically free from bubbles. It was made available for our use through the courtesy of the Corning Glass Works. ‘The density of the glass determined at 23.2° by the Archimedes method was 2.233 g/cm’ and its refractive index,’ np, was 1.473. The results of the two latest determinations of the compressibility of pyrex glass are given in Table 1. TABLE 1. EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS FOR PyrREX GLASS a = —615 a= —620 b= 302.4 b= 306.5 Pressure c= 0.87 C= 0.55 (kilobars) es : Least square Ilo = Least square (k—k’) X 105 ~ 5 (k—k’) X 105 : 5 (obs iy (obs Geeta i, 3135 —4 3128 —9 ii 2828 12 2829 tf 10 2497 1 2504 4 9 2158 —19 2169 —14 8 1865 6 1876 9 7 1546 it 1550 —3 6 1243 12 1244 5 5 913 —6 917 —9 4 612 4 615 1 3 287 —13 299 —6 2 0 7 ) 5 1 — 320* —325* * Not used in least square calculation. The mean of the two results gives the following value of k, the total bulk compression produced by increase of pressure from atmospheric pressure to p kilobars: 105k = 304.5 + 0.71 p? (1) This value is substantiated by two determinations made in 1925 which gave as an average: 10° & = 303.2 p + 0.18 p? (2) Taking into account the recent improvements in our technique we are inclined at this time to give all the weight to equation (1) and to 8 We are indebted to Dr. H. E. Merwin of this Laboratory for this value. 384 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 give as our estimate of the most probable value of the cubic compres- sibility of pyrex, 10° 6 = 304.5 + 1.42 7 recip. kb. at 25°C. The agreement between this value and Bridgman’s is obvious, and in particular all our results confirm his observation that the compressi- bility of pyrex increases with pressure. Vitreous silica. According to Bridgman’, who gives as the com- pressibility of vitreous silica, 10° 8 = 269.9 + 3.66 p recip. kb at 30°, TABLE 2. ExpERIMENTAL RESULTS FOR VITREOUS SILICA a = —560 a = —563 b= 27326 b= 27528 Pressure c= 1.84 C= 1.60 (kilobars) gal oo Re) (k—h') X 105 Least square - (k—k’) X 105 Least square (bs) rare (obs a 12 2977 —11 2972 —4 11 2683 11 2665 1 10 2369 9 2356 it 9 2043 —9 2048 0 8 1748 Z 1751 5 7 1445 0 1450 4 6 1157 9 1158 9 5 842 —12 837 —19 4 561 —3 557 —9 3 277 0 284. 5 2 0 5 0 5 il —271* — 286* * Not used in least square calculation. this glass exhibits the greatest increase of compressibility with pressure of any substance yet examined. Our results confirm this statement. We made experiments on a cylinder of perfectly clear vitreous silica whose only flaws were a few long, exceedingly fine capillaries—probably elongated bubbles. The volume of the specimen at atmospheric pres- sure was 20.262 cm, and its density, determined at 23°C. by the Archi- medes method, was 2.204 g/cm’. The specimen came from the Gen- eral Electric Company’s works at Lynn, Massachusetts. Five series of measurements on this specimen were made, three in 1925, and two in 1930. ‘Table 2 gives the results of the last two determinations. On averaging the coefficients in this table we obtain equation (3): ocT. 4,1931 ADAMS AND GIBSON: CUBIC COMPRESSIBILITY 385 107% 107% 274.7 p + 1.72 p? (3) 257.4 p + 2.79 p? (4) In the three earlier results the values of the coefficients b and c¢ were 258.1, 259.9, and 253.3; and 2.61, 2.86, and 2.90 respectively. The average of these gives equation (4). In assigning a most probable value to the compressibility we have again taken the improvement in our technique into account and have given the later result twice the weight of the earlier one. Our estimate of the compressibility of vitre- ous silica is, therefore, 10° 6 = 268.9 + 4.15 p, which agrees very closely with Bridgman’s value. TABLE 3. EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS FOR OBSIDIAN 2 1 a = —571 a = —570 b =) aber b= 283.9 Pressure c= —0.58 c= —0.38 (kilobars) (k—k’) X 105 Least square (k—k’) X 105 Least square (bs oe ce a aD 12 2770 —4 2781 —]l 11 2509 7 2507 0 10 2226 —2 2226 —5 9 1953 0 1952 —2 8 1681 83 1687 10 a 1406 HY 1406 il 6 1131 9 1124 4 5) 824 —19 823 —17 4 enh. —6 550 —9 3) 287 6 284 6 2D 0 2 0 4 1 —313* —287* * Not used in least square calculation. Obsidian. The compressibility of the specimen of obsidian de- scribed in a previous paper® was redetermined largely with a view to establishing more firmly the sign and magnitude of the pressure co- efficient of the compressibility. Glasses with high silica content, e.g. pyrex glass, resemble vitreous silica in exhibiting an increase of com- pressibility with pressure, while glasses with low silica content behave in the ordinary way. Obsidian is a naturally occurring glass contain- ing over 70 per cent of silica, and its compressibility shows very little 9 Adams and Williamson. Journ. Franklin Inst. 195: 483. 1923. 386 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 change with pressure. It is evidently on the border line between the glasses which behave normally under pressure and those which do not. The volume of the specimen we used was 20.007 cm? and its density at 25°C. was 2.333 grams per cm.? The experimental results are given in Table 3. The equation, 10° k = 284.8 p — 0.48 p?, represents the mean of these results and leads to the following equation for the compressibility : 10° 6 = 284.8 — 0.96 p. Adams and Williamson found that as far as their results could show the bulk compression of obsidian was a linear function of the pressure and that the value of 6 at 7 kilobars was 2.88 x 10-’ reciprocal kilo- TABLE 4. ExpERIMENTAL RESULTS FOR DURALUMIN a= —259 b= 121.0 Pressure (kilobars) (k—k’) XK 105 Least square residuals x 105 5; (obs) (obs-cale) 12 1184 —9 11 1094 22 10 947 —4 9 817 —13 8 706 —3 7 592 4 6 476 9 3) 302 6 4 Daley, = 12 5) 87 ) —17 2 | 0 1L7/ bars. This value may be compared with 2.78 x 10-° reciprocal kilo- bars, which is the compressibility of obsidian at 7 kilobars as computed from the results in this paper. Bridgman!° measured the compressi- bility of a sample of obsidian from Ascension Island by the linear method. He interpreted his results as indicating that the compressi- bility of this natural glass first decreases and then increases as the pressure is raised. His value of the compressibility at 7 kb is consider- ably lower than ours, being of the order of 2.55 x 10-3 reciprocal kilobars. ‘Two considerations prevent close comparison between Bridgman’s results and ours. First, the sample of obsidian he examined contained three per cent less silica than our sample—a circumstance 10 P, W. Bridgman. Am. Journ. Sci. 10: 364. 1925. oct. 4,1931 ADAMS AND GIBSON: CUBIC COMPRESSIBILITY 387 which would call for a lower compressibility in Bridgman’s sample. Second, as Bridgman himself implies, especially in the case of a basaltic glass from Kilauea, the linear method cannot be trusted too far to give the cubic compressibility of natural glasses. Duralumin. of a cylinder built of disks and held together by gold wire. Tuckerman of the U. 8. Bureau of Standards was kind enough to supply the specimen, which was described as 45-duralumin, Bureau of Standards Number 6532 E-4. Only one determination was made, and the results are given in Table 4. of the pressure. TABLE 5. EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS FOR THREE SALTS The sample of duralumin examined was in the form Dre B: A linear equation was used to express (k — k’) as a function Sea Peres Potassium eulpuete Sodium epinuate b= 668.9 b= 331.8 b= 2871 Pressure c = —13.86 c= —3.83 c= —2.38 (kilobars) se ase Se Ae . | Least square W .| Least square peesiairs .| Least square (k—k") X 10° a i .| (k—k”) X 105 : a | (e—k7) X 103 : : CST SE a ue aga a ees a8 Co Mia ba tere 10 4666 1 2618 if 1912 1 9 4278 19 2358 0 1704 —16 8 3804 —22 2082 —9 1499 —25 it 3360 —5 1825 8 1334 10 6 2869 —7 1525 —10 1123 4 5) 2367 rf 1244 —l 904 —9d 4 1816 0 948 0 702 8 3 1258 14 665 22 490 15 2 656 17 332 2 263 12 1 | 0 —17 0 —10 0 — 22 / The average compressibility of this substance between 2 and 12 kilobars is 1.21 X 10-3 reciprocal kilobars. Solid salts. We have also determined the compressibilities of three solid salts, ammonium nitrate, potassium sulphate, and sodium sulphate. The last-named salt was in the form, Na,SO.V, or thenardite. All these salts received the same treatment. The powdered salt (J. T. Baker’s C. P. Analyzed) was pressed into extremely compact pellets with the help of a testing machine capable of exerting a force of 5000 kg. Enough pellets were weighed out to give a total volume of salt of 10 cm*. This was the volume of the salt, not that of the salt plus the pore space. The pellets were placed in a steel capsule and submitted to hydrostatic pressure. A comparison run with 10 cm? of steel in- stead of the salt in the capsule enabled us to estimate directly the 388 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 difference between the compressibility of the salt and of the standard, steel. The ammonium nitrate was not compressed to pellets but melted and cast into a cylinder. Two series of measurements were made on ammonium nitrate, two on potassium sulphate, and one on sodium sulphate. The average observed values of the compressions are recorded in Table 5. Equations (5), (6), and (7) represent the average results for ammonium nitrate, potassium sulphate, and sodium sulphate respectively: 10° k = 668.9 p — 13.86 p? (5) 10° k = 331.89 — 3.83 p? (6) 10k = 237.1 p = 2.38 9 (7) The compressibility, 6, of any of these salts may be obtained by dif- ferentiation of the appropriate equation. . N-butyl ether. Contrary to expectation, this remarkable licuatek al- though relatively non-volatile, does not freeze at pressures as high as 12,500 bars at room température. In addition it appears to be com- paratively fluid at these high pressures and so is an excellent pressure- transmitting liquid. The n-butyl ether we used came from the East- man Kodak Laboratories. It is listed as No. 173 B.p. 142-144°. Two series of determinations were made over the high-pressure range and a special piezometer method was employed to measure the bulk compression up to 2 kilobars, which, it should be remarked, is more than one-third of the bulk compression produced when the pressure is raised from zero up to 12 kilobars. : In Table 6 we record the second series of results. It was found that the points from 7 to 12 kilobars for both series were represented ac- curately by equation (8), , 10!k = 1058 + 187.8 p. — 4.88 p? (8) Below 7 kb, however, the differences between the values of & as cal- culated by equation (8) and those observed increased enormously. For the second series of results these differences could be repre- sented by the equation LOT) Sa O28 ene we (9) where A is the difference between the observed value of & and that calculated by equation (8). Hence the equation 10k = 1058 + 187.8 p — 4.88 p? — 1028 e270 (10) oct. 4,1931 ADAMS AND GIBSON: CUBIC COMPRESSIBILITY 389 was used to express the second set of results and gives the values of 104k shown in column 3. The differences at low pressures were greater than might be desired, a fact which is partly due to the difficulty we encountered in estimating exactly the values of k between 0 and 2 kb. In the first series of results where the uncertainties at low pressures were greater, the value of (k o»; — Kk cac) at 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 kb were —30, 42, —4, —15, and 6, respectively, although, as has been men- tioned, equation (13) fitted accurately above 6 kb. It is of interest to note that a mass of n-butyl ether which occupies 100 cm? at atmospheric pressure occupies 89.5 em? at 2000 bars and 74 em? at 12,000 bars. TABLE 6. RESULTS FOR N-BUTYL ETHER Pressure (kilobars) 104k (obs) 104k (cale) Difference X 10+ (obs-cale) 12 2608 2609 —1 11 2532 2534 —2 10 2448 2447 i 9 2353 2351 2 8 2246 2244 2 "4 2132 ZAZ5 7 6 1998 1994 4 5) 1843 1844 —1 4 1665 1668 —3 3 1441 1452 —l1 2 1156 1160 —4 1 747 733 14 0 Conclusion. ‘This communication illustrates the variety of ways in which the compressibility of matter changes with pressure. At one extreme there are the silica-rich glasses whose compressibility increases markedly at the high pressures. At the other extreme a liquid such as butyl ether decreases in compressibility very rapidly up to five kilobars while at higher pressures its compressibility changes no more than that of a solid like ammonium nitrate. Intermediate between these two extremes come substances like obsidian and duralumin where the de- crease of compressibility with pressure is barely detectable over a range of twelve thousand atmospheres. Lastly, the salts may be taken as typical of the ordinary not too incompressible crystalline solid whose rate of decrease of compressibility, although large at first, diminishes steadily as the pressure rises. 390 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 It will, therefore, be obvious that any general rules for estimating the magnitude of the change of compressibility of a substance from observations on other substances should only be applied after careful consideration of the nature and structure of the substances involved. In particular, rules deduced for the rate of change of compressibility - of holocrystalline materials should not in general be applied to glasses. PALEONTOLOGY .—New Carboniferous invertebrates—II1.1 GEorGcE H. Girty, U. 8. Geological Survey. Schizophoria peculiaris n. sp. Figs. 1-4 Shell very small, broadly ovate in outline, varying in proportions but always wider than long, highly convex, coarsely striated. The pedicle valve may be compared to a cone which is elliptical at the base, very depressed, very oblique, and considerably arched in the apical part. The hinge line is equal to about half the greatest width but when the valve is viewed from above it is mostly concealed by the projecting umbonal parts. The outline, due to these two factors, has an ovate shape but little interrupted by the cardinal angles, with well rounded and strongly divergent sides and a broad gently convex or sometimes faintly emarginate anterior margin. The cardinal area is high, but not so high as it is wide and it is neither strongly arched nor strongly inclined backward. The beak tapers rapidly to a point and is not greatly incurved. The convexity is high and regular, though chiefly localized in the posterior part and the median line may be depressed into an obscure sinus. The brachial valve differs in shape but little from the pedicle valve. The cardinal area is lower and it lies essentially in the plane of the shell margins. Though lower than the cardinal area of the pedicle valve, it extends almost as far beyond the hinge line and is relatively high for a shell of this kind and size. The beak (compared with the ventral beak) is blunter and more in- curved. A median sinus is of more common occurrence in this valve than in the other, and though never strong, it is likewise more distinct. If a sinus is present, and especially if a sinus is also present in the pedicle valve, the outline in front is correspondingly emarginate. The surface is marked by radial lirae that are exceptionally strong and coarse for a shell of this size. They are separated by relatively wide inter- spaces, though many of the interspaces are partly occupied by interstitial lirae which subsequently become as large as the others. ‘The lirae vary in size and spacing and the surface generally has an irregular appearance. To this appearance of irregularity the tendency of the larger lirae to end abruptly in a large pore or hollow spine contributes somewhat, and also the varices of growth that some specimens developed. Hollow, prominent and interrupted lirae are not a conspicuous feature and on many specimens they are difficult to distinguish at all. They are mostly to be looked for on the pedicle valve. The varices of growth which are especially common and especially strong on these shells, of course interrupt all the lirae simultaneously. 1 Published by permission of the Acting Director of the U. S. Geological Survey. For the previous papers of this series, see this JouRNAL 19: 135-142 and 406-415. Re- ceived July 29, 1931. oct. 4, 1931 GIRTY: CARBONIFEROUS INVERTEBRATES 391 Most of the Schizophorias in our American Carboniferous faunas are large shells. The present species differs from them not only in size, but in other respects, so much that detailed comparisons seem unnecessary. That the shells included here merely represent the immature condition of some larger species seems unlikely, not only because they are associated with no large species of which on other grounds they could be the immature form, but because they occur in considerable numbers and are more or less uniform in size and in other characters. The largest specimen referred here has a width of 12 mm., the next largest, 10 mm. and so on down. Horizon and locality: Upper part of the Hueco limestone; Marble Canyon, east face of the Diablo Plateau, Hudspeth County, Texas (station 6681). Pustula palmeri n. sp. Mies a0), Shell small, rarely 10 mm. in width, highly convex (in the pedicle valve), lacking both radial costae and concentric wrinkles that are either systematic or pronounced but marked by numerous small spines which project from large rounded bases. Pedicle valve subquadrate in outline except for the projecting umbonal parts, the front and sides being more or less straightened merging in strong curves around the antero-lateral angles. The proportions vary in different specimens, but the width seems to be regularly greater than the length. The hinge line is about equal to the width below, but it is more apt to be slightly shorter than slightly longer. The shell is strongly and rather regularly arched. ‘Transversely the curvature is somewhat subdued across the median part with a steep descent on either side to the small depressed auricles. The umbonal parts are rather prominent and they project considerably beyond the hinge when the valve is viewed from above but not more than is common. The surface is primarily marked by spines which arise from large well defined nodes. The spines are numerous and though actually small, are rather large for the size of the shell. They are more or less regularly arranged on a plan which is fundamentally alternating or quincunxial. This arrange- ment, however, is not as a rule conspicuous, a formation in transverse rows being more obvious than any other. In some specimens curving oblique rows are formed at the sides and in others the development of spines and nodes is accompanied by a tendency to form large indistinct radial costae on the anterior parts. The nodes and spines become gradually smaller and more closely arranged toward the hinge line, near which all the transverse features converge to some extent. Several specimens have a row of small spines along the hinge margin, but this may not be a constant feature. On one of these especially the spines were developed in connection with a series of small, sharp, regular plications extending downward from the margin, a spine to each plication. The spines with their nodose bases are more numerous on some specimens than on others, and aside from number, the nodes vary also in size and prominence. On some specimens they are by no means conspicu- ous. The surface is marked by striae of growth in the nature of microscopic and irregular concentric wrinkles. Some of these are delicately lamellose. Though not developed regularly or at regular intervals, other striae much larger than the incremental ones occur here and there between the rows of 392 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 spines and pustules. More regularly large wrinkles or plications are devel- oped near the hinge line but they lose their strength within a short distance except as they may be represented by the stronger grooves that pass between and emphasize the rows of spines. The brachial valve corresponds in shape with the pedicle valve in the usual manner. It is strongly transverse and in outline rather subquadrate than semi-circular. It is gently concave so that a relatively ample cavity is left within. The curvature is not quite regular, being low over the visceral disk and more pronounced over the marginal parts without, however, any marked discrepancy. The most conspicuous surface feature in this valve consists of small rounded indentations or dimples which evidently correspond individually to the nodes on the surface of the pedicle valve. These indentations become deeper and more elongate toward the cardinal margin, so that the elevations between them take the shape of more or less irregular wrinkles. Microscopic wrinkles of incremental nature cover the entire surface which sometimes also is marked by concentric undulations (broad grooves and narrow ridges), all very faint but fairly regular where they occur at all. This valve also is armed with spines which are at least as numerous as the spines of the pedicle valve and much smaller. They occur distributed among the dimples and spring from the surface without giving rise to appreci- able nodes. Species of the general character of P. palmerz are rare in our Pennsylvanian faunas and I am able to name but two which can profitably be compared with it. P. keytez has fewer and smaller spines which were developed without appreciably disturbing the even curvature of the pedicle valve by giving rise to nodes or spine bases. Although the nodose or monticulate surface is not a constant feature in P. palmer, at least in a conspicuous degree, it is a very common one. P. keytez is also somewhat smaller and it is somewhat differ-_ ently proportioned, being comparatively long whereas P. palmerz is compara- tively broad. Pustula globosa is more comparable to P. palmeri in size and shape but it has much fewer spines and the spines, though leaving large scars on the surface, did not produee distinct elevations in the nature of spine bases. Horizon and locality: Cherokee shale; mine dumps near Joplin, Missouri. Pustula keytei n. sp. Figs. 11-14. Shell very small, hemispherical, without radial costae, and without con- centric plications, but covered with numerous small spines. Pedicle valve irregularly ovate in outline with length and width about equal though commonly somewhat longer than wide. Outline in front of the hinge rather regularly rounded. Hinge a little shorter than the width in front, mostly concealed by the umbonal parts when the valve is viewed from above. Convexity high. Umbonal region rather gibbous descending abruptly to the small, ill-defined auricles and projecting well beyond the hinge. A section longitudinally would show the greatest height posterior to the mid-length with a gradually decreasing curve forward. “oct. 4, 1931 GIRTY: CARBONIFEROUS INVERTEBRATES 393 The surface, which is without even traces of radial costae, is marked by fine, incremental lines. The sides of the vault and the auricles show small sub- equal concentric plications most of which spread out and become indis- tinguishable over the intermediate parts. A few of the grooves may persist, marking off concentric bands but this is more or less sporadic and developed especially on the visceral disc. Some of the striae also are lamellose along the posterior side. The spines which are represented by scars or by fragments of the basal parts, were apparently small and perpendicular to the surface, from which they were developed without giving rise to conspicuous nodes or spine bases. They show a general tendency to form concentric rows and occur scatteringly over the median part of the vault but in more close arrangement on its sides. The brachial valve is semicircular in outline. The width, though greater than the length, is by no means twice as great. The curvature is moderately strong but much lower than that of the pedicle valve so that a considerable space is left between them. The curvature is also fairly regular—perhaps a little strengthened over the marginal parts. The surface features are so subdued as to be rather inconspicuous. Very fine incremental striae can be seen and descending from the hinge fine obscure wrinkles which either lose themselves in passing across the intermediate part or give rise to faint con- centric undulations. Scattered over the surface, though scarcely to be seen except in a favorable light, are small dimple-like depressions that correspond to spines on the pedicle valve and were apparently developed simultaneously with them. This valve also was provided with spines but in comparison with the spines of the pedicle valve, they are smaller and less numerous. Because they are small, however, some may have been overlooked and their number may really be greater than it appears. Mr. Mather has described a species very similar to this from the Morrow group of Arkansas, of Pottsville age. I have a number of specimens from the Morrow that would naturally be referred under P. globosa and among them it is possible to find individuals that do not differ greatly from P. keytez, but most of the specimens and apparently the more typical ones, are relatively broader and were armed with distinctly larger spines. The spines are not only larger but apparently also less numerous on the sides of the vault and less closely arranged; the specimens from Arkansas, however, are not as favorably preserved as those from Colorado, and it has not been possible to compare them satisfactorily in a number of details. The superficial features of the brachial valve, for instance, are neither adequately described by Mather, nor are they in certain details adequately shown by my specimens. This valve is described as flattened over the visceral disk and abruptly de- flected around its margins. Here again the two species appear to differ inasmuch as the brachial valve of P. keytez is regularly arched. It should be remarked, however, that some of my specimens of P. globosa (if correctly identified) are equally regular though others have a flattened visceral disc and a deflected margin as described. Another similar but less closely related form is P. palmeri. In P. palmeri the spines are more numerous and more 394 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 regularly arranged and they spring from relatively large, rounded nodes which, by reason of their regular arrangement, produce here and there the appear- ance of large, ill-developed radial costae. Horizon and locality: Fountain formation (Glen Eyrie shale member); Glen Eyrie, El Paso County, Colorado (station 5100). Avonia williamsana n. sp. Figs. 15-19 Pedicle valve small, rarely more than 15 mm. in width. Width and length about equal, though the width is commonly somewhat the greater. Outline broadly subovate. Vault moderate in height, gradually enlarging, con- spicuously ovate and without a sinus. Hinge line equal to the width in front. Auricles quadrate in outline, small, depressed, ill-defined. Sculpture comprising growth lines, concentric striae, spines with their bases, and radial costae. The growth lines are fine and inconspicuous. The concentric striae may be fairly strong and numerous, or on the other hand, few and obscure. They are not restricted to the visceral disk but may occur at irregular intervals throughout the entire length of the valve. Not rarely they are so shaped as to make a step-like descent forward. Broadly speaking, the posterior half of the valve is marked by spiniferous nodes and the anterior half by spiniferous costae, but the one type of sculpture graduates into the other, and the change occurs at different stages of growth in different speci- mens. The umbonal region which is somewhat finely and irregularly cor- rugated, is marked by numerous nodes which are rather large and surmounted by spines which are rather small. In a general way the nodes occur in trans- verse rows and alternate in the rows. As growth proceeded the nodes became more elongated, passing into short costae that are interrupted by the trans- verse striae and these shortly became continuous costae that the weakened striae fail to disturb. The spines are numerous over all parts of the surface and produce nodes where they occur, but where the spines take off from con- tinuous costae, the nodes do not conspicuously deform them. The transverse arrangement of the spines in rows in many places is very striking, but the rows are irregular, crooked, or discontinuous. The costae are strong and rather regular; about 7 or 8 occur in 5 millimeters. | The brachial valve is deeply semicircular in outline and considerably wider. than long. In the form of an external mold it is moderately convex but it is decidedly less convex than the pedicle valve, especially over the umbonal parts. These are rather exceptionally prominent for a brachial valve, how- ever, and indeed the curvature of the whole valve though varying in different specimens is exceptionally strong and rather regular. The surface markings, still in terms of the external mold, are a close repeti- tion of the surface markings of the pedicle valve. Small nodes cover the posterior part and pass by gradual elongation into continuous costae, also faintly nodose, the costae corresponding to the costae of the pedicle valve and the nodes to the spines upon them. This valve equally with the other, is equipped with numerous small spines, and here also the spines are conspicu- ously but irregularly alined in transverse rows. They occur in the grooves between the costae and the grooves are slightly depressed or enlarged where they occur. Of course the grooves represent costae on the shell itself and oct. 4, 1931 GIRTY: CARBONIFEROUS INVERTEBRATES a99d the enlargements slight nodes at the bases of the spines. Returning to the valve in its condition of external mold, some specimens are crossed by delicate flat-lying but conspicuous lamellae spaced at fairly regular but remote inter- vals and marking stages of growth. Other specimens appear to lack the lamellose feature, and to present instead a surface marked by rather fine concentric wrinkles, which are obscure over the median region but gain in strength and regularity as they pass onto the sides of the vault and onto the auricles. If Avonia williamsana is brought into comparison with other Producti at present known in our Mississippian faunas it is found to have many distinctive characters. It has much in common with some forms of Productus arcuatus to judge from Professor Weller’s figures, but P. arcuatus, in its characteristic expression is a member of the semzreticulatus group; the visceral disc in the pedicle valve is marked by concentric corrugations, the costae are coarser than those of A. williamsana and the spines fewer and much larger. Differ- ences still more noteworthy are found in the brachial valve in which the visceral disk is well differentiated from the trail and strongly wrinkled, while spines, which are common on the brachial valve of A. williamsana, appear to be entirely wanting. If that species were developed on a more generous scale, A. williamsana might be compared to the form that Professor Weller in his monograph figures from the Burlington limestone as Productus sp. (plate 14, figs. 26 and 27). Besides being much larger A. williamsana is distinguished among other differ- ences by the more numerous spines and the more gradual appearance of the costae. The specimens used to represent the Burlington species in this comparison had their source in the white chert of Burlington age at Louisiana and Kinderhook, and without much question they represent the Productus sp. of Weller’s monograph. It is possible that instead of being described as new, Avonia williamsana should be identified with A. pustulifera Moore. ‘The evidence on this head is somewhat contradictory. As represented by Moore’s figures, A. pustulifera has a less spreading shape, coarser costae, and less numerous spines, so that A. williamsana appears to be something quite distinct. My collections from Osceola, however, contain a number of specimens which, on the one hand appear to be identical with A. willzamsana but which I should be tempted to identify with A. pustulifera on the hypothesis that the original figures, even though they are photographic, do not fully or accurately portray the specific characters. My specimens, however, did not come from the same horizon as Doctor Moore’s, a circumstance that may vitiate the fact that they came from the same locality. Moore did not describe the brachial valve of A. pustulifera so that the factors of identification are thereby much reduced. Horizon and locality: Boone limestone (in beds of Keokuk age); Joplin, Missouri (station 1301A). x 4 4 % 5 % > ¥ g + 4 4 j Figs. 1-19. For explanation, see page 397 oct, 4, 1931 MARSH: COPEPOD GENERA 397 DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES Schizophoria peculiaris n. sp. Figs. 1-4. Different views of one of three cotypes. Fig. 3 is of the natural size; the others are enlarged to about 3 diameters. Hueco limestone; Marble Canyon, east face of Diablo Plateau, Hudspeth County, Texas, (Station 6681). Pustula palmeri n. sp.- aA Figs. 5-10. Different views of 3 cotypes, figs. 58 representing one specimen, fig. 9 another, and fig. 10athird. Fig. 7 is of the natural size; the others are enlarged to about 3 diameters. Cherokee shale; mine dumps near Joplin, Mo. Pustula keytei n. sp. + Figs. 11-14. Different views of two cotypes, all X3. Figs. 11-13 represent one specimen, fig. 14another. Glen Eyrie shale member of the Fountain formation; Glen Eyrie, El Paso County, Colorado. Avonia williamsana n. sp. Figs. 15-19. Different views of 3 out of 7 cotypes. Figs. 15-17 represent one speci- men, fig. 15 being an enlargement to two diameters. Fig. 18 represents an external mold of a brachial valve X2. Some of the holes made by the small spines are here shown. Fig. 19 represents a pedicle valve, X2. This specimen like the original of fig. 15 is practically an internal mold. Cherty beds of the Boone limestone; Joplin, Mo., (Station 1301A). ZOOLOGY .—The copepod genera Broteas Lovén, Paradiaptomus Sars, Lovenula Schmeil, Metadiaptomus Methuen, and Adiaptomus Cooper.!. C. DwicHt Marsu, Bureau of Animal Industry. In connection with a study of Diaptomus it became necessary to determine somewhat clearly: what species should be separated from Diaptomus and referred to the proposed genera Broteas, Paradiapto- mus, Lovenula, Metadiaptomus, and Adiaptomus. It was found diffi- cult to get from the authors who have used these names any method of determining by a few characters the generic limits of these proposed divisions of the Diaptomidae. Gurney, 1929, discussed the matter somewhat elaborately, but did not make clear a practical method of separating the genera. ‘This led the writer to go over the literature to see if he could find out how the authors used these names and whether it might be possible, in some fairly simple way, to make diagnoses of the genera. This was necessarily nothing but a study of the litera- ture, as no material of these forms was available for examination. Such a critical study is always difficult because many published de- scriptions are incomplete and there is always a possibility, especially in the examination of minute structures, that there may be mistakes of observation, in making sketches, or of interpretation. When there is a discrepancy between authors, it may be assumed that the later author is right, although, of course, this would not always be true. In 1847 Lovén proposed the generic name Broteas for a South African copepod giving a somewhat elaborate description with figures. This 1 Received August 3, 1931. 398 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 differed from the recognized characteristics of Diaptomus in that the female abdomen was composed of two segments instead of three, the maxillipeds were long and powerful instead of rather weak and incon- spicuous, the endopodites of the swimming feet were all two-segmented, while in Diaptomus the endopodites of the first feet are two-segmented and of the second, third, and fourth three-segmented, and the first antennae contained 27 segments instead of 25. The exopodite of the left 5th foot of the male was armed with a conspicuous hook, appar- ently terminal, and an acute spine. In 1895 Sars described Paradiaptomus lamellatus, proposing the new genus Paradiaptomus. ‘This, like Broteas, has two-segmented female abdomen and long and powerful maxillipeds; the endopodite of the maxilliped consisted of three segments instead of five as in Diaptomus. The swimming feet were like Diaptomus,—first foot two-segmented and the others of three segments. The exopodite of the left 5th foot of the male was armed with three spines. In Giesbrecht and Schmeil, 1899, Schmeil proposed Lovenula in place of Broteas, since Broteas was preoccupied. His description was practically lke that of Lovén, but he added that the endopodite of the maxilliped consisted of three segments. Thus the main distinc- tion between Lovenula Schmeil, or Broteas Lovén, and Paradiaptomus Sars was that the endopodites of the swimming feet of Lovenula have two segments, while those in Paradiaptomus Sars are like those in Diap- tomus, two-segmented in the first, and three-segmented in the others. Giesbrecht and Schmeil, 1898, diagnosed Paradiaptomus in accordance with the description of Sars as having the two-segmented female abdo- men and three-segmented endopodite of the maxilliped as in Lovenula and the segmentation of the endopodites of the swimming feet as in Diaptomus. 7 Sars in 1899, from some collections in which he recognized, as he thought, the original species of Lovén, published a detailed descrip- tion under the title ‘‘On the Genus Broteas of Lovén with Description of the Type Species: Broteas falcifer Lovén:” this description was accompanied with rather elaborate illustrations. He stated that Lovén was doubtless in error in the number of antennal segments which are 25 instead of 27. The last segment of the right antenna bears a small hook. The swimming feet, instead of having two-segmented endopodites, are like those in Diaptomus. He considered that these facts make Broteas identical with his Paradiaptomus and, as Paradiap- tomus is the more recent name, he made it a synonym of Broteas. oct. 4, 1931 MARSH: COPEPOD GENERA 399 Van Douwe, 1912, made some criticisms of preceding descriptions, but stated nothing that adds to our knowledge of the generic dis- tinctions. Gurney, 1904, in his description of “‘Lovenula mea’ which is now considered identical with Paradiaptomus falcifer stated that the endo- podites of the maxillipeds were four-segmented. Brady, 1913, considered that Paradiaptomus should be used to include Broteas and Lovenula. Grochmalicki, 1913, made Paradiaptomus Sars a synonym of Lovenula Schmeil, and listed 3 species of Lovenula, L. falcifera Loven, L. lamellata Sars, and L. mea Gurney. He added another species, L. stolzmanni. Riihe, 1921, stated positively that the endopodite of the maxilliped of Paradiaptomus has five segments. Rihe claimed that Sars was in error in regard to the left fifth foot of the male; he stated that two spines are borne on the external margin of the second segment of the exopodite and a hyaline lamella on the internal margin; that there is a definite line separating the first and second segments which leave the spines on the second segment. Both Sars and Riihe make the left exopodite two-segmented, but they differ in the location of the division. Sars, 1927, published descriptions of Lovenula falcifera and L. barnardi, and revived the genus name Paradiaptomus for L. lamellatus. In both Lovenula and Paradiaptomus he found the swimming feet like Diaptomus, the two-segmented female abdomen, and the endopodites of the maxillipeds five-segmented. He made Paradiaptomus somewhat different in form from Lovenula, the maxillipeds less powerfully de- veloped, and no hook on the ultimate segment of the right male antenna. Brehm, 1927, stated that the family Diaptomidae has only two genera, Paradiaptomus and Diaptomus, evidently discarding Broteas and Lovenula. In 1906 Cooper proposed the name Adiaptomus for a species which he named A. natalensis. He stated that it has antennae of 26 segments, female abdomen of 2 segments, and his figure shows the male fifth foot of the same general form as that found in Lovenula Schmeil. The endopodites of the maxillipeds are three-segmented, and the swimming feet are like Diaptomus. There seems to be no reason for separating Adiaptomus from Lovenula except the 26-segmented antennae and possibly there was a mistake about this. Metadiaptomus was proposed by Methuen in 1910 with the type species M. transvallensis. The antennae are of 26 segments, as stated 400 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 for Adiaptomus. The female abdomen is three-segmented. The swimming feet are like Diaptomus. In-the male fifth feet, fig. 3, the second basal segment of the right foot is very much enlarged on the inner border, and this border and part of the dorsal surface is spinose. The left exopodite of the male fifth foot is one- or possibly two-seg- mented and bears two processes, a strong curved spine on the dorsal surface which, in the type species, is nearly as long as the whole exopo- dite, and a small terminal spine. Gurney, 1929, recognized the two genera Paradiaptomus and Meta- diaptomus, dividing Paradiaptomus into a Paradiaptomus and a Lovenula series. The various ideas about the genera are summarized in Table 1. Diaptomus is added for comparison. : It appears that the original descriptions of Broteas and Lovenula made them differ from Diaptomus in the prominence of the maxillipeds, the segmentation of the swimming feet, the female abdomen, and the endopodite of the maxilliped. Paradiaptomus Sars 1895 differs from Broteas Lovén and Lovenula Schmeil in having the swimming feet like those of Diaptomus, and in the structure of the exopodite of the left 5th foot of the male. In regard to the segmentation of the endo- podite of the maxilliped there has been a progressive change in authors’ statements, the more recent making it five, like Diaptomus. If we assume, as one naturally would, that the later authors are more cor- rect, it is probable that we should consider that this segmentation is five. It appears, however, that while the division of this endopodite in Diaptomus is clearly in five segments they are not so clearly marked in the other genera and hence have been sometimes overlooked. ‘The maxilliped is highly developed and conspicuous in Paradiaptomus, Lovenula, and Broteas, and inconspicuous in Diaptomus and Metadi- aptomus. ‘There is a small hook on the ultimate segment of the right male antenna in Broteas and Lovenula of Sars and Paradiaptomus of Gurney. The female abdomen in Broteas, Paradiaptomus, Lovenula, and Adiaptomus is 2-segmented, while in Diaptomus and Metadiaptomus it is 3-segmented. This is not a hard and fast distinction, however, for a few species of Diaptomus have 2-segmented abdomens. Sars writes of some Diaptomi in which the female abdomen has the last two seg- ments ‘‘confluent.”’ One might raise the question whether, in such cases, if they were ‘‘confluent,”’ it might not be better to consider the abdomen to be two-segmented. oct. 4, 1931 MARSH: COPEPOD GENERA 401 There are differences in the male fifth feet which help materially in distinguishing the genera. As shown in the copy of Sars’ figure of the fifth feet of Broteas falcifer (Fig. 1), which now should be called Lovenula, the left exopodite has a well developed terminal hook and an acute spine. The left endopodite is either lacking or rudimentary. TABLE 1. Summary or CHARACTERS Armature left Swimming feet F crate Endop. Maxilliped ULE see inale endop. of male seyret 5th ft. Broteas Loven 1847] 1-4, 2 seg. | 2 seg. Hook & acute spine. Paradiaptomus 1, 2 seg. Prominent, 3stout spines. Sars 1895 2-4, 3 seg. | 2 seg. | Endop. 3 seg. : Lovenula Schmeil | 1-4, 2 seg.| 2 seg. | Prominent, Hook & acute 1898 Endop. 3 seg. spine. Paradiaptomus 1898} 1-2 seg. Prominent, 3 spines. 2-4, 3 seg. | 2 seg. | Endop. 3 seg. Broteas Sars 1899 24, 3 seg. | 2 seg. | Prominent, Ter. hook. | Hook & acute . Endop. 3 seg. spine. Lovenula Gurney Prominent, Hook & acute 1904 Endop. 4 seg. spine. Paradiaptomus 2 seg. Hook & acute Brady 1913 spine. Paradiaptomus Prominent, 2 spines & hy- Rithe 1921 _ | Endop. 5 seg. aline lam. Lovenula Sars 1927 | 2-4, 3 seg. | 2 seg. | Prominent, Ter. hook | Hook & acute Endop. 4 seg. spine. Paradiaptomus 1927 | 2-4, 3 seg. Prominent, 3 spines. Endop. 4 seg. Paradiaptomus, in- 2 seg. | Prominent, Ter. hook cluding Love- Endop. 5 seg. nula, Gurney 1929 Adiaptomus Cooper| 24, 3 seg.| 2 seg. | Endop. 3 seg. Hook & spine. 1906 Metadiaptomus 2-4, 3 seg. | 3 seg. Large curved Methuen 1910 spine on posterior Suntace. Small spine near end. Diaptomus 2-4, 3 seg. | 3 seg. | Not prominent Endop. 5 seg. Paradiaptomus Sars, as shown in his figure of P. lamellatus (Fig. 2) has a distinct left endopodite and the exopodite is armed either with three rather stout spines, as stated by Sars, or with two spines and a hyaline lamella according to Rite. 402 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 Adiaptomus has male fifth feet like Lovenula. Metadiaptomus, as shown in the figure from Methuen of M. transvaalensis (Fig. 3), has a stout curved spine on the posterior face of the exopodite and a smaller terminal spine. In addition, the second basal segment of the right foot is much enlarged on the inner side and the inner border and part of the posterior surface is armed with spinules. The following suggestion then is made for distinguishing between these genera: Lovenula Schmeil has 2-segmented female abdomen, prominent maxillipeds, the left exopodite of the male fifth foot armed with a terminal hook and an acute spine. 1 2 Fig. 1. Fifth foot of male of Lovenula falcifera. After Sars. Fig. 2. Fifth foot of male of Paradiaptomus lamellatus. After Sars. Fig. 3. Fifth foot of male of Metadiaptomus transvaalensis. After Methuen. Paradiaptomus Sars has 2-segmented female abdomen, prominent maxillipeds, the left exopodite of the male fifth root armed with 2 stout spines and a hyaline lamella. | Metadiaptomus has 3-segmented female abdomen, maxillipeds not prominent, the left exopodite of the male fifth foot armed with a curved spine on the posterior surface and a small terminal spine. The second basipodite of the right male fifth foot is enlarged on the inner side and spinulose. Adiaptomus is a synonym of Lovenula. Lovenula will include Broteas falcifer Loven 1847, Lovenula excellens Kiefer 1921, Adiaptomus natalensis Cooper 1906, Diaptomus boumerr Daday 1910, Paradiaptomus biramata Lowndes 1930, P. biramata Riithe 1921, P. biramata Van Douwe 1912, Broteds falcifer Sars 1899, oct. 4, 1931 MARSH: COPEPOD GENERA 403 Lovenula falcifera Sars 1927, L. barnardi Sars 1927, Paradiaptomus faleifer Brady 1913, Lovenula Giesbrecht & Schmeil 1898, Broteas falcifer Metheun 1910, Lovenula mea Gurney 1904, Diaptomus africanus Daday 1908, D. aethiopicus Daday 1908, Lovenula simplex Kiefer 1929, Diaptomus pictus Brady 1913 (which as suggested by Gurney 1929 is probably a synonym of Cooper’s Adiaptomus natalensis), and possibly Diaptomus alluaudi DeGuerne & Richard 1890 (but female has 3-segmented abdomen). Paradiaptomus will include Paradiaptomus lamellatus Sars 1895, P. lamellatus Rithe 1921, P. lamellatus Giesbrecht & Schmeil 1898, Broteas lamellatus Sars 1899, Paradiaptomus lamellatus Sars 1927, and Lovenula stolemanni Grochmalicki 1913. Metadiaptomus will include M. transvaalensis Methuen 1910, Para- diaptomus transvaalensis Kiefer 1929, Paradiaptomus colonialis Kiefer 1928, Diaptomus meridianus Van Douwe 1912, D. mascalus Brady 1913, D. capensis Sars 1901, D. purcelli Sars 1901, D. chevreuxi De Guerne & Richard 1894, D. allwaudi De Guerne & Richard 1890, D. rigidus Sars 1927, Probably D. asiaticus Uljanin 1875, D. rehmanni Grock 1918, and D. tibetanus Daday 1908. Diaptomus greent Gurney 1907, called Paradiaptomus greent Gurney 1931, and the two species described by Van Douwe 1912 as Paradiap- tomus schultzer and P. similis, are considered as probably Diaptoma. Gurney 1907 stdted that the female abdomen in D. greeni was 3- segmented. Van Douwe stated that the female abdomen was 2- segmented in Paradiaptomus schultzet and P. similis. Gurney, 1931, reported as the result of an examination of new material of P. similis that the female abdomen is 3-segmented: this would be presumptive evidence that these forms should be considered as Diaptomi. It seems probable, moreover, that P. schultzet and P. svmilis are not specifically distinct and should be considered as synonymous. As pointed out by Gurney, 1929, it is sometimes difficult to separate these genera. The typical large, curved spine on the posterior surface of the exopodite of the male fifth foot in Metadiaptomus may be much smaller in some species and may be found more distad on the exopodite until it is sometimes difficult to decide whether it should be considered as located on the posterior surface or as terminal. That is, the termi- nal hook of Lovenula is doubtless homologous with the curved spine of Metadiaptomus. Probably it is also homologous with the ‘‘external”’ spine of Paradiaptomus. 404 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 LITERATURE CITED Brapy, G. S. 1913. On freshwater Entomostraca from various parts of South Africa. Ann. Natal Mus., vol. 2, pt. 4, pp. 459-584. BreuM, V. 1927. Ordnung der Crustacea Entomostraca. Handbuch der Zoologie. Kiikenthal & Krumbach. 3rd Bd. 4 Lief. pp. 435-496. CoopEerR, ARNOLD W. 1906. Notes ona new species of Gymnoplea from Richmond, Natal, South Africa; Adiaptomus natalensis (gen et sp. nov.). Ann. Natal Govern. Mus. 1, p. 97-103, 1 pl. Dapay, E. von. 1908. Entomostraca et Hydrachnidae e Tibet. Records of the Indian Mus., Calcutta, 2, 1908-1909: 323-341, 9 figs. —— 1908. Adatok német-Kelet-Afrika Edesvici mikrofaundjénak ismeretéhez. Math. Termés. Erteseté. 26-43-57. ? —— 1910. Species aliquot novae Entomostracorum. Arch. zool. Budapest, Vol. 1, p. 187-195, 3 tab. Van Dovuwet, Cary. 1912. Copepoda. Neue Stisswasser-Copepoden aus Sitidafrica. Zoolog. und Anthropol. Ergebnisse einer Forschungreise im westlichen u. zen- tralen Stidafrica in den Jahre 1903-1905 von Dr. Leonard Schultze. Bd. 5. Syst. & Tiergeog. Lief. 1, pp. 23-32, 1 pl. GIESBRECHT, W. UND O. ScHMEIL. 1899. Copepoda. I. Gymnoplea. Das Tierreich Lief. 6, XVI, 169 pp., 31 figs. GROCHMALICKI, J. 1913. Beitrdge zur Kenntnis der Stisswasserfauna Ostafrikas. Anz. der Akad. Wiss. Kraku, Math-naturw. KI. Reihe B. Nr. 7 B, 2 Taf., 1913, pp. 517-537. Dr GuERNE & Ricuarp. 1890. Diagnose d’un Diaptomus nouveau du Congo. Descrip- tion du Diaptomus alluaudi, n. sp. recuelli par M. Alluaud dans un réservoir d’eau douce a Lanzarote (Canaries), in: Bull. Soc. zool. France, Vol. 15, p. 198-200. —— 1894. Diaptomus chevreuxi, Copépode nouveau d’Algérie. Avec 5 fig. Bull. Soc. zool. France, T. 19, p. 176-179, figs. 1-5. GurRneEyY, R. 1904. Onasmall collection of freshwater Entomostraca from South Africa. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. II, pp. 298-301. . —— 1907. On two new Entomostraca from Ceylon. Spolia Zeylanica Vol. 4, pp. 126- 134, 2 pls. —— 1929. Notes on the Diaptomidae of South Africa. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 4, pp. 572-584. —— 1931. A species of fresh-water Copepod, Paradiaptomus greeni Gurney, common to South Africa, Ceylon, and India. Zool. Anz. 92 (11/12) pp. 301-303, figs. 1-5. KigFrerR, FriepRIcH. 1928. Beitrdge zur Copepodenkunde. Zool. Anz. Bd. 76, Heft 1/2, pp. 5-18. — 1929. Neue und wenig bekannte Stisswasser-Copenoden aus Stidafrika. Zool. Anz. 15 Marz 1929. Bd. 80, heft 10/12, pp. 309-310. Lovin, L. 1847. Fyra nya arter af Sétwatters-Crustaceen fron Sédra Afrika. Kongl. Vet. Akad. Handl. 1845, pp. 427-439, Taf. III-VI. Lownpgs, A.G. 1930. Freshwater Copepoda from Abyssinia collected by Mr. J. Omer- Cooper. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. Part I, 1930, pp. 161-179. 4 pls. MeEtTHUEN, Paut A. 1910. On a collection of freshwater Crustacea from the Transvaal. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 1910 p. 148-166, 11 pls., 2 figs. Rtue, F.E. 1921. Die Stisswassercrustaceen der deutschen Stidpolar-Expedition 1901- 1903 mit Ausschluss der Ostracoden. Deutsch. Siidpol. Ex. 1901-1903. XVI Bd., Zool. VIII Bd. Pp. 5-66. ocT. 4, 1931 PRICE: METAGONIMOIDES OREGONENSIS 405 Sars, G.O. 1895. On some South African Entomostraca raised from dried mud. Skrift. Vidensk. Selsk. Christiania, 1895, No. 8, p. 1; 1-56. — 1899. On the genus Broteas of Lovén, with description of the type species: Broteas faleifer Lov. Arch. Math. og Naturvid. Kristiania, 21: pp. 1-27, pl. IV. —— 1907. Ontwo new species of the genus Diaptomus from South Africa. Arch. Math. Nat. Kristiania Bd. 28, No. 8, 17 pp., 2 pls. —— 1927. The fresh-water Entomostraca of the Cape Province (Union of South Africa). Ann. South Afric. Mus. Vol. 25, p. 85-149, 12 pls. Uusanin, W.N. 1875. Crustacea of Turkestan. Part I. ZOOLOGY .—Metagonimoides oregonensis, a new trematode from a raccoon... EMMETT W. Pricer, Bureau of Animal Industry, United States Department of Agriculture. (Communicated by ELoIsE B. Cram.) Among some specimens recently referred to the writer by Dr. D. Sinitsin were a few specimens of a trematode which had been collected by Dr. J. N. Shaw, Oregon State College, Corvallis, Oregon, from the intestine of a raccoon. ‘This fluke is closely related to species of the heterophyid genus Metagonimus Katsurada, but differs from them in certain characters which are regarded as sufficient to warrant the erec- tion of anew genus. For this form the name Metagonimordes oregonen- sis. N.g., N. Sp., is proposed. Metagonimoides new genus. Generic diagnosis.—Heterophyidae: Body piriform in outline, strongly flattened dorso-ventrally. Oral sucker terminal; acetabulum well developed, lateral, directed antero-medially, and opening into a shallow genital sinus as in Metagonimus. Seminal vesicle slender and showing several constrictions. Testes oval, situated opposite each other at posterior end of body. Ovary irregular in shape, pretesticular, slightly to right of median line; seminal re- ceptacle well developed; Laurer’s canal present. Vitellaria lateral, extending from level of base of pharynx to posterior end of body. Uterus S-shaped, never extending caudad of ovary. Excretory vesicle Y-shaped, with short, wide stem and relatively short branches. Parasitic in intestinal tract of mammals. Type species.—Metagonimoides oregonensis new species. Metagonimoides oregonensis new species. Figs. 1, 2. Description.—Metagonimoides: Body piriform in outline, 589 to 688u long by 573 to 852u wide, strongly flattened dorso-ventrally. The cuticle is missing in all specimens available and it is not possible to determine whether spines are present or not. Oral sucker cup-shaped, 93 to 114y in diameter, terminal 1 Received August 3, 1931. 406 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 in position, and with its aperture slightly subterminal; prepharynx very short; pharynx strongly muscular, 77 to 109u long by 46 to 93u wide; esophagus short and slender; intestinal caeca slender and extending to posterior end of body. Acetabulum 124 to 233u in diameter, situated in equatorial zone at right side of body, its aperture directed antero-medially and opening into a shallow genital sinus. Opening of genital sinus irregular and with two papilla- like ridges projecting into sinus, the larger of these ridges situated at postero- median border and the smaller situated at anterior margin. These structures have been interpreted by Witenberg’ as a modified gonotyl or so-called genital DFT Fig. 1.—Metagonimoides oregonensis Price. Dorsal view. sucker. No cirrus pouch present. Seminal vesicle slender, shaped somewhat like a transversely placed interrogation mark, and lying dorsal to uterus in left lateral field. Hemaphroditic duct opens into genital sinus at base of anterior ridge-like papilla. Testes oval, 112 to 150u by 150 to 200u, and situated opposite each other in posterior part of body, their median border being separated by the stem of excretory vesicle. Ovary more or less irregu- lar in outline, at posterior border of acetabulum in some specimens and median 2G. WITENBERG. Studies on the trematode-family Heterophyidae. Ann. Trop. M. and Parasit., Liverpool. 23: 131-239, figs. 1-33. 1929. oct. 4, 1931 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 407 to it in others; Laurer’s canal present. Vitellaria lateral and composed of medium sized follicles which extend from level of posterior end of pharynx to posterior end of body; they are separated anteriorly and posteriorly by a narrow space. Uterus relatively short and forming a low S-shaped loop which lies chiefly in left lateral field; it does not extend caudad of ovary as in the case of Metagonimus. Eggs oval, 33u long by 18u wide, golden yellow in color. Excretory vesicle Y-shaped, with wide stem and relatively short, slender branches; excretory pore terminal. Host.—Procyon lotor. Location.—Small intestine. Distribution — United States (Corvallis, Oregon). Specimens —U. 8S. National Museum Helminthological Collection No. 30862 (type and paratypes). sea SeGth SRE eT qeeemugsaeesees 4 <> a: 2 yee eas Ps os > BPs Fig. 2. view. Metagonimoides oregonensis Price. Acetabulum and genital sinus. Ventral This trematode is distinguished from species of Metagonimus (M. yoko- gawaz (Katsurada), and M. ciwreanus (Witenberg) ( = Dexiogonimus ciureanus Witenberg) by the distribution of the vitellaria and the course of the uterus. In Metagonimus the vitellaria do not extend anteriorly beyond the ovarial zone and the uterine coils extend caudad of the ovary and seminal receptacle, while in Metagonzmozdes the vitellaria extend as far anteriorly as the pharynx and the uterine coils do not extend caudad of the ovary and seminal re- ceptacle. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS SIXTEENTH INTERNATIONAL GEOLOGICAL CONGRESS According to a circular letter recently issued by the committee on or- ganization of the International Geological Congress, the sixteenth session will meet in Washington in June, 1933. The following topics for discussion have been proposed: Measurement of geologic time by any method. Batholiths and related intrusives. Zonal relations of metalliferous deposits. Major divisions of the Paleozoic system. 408 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 16 Geomorphogenic processes in arid regions and their resulting forms and products. Fossil man and contemporary faunas. Orogenesis. It is planned to offer the following excursions before the sessions: A-1. An 11-day tour of eastern New York and western New England by bus, starting from New York City. A-2. A 12-day tour of the mining districts of the southern Appalachians and the Mississippi Valley by special train from Washington. A-3. A 10-day trip by bus through the Appalachian Valley in Virginia and portions of bordering States, from Washington. A-4. A 10- or 11-day tour of northern New York by bus, from Albany. A-5. A 10-day trip by boat to classic Cretaceous, Tertiary, and Pleistocene localities on Potomac River and Chesapeake Bay, from Washington. A-6. An 1i-day trip by train from Washington to the oil fields of Oklahoma and Texas. A-7. A 5-day trip by bus from New York to Washington, primarily for geomorpho- logists. A-8. A 4- or 5-day trip from New York to Washington by bus, primarily for economic geologists. A-9. A transcontinental excursion, lasting 12 or 14 days, from San Francisco to Washington. There will also be a series of 12 short excursions of one or two days length, starting from New York. Some of these will be offered before and others after the ‘‘A”’ series of excursions. It is proposed to devote three days during the session to short excursions to points of interest near Washington. The following excursions after the session are planned: C-1. A transcontinental excursion by special train from Washington, 35 days. The major features of this excursion will be a series of side trips, generally by bus, to points of particular interest. C-2. A transcontinental excursion by train from Washington, 35 days. This excur- sion has been planned so as to give a general cross section of the geology of the United States. The main emphasis is on regional and structural geology, physiography, and Tertiary stratigraphy, including volcanics. ; C-3. A 10-day excursion by train to Chicago, thence by bus, to study the glacial geology of the Central States. C-4. A 10- or 11-day excursion to the iron and copper deposits of the Lake Superior region. C-5. A 35-day transcontinental excursion from New York or Washington to San Francisco by airplane with return by train, primarily for geomorphologists. Copies of the circular, which contains detailed information regarding these excursions, may be obtained from the General Secretary, Sixteenth Inter- national Geological Congress, U. S. Geological Survey, Washington, D. C. OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS Tuesday, October 6 Wednesday, October 7 Thursday, October 8 Saturday, October 10 Tuesday, October 13 Wednesday, October 14 Thursday, October 15 Saturday, October 17 The Botanical Society The Washington Society of Engineers The Medical Society The Chemical Society The Philosophical Society The American Institute of Electrical Engineers The Geological Society The Medical Society The Academy The Biological Society The Helminthological Society The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: N. A. Coss, Bureau of Plant Industry. Corresponding Secretary: Pau E. Howe, Bureau of Animal Industry. Recording Secretary: CHARLES THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. CONTENTS ORIGINAL PAPERS Page Population analysis.—The extinction of families—I. Aurrep J. LorKa.......... 377 Physical chemistry.—The cubic compressibility of certain substances. L. H. Apams and R. E. Grpson.............. PC a .. 381 Paleontology.—New Carboniferous invertebrates—III. Grorer H. Grrty....... 390 Zoology.—The copepod genera Broteas Lovén, Paradiaptomus Sars, Lovenula Schmeil, Metadiaptomus Methuen, and Adiaptomus Cooper. C. DwiantMarsu. 397 Zoology.—Metagonimoides oregonensis, a new trematode from a raccoon. EmMert WisPBICm, 5. os sce chek sawn ope bela os Hae Sw cate Oi neat Gee ee 405 Screnraic Norns AND NEWS 2 oboe ee a a ee 407 This JouURNAL is indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. Voi. gi = OcToBER 19, 1931 No. 17 : ing ; ps Ee Ynys a ON ag Joo r ~> a _~\ MSG Ae. OF THE ie WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ° BOARD OF EDITORS C. Wytue Cooke CHARLES DRECHSLER Huaea L. DrypENn Uv. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS = ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. PETERS Harotp MorRRISON PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E, A, GoLDMAN G. W. Srosz BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY ™ AGNEs CHASE J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Roger C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Royau AND GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated sovieties; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNALis issued semi- monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer when it appears on the nineteenth only. - Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors: they should be clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To faeilitate the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced by zinc etchings being preferable. Proof.—IW order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. om . Author's Reprints—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord- ance with the following schedule of prices: Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers Da eae Rake dys et etiam $2.00 100 $ .50 $ .55 $. $1.10 2.50 150 . 90 1.00 1.10 1.60 3.00 200 1.15 1.50 1.60 2.10 3.50 250 1. 65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. The rate of Subscription per volwmets io ite ok. ose rene cs Ga ok ee Semi-monthly numbers... 55 Gt wile es aoe kk os « ores ee eS. Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 18, 14, and 15)..... 50 - Remitiances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’”’ and addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C. Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made within thirty days after date of the following issue. * Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates are given to members of scientific societies afhliated with the Academy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vor. 21 OcToBER 19, 1931 Novi? CHEMISTRY .—Further studies of kolm.1 R. C. Weis and R. E. StEvENS, U. 8. Geological Survey. INTRODUCTION Swedish kolm, a material resembling oil shale, has recently become of special interest as one of the very few substances whose age can be determined both from fossils and from the lead-uranium ratio. In- terest in this material has been stimulated by Professor A. C. Lane, Chairman of the National Research Committee on the Measurement of Geologic Time by Atomic Disintegration, through whose efforts various studies have been made of it, including those described in this paper. One of the significant results is that the lead extracted from the kolm is the purest uranium lead so far found; its atomic weight determined at Harvard by Baxter and Bliss? is 206.008, whereas that of ordinary lead is 207.218. According to Sjogren? kolm was known to Cronstedt as early as 1758. It occurs in limestone and alum shale quarries in the form of ellipsoidal nodules several decimeters thick. It was studied chem- ically by Nordenskidld,* who also sent a sample to Prof. Winkler at Freiberg in 1901. Winkler found the combustible contents of the kolm to occur in the same proportions as in anthracite (about 5 per cent O, 88 per cent C, and 7 per cent H). He also confirmed the pres- ence of free nitrogen (0.50 per cent). ‘The ash consisted mostly of S10,, Al,O;, and Fe.O;:, with small quantities of MnO, MgO, CaO, alkalies, and U;0s. Nordenskidld had earlier found sulphur, uranium, and small proportions of nickel, cobalt, copper, molybdenum, vana- dium, and the cerium and gadolinium earths. Miss Naima Sahlbom, 1 Published with the permission of the Acting Director, U. S. Geological Survey. Received August 26, 1931. ? Baxter and Bliss. Jour. Am. Chem. Soc. 52: 4848. 1930. 3 Hj. Sjogren. Arkiv. Kemi, Mineral. och. geol., Stockholm, 1905, Band 2, Hafte dD, pp. 1-6. * Nordenskidld. Compt. rend. 120: 859. 1895. Oh oO ee) 409 4 410 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 17 assistant to Sjogren, identified barium, lead, tin, and lithium in the kolm. Our sample of kolm, which was received through Professor A. H. Westergaard, was “collected from the middle and lower parts of the Peltura beds of the shale quarry of Gullhogen near Skovde in the province of Westergotland. These beds we consider to be of Cambrian age. Undoubtedly they are of pre-Ordovician age, as the overlying bed is formed by alum shale with Dictyonema flabelliforme Elchw.” The beds are therefore of Upper Cambrian age. Some of this material gave roughly 1.8 per cent moisture, 29.5 volatile matter, 43.6 fixed carbon, and 35.1 ash, according to the U. 8. Bureau of Mines. Mr. M. F. Connor kindly determined the approxi- mate composition of the ash to be SiO, 48.68 per cent, Al,O; 20.34, Fe,O; 20.00, CaO 0.90, MgO 1.40, Na.O 0.60, K.O 5.84, SO; 0.62, TiO, 0.20, P.O; 0.15, undetermined 1.27, with S in the kolm 4.74, and Fe 3.85, as pyrite. Later tests (by R. C. Wells) showed about 0.003 per cent V2O;, referred to the kolm, about 0.04 ZnO, 0.13 rare earths, 0.013 Mo, 0.003 MnO, 0.004 NiO and no Zr, Be, or Th. The ash was 31.25 per cent of the weight of the kolm used in the final work. Bismuth and cobalt were not noted, though they might have been present. Titanium and phosphorus were not mentioned by Sjogren. The uranium in the kolm is supposed by Lindgren to have been segregated by organisms. It appears to be free from thorium. Its percentage was carefully determined by Mauzelius.’ Later deter- minations with the electroscope by one of us, also by 8. C. Lind, R. B. Moore, and Herman Schlundt, who used the emanation method, indicated somewhat less uranium than that found in the regular analytical way. The cause of this slight discrepancy is not yet entirely clear. Part of the difficulty, however, may consist of freeing the ura- nium entirely from silica and alumina, or, if the cupferron or titration methods are used, of avoiding the presence of zinc or overreducing the uranium solution previous to titration. ANALYTICAL DETERMINATIONS The principal object of the analytical work was to determine the age of the kolm from the ratio of lead to uranium. As the percentages were small this work was very laborious and time consuming. In general the method consisted of (1) getting all the lead in one portion, (2) all the uranium in another portion, and (3) separating each in a pure and determinable form. The method finally used was as follows: 5 R. Mauselins. Tekn. Tidskr., Upp]. C, Kemi och Bergvet, H. 2, 1914. oct. 19, 1931 WELLS AND STEVENS: KOLM 411 About 50 grams of a large finely powdered uniform sample (originally pre- pared by R. B. Moore) was gently ignited in a platinum dish. The ash was treated with water, about 23 ml. of sulphuric acid, and an excess of hydro- fluoric acid and evaporated to fumes. The residue was dissolved in water and again heated to fumes. It was then again dissolved, transferred to a flask, made up to 500 ml., saturated with hydrogen sulphide, heated, cooled, again saturated with hydrogen sulphide, and allowed to stand at least overnight. The solution was then filtered and the precipitate well washed with water con- taining hydrogen sulphide, whereby all the lead was separated in the impure precipitate from all the uranium in the filtrate with most of the iron and alumi- num. The precipitate containing the lead sulphide was extracted on the filter paper with hot dilute hydrochloric and nitric acids and the solution set on the steam bath to evaporate. The insoluble part, after gently burning off the filter paper, was fused with sodium carbonate, leached with water, and the solution filtered and discarded. The precipitate was dissolved in hot dilute hydrochloric acid, nearly neutralized with sodium carbonate with litmus paper, and heated just to boiling, whereby much of the titanium was pre- cipitated almost free from lead. This was filtered off and the lead in the filtrate precipitated with hydrogen sulphide as before, finally dissolved, and added to the main solution of lead nitrate. The titanium precipitate was reworked by the sulphate method to recover the small quantity of lead in it. All the filter papers used were finally ignited, the ash fused with sodium car- bonate, and any lead present recovered in the usual way. ‘The final solution containing all the lead was heated to fumes with a small excess, 0.2 or 0.4 gram, of sulphuric acid, diluted about 20 times, allowed to stand overnight, and filtered, whereby molybdenum and copper were removed. The lead sulphate was then dissolved in hot ammonium acetate solution and the solu- tion allowed to stand overnight and filtered. After collecting traces of lead from all remaining ignited filter papers by means of a fusion, separation as sulphate, and solution in ammonium acetate, the total lead was again pre- cipitated as sulphide, filtered off, dissolved in nitric acid, and converted to sulphate in a weighed porcelain crucible. From this weight was calculated the percentage of lead. The filtrate containing the iron, aluminum, and uranium was heated with nitric acid to oxidize the iron, neutralized with ammonia, precipitated with ammoniacal ammonium carbonate in excess, and filtered. Two reprecipita- tions were made to extract all of the uranium. The combined filtrates were evaporated to small bulk, heated with an excess of nitric acid for some time to destroy ammonium salts, diluted, precipitated with ammonia, and the filtrate containing calcium discarded. The uranium precipitate was tested for rare earths by means of hydrofluoric acid at this point, but no precipitate was obtained. The uranium was then converted to sulphate, diluted to 150 ml., neutralized with sodium carbonate, and an excess of 1.5 grams of sodium bicarbonate added. After heating to boiling the precipitate was filtered off, dissolved in nitric acid, and reprecipi- tated. Asa small quantity of uranium seemed to be persistently retained by the precipitate in some tests the precipitate was dissolved in hydrochloric acid, evaporated nearly to dryness, sodium chloride added, then potassium ferrocyanide in excess. On filtering the precipitate off, washing, transposing 412 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 with hot sodium hydroxide solution, filtering, washing, dissolving in nitric acid, and treating again with sodium carbonate and bicarbonate the remaining quantity of uranium passed into the filtrate and was recovered and added to the main portion, which was again converted to sulphate. The solution was brought to 12 per cent by volume of sulphuric acid, then, after cooling in ice water, a solution of cupferron was added. The small pre- cipitate was filtered off, the cupferron in the filtrate destroyed by nitric acid, the uranium reduced in 4 per cent sulphuric acid in a zine reductor, brought to 6 per cent sulphuric acid, then precipitated by cupferron, filtered off and ignited. This material was dissolved in nitric acid, a slight quantity of in- soluble material filtered off, the solution diluted, boiled, and cooled and the uranium again precipitated with ammonia to eliminate zine sulphate, filtered off, ignited and weighed as U;0s. From the weight was calculated the per- centage of uranium, as shown in Table 1. TABLE 1.—LEAD-URANIUM RATIO OF THE KoLM. (By R. C. Wells.) : Pb Experiment Per cent Per cent HE ECU Se eee Lee 0.0261 — Dist Fak Jae ae gee = 0.440 Been aac 5 ee .0264 — ce gree eS a SAS ie .0268 .412 aot. Sens Ae =e .442 OOO ae eee = .425 Weighted mean........... 0.0264 0.432 Pb:U = 0.061 The figure for U in experiment 4 is given only half weight, as pre- sumably some uranium was lost. Owing to uncertainties in the factor a simple formula mall suffice to calculate the age for the present. log (U + 1.156 Pb) — log U nea 6.5 X 10-5 million years This gives 458 million years, which is a little lower than the figure generally ascribed to the Cambrian, 500 to 600 million years, thus tending very slightly to shorten up the Paleozoic and bring the pre- Cambrian a little nearer.® 6 After the work described above was completed some tests of the precipitation of uranous salts by cupferron made by J. G. Fairchild in the Survey laboratory indicated that the results tend to come a little low, possibly as much as 4 or 6 milligrams of U:Os. The question needs further study, and by several analysts. If a correction on this account is applicable it might raise the uranium percentage given above to 0.445, but the size of the correction is not yet definitely established and it should not be applied until the matter is investigated in greater detail. ocT. 19, 1931 WELLS AND STEVENS: KOLM 413 PERMEABILITY OF THE KOLM TO GASES (R. E. Stevens) The low results generally found for the age of minerals by the helium- lead ratio, and usually ascribed to a loss of helium, made it of interest to see how permeable the kolm might be to gases. For the measurement of diffusion through kolm use was made of the apparatus previously described by one of us.’ It consists essen- tially of two glass chambers between which is sealed the specimen to be tested. After the apparatus has been evacuated, one of the cham- bers is filled with gas at atmospheric pressure. By means of manome- ter tubes readings are taken, at intervals, of the pressure in each chamber, from which the volume of gas diffused and the permeability of the sample may be calculated. The very small permeability of the kolm made the presence of leaks a grave source of error, and much time and care was taken in assem- bling and testing the apparatus. The specimen of kolm was sealed between the two chambers and the junction heavily coated with seal- ing wax. Two coats of shellac were added. Both chambers were then evacuated and pressure readings taken over a four-day period, showing an increase in pressure of 3 mm. The pressure seemed to reach a steady value after one day, and it appeared evident that the change was due to escape of gas held within the kolm. For this reason the apparatus was first allowed to stand evacuated for a day before making a determination. Decreasing the size of the chambers in order to increase the sensi- tivity made it necessary to determine, in each test, the change in volume due to displacement in the mercury columns. The size of manometer tubes was measured, as well as the volume of the chambers, so that corrections could be applied. In conjunction with the readings of the mercury columns, the tem- perature and barometric pressure were noted, pressure within the chambers being obtained by difference. The volume of gas in each chamber was then reduced to standard conditions. Decreases in volume in one of the chambers were in good agreement with increases in the other. and an average was taken as the volume of gas diffused. The results of experiments with air and with hydrogen are given in Table 2. In the last column is tabulated the permeability constant, k, for the kolm. In the formula for k, V is the volume of gas diffused, Land A the length and area, respectively, of the kolm specimen, W 7R.C. Wells. This Journat 19: 321. 1929. 414 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 the molecular weight of the gas, p, — p. the average pressure gradient in atmospheres, and T' is the time in hours. There is a small difference in the value of & obtained with the two gases. This may be due in part to the fact that air is a mixture of gases and some fractionation may have occurred. Another small variation may be caused by the relative viscosities of the two gases. A conception of the dense nature of kolm is obtained by comparison with the previous study? of diffusion through ball clay with the same apparatus. The value of & for ball clay was found to be over 600, TABLE 2.—PERMEABILITY OF KoOLM TO GASES (By R. E. Stevens.) At right of plug At left of plug Vol Average (iE ais Paid shat oe: CUI Dieu aa . ‘ ’ rent 4 Gaeused | hours) | Pressure, lad iad mim,| P0024" at 180 pilot danm,| maemo Ppp) AT. 1 o 5 eres Gams eles Ci tae (ml.) (71 — pr) 0 0.5 0.01 764 58.5 48 113.0 7.61 675 51.1 i a a ° ce Air 24 154.0 10.40 640 48.0 9 45 60 031 24.5 189.0 12.90 611 45.6 2 10 “59 032 23.5 217.0 14.80 583 43.3 ; 0 2.0 0.13 767.5 58.9 9 25 968 028 4 38.0 De OP 142.5 56.8 8 00 788 025 Hydrogen | 20 157.0 | 10.66 | 649.5 | 48.9 6.70 533 026 24 246.5 17.00 564.0 41.8 6.85 “999 023 48 341.0 23.92 A77.5 30.0 ‘ Molecular weight of air = 29.0 Molecular weight of hydrogen = 2.02 Dimensions of kolm: Diameter = 2.92 cm.; thickness = 0.23 cm. with time expressed in hours, as compared with 0.03 for the kolm. Even with the small permeability found for kolm it is assumed that the gas must have passed through pores and not through the material of the kolm itself (as helium seems to pass through silica glass). More- over the experiments were made at relatively low pressures after pump- ing out most of the moisture in the material. SUMMARY 1. The lead-uranium ratio of Swedish kolm is found to be C.061, a figure that will enable Cambrian time to be dated when certain factors are determined more accurately. Provisionally it gives about 460 million years. 2. The kolm is found to have a very low permeability to gases, 0.03, as compared with 600 for a ball clay previously studied. S06. Gita Pp: 320. oor fo 193T BERRY: NODOSARIA PO7OENSIS 415 PALEONTOLOGY .—Contributions to the paleontology of Peru, V. Nodosaria pozoensis W. Berry, n. sp... WILLARD BERRY. (Com- municated by Epwarp W. BERRY.) During the course of examining numerous well samples from the Tertiary of Northwest Peru, I commonly found separate chambers of a species of Nodosaria. Occasionally several were found together but more often they were widely scattered throughout the sample. In examining the samples from one well a larger piece of cutting yielded a nearly complete specimen. This specimen, which was slightly damaged in cleaning, was found in hard, gray, slightly sandy shale or “orada.”’ This species is probably from the Negritos formation (?) of the Eocene. The exact horizon is questionable due to the lack of exact correlation of the wells in this older part of the Eocene. This organism must have lived in fairly quiet waters as evidenced by its extremely weak structure. That the water was fairly deep or else was not affected by a large run off is shown by the fineness of the shale. ‘The species may be described as follows. Fig. 1. Nodosaria pozoensis W. Berry, X 3. Nodosaria pozoensis W. Berry, n.sp. Test large elongate, very slightly curved, untapered, composed of more than 13 chambers, initial end rounded, (broken in cleaning type) apertural end always missing, sutures straight, distinct, depressed; walls costate, costae not running from chamber to chamber but stopping at each suture and not lining up exactly, the younger chambers having less costae, chambers inflate. Usually found as separate chambers. Length, 10 mm.; diameter, 0.75 mm. Nodosaria pozoensis has the general appearance of N. raphanus (Lin- naeus) but lacks the pointed initial end and is larger with a larger number of costae on each chamber. ‘This species is easily recognized even in the sepa- rate chambers by the heavy costae and the almost round character of the chambers. Locality—Eocene well ¥ 1920, depth 1980 feet, Negritos, Peru. 1 Work carried out under a grant in aid from the National Research Council. Re- ceived August 26, 1931. 416 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 ZOOLOGY .—WNew pocket gophers from Arizona and Utah. BE. A. Goup- MAN, U. 8. Biological Survey. During recent years many additional specimens of pocket gophers from typical regions and from localities tending to fill gaps in geo- graphic ranges, as previously known, in Arizona and adjoining territory have been acquired. Study of this material has afforded a clearer concept of the status and relationships of the numerous forms inhabit- ing the highly diversified general area. Leaving Thomomys fossor, a representative of a well marked group apart, out of consideration, the pocket gophers of Arizona are cur- rently assigned to two groups. These are the ‘“perpallidus” and “‘fulvus’”’ groups respectively. In revising the genus Thomomys Bailey (North Amer. Fauna, No. 39, p. 33, Nov. 15, 1915) aligns these groups as follows: ‘‘The perpallidus group includes mainly pale desert forms with very small ears, but has no very distinctive group characters. . The fulvus group includes several mountain forms of rather bright tawny shades, and paler tawny valley forms in the surrounding country.’ He also says: ‘‘The bottae group is large, variable, and not sharply separated from the perpallidus and fulvus groups; all of them agree in number and arrangement of mammae, short ears, and many other characters.’ Passing in review the material now available the writer is forced to the conclusion that not only are there no characters warranting the recognition of 7’. perpallidus and T. fulvus as separate groups, but they are united by forms so closely interrelated that even specific distinc- tion disappears. Complete intergradation is evident in some cases and the kind and combination of characters presented indicate such close relationships that it can safely be assumed in others. The ranges of a chain of forms connecting perpallidus and fulvus extend across the lower part of the Colorado River valley, interrupted by the river channel. The valley is inhabited on the two sides by forms that differ only slightly in average characters, some individuals being indistinguishable. This close alliance is readily understood when it is remembered that, from time to time, shifting channels along the lower Colorado transfer areas of considerable size from one side to the other. 1 Received September 3, 1931. ocr. 19, 1931 GOLDMAN: NEW POCKET GOPHERS 417 The near relationship of perpallidus and fulvus is clear, but it seems best in the present faunal treatment of pocket gophers arbitrarily to draw a line between the two at the Colorado River rather than to invite the confusion that would result through an attempt to transfer all of the forms of perpallidus to fulvus, the older name. Incidentally, general comparisons strongly indicate that forms currently placed under perpallidus and fulvus may eventually have to be listed as sub- species of botiae, a still older name. In order to avoid confusion in describing new subspecies the following forms from east of the Colorado River currently assigned, except cervinus, to perpallidus are trans- ferred to fulvus: Thomomys fulvus chrysonotus Grinnell Ehrenberg, Yuma County, Arizona. Thomomys fulvus cervinus Allen Phoenix, Maricopa County, Arizona. Thomomys fulvus aureus Allen. .. Bluff City, San Juan County, Utah. Thomomys fulvus apache Bailey Lake La Jara, Jicarilla Indian Reservation, New Mexico. Pocket gophers inhabit neariy every part of Arizona and adjoining territory, but the ranges even of subspecies are irregularly interrupted owing to rock formations, adverse soil, food, or other conditions. The multiplicity of forms appears to be the expression of environmental factors and the sedentary habits of the group. Some occupy exten- Sive ranges and others are quite restricted. Habitats vary from allu- vial river bottoms and sterile desert plains near sea level to high forested plateaus and rugged mountains, often rising abruptly to high elevations. DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SUBSPECIES Thomomys fulvus flavidus subsp. nov. Golden Pocket Gopher Type-—From Parker, Yuma County, Arizona (altitude 350 feet). No. 181065, & adult, U. S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected February 1, 1913, by E. A.Goldman. Original number 21810. Distribution —Known only from alluvial bottom lands along the Colorado River in the vicinity of the type locality. General characters.—A large ochraceous buff or golden yellowish subspecies with an angular, massive skull. Similar in color to Thomomys fulvus chrysono- tus (Somewhat paler than the type), but upper parts clearer ochraceous buff; under parts, especially inguinal region, and hind limbs all around irregularly marked by pure white areas, the white extending to roots of hairs (these parts in chrysonotus plumbeous basally); skull very similar but exhibiting a depar- ture in detail. Allied to Thomomys fulvus desertorum but larger, much paler 418 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 and cranial characters distinctive. Very similar in general color and super- ficially resembling the geographically. removed form, Thomomys fulvus aureus; upper parts more uniform rather pale ochraceous buff (varying to richer buffy tones, with dorsum moderately overlaid with black in aureus); under parts with irregular white markings (normally absent in aureus); skull more angular and massive and differing in important details. Color.—Type (winter pelage): Upper parts near ochraceous buff or golden yellow, the back scarcely modified by dark-tipped hairs, becoming light ochra- ceous buff on sides; under parts in general overlaid with light ochraceous buff, the basal color plumbeous, irregularly and extensively invaded on inguinal region by pure white, the white extending to roots of hairs and including hind limbs all around; a pure white pectoral spot; black auricular spots small, not reaching anterior part of ear; feet and tail thinly clothed with whitish hairs. Young (in first pelage): Light ochraceous buff above, creamy white below. Skull—Very similar in general to that of T. f. chrysonotus, but larger; supraoccipital region indented mesially and more distinctly concave in trans- verse section over foramen magnum; auditory meatus opening more widely; mastoid process of squamosal less deflected forward; auditory and mastoid bullae large and fully inflated and dentition heavy as in chrysonotus. Similar to that of T. f. desertorum but larger, more angular and massive; auditory and mastoid bullae larger, more fully rounded; mastoid bullae more swollen and bulging posteriorly, and less broadly overlapped by exoccipitals; dentition similar but heavier. Compared with that of 7. f. aureus the skull is similar in size, but more angular and massive; maxillary arm of zygoma heavier; nasals longer and broader posteriorly; ascending branches of premaxillae narrower, more tapering posteriorly; pterygoids broader; interpterygoid space more narrowly V-shaped (more or less distinctly U-shaped in aureus); auditory meatus opening more widely; paroccipital process in adult male more strongly overlapping auditory bulla; bullae large and swollen, and dentition much as in aureus. Measurements.—Type: Total length, 249 mm.; tail vertebrae, 83; hind foot, 33. Average of three adult male topotypes: 238 (232-250); 75 (66-86); 33.5 (32.5-34.5). Average of nine adult female topotypes: 221 (210-2386); 70 (57-78); 32 (31-82.5). Skull (type): Condylobasal length, 41.7; zygomatic breadth, 27.2; greatest breadth across squamosals (over mastoids), 21.8; inter- orbital constriction, 6.8; length of nasals, 15; alveolar length of upper molari- form tooth row, 8.8. Remarks.—The clear, nearly uniform golden yellowish general color and extensive pure white areas irregularly invading the under parts and usually in- volving both hind legs well up toward the hips all around distinguish this form externally from its near relatives. It bears a rather close superficial resem- blance to aureus, but the ranges of the two are completely separated by those of interposed forms. Specimens examined.—Sixteen, all from the type locality. Thomomys fulvus modicus subsp. nov. Type.—From La Osa (near Mexican Boundary), southern end of Altar Valley, Pima County, Arizona. No. 59203, o adult, U.S. National Museum, collected by E. A. Mearns and F. X. Holzner, December 14, 1893. Original number 2681. Distribution.—Desert plains and valleys of central southern Arizona, and probably adjoining parts of Sonora, Mexico. ocr. 19, 1931 GOLDMAN: NEW POCKET GOPHERS 419 General characters.—Closely allied to Thomomys fulvus cervinus of the Salt River Valley, but smaller, color darker, near wood brown instead of vinaceous buffy or fawn color in winter pelage; cranial characters distinctive. Related to Thomomys fulvus chrysonotus of the lower Colorado River Valley, but prevail- ing color wood brownish instead of pale ochraceous buffy; skull differing in detail. Similar in general to Thomomys fulvus toltecus of Chihuahua, but color duller, wood brownish instead of rich ochraceous buffy in winter pelage; skull more slender in form. Color.—Type (winter pelage); Upper parts near wood brown, purest along sides, thinly overlaid with dusky on head and over back; under parts pale ochraceous buffy, the plumbeous basal color showing through; ears encircled by conspicuous deep black areas; forearms, feet, and tail whitish. Some speci- mens in worn summer pelage are rich ochraceous buffy above. Skull.—Similar in general form to that of 7. f. cervinus but smaller and of slenderer proportions; rostrum narrower, more constricted or compressed laterally in front of zygomata; nasals narrower; jugal shorter. Compared with those of 7. f. chrysonotus and T. f. toltecus the skull is less massive than either; maxillary arm of zygoma sloping more strongly backward; jugal shorter, the result being a distinct shortening of the outer side of the zygoma, rostrum and nasals more slender; incisors narrower. Measurements —Type: Total length, 238; tail vertebrae, 79; hind foot, 30. Average of four adult male topotypes: 214 (204-222) ; 67 (55-75) ; 28 (25.5-30). Average of six adult female topotypes: 208 (198-224) ; 69 (60-74) ; 27.5 (26.5— 28). Skull (type): Condylobasal length, 40.5; zygomatic breadth, 25; greatest breadth across squamosals (over mastoids), 20; interorbital constric- tion, 6.7; length of nasals, 13.7; alveolar length of upper molariform tooth row, 8. Remarks.—While modicus is usually much larger than intermedius and differs widely in color, the skulls of some females, especially, are similar in size in the two forms, and in other respects indicate probable intergradation. This desert race tends to bridge the gap between chrysonotus, the pallid sub- species inhabiting the region east of the lower Colorado, and the darker forms occupying the higher country in southeastern Arizona. It partakes also of the characters of cervinus, the lighter colored, more robust animal of the Salt River Valley. Specimens examined.—Total number, 20, all from Arizona as follows: Cala- basas, 1; Fort Lowell, 2; Indian Oasis, Baboquivari Valley, 2; La Osa (type locality), 11; Tucson, 4. Thomomys fulvus catalinae subsp. nov. Santa Catalina Mountain Gopher Type-—¥rom Summerhaven, Santa Catalina Mountains, Pima County, Arizona (altitude 7,500 feet). No. 244081, @ adult, U.S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by E. A. Goldman, August 6, 1923. Original number 23517. Distribution.—Known only from the upper slopes of the Santa Catalina Mountains, Arizona. General characters—A small, dark, richly colored subspecies. Allied to Thomomys fulvus toltecus, but smaller, much darker, with a narrower, less massive skull. Similar in general to Thomomys fulvus intermedius of the Huachuca Mountains, but larger; color of upper parts more uniform, without 420 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIEINCES VOL. 21, No. 17 the broad, blackish median dorsal area usually continuous from head to base of tail in 2ntermedius, and sides brighter, more tawny; cranial characters dis- tinctive. Color—Type (summer pelage): Upper parts between tawny and ochra- ceous tawny, clearest on lower part of sides, the top of head and back heavily mixed with black, the black predominating on middle of face; under parts over laid with light tawny, the under color everywhere dark plumbeous; ears com- pletely within deep black spots; feet and tail thinly clothed with dull whitish hairs. Some specimens exhibit small median dorsal blackish areas. Skull.—Narrower and less massive than that of 7. f. toltecus; zygomata more slender and much less widely spreading; dentition similar. Compared with that of T. f. zntermedius the skull is larger; rostrum less constricted in front of zygomata; nasals broader, less wedge-shaped posteriorly; auditory bullae larger, more smoothly and evenly rounded (more or less distinctly truncate anteriorly in intermedius). Measurements —Type: Total length, 218; tail vertebrae, 65; hind foot, 31. Average of four adult male topotypes: 211 (204-220); 64 (58-72); 28.5 (27.5- 30). Average of four adult female topotypes: 202 (196-212); 59 (55-62); 25 (24-26). Skull (type): Condylobasal length, 38.6; zygomatic breadth, 23.8; greatest breadth across squamosals (over mastoids), 19.5; interorbital con- striction, 6.5; length of nasals, 13; alveolar length of upper molariform tooth row, 8.1. Remarks.—T. f. catalinae somewhat resembles its geographic neighbor intermedius but the upper parts are richer, more tawny instead of cinnamon brownish, and the general color is more uniform, without the broad blackish median dorsal area normally extending from top of head to base of tail in intermedius. It is probably restricted to the Santa Catalina Mountains which rise island-like from the desert plains. Specimens examined.—Ten, all from the type locality. Thomomys fulvus grahamensis subsp. nov. Graham Mountain Pocket Gopher Type-—From Graham Mountains (Pinaleno Mountains on some maps) Graham County, Arizona (altitude 9,200 feet). No. 204313, @ adult, U.S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by E. G. Holt, June 7,1914. Original number 269. Distribution —Known only from the upper slopes (6,100—9,200 feet altitude) of the Graham Mountains, Arizona. 2 General characters——Closely allied to Thomomys fulvus toltecus, but color darker; skull narrower. Resembling Thomomys fulvus fulvus of the high plateau region in color, but duller, less ochraceous tawny; skull differing in detail. Similar in size to Thomomys fulvus catalinae but lighter, the sides of body ochraceous buffy instead of ochraceous tawny; combination of cranial features distinctive. Differing from Thomomys fulvus intermedius in decidedly larger size, lighter color and well-marked skull characters. Color.—Type (summer pelage): Upper parts dark ochraceous buff, purest along sides, rather heavily mixed with black on top and sides of head and over dorsum, the dark hairs becoming somewhat thinner on rump; face blackish; ears encircled by deep black; under parts overlaid with light ochraceous buff, the basal color plumbeous everywhere; feet dull whitish; tail whitish, inter- rupted by irregular dusky sections above. eer, 19 (1931 GOLDMAN: NEW POCKET GOPHERS 421 Skull.—Similar to that of 7. f. toltecus, but narrower; braincase narrower; zygomata much less widely spreading; maxillary arm of zygoma more slender, the external angle narrower and less prominent; jugal less expanded anteriorly and more strongly inclined upward to point of union with maxilla; auditory bullae smaller; dentition very similar. Similar to that of 7. f. fulvus, but narrower and flatter; zygomata much less widely spreading; auditory bullae rather small, much as in fuluus. Not very unlike that of 7. f. catalinae in size and general form, but rostrum deeper; jugal slanting more strongly upward from squamosal to point of union with maxilla (jugal more nearly horizontal in catalinae) bullae slightly smaller. Compared with that of 7. f. intermedius the skull is larger and heavier; nasals broader posteriorly; rostrum less con- stricted or compressed laterally in front of zygomata; ascending branches of premaxillae broader posteriorly; auditory bullae larger, more smoothly rounded. Measurements.—Type: Total length, 231; tail vertebrae, 71; hind foot, 29. Two adult male topotypes: 217, 225; 68, 68; 27, 28. Two adult female topo- types: 215, 228; 69, 76; 27, 28. Skull (type): Condylobasal length, 38.3; zygomatic breadth, 23.3; greatest breadth, across squamosals (over mastoids), 19.2; interorbital constriction, 7.5 length of nasals, 13.8; alveolar length of upper molariform tooth row, 8.5. Remarks.—The present form appears to be restricted to the upper slopes of the Graham Mountains, doubtless intergrading lower down with toltecus which inhabits the Gila Valley and neighboring areas. In general color it some- what resembles typical fulvus but the ranges of the two are separated by an arm of that of toltecus along the Gila River valley, and distinctive characters have been pointed out. Specimens examined.—Ten, all from the Graham Mountains, Arizona. Thomomys fulvus collinus subsp. nov. Chiricahua Mountain Pocket Gopher Type——From Fly Park, Chiricahua Mountains, Cochise County, Arizona (altitude 9,000 feet). No. 66053, @ adult, U. S. National Museum (Bio- logical Survey collection), collected by A. K. Fisher, June 10, 1894. Original number 1527. Distribution —Known only from the upper slopes of the Chiricahua Moun- tains, Arizona. General characters.—Closely allied to Thomomys fulvus toltecus, but smaller and darker; skull of lighter proportions. Similar in size and color to Thom- omys fulvus grahamensis, but skull more slender. About like 7. f. catalinae in size, but color much lighter, the sides ochraceous buffy instead of rich tawny, and skull differing in detail. Color.—Type (summer pelage): Upper parts dark ochraceous buff, purest along sides, rather heavily mixed with black on top of head and over back; under parts overlaid with rich ochraceous buff, the hairs plumbeous at base; feet and tail whitish. In one specimen from 7,500 feet altitude the under parts are creamy white. Skull—Not very unlike that of 7. f. toltecus but smaller, relatively nar- rower, less massive. Similar in size to that of 7. f. grahamensis, but more slender in form; rostrum, braincase, and interorbital constriction usually nar- rower; nasals narrower; jugal nearly horizontal (not distinctly inclined up- ward anteriorly as usual in grahamensis); auditory bullae larger; incisors 422 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 usually narrower. Compared with that of 7. f. catalinae the skull is similar in size and form but is usually narrower; rostrum more slender; bullae usually smaller; dentition about the same. Measurements.—Type: Total length, 225; tail vertebrae, 68; hind foot, 29. Two adult males from Pinery Canyon (altitude 7,500 feet), Chiricahua Moun- tains: 210, 190; 74, 60; 27, 26. Two adult females from same locality: 200, 190; 74, 62; 27, 27. Skull (type): Condylobasal length, 39; zygomatic breadth, 24; greatest breadth across squamosals (over mastoids), 19.8; inter- orbital constriction, 6.6; length of nasals, 12.4; alveolar length of upper molari- form tooth row, 8.3. Remarks.—T. f. collinus is a small dark high mountain subspecies readily distinguished from the larger lighter ochraceous toltecus of the neighboring plains. Specimens from the mouth of Turkey Creek at 5,000 feet altitude are dark in color, but the skulls are heavier than in typical collinus and indicate gradation toward toltecus. ‘The present form resembles grahamensis exter- nally but differs in combination of cranial characters, and the ranges of the two are separated by an arm of that of toltecus. Specimens examined.—Total number, 24, all from the Chiricahua Moun- tains, Arizona, as follows: Fly Park, 1 (type); Pinery Canyon (7,500 feet), 6; Rucker Canyon, 6; Turkey Creek (mouth, 5,000 feet), 11. Thomomys fulvus pusillus subsp. nov. Coyote Mountain Pocket Gopher Type-—F¥rom Coyote Mountains, Pima County, Arizona (altitude 3,000 feet). No. 209290, 2 adult, U.S. National Museum (Biological Survey col- lection), collected by E. A. Goldman, September 4, 1915. Original number 22722. Distribution —Known only from the Coyote Mountains; probably inhakit- ing other desert mountain ranges of central southern Arizona. General characters.—A small, rich ochraceous tawny form with a slender, delicate skull and large, fully distended bullae. Similar in size to Thomomys fulvus intermedius, but general color above rich ochraceous tawny (without a broad blackish median dorsal line) instead of cinnamon brown, and cranial characters, especially form of zygomata and large bullae, quite distinctive. Much smaller than Thomomys fuluus modicus, color richer, more tawny, and skull differing in detail. Color—Type: Upper parts between tawny and ochraceous tawny, purest along sides, the top of head and back somewhat darkened by black-tipped hairs; muzzle blackish; black auricular spots small, encircling entire ears; under parts ochraceous buffy; feet white; tail grayish dusky above, whitish below. Skull—Similar in size and general form to that of 7. f. intermedius, but flatter; zygomata diverging and widest anteriorly (instead of posteriorly as in intermedius); nasals broader posteriorly, the ends emarginate as usual in intermedius; premaxillae narrower posteriorly; basioccipital narrower; audi- tory and mastoid bullae much larger, more swollen and smoothly rounded; molariform toothrows shorter. Compared with that of 7. f. modicus the skull is very much smaller and flatter; zygomata widest anteriorly instead of posteriorly ; auditory and mastoid bullae similarly inflated. Measurements—Type: Total length, 201; tail vertebrae, 65; hind foot, 27.5. Skull (type): Condylobasal length, 32.6; zygomatic breadth, 19.7; greatest breadth across squamosals (over mastoids), 17.1; interorbital con- oct. 19, 1931 GOLDMAN: NEW POCKET GOPHERS 423 striction, 6.2; length of nasals, 11; alveolar length of upper molariform tooth row, 6.8. Remarks.—This small desert-mountain form approaches intermedius in size, but in the sum of its characters is more nearly related to the much larger lowland subspecies modicus. It may be expected to occur in other desert mountain ranges in the region of the type locality. I+ is based on a single specimen which presents cranial characters that appear to be quite distinctive. Thomomys fulvus peramplus subsp. nov. Tunicha Mountain Pocket Gopher Type.—From Wheatfield Creek, west slope of Tunicha Mountains, Apache County, northwestern Arizona (altitude 7,000 feet). No. 247632, % adult, U. S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by Paul Trapier, June 23, 1927. Original number 720. Distribution —Mountains of northeastern Arizona and northwestern New Mexico (altitude 7,000-8,800 feet). General characters—A large dark-colored subspecies closely resembling Thomomys fulvus apache, of northern New Mexico, but upper parts still duller, the sides vinaceous instead of dull ochraceous buffy; skull more elongated and presenting a departure in detail. Contrasting strongly with Thomomys fulvus aureus of southeastern Utah in dark, dull coloration, but cranial char- acters indicate close relationship and the two doubtless intergrade along the basal slopes of the mountains. Color much duller than Thomomys fulvus fulvus of the high plateau region of Arizona, and skull quite distinctive. Color.—Upper and under parts near vinaceous buff, clearest along sides, the top of head and posterior part of back blackish; dark plumbeous basal color tending to show through nearly everywhere and accentuating the dull general tone; black auricular spots inconspicuous, nearly confluent with general color of dorsum; ankles dusky; fore feet grayish or light brownish; hind feet white; tail above clothed with brownish hairs on proximal half, becoming white be- yond to tip and whitish below. Skull.—Closely aproaching that of 7. f. awreus but rostrum longer; nasals broader posteriorly and premaxillae correspondingly reduced. Similar to that of T. f. apache, but more elongated; rostrum decidedly longer; nasals longer and broader posteriorly, less wedge-shaped; premaxillae narrower posteriorly; interorbital constriction narrower; bullae large and rounded, about as in apache. Compared with that of 7. f. fulvus the skull is similar in general form, but larger, more angular and massive; nasals less wedge-shaped, broader pos- teriorly, the ends irregularly truncate instead of emarginate; auditory bullae much larger, bulging farther below basioccipital; dentition heavier. Measurements.— Type: Total length, 260; tail vertebrae, 80; hind foot, 35. Average of four adult male topotypes: 246 (240-255); 80 (60-90); 35 (84-37). Average of six adult female topotypes: 230 (225-240) ; 75 (65-88) ; 32 (31-33). Skull (type): Condylobasal length, 45.6; zygomatic breadth, 28; greatest breadth across squamosals (over mastoids), 23; interorbital constriction, 6.7; length of nasals, 16.8; alveolar length of upper molariform tooth row, 8.8. Remarks.—In dark, dull coloration this high-mountain form resembles apache, but in cranial characters reveals closer relationship to the vividly tinted subspecies aureus of the surrounding deserts. Its known vertical range is from 7,000 to 8,000 feet. At the type locality it occurs in close proximity to 424 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 the distinct species, Thomomys fossor, which seems to replace it at about 9,600 feet altitude along the crest of the Tunicha Mountains. Specimens examined.—Total number, 33, as follows: Arizona: Canyon de Chelly (7 miles above mouth), 1; Fort Defiance (12 miles northwest), 1; Saint Michaels, 2; Tunicha Mountains (type locality), 16. New Mexico: Chusca Mountains, 13. Thomomys perpallidus osgoodi subsp. nov. Type.—From Hanksville, Wayne County, Utah. No. 158530, o& adult, U. S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by W. TEL Osgood, October 20, 1908. Original number 3701. Distribution.—Fremont River Valley near Hanksville, Utah; limits of range unknown. General characters.—A very light ochraceous buffy or light yellowish form with a rather massive skull. Somewhat resembling Thomomys fulvus aureus from Bluff, San Juan County, Utah, but upper parts contrasting in decidedly lighter ochraceous buffy tones, and cranial characters distinctive. Related to Thomomys perpallidus planirostris from Zion National Park, but much paler, and skull differing in important features, especially the arched instead of flattened or depressed upper surface near anterior roots of zygomata. Color.—Type (winter pelage): Upper parts very light ochraceous buff, richest on posterior part of back, unmodified by dark-tipped hairs present in most related forms; middle of face, nose, and area near mouth indistinctly dusky; under parts and well up on flanks and outer sides of limbs creamy white; black auricular spots small, but conspicuous and completely encircling ears; feet and tail white. Five other specimens are practically identical in color. Skull.—Similar in general form to that of 7. f. aureus, but smaller; occipital region more smoothly rounded above, tending to bulge posteriorly below slightly developed lambdoid crest; premaxillae narrower posteriorly and taper- ing to a more acute point; sides of zygomata more or less distinctly bowed in- ward near middle (sides more nearly straight in aureus); interpterygoid fossa _ more narrowly V-shaped (usually more nearly U-shaped in aureus); basi- occipital shorter; bullae slightly smaller, but fully inflated; dentition about the same. Compared with that of 7. p. planirostris the skull is arched, instead of flattened or depressed, and more or less distinctly concave in cross section along the median line near anterior roots of zygomata; occipital region more projecting posteriorly below lambdoid crest; auditory bullae larger, more dis- tended below level of basioccipital. Measurements —Type: Total length, 233; tail vertebrae, 72; hind foot, 30.5. Two adult male topotypes: 215, 225; 68, 70; 29, 29. Average of three adult female topotypes: 197 (184-203) ; 58 (51-63); 27 (27-27.5). Skull (type): Condylobasal length, 39; zygomatic breadth, 24.2; greatest breadth across squamosals (over mastoids), 20.3; interorbital constriction, 6.9; length of nasals, 13.8; alveolar length of upper molariform tooth row, 8. Remarks.—T. p. osgoodi superficially resembles aureus, but is lighter yellow- ish and in cranial characters presents a marked departure. Moreover, it is separated from aureus by the effective barrier of the Colorado River. Itisa well marked subspecies more closely allied to planirostris and other forms inhab- iting the territory north and west of the Colorado River. Specimens examined.—Six skins and skulls and two skulls without skins, all from the type locality. oct. 19, 1931 GOLDMAN: NEW POCKET GOPHERS 425 Thomomys perpallidus dissimilis subsp. nov. Henry Mountain Pocket Gopher Type.—From east slope of Mount Ellen, Henry Mountains, Garfield County, Utah (altitude 8,000 feet). No. 158526, 2 adult, U. S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by W. H. Osgood, October 15, 1908. Original number 3677. Distribution Known only from the type locality; probably generally dis- tributed over the upper slopes of the Henry Mountains. General characters.——Closely allied to Thomomys perpallidus osgoodi but upper parts near light buff, instead of light ochraceous buff, and skull differing in detail. Similar in general to Thomomys fulvus aureus but smaller, light buffy color contrasting strongly with rich ochraceous buff of aureus, and cranial characters distinctive. Differmg from Thomomys perpallidus plani- rostris in pallid coloration, and important cranial features. Color — Type (winter pelage): Upper parts near light buff, faintly darkened along the median dorsal area by dusky-tipped hairs; muzzle dusky; black auricular spots small, but including entire ears; under parts, forearms and hind legs creamy white; feet and tail whitish. Young (in first pelage): Similar to type but inclining toward light ochraceous buff on top of head, neck, and shoulders. Skull—Most closely resembling that of Thomomys perpallidus osgoodi, but more elongated; rostrum longer; zygomata more slender, more strongly converging anteriorly; bullae less rounded, more compressed laterally; incisors pale, the ends less recurved. Compared with that of T. p. planirostris the skull is arched, instead of flattened or depressed and more or less distinctly con- cave in cross section along the median line near anterior roots of zygomata; occipital region more projecting posteriorly below lambdoid crest; zygomata narrower, more slender, more strongly converging anteriorly; auditory bullae more elongated, more compressed laterally and projecting below level of basioccipital. Similar in general to that of 7. f. awreus, but smaller, more slender, and differing in important details as follows: Occipital region more smoothly rounded above, tending to bulge posteriorly below lambdoid crest; zygomata narrower, more slender and converging anteriorly; interpterygoid fossa more narrowly V-shaped; auditory bullae narrower, less fully inflated; teeth smaller, the incisors less recurved. Measurements.—Type: Total length, 211; tail vertebrae, 60; hind foot, 27° Skull (type): Condylobasal length, 37; zygomatic breadth, 21.6; greatest breadth across squamosals (over mastoids), 18.8; interorbital constriction, 6.8; length of nasals, 12.2; alveolar length of upper molariform tooth row, 7.6. Remarks.—Pocket gophers from high mountains are usually dark, but 7. p. dissimilis is remarkable for its pallid coloration. Near relationship to osgoodz of the adjoining Fremont River Valley is evident but the unusual color and the combination of cranial characters are distinguishing features. Specimens examined.—Three, from the type locality. Thomomys perpallidus absonus subsp. nov. Houserock Valley Pocket Gopher Type.—F¥ rom Jacob’s Pools, Houserock Valley, Coconino County, northern Arizona (altitude 4,000 feet). No. 250016, o& adult, U. S. National Museum 426 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 (Biological Survey collection), collected by E. A. Goldman, June 7, 1931. Original number 23569. Distribution Known only from the type locality. General characters.—A dull grayish buffy subspecies of medium size, with a narrow, slenderly formed skull. Closely allied to Thomomys perpallidus planirostris but paler, with differential cranial characters, especially the higher midline of the fronto-nasal region. Similar in general to Thomomys per- pallidus osgoods and Thomomys perpallidus dissimilis, but much darker, and skull presenting a different combination of characters. Color.—Type (acquiring summer pelage): Upper parts near light ochra- ceous buff, purest along sides, thinly mixed over top of head and back with pale dusky hairs producing a dull rather grayish buffy combined effect; muzzle dusky; black postauricular spots rather large, extending forward to include anterior margins of ears; under parts overlaid with pale ochraceous buff; fore- arms, ankles, and feet whitish; tail whitish, becoming pale buffy above near base. Insome specimens the under parts vary to light ochraceous buff. Skull—Similar in general structure to that of Thomomys perpallidus planirostris, but of slenderer proportions, the zygomata very weak, and the lambdoid crest and temporal ridges slightly developed even in adult males; frontal region and posterior part of rostrum less flattened or depressed along the median line, and lacking the concavity in cross section characterizing planirostris; ascending branches of premaxillae narrower, less extended pos- teriorly beyond nasals; palate usually narrower; teeth smaller. Compared with that of 7. p. osgood: the skull is more slender in form; rostrum longer and relatively narrower; zygomata more slender, the jugal, especially, more attenu- ate; palate narrower; auditory bullae less inflated, less bulging below basi- occipital; dentition similar. Differing from that of 7. p. dissimilis in more squarely spreading zygomata; auditory bullae broader, more rounded, less laterally compressed and Jess projecting below basioccipital; incisors slightly more recurved. Measurements —Type: Total length, 230; tail vertebrae, 79; hind foot, 30. Average of three adult male topotypes: 231 (228-234); 77 (74-82); 31 (30- 32.5). Two adult female topotypes: 210, 217; 69, 70; 30, 29. Skull (type): Condylobasal length, 40; zygomatic breadth, 24.4; greatest breadth across squamosals (over mastoids), 19.5; interorbital constriction, 6.6; length of nacals, 13.7; alveolar length of upper molariform tooth row, 7.3. Remarks.—T. p. absonus is a fairly well marked form probably restricted to Houserock Valley which occupies a broad depression with a generally level bottom lying along the northern side of the Marble Canyon of the Colorado River. This reach of the river bisects the interior basin of which Houserock Valley is the northern half, at the upper entrance to the Grand Canyon, and forms a barrier limiting the distribution of most of the smaller mammals. The species or subspecies usually differ on the opposing sides of the stream. The bottom of Houserock Valley is gashed by side canyons of the Colorado and the dispersal of this pocket gopher is much restricted even here. It has been found inhabiting soft sand extending for about two miles out over the floor of the valley from near Jacob’s Pools, a spring at the western base of the escarp- ment marking the great fault line known as the Vermilion Cliffs. Specimens examined.—Twelve, from the type locality. ocr, 19,1931 SHAMEL: A NEW CRICETINE RODENT 427 MAMMALOGY.—Akodon chacoensis, a new cricetine rodent from Argentina! H. Haroup Samet, U. 8. National Museum. (Communicated by JoHN B. REESIDE, JR.) A new cricetine rodent has been found in a collection of mammals from Argentina that was made in 1920 by Dr. Alexander Wetmore. This specimen was discovered at the same time as Marmosa formosa, which I described in March, 1930, but until it could be compared with specimens in the British Museum [| hesitated to publish on it. It has since been compared with specimens in the British Museum by Dr. W. H. Osgood, and this comparison bears out my original conclusion. Akodon chacoensis sp. nov. Figs. 1, 2. Type.—Adult male, skin and skull, No. 236239, collected in Las Palmas, Chaco, Argentina, by Dr. A. Wetmore, June 20, 1920. Diagnosis.—In its external measurements it is practically the same size as Akodon arenicola from Argentina, but considerably darker in color. Enamel folds, on the inner side of the tooth row, somewhat flattened and folded dis- tinctly backward; reentrant angles closed; without groove on anterior surface of m? or inner surface of m*. Skull—tThe skull, when compared with that of Akodon arenicola, is char- acterized by the large size of the brain case in proportion to the rather weak short rostrum. ‘The anterior edge of the zygomatic plate is perfectly straight and projects forward scarcely at all. The drop downward of the zygoma from the plate is very abrupt, so much so, that the arch formed by the infraorbital plate and the inferior border of the zygoma is almost completely hidden when the skull is viewed from the side. The drop of the zygoma is so abrupt down- ward that there is rather a well defined angle where it joins the zygomatic plate. The lowest dip of the zygomatic arch is in its center, while in other species it is found at the posterior curve. The rostrum is short. The dis- tance from the anterior edge of zygomatic plate to anterior surface of incisor, 46mm. The lateral depressions of the basioccipital are deep and are scooped out abruptly back of the basal suture. The palate, which extends well behind m', is broad at posterior end of the tooth row (4.4 mm.) and not waist-like. Six small pits in the palate, three on each side, but none farther back than a line joining the centers of m’. The palatal foramen extends from the middle of first molar until it almost touches the incisors. Teeth.—The enamel folds of the upper molars are more or less flat, and are folded distinctly backward; the reentrant angle on the inner side of the tooth row is directed forward and closed. In other forms of Akodon the enamel folds are rounded, not folded backward, and the reentrant angle is open. On the. outer side of the tooth row the reentrant angle is directed backward, except the first reentrant angle of m? which points straight inward. The teeth are well 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received August 8, 1931. 428 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 worn; m! has three cusps on the outer edge with a secondary one between the second and third, and three on the inner side; m? has four cusps on its outer edge, one and three being secondary, two on the inner edge. ‘The anterior surface of m1 and the inner surface of m? are smooth. m? is a round peg-like tooth with two well defined enamel islands. The incisors are curved more abruptly inward toward the throat than any other species examined, and according to Thomas are what would be called opisthodont. Color.—The general color is olivaceous with some buff about the eyes and sides of head and along the sides of the body; but the back is very dark, almost black from the shoulders down to the base of the tail. The underparts are whitish, with a very slight buffish tinge; hairs basally dark slate both above and below. The feet appear to be dark brown clothed in short white hair, but this is because the hairs which cover them are brown at the base and tipped with white. The digits are white. Measurements.—Type: total length, 160 mm.; tail, 66 mm.; hind foot, 22.5 mm.; greatest length of skull, 25.0 mm.; condylobasal length, 22.4 mm.; zygomatic breadth, 12.2 mm.; interorbital breadth, 4.5 mm.; length of nasals, 8.4 mm.; breadth of braincase, 12.6 mm.; diastema, 5.5 mm.; maxillary tooth row, 4.0 mm.; mandibular tooth row, 4.0 mm.; length of mandible, 14.6 mm. Fig. 1. Akodon chacoensis, lateral view of skull X 3. U.S. N.M. No. 236239. I have compared this specimen with the following species of Akodon: areni- cola, arviculoides, bogotensis, boliviensis, canescens, cursor, lenguarum, mollis, neocenus, pulcherimus, surdus, tolimae. In only one species of Akodon was the brain case any wider and that was in A. lenguarwm (13.2 mm. as against 12.6 mm.), and A. lenguarwm is a much larger animal. In all other species the brain case is smaller. Some of the differences between the specimen from Chaco and other species of Akodon may be summarized as follows: 1. Much larger brain case in proportion to length of rostrum. . Palatal foramen extends nearer the incisors. . Palate extends farther behind m?. . Palate behind m? not waist-like. . Zygomatie plate has a well defined angle. . Zygoma drops much lower, particularly anteriorly. HS ore W WD oct. 19, 1931 SHAMEL: A NEW CRICETINE RODENT 429 7. Enamel folds on inside of tooth row folded backward on one another like window shutters. 8. Incisors curve inward more abruptly toward the throat. 9. Reentrant angles closed. This specimen was taken to the British Museum by Dr. W. H. Osgood and compared with South American specimens there. Dr. Osgood had the follow- ing to say: There is nothing like this in the British Museum. ‘The species is doubtless new and the genus is uncertain. .. . This may be a new genus, but until more than one specimen can be exam- ined, it would not help much to name it. The relationships of those already named are very obscure and Thomas has reversed himself on them several times. There are a lot of species which won’t fit exactly into any of the groups he has recognized. Vig. 2. Akodon chacoensis, palatal view of skull X 38. U.S.N.M. No. 236239. Dr. A. Wetmore at the time he collected this specimen made the following note: Number 1059 was secured in a small patch of marsh grass, about ten feet square, in an open savannah. The white toes with square cut demarcation behind were especially noticeable. This animal had a skin as tender as a rabbit’s, and thus differed from any other mouse that I have handled. It is doubtless best, under the present condition of uncertainty with respect to some of the South American genera, to make this} only a new species. How- ever, the characters of the enamel folds, without considering other peculi- arities, are so distinctive that there is no doubt in my mind that when other specimens are taken they will show that this animal represents a new genus. 430 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 17 ENTOMOLOGY.—New Jassinae, with notes on other species P. W. Oman, U. 8. Bureau of Entomology. (Communicated by Harouip Morrison.) PLATYMETOPIUS HYALINUS Osb. Platymetopius cinctus Mats., Jour. Col. Agr., Tohoku Imperial Univ., Vol. Darbeds 2 ol One. This pretty little leafhopper was described by Osborn (Ent. News, XI, p. 501, 1900) from specimens taken in Washington on an introduced maple. He and later workers in the group have strongly suspected that the species was an introduced one, but knowledge of original habitat has not heretofore been available. However, in looking over the leafhoppers in the C. F. Baker col- lection the writer found two specimens of this insect from Japan labeled Platymetopius cinctus Matsumura determined by Matsumura. P. cinctus was not described until 1914 (Jour. Col. Agr., Tohoku Imperial Univ., vol. 5, Part 7, p. 215) so it becomes a synonym of P. hyalinus Osb. Matsumura reports the species from Hokkaido, Honshu (Tokyo, Gifu, Takasago) and Kiushu (Satsuma) and says it was collected in numbers from a species 01 maple. This evidence strengthens the assumption of Dikerson and Weiss (Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. vol. 12, p. 372, 1919) that the hopper was brought into this country on imported maples. Since its importation it has spread rather rapidly and is now reported as far west as Ohio. The writer has also examined specimens in the collection of the University of Kansas taken at Portland, Oregon, Aug. 12, 1920, by A. A. Nichol, indicating the introduction of the species to the west coast as well as the east. Laevicephalus excavatus n. sp. Figs. 3, 3a, 3b Resembling Laevicephalus striatus (L) but slightly smaller, with the male plates longer and the last ventral segment of the female roundingly excavated. Length 3-3.5 mm. Color: Much as in typical striatus but variable. Darker specimens show a pair of triangular brown spots at the apex of the vertex and two pairs of quadrangular spots behind these. Paler specimens may have only the spots at the apex. Pronotum with four faint longitudinal brown stripes. Veins of elytra whitish, cells variously embrowned. Form: Vertex one-fourth wider than long, distinctly right-angled. Head slightly wider than pronotum. General appearance more robust than striatus. Genitalia: Last ventral segment of female slightly longer than preceding with a median U-shaped excavation extending half-way to the base, length next the excavation exceeding length at side of abdomen. Male valve as in striatus but plates slightly more exposed and divergent at the tips than in that 1 Received August 15, 1931. Ger. 19, 195i OMAN: NEW JASSINAE 431 species. In the internal male genitalia the shaft of the oedagus, from the point of union of the two forks to the point of articulation of the penis, although much heavier and broader, is less than half as long as the corresponding por- tion in L. striatus (L.). Holotype female from Gazelle, California, Sept. 4, 1897, A. Morse, Collec- tion C. F. Baker (2373). Allotype male, same data. Paratypes, 24 males and 5 females with the above data, one male from Sis- kiyou, Oregon, Sept. 6, 1897, A. Morse, Collection C. F. Baker (2381), and 8 males and 7 females from Lakeside, Lake Tahoe, California, June 29, 1927, J. M. Aldrich. Types.—Cat. No. 48584, U.S. N. M. LAEVICEPHALUS DEBILIS (Uhler). Deltocephalus cadyt Deay, Can. Ent., vol. 59, pp. 54-55, 1927. Laevicephalus orbiculus DeL. & 8. Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer., vol. 22, p.103, 1929. In his description of the species (Bul. U. 8. Geol. Geog. Surv., 1, p. 360 [94], 1876) Uhler gives, as the locality, ‘‘Colorado, on the sides of the high mountains, and near Fair Play, in South Park.” Of the original series, so far as the writer is able to determine, there are only two specimens remaining. Both are females, one labeled ‘‘Col. Mts.” and evidently one of those referred to as occurring ‘‘on the sides of high mountains,”’ while the other is from Fair Play. Both labels are in Uhler’s handwriting. Since the specimen labeled ““Col. Mts.” has locality preference and answers in all respects to the descrip- tion, it should be considered as typical of the species. The example from Fair Play is another species, apparently exectus DeLong, and does not fit Uhler’s characterization of debilis. However, the specimen at hand from “Col. Mts.” is not the species heretofore known as debilis, but is identical with specimens of L. orbiculus DeL. & Slmn. (Ann. Ent. Soc. Amer. vol. 22, p. 103, 1919) and with paratypes of L. cady: (Deay) (Can. Ent., vol. 59, pp. 54-55, 1927), obtained through the kindness of Dr. P. B. Lawson. The above-men- tioned species hence must be accepted as synonyms of L. debilis (Uhler) while the species commonly known as debilzs is unnamed and will be described later in this paper. That Uhler’s description does not apply to the larger species formerly known as debilis is shown by the fact that he gives the length of 3.5 mm., and says the front is ‘‘stained with black above and on each side.”’ These char- acters fit his example but cannot be applied to the larger species. There are also in the Uhler collection examples of this larger species from the C. F. Baker collection. ‘These Uhler had labeled ‘‘ Deltocephalus debilis Uhler var.’’— further evidence that he recognized them as not being typical of debzlis. _L. debilis (UhI.) seems to be limited in distribution to the higher altitudes in the northwestern part of the United States. I have seen specimens from Wyoming, Colorado, and Montana. 432 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 Laevicephalus uhleri n. sp. Similar to L. debiles (Uhler) but larger and more robust, the female genital segment without prominent lateral angles. Length of female 4 mm., of male 3./omm. Color: General ground color yellowish green, front usually brownish with pale arcs over the entire surface. HEHlytra occasionally black, in part or wholly. Tip of last ventral segment of female black. Abdomen variously infuscated. Form: Somewhat variable, about as in debilis but more robust. Last ven- tral segment of female with rounding lateral angles, produced medially and slightly bifid. Male valve bluntly triangular, plates large and broad, bluntly rounded and not equaling pygofer. Most references in literature to L. debslis (Uhl.) apply to this species, one of the commonest in high altitude and northern regions. However, this species lacks the prominent lateral angles on the female segment which are characteristic of Uhler’s species, and has the front usually wholly uniformly brownish with faint arcs, while debilzs is marked with black only toward the apex and on the sides of the front, the remaining portion being distinctly lighter. Holotype female and allotype male are from Forrester’s Ranch, Laramie Co., Colorado, August 3, 1896, C. F. Baker, Collection C. F. Baker (2020). Numerous paratypes from Forrester’s Ranch, collection C. F. Baker (2020 and 2013) and Morris Ranch, Laramie Co., Colorado, July 11, 1896, C. F. Baker, Collection, C. F. Baker (2009). There are also specimens at hand from other localities in Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Utah, Washington, and Canada. Types.—Cat. No. 43585, U. 8. N. M. Deltocephalus lineatifrons n. sp. Figs. 2, 2a, 2b Size and form of D. chintinomy DeLong but with two black longitudinal stripes on the front. Length of male 2.75 mm., of female 3 mm. Color: General ground color pale yellow. Front and vertex yellow except for two wide parallel stripes of black which cover the sides of the frons and a portion of the genae, and extend to the disc of the vertex, coming closer to- gether as they do so, with a partial break at the apex of the vertex. Pronotum with anterior margin irregularly infuscated, as in the scutellum. Clavus of each elytron with an oblique fuscous mark, the two together forming a rough . VY on the dorsal median line. A large irregular fuscous spot on the disc and a smaller one near the apex of the corium. Abdomen infuscated. Central portion of hind margin of last ventral segment of female pale brown. Form: General appearance robust. Vertex well produced and rounded to the front, length on the median line two-thirds the width at base. Pronotum with anterior margin strongly convex, posterior margin straight, length at middle exceeding length of vertex, sides very short. Elytra of male exceeding abdomen; of female, short, leaving tip of abdomen exposed. Genitalia: Last ventral segment of female twice longer than preceding, lateral angles rounded, central portion rather broadly excavated, a small tooth at the bottom of the excavation. Sides and base of notch brownish. Male valve broad and slightly triangular, plates together broad at base and well pro- duced with rounded tips. This species belongs to the fuscinervosus group but appears to be most aor 19,1931 OMAN: NEW JASSINAE 433 closely related to chintinomy DeLong, from which it may be separated by the markings of the vertex and front. Holotype male and Allotype female from Spicer’s, North Park, Colorado, July 18, 1896, C. F. Baker, Collection C. F. Baker (2024). Paratypes.—6 males and 4 females with the above data, 2 males and 2 females from Rabbit Ears Pass, Colorado, July 21, 1896, C. F. Baker, Collec- tion C. F. Baker (2019), and one male from Cameron Pass, N. Colorado, July 30, 1896, C. F. Baker, Collection C. F. Baker (2150). Types.—Cat. No. 43586, U. 8. N. M. It is interesting to note that North Park, Colorado, has a mean altitude of from 8,000 to 9,000 feet and Rabbit Ears Pass and Cameron Pass are both near 10,000 feet in altitude. C. F. Baker’s collection notes state that 2024 was “on grass, Carex, and a little Potentilla,” and 2150 was ‘‘on mostly Carex.” From this it is evident that the species is confined to situations in high altitudes, apparently alpine meadows. THAMNOTETTIX SIMPLEX (Herrich-Schieffer). Deltocephalus chlamydatus Prov., Pet. Faune Ent. Can., vol. 2, p. 339, 1890. The writer has compared specimens of Thamnotettix chlamydatus (Prov.) from Colorado, Canada, and Alaska with examples of Thamnotettix simplex (H.8.) from Europe and finds them to be identical in all external characters and in the internal male genitalia. Th. simplex (H.8.) has priority. The species is apparently common in both North America and Europe. In North America it is limited in distribution to northern localities or high altitudes. DryYLrx TRUNCATUS Sleesman Fig. 4 Female: Similar to male, but slightly longer. Last ventral segment slightly longer than preceding, with a median shallow, rounded excavation; the sides of this more produced than the sides of the segment. Disc of seg- el usually yellowish, hind margin dark, darker in excavation. Ovipositor ack. This species was described from two males from Ohio (Ent. Amer., vol. X, No. 2, 1929). The description of the female is based upon one specimen from Chicago, Illinois, two from New Jersey, and two from Norwood, Maryland (Uhler). There are also males at hand from New Jersey. MENOSOMA ACUMINATA (Bak.) Fig. I This species was described by Baker (Psyche, vol. 7, Suppl. 1, p. 25, 1896, Athysanus) from a single male. Osborn and Ball, in their monograph of the group (1902), stated that ‘‘This species is only known by the single, faded, male type and while it without doubt belongs to the subgenus Conosanus its character could not be made out with sufficient certainty to warrant including in the synopsis.”” Sleesman (1929) did not mention it in his monograph of the Euscelis group. 7. acuminata 2a D. linea tifrons D. truncatus 3a L. excavatus 5a Xl Ph. dive rgens Ph. obyius EXPLANATION OF FIGURES Fig. 1. Menosoma acuminata; female genitalia. XX 15.5. Fig. 2. Deltocephalus lineatifrons; 2a, male genitalia; 2b, female genitalia. X 31. Fig. 3. Laevicephalus excavatus ; 3a, male genitalia; 3b, female genitalia. X 31. Fig. 4. Drylix truncatus; female genitalia. > 15.5. Fig. 5. Phlepsius divergens; 5a, lateral view of head; 5b, male genitalia. X 15.5. Fig. 6. Phlepsius obvius; 6a, lateral view of head; 6b, male genitalia; 6c, female genitalia. >< 15.5. 434 u oct. 19, 1931 OMAN: NEW JASSINAE 435 Some time ago there was sent to the Bureau of Entomology by Mr. Van E. Romney from Alamo Alto Sta. in Western Texas a single female which was identified by the writer as acuminata (Baker). Subsequently, when the group was being arranged, a pair of specimens was found labeled by Dr. E. D. Ball: “This is Athysanus acuminatus Bak.” Since these are the only known records of the female of the species a description is here added. Similar in size and coloration to the male. Last ventral segment with a long, median, spatulate process ending in two lateral points, between these a U-shaped excavation. Segment, aside from process, short, longer next the process than at lateral margins. The male types seems to be quite typical in color for the species. Ball (Florida Ent., vol. XV, No. 1, p. 5, 1931) has recently placed the species in the genus Menosoma Ball. Phlepsius divergens n. sp. Figs. 5, 5a, 5b. Resembling Phlepsius mimus Baker in form and coloration but larger, with the vertex shorter and the male plates flat and strongly divergent at the lips. Length of male 6.5 mm. Color: General ground color creamy to gray. Fuscous irrorations over face and entire dorsal surface without definite pattern. Femora distinctly twice-banded with black. Hind margin of pygofer black. Form: Vertex short, scarcely longer at middle than next the eye, very slightly angled and not carinate between disc and front. Pronotum over two and one-half times as long as the vertex. Elytra extending well beyond tip of abdomen. Genitalia: Male valve very short and broad, obtusely angled at the middle. Plates flat and broad, outer margins nearly parallel but slightly concave and converging; inner margins contiguous for a short distance, then sharply diverging, the plates together thus having the appearance of a triangular incision from the hind margin. Pygofer strongly exceeding plates, margins thick and heavy. Because of the very distinct male genitalia there is no hesitancy in describ- ing this form from a single specimen, the holotype male from Forestburg, Texas, taken in June, 1928. Type.—Cat. No. 48587, U.S. N. M. Phlepsius obvius, n. sp. Figs. 6, 6a, 6b, 6c. Very similar in size and form to Phlepsius mimus Baker but with the elytra much more finely and densely irrorate and the female genital segment broadly produced medially. Length of male 6.25 mm., of female 7 mm. Color: Dirty white to gray, heavily irrorate with brown. Hind margin of female genital segment dark centrally. Form: Vertex broad, one-half longer at the middle than next the eye, very bluntly angled and rather rounding to the front. Pronotum nearly twice as long as vertex. Elytra long, tips slightly flaring. 436 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 Genitalia: Last ventral segment of female nearly twice as long as preceding, lateral angles well produced and rounded, hind margin shallowly excavated, the median portion with a short, blunt, slightly bifid tooth. Male valve tri- angular, broad and rather short. Plates short and broad, diverging at tips, somewhat similar to those of Phlepsius divergens n. sp. but with the tips thin and curled upward. Pygofer extending beyond plates, tips thin and bluntly pointed. Holotype male, Allotype female, and one female paratype from Clyde T. Reed, Kingsville, Texas. Types.—Cat. No. 48588, U.S. N. M. BOTANY.—Two new grasses from Mexico... Jason R. SWALLEN, Bureau of Plant Industry. (Communicated by A. 8. HircHcock.) Among the grasses collected by Prof. H. H. Bartlett on the Expedi- tion of the University of Michigan to the Sierra de San Carlos, Tamaulipas, Mexico, in the summer of 1930, the following two species are new. Panicum transiens Swallen, sp. nov. Perenne; culmi erecti 60-65 cm. alti, pubescentes vel pilosi, ramosi; vaginae papilloso-pilosae, quam internoda culmorum breviores, quam internoda ramo- rum longiores; laminae 5-12 cm. longae, 6-14 mm. latae, lanceolatae, pubes- centes, marginibus albis scabris, basi papilloso-ciliatae; panicula 8-15 em. longa, ramis adscendentibus vel divergentibus; spiculae appressae, 4 mm. longae, basi attenuatae, papilloso-pubescentes; gluma prima subacuta 2 mm. longa; gluma secunda quam spicula paulo brevior; lemma sterile spiculam aequans; lemma fertile 3 mm. longum, subacutum apice pubescens. Perennial, culms erect, 60-65 cm. tall, freely branching, pubescent or pilose; sheaths papillose-pilose, densely pubescent on the collar, those of the main culm shorter than the internodes, those of the branches much longer than the internodes; blades 5-12 cm. long, 6-14 mm. wide, lanceolate, flat, pubescent on both surfaces, the white scabrous margins papillose-ciliate toward the rounded base; ligule densely ciliate, about 0.5mm. long; panicles 8-15 em. long, the short- branches stiffly ascending or spreading; spikelets (except the terminal ones) short-pediceled, appressed to the branches, 4 mm. long, pointed at the apex, attenuate at the base, papillose-pubescent; first glume 2 mm. long, subacute, the margins somewhat hyaline; second glume a little shorter than the spikelet — exposing the fruit; sterile lemma equaling the spikelet; fruit 3 mm. long, sub- acute, smooth and shining, puberulent at the apex. Type in the United States National Herbarium No. 1501526, collected on Mesa de Tierra, vicinity of San José, altitude 1000 meters, Sierra de San Carlos, Tamaulipas, Mexico, July 19, 1930, by H. H. Bartlett (No. 10454). Another specimen (Bartlett 10090) collected at La Vegania, vicinity of San José, Tamaulipas, Mexico, is also referred to this species. Panicum transiens is allied to P. pedicellatum Vasey of Texas and P. nodatum Hitche. & Chase of Texas and northern Tamaulipas. From the 1 Received August 11, 1931. ocr. 19, 1931 MATLACK: JUICE SAC OF THE ORANGE 437 former it differs in having longer spikelets, 4 mm. long, from the latter in hav- ing a longer subacute first glume, and from both in being a larger plant with much longer and wider blades. ‘These three species compose the Pedicellata group which is intermediate between the subgenus Dichanthelium and true Panicum. Eragrostis longiramea Swallen, sp. nov. Perennis; culmi erecti, 150-160 cm. alti, laeves vel scaberuli; vaginae dense papilloso-pilosae; laminae 35-60 cm. longae, 4-8 mm. latae, planae, elongatae, attenuatae, scabrae, basi angustae et sparsim papilloso-pilosae; panicula 50-60 em. longa, ramis gracilibus, scabris, adscendentibus vel divergentibus, in- ferioribus 15-25 cm. longis; spiculae 3-5 mm. longae, 5—7 florae; glumae acutae vel acuminatae, 2 mm. longae, carinis scabris; leommata 2 mm. longa. Perennial; culms apparently single, erect, 150-160 cm. tall, smooth or mi- nutely scaberulous; sheaths rounded on the back, shorter or longer than the internodes, densely papillose-pilose with spreading hairs, especially on the collar; blades 35-60 cm. long, 4-8 mm. wide, flat, elongate, attenuate to a fine point, narrowed toward the base, sparsely papillose-pilose on both surfaces near the base, scabrous above and toward the margins beneath, the lower surface otherwise smooth; panicle 50-60 cm. long, the axis glabrous or retrorsely pilose, the branches slender, scabrous, ascending or spreading, pilose in the axils, the lower ones 15-25 cm. long; spikelets 3-5 mm. long, plumbeous, the pedicels long and slender, spreading or sometimes appressed, 5-7 flowered, the florets rather crowded; glumes acute or acuminate, 2 mm. long, scabrous on the keel; lemmas 2 mm. long, slightly keeled toward the minutely scabrous apex, the lateral nerves indistinct. : Type in the United States National Herbarium No. 1501524, collected on Pico del Diablo, vicinity of Marmolejo, Sierra de San Carlos, Tamaulipas, Mexico, August 12, 1930, by H. H. Bartlett (No. 10910). One other specimen besides the type has been seen. This is Bartlett 10433 collected on Mesa de Tierra, vicinity of San José, Sierra de San Carlos, Tamau- lipas, Mexico. This differs from the type in having the axis of the panicle retrorsely pilose. This species is allied to H. lugens Nees and E. polytricha Hack., differing from them in being a much larger plant with broader, elongate blades. BOTANY.—The juice sac of the orange with some observations on the plastids of citrus.» M. B. Matuack, U. 8. Department of Agri- culture. (Communicated by J. A. LECLERC.) The writer became interested in the structure of the juice sac of the orange when he observed that only a small part of the liquid contained therein ran out when the juice sac was pricked with a needle. He also noted what appeared to be a cellular structure in the inner portion of the juice sac when it was flattened out on a slide and observed under a microscope. This led him to make some sections of the sacs. The 1 Food Research Division Contribution No. 104. Published by permission of the Chief of the Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. Received August 1, 1931. 438 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 only sections of which the writer is aware are those of Tschirch and Oesterle.2. These investigators show only sketches of the cross section of the juice sacs of mature and immature bitter oranges. The juice sacs were fixed in Carnoy’s fluid and embedded in paraffine by the usual method. The process had to be carried on very gradually in order to prevent collapse of the material. The sections were cut 20 microns thick by means of a rotary microtome. Bismark brown was used as a staining agent. Haemotoxylin stains the sections well but makes the material more difficult to photograph. The walls of the juice sac are very thin and take up little of the stain, consequently they transmit too much light. However, by using the brown stain and blue light fairly satisfactory photographs were obtained. Exposures of one hour and twenty minutes were used. Figure 1 shows a cross section and Figure 2 a longitudinal section. Owing to the delicacy of the material it was impossible to obtain a section which was entirely perfect. From the standpoint of edibility this very tenderness is of great importance. While working on the juice sac it was noted that they contained nu- merous plastids. These cannot be shown in this type of section since they are removed by the fixing and mounting operations. By teasing out the inside portion of the fresh juice sac these plastids can easily be observed under the microscope. Their size and shape appear to be characteristic of the species from which they are obtained, which fact might be of use in genetical studies. For instance the tangerine, sat- suma, and willow-leaved mandarin oranges have spindle-shaped plas- tids. The grapefruit has what appears to be elaioplasts or colorless groups of oil-like droplets. The Sampson tangelo has a red meat like the tangerine, and the chromoplasts are numerous and spindle shaped. The Thornton tangelo has a yellow meat with a slight orange tint, colorless globules, as in the grapefruit, and small orange isodiametric plastids. Lastly the Nocatee tangelo has only the colorless globules or elaioplasts, and the general appearance of the meat is the same as that of the grapefruit. It is thought by some botanists that the king orange does not belong to the same species as the mandarin. Ob- servations disclose that, as noted above in the tangerine, satsuma, and willow-leaved mandarin the chromoplasts are spindle-shaped, whereas in the king orange they are isodiametric. 2 Anatomischer atlas der Pharmakognosie und Nahrungsmittelkunde, 1900. Tab. 69 and 70. Fig. 44 and 45. oct. 19, 1931 MATLACK: JUICE SAC OF THE ORANGE 439 In general the plastids of citrus fruits can be divided into three groups. ‘The first includes isodiametric plastids as found in the king Figure 1.—Juice sac. X Section X 80. Figure 2.—Juice sac. L Section X 80, Figure 3.—King orange. Chromoplasts X 440. Figure 4.—Satsuma orange. Chromoplasts X 440. Figure 5.—Grapefruit. Elaioplasts ? x 440. 440 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 orange, three varieties of kumquats and the numerous varieties of the sweet orange. In the second are the spindle-shaped plastids of the satsuma, tangerine, mandarin, calamondin, rangpur lime, and the Sampson tangelo. ‘The third group includes the colorless type as found in the grapefruit, bittersweet, sour orange, lemon, acid lime, Citrus trifoliata, citron (Etrog, Parish and commercial), Siamese pummelo and citrange. The Indian Red Pummelo is an exception in that it contains in addition to elaioplasts, pink crystals which appear at times to be surrounded by a pink stroma. Figures 3, 4 and 5 illustrate the three respective types of plastids. These observations are presented at this time in the hope that some one will see fit to carry the studies further. ENTOMOLOGY .—-A new ant from Porto Rico Wm. M. Mann, U.S. National Museum. Among ants received by the U. 8. Department of Agriculture for identification occurred the following interesting new species: Cerapachys (Syscia) seini, new species. Worker. Length 2mm. (Fig. 1). Head about one-third longer than broad, as broad in front as behind, with slightly convex sides and strongly excavated posterior border and angulate corners. Antennal scapes extending less than half the distance to occipital corners; rather strongly curved and clavate; first funicular joint a little longer than broad; funicular joints 2 to 7 transverse, increasing in size toward apex; terminal joint as long as the 3 preceding joints together. Eyes lacking. Mandibles stout, acuminate at tips. Thorax in profile very feebly convex, from above nearly three times as long as broad; promesonotal suture discern- ible though very shallow; sides and posterior border of epinotum narrowly margined, subangulate above; petiole in profile as long as postpetiole with a large and flat anteroventral spine; from above two-thirds as broad as post- petiole; postpetiole in profile considerably deeper than petiole, feebly convex above; from above one and one-half times as broad behind as in front. First segment of gaster two and one half times as long as remaining segments to- gether. Legs short with thick femora and tibiae. Subopaque. Head, thorax, petiole and postpetiole coarsely, somewhat rugosely punc- tate; first segment of gaster with large shallow punctures largest and most dense anteriorly; the surface between sublucid; legs rather strongly punctate. Head, body and appendages with abundant recumbent white silky hairs and a few longer and coarser sub-erect hairs. Color light yellowish brown. Type: Cat. No. 48648 U.S. N. M. Type locality: Porto Rico Insular Experiment Station, Rio Piedras, P. R. 1 Received August 15, 1931. oer, 19,1931 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 44] This species is described from a series collected by Francisco Sein in soil about the roots of sugar cane. Although the type locality of this species is Porto Rico and it is the first record of an ant of this subgenus in the New World, I believe it very probable that it is endemic to New Guinea and has been introduced into Porto Rico in soil with sugar cane. The other species of Syscza occur in Australia, Malaya and Ceylon, with the exception of szlvestrii Wheeler, which was described from Hawaii. I think it possible that the latter species also will later be found endemic to New Guinea. C. seinz is one of the smallest of the species; the promesonotal suture is more distinct than in the other known forms and the punctation of the gaster finer and shallower with the area between smooth instead of rugulose. C. silvestri7 is larger and has the head larger in proportion to its width and the antennal scapes longer, stouter and less curved. Fig. 1. Cerapachys (Syscia) seini, n. sp., worker. Drawn by ELeanor A. CaRLIN. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES THE ACADEMY 239TH MEETING The 239th meeting of the AcapEmy was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club on Thursday, March 19, 1931, Vice-President Curtis pre- siding. About 200 persons were present. Program: Joun C. Murriam, President of the Carnegie Institution of Washington: The unity of nature as illustrated by the Grand Canyon.—The speaker described the educational features provided at the Grand Canyon for the purpose of assisting visitors in a critical study of the formation and structure of the canyon walls. 442 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 240TH MEETING The 240th meeting of the Acaprmy was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club on Thursday, April 16, 1931, Vice-President Curtis presiding. Program: O. Ei. Baxer, Bureau of Agricultural Economics, U. 8. Depart- ment of Agriculture: Changes in diet affect agriculture.—The economic depres- sion during 1930 resulted in a downward trend in the consumption of several foods by the American people toward the standards that plowaies during the war years and the years immediately preceding. The World War caused changes in the diet of the American people. The principal change after the war was a notable decline in the use of bread, of corn meal, and other cereal foods and an increase in the consumption of milk, of meat, of sugar, of fresh vegetables, and of fruit. Apparently the higher wages and salaries of city people since the war has enabled them to eat more of the expensive foods. During the five war years, 1914 to 1918, the average consumption per person of wheat, corn, oats, rye, buckwheat and barley for human food totaled about 310 pounds a year, whereas during the last five years 1924— 1928 it was only about 230 pounds. This is a decrease of 80 pounds, or over a fourth. On the other hand, the average American was eating until recently nearly a third more sugar, probably a fourth more milk and dairy products, nearly a fifth more meat, possibly a fifth more vegetables, and a tenth more fruit. These changes in diet have had a marked effect upon the need for farm land. If man could live on sugar alone it would require only about one-third of an acre of sugar beets to provide the amount of energy in the food of the average American for a year, but it would require three-fourths of an acre of corn or potatoes, an acre and a half of wheat or tomatoes, two to three acres of crops if he lived on milk alone, about the same acreage of corn and other crops if he ate only pork and lard, and 12 to 16 acres of crops if he lived wholly on beef and veal. This comparison of acreage required to produce an equal quantity of food, measured in calories, shows that much more land is required to produce a diet based largely on meat than one based on wheat, corn or the other cereals. It now requires over two acres of crops to feed the average American, but only one acre to feed the average German, one-half acre to feed a Chinaman, and one-fourth an acre, a Japanese. ‘This is owing largely to the difference in diet, except that the difference between China and Japan is owing to much higher crop yields 1 in Japan. , The decrease in the United States since the war years in consumption per person of cereal foods, principally wheat flour and corn meal, has reduced the area of these crops needed to feed a person by about one-twelfth of an acre; while the increase in consumption of milk, vegetables, fruits, and of meat prior to 1929 increased the area per person needed to produce these products by a quarter of an acre. Nearly all the increase in sugar consump- tion has come from Cuba, Porto Rico, Hawaii and the Philippines, so it has not been included in the estimate. The net result, therefore, of this change in diet was an increase in crop land needed to feed each person of about one-sixth of an acre. Meanwhile, the population of the United States increased from 95 million to 120 million, which, after allowing for the change in diet, indicates that about 50 million acres more crop land would be needed to feed our people than during the war, provided no changes occurred in oe7!) 2195/1931 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 443 production per acre. But the fact is that there are only about 6 million more acres of crops used to produce the nation’s food than were used during the war. What has produced this result? First, the use of the automobile and the tractor has reduced the number of horses and mules in the United States by over seven million and released for other uses probably 20 to 25 million acres of crop land formerly used to feed these horses and mules that have disappeared. Most of this land thus released is used to feed meat and milk animals. Secondly, there has been a great improvement in the amount of meat and milk produced per unit of feed consumed. Thirdly, there has been a shift from the less productive classes of animals per unit of feed consumed to the more productive classes,—notably from beef cattle to dairy cattle and hogs. Fourthly, there has been a shift from the less productive crops to the more productive. Fifthly, there has been a little increase in the yield per acre of many of the crops. In brief, the application of science to agriculture, which has taken place more rapidly since the War than ever before, has enabled the American farmer to provide a more expensive diet to an increasing number of people from a practically stationary acreage of crop land. (Author’s abstract.) 241sT MEETING The 241st meeting of the AcapEMy was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club on Thursday, May 21, 1931, at 8:15 p.m., President Coss presiding. About 125 persons were present. Program: E. D. Merrity, Director, New York Botanical Garden: Plants and animals of the Philippines and neighboring islands—How they came to be where they are.—Introductory to a general discussion of the present- day geographic distribution of plants and animals in the Philippines and in neighboring islands, the speaker discussed in general terms the relative sizes of the geographic areas involved, geologic history of the region, hydrography, climate, wind, and rainfall. The bearing of endemism on the general subject was stressed, indicating that those areas still covered by primary forests were most important, and that much of the present-day vegetation in the settled areas represents introduced elements. In the plant kingdom the percentage of endemism in the primary forest exceeds 80 per cent while in the settled areas and secondary forests it scarcely exceeds 10 per cent. Attention was called to the fact that man has been a most important disturbing factor in reference to the distribution of both plants and animals in Malaysia. In drawing conclusions as to biogeographic relationships, emphasis was placed on the importance of assembling data covering all groups of plants and animals, for the reason that distributional data apper- taining to one group frequently shows entirely different biogeographic rela- tionships as compared with other groups. As an illustration, if one studies the Dipterocarpaceae, one would conclude that the Philippine flora was dominently western Malaysian in origin, but if one studied the Myrtaceae, one would conclude that it was dominently Australian. For purposes of discussion three areas were indicated; western Malaysia or Sundaland (Borneo, Sumatra, Java, etc.); eastern Malaysia or Papualand (New Guiana and adjacent islands); and Wallacea, the region between Wallace’s and Weber’s lines separating Sundaland from Papualand. Data were presented 444 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 covering the present known geographic distribution of various groups of insects, fresh-water and land molluscs, fresh-water fishes, batrachians, reptiles, birds, mammals, and plants. In general there is a close correlation in the present distribution in all of these groups as between the Philippines and both eastern and western Malaysia or Papualand and Sundaland. Asiatic types are found to diminish rapidly in numbers and in importance as one proceeds eastward, and Australian types similarly decrease as one pro- ceeds westward and northward in Malaysia. The apparently anomalous distribution of plants and animals in Malaysia and the Philippines, with much stronger Australian elements in the Philippines than in Java and the other Sunda Islands, was explained by the probable existence during Pleisto- cene and Pliocene times of two more or less stable continental areas repre- sented by the two great continental shelves as delimited by the present 200- meter line. To the west the Sunda Islands (Java, Sumatra, and Borneo, including the Palawan-Calamian group in the Philippines) were at times con- nected with Asia, and New Guiana had the same history with relation to Australia. Between these two stable areas there was apparently an unstable constantly archipelagic area which has existed since Tertiary times, the practical absence of mammals in Australia indicating no direct connections between Asia and Australia since the mammals attained dominance as a group. This insular area has inhibited direct east and west intermigration of both plants and animals in Malaysia as a whole. This area, called ‘‘Wallacea,” is approxi- mately delimited on the west by Wallace’s line and on the east by Weber’s line. These two “lines,” originally proposed as delimiting or separating the Asiatic and Australian faunas, are approximately the eastern boundary of Sundaland and the western boundary of Papualand, where the two old continental areas impinge on the intermediate unstable insular area. Wal- lacea includes all of the Philippines (except the Palawan-Calamian group), Celebes, Moluccas, Lesser Sunda Islands and Gilolo. The two stable areas, Sundaland and Papualand, are characterized by the presence of vast continental shelves with a very even submarine topog- raphy, the water averaging less than 100 meters in depth in these great shelf seas. In contrast to this, Wallacea has an entirely different submarine topography, being characterized by the presence of numerous great deeps, with depths as great as 5000 to 6000 meters, these deeps being more or less parallel to the rows of raised islands as pointed out by Molengraff. Inter- migration has apparently been in general north and south within Wallacea rather than east and west across it. Thus many Australian types were able to reach far to the north in the Philippines, but few were able to reach western Malaysia, although Java is much closer to Australia than is the Philippine group. There was apparently a similar north and south migration of both eastern and western Malaysian types via the Philippines, and some from each area succeeded in negotiating the two longer sides of this hypothetical triangle rather than east and west across its comparatively narrow base, which is represented by the Lesser Sunda Islands. In closing, the speaker discussed Dr. Lam’s application of Wegener’s theory of continental shift to the genetic phytogeography of the Malay Archipelago. According to this theory the Australian region shifted north- ward, coming into collision with the Asiatic continent in the Pleistocene. After the collision the two continents commenced exchanging plants and animals. Dr. Lam considers that the theory of an intermediate unstable ocr. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 445 insular area of long geologic duration is unsatisfactory in that it gives no real explanation of the principal problem involved; that is why two regions having such remarkably different floras and faunas as Australia and Asia lie so close together in present geography. (Author’s abstract.) CHARLES THom, Recording Secretary. BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 75/TH MEETING The 757th meeting was held in the New Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club January 24, 1931 at 8:10 p.m., with President Werrmore in the chair and 130 persons present. New member elected: Epmunp McNatty. A. A. DoouitTLe exhibited two hermetically sealed jars containing grow- ing algae and mosses, which had been sealed in 1924. E. P. WALKER reported four nests with eggs of black-crowned night herons in the large open flight cage at the Zoological Park. Program: A. H. Howey: Exhibition of paintings of Florida birds—The speaker showed a number of water-color and oil paintings by F. L. Jaquzs of the American Museum of Natural History, which will be used to illustrate his forthcoming book on the birds of Florida. VERNON BaILey: General features of the Upper Mississippt River Wild life and Fish Refuge-——The Upper Mississippi River Wild Life and Fish Refuge, including the island flood lands and waters of the Mississippi River Valley from Lake Pepin, in southern Minnesota, to near Rock Island, Illinois, about 300 miles of irregular, scattered, and broken areas of land and water, was set aside by Congress for a great experiment in conservation and wild life study. Money was appropriated for purchase of the cheaper bottom lands not suitable for agriculture but well adapted to game and native wild life. Upto date about half of the land needed for the refuge has been secured, enough to start some experiments in restocking and building up the native fauna. ‘The general plan is to keep many extensive areas as absolute sanc- tuaries, enough to maintain abundance of native life for the whole region, but outside of these areas to allow enough hunting and trapping to remove the excess of each species so they will not overpopulate and destroy their supply of food and cover. The refuge is on one of the greatest migratory highways of waterfowl in the country. To study the present condition of its native life Mr. and Mrs. BaiLtry spent the summer of 1930 at various points along the length of the refuge. Mr. BarLey grew up in the Upper Mississippi Valley, so its general life has been familiar to him for many years. He saw it first from a covered wagon in 1869, but this part of the valley was a well settled country then and his father had to go 30 miles north of Minneapolis before finding a homestead of choice land. The changes in bird and animal life and the possibilities of the region as a sanctuary were described. (Author’s abstract.) F. M. Unwver: Waterfowl and reptile life of the Upper Mississippi River Wild Life and Fish Refuge—The Bureau of Biological Survey conducted preliminary biological investigations in the Upper Mississippi River Wild Life Refuge during the summers of 1926, 1927, and 1928. Two biologists worked together from a headquarters boat each year. The principal purpose was to determine the type, abundance, and distribution of waterfowl foods, and factors affecting their development throughout the Refuge. Fluctuating water levels were found to be the most important single factor in retarding the development of waterfowl foods. 446 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 During the course of this work about 400 species of plants (principally aquatic and moist-soil types) were studied. Notes on the water-fowl indicate that the once rare wood duck is now the most abundant of 14 species of ducks recorded in the Refuge during the nesting season; 41 species and races of reptiles and amphibians have been recorded from the counties which the refuge traverses; 90 species and races of fishes and 1 lamprey have been taken in the refuge, and 27 additional fishes and 1 more lamprey have been recorded in adjacent tributary streams. Sixty kinds of mussels and five species of crayfishes have been recorded from this area. The Refuge will probably be greatly altered in the near future by the construction of a series of dams to facilitate navigation in the Upper Missis- sippi River. The final effects of that program are problematic. (Auwthor’s abstract.) 758TH MEETING The 758th meeting was held in the New Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club February 7, 1931 at 8:15 p.m., with President WrtTmore in the chair and 96 persons present. New members elected: H. C. Bryant, THEODORE Koppanyl, W. C. MANSFIELD. W. B. BELL reported that the musk oxen recently introduced into Alaska were adapting themselves readily to the new environment and gaining in weight. A. WETMORE announced that it was planned to open the new reptile house at the National Zoological Park on February 28. Program: T. GILBERT PxrarRson: Adventures in bird protection—The speaker gave his first public address on the subject of bird protection just 27 years ago in Washington, D. C. From this point the history of bird protection here and abroad was sketched. In Europe bird protection usually means the protection of game on large estates. The first known organization to take up bird protection was in France and was for the purpose of controlling wolves. It dates back to the time of Charlemagne. The present International Committee on Bird Protection has on its agenda consideration of such problems as the protection of song birds, oil pollution, sizes of ‘leads’ to be used in shooting, and others. Game birds are fre- quently abundant on estates but the protection of song birds usually is a county matter, the protected species being listed on schedules, and one given protection in one county may not receive it in another. In Scotland no public shooting is permitted except between tides. England has a Royal Society for the Protection of Birds, with volunteer ‘“‘watchers’’ who accumu- late much useful information. France also has a Society for Bird Protection and last year the speaker attended the celebration at the establishment of their 1000th sanctuary. These are nothing more than plots of land privately owned where the owner agrees to protect the birds. Hawks are very scarce in Europe, being killed at every opportunity. Small song birds are not accorded legal protection, and in one year in Belgium, according to official figures, between three and four million were killed for food. Referring to American efforts at wild life protection, the speaker gave first the history of Pelican Island, Florida, established by order of President Roosevelt in 1904. Pelicans have at times suffered heavily both at the hands of nature and man. During the war their destruction was urged as a con- servation measure but an investigation showed that their food was almost 100 per cent menhaden, fish of no value as human food. oct. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 447 The speaker also dealt with the efforts to establish a national park in the Everglades, the efforts to preserve the Heath Hen on Martha’s Vineyard, Massachusetts, and the success achieved in establishing the Paul J. Rainey Wild Life Sanctuary in Louisiana and the Antelope Refuge in Nevada. H. W. Teruune: Wild life protection in Alaska.—The Alaska Game Com- mission is badly hampered through lack of wardens and operating funds. During its five years’ operations, the revenues from sale of licenses, fines and forfeitures have increased from $19,000 in the fiscal year 1926, to $53,000 in 1930, while funds appropriated for the work have increased from $55,000 in 1926 to $97,000 in 1930. Starting with a force of 5 field wardens the Com- mission now has 10, 3 having been added during the present year. In addi- tion to this force of regularly appointed full time men, there are about 90 licensed guides who are ex-officio wardens. The enforcement work of the guides, however, is largely preventative, as they are not authorized to incur expenses chargeable to the enforcement appropriation. Seven wardens with a district of over 90,000 square miles each, during the fiscal year 1930, travelled 55,000 miles in the course of enforcement. The Alaska Game Com- mission is encouraged in the work by the Courts meting jail sentences in addition to heavy fines in nearly fifty per cent of convictions. Game conditions, generally, are improving. Since 1915 game has increased in nearly every section of the territory. There are no grounds for the present hysteria over the depletion of the large brown bears of Alaska, as they also are increasing. Some apprehension is felt, however, regarding the mountain sheep, in whose range the coyotes are rapidly advancing. Increasing reports of the scattering of some of the herds of sheep by coyotes are viewed with alarm. Incidentally, recent reports state that two coyotes were taken in the winter of 1929-30 near Point Barrow, the top of the continent. Furs constitute one of the principal resources of Alaska, standing fourth in exports. Fur exports for 1929, amounting to 43 millions, were exceeded only by fisheries products with 463 millions, copper 83 millions, gold 7 mil- lions. A study of the records of furs shipped from Alaska during the past 18 years indicates a well defined cycle of plenty and scarcity. (Author’s abstract.) 759TH MEETING The 759th meeting was held in the auditorium of the New National Museum February 28, 1931 at 8:10 p.m., with Vice-President JAcKsoN in the chair and 280 persons present. Program: R. L. Dirmars: Motion picture studies of reptiles (illustrated)— The speaker sketched the advances in the last thirty years in the classifica- tion of snakes and in the treatment of snake poisoning. He then showed three reels of excellent moving pictures taken at the New York Zoological Park, illustrating (1) tortoises and lizards; (2) harmless snakes; and (3) poisonous lizards and snakes, accompanying the pictures with a running account of the animals’ habits. 760TH MEETING The 760th meeting was held in the New Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club March 7, 1931 at 8:10 p.m., with President WErTmor:E in the chair and 90 persons present. 448 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 FRANK THONE exhibited several recently published books on biological subjects including SKENE’s School botany, WHEELER’s Demons of the dust, Hornapay’s Thirty yeors’ war for wild life, Kupo’s Handbook of protozoology, and Furertses’ Abyssinian birds and mammals. W. M. Mann stated that the newly-opened reptile house has been visited by a large number of people. E. P. WALKER mentioned a recent shipment of Canada geese, white-tailed deer, and three fine buck antelope, received from the Biological Survey. Program: C. H. 'TowNsEND: A recent expedition to the Galapagos Islands and studies of Galapagos tortoises —The speaker has been interested for several years in an attempt to save from extermination the tortoises of the Galapagos Islands. For many years these tortoises furnished food to whalers, as well as to many other vessels. Examination of log books of whalers at New Bed- ford indicates that Baur’s estimate that ten million tortoises were taken from the islands is very likely not too large. ‘Tortoises were practically gone from the accessible islands by the last quarter of the last century. They were also harried by hunters from Ecuador who killed them for the oil. In 1928 a vessel of the Bureau of Fisheries, acting with funds furnished by the New York Zoological Society, visited the Galapagos Islands to secure tortoises for zoological gardens. On Duncan Island none were found, but on Albemarle they were still found in numbers. Altogether 180 specimens were brought back, some of which were kept at New York while others were widely dis- tributed to zoological gardens in the southern tier of States and in Bermuda, Honolulu, and Australia. No specimens weighing more than 80 pounds were brought back owing to difficult conditions of transport on the islands, and most of them were very much smaller. In general, it was found that in captivity they doubled or more than doubled their weight in two years. A specimen kept by the speaker at his home would go every evening to a corner of the yard next to a fence or log, scratch off the grass, and lie down on the raw earth. ‘This practice was no doubt safe in its natural home, but was not so in the much cooler climate of New York. Consequently every evening for two weeks the turtle was driven into the garage where he burrowed into a pile of straw. At the end of that time he learned to do this for himself. In 1930 the speaker, with other naturalists, accompanied Vincent Astor on an expedition to the Galapagos Islands on which other specimens were collected. Photographs of the tortoises in the wild state and in captivity were shown, and moving picture films taken on the Vincent Astor Expedition. 761ST MEETING The 761st meeting was held in the New Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club March 21, 1931 at 8:15 p.m., with Vice-President Jackson in the chair and 63 persons present. C. W. STILEs gave a brief resumé of the results of a 5000-mile trip through the southern States in search of hookworm. Newspaper reports that hook- worm has been eradicated in the United States are incorrect. The pupils of 97 schools in seven States were examined. Infection varying from 1.4 per cent to 98 per cent was found, with an average of 32 per cent. Deplor- able conditions of poverty and destitution were met in many places. F. THone exhibited several recent publications: P. Ereprr’s Animals looking at you and Animal children, and W. S. Bronson’s Fingerfins and Paddlewings, the two latter, describing the life of a sargassum fish and the Galapagos penguin respectively, being written for children. Ger 19), 1931 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 449 Program: Evin CHEVERLANGE: Exhibition of paintings of fishes of Tahiti. —The speaker exhibited a series of colored paintings he had recently made and described his method of work. As far as possible, the fish were caught and kept alive in aquaria in order to observe their natural colors, which in many cases change greatly after death. He also studied them under water and made sketches there. By taking in his mouth a tube two or three fathoms long, supported by a float, through which he breathed, and with a clothespin on his nose, he found it possible to tay under water for half an hour without ill effects. D. E. BucxineHam: The fish poison Dervis. EE ois elliptica is one of the several varieties of poisonous plants employed by the natives of the Malaysian Archipelago as a fish poison. The root of the plant is bruised and thrown into a stream where fish abound; within a few minutes, the fish are stimulated and swim in a frightened manner; then they appear on the surface either stunned or apparently dead. This method of fishing is illegal but is carried on secretly with success. In other tropical countries, including South and Central America, the plant Cube (Lonchocarous nicou), as well as many other plants, produces this poisonous effect on fish. The active principle of Derris and Cube is rotenone, a white crystalline compound, having the formula C2y.H».O,. It is insoluble in water, but soluble in acetone, chloroform, and many other organic solvents. Rotenone is extremely toxic to fish, one part in twenty million parts water killing gold fish in three hours; it is also highly toxic to insects and is effective both as a contact and as a stomach insecticide. Derris extract has been used as an arrow poison by the head hunters of Borneo and the Amazon River. Because of its reputation as a poison used by uncivilized tribes, the writer has made many experiments to determine its effect on domestic animals when administered by the mouth. The usefulness of rotenone as well as the extract of Derris as an insecticide would be seriously curtailed if it were markedly toxic to warm blooded animals; if, for instance, its action were similar to that of curare, strychnine, or similar drugs. The ideal insecticide is one that is toxic to insects but harmless to domestic animals. Both rotenone and Derris extract have been proved, conclusively, to be non-poisonous to all domestic animals in any reasonable dose. Remarkable effects have been noted when Derris extract, in three per cent dilution in talcum, is applied as an insecticide on dogs and cats for fleas, lice, and ticks. Rotenone and Derris extract are proved to be valuable new insecticides, in both agriculture and veterinary medicine. There is a large annual production of cultivated crops of Derris in Sumatra and the Malay States. The roots mature full toxicity in twenty months. An American market is sure to follow the fine results obtained with rotenone as well as the toxic extract of Derris. (Awthor’s abstract.) R. E. Tarsett: Control over mosquito breeding.—Different species of mos- quitoes differ greatly in habits, on which methods of control must be based. The fundamental point is the elimination of water, the breeding place, as far as possible, and the control of the remainder with oil. For the author’s purpose, mosquitoes are divided into four groups—malarial, domestic, wood- land, and temporary pool species. Of three species of Anopheles in the southeastern states only A. quadrimaculatus is important. It breeds only in quiet waters, feeds only after dark, has a flight range of about a mile, and appears to have a homing instinct in connection with egg laying. Like some 450 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 other species, it will enter a house through the chimney but can be kept out by hanging up a bag of naphthalene balls. The larvae feed on the surface of water and can be killed by a light dust of paris green (1 pound per acre). The principal domestic mosquitoes are Culex sp. and in the South Aedes aegyptt. ‘The former breed in any foul water, even in underground water containers which may be difficult to find or to reach; the latter only in man- made utensils in or around inhabited dwellings. The woodland species breed in open water and their habits vary greatly. The species breeding only in temporary pools lay their eggs in depressions where they remain dormant until rain. Development takes only a few days. Control measures in a given area usually do not extend far enough to reach the species of this group. In conclusion the speaker showed a film illustrating the life cycle of Aedes aegyptt. 762ND MEETING The 762nd meeting was held in the New Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club April 4, 1931 at 8:10 p.m., with Vice-President Jackson in the chair and 42 persons present. J. M. Aupricu stated that during a trip in the West last summer he found that in one locality bluebirds were nesting in about one-half the drop-front mail boxes. Program: H. 8. Davis: Progress in experimental fish culture.—In this country fish culture has been confined to the propagation of game fish and goldfish. At present emphasis is laid on the planting of older fish than formerly, in proper situations, and on making lakes more productive. Trout are grown for market in large numbers, and other fish may be later. There is an experimental station devoted to trout in Vermont, one devoted to pond culture in Iowa, and another in West Virginia devoted to both. Pictures were exhibited showing hatcheries and also work in the sloughs in the Upper Mississippi Refuge. Discussed by E. P. WALKER. C. R. Lucas: Commercial fish farming in the United States.—There are over 1,000 nurseries and hatcheries in the United States, 455 of which are governmental. The value of their product is over $2,000,000 annually. The first hatchery for trout was established in 1864, and there are now over 100 establishments; that for goldfish shortly after 1878 (now 44 establishments) ; that for pond fish in 1929 (now 11). H. B. Humpurey: The relation of trees and other vegetation to stream flow.— The speaker presented the results of observations on the rate of discharge of a small stream near his home at Cabin John, Maryland, made last autumn and subsequently. These observations show that there was an immediate relationship between sunlight and stream discharge, and that after the trees and other vegetation lost their foliage the discharge increased greatly. During 36 hours of continuous observation on 27-29 September, it was found that vegetation exerted an increasing pull on the water supply from about 10 a.m. until late afternoon, and that no water was running from about 3 p.m. to7 p.m. (Full report in Monthly Weather Review 58: 397-398. 1930.) In discussion, R. M. Linsey stated that owing to the small amount of fresh water in the Potomac, crabs had been common last summer nearly up to Alexandria. oct. 19, 1931 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 451 763RD MEETING The 763rd meeting was held in the New Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club April 18, 1931 at 8:10 p.m., with Vice-President StiuEs in the chair and 75 persons present. New member elected: Louise W. Cocke. Program: W. A. Horrman: A consideration of educational, especially bio- logical, progress in China, prefaced by some general remarks on the country and its people (illustrated)——The speaker described the general features of Chinese geography, language, and customs. Lingnan University (formerly Canton Christian College) is now 43 years old. It is more Chinese than the other fifteen Christian colleges and gives a typical Chinese education. It includes a university (with 300 pupils, including 50 girls), high school, primary, and kindergarten, with a total of 1100 pupils. Two thirds of the college staff of 75 are Chinese. The university has specialized in science and has the largest herbarium in China and large zoological collections. Like other Chinese universities, it is greatly hampered by the lack of published litera- ture. The scientific organizations of China were mentioned and discussed briefly, and an account given of the explorations of Lingnan University in Hainan. | M. K. Brapy: The Breeding of Salamanders (illustrated).—This paper will appear in full in the Novitates of the American Museum of Natural History. 764TH MEETING 52ND ANNUAL MEETING The 764th regular and 52nd annual meeting was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club May 2, 1931 at 8:15 p.m., with Vice-President Jackson in the chair and ten persons present. New member elected: S. W. GrISER. The minutes of the last annual meeting were read and approved. The reports of the Recording Secretary and Corresponding Secretary were read and ordered placed on file. The recommendation of the Council that the Treasurer’s report and the report of the Auditors be postponed until the first fall meeting was approved. Dr. OBERHOLSER for the Board of Trustees stated that the status of the Permanent Fund is unchanged. Mr. WALKER made an oral report for the Committee on Communications. Messrs H. C. Futter and W. H. BAuu were appointed Tellers, and the election took place, resulting as follows. President, H. H. T. Jackson: Vice-Presidents, C. E. CHampuiss, C. W. Stites, T. E. Snyper, H. C. FuLuer; Recording Secretary, S. F. Buak3; Corresponding Secretary, W. H. Wuits; Treasurer, F. C. Lincotn; Members of Council, W. R. Maxon, A. A. Doo.itrie, I. Horrman, E. P. WALKER, T. H. KEARNEY. S. F. Buaxe, Recording Secretary. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS Dr. Hitmar Opvm, of the Geological Survey of Denmark, Copenhagen, was in Washington during part of September studying Eocene and Upper Cretac- eous fossils at the National Museum and the organization and methods of the ground water division of the Geological Survey. Dr. ALEXANDER WETMORE has been elected a member of the California Academy of Sciences. 452 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 17 The first trial expedition of Aeroarctic in the arctic utilized the Graf Zep- pelin during a six-days’ flight of 8,000 miles leaving Berlin July 25 and re- turning July 30. The course was approximately Friedrichshafen, Lenin- grad, Archangel, Franz Josef Archipelago, Northern Land, Taymir, Novaya Zemlya, and return to Archangel and Friedrichshafen. LyunGpaut of Sweden, SmituH of the United States Coast Guard, and Lincoln Ellsworth representing the American Geographical Society took part in the magnetic observations which were in charge of LIUNGDAHL, the other two men assisting. There were 92 determinations of magnetic horizontal intensity obtained with the double- compass supplied by the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism and eight observations of declination with a Thomson compass. All reports indicate the trial expedition to have been an extremely satisfactory one and ECKENER has already assured the General Secretary of the Society of his desire to have the longer flight as originally proposed realized, if possible, next year. For its International Polar Year Expedition the Canadian Meteorological Service has already received a special grant to apply this year for the purchase of instruments and for the preliminary arrangements. The main magnetic station will be at Chesterfield Inlet. Four or five other stations will be estab- lished principally for meteorological work. The earth-current photographic registrations started at Tucson in March with the cooperation of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company, the Mountain States Telephone and Telegraph Company, the Coast and Geodetic Survey and the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism are continuing very satisfactorily. The first of the coded messages regarding auroral display and intensity which are now a regular part of the daily URsIGRAM was received from College, Alaska, August 15 as applying to the date August 13. The Nautilus of the Wilkins-Ellsworth Trans-Arctic Submarine Expedition left Bergen August 5 and arrived at Spitzbergen August 15. Owing to the lateness of the season it was not possible to cruise in the arctic ice longer than about three weeks. ‘The vessel returned to Spitzbergen and after repairs proceeded to Norway. In the scientific staff were B. VILLINGER who spent some three weeks with Dr. VeEninGc-MEINEsz in the study of the gravity ap- paratus, Dr. SvERDRUP of Bergen and F. M. Souxs of the Department of Ter- restrial Magnetism. Dr. and Mrs. Joun C. Merriam after spending the greater part of the summer in Europe returned to Quebec August 26 and proceeded directly to California. J. M. Stace of the British Meteorological Office came to Washington July 25 to visit the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism and discuss matters pertaining to the International Polar Year. He left July 31 to return home by way of Toronto. A letter written after he returned states that despite the unfavorable economic conditions he finds everyone is quite optimistic as re- gards the program of the International Polar Year. Dr. J. E. I. Carrns who has recently received his degree at Trinity College resumed his work in the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism, June 29. OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND _ AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS Tuesday, October 20 The Anthropological Society Wednesday, October 21 The Washington Society of Engineers The Medical Society Saturday, October 24 The Philosophical Society Wednesday, October 28 The Geological Society The Medical Society Saturday, October 31 The Biological Society Tuesday, November 3 The Botanical Society - Wednesday, November 4 The Washington Society of Engineers The Medical Society The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: N. A. Coss, Bureau of Plant Industry. Corresponding Secretary: Pau E. Hows, Bureau of Animal Industry. Recording Secretary: CHARLES THOM, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. CONTENTS ORIGINAL PAPERS Chemistry.—Further studies of kolm. R. C. Weuts and R. E, Stmvens......... 4 409 Paleontology.—Contributions to the paleontology of Peru, V. Nodosaria pozoensis W. Berry, n.sp. WiILtLARp Burry...... eee ee ei ee 415 Zoology.—New pocket gophers from Arizona and Utah. E. A. GOLDMAN........ 416 Mammalogy.—Akodon chacoensis, a new cricetine rodent from Argentina. H. HaBoLp SHAMEL. 5.2.05 00. hk ee ee, 427 Entomology.—New Jassinae, with notes on other species. P. W. Oman SO ts tage 430 Botany.—Two new grasses from Mexico. Jason R. SWALIEN:.. ooo niet OO Botany.—The juice sac of the orange with some observations on the plastids of — citrus. M. B. Matuack...... Mr Diva ous Rha Cae ieee .. 4387 Entomology.—A new ant from Porto Rico. Wm. M. MANN............... aes 440 PROCEEDINGS The AGADEMY.,..2... 2... 0. . 5 ack pe ee Lig aia oe es 441 The Srolorical Society. ... ict. Supe ee hes ok lee ee 445 Sctuntimc Nores anD NEWS. 6202 S40) eee a ee 451 This Journal is indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. ‘ia “ S NOVEMBER 4, 1931 No. 18 P re! . : =, , ; a f ye i | uf Ba 4 = a 4 frm, aN : i ¥ if ge ~~ 4 2 i» Fag Sd, | fees S | = One: * i" OF THE es 7 ! ~ a ee a WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS C. WrtHEe Cooke CHARLES DRECHSLER Hues L. DrrpeNn U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. Peters Haroitp Morrison PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GotpMAN G. W. Stross BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY AaGnes CHASE J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Roger C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Roya anp GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JoURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JoURNAL is issued semi- monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors: they should be clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. Illustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced by zine etchings being preferable. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Author's Reprints—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord- ance with the following schedule of prices: Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers BOQ Cae es aU cele We cers ee $2.00 100 $ .50 $ .55 $. 60 $1.10 2.50 150 .90 1.00 1.10 1.60 3.00 200 1 ag 1.50 1.60 2.10 3.50 250 1.65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the corner may be obtained at the following prices/ First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. The Fate of Subscription per vOlame te nes bt a oss ce ss oa ee ee $6.00* pemu-monthly numbers: 2. oi v erase ees oe ea fe es ne ee ee .25 Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15)..... .80 Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences” and addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C. Exchanges.—The JouRNAL does not exchange with other publications. _ Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made within thirty days after date of the following issue. *Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 21 NoveEeMBER 4, 1931 No. 18 POPULATION ANALYSIS.—The extinction of families—II.1. ALFRED J. Lorka, New York. Let Cy be the probability, at the moment of his birth, that a random male shall eventually have just N sons. Then, as has been shown by H. W. Watson,? and independently by J. F. Steffensen,? the prob- ability that the progeny of this male, in direct line of male descent, shall comprise just & males in the s-th generation is given by the coef- ficient of x* in the s-th iteration‘ f,(x) of f(x), where To carry. out the successive iterations of the function f(x), as re- quired according to this formula, for any considerable number of generations, would be an excessively laborious task in the general case in which the coefficients Cy may have any arbitrary values. Actually, the work is greatly simplified by the fact that the numerical coefficients Ci, C2, . . . .as computed from actual statistics (United States, white males 1920), are found to approximate the simple law of geometric progression. ‘This is shown in Fig. 1, in which the nu- merical values of the Cy are plotted on a logarithmic scale against the values of N on an arithmetic scale. It will be seen that for V = 1,2,3, . . . , the points thus plotted fall approximately on a straight line. It is true that for the higher members of the set, notably C, 1 Received September 23, 1931. For Part Isee this JoURNAL 21: 377-380 1931. 2 Published in Natural Inheritance by Francis Galton, 1889, p. 242. 3’ Matematisk Tidskrift 1930, p. 19. * The notation f, (x) and its designation as the s-th iteration of f(x) is to be understood as follows: file) = f@) falc) = ffi(z)} fale) = fifsa(e)} In counting generations, the original ancestor must be reckoned as the zero genera- tion, his sons as the first, and so on. 453 454 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 18 and Cy, there is a systematic departure from linearity. But these higher coefficients are relatively unimportant, since families comprising a large number of sons are rare. Accordingly a straight line was fitted by the method of least squares to the logarithms of the values of C,, Cy, . . .determined by the process described in Part I (this JouRNAL, October 4, 1931, p. 377) with the results shown in Fig. 1 1.0000 ee Le CS Coe NG BUS ema eee i A ) a N he IN a a i ee a ee a ee a a [ML LL ea “lOO es eee ee a Ee Po Pa” en ns na nen a i i ed i Ce Mo ‘i et a a i i c ee eee * oo | | —————_————— is Seen BEG Pn Re I ee ee Se) ° i i i a ei ie gore eae —————— ey Rat a OR eT a Ew i aa eee | .0001 om 2 3 4 fe 6 i 8 9 10 Number of Sons (W) Figure 1. Probability P (1, N) that a new-born male shall have N male descendents (sons) in the first generation. Based on statistics for white males, U.S., 1920. and Table 1 in which the ‘‘smoothed”’ values for Ci, C, . . . Cio are those given by the least square fit Cy = .4099 x (.5586)” (2) It should be noted that C, is not included among the series of coef- ficients defined by (2). If it had been included, the set of coefficients Nov. 4, 1931 LOTKA: EXTINCTION OF FAMILIES 455 10 would in general fail to satisfy the condition Y Cy = 1. Accordingly 1 Cy was determined separately, by the relation 10 Ce tas (3)5 1 alter the “‘smoothed”’ values of Ci, C2 . . . Cio had been deter- mined as indicated above. TABLE 1. VauuEs oF COEFFICIENTS Cy N Crude Smoothed@ 0 .4981 .4828 1 .2103 2289 2 .1270 .1279 3 .0730 .0714 4 .0418 .0399 5 .0241 .0233 6 .0132 .0125 ds .0069 .6070 8 .0035 .0039 9 .0015 .0022 10 .0005 .0012 2 Least squares straight line fit to logarithms of Ci,C2, . . . Cio, Cy = .4099 X (.5586)¥ The function f(x), using the smoothed values of the coefficients Cy, is of the form of a constant term plus a geometric series. It can, ac- cordingly be written in finite form .40986 [1 — (.558602)"4] (4) (1 — .55860z) In actually carrying out this iteration, the labor can be greatly reduced, with but little loss in accuracy,® if the geometric series is summed to infinity, instead of stopping at the term in C1». The equa- tion (4) then reduces to f(z) = .07294 + 4828 — .040742 _ 4828 — .04074x 5 Hz) Wea o 5 In equation (3) it does not very greatly influence the result whether we carry the summation to Cy or to Cw, the former alternative giving Cy = .4828, the latter Cy = 4813, while the unsmoothed data give Co = .4981. 6 The retention of the higher terms implies that we are including a contingent of very large families. But the coefficients Cy become so small, i.e., the theoretically very large families are so rare, that the error introduced is small. 456 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 18 With the function f(z) thus expressed in finite form, the determina- tion of successive iterations 1s now a matter of simple arithmetic, the results being obtained primarily in finite form, and being then expanded in series in order to determine the required coefficient of x*. The results thus obtained are shown in Table 2 and in Fig. 2. This latter has been drawn as a three-dimensional model and shows on a vertical logarithmic scale the probability P(s,N) that the s-th genera- tion shall comprise just NV sons, the corresponding values of s and N being read on arithmetic scales running respectively from left to right and from the back face forward out of the plane of the paper. The values of this probability for N = 0 and for successive generations fall on a separate curve shown near the top on the rear face of the dia- TABLE 2. Tut Propasiuity P (s.V) ppr 1,000 rHat a NEwBorn MALE SHALL HAVE N MALE DESCENDANTS IN THE 8-TH GENERATION 482 80/517 .20)228 . 95/127 .89) 71.44) 39.91) 22.29) 12.45) 6.95} 3.88) 2.17| 1.21 634. 16/365 .84) 98.29) 72.12) 52.92) 38.83) 28.49} 20.90} 15.33) 11.25) 8.25) 6.05 707 .65|292 .35) 53.97) 44.19} 36.18) 29.62) 24.25) 19.85} 16.25) 13.30) 10.89) 8.92 750. 74/249 .26) 33.80) 29.36) 25.50) 22.15) 19.24) 16.71) 14.51] 12.60] 10.94) 9.50 778 .83/221.17| 22.95) 20.68] 18.63) 16.79) 15.13) 13.63] 12.28] 11.07; 9.97) 8.98 798 .45)201 .55) 16.48) 15.22) 14.06} 12.99) 12.00) 11.09) 10.24) 9.46) 8.74) 8.07 812.80)187.20) 12.29} 11.56} 10.87) 10.22) 9.61) 9.04) 8.50) 7.99) 7.51) 7.06 823 .68/176.32} 9.46) 9.01) 8.59} 8.19| 7.80) 7.43) 7.08} 6.75) 6.43) 6.13 832.13/167.87; 7.41) 7.13) 6.86, 6.60) 6.35) 6.11) 5.88) 5.66) 5.45) 5.25 838 .81/161.19) 5.90) 5.73) 5.56) 5.40) 5.24) 5.08} 4.93) 4.78) 4.64) 4.50 COMO ONO rPEwWNH FE — gram. The values of the probability P(s,N) for all other values of s and WN fall on a family of straight lines which themselves fall on a ruled surface, the outstanding feature of the diagram. Graphic iteration of the function f(x). It is worth noting that the operation of constructing successive iterations of f(z) is very easily carried out graphically, as follows: In the diagram, Fig. 3, the lowermost curve represents the function y = f(x) to be iterated. Draw the line OP at 45 degrees to the co- ordinate axes. Take any point Q on the given curve. From Q draw a perpendicular QR, and a horizontal QS meeting OP in 8. From S draw a perpendicular ST meeting the curve in T. From T draw a horizontal TU meeting QR in U. Then U isa point on the (second) iteration f {f(x)} = f.(x). Point by point the graph of f.(z) can thus Noy. 4, 1931 LOTKA: EXTINCTION OF FAMILIES 457 be constructed, and from it, by a repetition of the process, the graph of f3(z) and so on. Or, in view of the relation te \fo(a)} = f.(2) (6) the fourth iteration can be obtained directly from the second, the eighth from the fourth and so on. Generation (.s) 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1.0000 ee a eae See) (eae eal De Peeeeredl ess res ee PO acne sents eee eae) ere) aa a eer remy | Plane of zero mele progeny rT ct Probability of N Males in S4 Generation Generation (s) Figure 2. Probability P (s, N) that a new-born male shall have N male descendents in the s-th generation. Based on statistics for white males, U.S., 1920. The process is very simple and easily carried out. It must be remembered, however, that we require not merely the graphs of these iterated functions, but the coefficients of the terms in their expansion in power series. Unfortunately, for the determination of these coef- ficients with any satisfactory degree of accuracy the graphs are not adequate. They do, however, bring out clearly certain points of in- 458 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 18 terest. So, for example, it will be seen that the graphs for all the ite- rated functions pass through the points corresponding to the roots of the equation x = f(x) (7) * fied =Co+ Cx +C,x?+ + C,x!° Where Cy = PR) at birth, that given male shall have Just N sons In the example here figured, i 40986[1-(55860x)"] fits + 07294 + Tr seecox] Note : The intercept, on the y axis, of the curve y = fs(x) gives the probabrhe of extinction of ihetiale line of eteent vane he first S lyenerations co) ° a ig 3 4 5 G 7 8 i) 1.0 Figure 3. Iterations of y = fi(z)* and illustration of the graphic method of construc- tion. these roots being common also to the equation for all values of s. Another point of interest to note is that the successive iterated curves ultimately approach a curve consisting of two straight lines forming a right angle. nov. 4, 1931 COOPER: AUTHORSHIP OF ‘‘PRELIMINARY NOTICE” 459 Roots of equation (7). In Part 1 of this article the root, inferior to unity, of (7) was found to be .8797 on the basis of the original unsmooth values of the coefficients Cy. This required solving by the method of successive approximations an equation of tenth degree, with terms of all degrees from the first to the tenth actually present. It is to be noted that when the smoothed values of the coefficients Cy are employed, the solution of (7) is greatly simplified. The first approximation is found very easily by the quadratic equation 48280 — .04074x | (9) 1 — .55860x 8724 (10) The further approximations are then very easily computed with re- tention of the term in x" in the expression (4) for f(x), since there is always only one term of higher than second degree present. ‘There is thus found, ultimately, for the required root, f= (8715 (11) which, as will be seen, does not differ very greatly from the value .8797 obtained with use of the unsmoothed coefficients Cy. In fact, the errors of observation in the statistics underlying the values of Cy are probably greater than the difference between the crude and the unsmoothed values of these coefficients, and accordingly nosignificance can be attached to the difference by less than one unit in the second decimal between the values .880 and .872 obtained as above by the use of the crude and of the smoothed coefficients respectively. PALEONTOLOGY .—Concerning the authorship of the “Preliminary notice of the lamellibranch shells of the upper Helderberg, Hamilton and Chemung groups, etc., Part 2’! G. A. Coopmr, U. 8. Na- tional Museum (Communicated by J. B. REESIDE, JR.). During the course of bibliographic studies of the Devonian Pelecypoda in connection with a projected bibliography of the Devonian inverte- brates under the direction of Dr. E. M. Kindle of the Canadian Geo- logical Survey the writer has had to refer to a paper reminiscent of the turbulent days at Albany in the Hall régime when the great Pale- 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received September 24, 1931. 460 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 18 ontology of New York was being conceived. The following remarks relate to the Preliminary notice of the lamellibranchiate shells of the upper Helderberg, Hamilton and Chemung groups, with others from the Waverly sandstones, Part 2, published anonymously in 1869 and 1870. Although many writers have accredited the publication to James Hall, evidence points strongly towards a joint authorship with R. P. Whit- field. This claim of Whitfield to joint authorship with Hall has ap- parently been recognized by a few writers only. In the interest of bibliographic stability it is the writer’s purpose to settle permanently the question of authorship of the preliminary notice, No. 2, dates of genera and species described therein, and the status of the two generic names, Modioconcha and Nyassa. The publication under discussion appeared in two forms, the first an 80-page edition distributed in December 1869 and the other an enlarged edition of 97 pages, published one month later, January 1870. Hall? explains the circumstances surrounding the distribution and com- position of the pamphlets: In 1869 the writer printed and published ‘Preliminary Notice No. 2, of the Fossil Lamellibranchiate Shells of the Upper Helderberg, Hamilton, Portage and Chemung groups,” etc., to the number of eighty pages, issued in December of that year. One hundred copies in this form were distributed. In January following the printing was resumed, and sixteen additional pages were printed. The pamphlet thus augmented, with a supplementary page stating the fact that the descriptions of other species were in type, was distributed to the public. Hall states further that the paper was to have appeared in the 23rd Annual Report of the New York State Cabinet of Natural History “with a preparatory |sic] note making due acknowledgements for sources of aid and information . .? The Prehminang noice: No. 2 did not appear in the 23rd Annual Report and by way of ex- planation Hall adds, “‘this report (23) [rd Annual Report] was, however, not published till 1872. In the meantime the burning of the State printing establishment destroyed the material in the hands of the printer (leaving some proof-sheets only in the hands of the author).”’ In the same preface he gives the reason for the appearance of prelvmi- nary notice, No. 2 in advance of No. 1 as follows: “‘... because the investigations upon the genera there included in No. 2 were farther advanced; while comparatively little had been done in arranging the 2 James Hatyu. Preliminary notice of the lamellibranchiate shells, etc., Part 1. Ann. Rept. N. Y. St. Mus. 35: 215, 216. 1884. Nov. 4, 1931 cOoOPER: AUTHORSHIP OF ‘‘PRELIMINARY NOTICH’’ 461 groups preceding those described.” Referring to the preliminary no- tice, No. 2 Hall makes the statement that he ‘‘was very efficiently aided by Mr. R. P. Whitfield, then an assistant in the Museum, to whom he expresses his obligations.”’ After the distribution of the 80-page edition, the pamphlet was noticed in the American Journal of Science for March, 1870? in which the authorship was accredited to James Hall. The publication of the paper was also recorded in the Proceedings of the American As- sociation for Advancement of Science* and likewise attributed to Hall. The Neues Jahrbuch® in noticing the second edition, accredited the paper to James Hall. The basis of Hall’s title to sole authorship of the paper appears to rest on the presence of a printed slip inside the cover of the 97-page edition’ which bears the words ‘““With Compliments of James Hall;”’ the presence of the name Hall inserted after two of the generic names’ used in the pamphlet for the first time; the use of the first person sin- gular in some of the descriptions;’ his many references in later litera- ture® to the genera proposed in the preliminary notice, No. 2 as his own; and the fact that some bibliographers!® have accredited this anonymous paper to Hall on the above superficial evidence. In the course of his bibliographic studies the writer came upon the late Dr. C. D. Walcott’s copy of the 97-page edition which bears valu- able notes dealing with the authorship of the pamphlet. Finding Wal- cott’s notes of such great importance the idea suggested itself that additional copies owned by other paleontologists might likewise yield valuable information. Accordingly requests were sent to several 8 Page 276. * Proc. Amer. Asso. Adv. Sci. 18: 282. 1869. > Neues Jahrb. fiir Min., Geol. & Pal. 1871, p. 988. ® Recently the writer purchased an unused copy of the 97-page edition from the University of Chicago which shows clearly the method used by Hall in distributing this edition of the paper in question. Inside the cover is pasted a slip bearing the following printed words: ‘‘With compliments of James Hall, N. Y. State Museum Natural History, Albany, N. Y., U. 8. A.” This was a common method of distribution of New York State Museum publications. The writer does not know if such a slip appeared with the 80-page edition since the copies seen were without covers. James D. Dana’s copy bore ‘‘With the respects of James Hall” in Hall’s writing. These ‘‘compliments’’ and ‘‘respects’’ of James Hall do not necessarily imply authorship by Hall, as was evidently assumed by the American Journal of Science for March, 1870. ) 7 Nyassa, p. 28; Pholadella, p. 63. § See under Modioconcha, p. 27; also pages 34, 44, and 62. * Pal.N.Y.V, Lam. 1 & II, 1884 & 1885, resp. 108. A. Miuuter. North American Geology and Paleontology, II, 1889; ScupDER. Nomenclator zoologicus, U.S. Nat. Muss. Bull.19. 1882. 462 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 18 universities and museums. Dr. Charles Schuchert of Yale University loaned his personal copy of the 97-page edition and James Dwight Dana’s copy of the 80-page edition, both of which carried valuable notes. Through Dr. R. Ruedemann the New York State Museum loaned Dr. John M. Clarke’s copy of the 97-page edition. The writer extends his thanks to Drs. Schuchert and Ruedemann and the New York State Museum for their kindness. Whitfield’s first printed claims known to the writer appear in the Geology of Wisconsin, Part III, Paleontology, 1882, pp. 335-337, and the Annals of the New York Academy of Science, volume II, no. 8, 1882, pp. 201, 216, 233, and 244. In these reports Whitfield cites the Preliminary notice, No. 2 giving Hall and Whitfield as authors and states that the pamphlet was “distributed without author’s name.” In his faunal lists Whitfield cites a species!! described in the Preliminary notice, No. 2 as “H. & W.” Whitfield’s claim was brought to public attention prior to the pub- lication of the Geology of Wisconsin, Part III, Paleontology by C. A. White” who cites the pamphlet as ‘Anon [Hall and Whitfield]’”’ and in addition makes the following remarks: This memoir was noticed in the Am. Journ. Sci., vol. xlix, 2d series, p. 276, and attributed to James Hall, although the work itself bears the name of no author. It does not appear that Prof. Hall has anywhere claimed sole author- ship; but, on the contrary, Prof. Whitfield has claimed the authorship to be jointly with Prof. Hall and himself. See Ann. Rep. Wisconsin Geol. Surv. 1878, p. 51, and Paleontology of Wisconsin (now in press), pp. 136, 137, and 133.0 ee White’s reference to Whitfield’s claim in the Annual Report of the Wisconsin Geological Survey for 1878 and the Paleontology of Wiscon- sin have been checked by the writer. The first reference is evidently an error by White since Whitfield’s claim does not occur in this report, nor in the reports for 1877 and 1879. In the Geology of Wisconsin, Part III, Paleontology, Whitfield’s indications of joint authorship with Hall appear on pages 335-337, not the pages cited by White. It is possible that Whitfield informed White of his intention to pub- lish his claims to joint authorship with Hall, or White may have seen the manuscript or proof-sheets of the Annual Report for 1878 above | cited but the claim never appeared because of deletion or some other reason. Whitfield continued these claims in later publications® and 1 Geol. Wis. 1: 369. 1883. 12 Bull. U.S. Geol. & Geog. Surv. Terr. 5 (1): 144. 1879. 13 Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 5: 523, 545, 559, 561, 604, 614. 1891; 12 (8): 140, 185, 186; Geol. Ohio 7: 422, 437, 438, 440, 451, 453,494. 1893. Nov. 4, 1931 COOPER: AUTHORSHIP OF ‘‘PRELIMINARY NOTICE”’ 463 the fact that they were ignored by so many writers is doubtless because the case was never thoroughly investigated. There are certain points of evidence in the paper which strongly substantiate Whitfield’s claim to joint authorship with Hall. There is an occasional use of the word ‘‘we,” and the appearance of Whit- field’s initials on pages 84, 91, and 93. These Hall evidently failed to delete during the apparently hurried proof-reading of that part of the paper. To this oversight may be added another of Hall’s which appears in the legend to plate 14, figure 7, of the 23rd Annual Report of the New York State Cabinet of Natural History. In this legend the species, Microdon tenuistriatus, described as a new species in the Preliminary notice, No. 2, page 32, is cited under the authorship of “H. & W.’’, the initials clearly indicating Hall and Whitfield. In support of Whitfield’s claim also is the oral statement of Dr. Edwin Kirk of the United States Geological Survey who says that, in conver- sations with Whitfield, the former associate of Hall declared that he (Whitfield) wrote the Preliminary notice, No. 2 and was to have received joint authorship with Hall. Still more conclusive than the evidence cited above is that contained in a note written by Dr. C. D. Walcott on the first page of his copy of the sconnd edition. This copy, presented to Walcott by Hall, bears the notation ‘‘With compliments of James Hall’ in Hall’s hand writing. Walcott, evidently aware of Whitfield’s claim, asked Hall to write his name as author if he claimed sole authorship to the pam- phlet, but Hall refused to sign his name (see fig. 1). Hall’s refusal to assume sole authorship of the Preliminary notice, No. 2 places him in the peculiar position of substantiating Whitfield’s claim. James Dwight Dana’s copy of the 80-page edition also bears evidence, for, in his own handwriting, Dana attributes the authorship to Hall and Whitfield. The fact that Hall and Whitfield’s names are associated together in other papers prepared at this time shows that an agreement of joint authorship with Whitfield was not entirely distasteful to Hall. Three of these papers" actually appear in the 23rd Annual Report of the State 44 Whitfield calls attention to the appearance of his initials in the Preliminary notice, No. 2in the Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 12 (8): 140. 1899. 15 Descriptions of new species of fossils from the Devonian rocks of Iowa, pp. 223-289; Notice of three new species of fossil shells from the Devonian of Ohio, pp. 240, 241; Notice of two new species of fossil shells from the Potsdam sandstone of New York, pp. 241, 242. The last two papers are without an author’s name but are included under article (F) along with the first. The legends to plates 8-12 accompanying these articles attribute all of the species to Hall and Whitfield. 464 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 18 Y, A A——~_2 of, Ss SS ~\S ee Sie PRELIMINARY NOTICE Sod OF THE LAMELLIBRANCHIATE SHELLS OF THE UPPER N HELDERBERG, HAMILTON AND CHEMUNG GROUPS, WITH OTHERS FROM THE WAVERLY SANDSTONES. [ Preparatory for the Paleontology of New-York.] SG Parr 2. GENUS MODIOLA (Lamarck). the Jvc isl MopI0oLA PRECEDENS (nN. s.). Sex elongate-ovate, very oblique,,a little more than twice as long as wide. Valves moderately ventricose : beaks small, appressed ; cardinal line short, less than half the length of the Gui slightly \ alate and gompaeved at the extremity; postero- “pen! border broadly rounded; anterior end short, narrow and laterally com- pressed ; byssal iat slightly sinuate. Surrace marked by fine concentric lines, and by fine radiating wrinkled striae which diverge along the median line and curve toward the opposite margins of the shell. | Formation and locality. In a band of conglomerate and sandstone of the Chemung group, south of Olean, Alleghany county, N.Y. ROL og Boe of BOs, Oe Of Ney a7 oe MopIoLa METELLA (12. s.). Ls Suetx elongate-ovate, greatest breadth nearer the anterior end; pos- terior and antero-basal margins subparallel : beaks small, laterally - compressed. Valves evenly ventricose : cardinal line a little more than one-third the length of the shell, slightly arcuate; anterior end projecting but little beyond the Beaks, inflated and rounded . at the margin; postero-basal extremity hare ply rounded. Surrace smooth, or indistinctly marked by concentric lines or undu- 9 lations of growth. ed ra he ofl. a) ag r4 IN GS This species differs from the last in the absence of radiating strive, and aw very materially in the form of the shell, which attains a larger size, so ‘ far as observed. The general features of this shell are similar to those ' of Mytilus (Mytilarca) occidentalis (Wire & WuHitFiEtp) from the * sandstones of Burlington (Iowa); but it is more regularly ventricose, Sie « and not so frequently marked by concentric undulations, while the hinge line is more oblique +o the axis of the shell. These featur es will serve to State Cab. Nat. Hist., December, 1869. 1 x Figurel. Photographic copy of page 1 of Dr. C. D. Walcott’s copy of the Preliminary notice, No. 2 nov. 4, 1931 COOPER: AUTHORSHIP OF “PRELIMINARY NOTICE” 465 Cabinet of Natural History, the publication that was to have con- tained the Preliminary notice, No. 2. The question of bibliographic stability rather than of justice to Whitfield has impelled the writer to revive this claim of Whitfield’s to joint authorship in the Preliminary notice, No. 2. Although some writers have credited Hall with sole authorship, White, Dana, Walcott, and Etheridge considered it a joint publication of Hall and Whitfield. The pamphlet as distributed from the New York State Museum was an anonymous paper and as such has no standing; its contents could be ignored and all of the genera and species contained therein dated from 1883 when the Palaeontology of New York, vol. V, part 1, Lamelli- branchiata, Plates and Legends appeared. ‘This however, would lead to a great deal of confusion. It would seem preferable to affix to the anonymous paper the same of the senior author, who was directing the researches embraced by the pamphlet, and the name of the Junior author who obviously had a large share in its preparation. It is rec- ommended therefore, as a move towards stability, that subsequent bibliographers recognize the authors of the Preliminary notice, No. 2 as Hall and Whitfield. This procedure will be followed in the forth- coming bibliography of Devonian invertebrates. The establishment of authorship is not the sole problem connected with the Preliminary notice, No. 2; there are, among other points, the questions of dates for genera and species and the status of certain genera and species. The question of dates arises from the fact that there were two editions of the pamphlet, the second edition containing 17 pages more than the first. The genera and species in the first, or 80-page edition, take the date December 1869, and those described on pages 81—96 of the second or 97-page edition date from January 1870. On page 97 several new species of Schizodus and Lunulacardium, a new genus Mytilops, and a new subgenus of Pinna, Palaeopinna, are mentioned but are unaccompanied by descriptions; these are therefore nomina nuda and have no standing. Thespecies and genera” mentioned on this page are properly indicated in Palaeontology of New York, volume V, Part 1, Lamellibranchiata (plates and legends), 1883 and must 16R. Jun. ETHERIDGE. Rec. Austral. Mus. 11 (10): 228. 1917. Cites Modiomorpha correctly as Hall and Whitfield, 1869. . 17 Cardiola ventricosa, nom. nud., in the Preliminary notice, No. 2 is not mentioned in Pal. N. Y. 5, pt. 1, Lam. (Plates and legends) 1883, but appears in Pal. N. Y. 5, pt. 1, Lam. 2, 1885, p. 417, pl. 69, figs.1,2. In Pal. N. Y. 5, pt. 1, Lam. (Plates and legends), 1883, pl. 69, figs. 1, 2, the very same figures bear the name Cardiola? elevata. Evidently the latter name has priority. 466 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 18 date from the publication of that volume. The species Schizodus quadrangularis (n. s.), page 96, also must stand as a nomen nudum be- cause its description is incomplete. This species is adequately indi- cated in the “Plates and legends” 1883. | It will be of interest to mention several miscellaneous points, as follows: a). Although the name Cimitaria is used in the Preliminary notice, No. 2 for the first time, it is not designated as a new genus, probably due to oversight. b). Whitfield’s claim that Hall’s name was inserted after Pholadella!’ without his knowledge can not be recognized. ““Pholadella (Hall n. g.)”’ must stand as written, for, once it is agreed that the paper is a joint product of Hall and Whitfield, it must be accepted as published. Pholadella is to be cited, therefore, as “‘Phola- della Hall 1869, in Hall and Whitfield 1869.’ c). Under the heading “Genus Schizodus King,’ the synonyms of the genus are given, and are followed by the name ‘‘Curtonotus’’ in small capitals. It is not clear if Curtonotus, a Schizodus-like genus created by Salter, is to be regarded as a subgenus of Schizodus because it appears in no other place and furthermore all the species are listed as Schizodus. d). The famil- iar names Palaeoneilo and Palaeanatina are spelled in this paper ‘“Palaeaneilo” and “Palanatina,”’ probably an example of inadequate proofreading, of which there are many more obvious ones throughout the pamphlet. The current spelling is correct and will be continued. The case of Modioconcha versus Nyassa is interesting because the two genera rest on the same genotype. Modioconcha has never been favored by use but Nyassa on the other hand, has been in general use since it was first proposed. On page 27 of the Preliminary notice, No. 2 remarks on several genera are concluded with a paragraph in which the subgeneric name Modioconcha is proposed for a pelecypod thought by the ‘‘authors” to have a close relationship to Modvolopsis. The type of the proposed subgenus is given as Nyassa arguta. Follow- ing the characterization of the new subgenus Modtzoconcha, is the heading ‘‘Genus Modiolopsis’”’ with the subheading ‘“‘Subgenus Nyassa (Hall).” These headings are followed by descriptions of four species of Nyassa, the first species being NV. arguta. Although this is the first use of the word Nyassa, except for its mention as the genotype of Modvoconcha referred to above, there is no description of the subgenus Nyassa and no type is designated. However it is clear that the two genera are synonyms, Modtoconcha having N. arguta as type, and Nyassa having N. arguta as its first species. 18 Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 2 (8): 233. 1882;5: 609. 1891; Geol. Ohio 7: 494. 1893. ¢ Nov. 4, 1931 COOPER: AUTHORSHIP OF ‘‘PRELIMINARY NOTICE”’ 467 Later, in 1882, Whitfield published the first characterization of the genus (subgenus) Nyassa and stated that the generic description had been omitted from the Preliminary notice, No. 2.18 Whitfield selected N. arguta as the genotype. Since Modioconcha and Nyassa are to be regarded as having been proposed simultaneously the life of either depends on the first reviser who has the privilege of selecting one of these two genera.?° Whitfield, as first reviser, selected Nyassa and named JN. arguta as the type of the genus, and ignored the obscure Modioconcha. Further the writer holds that it is desirable to retain Nyassa as a genus in preference to Modioconcha because the latter has been totally ignored. Scudder” does not list Modioconcha, and Hall in the final copies of the Paleontology of New York, volume V, Lamelli- branchiata, recognizes the name Nyassa only. The single mention of Modioconcha known to the writer in the literature subsequent to 1870 is by Beushausen” who lists the name in his synonymy of Nyassa but fails to use it. On this basis then Modioconcha Hall and Whitfield becomes a synonym of Nyassa Hall and Whitfield 1869. In the Pre- luminary notice, No. 2 the name “‘(Hall)’’ is inserted after Nyassa on page 28 but is not followed by the usual ‘‘n. g.’”. For this reason it is suggested that Whitfield’s name accompany Hall’s as author of the genus. 19 Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci. 2 (8): 216, 244;5: 558, 1891; Geol. OhioT: 451. 20 See Article 28, International rules of zoological nomenclature, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash- ington 39: 82. 21 Scudder. Nomanclator zoologicus. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 19: 1882. 22 Abhandl. konigl. preuss. geol. Landesanst., n. f., Heft 17, p. 29, 1895. 468 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 18 ZOOLOGY .—On the status of the nemic genera Aphelenchus Bastain, Pathoaphelenchus Cobb, Paraphelenchus Muicoletzky, Parasita- phelenchus Fuchs, Isonchus Cobb and Seinura Fuchs.! G. STEINER, Bureau of Plant Industry. About a year ago, while examining diseased gladiolus corms from New Egypt, New Jersey, and again in looking over some diseased Irish potatoes from South Africa, nemas were found closely resembling that described by Cobb in 1913 as [sonchus radicicolus. In the gladiolus corms a single such male was seen, together with numerous females, while many males were found in the potatoes. These males were specifically identical with the associated females,—which were, beyond doubt, Aphelenchus avenae. A detailed study supports this view in every way. The male of Aphelenchus avenae is thus identified as Isonchus of Cobb. In 1927 Goodey called attention to the close re- semblance of the head end of [sonchus radicicolus to that of the female Aphelenchus avenae. The proposal by Cobb of a new genus mainly on the basis of the male characters is good evidence that the male of A. avenae is utterly different from the males hitherto assigned to Aphelenchus. This difference is so great that the two types cannot reasonably be placed in a single genus. Seemingly, it would be most logical to retain Isonchus as the generic name for what has been called Aphelenchus avenae. Unfortunately the rules of nomenclature pre- vent this. According to Stiles and Hassal (1905), Bastian through correspondence made avenae the type of Aphelenchus. Nevertheless the portion of the genus which is thought of by every nematologist when the generic name is used is that which includes A. parietinus, A. fragariae, A. olesistus, A. ritzema-bosi, etc., all quite different from avenae. The usual generic diagnosis was chiefly shaped after these species, since males were known for these species only. ‘The absence of a bursa in the male, a character which is general in all these forms, was always considered one of the main generic features, especially in contrast with Tylenchus. Even Bastian himself does this by de- fault. However, the generic name Aphelenchus Bastian, accord- ing to the rules of nomenclature, must be connected permanently with A. avenae, because this form was selected by Bastian as the type of the genus. This makes the reclassification of the former genus more complex. It was an unfortunate choice to designate this species, of which the male was unknown at the time, as the type, when another 1 Received September 30, 1931. nov. 4, 1931 STEINER: ON STATUS OF NEMIC GENERA 469 species like A. partetinus, with both sexes known, could have been designated. This is even more deplorable because, as before men- tioned, one of the main generic characters—the absence of a bursa— was based on the male of A. parietinus. It is evident that the whole classification of what has been called Aphelenchus must be revised, even though the genus has included a number of economically important parasitic species recorded in an extensive literature, so that the renaming must create confusion. Under the rules of zoological nomenclature, Aphelenchus avenae Bastian remains as the type species of the genus Aphelenchus. Aphel- enchus must be synonymized with the genus Isonchus Cobb. Thus the forms placed in the genera Aphelenchus, Isonchus and Paraphelenchus now fall as follows: 1. Aphelenchus, with four or, more probably, two species, namely: A. avenae, A. agricola de Man (if it is different from avenae), A. radicico- lus-[sonchus radicicolus (if it is different from avenae) and A. Cylindri- caudatus Cobb (Steiner 1926). Diagnosis: Aphelenchus, nemas resembling Tylenchus but differing in the following characters; spear without basal swellings (knots); posterior portion of oesophagus not distinctly set off from the intestine, which apparently begins just- behind the middle bulb; the latter well developed, oval, with valvulae; dorsal salivary gland emptying in front of, subventral behind, these valvulae. Female with a more or less reduced posterior branch of the uterus; male with a gubernaculum and a well developed bursa with several bursal ribs. Type: A. avenae Bastian 1865. 2. Pathoaphelenchus (Cobb), (Syn. Parasitaphelenchus Fuchs) pro- posed in 1928 as asubgenus of the formerAphelenchus, to include forms like A. parietinus ete., which do not have a bluntly rounded, but conical or even filiform tail end. It is proposed to give Pathoaphelenchus generic standing and to include in it the forms Cobb placed in his sub- genus. Diagnosis: Pathoaphelenchus, nemas similar to Aphelenchus but the males without bursa and without a gubernaculum. Spear mostly with basal swell- ings (knots) or furcated at its proximal end. Type: P. parzetinus Bastian. The subgeneric division proposed by Cobb would be retained: subgen. Pathoaphelenchus with the spear with basal swellings (knots), not furcated posteriorly. Type: P. parietinus (Bastian) 1865. subgen. Schistonchus with the spear fureated posteriorly. Type: S. caprifict (Gasparrini) Cobb 1928. subgen. Seinura (Fuchs) emend with the spear as in subgenus Patho- aphelenchus but without basal swellings or knots. Type: S. malz Fuchs. 470 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 18 This last subgenus was proposed as a new genus by Gilbert Fuchs in 1931, and characterized as resembling Aphelenchus but having a spear without basal swellings or knots and an elongated tail. Con- sidering that an earlier described Pathoaphelenchus (P.demani) has also an elongated tail, the only remaining differentiating character would be the absence of swellings or knots on the spear. This, however, we cannot consider as of generic importance, and propose Seinura as of subgeneric standing. Recently Fuchs created the genus Parasitaphelenchus to include a large number of new species. Unfortunately he gives no diagnosis. The genus as he describes it cannot be distinguished from Patho- aphelenchus. It is therefore thought best to consider it synonymous with the latter. Possibly later some of the forms he referred to it may be placed to advantage in one or several new genera, their generic diagnosis being formulated anew. But some at least of the new species of Fuchs would have to remain with Pathoaphelenchus, its generic diagnosis applying fully to them. This matter is more fully discussed in a recent paper (Steiner, in press). 3. Paraphelenchus Micoletzky. ‘This is a good genus. Its stand- ing and the forms belonging to it are discussed in another paper (Steiner and Cassidy, in press). Diagnosis: Paraphelenchus, nemas resembling Aphelenchus but with a posterior (post-bulbar) oesophageal portion, which is distinctly set off from the intestine; males with a gubernaculum but without a bursa, their tail being short, more or less obtuse and having a number of irregularly arranged papillae. Type: P. pseudoparietinus Micoletzky 1922. APHELENCHUS AVENAE Bastian Syn.: Aphelenchus agricola de Man, 1885 This species has been discussed by a number of authors. Goodey (1927, 1928 and 1929) added perhaps most to our knowledge, and first called attention to its close resemblance to Jsonchus radicicolus, which may prove to be synonymous. As far as can be seen at present, they differ in no way. The male of A. cylindricaudatus (syn. Tylenchus cylindricaudatus) can hardly also be distinguished from it; here, how- ever, the female exhibits some differentiating characters. It has long been an open question as to the synonymy of A. avenae and A. agricola. The only marked difference between the two species is the striation of the lateral fields described for A. agricola but not mentioned by Bastian for A. avenae. However, Bastian may well nov. 4, 1931 STEINER: ON STATUS OF NEMIC GENERA 471 have overlooked them. In fixed material it is often difficult, even impossible, to observe them, although they are rather plain in all living specimens. This is true too for the caudal papillae as described by de Man for the female tail of A. agricola. Sometimes they are very faint or are not seen at all. A. avenae seems to be a very polyphagous species since it has been discovered on a great variety of plants. From January to July 1931 it was seen by the writer as follows: In Irish potatoes from South Africa (2) 6c 6c c?¢ cc England (4) GE, + 166 73 ‘“ Canada (7) bag hae ‘6 ‘c Argentina éc a9 cc a9 Denmark cé cs ce cc Finland a4 ce ce ia§ Egypt “sweet ‘“ ‘“f New Jersey “Carrot 4, Brazil te dees ‘ South Africa a9 i 6c Germany ‘* onion ‘* Greece OC abe 66 Egypt (73 ce 6c Italy a4 igs ag Germany ‘* narcissus ‘Virginia (2) és f ‘ New Jersey (2) ty 4 ‘* New York ss © ‘‘ Mississippi i ‘* Illinois f ‘‘ Holland (2) ‘* iris ‘* Holland (2) ‘* anemone “New York.) ‘* cactus ‘* Germany ‘‘ Caryopteris sp. ‘‘ France ‘* strawberry ‘‘ Massachusetts 66 66 7 Oregon ‘* peony ObiG ‘“* cotton seedlings ‘‘ South Carolina Not only is the variety of plants with which it is found associated apparently large, but its geographical distribution also seems to be worldwide. Little is known as to its closer relationship to the various plants. It is perhaps one of the species with facultative parasitism, that is, it can live as a true parasite but does not necessarily have to do so, being able also to support itself in a saprophytic mode. Its parasitism may be ecto- or endo-parasitism. In gladiolus the nemas were found in brownish spots all through the corms and were located 472 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 18 by cutting the latter into pieces. There is a certain phaenotypical difference in the specimens from the various hosts, those from potato tubers, carrots and similar rich food being relatively larger and fatter. Few facts are to be added to the morphology of the female. The number of the striae on the lateral fields, if counted in the middle region, is most often 12. The number, however, diminishes toward both ends of the body. These striae are crenate according to the cuti- cular annulation. The latter, however, stops at these lateral fields. In the male these structures are the same. A careful comparison of the sexes reveals this to be true for all morphological characters common to both. Figure 1, A represents the anterior end of a male. If compared with Figure 3 and the description given by Goodey (1929) and others, complete similarity is seen. Special stress is laid upon the fact that the oesophageal glands have not only the same arrangement but also the same order of outlets in the oesophageal bulb. Most striking is the male copulatory apparatus. It somewhat links conditions as seen in Rhabditis with those of Tylenchus. The spicula resemble somewhat those of Rhabditis in that they have ventrally a — semicircular protuberance. The proximal end is slightly capitate. In aside view (fig. 1,G) the gubernaculum appears to be almost lineate and of about half the length of the spiculum. Seen ventrally (fig. 1,F) however it appears to be a broad but flat piece. Most interesting is the bursa, the presence of which so widely separates this form from all those of the genus Aphelenchus as hitherto conceived. From the Tylenchus bursa it differs by the multiple bursal ribs, which, if this is, aS it seems, a generic character, brings the genus Aphelenchus near to Rhabditis. One rib is located slightly in front of the anus, the three others on the second half of the tail, being separated from each other by about equal distances. ‘The bursa encloses the tail end. The presence of some bursal muscles anterior to the bursa itself is probable. A retractor spiculi was seen in the usual position. ‘The testis is re- flexed (fig.1,D). In the material from South Africa which contained a larger number of male specimens, a female with a definite copulatory mark on its vulva was seen (fig. 1,C). Such marks are not infrequently seen in the bisexual Rhabditis species. In the present case it shows that copulation may take place. It is, however, assumed by most writers that Aphelenchus avenae is a syngonic species. What signifi- cance then has the sporadic appearance of males? They seem to be fully functional, at least to judge from the above mentioned copulation mark. There are no explanations available based on experimental Nov. 4, 1931 STEINER: ON STATUS OF NEMIC GENERA 473 or other evidence. However, reference may be made to similar con- ditions in some of the Rhabditis species. Under certain circumstances, probably of external character, males appear in some of these normally ee =| ee ey ee & _—F Ne ne er eas eo a % —. 3 So = Pay tt rt rst 7 2222ye fai KO SRS EE SCY AES i) i ~ ACES es S Es #2 22, Bes 4 Si - sete eT td c = eyed ) “Fe Fig. 1.—Aphelenchus avenae Bastian. A. Head end of male. ez p, excretory pore; oe gls, oesophageal glands; oe gl op, openings of oesophageal glands; about X 533. B. Structure of lateral field. C,. Side view of vulva and vagina; cem, cement left from copulation, con msc vag, circular constrictor vaginae; dil msc vlv, dilatator muscle of vulva. C,. Front view of vulva with obliquely placed dilatator muscles. D. End por- tion of testis reflexed. E,H,,3.. Various types of tailends. F. Ventral view of male tail end; gub, gubernaculum; sp, spiculum; rbs brs 1-4, bursal ribs; about X 533. G. Side view of male tail end; legend same as in Fig. F; about X 533. H. Side view of vulva to show the sudden contraction behind the vulva. syngonic species, exceptionally even in considerable number. The mechanism of their appearance, however, is unknown. ‘The resem- 474 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 18 blance of A. avenae to Rhabditis along this more physiological lineis rather significant. Finally attention should be called to the fact that in the present species the tail of the female exhibits a certain variation; forms with the typical cylindrical tail (fig. 1, E;) were seen, besides forms with a tail like that in Figure 1,E; and the one in Figure 1, Es,,. A certain variation exists also in regard to the profile line of the vulva, which usually represents conditions as drawn in Figure 1,H where a sudden constriction occurs just back of the vulva. Figure 1,C, represents an exception to this, the constriction being absent. The latter figure and Figure 1, C: give the arrangement of the dilatatores vulvae, four in number and attached diagonally at each corner of the vulva. There seems to exist also a circular constrictor vaginae (fig. 1, C;). Measurements: Male from gladiolus corm 2 oli Maden st ey aan tag 1h 2) acc. 1.9 2.9 3.1 3) ob) 2.4 Specimens from parsnips canna Mere UNAM RAM G22 ey. De. 2.9 3.2 3.8 DADs i. 10.6 125 80 97 .82 mm. CO CC CC CC CS TT er 5 2.5 2.6 3.0 2.2 THE SPECIES OF THE GENUS APHELENCHUS AS KNOWN AT PRESENT As stated above, Isonchus radicicolus Cobb 1913 is undoubtedly a member of the genus Aphelenchus as here conceived; the same is the case for T'ylenchus cylindricaudatus Cobb (Steiner 1926). Both species are extremely similar to A. avenae, especially in the male and a re- vision of their characters seems to be necessary for a final ascertain- ment of their taxonomic position. On the basis of data available at present, the following diagnoses may be given: A. avenae Bastian, type species (Syn. A. agricola) Diagnosis: Aphelenchus with the characters of the genus; lateral fields in the middle region of the body with about twelve longitudinal striae, crenate according to the annulation. Four bursal ribs; female tail cylindroid or obtuse conical. A. cylindricaudatus (Cobb) (Steiner 1926) Diagnosis: Similar to A. avenae but lateral wings well developed, crenation irregular, not conforming with the cuticular annulation. (Lateral fields without longitudinal striae?). Female tail somewhat finger-shaped, its base Nov. 4, 1931 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 475 conical, next portion cylindrical, end portion somewhat swollen and bluntly rounded. 1A. radicicolus (Cobb 1913) Diagnosis: Characters of A. avenae but a single lateral wing (apparently without lateral fields and longitudinal striae!). Male bursa with 5 ribs. LITERATURE CITED Coss, N. A. New nematode genera found inhabiting fresh water and non-brackish soils. This JouRNAL 3: 432-444. Pl. 1. 1913. Coss, N.A. Proceedings Helminthological Society of Washington. Journ. Parasitology. 14: 54-72. 1928. Fucus, GILBERT. Neue an Borken- und Riisselkéfer gebundene Nematoden, halbpara- sitische und Wohnungseimmieter. Zool. Jahrb. Syst. 59. 505-646. figs. 1-177. 1930. Fucus, GILBERT. Seinuragen.nov. Zool. Anz. 226-228. Abb.1-5. 1931. Gorrart, H. Die Aphelenchen der Kulturpflanzen. Julius Springer, Berlin. 1-104. Textfig. 142. Pl. 1. figs. 1-8. 1930. GoopeEy, T.- On the nematode genus Aphelenchus. Journ. Helminthology. 5. 203-220. figs. 1-10. 1927. GoopEy, T. The species of the genus Aphelenchus. ibidem 6. 121-160. figs. 1-23. 1928. Goopgy, T. On some details of comparative anatomy in Aphelenchus, Tylenchus and Heterodera. ibidem 7. 223-230. figs.14. 1929. Man, J.G.pE. Die frei in der reinen Erde und im stissen Wasser lebenden Nematoden der niederldndischen Fauna. Leiden: E.J. Brill. 1884. Micouetzky, H. Die freilebenden Erd-Nematoden. Arch. Naturgesch. 87. Jahrg. Abt. A. Heft. 8a. 9. 1922. STEINER, G. Parasitic nemas on peanuts in South Africa. Centralbl. f. Bakt. Par. Infekt. 66. 351-365. PlatesI-IV. 1926. STEINER,G. Onsomenemic parasites and associates of the Mountain Pine Beetle (Dend- roctonus monticolae Hopkins). Journ. Agric. Research (in press). STEINER, G. AND GERTRUDE Cassipy. A study of nemas infesting the roots of coffee trees in Java, Guatemala and the Hawaiian Islands (in preparation). STILES, CHas. WARDELL, AND HaSSALL, ALBERT. The determination of generic types, and a list of roundworm genera, with their original and type species. Bull. 79, Bureau of Animal Industry, U.S. Dept. of Agriculture, Washington. 1-150. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS F. M. Sours of the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism, who was one of the scientific staff on board the Nautilus, arrived in Washington, D. C., October 14, bringing with him the magnetic and depth data obtained. De- spite the necessary curtailment in the cruise because of lateness of the season valuable data were secured in physical and chemical oceanography, terrestrial magnetism, gravity, and marine biology. ANDREW THOMSON, formerly director of the Apia Samoa Observatory, who recently returned from eight months’ meteorological studies in Europe is temporarily engaged at the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism in the 476 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 18 reduction and discussion of the 171 pilot-balloon series over the Pacific Ocean obtained on the Carnegie. Dr. L. E. Loveripce of the University of California reported September 28 at the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism to assist in the high-voltage laboratory. The United States Geographic Board on October 7, 1931, adopted a resolu- tion naming a crater in Coconino County, Ariz., ‘‘Merrill Crater,” in honor of the late Dr. Grorcr P. Murriti, who was the first scientist to investigate and. describe Meteor Mountain, which is in the vicinity of the newly named Merrill Crater. The staff of the Division of Mollusks of the National Museum has been increased by the appointment of Mr. Horace G. Ricuarps of the University of Pennsylvania, to the position of Aid. Obituary JamMEs WILLIAMS GIDLEY, Assistant Curator of Mammalian Fossils in the U.S. National Museum and a member of the Acapremy, died September 25, 1931, at Washington after a protracted illness. Dr. Gidley was born in Winneshiek County, lowa, on January 7, 1866. He obtained his professional training at Princeton University, where he took a master’s degree, and at George Washington University, where he received the doctorate. He was attached for some years to the American Museum of Natural History, trans- ferring in 1905 to the National Museum and remaining with that institution until his death. Dr. Gidley chose the study of the fossil mammals as his special field and attained distinction in it. His earlier work concerned the Eocene mamals, but in later years he dealt chiefly with the later faunas. His most recent work was with the late extinct fauna of Florida, which is associated with human remains, and with an older fauna of the late Pliocene of Idaho. The BS aanmieical Society The Geogra I hic Society : Geo! ogical Society ah Medical aay ogic a Sates e Anthro} pological cone : The Historical Society Wie aes The Washington Society of Engineers The Medical Society | acento | ‘The "eran : oe ‘ This Journatis indexed in he International Index toP, ’ ; ie eee te Vou, 21 NOVEMBER 19, 1931 No. 19 { A AK hist ‘ ; ‘ f ? £2 Z ae 2 \ JOURNAL °°"? 1431 (3) oS, ey yf SLNAL MUSEUM OF THE aur Ae pce ae Sts oss, WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS : C. Wytue Cooxe CHARLES DRECHSLER Hues L. DrypEN U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRZ BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W.J. PETERS Haroutp MorRIson PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E. A. GoLpMAN G. W. Stosz BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Aanres CHASE J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Roacer C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPTIN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Roya AND GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. _ should appear only as footnotes and Y, monthly, on the fou it appears on 16 peers Ne a Vo publiéation is an essential feature; a man twentieth of the month will ordinaril ap of the JOURNAL for the following fo rth Mivaseripts may he sent to any 1 clearly typewritten and in suitable f editors cannot undertake to do more the the ‘ally | ae of en the editors and p in see oe bd es ep —In order to facilitate prom s requested. It is urged that y will exercise due tare in seeing that _ Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints . bearing the name of the author and _ date of issue, and additional reprints, i with < ewe? soheda f | ‘Biagelinpes for sain cn with the Gettin’ Ss name er ddress corner may be obtained at the following prices. First. 100, $4 a ie ed As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra, copie | pots invariably be attached to the first page cs ae ema r : The rate of Subscription per volume i tees SEE ON alas Ae HE ale Semi-monthly numbers 3) .220.0; Se che ie Uh A ogame eels numbers (July, August, cae September, Nos. 13, 14, i anil 1) Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of . addressed the ee HG, oie, Cost om ero Hal Was Mi issing Numbers will be replat ition Pe: provided a ctu thirty days after date of the following i issue. Wy *Volume 1 however, from June 19, 1911 to Teale 19, 1911, ee be sent for $3. 00. Speci ‘ are given to members of scientific societies affiliated dca the pond JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21 NoveMBeER 19, 1931 No. 19 BOTANY.—Four new species of Myrsinaceae from China.! E. H. Waker, National Museum. (Communicated by Wituram R. Maxon). The following four new species have been recognized during the examination of alarge number of specimens of Myrsinaceae from eastern Asia in various American Herbaria. They are here described prepara- tory to a revision of the Chinese, Japanese, and Formosan members of this family. Ardisia scalarinervis Walker, sp. nov. Repent undershrub, about 40 cm. high, the branches ascending, densely fuscous-tomentose; leaves clustered at ends of branches, the petiole about 4 em. long, fuscous or ferruginous-tomentose or villose, the blade 20 to 30 em. long, 7 to 8 cm. wide, obovate or oblanceolate, tapering toward the narrowly rounded base, rather broadly acute or sub-acuminate at apex, closely erose-dentate (the teeth apiculate), prominently elevated-punctate near margin and apex on both sides, glabrous and dark green above, sparingly and minutely puberulent and fuscous beneath; midrib prominent beneath, densely shaggy with long ferruginous villose crisped hairs, the lateral nerves forming a right or obtuse angle with the midrib; inflorescence 2 to 3 cm. long, a sub- terminal or axillary, pubescent cluster of several peduncled umbels each about 7-flowered, the peduncles short, the pedicels slender, about 1.5 cm. long; flowers 4 mm. long; sepals shortly united at base, triangular-ovate, 1.5mm. long, ferruginous-puberulent, minutely ciliate, not punctate; petals ovate or oblong-ovate, acute glabrous, black punctate at apex; stamens somewhat shorter than petals, the filaments very short and broad, the anthers large, sagittate, acute or submucronate; pistil with globose, hairy ovary, the style very slender, about as long as petals, the stigma punctiform; fruit a globose berry with horny endocarp, 5 to 7 mm. in diameter, reddish, minutely puberu- lent or glabrous, not punctate, one-seeded. 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received September 28, 1931. ate 477 nov 19°" Fig. 1. Ardisia scalarinervis Walker, sp. nov.—a. branchlet with leaf and inflores- cence, 2/5 nat. size; b. pistil, x 5; c, petals and stamens, x 5; d. fruit, x 5. Fig. 2. Maesa salicifolia Walker, sp. nov.—a: branchlet, 2/5 nat. size; b. flower with corolla removed, x 5; c. corolla opened, x 5. Fig. 3. Maesa macilenta Walker, sp. nov.—a. branchlet, 2/5 nat. size; b. flower, x5. Fig.4. Rapanea kwangsiensis Walker, sp. nov. —branchlet with mature fruit and leaf, 2/5 nat. size. ue 478 Noy. 19,1931 WALKER: NEW SPECIES OF MYRSINACEAE 479 Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 458,790, collected at Szemao, Yunnan, China, by A. Henry (no. 12,021). This species, known only from the type, is very distinct in its oblanceolate or obovate leaves with densely shaggy midrib and in the ladderlike arrange- ment of the lateral nerves, which are divergent at a right angle from the midrib. Rapanea kwangsiensis Walker, sp. nov. Small tree or shrub, 6 meters high, the branchlets thick; leaves petiolate (1 to 2 em.), the blade coriaceous, 11 to 14 em. long, 4 to 5 em. wide, obovate, gradually tapering to an acute base, broadly acute to obtuse or almost rounded at apex, entire, dark green above, paler beneath, glabrous, not punctate, except obscurely so beneath at margin; inflorescence few-flowered, developing 1 to 3 fruits, umbellate on short, densely scaly spurs or knobs, axillary, among the leaves or above the rather prominent leaf scars on older portions of the branch, the scales obtuse, entire, sometimes fringed; flowers 5 to 6-merous on slender pedicels; sepals 2 mm. long, united one-third to one-half their length, ovate, acute, entire, sometimes finely papillose on margin, otherwise glabrous, not distinctly punctate; petals united one-third their length, about 4 mm. long, narrowly oblong-lanceolate, rounded or acute at apex, punctate on back, papillose on margin and within; stamens with short filaments at- tached at or just above the throat of corolla tube, the anthers in pistillate flowers shorter than petals, sagittate, apiculate; pistil with ovoid ovary, the style very short, the stigma about as long as or slightly longer than the petals, flattened-ligulate, sometimes cleft at apex; fruit globular, 4 to 5 mm. in diam- eter, purplish, longitudinally lined with elongate, glandular punctations, the pedicels slender, 5 to 8 mm. long. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,273,486, collected at ‘‘Lan- low, E. Lin Yen,’’ Kwangsi, China, 1,500 meters altitude, August 2, 1928, by R. C. Ching (no. 6,657). This species, known only from the type, may be easily distinguished from other Chinese species of the genus by its thicker stems, its clearly obovate large leaves having a gradually tapering base, and its fruits with longer pedi- cels. The type specimen, though in fruit, bore a few dried pistillate flowers from which the above flower description was drawn. It was collected on the expedition sent into Kwangsi in 1928 by the Metropolitan Museum of Natural History, Nanking, China. Maesa macilenta Walker, sp. nov. Shrub, 1.5 to 2 meters high, the branchlets slender, glabrous or minutely puberulent; leaves short-petiolate (5 mm.), the blade thin-membranous, 10 to 20 cm. long, 3.5 to 5 em. wide, ovate to elliptic-lanceolate, acute or rounded at base, long-acuminate at apex, subentire or minutely sinuate-dentate, dull green on both sides, glabrous, glandular-striate, the lateral nerves 7 or 8 pairs; inflorescence 1 to 2.5 cm. long, racemose or sparingly branched-paniculate, very minutely puberulent, the bracts subulate, nearly equaling the short pedicels; flowers 2 mm. long, the bracteoles ovate to oblong; sepals shortly united at base, ovate, obtuse, entire, sometimes very minutely ciliate, not 480 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 19 conspicuously glandular; corolla tubular-campanulate, the tube twice as long as the sepals, 2 to 3 times the length of the ovate, rounded, irregularly margined lobes, longitudinally lined; staminate flowers unknown; stamens in pistillate flowers minute, included, the anthers ovate; pistil shorter than the corolla tube, the free part of the semi-inferior ovary conical, the style slender, less than 1 mm. long, the stigma obscurely lobed; fruit unknown. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 458,604, collected at Szemao, Yunnan, China, by A. Henry (no. 11,704A). An additional specimen is Henry 11,704, in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden. This species is related to Maesa japonica (Thunb.) Moritz in its charac- teristic relatively long corolla tube. However, it may be distinguished from that species by its thin, membranous leaves, its small inflorescence and flowers, and its ovate bracteoles, which are not broad and clasping. From the fol- lowing new member of this group with long corolla tubes it is distinguished by its ovate or elliptic-lanceolate (not narrowly lanceolate) leaves, these thin and membranous, not coriaceous and rugose, and by its ovate bracteoles. Maesa salicifolia Walker, sp. nov. Erect shrub, 2 meters high, glabrous throughout, the branchlets rather slender, grayish-brown; leaves with channeled petiole (5 to 8 mm.), the blade coriaceous, 10 to 18 cm. long, 1.5 to 2 cm. wide, narrowly oblong-lanceolate, obtuse at base, long-acute or acuminate at apex, strongly revolute, entire, not punctate, rugose, the midrib and the 5 to 7 pairs of lateral, curved, as- cending nerves appearing deeply impressed above, correspondingly ridged beneath, the veinlets inconspicuous; inflorescence axillary, solitary or 2 or 3 together, 1.5 to 2 em. long, racemose or paniculate, the few branches near the base; flowers 3 to 4 mm. long, slightly longer than the pedicels, the floral parts mostly longitudinally glandular-striate, the bracteoles broadly ovate, obtuse, sometimes broadly so; sepals about 1 mm. long, imbricate, shortly united, below, broadly ovate to suborbicular, broadly obtuse or rounded, the margin thinner; corolla tubular or tubular-campanulate, the tube 3 to 4 mm. long, about 3 times the length of the sepals, the lobes short-ovate, rounded, scarcely spreading; stamens in staminate flowers included, attached at about the middle or above the middle of the corolla tube, 1 mm. long, anthers ob- long-ovate, rounded at apex, about equaling the slender filaments; pistil in pistillate flowers with free part of semi-inferior ovary conical, the style slender, scarcely reaching height of anthers, the stigma slightly dilated; or obscurely lobed; fruit globose, 4mm. in diameter, reddish longitudinally striate-punctate wrinkled, the persistent sepals approximate about the more or less persistent style. toe in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden, collected on Teng Woo Mountain, Kwangtung Province, China, by C. O. Levine and G. W. Groff, Noy. 18, 1916 (Canton Christian College no. 45). Additional speci- mens are: C.C.C. 13,242 and H. T. Ho 60,026, both from the type locality, Teng Woo Mountain. In its long corolla tube this species is related to Maesa japonica, from which, however, as well as from the preceding new species, it may be readily distinguished by its narrowly lanceolate, entire, rugose leaves. In floral characters it is at present indistinguishable from Maesa japonica. Noy. 19, 1931 GOLDMAN: A NEW AGOUTI 481 ZOOLOGY.—A new agoutt from Costa Rica E. A. GoLpMan, Biological Survey. Among interesting mammals recently obtained by the well known field naturalist, Mr. C. F. Underwood, in western Costa Rica, is an agouti which seems to represent a hitherto unrecognized geographic race. It is here named for the collector who has been making notable contributions to knowledge of the fauna of Costa Rica for many years. Dasyprocta punctata underwoodi subsp. nov. Costa Rican Agouti Type. From San Geronimo, Pirris, western Costa Rica. No. 256459, @ adult, U. S. National Museum, collected by C. F. Underwood, June 1, 1931. General characters.—An orange buff and yellow subspecies without distinctly banded pelage; longer hairs on rump reaching about 95 millimeters, mainly dusky below light orange yellow tips about 20 millimeters in length. Similar to Dasyprocta punctata punctata and D. p. richmondz, but pelage of upper parts in general much less distinctly banded, the longer rump hairs nearly uni- formly dusky below light orange yellow tips (narrowly banded to base in punctata and richmondz). Very similar in color arrangement to the geograph- ically more distant form D. p. dariensis of eastern Panama, but upper parts more extensively orange buff or orange yellowish; and skull lighter in struc- ture. Differing notably from D. p. nuchalis of western Panama in the absence of the black nape. Color.—Type: Top of head, nape, shoulders, sides of body and outer sur- faces of limbs coarsely mixed black and light orange yellow; middle of back heavily overlaid with rich orange buff, the under color blackish; long hairs of rump blackish basally but tipped with light orange yellow in contrast with orange buff of back; under parts in general mixed brownish and pale yellow- ish buff, the buff becoming purer along the median line of abdomen and inguinal region; fore feet blackish; hind feet with short black and yellowish hairs on metatarsus. Skull.—Closely resembling those of D. p. punctata and D. p. richmondi but vertical portion of maxilla between jugal and antorbital vacuity narrower in the type, more encroached upon by jugal; nasals very broad and expanded anteriorly. Measurements.—Type: Head and body, 511 mm.; tail, 22; hind foot, 115. Skull (type): Greatest length, 114.2; condylobasal leneth, 103. 7s zygomatic breadth, 51.8; interorbital constriction, oHlbar length of nasals, 41. 5: maxillary toothrow (alveoli), 17.8. Remarks.—The agoutis of the D. punctata group subdivide in Middle America into several closely allied, but fairly well marked geographic races. D. p. underwood: is based on a single specimen which appears to be quite dis- tinctive, as shown by comparison with neighboring forms including speci- mens assumed to be near typical D. p. punctata, the type of which probably came from western Nicaragua (See Goldman, Proc. Biol. Soe. Washington, vol. 30, p. 114, May 23, 1917). 1 Received October 18, 1931. 482 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 19 ZOOLOGY .—A new kinkajou from Mexico. E. W. Newson and E. A. GOLDMAN, Biological Survey. In reviewing the kinkajous of Mexico (Potos flavus group) the writers have noted characters which seem to warrant the recognition by name of the geographic race inhabitating the region of the Yueatan peninsula. The new form is described as follows: Potos flavus campechensis subsp. nov. Campeche Kinkajou Type.—From La Tuxpefia, Champoton, Campeche, Mexico. No. 181266, 2 adult, U. S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by Percy W. Shufeidt, February 12, 1913. X catalogue number 10234. Distribution. —Campeche, Tabasco, northern Guatemala and probably all of Yucatan peninsula; limits of range unknown. General Characters.—A light-colored, medium-sized subspecies, very similar in general to Potos flavus chiriquensis of western Panama, but lighter in color, the head, and front and sides of legs and feet less shaded with dusky; skull narrower and differing in detail. Similar in general size to P. f. guerrerensis of western Mexico, but upper parts less overlaid with dusky ; cranial characters distinctive. Differing from P. f. aztecus of the Gulf slope in Vera Cruz mainly in decidedly smaller size and lighter color. Color—Type: Upper parts in general near clay color (Ridgway, 1912), purest on face, flanks, and outer sides of limbs, the top of head and back thinly overlaid with brown; under parts, including inner sides of limbs and under side of tail near ochraceous buff, becoming brownish abruptly along a narrow median line on the abdomen and a spot immediately behind the naked gular patch; ears thinly clothed with light buffy hairs; feet about like outer sides of limbs, not distinctly dusky as usual in the group; tail above about like back, becoming more brownish toward tip. Skull.—Similar in general form to that of P. f. chiriquensis, but braincase narrower; frontal region rising similarly high anteriorly but somewhat more depressed behind postorbital processes; postorbital processes more compressed or flattened antero-posteriorly, less rounded and peg-like; bullae usually larger, more inflated anteriorly; dentition very similar. Compared with P. f. guerrerensis the skull is relatively narrower, more elongated; frontal region higher anteriorly, more depressed behind postorbital processes (frontal profile more evenly arched in guerrerensis) ; audital bullae much less inflated. Differing from aztecus in decidedly smaller size. Measurements.—Type: Total length, 997 mm.; tail vertebrae, 513; hind foot, 90. Skull (type): Greatest length (median line), 95.4; condylobasal length, 88.2; zygomatic breadth, 60.8; interorbital breadth, 20 ; postorbital constriction, 18.8; breadth across mastoid processes, 47.2; breadth of brain- case, 37.8; upper toothrow, front of canine to back of last molar (alveoli), 25.8. Remarks.—In general combination of cranial characters P. f. campechensis tends to bridge the gap between P. f. chiriquensis, of which over 20 specimens have been available for comparison, and the more northern representatives of the Potos flavus group. The skull is more slender, however, than usual in the nearly related forms, and the lighter coloration appears to 'be distinctive. 1 Received October 18, 1931. Nov. 19, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 483 Pallid coloration, apparently associated with general aridity, characterizes a considerable number of the animals of the Yucatan peninsula region and the representative there of P. flavus is, apparently, no exception. Specimens examined.—Total number, 4, as follows: Campeche: La Tuxpefia (type locality), 1. Tabasco: Las Minas, 1 (skull only) Guatemala: Perdida, Peten, 1 (skull only); northern Guatemala (with- out definite locality), 1. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES THE ACADEMY 242D MEETING The 242d meeting of the AcADEMY was a joint meeting with the Society of Sigma Xi, and was held in the Auditorium of the Interior Department Build- ing, F’. Street, between 18th and 19th Streets, on Monday, October 26, 1931. About 400 persons were present. President N. A. Coss called the meeting to order at 8:30 P.M., and made the introductory remarks, then turned over the chairmanship to Dr. P. R. Herz who introduced Professor WILLEM DE Sitter, Director of the Observatory at Leyden, Holland and Past President of the International Astronomical Union, who delivered an address on The origin of the planetary system: The solar system shows many features that cannot be due to chance but must have an explanation in the origin of the system. All the planets move around the sun in planes that are inclined at very small angles to each other. They all move in the same direction. The satellites move around the planets in planes which again have small inclinations with the planes of their families and also in the same direction. The axial rotations of the planets and of the sun itself are in the same direction and the equatorial planes have again small inclinations from the orbital planes. All the orbits are nearly circular. The masses of the planets are small as compared with that of the sun. The masses of the satellites are small compared with those of the planets. The only two notable exceptions are our own moon of which the mass is as much as 1/80 of the mass of the earth and the rings of Saturn which are a formation that is unique in the solar system. Other exceptions, large inclinations and revolu- tions in the opposite direction, occur only at the very outskirts of the system or in subordinate systems. All these irregularities call for an explanation which must be found in the origin of the system. The well known hypothesis, known by the names of Kant and Laplace, has held the field for over a century. It really consists of two hypotheses, namely, that the sun and the planets were formed by condensation from a gaseous nebula and that the planets were separated from the sun as a result of the centrifugal force due to rotation of this nebula. There are several objections to this hypothesis. In its original form it is supposed that by the rotation, a ring of matter somewhat similar to the rings of Saturn was thrown off from the equator of the rotating sun and that the planets were formed by condensation of matter constituting this ring, in one point of it. It has been shown by Darwin that this is impossible. But even omitting the ring as an intermediary stage, the hypothesis was shown to be untenable. Mathemati- eal analysis proves that rotation can give rise to only two configurations, namely, either a double star or a spiral nebula, both of which exist in the stellar universe in many and great numbers. But rotation can never produce 484 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 19 a stellar system consisting of one central body attended by a number of relatively small planets. Another theory which was already suggested by Babinet i in 1861 is that the planets were thrown out of the body of the sun by the attraction of another celestial body passing at a very short distance. ‘The first result of an en- counter of this kind would be that a filament of matter was drawn out from the sun towards the passing star. This filament, after the star had passed away, would break up into different fractions some of which would be large and constitute the planets, while a considerable part of the mass of the fila- ment would either fall back on to the sun or be dissolved into a medium of gaseous molecular constitution, which would in the course of time partly fall down on the sun and planets and partly be dissolved into space. The effect of this medium on the motion of the planets would be to make the orbits circular as the result of friction. ‘Those parts which would fall back on the sun would impart to the sun the momentum acquired from the passing star and thus produce the rotation of the sun in the same direction as the revolution of all the planets. The orbits of the planets would be very elliptical in the beginning and only be reduced to circles gradually due to the effect of the resisting medium and only at first perihelion passage in the elliptical orbit, the satellites would be drawn out from the planet by the action of the sun in the same way as the planets were drawn out from the sun by the star. This theory thus explains all the major features of the solar system. It explains why all motions are in the same direction and in the same plane and why all the orbits are nearly circular. The rotation of the sun and planets in the same direction and in the same plane is explained by matter falling back on them. In working it out numerically, Dr. Harold Jeffreys has found that on the whole the theory is very satisfactory, and in particular, the time required for the resisting medium to reduce the eccentricity of the orbit of Mercury to its present value agrees approximately with the age of the earth as derived from geological evidence. There is one difficulty, however, and that is that the momentum of the matter falling back is not sufficient to ex- plain the rotation of the sun and the planets. Jeffreys, therefore, about two years ago, suggested that the encounter was not only a near approach but an actual collision between two suns, the shortest distance between the centers being of the order of 4/5 of the sum of the diameters. This would provide a sufficient explanation for the rotation while the other results from the theory would be very little changed. (Avuthor’s abstract.) CnHaRLes THom, Recording Secretary. iS . : oe OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS | _ ‘THE “WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND ais AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ie : ANNOUNCEMENTS OF Niateel “Friday, November 20 _ The Geographic Society ‘Saturday, November 21 The Helminthological Society The Philosophical Society ; ee - ” Wednesday, November 25 The Geological Society ee ee £ "The Medical Society | ! ee _ Friday, November 27 | The Geographic Society | | | oe Saturday, November 28 The Biological Society . yee ‘Tuesday, December 1 _ The Botanical Society wae _ Wednesday, December 2 The Washington Society of Engineers ate ae The Medical Society sy " "Thursday, December 3 The Entomological Society — ‘ ‘ cae December 4 The ‘aha tae Society 3 : The programs of the aes of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if gent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY ie : President: N. A. Coss, Bureau of Plant Industry. aaa _ Corresponding Secretary: Pau E. Howe, Bureau of Animal Industry. Ag Recording Secretary: CHARLES THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. Treasurer: Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. new speci Ss Fo hans aN M4 a x A new agouti from } This Jourwais 39. Wi25 Vou. 21 DECEMBER 4, 1931 No. 20 OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS C. WytHE CooKkE CHARLES DRECHSLER Hua L. DrypEen U- 5. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. Peters Haroip Morrison PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E, A. GoLpMAN G. W. Stosr BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY AaNnrEs CHASE J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Roger C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPTIN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Roya AND GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. i | lias written or the Washing eet. and programs oft re etin rar aden aE hc! 9 | 4 ur i it app ears on ‘the Rea ae ot ee f - publication | is an essential feature; a m : Rca ie ee a of the month will ordinarily Serer ee the J OURNAL for the following f Star Me anuseripts may be sent to any pember of ihe Boar a ee ae pewritten and in suitable form for printing 101 editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious ‘should appear only as footnotes and should include year of the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested t Eh ially | and submitted on a separate manuscript Pace plas a ‘Iilu trations in limited amount will be accepted, by zine etchings being preferable. : Proof. —In order to facilitate p “unless Tequested. It is urged that ‘Author’ s Reprints. —Fifty reprint eee the name of the author date of issue, and additional reprints, wil ance ee the ee Sige of pr Pee oe _ Envelopes for mailing repeat with the author’ s name ead Te, corner may be obtained at the following prices. — First 100, $4.00 a Ag an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for Bg copies « Pi eee Snel invariably be attached to the first pace on ae a dee ee , ‘The rate of Subscription per volume ' is... Bye oe) nce ip Sha steers Pas a Gane tnanthly NUMDETS. Leeda apie eee vo ec ue cacao _ Monthly numbers (July, August, and Sepiember, Nos. 13, 14, and 1 ») » fie o - Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy ' Ai | a addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, ' d a is pace: | Exchanges. —The JOURNAL does not exchange with other publications is Mi issing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim soe days after date of the following issue. night i “Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to oe 19, 1911 will jou sent for $3. 00. Sedat are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy — ‘is Sa erate JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21 DECEMBER 4, 1931 No. 20 BOTAN Y.—Notes on yagé, a drug plant of southeastern Colombia. C. V. Morton, U.S. National Museum. (Communicated by E. P. KILLIP. ) The National Museum has recently received from Mr. Guillermo Klug, of Iquitos, Peru, a large collection of plants obtained by him in the Putumayo region of southeastern Colombia. Mr. Klug became especially interested in various drug plants used by the natives as stimulants, and included herbarium specimens of these in his collec- tion. Three of the plants, known to the Indians under the general name of yagé, belong to the genus Banisteriopsis C. B. Robinson (Family Malpighiaceae), subgenus Hubanisteriopsts Morton, nomen novum (Banisteria subgenus Hubanisteria Niedenzu). The necessity for using the name Banisteriopsis for this genus has been discussed by the author in a former paper.2. The type of the genus (and subgenus) is Banstertopsis argentea (Kunth) Robinson & Small. Banisteriopsis inebrians Morton, sp. nov. Sect. Camptostylis, Subsect. Cosmiothamnus. Liana altissima plus quam 30 m. scandens, ramulis jam hornotinis demum usque 4 mm. diametro fuscesen- tibus glabratis teretibus striatis lenticellis numerosis instructis, internodiis 5-6 cm. longis; lamina foliorum oppositorum late elliptica basi rotundata obliqua apice solum acuta, ca. 11 cm. longa, 6.5 em. lata, supra laevis nitida olivaceo-viridis, subtus concolor mox utrinque glabrata (pilis perpaucis persistentibus exceptis), margine paullo revoluta subcoriacea, nervis mediis primariisque supra depressis subtus elevatis prominentibusque, utrinque jam demum dense strigosis, nervis primariis utrinque 4 vel 5 valde decurrenti- bus, basi nervorum infimorum glandulas 2 magnas nigras gerentibus, nervis 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received October 28, 1931. 2 “A new Banisterta from Brazil and British Guiana,”’ Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash. 43: 157. 1930. 485 486 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 20 secundariis inter se parallelis vix prominulis; petiolus 10-12 mm. longus, ea. 1.5 mm. crassus, supra valde canaliculatus strigosus eglanduliferus; stipulae ad glandulas pubescentes magnas demum deciduas reductae; flores non suppetunt; inflorescentia axillaris, fructu vix ultra 5 em. longa, paullulum composita, rhachi 4-9 umbellas gerente, umbellis ipsiis 4-floris, pedunculo inflorescentiae 6-14 mm. longo, pedunculis umbellarum 12-14 mm. longis, pedicellis sessilibus 13-14 mm. longis, sicut pedunculis persistente pubes- centibus; sepala ovata obtusa puberula ca. 4 mm. longa, inecurva, glandulas 8 oblongas ca. 2 mm. longas gerentia; styli recti apice orbiculari-capitati, anticus 3.5 mm. longus rectus 2 posticis crassior longior; samarae nuce densis- sime sericeae, ceterum demum parce strigosae; nux nigro-fusca oblonga, uno latere solum reticulato-rugosa, altero in alulas vel aculeos biseriatos ad 2 mm. longos excrescens, areola ventrali orbiculari 5-5.5 mm. diametro concava; ala dorsalis fere verticalis, late semiobdeltoidea, ca. 3.5 cm. longa, basi ca. 7 mm. lata, infra apicam ca. 16 mm. lata, margine antico incrassato recto basi vix appendiculato, margine postico curvato crenulato. Banisteriopsis caapi? diversa esse patet: petiolis subgracilibus apice 2 glandulis magnis instructis, stipulis minutis subulatis, laminis foliorum longe acuminatis, majoribus (usque 17 cm. longis, 6-9 cm. latis), nervis mediis et primariis demum glabris, inflorescentia valde majore, pedunculis umbellarum subnullis, stylo antico 2 posticis breviore, et ala samarae oblique oblongo- obovata. B. quitensis* a nostra differs videtur: foliis longe acuminatis, fere eglanduliferis, stipulis parvis, inflorescentia terminali (?), magna 3 dm. longa, stylo antico 2 posticis breviore, lateribus nucis leviter solum tuberculatis fere laevibus, et alis minoribus (2.5 cm. longis, 11 mm. latis), obliquo-oblongis. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,517,293, collected at Umbria, 0° 54’ N, 76° 10’ W, Comisaria del Putumayo, Colombia, in forest, alt. 325 meters, Jan.-Febr., 1931, by G. Klug (no. 1964). Mr. Klug’s note reads, ‘1964. ‘Yagé del monte.’ From root to tip, more than 30 meters long. It takes 6 men to drag the lower half when cut. I estimate that this half weighs more than 500 kg.’”’ Over 60 herbarium sheets of this plant were prepared by Mr. Klug, all of which have been examined in preparing the above description. The related species Banisteriopsis caapr and B. quitensis are also powerful drug plants. The former is more closely related, differing in having the petioles bi-glandular at apex, the stipules minute and subulate, long acuminate leaves with glabrous midvein and nerves, the inflorescence much larger, the peduncles of the umbels very short, the anterior style shorter than the two posterior, and the samara wing obliquely oblong-obovate. B. quitensis has quite differently shaped samaras from those of our species. It is however perhaps much more nearly related to B. caapi than its disposition by Niedenzu would 3 Banisteriopsis caapi (Spruce) Morton, nomen novum. (Banisleria caapi Spruce; Grisebach in Flora Brasiliensis 12!:; 43. 1858.) 4 Banisteriopsis quitensis (Ndzu.) Morton, nomen novum. (Banisteria quitensis Ndzu. in Ind. lect. Lyc. Brunsverg p. hiem. 1900-1901: 10. 1900.) prc. 4, 1931 MORTON: NOTES ON YAGH 487 indicate. The character which he stresses, namely the long-decurrent primary veins, is a variable one, being found in all three of the species here discussed. The length of the decurrent portion is apparently far from constant and is probably of no diagnostic value. The following notes on the use and effect of the drug yagé are kindly supplied by Mr. Klug. The yagé cultwado referred to (Klug 1934) is apparently Banisteriopsis quitensis, but the specimen is sterile and the determination therefore doubtful. The specimens of oco yagé or chagro panga (Klug 1971) also are sterile. The leaves however appear to be very like those of Banistertopsis rusbyana,®> of which two sheets of the type collection® are in the U. 8. National Herbarium. “One of the most interesting plants found in the region of the upper courses of the Putumayo and Caqueta Rivers is the yagé. The Indians make a beverage from either the wild or cultivated yagé, boiling it in a large earthen- ware vessel an entire day until there is formed a sort of liquid, like the syrup of sugar cane. They add to the yagé the leaves and the young shoots of the branches of the oco yagé or chagro panga (no. 1971), and it is the addition of this plant which produces the ‘bluish aureole” of their visions. These are like cinematograph views, and occur after about a half liter of the drink has been consumed in portions an eighth of a liter each at intervals of half an hour. Thereafter, the Indian falls into a profound sleep during which he is in a state of complete insensibility and anesthesia. During this period the subconscious activity acquires enormous intensity. The dreams follow each other with extraordinary precision and clearness. giving to the intoxicated person, according to the observations of missionaries, the power of double vision, and of seeing things at a distance, like certain mediums in their trances. Upon awakening, he retains clearly the hallucinations and fantastic visions which he experienced in unknown regions. Perhaps this drug has the prop- erty of developing the psychic faculties. In 1919 Dr. Zerda Bayon, special- ist in the chemistry of plants, gave this plant the name Telepatina. “Prof. Barriga Villalba experimented upon animals with the yageina, which he succeeded in isolating, with the following results: If a horse has a weak dose of a few centigrams per kilogram of its weight injected into it an extreme excitation is produced, and the animal runs in all directions. The body begins to tremble and the animal maintains its equilibrium with the greatest difficulty. With a larger dose, something like twenty centigrams per kilo- gram, the yageina becomes a real poison, and the animal loses its equilibrium, cries, falls into convulsions, its temperature is lowered, and anesthesia becomes 5 Banisteriopsis Rusbyana (Ndzu.) Morton, nomen novum (Banisteria rusbyana Ndzu. in Ind. Lect. Lyc. Brunsberg. p. aest. 1901: 19. 1901). 8 Beni River, Bolivia. July, 1886, Rusby 2171; distributed as Hiraea. 488 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 20 general. The same results were obtained with dogs, in which complete anesthesia without loss of vision or sense of smell was proved. “The small doses which Barriga Villalba tried upon himself produced a profound sleep and certain sensations of well-being. But this was very far from being the effect on the savages, for which reason Professor Mufioz, of Colombia, employed 30 to 40 grams of the drink, prepared according to the manner of the natives. Effect: At first there was a slight stimulation of the nerves, similar to that of caffein, then a slight dilation of the pupils. All exterior objects acquired a strange appearance, aureoled and of a blue color. Then came the most extraordinary hallucinations, resembling those of hashish, very magnificent, very terrifying. These are due without doubt to the exeita- tion of the cerebral centers of vision, the sensibility of which is such, that the person who has taken yagé is capable of seezng objects 7n the midst of the most complete obscurity. “In Umbria I have had occasion to converse with persons of education who have told me of taking yagé, prepared by the savages (but without the addition of the leaf of chagro panga or oco-yagé) for the cure of malaria from which they suffered, and they have assured me that with three drinks of this (about 150 grams) they have been cured completely, and that for several years they have not suffered further from this illness.” PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 478TH MEETING The 478th meeting of the Society was held in the Assembly Hall of the Cosmos Club, April 22, 1931, President O. EK. Mrrnzmr presiding. Informal communications: H. D. Miser described certain small anticlines exposed in the Cason shale at the Cason manganese mine near Batesville, Arkansas, and ascribed them to compaction of the shale above an irregular buried topography. The Cason shale rests unconformably on the Fernvale limestone, the relief of the surface of unconformity being about one foot. Above each buried hill the shale is folded into an anticline and above each valley it is folded into a syncline. The folds are not aligned and they die out about 3 feet above the top of the limestone. The shale contains fossil algae that are normally spherical but that are so flattened in the Cason shale that their present minor diameters are about one-third their original lengths. The major diameters are parallel to the bedding of the shale. It is believed, therefore, that the shale has been compacted to about one third its original thickness. Miser pointed out that some believe such folds yield part of the petroleum in the mid-Continent oil fields. Regular program: C. N. Fenner and A. L. Day: Borehole investigations in the geyser basin of Yellowstone National Park.—For a number of years the Geophysical Laboratory of the Carnegie Institution of Washington has been pDEc. 4, 1931 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 489 making a comprehensive study of the geysers and hot springs of Yellowstone Park. In connection with this study exploratory boreholes have been put down to a depth of several hundred feet at two sites in order to determine the underground conditions on which the surface manifestations of geyser activity are dependent. The first hole was drilled in 1929 in Old Faithful Basin, and the second in 1930 in Norris Basin. At both sites the holes were in hot areas not far from active vents. At Old Faithful the drill penetrated beds of indurated sand and gravel to a depth of 220 feet. These sediments apparently had been accumulated in basins overdeepened by glacial scour. The component material is rhyolite, now much altered by the circulating hot water and consolidated by the deposi- tion of secondary minerals. From 220 feet to the bottom of the hole at 405 feet, rock in place was penetrated. This bedrock was likewise rhyolite, either glassy or lithoidal. The temperature in the hole increased progressively though somewhat irregularly to a maximum of 180°C. at the bottom. Steam which contained small amounts of hydrogen sulphide and carbon dioxide was encountered, the maximum pressure being 57 pounds to the square inch. In both the sediments and in the underlying rock there were numerous small seams and fissures in which opaline silica, quartz, chalcedony, adularia, calcite, and the zeolites analcite and clinoptilolite had been deposited together with other secondary minerals. Even the unfractured rock was likewise impregnated with these minerals. In the second hole, drilled in the Norris Basin, sedimentary beds such as were found at Old Faithful were lacking, and rhyolite in place was encountered just below the surface. This rock has been considerably altered, with the formation of quartz, adularia, and tridymite. Hydrogen sulphide was evi- dently more abundant than at Old Faithful and consequently pyrite is a fairly abundant secondary mineral. In the Norris hole the maximum tem- perature was 205°C. In the borehole in the Norris basin steam pressure as great as 300 pounds to the square inch was encountered. ‘This is the highest pressure on record for such drilling projects, and it increased the difficulties enormously. The bedrock was found to be much fissured, and there was apprehension that it might be uplifted bodily and a great crater formed. Drilling operations were slowed down greatly, and finally when the hole was 265 feet deep, a break developed in the casing, probably produced by the abrasion of the grit carried by the uprushing steam. No means of repairing the casing was found, and it brought operations to a close at a less depth than had been contemplated. Difficulties such as those encountered in drilling this hole must be contended with in any attempt to tap underground sources of power under similar conditions, or to put down holes for investigative purposes. It is believed that the data on rock texture and underground temperatures that were obtained in these holes will permit amplification of Bunsen’s theory of geyser action in a number of respects, and will explain various manifesta- tions visible at the surface. Detailed petrographic and chemical studies of the drill cores are still in progress. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. JOHNSTON and SHENON. W. H. Bucuer: The mobile belts of the earth.—The structural features of the face of the earth result from the deformation of the crust. Two mutually incompatible views as to the physical character of this crust are being held 490 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 20 by geologists at present. One assumes that the acid and basic materials of the crust differ so much in strength that the acid materials can maintain their form in pushing laterally through the basic materials and also in extending downward into levels of higher temperature. The other view assumes that the strength of both materials is of the same order of magnitude. In the second case the base of the crust, that is, the zone in which the strength reaches zero, is a fairly smooth surface from 30 to 100 miles below the earth’s surface. A number of observations have convinced the writer that the first view is untenable. Two of these are: (1) If there were an essential difference be- tween the strength of basic and acid materials, it should result in correspond- ing differences in surface forms produced by structural deformation. This does not seem to be true. Essential features of what are commonly called “orabens’ for instance, are seen to be identical on continents and on sea bottoms. (e. g. Bartlett Trough; Tanganyika Trough, etc.) (2) Shepherd and Greig have demonstrated experimentally that the temperature at which rocks of granitic composition would flow is much lower than for basalt. Adopting the second view, we think of the crust as a definite shell which is capable of transmitting stresses. The presence of long linear structural features points to stresses which acted on the crust at large. The most strik- ing features of this type are the long belts of mountain folding (e. g. Antillean system and the Alpine Mountains of Europe, N. Africa, and Asia) and of graben faulting (e. g. African fault belts of which rift valleys are a conspicuous part). This paper deals with the relation between these two extreme types of linear crustal deformations. The chief structural features of the fault belts are believed to owe their existence to tensional stresses. Besides these, however, there are indubitable evidences of compressive stresses. This is reflected in a curious way by the fact that the same series of hypotheses of origin have been suggested for three conspicuous examples: the Rhine graben, the African rift valleys, and the Great Basin. (‘‘Key-stone” theories of Elie de Beaumont, Gregory, and Le Conte, 1878; tensional theories of Suess and Le Conte, 1888; compressive wedge theories of Andreae, Wayland, and Link). The writer believes that these three typical regions originated under tensional stresses and were modified by subsequent compressive stresses. The distinctive feature of these belts is that under compressive stresses they developed a minimum of mobility. The writer, correspondingly, designates them as ‘‘fracture belts of low mobility.” Such regions as the areas of Saxonian folding in northern Germany and the Coast Ranges of California of post-Franciscan time display a curious combination of fault-block pattern and rock folding. ‘The writer contends that the fault dislocations took place under tensional stresses in epochs of general crustal expansion and that they were modified by compression in epochs of crustal contraction. This is the same sequence as that inferred for the fracture belts of low mobility. In this second case, there is much greater mobility, but it is localized due to the mosaic arrangement of the fault blocks. The writer designates this type ‘‘heterogeneous mobile belts.” The true “‘mobile belts,’ such as the Appalachian and Alpine systems, are characterized by intensive folding, essentially without normal faulting. Their history involves a major problem which is apt to be overlooked. The folding always follows a period of ‘‘geosynclinal” sinking, but at least during DEC. 4, 1931 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 49] long intervals of these “geosynclinal’’ epochs, sinking took place without upward movements of one or both margins. This isshown by the very thick series of pure limestone which are so characteristic of such “geosynclinal’’ belts. (‘‘Hochgesbirgskalk”’ of the Alps; Cambro-Ordovician limestones of the Appalachians). The writer knows of no adequate explanation of the origin of such long, relatively narrow troughs that sink continuously for long intervals of time without any mountain-making movements. The analogy of the ‘‘fracture belts of low mobility”’ and of the “heterogeneous mobile belts”’ suggests that these “homogeneous mobile belts” likewise owe their origin to tensional crustal stresses which create the geosynclines while later compressive stresses throw them into folds. It seems reasonable to assume that just as folding takes place with all signs of a much greater mobility than is displayed in the other two types, so the yielding under tension owes its peculiar ‘“Shomo- geneous” character to greater ‘‘mobility.”” The writer, then, suggests that these three types of major linear elements of structure form a gradational series that are produced by the same alternation of crustal tension and com- pression, and that differ merely in the manner of their reaction to these stresses. One characteristic common to all three types is frequently overlooked; namely, that later belts may intersect earlier ones at any conceivable angle. This independence of later from earlier mobile belts is very difficult to under- stand unless just such an alternation of tension and compression in the crust is assumed, as seems to be indicated by the structural history of the belts them- selves. (Author’s abstract.) Discussed by Messrs. Moort, FERGuson, Rusry, and G. R. MANSFIELD. Car LE H. Dane and A. M. PipEr, Secretaries. SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS The Innsbruck meetings of the International Commission on the Polar Year were held September 23, 25, and 26. Among the many resolutions passed one provided that there should be no postponement of date since so many governments were participating. Five meetings of the International Commission of Terrestrial Magnetism and Atmospheric Electricity were held at Innsbruck September 21, 22, and 23. Observations made on the Graf Zeppelin’s arctic flight last July indicate that sea fog in the arctic is a relatively thin blanket varying from a few hun- dred to one thousand feet that can be easily surmounted in aerial navigation. A general meeting of Aeroarctic is to be held in Berlin, November 7, 8, and 9. The International Electrical Congress will meet at Paris in July 1932. The recently formed Section of Hydrology of the American Geophysical Union announces the organization of a Committee on the Hydrology of Glaciers, composed of the following men: STEPHEN R. Capps, Senior Geol- ogist, Alaska Branch, U. 8. Geological Survey: Dr. Harry FreLp1InG ReEIp, ~ Professor Emeritus of Dynamic Geology, Johns Hopkins University; G. L. ParkeER, District Engineer, Water Resources Branch, U. 8. Geological Survey; Cart P. Ricuarps, Chairman of the Research Committee of the Mazamas, Portland, Ore.; R. H. Sarcent, Senior Topographic Engineer, Alaska Branch, U.S. Geological Survey; Dr. WatuacrE R. Atwoop, Assistant, 492 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 20 Branch of Research and Education, National Park Service; Francois E. Matrues, Senior Geologist, Section of Glacial Geology, U. S. Geological Survey, Chairman. The functions of the committee correspond in general to those of the Glacier Commission appointed by the Section of Scientific Hydrology of the International Geodetic and Geophysical Union in Europe and will consist principally in securing systematic records of the annual variations of American glaciers. KennetH D. Lonman, A. M. 1930, California Institute of Technology, has been appointed Assistant Geologist in the Geological Survey. J. P. Marsue, recently instructor at Harvard University, is making de- terminations of the age of certain uranium minerals, by means of their lead- uranium ratios, in the chemical laboratory of the Geological Survey. CHARLES Mitton, Ph. D. 1929, Johns Hopkins University, has been appointed a geochemist in the Geological Survey. Prof. KanzamMon Kuxkucut, in charge of the Department of Biology, Toyama High School, Toyama, Japan, has come to the National Museum for the purpose of examining its collections of oriental invertebrates. He is particularly interested in crustacea and mollusks, and is determining a number of specimens that he has gathered in the course of his Japanese faunal studies. He expects to be in Washington for some weeks. Dr. TEmcH1 Kosayasui of the Geological Institute, Imperial University, Tokyo, Japan, accompanied by his wife, has arrived at the National Museum with large collections of early Paleozoic fossils. He intends to remain here for perhaps a year and a half to study these fossils where related forms are available for comparison. These collections are mainly from South Korea which is practically a virgin territory from a geological standpoint. eae _ OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS ee THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND hae oe. AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ie: fe: %, ‘ ; ie a o Awouncaxcents or MEETINGS ; z eo Beturday, Daceibae eee The Philosophical Society # - Tuesday, December 8 The Electrical Engineers © i pomedneeday, December 9 The Geological Society _ ie: _ The Medical Society Ghursday, December 10 The Chemical Society — Friday, December11 The Geographic Society — Saturday, December 12 The Biological Society 3 ( Daseday, December 15 = The Anthropological Society _ The Historical Society | | Wednesday, December 16 The Washington Society of Engineers The Medical Society Pe huthday: December 17 The Academy _ Friday, ‘December 18 #‘The Geographic Society | ie Mi oad December 19 ‘The Helminthological Society oh eae The Philosophical Society ; The uae of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if _ sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month, OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: N. * ‘Cine. Bureau of Plant Industry. - Corresponding Secretary: Paut E. Hows, Bureau of Animal Industry. _ Recording Secretary: CHARLES THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. Ft aad Henry G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey. I 193) t,.) _ ‘ « é o OF THE Se eS, of ad ee me tare ae “WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS C. Wytue Cooke CHARLES DRECHSLER Huau L. DrypEeNn U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY BUREAU OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS W. J. PETERS Harotp Morrison PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY E, A. GotpMAN G. W. Stose BICLOGICAL SOCIETY GEGLOGICAL SOCIETY AGNES CHASE J. R. Swanton BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY Roaer C. WELLS CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mr. Roya AND GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918. Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This Jourwat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: — (1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNAL is issued semi- monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. bot publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. > Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors: they should be clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. Iilustrations in limited amount will be accepted, drawings that may be reproduced by zine etchings being preferable. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Author’s Reprints.—Fifty reprints without covers will be furnished gratis. Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagination and date of issue, and additional reprints, will be furnished at cost when ordered, in accord- ance with the following schedule of prices: Copies 4pp 8 pp 12 pp. 16 pp Covers 5) | Peed acs ia total RERUN eae Te aga $2.00 100 $ .50 $ .55 $. 60 $1.10 2.50 150 90 1.00 1.10 1.60 3.00 200 1.15 1.50 1.60 2.10 3.50 250 1.65 2.00 2.10 2.60 4.00 Envelopes for mailing reprints with the author’s name and address printed in the corner may be obtained at the following prices. First 100, $4.00; additional 100, $1.00. As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. The vate.of Subscription pet 0olume 18 xy vs ieee ss ss oss ss sian anes oe eee $6. 00* semi-monthly numbers. 0/0) scc8. agate ais bce ket id os Cagis pe ee ee .20 Monthly numbers (July, August, and September, Nos. 13, 14, and 15)..... .50 Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and addressed to the Treasurer, H. G. Avers, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C. Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made within thirty days after date of the following issue. *Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911 to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy a JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 21 DEcEMBER 19, 1931 No. 21 PHYSICS.—Certain aspects of Henry’s experiments on electromagnetic induction JosEPH SS. Ames, Johns Hopkins University. (Communicated by L. H. ApaAms.) I regard it as a great honor to be invited to give the first of a series of lectures before the Washington Philosophical Society, to be known as the Joseph Henry lectures, established in honor of the founder and the first President of the Society. I think it is undoubtedly proper for me to choose as the topic of this first lecture one which is related to the life of Joseph Henry, partly be- cause of the association of his name with the lectureship, but also because this year is recognized as the one hundredth anniversary of the discovery of the phenomena of electromagnetic induction, a discovery with which the name of Joseph Henry will always be associated. This discovery of electromagnetic induction marked the beginning of the modern era of electricity and in fact of the modern era of physics, and it is therefore most fitting that a celebration of the centennial anniversary of the discovery should take place. Last month such a cele- bration was held in London at the Royal Institution, to commemorate the part Michael Faraday played in the discovery. Although he was anticipated in this by Joseph Henry, so far as both mutual induction and self induction are concerned, Faraday will always be regarded, properly I think, as their real discoverer because he was the first to publish the results of his investigations and pointed out at the time of his first announcement the possibility of making practical application of them. Joseph Henry, himself, although he deeply regretted the fact that he had delayed publication of his investigations, always gave 1 An address delivered before the Philosophical Society of Washington on October 24, 1931. Received November 12, 1931. 493 494 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 full credit to Faraday and was scrupulously careful to refer to him as the discoverer. ‘The newspapers, magazines and scientific periodicals have called attention repeatedly during the past two months to the work of Faraday and to his greatness as an experimenter and as a philosopher of nature. Rather scant notice has been given to the work of Joseph Henry, one writer saying that he “probably anticipated”’ Faraday; and my real reason for selecting the topic I have for this evening is my desire to impress upon all of you who listen to me the essential facts of Henry’s great discoveries. Certainly whenever an American physicist hears the words, induced currents, the first thought that should come to his mind is “Joseph Henry discovered these.”’ It will indeed be superfluous for me to give a sketch of the life of Henry or to refer in detail to the long series of his brilliant investiga- gations in the varied fields of physics or to his great contributions to the scientific life of this country. Anyone who is interested in these mat- ters should read the address by Professor William B. Taylor which was read before this society fifty-three years ago this month and which was published by the government in a volume devoted to the life and scientific work of Henry, and especially the excellent article by Pro- fessor Magie in the October number of Reviews of Modern Physics. I intend to confine myself this evening to the question of induced electric currents and, even more narrowly, to the original experiments of Henry, calling attention particularly to the dates at which his dis- coveries were made. I must begin, however, by making as the back- ground of my paper a statement concerning the scientific knowledge available at the time Henry began his experiments and also a descrip- tion of Henry’s environment, so that you may understand more clearly the stimulus which animated him and the difficulties under which he labored. In 1819 Oersted made the discovery that an electric current flowing in a conductor exerted a force upon a magnet and this great event was, of course, followed at once by investigations all over Europe. In the following year Schweigger devised his multiplier consisting of an ar- rangement by which a magnetic needle came under the influence of several turns of wire, and thus perfected a rather sensitive instrument for the detection of an electric current. In this same year, 1820, Arago and Davy discovered independently that a steel needle placed axially inside a helix of wire became magnetized when an electric current was passed through the helix. In this experiment of Arago’s the wire was pDEc. 19, 1931 AMES: HENRY’S EXPERIMENTS 495 uncovered and was wrapped in a loose helix around a glass tube, the needle being placed inside this tube. In the same year also Ampére began his brilliant series of studies on the action of currents on magnets and of currents on currents, resulting in the discovery of phenomena which form the basis of electrodynamics. In these experiments Am- pére used single turns of bare wire. In 1825 William Sturgeon of Wool- wich, England really developed the electromagnet by winding uncovy- ered wire around an iron bar, which was insulated from the wire, the iron bar itself being bent into the shape of a horseshoe so that an arma- ture could be placed across its two ends. In this electromagnet Stur- geon used eighteen turns, loosely coiled. ‘These were the essential facts concerning the relations between electricity and magnetism known to the scientific world at the time Henry began his studies. In 1826 Joseph Henry was elected Professor of Mathematics and of Natural Philosophy at the Albany Academy. ‘This was one of the outstanding High Schools of the State of New York and the work done there compared favorably with that characteristic of some of the col- leges of that day. He was twenty-seven years old at the time of his appointment and his interests were already centered in the study of natural philosophy, his attention having been called to the subject when he was fifteen years old by the chance reading of a book which he had found left on a table by a man boarding with his mother. This book, Dr. G. Gregory’s Lectures on Experimental Philosophy, Astron- omy and Chemistry, made a great impression upon the boy’s mind, and it is recorded that the owner gave it to him and that he kept it with him throughout his entire life. It aroused his intellectual curiosity and inspired him with a desire to answer questions dealing with nature. He set to work at once to perfect himself for this life of investigation, and after some years of study, teaching and tutoring, during which time he presented several papers before the local Scientific Society, the Albany Institute, he was chosen unanimously to fill the position I have mentioned. Albany at that time was a small city practically on the frontier, remote from centers of scholarship or of study, but the Albany Academy was a very worthy institution. It occupied a large building in the center of the city, consisting of classrooms and one good sized hall in its center, used for general purposes. There was no laboratory, of course, as such, and no apparatus of any kind; consequently Henry had to do everything with his own hands except so far as he could call upon a blacksmith to help. Schools in those days were rather serious- minded institutions and Henry was kept fully occupied with his classes 496 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 as long as the school was operating, which was for practically ten months of the year. The sessions began the first of September and during all the time Henry was professor in the Academy the only opportunity he had for experimental investigations was during the summer vacations, and practically for only one month, the last part of July and the first part of August. When the vacation began Henry would set up his apparatus in the main hall of the building and he could work with it until in August the time came for the building to be cleaned and gotten ready for the classes which met, as I have said, the first of September. I must ask you to consider this situation and to contrast it with that of the investigators in Europe, especially of Faraday. Here was a man evidently full of ideas, evidently eager to add to knowledge and to test his theories by experiments; but he had no apparatus, he had no means to buy any even if it had been available and he had at his dis- posal only a few weeks of the year in which he could devote himself to what was really the purpose of his life. When one considers these circumstances it is extraordinary indeed that Henry should have been able to advance as far as he did. Henry read with eagerness everything that was published in regard to the connection between electricity and magnetism and as soon as he became a professor at the Albany Academy he began to make plans for the continuation of the experimental work of which he had read. The first thing he planned to do, naturally, was to repeat the work of others so as to convince himself of its accuracy and to become more familiar with the phenomena. In thinking over the experiments done by oth- ers he believed that he could increase the sensitiveness of the apparatus and could magnify the forces by an extremely simple device, which apparently had not occurred to anyone else. ‘This was to use coils of insulated wire in place of single turns, and in October, 1827 he dem- onstrated before the Albany Institute the various experiments of Ampére and others using coils and thus magnifying the effect greatly. In order to super-impose one layer of the coil upon another layer, thus forming a bobbin, it was obviously necessary to insulate the wire it- self, which he did by wrapping the wire ‘“‘with silk,’’ as he says. Ihave heard from the family that “‘the silk” used by Henry in making some of his first coils was really a series of ribbons of silk obtained by the sacrifice on the part of his wife of her white silk petticoat. An electro- magnet made by Joseph Henry and used in his experiments is still in existence, being treasured in the museum at Princeton University, and pDEc. 19, 1931 AMES: HENRY’S EXPERIMENTS 497 one can still see the white silk ribbons used in its construction, so I believe the story I have heard is true. One can hardly overestimate the importance of this device of Henry’s. No one up to this time had thought apparently of using insulated wire coiled in layers, and immediately after Henry described his apparatus all the investigators of Europe adopted the idea. Faraday in his orig- inal apparatus, used when he made his discovery of electromagnetic induction, wound bare wire on an insulated iron ring, the separate coils being kept apart by winding between them a long twine, the separate layers being kept apart by pieces of non-conducting cloth. One can- not tell by reading Faraday’s papers whether this idea was original with him or whether it was adopted after having seen Henry’s published paper. Asa matter of fact, in no one of Faraday’s papers is there any reference to the experimental work of Joseph Henry. Henry’s first application of this new principle of coiling long wires into a number of layers was in the construction of a small electromag- net which he exhibited before the Albany Academy in June, 1828; and, having found how successful it was, he made another more powerful one the following year, which he exhibited in March, 1829. He then had a new idea in regard to the winding of magnets and in the latter part of the same year made one in which he had two independent wind- ings over the whole length of the iron core, so that he could join these two in parallel. Then in order to make a magnet which could be used for many experimental purposes, in August, 1830 he wound one in a distinctly novel way, producing a magnet by far the most powerful then in existence. He wound the core of this magnet with nine sepa- rate coils, each coil occupying a space of about two inches. The terminals of each coil extended out from the side so that he was able to join the nine coils either in series or in parallel. This offered him a great variety of experimental possibilities. He investigated in connec- tion with this magnet the effect of using a number of voltaic cells arranged in parallel or in series and he emphasized the effect of having the cells when in series joined with the coils of his magnet also in series and similarly the effect of having either one cell or all the cells in paral- lel joined with the coils of his magnet when these were in parallel. He made a study of what we would today call Ohm’s law so far as the effect of the internal resistance of batteries is concerned and also per- formed many other experiments, some of which [ will refer to later. All this was in August, 1830. In November of the same year he saw in 498 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 Brewster’s Edinborough Journal an account of some work done by the Dutch physicist, Moll, in regard to electromagnets and thought it best to write an account of his work up to that time upon the same subject. This he did in November and submitted it for publication in Szlliman’s Journal. It was published in January, 1831 and was Henry’s first scientific publication in a recognized scientific journal. It was charac- teristic of Henry for many years not to publish his results as soon as he had obtained them, but rather to wait until he had tested and investi- gated the various ideas which were in his mind on any one subject so that he would be convinced that he had exhausted the possibilities of that particular line of thought. This quality of his mind resulted naturally in the fact that so far as publication was concerned he was anticipated often and he was in several cases persuaded by his friends to write brief accounts of what he had done after the publication by others of their work. I refer above to experiments which Henry made with his final form of magnet, and these he did not include in his paper in Silliman’s Journal, which was confined simply to a description of his magnets. His reason for not publishing some of these experiments which were made in August, 1830 was because he intended to continue these further, and during August, 1831 he was very busy preparing some new appa- ratus one portion of which was a large reel containing a mile of wire and another was a much more powerful electromagnet. In a letter of No- vember 6, 1831 he says that he had been making this apparatus “for some contemplated experiments in the identity of electricity and mag- netism.”’ In another letter he says that he had to stop his work on this new apparatus because the room in which he was working was wanted for the classes of the Academy. It is clear, therefore, that in August, 1831 he had been occupied with the construction of apparatus with the idea of continuing some of the work which he had begun in August, 1830 and which he had not thought to be sufficiently advanced to justify publication. Immediately after the discovery of the fact that an electric current through a coil of wire would magnetize a piece of iron and in fact that a coil of wire carrying an electric current had magnetic properties, many investigators felt that there should be some way by which an electric current could be produced by means of a magnet and experiments of various kinds were tried. Among others, Michael Faraday of the Royal Institution, London, occupied himself with the problem for some pEc. 19, 1931 AMES: HENRY’S EXPERIMENTS 499 years and on August 29th, 1831 began a series of experiments which finally solved the problem. He reported the essential features of his experiments to the Royal Institution and also to the Royal Society and preliminary accounts were published in the spring of 1832. Henry saw these probably in June of that year and thought it best to publish at once his preliminary investigations on the same subject, so that the first published account of his work appeared in the July, 1832 number of Silliman’s Journal. In this account he describes experiments on the production of electric currents by varying the magnetic field through a coil of wire and also an observation which he had made some years be- fore concerning the spark which is produced when an electric circuit is broken. He noted further that these two phenomena were evidently due to the same fundamental cause. I shall describe later the details of these experiments, but I wish at this time to call attention to the probable dates at which they were performed. In view of what I have said above I do not think there can be any doubt but that his observa- tions of induced electric currents due to a varying magnetic field were carried out in August, 1830 when he was working with his new magnet. In fact, he says explicitly that the observations were made by using this magnet. When he observed the spark produced at the breaking of a circuit and studied the effect on this spark of various forms of the cir- cuit it is quite impossible to say. It certainly was an early observa- tion and the date has been set by Joseph Henry’s daughter, Miss Mary Henry, asin 1829. ‘This is extremely probable and the claim, I think, is supported by various considerations. Miss Henry says that she often talked with her father concerning the early history of electro- magnetic induction and that he always spoke as if he had discovered induced currents in 1830 and made his first observations of self in- duction in 1829. I think it is very reasonable to believe that it was his observation of the electric spark on breaking a circuit and certain other phenomena to which I shall refer later, these being made in August, 1829, that led him to undertake the experiments which cul- minated in the discovery of induced currents in August, 1830 after he had completed his new magnet. In any case he saw so much ahead of him in August, 1830 calling for the construction of new apparatus that he thought it best not to publish his preliminary studies, so that August, 1831 found him busy making the apparatus which he felt necessary to have available to continue his investigations. Then again, he was stopped in his work by the opening of the school session and probably 500 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 he would not have published any full account of his studies until after August, 1832 if it had not been for the fact that he saw that Faraday had already made some of the discoveries with which he was familiar as the result of his own investigations. After Henry saw the brief notes concerning Faraday’s work he took up the problem anew, repeating some of Faraday’s work and extending his own, although the latter was very complete and convincing. Having made his powerful electromagnet, which I have described above (earlyin the summer of 1830), he wound a coil of wire around the armature of the magnet and led the terminals of the wires to an instru- ment for indicating current. He noticed that when he turned on the magnetizing current there was immediately a fling of the galvanoscope needle and that when he broke the magnetizing current there was a fling in the opposite direction. He further observed that when he turned the magnetizing current off and detached the armature there was also a fling of the galvanoscope needle, the amount of which varied according to the distance he moved the armature. Finally, he ob- served that when the armature was in place on the magnet and he va- ried the magnetizing current there was also a fling. So he felt justified in drawing the conclusion that there was an instantaneous current in one or the other direction in a helix of copper wire surrounding a piece of soft iron accompanying every change in the magnetic intensity of the iron. No statement concerning the production of induced electric currents could be any clearer than this. His observation of certain phenomena of self induction, probably made in 1829, was equally important. Having noticed this fact of the appearance of a spark which may have been and probably was a chance observation owing to some break in an electric circuit, he studied the effect of having the circuit consist of a short wire or a long one and also the effect of coiling a conductor into a spiral or helix, noting the in- creased effect when the latter was done. We have seen that in the summer of 1831 Henry was busy making a new magnet and new apparatus for experimental purposes. In 1832 he was elected Professor of Natural Philosophy at the College of New Jersey, now Princeton, and he moved there with his family in Novem- ber of that year. The first few years of his incumbency were occupied with the immediate duties of his chair and he did not have an opportu- nity to continue his studies until 1834. In November of that year Far- aday published an account of his discovery of the phenomena of self induction and Henry’s friends persuaded him that it was his duty to janet 19,1931 AMES: HENRY’S EXPERIMENTS 501 publish at once an account of what he had done on the same subject up to that time. This he did. He gave an oral account of his work before the American Philosophical Society in Philadelphia at its meet- ing of January 16, 1835 and wrote a fuller account, which was published in Stllaman’s Journal. He had extended the observations to which I have referred above by investigating not alone the spark produced on breaking the circuit, but also the currents and the shock which accom- panied the break. He had also studied the effect of introducing iron into a helix and had really made great progress. From this time on Henry worked fairly continuously and, apparently having learned his lesson in regard to publication, communicated his results as soon as he was convinced that they were definite. He had been elected a mem- ber of the American Philosophical Society in 1834 and thereafter he communicated his results to this Society and they were published in its Transactions or Proceedings. He continued for some years his study of the phenomena of self induction and other effects of electromagnetic induction; in fact there was a constant series of publications on the subject till his election as Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution in December, 1846. In one series of experiments he investigated the effect of a discharge of a Leyden jar through his primary coil in producing induced currents in neighboring conductors and was ultimately led to the proof that such a discharge was oscillatory. (Conviction that this was the character of the discharge had been expressed previously in 1827, by Savaray, but this fact was not known by Henry.) He was able to prove also that this inductive action produced by discharges through a primary con- ductor was felt at considerable distances, certainly as far as two hun- dred feet. ‘This is the first experiment on record of electromagnetic waves (in 1842). One of his most important studies dealt with the effect of introduc- ing sheets of conductors between his primary and secondary coils (in 1838). One of the main interests in this study lies in the fact that Henry’s observations were quite contrary to those announced by Far- aday. Henry showed that the introduction of a plate of copper cut off completely the inductive action, whereas Faraday had found that there was no shielding effect. The explanation of the discrepancy, which Henry, himself, was able to make, lies in the fact that Henry’s observa- tions were on what we nowadays call electromotive force, whereas Faraday in his investigations was concerned with the quantity of 502 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 induced current. This fact emphasizes the difference in the experi- mental equipment of the two investigators. Henry had practically no measuring apparatus and had to content himself with such observa- tions as sparks and the shocks received when discharges were passed through his body; Faraday, on the other hand, had a well equipped laboratory. It is extremely interesting as one reads the papers by the two great physicists to see how they express themselves without having the benefit of the knowledge which came when Ohm’s law was known. I think of the two men Henry had perhaps a clearer understanding of the essential features of induced currents, but I could not give con- clusive proof of this. Both men were aware of the fact that there was one quality of the current which depended upon the rate at which the magnetic field is changed, this being what determines the shock in the muscles and the distance at which a spark will occur in a broken circuit, and that there was another property of the current depending upon the total change in the field, which determined the fling of the galvanom- eter needle. ‘The former was independent of the material of the con- ductor, while the latter varied with it. It was not, however, until the work of Lenz and of Neumann that all the difficulties were removed and all the phenomena expressed in one simple equation. One interesting experiment of Henry’s in this connection was to show that although there were differences in the shock produced in the sec- ondary coil when the current was made or broken in the primary, there was no difference at all in the fling of the galvanometer needle. This observation led him to a very careful study of the phenomena associated with making and breaking a circuit. The discrepancies between the observations of Henry and of Fara- day, dependent upon the fact that the former was observing as a rule electromotive force while the latter was measuring the quantity of current, reminds one very much of the discrepancies which existed in the early history of mechanics, discrepancies which were only cleared up by the mathematical work of D’Alembert. Mechanics had its origin, as is known to you all, in the work of Galileo, Newton and Huy- ghens, and in the century that followed their first publications a con- troversy as to the proper measure of those agencies in nature which produce the changes in velocity of a body. One school of writers in- sisted that the proper measure of the effect of such agencies was to be found in the difference in the squares of the velocities of the body at the beginning and the end of the action. Another school insisted equally pec, 19; 1931 COOKE: COASTAL TERRACES 903 vehemently that the effect should be measured by the difference in the velocity. If this dispute were stated in modern language it would be somewhat as follows: Is the effect to be measured by the change in the kinetic energy or by the change in the momentum? It was D’Alembert who first showed that neither one of them was the proper measure, because the change in the kinetic energy is equal to the product of the force by the distance through which the body moves under the action of the force, while the change in the momentum is equal to the product of the force by the time during which the body is under the action of the force. Or, it may be said, if one wishes to, that both schools were right and that they were looking at the two sides of the shield as in the ancient fable. Something of the same kind may be said in regard to work of Henry and Faraday. ‘Their research work was absolutely trustworthy, but their interpretation of this could not be completely satisfactory until the work of Ohm was appreciated and until the mathematicians had completed their study. I can add but little to what is well known concerning Henry’s qual- ities aS an investigator and administrator. As one reads the various papers contributed to the memorial volume devoted to his life, one is struck by the universal admiration for his broad philosophy, his accu- racy of observation, his brilliant intuitions and his devotion to the cause of science in its widest interpretation. He was unselfish to a marked degree. He was not interested the faintest in personal advancement or in advancing claims for discoveries or inventions. His sole purposes in life were to interpret nature and to diffuse knowledge among men. Beyond any doubt he is the outstanding figure in the history of the scientific life of America. GEOLOGY.—Seven coastal terraces in the southeastern States... C. WyTHE CookE, U.S. Geological Survey. In two recent papers? I called attention to the horizontality of the shore lines that bound the marine Pleistocene terraces of the eastern and southeastern United States and interpreted it as due to the stabil- 1 Received November 17, 1931. Published by permission of the Acting Director of the U.S. Geological Survey. | 2C. WrytHEr Cooxr. Pleistocene seashores. This JouRNAL 20: 389-395. 1930. Correlation of coastal terraces. Jour. Geol. 38: 577-589. 1930. 504 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 ity of the land on which a fluctuating sea had cut its marks at various levels. The fluctuations of sea level were attributed primarily to the varying quantities of water contained in the waxing and waning con- tinental ice caps, sea level having been low during times of greater glaci- ation and high when there was less ice. Under this hypothesis, the shore line of each coastal terrace was formed during an interglacial stage. I also pointed out the obvious facts that fluctuations of sea level are not local but are world-wide and that contemporaneous beaches stand at nearly the same level on all lands that have not moved since the sea lay upon them but that the beaches may vary somewhat in altitude because of local differences of tidal range. As many lands have presumably remained rigid and undisturbed throughout Quater- nary time, it may be possible to detect abandoned beaches along their margins at the same altitudes as those along the southeastern part of the United States. When they are found a ready means will be at hand to establish exact correlations between the interglacial Pleisto- cene deposits of the eastern United States and those of other conti- nents. Anthropologists and archeologists may be able to date the stages in the evolution of man and his cultures in terms of an inter- continental chronology, and glacialists may eventually tie in the com- plex history of the advances and retreats of the ice sheets of North America with those of other lands. In the papers cited I recognized only six Pleistocene shore lines at altitudes about 25, 65, 95, 160, 215, and 265 feet above the present sea level, but mentioned the possibility that there might be more than the six enumerated. ‘The altitudes assigned to these shore lines were in- tended to indicate the approximate position of mean sea level when each terrace was formed, and were therefore purposely made a little lower than the highest water marks of the time, which presumably were produced by high tides and storms. In the present paper atten- tion is called to a seventh shore line which was overlooked in earlier work, the altitudes of the beaches are revised (the average former high- water mark rather than former mean sea level being chosen although the datum of reference is present mean sea level), the distribution of each terrace in the southeastern States is sketched, and reeommenda- tions are made as to what name should be applied to each terrace. The altitudes of the seven shore lines now recognized and the preferred names of the terraces corresponding to them are as follows: pec. 19, 1931 COOKE: COASTAL TERRACES 505 270 feet (82 meters), Brandywine terrace. 215 feet (66 meters), Coharie terrace. 170 feet (52 meters), Sunderland terrace. 100 feet (30 meters), Wicomico terrace. 70 feet (21 meters), Penholoway terrace. 42 feet (13 meters), Talbot terrace. 25 feet (8 meters), Pamlico terrace. It should not be forgotten that points on a terrace are ordinarily lower than the corresponding shore line and may be almost as low as the next lower shore line. Thus, the Sunderland terrace Gf no intermediate terraces have been overlooked) may range in altitude from 170 feet above sea level at its former shore line to 100 feet above sea level at its outer edge. All of the terraces above listed are, in my opinion, recognizable in the eastern United States at least as far north as Maryland and are interpreted by me to indicate marine or estuarine shore lines through- out their extent. According to another interpretation recently published* marine terraces in the Potomac basin are recognized only below 100 feet elevation and all deposits above that level are considered to belong to an alluvial fan laid down on land by the Potomac River. The Brandywine terrace.—The type locality of the Brandywine ter- race may be considered to be the same as that of the Brandywine forma- tion, about which there can be no question. Clark‘ wrote as follows: “The name Brandywine is proposed for this formation as the deposits are extensively and typically developed in the vicinity of Brandywine, Prince Georges County, Maryland... . Brandywine... . islocated on the slightly-eroded surface of the old Brandywine terrace not far from the center of the largest tract still preserved intact. . . . . The formation attains its maximum thickness in the general area in which Brandywine is situated. No section of the formation is exposed at Brandywine since it is situated on the uneroded surface of the forma- tion, but the adjacent ravines both to the east and west cut through the formation, exhibiting the gravels, sands, and loams characteristic of the formation.”’ 3M. R. Camppetnu. Alluvial fan of Potomac River. Geol. Soc. Am. Bull. 42: 182. 1931. 4W. B. CuarKx. The Brandywine formation of the Middle Atlantic Coastal Plain. Am. Jour. Sci. (4th. ser.) 40: 499, 505. 1915. 506 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 As Clark included in the Brandywine formation some deposits that are now known to be older and others that are younger than those at Brandywine, the formation should be restricted so as to include only those gravels, sands and loams that were laid down in the Brandywine sea and in the contemporaneous estuaries and rivers. As the shore of the sea and estuaries during Brandywine time appears to stand about 270 feet above the present sea level, that altitude may be assumed to represent the upper limit of the Brandywine formation and the 270- foot contour line may be assumed to mark approximately the land- ward margin of the Brandywine terrace except where the land has been cut back by later erosion. If, however, a shore line between 233 feet (the altitude of Brandywine) and 270 feet should be discovered, the for- mation and terrace would need to be further restricted. Several remnants of the Brandywine terrace in Virginia are shown on the map of Washington (D. C.) and vicinity, notably the ridge between Baileys Crossroads and Theological Seminary and along the Fairfax Road south of Back Lick Run. Part of the so-called “Lafayette’’ terrace of North Carolina represents the Brandywine. In the mapped parts of South Carolina and Georgia the Brandywine terrace is con- siderably dissected, but farther south in Georgia it is represented by large flat areas. ‘The name “Hazlehurst’’ which I applied to it in 1925 should be discarded in favor of Brandywine, which has priority. The Brandywine terrace does not appear on any published topo- graphic maps of Florida because the areas mapped are too low, but it probably fringes the highlands of western Florida and of Dade County which rise above 270 feet. | The Coharie terrace.—The typical Coharie terrace® is crossed by Great Coharie Creek in Sampson County, North Carolina, and is shown on the Coharie quadrangle. The prevailing altitude of the plain in this region is between 180 and 190 feet, although it rises to 210 feet above sea level in the northwestern corner of the quadrangle. The shore of the Coharie sea does not cross the Coharie quadrangle, but is faintly shown in the western part of the Four Oaks quadrangle, which adjoins it on the north, where there is a rise from 215 feet to 230 feet within a quarter of a mile. The shore is more plainly visible on the Orangeburg (South Carolina) quadrangle, where a scarp rises from about 215 feet to 270 feet in half a mile. Although these slopes 5L. W. SrepHenson. North Carolina Geol. Survey 3: 273. 1912. The Coharie terrace, as mapped by Stephenson, included a large part of the Brandywine. DEc. 19, 1931 COOKE: COASTAL TERRACES 507 would appear insignificant in a hilly country, they are much steeper than the normal slope of the undissected terrace plain. The ‘‘Claxton” terrace of Georgia, as shown on the Claxton quad- rangle, stands at the same altitude as the typical Coharie, and is evi- dently the same terrace. ‘The name Coharie has many years’ priority. Part of a large outlier of Coharie terrace (an island in the Sunderland sea) is shown on the Arredondo quadrangle north and northwest of Gainesville, Fla. In Virginia, the Coharie terrace is considerably dis- sected, but many flat patches of it remain, such as that 2 miles east of Fredericksburg (Stafford quadrangle and map of Fredericksburg and vicinity) and at Arlington (map of Washington and vicinity). In the District of Columbia, the Coharie terrace (estuarine facies) is well developed at Meridian Hill Park and in the Mount Pleasant section of Washington. In Maryland, the uplands in the southern part of the Brandywine quadrangle are part of the Coharie terrace. The Sunderland terrace—The name of the Sunderland terrace is derived from the hamlet of Sunderland, Calvert County, Maryland (Prince Frederick quadrangle). This place is not very suitable for a type locality, for it appears to lie between two outliers of the Coharie terrace, but the Sunderland terrace is further defined by Shattuck® as being limited by an ancient sea cliff at Charlotte Hall (Wicomico quadrangle), the foot of which he said is 170 feet above sea level. This definition is quite satisfactory. However, in later work’ Shattuck in- cluded in the Sunderland much that falls within the Coharie and other terraces as now defined, with the result that the surface and the shore line of the composite Sunderland terrace appeared to be warped. The name Sunderland should be restricted to the terrace that is - bounded by the shore line at or near 170 feet above sea level. The shore of the Sunderland sea appears to have lain against or near the crystalline rocks of the Piedmont from Wilmington, Del., to Baltimore; thence it trended southward to the vicinity of Mechanics- ville, St. Marys County, Md., lying several miles west of Patuxent River south of Bowie. There was a wide embayment up the Potomac Valley to Washington. In Virginia, the shore gradually approached the Piedmont, which it reached near Richmond and followed to the North Carolina line. The shore can be traced across the Kenly (North Carolina) quadrangle at an altitude apparently a little above 170 feet, 6G. B.Ssattuck. Am. Geol. 28: 102-103. 1901. 7 Maryland Geol. Survey. Pliocene and Pleistocene. 1906. 508 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 although the large contour interval and the lack of detail in the map do not permit one to locate it very accurately. In the mapped part of South Carolina, the shore is rather faint, but it can be traced at an altitude between 170 and 175 feet above sea level from the south fork of Edisto River near Bamberg past Allendale to the former estuary of Savannah River (Bamberg, Olar, Allendale, and Peeples quadrangles). In Georgia, the Sunderland terrace has been called the ““Okefenokee”’ plain or terrace, but the name Sunderland has priority. The Wicomico terrace.—Wicomico River in St. Marys and Charles counties, Maryland, suggested the name of the Wicomico terrace. According to Shattuck’ in southern Maryland the base lies about 40 or 50 feet, and the top, where it borders its ancient sea cliff, about 90 feet above sea level. ‘The only area within these limits in the neighborhood of Wicomico River shown on the much-generalized map of the Wicom- ico quadrangle is about 1 square mile southwest of Cooksey that lies between the 80 and the 100-foot contour lines. This area may be regarded as the type locality of the Wicomico terrace. Ninety feet appears to be somewhat lower than the Wicomico shore line. Even 95 feet, which I assigned to the Wicomico in a recent paper, is a little too low. One hundred feet (80 meters) above sea level is generally considered as the upper limit of the Wicomico, and that alti- tude appears to be about right. In Maryland, the Wicomico terrace is best developed on the Eastern Shore, where it forms the crest of the divide in Kent and Queen Anne counties, but strips of it are found along most of the estuaries west of Chesapeake Bay. The Capitol at Washington is built on it and Capi- tol Hill was mentioned by Shattuck as an example of the terrace. In Virginia, the Wicomico seashore followed the Surry scarp,° the foot of which lies about 100 feet about sea level (Surry and Ivor quadrangles), but estuarine reentrants of the terrace extend to the Fall Line along some of the streams. In North Carolina, part of the shore line is shown on the Falkland quadrangle south of Fieldsboro at an altitude of about 100 feet. Itshows on the Manning and Pineland quadrangles (South Carolina) at the same level. On the Glennville (Georgia) quadrangle, the Wicomico shore can be traced along or near the 100- foot contour line southward for two-thirds the length of the map and 8G. B.Ssatrtruck. Am. Geol. 28: 103. 1901. 9C. K. WentwortH. Sand and gravel resources of the Coastal Plain of Virginia. Virginia Geol. Survey Bull. 32: 55. 1930. 7 pees td 1931 COOKE: COASTAL TERRACES 509 westward up the former seven-mile-wide estuary of the Altamaha River. In Florida, the Wicomico terrace, called ‘“Newberry” by Mat- son, covers much of the Cambon quadrangle. Its shore lay along Trail Ridge on the adjoining Macclenny quadrangle and on the Lawtey quadrangle. Here, too, the altitude of the shore line is very close to 100 feet above sea level. The Penholoway terrace-—The type locality of the Penholoway ter- race is shown on the Hortense (Georgia) quadrangle.” ‘This area lay back of a low barrier island on which Browntown and Winslow (Everett City quadrangle) stand and apparently was partly covered by tidal marshes, to judge from the pattern of the present drainage. High tides reached 70 feet above present sea level or possibly a foot or two higher. Seventy feet (21 meters) may be taken as the altitude of the shore of the Penholoway sea. In Florida, a terrace standing within the limits of altitude of the Penholoway and probably equivalent to it has been called by Matson the “Tsala Apopka” terrace. but its type locality shows so much evi- dence of underground solution that the position of its shore line is problematical. ‘The name Penholoway is therefore preferred although Tsala Apopka has priority. The shore of the Penholoway sea can be easily traced at an altitude of about 70 feet across the Walterboro (South Carolina) quadrangle. Summerville and Pinopolis are built on a long spit or island that sepa- rated the Penholoway sea from the mainland. Ridgeville stands on a barlike island at the mouth of the bay back of it (Summerville and Ridgeville quadrangles). The seashore of the Penholoway terrace forms the southern part of the Kinston (North Carolina) quadrangle. In Virginia most of the seaward-facing part of the Penholoway terrace has been destroyed, but there are a few areas (notably south of York- town) which lie within its altitudes. Several remnants of the estuarine part of the Penholoway terrace border Potomac River in Arlington County, Virginia. College Park, Md., (map of Washington and vicinity) is built near the head of a Penholoway estuary. A ridge of clay that rises to an altitude of about 70 feet above sea level near the Mount Vernon Memorial Highway near Fort Hunt, Va., (Indian Head quadrangle) is interpreted as having been deposited during Penholoway 10C, WytHE Cooks. Physical geography of Georgia. Georgia Geol. Survey Bull. 42: 24. 1925. 010 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 time by the Potomac estuary across the entrace to an old drowned me- ander curve cut by the Potomac River at some stage of Pliocene time." The Talbot terrace——According to the original definition by Shat- tuck,” the 45-foot contour line marks the shore of the Talbot sea. As the actual shore line seems to be three or four feet lower than this, the altitude adopted in this paper is 42 feet, or 13 meters. The name is taken from Talbot County, Maryland. Shattuck included in the Talbot not only the Talbot terrace as here restricted, but everything between its shore and the Recent terrace that is now forming. Steph- enson, in describing the Pleistocene deposits of North Carolina, divided the composite Talbot terrace into two parts, an upper ‘‘Chowan”’ terrace, which has the same shore line® as the typical Talbot, and a lower Pamlico terrace. It seems preferable to retain the name Talbot for the upper terrace and to discard the newer name “Chowan.” In Delaware and Maryland the ocean extended inland 12 or 15 miles beyond the present seashore during Talbot time. A low seaward- facing scarp above the 40-foot contour line on the Pittsville quadrangle shows its former margin. Elsewhere in Maryland, including Talbot County, the Talbot terrace was covered by Chesapeake Bay and its tributary estuaries. In Virginia, most of the seaward-facing part of the Talbot terrace has been destroyed, but the terrace is developed along many of the estuaries. The foot of an unusually fresh-looking east- ward-trending scarp facing the James in the southeastern part of the Toano quadrangle a quarter of a mile north of B. M. 22 stands 41 feet above sea level. ‘The sharpness of this scarp may have been accen- tuated by artificial grading. | | In the mapped parts of South Carolina little of the original shore of the Talbot sea remains, although there were many islands of Talbot terrace in the succeeding Pamlico sea. In the Physical geography of Georgia, I pointed out*4 what is probably a remnant of the Talbot terrace between Hinesville and Canoochee River (Hinesville quadrangle) but interpreted it as a bench cut while the sea stood at a higher level. 11 Wentworth (op. cit., page 77) interprets this oxbow as having been cut off and partly silted up in late Talbot time. 2G. B.SHartuck. Am. Geol. 28: 104. 1901. 13 Stephenson did not define the ‘‘Chowan’’ terrace by reference to a shore line although he states (op. cit., page 283) that ‘‘the surface of the [Chowan] formation forms a plain which slopes up from elevations of about 25 to 40 feet above sea level along its eastern margin to elevations of about 50 feet along the foot of the escarpment separat- ing it from the Wicomico plain above.’’ 14 Georgia Geol. Survey Bull. 42: 32. 1925. DEc. 19, 1931 COOKE: COASTAL TERRACES 511 The Talbot shore line is better shown along the East Coast of Flor- ida, where it follows the 40-foot contour line from the forks of Black Creek on the Middleburg quadrangle southeastwardly across the south- western corner of the Orange Park quadrangle. It is even more con- spicuous on the Interlachen quadrangle, at the same altitude. Lever- ett has traced this shore line down the eastern side of the Peninsula at an altitude of about 40 feet and referred it to the ‘‘Pensacola”’ terrace. The Pamlico terrace—The name Pamlico is derived from Pamlico Sound in eastern North Carolina, away from whose shores the Pamlico terrace extends as broad, nearly level stretches of lowland. The plain is also present on both sides of Pamlico River and covers the greater part of Pamlico County. According to Stephenson, the terrace nowhere in North Carolina is higher than 25 feet above sea level. The Pamlico terrace may therefore be defined as the terrace having a shore line approximately 25 feet above sea level. In Maryland the Pamlico seashore lay near the present Atlantic coast. ‘Traces of it can be seen on the Snow Hill quadrangle. The estuarine facies of the terrace borders Chesapeake Bay from a few miles below Havre de Grace to Baltimore and covers a broad expanse on the Eastern Shore below Chestertown. From the North Carolina line almost to Charleston, 8. C., the shore of the Pamlico sea appears to have been cuspate and almost continuous, but from Charleston to Savannah there were many irregular islands like the Sea Islands of today. In Georgia the Pamlico shore consists of two broad cusps broken by several bays and inlets. Almost everywhere in the area covered by topographic maps it is marked by a moderately high scarp, the foot of which lies about 25 feet above sea level. The terrace was excellently described by Otto Veatch” under the name “‘Satilla coastal lowland or Satilla plain’’ in a book which bears a date of publication a year earlier than that of Stephenson’s description of the Pamlico although the letter of transmittal of the North Carolina report is dated four months earlier than that of the Georgia report. The name Pamlico is preferred because it has gained wider acceptance than “‘Satilla.”’ In eastern Florida the Pamlico terrace is backed by a scarp whose 15 FRANK LEVERETT. The Pensacola terrace and associated beaches and bars in Florida. Florida Geol. Survey Bull.7: 9-17. 1931. 167,,W. STEPHENSON. North Carolina Geol. Survey 3: 286. 1912. 17 Orro VEatcH. Georgia Geol. Survey Bull. 26: 36-38. 1911. 512 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 base lies below the 30-foot and above the 20-foot contour lines on the Boulogne, Hilliard, Cambon, Orange Park and Palatka quadrangles. In western Florida it stands at the same altitude on the War Depart- ment’s fire-control map of Pensacola. Leverett!® places the height of the ‘‘Pensacola”’ sea at Pensacola about 25 feet above present sea level. Matson” described the “‘Pensacola terrace” as ‘‘a broad plain, rising less than 40 feet above sea level, and apparently including two divisions, one being less than 20 feet above, and the other from 20 to 40 feet above sea level.’?’ The lower of these two divisions is the Pamlico terrace; the upper is the Talbot. Frank Leverett, in searching for evidence of deformation of the “‘Pensacola’’ shore line, overlooked the shore line of the lower of these two divisions in the east and the shore line of the upper of the two in the west. Therefore, in correlat- ing the 40-foot (Talbot) shore in eastern Florida with the 25-foot (Pam- lico) shore at Pensacola, he finds a gentle slope toward the west which he ascribes to tilt due to the increasing weight of the delta of Mississippi River. As further indication of this downwarp he says: ‘‘In the vicin- ity of Baton Rouge, on the east side of the Mississippi, the base of a scarp is down to about 15 feet.’? The foot of the scarp to which he referred, which is the one adjacent to Bayou Fountain on the Baton Rouge, La., quadrangle, slopes southeastward from about 30 feet at Baton Rouge to an altitude below 10 feet at the edge of the quadrangle, and apparently closely approaches sea level in the unmapped area farther east. It seems to have been the Recent shore of the Gulf be- fore the Mississippi Delta was built up in front of it. The slope is that of the surface of the delta and is not due to tilting. Another scarp near Baton Rouge, shown by the closeness of the 40- and 50-foot con- tour lines, may mark either the Pamlico or the Talbot shores, or possi- bly both, for the Mississippi River is able to deposit sediment upon both the Pamlico and the Talbot terraces (raising them above their natural level) because high water at Baton Rouge, according to the map, is 41 feet above sea level. No topographic maps showing the shores of Pamlico Sound have been published. The Belhaven quadrangle, however, which lies only a few miles north of Pamlico River, includes a large area of Pamlico 18 FRANK LEVERETT. Florida Geol. Survey Bull. 7: 24. 1931. 19G.C. Matson. Geology and ground waters of Florida. U.S. Geol. Survey Water- Supply Paper 319: 34. 1913. 20 FRANK LEVERETT. Op. cit., pp. 26-29. pHe. 1D 19351 DRECHSLER: CROWN-ROT OF HOLLYHOCKS 513 terrace and shows a short stretch of its shore line in the northwestern corner at an altitude of very nearly 25 feet. The Pamlico shore line can be easily traced across the Edenton, Beckford, and Suffolk quad- rangles into Virginia, where it lies at the foot of the Suffolk Searp. Wentworth” has recently proposed to substitute for the Pamlico terrace of Virginia two terraces, an upper, which he calls the ‘Dismal Swamp” terrace, and a lower or ‘‘Princess Anne”’ terrace. If a marine terrace be defined by reference to the shore line of the tidal waters in which it was formed, it can not be divided, for a terrace can have only one shore line, although its supposed width may be restricted by the discovery of another shore line within the areal limits that had been assigned to it. As the ‘Dismal Swamp”’ terrace has identically the same shore line as the Pamlico,” the name Pamlico, which has many years priority, should be retained. The ‘‘Princess Anne”’ terrace was separated from the ‘“‘Dismal Swamp” because of the presence of a low scarp above 12 feet in the neighborhood of Norfolk and elsewhere in Virginia. Although no one can dispute the existence of this scarp, for it is plainly shown on the Cape Henry quadrangle, opinions may differ as to whether it is really a sea cliff formed at a stage of the sea about 12 feet above the present sea level. The evidence at present appears to be inconclusive. BOTANY .—A crown-rot of hollyhocks caused by Phytophthora mega- sperma n. sp... CHARLES DRECHSLER, U.S. Department of Agriculture. On May 15, 1931, a specimen of diseased hollyhock, Althaea rosea Cav., from a garden in the District of Columbia and reported to be illustrative of a trouble that had led to the loss of other plants in the same plot, was submitted to the writer for examination. Additional specimens were received during the ensuing two weeks. Early in June, perhaps because of the advent of drier weather conditions, but more probably because all the diseased plants had by that time suc- cumbed, the destruction came to a halt in the garden referred to, though on June 5 a dying specimen from a small experimental planting 21C.K.WeEntTWorTH. Virginia Geol. Survey Bull. 32. 1930. 22C. K. WENTWORTH. Op cit., pp. 67-69. 1 Received November 16, 1931 514 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 Fig. 1. A.—Hollyhock plant affected with crown-rot, as collected in Washington, D. C. showing decay throughout short over-wintered stem and in the discolored proxi- mal portions of the fleshy roots, X?. B.—Longitudinal section of hollyhock crown attacked by Phytophthora megasperma, showing sharp line of demarcation between decayed and healthy parts at bases of new shoots, X?. Photographed by Lillian A. Guernsey. DEc. 19, 1931 DRECHSLER: CROWN-ROT OF HOLLYHOCKS 515 of hollyhocks at Arlington Experiment Farm, Rosslyn, Va., was found to be affected with the same disease. While definite information as to the distribution of the malady is not available, there is reason to be- lieve that it is fairly widespread, a grower in the vicinity of Racine, Wis., for example, stating that he had lost his entire planting of holly- hocks during the early part of June 1931, the destruction evidently having taken precisely the same course as was observed in the District of Columbia. As the seat of the malady is very largely in the underground parts (fig. 1, A), the trouble makes itself manifest at the beginning sometimes through poor growth of the new shoots, but in other instances, as no- tably in the specimen at Arlington Experiment Farm, a dozen robust shoots between 1.5 and 2.0 meters high may be produced before any sign of abnormality is noticeable. Ordinarily no premonitory changes in coloration or turgidity of leaves or stalks are apparent when one after another the shoots fall to the ground, where they soon wither and die. In the course of a few days the entire aerial growth from a well developed crown may be killed. The manner of destruction thus shows a strong similarity to that pertaining to the foot-rot of various species of Liliwm by the fungus generally designated as Phytophthora cactorum (Leb. & Cohn) Schroet., or to the foot-rot of rhubarb caused by P. parasitica Dast. When the overwintered underground parts of a dying plant are ex- amined, the short stem is usually found to be completely involved in a decay that extends downward into many if not into all of the large fleshy roots, often for distances of from 5 to 10 em. and sometimes for distances of from 15 to 20cm. Outwardly the decay is evidenced in a buff or sepia or darker brown discoloration, while internally the tissues, in addition to being more or less discolored, are softened to such a degree that the fibrous and woody elements are readily separated into longitudinal shreds. ‘The decay is found usually to extend only a very short distance from the overwintered stem into the new shoots, the line of demarcation between diseased and healthy tissues being here rather sharply marked by a darkly discolored marginal zone (fig. 1, B). Apparently the shoots obtain water for a considerable period through the vascular elements of the completely killed overwintered parent stem, and fall to the ground only when the supporting tissues are weakened mechanically in such measure as no longer to be capable of supporting the weight of the aerial structures. ith camera lucida, drawn w ‘a megasperma, of Phytophthoi 1 apparatus xua . Se 2 Fig < 1000 516 pec. 19, 1931 DRECHSLER: CROWN-ROT OF HOLLYHOCKS 517 In the greater bulk of the decaying tissues of the diseased hollyhock plants examined was found a moderate quantity of intercellular mycelium, which being usually devoid of protoplasmic contents, could not usually be made to yield new growth. New growth and subse- quently pure cultures on artificial media were obtained fairly readily from pieces of newly invaded tissue from the margins of the diseased parts by employing the method set forth in an earlier paper (4), and with very satisfactory regularity when the washing of the infected material was continued until the gelatinous substance oozing in extra- ordinary quantity from the irrigated hollyhock tissue had been largely removed. The fungus thus obtained displays in its mycelium the vegetative features generally associated with species of Phytophthora. Its star- ing, openly branching habit and the substantial appearance of the granular contents of its hyphae at once indicate a member of that genus rather than of the related genus Pythiwm. As in many other species of Phytophthora and, indeed, in various species of Pythium, septa make their appearance in the originally continuous hyphae with the withdrawal of the granular contents. In completely evacuated mycel- ium the rather thick cross-walls are present usually in considerable number. A high degree of distinctiveness attaches, however, to the sexual ap- aratus, which is produced promptly and abundantly on nearly all sub- strata ordinarily employed (figs. 2-4). Aside from its ready produc- tion, the sexual apparatus is distinguished by the unusually large dimensions of oogonium and oospore. ‘Thus 200 oogonia produced on maize-meal agar plates and chosen at random 10 to 15 days after planting, yielded measurements of diameters distributed according to values expressed to the nearest micron as follows: 33,y, 1; 34y, 1; 37 u, 1; 39u, 2; 40n, 8; 41y, 5; 43yu, 6; 44u, 7; 45u, 19; 46u, 24; 47 n, 28; ASn, 19; 49n, 27; 50p, 24; 51 p,-17; 52y, 8; 3p, 3; 54 yp, 2; 56 yu; 2; 57 nu, 1. Measurements of the diameters of the 200 oospores contained within these oogonia yielded values distributed as follows: 26 u, 1; 28u,1;30u, 1; OZ, | 33H, 2: 34, Oo} 36u, oF OC L, 6; 38 uy, 2; 39 u, Ls AOQu, oar Alp, 26; A2Qu, 26; 438 u, 30; 44, 22; 45y, 18; 46u, 8;47u,5;49n, 1; 52u,1. These values from which averages for diameter of oogonium and diameter of oospore of 47.4u and 41.4u respectively were computed, may presum- ably be regarded as fairly representative of the species, having been obtained from material in which the bodies in question were present /2P 4a/SYIaIT 518 pec. 19, 1931 DRECHSLER: CROWN-ROT OF HOLLYHOCKS 519 in large number and showed practically no tendency toward degenera- tion. The oospores in substantially all cases showed the structure normal for the stage of maturity in which they were found. Natur- ally more extreme values not included in the ranges found in the course of the random selections came under observation. ‘Thus in the sex apparatus shown in Figure 4, E, among the smallest seen in an irri- gated lima-bean agar preparation, in which somewhat smaller dimen- sions are wont to prevail then in dry maize-meal agar plate cultures, the oogonium measures only 16 in diameter, while the oospore meas- ures only 11; and again the very largest oogonium seen in any maize- meal agar culture was found to measure 61 u in diameter, and contained an oospore 54, in diameter. The pertinent literature contains few records of oogonia and oospores equalling or closely approaching in size those of the hollyhock parasite. In a recently published comparative study of the genus Phytophthora, Tucker (9) states that the oogonia and oospores of P. erythroseptica Pethyb. with average diameters of 36.3 and 31.4u respectively, and hence fully 10u smaller in these dimensions than the hollyhock fungus, exceed in size those of any congeneric form, and held this superiority in size to be diagnostic for that species. In this connection it must be mentioned that Tucker reports that on transferring sterile mycelium of P. erythroseptica to Petri’s mineral solution he found after one week a few large oogonia measuring 30.1 to 64.34 (average 45.1) in diam- eter. As, however, oospores were not observed in these oogonia there were, indeed, excellent grounds for not regarding the large struc- tures as representative of the species. Somewhat similarly disturbing considerations pertain to Petri’s report (7) of the production of oogonia varying in diameter from 57 to 62u and oospores ‘‘non ancora ben differenziate’’ measuring between 50 and 56yu by P. cambivora (Petri) Buism. grown on earrot-agar acidulated with malic acid, when pre- viously (6) oospores of the chestnut parasite in the tissues of the dis- eased host had been found to measure only 20 to 27y. Ashby (2) more recently reported the discovery of several oogonia and oospores in a pure culture of P. cambivora, which with respect to size more nearly approximated those of the hollyhock parasite. It is to be noted that whereas the antheridia of both P. erythrospetica and P. cambivora developing in pure culture have always been found to be of the amphi- gynous type, those of the hollyhock fungus are predominantly paragynous. 520 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 A really close approximation to the hollyhock parasite in size of oogonium and oospore is to be inferred from Alcock’s summary (1) of the morphological features of the fungus held by her to be responsible for the ‘Lanarkshire strawberry disease’’ prevalent of late years in Scotland and England: “‘Oogonia average about 46u to 47, in diam- eter; oospores average about 33, to 47u diameter; oospore wall about 4u thick; sporangia about 50 by 30u.’’ Antheridia of the amphigy- nous type were stated to have been made out in the cells of the host ina few instances, failure to obtain the fungus in pure culture having pre- cluded more complete observations of the sexual apparatus. Accord- ing to a later note (8) of somewhat indefinite authorship, presumably the same parasite is “characterized by a large sporangium, by oospores of the two types and as far as has been ascertained is similar to Phythoph- thora cinnamomt.”’ It is not certain whether the latter quotation is to be interpreted as implying that the strawberry parasite produces large globose resting bodies of the type described by Rands (8) for his P. cinnamomz; but assuredly no bodies of such type have ever been seen in cultures of the fungus isolated from diseased hollyhocks. ; As has been mentioned the antheridia of the hollyhock fungus are predominantly paragynous. In plate cultures of maize-meal agar approximately 99 out of every hundred sexual units exhibit a paragy- nous relationship of the male organ (figs. 2, A-F; 3, A-D; 4, A-C), the amphigynous relationship occurring only rather rarely. On irrigated lima-bean agar preparations useful in the study of asexual reproduction the proportion of amphigynous antheridia (fig. 4, D-F) is much larger, varying often between 25 and 35 in every hundred. ‘The fungus is very obviously homothallic, for in many instances when it is neither too remote nor leads into one of the knotted hyphal tangles present here and there, the mycelial connection between antheridium and oogonium may be readily traced. In some eases (figs. 2, D; 4, C) the combined - lengths of antheridial branch, oogonial stalk and intervening portion of hypha is not in excess of 40u. The usual somewhat irregularly orbicular or broadly elliptical shape of the antheridium is sometimes modified by the presence of a distal protuberance or lobe (figs. 2, B, C, D; 4, B) by which contact with the oogonium is established. In its asexual reproduction the hollyhock parasite is rather similar to Phytophthora cryptogea Pethyb. & Laff., P. connamomi and P. cambi- vora. Thesporangium is as arule ovoid (fig. 5, A-F) but frequently the development of a distal lobe or protuberance (fig. 5, K, L, N, O) brings 4 foie ~~ 8 \ ; Q Cc. ida, th camera luc Fig. 4. Sexual apparatus of Phytophthora megasperma drawn wi 1000. 1 52 522 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 about a modification in its outward form suggesting the distal modi- fications sometimes present on antheridia. A papilla of dehiscence protruding beyond the apical contour is not produced, although quite obviously the wall at the apex of the sporangium becomes trans- formed into a noticeably thickened refringent cap through the yielding of which discharge is effected. Dehiscence is accompanied by a perceptible shrinkage of the sporangial envelope, as may be seen by a comparison of Figure 4, F with Figure 4, E, the contraction apparently being only in part accounted for by the relaxed contour of the empty membrane. The hypha supporting the sporangium is proliferous, so that a second or a third sporangium may be borne on the same axis, either within the empty envelope of the primary one, or beyond the latter, depending on the lengths of the intervening increments of growth of the sporangiphore (fig. 5, G-M). The sporangia obtained in irrigated preparations are too variable for profitable statistical metric treatment. Those formed earliest in a fresh preparation measure usually from 35 to 60u in length by 25 to 45y in diameter. The larger individuals like the one shown in Figure 5, A, yield between 35 and 45 zoospores; slightly smaller examples like those shown in Figure 5, B, C, yield between 30 and 35; the medium-sized specimen represented in Figure 5, E, yielded 18 by accurate count; the small one shown in Figure 5, D, was seen to deliver 6 zoospores. As the preparations become older and in part exhausted, the sporangia decrease in size until specimens make their appearance with minimum dimensions; that is, with the length between 15 and 20u, and width between 6 and 8u. Such diminutive structures as, for example, the Fig. 5. Asexual reproductive structures of Phytophthora megasperma, drawn with camera lucida, 500. A, B, C.—Fully grown primary sporagnia. D. E.—Spor- angia immediately preceding dehiscence. F.—Empty envelope of sporangium shown in EK. G, H, I, J, K, L, M.—Sporangia and supporting hyphae showing proliferation. O, P.—Evacuated sporangial envelopes within which are retained empty cyst walls with membranous parts of papillae of dehiscence, and in P, in addition, some encysted zoo- spores without evidence of repetitional development. Q.—Sporangium after frustrated dehiscence showing one zoospore cyst wall evacuated by means of a papilla of dehiscence, one discharged miniature sporangium on a germ sporangiophore perforating the wall of the primary sporangium, and 10 zoospores in various stages of repetitional development by production of miniature germ sporangia. R, a-7.—Zoospores after rounding up. S.—Two zoospores each giving rise to a germ sporangium, a showing beginning of development, b showing miniature sporangium delimited by basal septum. T, a-f.— Zoospores, each provided with a papilla of dehiscence. U, a-h.—Evacuated cyst mem- branes after escape of zoospores in second swimming stage. V, a-c.—Zoospores germi- nating by vegetative germ tubes. W.—A zoospore in motile stage. Jap 4asSYIHg 9 ion see page 522. For explanat Phytophthora megasperma. 5. Fig 523 524 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 21 tertiary sporangium shown in Figure 5, I, give rise to only a single zoospore. The zoospores are of the biciliate, longitudinally grooved, reniform type usual in the genus (fig. 5, W), which after a period of swarming round up (fig. 5, R, a-2). A second period of motility frequently ensues, this being accomplished through both of the courses of repeti- tional development set forth for a number of congeneric forms in an earlier paper (5). In most instances the encysted zoospore produces a wide papilla (fig. 5, T, a-f) which ultimately yields at the apex to liberate the full-fledged secondary swimming spore. Usually the cylindrical modification on the evacuated cyst wall is relatively short (fig. 5, U, a-d) but in some instances modifications of more consid- erable lengths (fig. 5, U, e-h) remain behind as evidence of exceptionally long papillae. This type of development prevails also among zoospores retained in relatively small number within sporangia (fig. 5, O, P) the dehiscence of which has been partially frustrated. In fewer in- stances a properly liberated zoospore gives rise to the second swimming stage by the production of a miniature sporangium on a delicate germ sporangiophore (fig. 5, 8, a, b). Yet in cases where the dehiscence of the ordinary large sporangia has been frustrated more nearly com- pletely, so that the imprisoned zoospores are packed rather closely within the containing envelopes, the escape of the protoplasts in this species as in congeneric forms is usually acomplished through the latter type of repetitional development (fig. 5, Q). As far as the writer is aware the literature contains no record of any species of Phytophthora combining oogonia and oospores having dimensions approaching those characteristic of the hollyhock parasite with predominantly paragynous antheridia, proliferous, non-papillate sporangia and the absence of large globose ‘‘chlamydospores.” ‘The fungus under consideration is therefore described as a new species for which a specific term descriptive of the large oospore is deemed appropriate. Phytophthora megasperma nN. sp. Mycelium intercellular in tissues of host; on artificial substratum of some- what radiating aspect, composed of freely branching hyphae from 3 to 8yu in diameter; continuous in actively growing stage, later, on becoming evacuated, developing numerous, rather thick septa; producing aerial growth in small or moderate quantity ; under aquatic conditions extramatrical growth meager. pec, 19, 1931 DRECHSLER: CROWN-ROT OF HOLLYHOCKS 525 Sporangium regularly formed terminally on a long, simple or sparingly branched, extramatrical filament measuring mostly 50u to 2 mm. in length and 2 to 2.5u in diameter, though often expanding in the distal portion to a diameter of 3 to 5u; later often coming into a lateral position through con- tinued elongation of the supporting filament from immediately below the delimiting septum; regularly ovoid, but occasionally bearing distally a protu- berance or lobe of variable size; measuring 6 to 45y in transverse diameter by 15 to 60u in length; on dehiscence opening broadly at apex without formation of an outwardly protruding papilla; after evacuation proliferous in moderate measure, both by formation of sessile or nearly sessile secondary or often tertiary sporangia within primary one and by repeated growth of the support- ing filament through the orifices of the empty envelope to produce additional sporangia externally. Zoospores produced from 1 to 45in asporangium; reni- form, longitudinally grooved, biciliated, after rounding up measuring 10 to 13yu in diameter; individually germinating by germ-tubes usually 1 to 3 in number, or often, whether properly liberated or retained within the sporangial envelope owing to frustrated dehiscence, often giving rise to a secondary zoospore,— the repetitional development taking place either by direct discharge of con- tents through an evacuation tube 3.5 to 5.5u in diameter and 1 to 10u in length, or by the production of an elongated miniature sporangium mostly 6 to 10u in diameter and 16 to 22u in length on a germ sporangiophore mostly 1.5u in diameter and 10 to 60z in length. Oogonium borne terminally on a stalk usually 5 to 15yu in length; smooth, subspherical, measuring 16 to 61yu, mostly 42 to 52u (average 47.4) in dia- meter; provided with a wall 0.5 to 1.7u (average 1.2u) in thickness. Anther- idium single; irregularly orbicular or prolate ellipsoidal, sometimes provided with a distal protuberance or lobe; measuring usually 10 to 18u in diameter by 14 to 20u in length; in some (1 to 35 out of 100) cases amphigynous, but more often paragynous, in latter event usually applied near base of oogonium and often in intimate contact with oogonial stalk; borne laterally or terminally or in intercalary relationship on a branch mostly 5 to 50u in length, the branch sometimes arising from a hypha not demonstrably connected with the oogonial hypha, but sometimes having close mycelial connection with the oogonium, the total length of filamentous parts between the septa delimiting the sex organs occasionally not exceeding 40u. Oospore colorless or more often dis- tinctly yellowish; smooth, subspherical, measuring 11 to 54y, mostly 37 to 47u (average 41.4) in diameter; provided with a wall 0.8 to 4.6u (average 3.6u) in thickness, and containing a reserve globule measuring at early matur- ity 6.5 to 24.0u (average 17.6u) in diameter. Causing a destructive decay of the stem and roots of Althaea rosea Cav. in Washington, D. C. and at Rosslyn, Va. 526 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 LITERATURE CITED 1. Alcock, N. L. A root disease of the strawberry. Gard. Chron. III, 86: 14-15. Jl. 6, 1929. No. 2219. 2. Ashby, S. F. The production of sexual organs in pure cultures of Phytophthora cinnamomi Rands and Blepharospora cambivora Petri. Trans. British Mycological Soc. 14: 260-262. 1929. 3. Department of Agriculture for Scotland. Scotland: Plant disease and pests. Intern. Rev. Agr. 22(M): 94-95. Je. 1931. No.6. Also reprinted in Intern. Bull. Plant Prot. 5 (m): 94-95. Je. 1931. No. 6. 4. Drechsler, C. The beet water mold and several related root parasites. Journ. Agr. Research 38: 309-361. 1929. 5. Drechsler, C. Repetitional diplanetism in the genus Phytophthora. Journ. Agr. Research 40: 557-573. 1930. 6. Petri, L. Studi sulla malattia del castagno detia ‘‘dell’ inchiostro.’’ Morfologia e biologia del micelio parassita. Annali del R. Instituto superiore Forestale Nationale Firenze. 3: 153-185. 1918. 7. Petri, L. Osservazioni biologiche sulla ‘‘Blepharospora cambivora.’’ Annali del R. Instituto superiore Ageario e Forestale Firenze. Serie seconda 1: 155-161. 1925. 8. Rands, R. D. Streepkanker van kaneel, veroorzaakt door Phytophthora cinnamomi n. sp. (Stripe canker of cinnamon, caused by Phytophthora cinnamomi n. sp.) Meded. Inst. Plantenz. Dept. Landb. Nijv. Handel 54, 53and1p.6pl. 1922. 9. Tucker, C. M. Taxonomy of the genus Phytophthora de Bary. Missouri Agr. Exp. Stat. Research Bull. 153. 208 pp. with 30 figs. in text. Je. 1931. ; BOTANY.—The Genus Chikusichloa of Japan and China. Y. L. Kerne,? U. 8. National Herbarium. (Communicated by A. S. HITCHCOCK.) In 1925 Chikusichloa was described with a single species and was regarded as an endemic genus in Japan. This grass, however, was recently found in China and a second species as well. The new species is from the Kwangsi collection of Mr. R. C. Ching in 1928, the other from my Kiangsu (I-shing) collection in 1929. CHIKUSICHLOA Koidz. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 39: 23. 1925. A single species, C’. aquatica Koidz., is described from Japan. Spikelets perfect, 1-flowered, somewhat laterally compressed or sub- terete, the disarticulation a short distance below the lemma, the spikelets falling with a stipe attached; glumes wanting; lemma lanceolate, attenuate into a terminal awn or acuminate, membranaceous, strongly 5-7-nerved; palea a little shorter and thinner than the lemma, 2-3-nerved; styles distinct, the stigmas laterally exserted; stamen 1, the anther linear; lodicules 2, minute; grain hard, fusiform, the pericarpjadnate to the mealy seed. Aquatic peren- 1 Received November 13, 1931. 2 Fellowship student of the Rockefeller Foundation, from the National Central Uni- versity, Nanking, China. nec. 19, 1931 KENG: CHIKUSICHLOA 527 nials with simple culms, narrow blades, and terminal panicles.—Species 2, one in Japan and Southeastern China, the other in Southwestern China. A. Spikelets awned, the stipe 2-4 mm. long, usually longer than the branchlet ines VeRVVgm Ne ROSMAN Pe e vo. k ei ice ick ep eR og S soya 1. C. aquatica. AA. Spikelets awnless, the stipe 1-2 mm. long, equaling or shorter than the leanehlenbelows the jOMb.:..'0 68s gee ew Dues NALLIGG: This genus belongs to the tribe Oryzeae, but approaches the Ameri- can genus Zizaniopsis, which is differentiated from Oryzeae by the uni- sexual spikelets. Though the spikelets in Chikusichloa are all alike, those in the upper part of the panicle are usually more fruitful than those in the lower. Moreover, there seems to be a tendency toward re- duction in the size of the anthers in the spikelets of the lower part of the panicle, suggesting a trend toward two kinds of spikelets, one pistillate, the other perfect. The perfect stipitate spikelets recall those of Hygroryza, but in that the stamens are 6, and the plant is floating, with inflated sheaths, short broad blades, and small panicles. In the origi- nal description of Chikusichloa the stipe remaining attached to the lemma is considered to be the elongated lower joint of the rachilla. Since here, as well as in Hygroryza, the glumes are wanting, it is not certain whether the stipe is an elongated rachilla-joint or the summit of a pedicel which disarticulates some distance below the spikelet. Such pedicels are characteristic of Thysanolaena and Polypogon, and are found in some species of 7'risetwm, where the presence of glumes at the apex of the stipe shows conclusively that the stipe is part of the pedicel. CHIKUSICHLOA AQUATICA Koidz. Bot. Mag. Tokyo 39: 23. 1925 Culms tufted, erect, 0.8-1.5 meters tall, subcompressed, 3-5 mm. thick, 5-noded, the lower nodes remote, the upper ones approximate; sheaths loose, compressed-keeled, much longer than the internodes; blades 45-60 cm. long, 8-14 mm. wide, acuminate, flat or folded, deep green, rather flaccid; panicle lanceolate, erect, half to one third the length of the plant, the branches slender, ascending, up to one third the length of the panicle; spikelets dull green, 3-5 mm. long, terminating in a slender awn 3-6 mm. long, hispidulous along the nerves; stipe 2-4 mm. long, or rarely shorter, hispidulous; anther 1—-1.5 mm. long; grain 2—2.5 mm. long, dark or brownish.—Shady sides of mountain streams, Japan and Southeastern China. CuInA: Kiangsu, I-shing, Keng 2496. One Japanese specimen, collected from Satsuma by Masamune in 1925, has been examined. It differs in having a stipe as much as 6 mm. long, but is similar otherwise to that of China. Chikusichloa mutica Keng, sp. nov. Culmi caespitosi, erect, circ. 75 cm. alti, 3 mm. crassi, subcompressi, glabri; vaginae laxae, compresso-carinatae, internodiis longiores; ligula firma, glabra, 3-5 mm. longa; laminae erectae, saepe conduplicatae et faleatae, 15-40 cm. chloa aquatica Koitz. For explanation see page 529. Fig.1. Chikusi 528 pec. 19, 1931 KENG: CHIKUSICHLOA 529 longae, expansae 10-16 mm. latae, acuminatae, firmae, glaucae, costa media superne obscura, inferne prominente; panicula contracta, linearis, 20-30 cm. longa, ramis tenuibus, alternis, erectis vel appressis, usque 7 cm. longis; spiculae anguste lanceolatae, 4 mm. longae, acuminatae, muticae, lacteae, inter nervos validos hispidulos glabrae et interdum plicatae; stipes 1-2 mm. longus, hispidulus; stamen unum, anthera usque 2 mm. longa; styli distincti, stigmatibus multo breviores. Culms tufted, erect, about 75 cm. tall, 3 mm. thick, subcompressed, glabrous; sheaths loose, compressed-keeled, the upper ones crowded on the approximate nodes; ligule firm, glabrous, 3-5 mm. long; blades erect, usually folded and falcate, 15-40 cm. long, 10-16 mm. wide, acuminate, firm, glau- cous, the midrib obscure above, prominent beneath; panicle contracted, linear, 20-30 cm. long, the branches slender, appressed, up to 7 cm. long; spikelets narrowly lanceolate, 4 mm. long, acuminate, awnless, rarely mucronulate, creamy-white, glabrous and sometimes folded between the hispidulous strong nerves; stipe 1-2 mm. long, hispidulous, equaling or more frequently shorter than the glabrous branchlet below the joint; stamen 1, the anther up to 2 mm. long; styles distinct, much shorter than the stigmas. Type in the Herbarium of the Metropolitan Museum of Natural History, Academia Sinica, Nanking, China, collected by the side of a stream in ravine, Seh Fing Dar Shan, Nanning, Kwangsi, altitude 600 meters, October 24, 1928, by R. C. Ching (no. 8200). Duplicate type in the U. 8. National Herbarium (no. 1501590). Fig. 2. Chikusichloa mutica Keng. A. Part of a panicle branch, X2. B. Stamen, pistil, and lodicules, drawn from a spikelet on the upper part of the panicle, X10. C. Same from a spikelet near the base of the panicle, X10. D. Spikelet and its stipe, X5. H-F. Lemma and palea, <5. Fig. 1. Chikusichloa aquatica Koidz. A. Plant, 4 natural size. B-C. Fruitful spikelets and stipes, X5. D. The articulation showing the branchlet persistent below the joint, X5. E-F. Caryopsis and its section showing the pericarp adnate to the mealy seed, X5. G. Young spikelet on the lower part of the panicle, with its lemma removed, <0: 530 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 21 This species is closely related to Chikusichloa aquatica, from which it differs chiefly in the awnless cream-white spikelets, shorter stipes, linear panicles, and in the glaucous firm blades. The specimens seen consist of the upper part of the plant, about 60 cm. long, with 4 leaves crowded above and the lower inter- nodes 7-11 cm. long. MAMMALOGY.—Six new white-footed mice (Peromyscus maniculatus group), from islands off the Pacific Coast.1 E. W. NELSON and E. A. GotpMAN, U.S. Biological Survey. In Revision of the mice of the American genus Peromyscus (North Amer. Fauna, No. 28, pp. 96-98, Apr. 17, 1909) Osgood referred speci- mens from the islands of San Miguel, San Nicolas, Santa Barbara, and Santa Rosa of the Santa Barbara group, off the coast of southern California, to Peromyscus maniculatus clementis which was originally described from San Clemente Island. Those from Santa Cruz Island were assigned to P. m. catalinae, of Santa Catalina Island. Specimens from Natividad Island and San Martin Island, off the coast of Lower - California, were referred (1. c., p. 100) to P. m. geronimensis, typical on San Geronimo Island. More than 20 years have passed since the fine monograph mentioned was published. In commenting upon material examined from the various islands the author pointed out in several instances characters which he regarded as too slight to afford a basis for satisfactory separa- tion. Finer distinctions are being made by many workers at the present time, and it seems to us probable that if the same reviser were reviewing this part of his work his viewpoint would be somewhat altered. Some of the islands are separated by 50 miles or more of open sea, while others lie somewhat nearer together. San Miguel and Santa Rosa Islands, with a comparatively narrow passage between them, ~ appear to be inhabited by the same form. Study of the fairly ample | material available has shown that although the characters presented in varying combinations from island to island are relatively slight they are maintained with rather remarkable constancy. Such characters are, aS in many other similar places, the expression of genetic factors resulting through isolation and response to environmental influences favoring their perpetuation. These insular forms, with ranges sharply 1 Received November 19, 1931. DEc. 19, 1931 NELSON AND GOLDMAN: NEW MICE 531 definable, are more readily and satisfactorily segregated than would be the case with many similarly differentiated mainland forms with ranges merging almost imperceptibly. We believe they should be recognized as interesting and tangible steps in the evolutionary process involved in the development of species. New subspecies are described as follows: Peromyscus maniculatus streatori subsp. nov. San Miguel Island Mouse Type—From San Miguel Island, off coast of southern California. No. 34631/46716, “old adult, U. S. National Museum (Biological Survey collec- tion), collected by C. P. Streator, June 24, 1892. Original number 1861. Distribution —San Miguel and Santa Rosa Islands. General characters.—A dark subspecies, similar to Peromyscus maniculatus clementis of San Clemente Island, but darker and browner, less buffy; general size about the same but ears usually slightly smaller; skull more slender in structure. Closely resembling P. m. catalinae in color; general size similar, but tail longer; ears slightly smaller; cranial characters, especially the smaller braincase, distinctive. Color.—Type: Upper parts in general near wood brown (Ridgway, 1912) with a dull cinnamon suffusion on cheeks, shoulders, and along sides, the top of head and back moderately mixed with black; underparts in general dull white; a small ochraceous buffy area at base of tail; forelimbs and hind feet white; ears dusky, indistinctly edged with white; tail bicolor, brownish above, white below. Skull——Similar to that of P. m. clementis but of slenderer proportions, the rostrum narrower, more attenuate; interorbital region narrower; inter- parietal smaller (shorter antero-posteriorly). Compared with that of P. m. catalinae the skull differs notably as follows: Braincase smaller, less inflated; interorbital region narrower; interparietal smaller (shorter antero-posteriorly). Measurements —Type: Total length, 170 mm.; tail vertebrae, 80; hind foot; 20. Average of 10 adult topotypes: 175 (160-185); 82 (77-86); 21 (21-22). Skull (type): Greatest length, 25.7; condylobasal length, 23.5; zygomatic breadth, 13.2; interorbital breadth, 4;interparietal, 9.1 X 2.1; length of nasals, 10.5; maxillary toothrow, 3.7. Remarks.—P. m. streatori is one of the smaller forms of P. maniculatus inhabiting the Santa Barbara group of islands. It is larger and darker- colored and scarcely requires close comparison with P. m. gambeli, of the adja- cent mainland. Specimens from Santa Rosa Island appear to be inseparable from those from San Miguel Island. Specimens examined.—Total number, 38, as follows: California: San Miguel Island (type locality), 25; Santa Rosa Island, 13. 532 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 Peromyscus maniculatus santacruzae subsp. nov. Santa Cruz Island Mouse Type.—From Santa Cruz Island, off coast of southern California. No. 47449, 2 old adult, U. 8. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by C. P. Streator, July 13, 1892. Original number 1923. Distribution.— Known only from Santa Cruz Island. | General characters.—A large dark subspecies, closely allied to its geographic neighbor Peromyscus maniculatus streatori, of San Miguel Island, but usually decidedly larger with very noticeably longer tail; color about the same. Similar to P. m. catalinae, of Santa Catalina Island, but tail longer, ears usually smaller, and cranial details distinctive. Differing from P.m. clementis as follows: General size larger, tail decidedly longer; color somewhat duller, more brownish, less suffused with buff; buffy lateral line less distinct. Color.—Type: Upper parts near wood brown, suffused with cinnamon buff on cheeks, shoulders, flanks, and outer surfaces of limbs, the top of head and back moderately overlaid with brownish black; under parts dull white; ears dusky, indistinctly edged with white; tail bicolor, brownish above, whitish below. Skull.—Closely resembling that of P. m. streatori, but larger and heavier; interparietal small as in streatorz. Similar to that of P. m. catalinae, but braincase somewhat smaller, less fully inflated; interorbital region usually narrower; interparietal smaller (shorter antero-posteriorly). Compared with that of P. m. clementis the skull is similar in general form, but larger; inter- ~ parietal smaller (shorter antero-posteriorly). Measurements.— Type: Total length, 207; tail vertebrae, 99; hind foot, 22. Average of 10 adult topotypes: 194 (184-214); 96 (88-105); 22 (21-23). Skull (type): Greatest length, 27.7; condylobasal length, 25.7; zygomatic breadth, 14.4; interorbital breadth, 4.2; interparietal, 8.7 x 2.6; length of nasals, 11.2; maxillary toothrow, 3.9. Remarks.—P. m. santacruzae is a large subspecies interposed in geographic range between the smaller form, P. m. streatori of San Miguel and Santa Rosa Islands and the still smaller mainland animal, P. m. gambeli. It differs con- spicuously from the latter not only in larger size, but in darker color. The smaller ears of specimens from Santa Cruz Island, compared with typical P. m. catalinae was pointed out by Osgood (Il. c. p. 98). Specimens examined.—T wenty-five, all from Santa Cruz Island. Peromyscus maniculatus exterus subsp. nov. San Nicolas Island Mouse Type.—From San Nicolas Island, off coast. of southern California. No. 92098, 2 old adult, U. S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by H. A. Gaylord, May 23, 1897. Distribution.—Known only from San Nicolas Island. General characters.—One of the smaller of the California insular races, very similar to Peromyscus maniculatus streatort of San Miguel Island, but ears larger; color paler, more cinnamon bufty, less brownish or dusky, especially on posterior part of dorsum. Similar to P. m. clementis, but lighter buff, and cranial details quite distinctive. Decidedly smaller in general than P. m. santacruzae, but with slightly larger ears; color brighter, more buffy, less brownish, the lateral line more distinct. Differing from P. m. catalinae in lighter, more buffy instead of brownish color, the lateral line more evident; skull exhibiting a departure in detail. bic. 19, 1931 NELSON AND GOLDMAN: NEW MICE 533 Color—Type: Upper parts cinnamon buff, purest on cheeks, shoulders, lateral line and interfemoral area, the top of head and back moderately over- laid with brownish black; under parts white; ears dusky, faintly edged with white; outer sides of forearms cinnamon buffy; outer sides of ankles dark brownish; tail bicolor, brownish above, white below. Skull.—Closely similar to that of P. m. streatorz, but upper outline highest near anterior border of frontals (highest near posterior border in streator7); braincase slightly larger; interparietal short (antero-posteriorly) as in streator7. Compared with that of P. m. clementis the skull is slenderer, with narrower and slightly flatter frontal region; nasals narrower; outer wall of antorbital foramen narrower, as viewed from the side; interparietal smaller (shorter antero-posteriorly). In contrast with P. m. catalinae the braincase is smaller, less fully inflated; interorbital region narrower; interparietal smaller (shorter antero-posteriorly). Differing from that of P. m. santacruzae mainly in smaller size. Measurements.— Type: Total length, 183; tail vertebrae, 88; hind foot (dry skin), 20. Average of 10 adult topotypes: 177 (171-187); 82 (76-88); 20 (19.5-21). Skull (type): Greatest length, 25.7; condylobasal length, 23.5; zygomatic breadth, 23; interorbital breadth, 4; interparietal, 8.2 x 1.9; length of nasals, 10.3; maxillary toothrow, 3.8. Remarks.—P. m. exterus inhabits the outermost of the Santa Barbara group of islands. Cranial characters indicate closer relationship to P. m. streatori of the islands of San Miguel and Santa Rosa to the northwest than to P. m. clementis of San Clemente Island, nearly equidistant to the southeast. In paler, more buffy coloration, however, it tends toward clementis which in turn is paler as compared with P. m. catalinae. The somewhat lighter coloration of the mice on these farther off shore islands suggests the presence of some differential influence. Many animals from within the fog belt along the Pacific coast are well known to exhibit dark colors. Possibly fog is less prev- alent on San Nicolas and San Clemente, which are 50 miles or more off shore, than on the other islands all of which are considerably nearer the coast. Specomens examined.—T wenty-four, all from San Nicolas Island. Peromyscus maniculatus elusus subsp. nov. Santa Barbara Island! Mouse Type.—From Santa Barbara Island, off coast of southern California. No. 92049, ~ adult, U. 8S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by H. A. Gaylord, May 16, 1897. X catalogue number 1095. Distribution — Known only from Santa Barbara Island. General characters—A dull brownish subspecies similar to Peromyscus maniculatus clementis but upper parts darker, the general tone brownish instead of buffy; skull differing in detail. Approaching P. m. catalinae in color, but ears smaller, and cranial characters distinctive. Closely resembling P. m. santacruzae; color about the same; size smaller; tail decidedly shorter; skull slightly different. Similar to P. m. exterus of San Nicolas Island, but darker, duller, more brownish in color; ears slightly smaller; skull diverging in minor features. Color—Type: Upper parts in general near wood brown, moderately mixed with black on top of head and over back; lateral line pinkish buff, but rather indistinct; under parts dull white; ears dusky, faintly edged with white; outer sides of forearms and hind legs buffy brownish; tail bicolor, brownish black above, white below. 534 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 Skull.—Very similar to that of P. m. clementis, but interparietal smaller (shorter antero-posteriorly) ; frontal region slightly flatter, with a less distinct longitudinal median groove or trough. Compared with P. m. catalinae the braincase is smaller, flatter, less inflated, and the interparietal is smaller. Slightly broader and heavier than P. m. streatori or P. m. exterus; rostrum and interorbital region broader; parietal with antero-external angle forming a less acute point. Differing from P. m santacruzae mainly in smaller size and slightly rounded, instead of acutely pointed, antero-external angle of parietal. Measurements.—Type: Total length, 166; tail vertebrate, 70; hind foot (dry skin), 20. Average of six adult topotypes: 174 (165-190) ; 75 (67-88) ; 20 (20- 21). Skull (type): Greatest length, 26; condylobasal length, 23.3; zygomatic breadth, 12.6; interorbital breadth, 4.3; interparietal, 9.3 x 2; length of nasals, 10.3; maxillary toothrow, 3.8. Remarks.—Specimens from Santa Barbara Island have hitherto been re- ferred to P. m. clementis which was originally described from San Clemente Island. A difference in color, however, while not striking is quite appreciable, especially when the series from the two islands are placed side by side; and the slight cranial characters are distinctive. In color P. m. elusus more nearly resembles P. m. santacruzae, and the skulls are not widely different, but it averages decidedly smaller, and the slightly rounded, instead of acutely pointed, antero-external angle of the parietal is quite constant. Specimens examined.—Iwenty, all from Santa Barbara Island. Peromyscus maniculatus martinensis subsp. nov. San Martin Island Mouse Type-—From San Martin Island, off west coast of Lower California, Mexico. No. 138979, 2 adult, U. 8. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by Nelson and Goldman, August 13, 1905. Original number 17726. Distribution.—Known only from San Martin Island. General characters.—A large medium-colored (neither very light nor very dark) insular subspecies, distinguished from its near relatives by a combina- tion of slight but fairly constant cranial details. Very similar to Peromyscus maniculatus geronimensis of San Geronimo Island; size and color about the same, but differing especially in the broader, less tapering rostrum and more projecting supraoccipital region. Decidedly paler than P. m. dubius, of Todos Santos Island, and skull differing in minor features. Paler than P. m. gambeli and darker than P. m. coolidgei, and larger, more robust, than either of these mainland forms. Color—Type: Upper parts cinnamon buff, purest on cheeks, shoulders, and distinct lateral line, moderately mixed with black on top of head and over back; under parts in general dull white, the basal color plumbeous except on throat and lips where the short hairs are white to roots; a small buffy area at base of tail; fore limbs whitish; outer sides of hind legs dull buffy, becoming whitish on feet; ears brownish dusky, narrowly and inconspicuously edged with white; tail brownish above, white below. Some of the topotypes are lighter and others darker above than the type. Skull.—Very similar in size and general form to that of P. m. geronimensis, but frontal region slightly more arched, less flattened anteriorly; rostrum usually broader, nasals broader, less tapering anteriorly; supraoccipital with a more prominent posteriorly projecting median angle, this portion of the cranium extending farther over the foramen magnum beyond the plane of pec, 19,1931 NELSON AND GOLDMAN: NEW MICE 530 the condyles; palatal pits larger. Not very unlike that of P. m. dubius, but interparietal smaller; nasals usually narrower. Measurements.— Type: Total length, 184; tail vertebrae, 82; hind foot, 23. Average of three adult topotypes: 182 (178-185); 81 (75-87); 22.5 (22-23). Skull (type): Greatest length, 27; condylobasal length, 26.3; zygomatic breadth, 12.8; interorbital breadth, 4.2; interparietal, 9.8 x 2.3; length of na- sals, 10.3; maxillary toothrow, 4. Remarks.—In size and external appearance P. m. martinensis closely ap- proaches P. m. geronimensis 1o which the specimens upon which it is based were referred by Osgood (l. c., p. 100). The greater average width of the nasals, as compared with typical geronrmensis was pointed out by him, and this together with the other differential cranial features mentioned here are regarded by us as sufficiently distinctive to warrant a separate name. Specimens excamined.—Fifty, all from San Martin Island. Peromyscus maniculatus dorsalis subsp. nov. Natividad Island Mouse Type.—From Natividad Island, off west coast of Lower California, Mexico. No. 80857, 2 adult, U. 8S. National Museum (Biological Survey collection), collected by A. W. Anthony, August 4, 1896. Original number 96. Distribution.—Known only from Natividad Island. General characters.—A large subspecies similar to Peromyscus maniculatus geronumensis, of San Geronimo Island, but less buffy, the face usually paler and the posterior part of back and rump in contrast more heavily overlaid with black; minor cranial features distinctive. Differing from P. m. cineritius, of San Roque Island, in darker color. Color—Type: Head and anterior part of back grayish or light buffy brownish in contrast with posterior part of back and rump which is pinkish buff heavily overlaid with black; flanks buffy brownish; under parts dull white; fore limbs whitish; outer sides of hind legs buffy brownish becoming white on feet; ears dusky externally, thinly clothed internally and narrowly edged with white; tail bicolor, brownish above, white below. Skull.—Size and general form about as in P. m. geronimensis, but nasals usually broader, less tapering anteriorly; outer wall of antorbital foramen broader, the anterior margin more rounded and projecting (more squarely truncate in geronimensis) as viewed from the side. Compared with that of P. m. coolidgei of the adjacent mainland the skull is larger, more robust, and differs in detail about as from geronimensis. Measurements —Type: Total length, 177; tail vertebrae, 73; hind foot (dry skin), 22.5. Average of three adult topotypes: 176 (174-183); 79 (75-83); 23 (22.5-23.5). Skull (type): Greatest length, 26.1; condylobasal length, 3.3; zygomatic breadth, 23.5; interorbital breadth, 24.2; interparietal, 9.3 x 2.8; length of nasals, 9.8; maxillary toothrow, 4. Remarks.—P. m. dorsalis lacks the richer cinnamon buffy tones of P. m. geronimensis. ‘The head and anterior part of the back are paler and grayer while the posterior part of the back and rump, suffused with lighter buff, becomes rather abruptly more heavily overlaid with black. No specimens of P. m. cineritius, of San Roque Island, are at hand for direct comparison, but that animal is described as pale grayish drab and apparently quite unlike the present form. P. m. dorsalis requires no close comparison with the smaller, paler subspecies, P. m. coolidget, of the adjacent mainland. Specimens examined.—Twenty-one, all from Natividad Island. 536 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 ZOOLOGY.—Neotylenchus abulbosus n. g., n. sp. (Tylenchidae, Nematoda) the causal agent of a new nematosis of various crop plants. G. STEINER, Bureau of Plant Industry. During the last two years the nemic plant parasite, Neotylenchus abulbosus n. g., n. sp., has been observed in strawberry plants affected by so-called ‘‘yellows” or ‘‘xanthosis,” received from Mr. Harold E. Thomas of California; in strawberry plants from Wisconsin and from Germany ; in potatoes in ships’ stores from England, Holland, Norway, and New Brunswick, Canada; and in carrots from England and Sweden. The form at first sight resembles T'ylenchus dipsaci, and it is probable that it has sometimes been mistaken for it. The present paper gives the result of a single experiment, and a summary of observations, and morphological and taxonomic data concerning the new genus and species. In strawberry plants this nema occurs in the bud,—between the folded leaves and stems,—and also in the developed stems and leaves, and is undoubtedly an endoparasite. In the above mentioned Cali- fornia plants, the nemas were extremely numerous in brownish, black- ish or yellowish spots of the leaves. We have not yet been able experi- mentally to produce such spots, but the single negative experiment is not conclusive. The Wisconsin strawberry plants, were somewhat dwarfed and looked abnormal, without exhibiting very special symptoms; they contained this nema only in small numbers. A lot of strawberry plants imported from Germany seemed to be 100% infested; they had, how- ever been packed close together in transit. ‘The few old leaves present exhibited brown spots or decayed parts. Young tender leaves had developed, though they were not completely unfolded. Nemas were found in their tissues, and in the bud between developing leaves. — Some of the leaf stems seemed to be slightly swollen, apparently because of the infestation. It is therefore impossible at the present time to describe satisfactorily clear-cut symptoms of this nemic disease on the strawberry plant. The carrots seen exhibited sunken areas, which, however, were filled with decay; no green parts have been available for study. The potato tubers also were too decayed when received to allow specific symptoms to be recognized, though the appearances seem much like those pro- 1 Received November 20, 1931. DEc. 19, 1931 STEINER: NEOTYLENCHUS d37 duced by Tylenchus dipsact. Certain areas were sunken and the tuber tissues exhibited a mealy appearance. bull PAS ssecvenGlll NGS eS Se one onan bs ee x amen ease ———— S$ = S = asam =-3eene mem mee é ba! Seon “5 ory - en eee ew eoe ane . —weeeen = a ¢< > Ss P Woe asi? — _— =e ome ames eee" 5 “SSs--- > =Se = = —s- —r- = me — = . cee eo au —-——— ( = es ee . — = ~~ LL a ear oS a SS teen —s— a eyes OUT. ome | my =——. | ‘ 4 ’ >= = Il Fig. 1. A. Sketch of the anterior end; B, of the spear; C, amphid; D, head on end; E, anal region of a specimen with caecal extension of the intestine; F, tail end; G, lateral wings showing nature of crenation; H, posterior end. All 530 except ‘‘D’’ which is 1075. The abbreviations are mostly self explanatory; oe gl op, opening of dorsal oesophageal gland; cut rds, cuticular rods of the framework in the lip region; ‘gli rngs, gliding rings of the spear; sp sw, swellings at base of the spear. 538 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 It is considered probable that this nema has a wide geographical dis- tribution; but it appears at present to be a temperate zone species. Neotylenchus n. g. Diagnosis. Genus very similar to Tylenchus, but differing in the complete absence of a median oseophageal bulb, the oesophagus having a pronounced central constriction encircled by the nerve-ring, the anterior portion being somewhat spindle-shaped, the posterior one somewhat sugarloaf-shaped. Head, seen from in front, divided into eight sectors (instead of six as in Tylenchus, Paraphelenchus, Aphelenchus, Pathoaphelenchus, etc.,)—a dorsal, a ventral, two lateral and four submedial. Male unknown. ‘Type species: Neotylenchus abulbosus n. sp. Fig. 1 Diagnosis. Neotylenchus with the characters of the genus; swellings or knots at the base of the spear with short, outward-pointing, curved processes. Further notes on the species. ‘The female is very similar to that of T’ylenchus dipsact. It is, however, noticeably thicker (compare formula below). The cuticle is annulated. The lateral wings are four in number, crenate in har- mony with the cuticular annulation and arranged as shown in fig. 1G. The head end is not set off, as it isin T’ylenchus dipsaci, and is more obtuse and broader; the tail is similar, sharply pointed, the terminus varying somewhat (figs. 1F and H). In spite of the presence of eight sectors on the front of the head, there seem to be only four submedial papillae. Fig. 1C shows a sketch of the profile view of anamphid. The spear is not strong, and is rather short; its basal swellings or knots are very characteristic, each having a small, out- ward-pointing, curved process for the attachment of protrudor muscles (Fig. 1B). In the lip region proper the spear is surrounded by short, longitudinal, cuticularized rods forming a kind of guiding frame. The species is easiest determined by the basal swellings of the spear. Asin the true Tylenchus spe- cies, there is a dorsal outlet of the oesophageal glands into the oesophageal canal just back of the spear. It seems that the oesophageal cells lie within the oesophageal tissus, the posterior portion of the oesophagus being quite swol- len. The oesophageal canal seems to be continuous, without any valvulae. No cardia was seen. The posterior end of the intestine sometimes forms a short blind sac, extending a little behind the anal opening (fig. 1E). The excretory pore is just behind the nerve-ring. A long canal leads inward and - backward, the renette cell apparently being quite a distance behind the » beginning of theintestine. Neotylenchus abulbosus is prodelphic, the ovary extending sometimes as far forward as the excretory pore. Neotylenchus abulbosus is apparently a syngonic species. Measurements: Average of three females that showed very slight variations. 6 104 -i9e9.2 18. Bagh, 90.5 0.76mm. 30. 37 5 37 3.0 DHE tO. 1931 BARTSCH: A NEW VOLUTID MOLLUSK 539 MALACOLOGY.—A new volutid marine mollusk, Aurinia schmitti.! Paut Bartscu, U.S. National Museum. Dr. Waldo L. Schmitt, Curator of our Marine Invertebrates, while collecting Crustacea in 1930 under the auspices of the Carnegie Insti- tution at the Marine Biological Station, Tortugas, Florida, made a number of hauls with a 30-foot otter trawl south of Tortugas. In one of these hauls in 80 fms. he secured two specimens of an A urinia, which differ from any heretofore secured; these are here described. Aurinia schmitti, n. sp. Bio. Shell large, spindle-shaped, exterior covered by an olivaceous periostracum which dehisced upon drying. When the periostracum is removed the general color of the shell is pinkish chalky with the exception of the nucleus, which is pale buff. There are also rows of chestnut-brown spots, which are arranged in spiral series. ‘Two of these occur between the summit and the suture of the turns. The last whorl shows five of these interrupted bands; the first much less developed than the rest, being at some little distance anterior to the sum- mit of the whorl; the next and fifth band are of about equal width, while the third and fourth are fully twice as wide as the second and fifth. The base of the columella is also brown. ‘The front of the shell from the inner columellar edge to the left side of the shell and the same area of the proceeding whorl, are covered with a soiled, smoky gray, somewhat nacreous callus. Inside of outer lip salmon-colored, showing the two heavy interrupted bands, and the rest by transmitted light. The nucleus consists of about one turn, which forms a smooth mammilated apex. Postnuclear whorls appressed at the sum- mit, marked by obsolete, rather broad, irregular, axial ribs, which are absent on the first and last turns. They show best on the second and third. The entire postnuclear part of the shell is marked by rather strong incremental lines, particularly so behind the edge of the outer lip. The spiral sculpture consists of numerous fine raised threads, which are of almost equal strength and spac- ing on the early whorls, but become less so on the later whorls; on the last they are a little stronger on the basal half than on the posterior portion thereof. Aperture elongate-oval, strongly channelled anteriorly and feebly so at the posterior angle; outer lip thin at the edge, somewhat sigmoid, being protracted in the middle, columella with two strong oblique folds. Type.—The type, U.S. N. M. No. 382779, has five postnuclear whorls, and measures: Height, 115 mm.; greater diameter, 35 mm.; length of aperture, 78mm. The present species resembles Aurinia robusta Dall in the shouldering of the last turn at the posterior angle of the aperture, which is even more strongly emphasized here. The spotting, too, is obscure as in that species. It also resembles it in the callus formation of the front of the last turn. In general shape, excepting the posterior angle of the aperture, it resembles Aurznia 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received November 10, 1931. 540 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 dubia Broderip more closely than Aurinia robusta Dall, but it is at once dis- tinguishedfrom it by the absence of the polished surface and brilliant spotting. Figure 1. Aurinia schmitti Bartsch. INDEX TO VOLUME 21 An * denotes the abstract of a paper before the AcCADEMy or an affiliated society PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES Anthropological Society of Washington. Biological Society of Washington. Botanical Society of Washington. Entomological Society of Washington. Geological Society of Washington. Philosophical Society of Washington. Proceedings: 152, 237, 342. Proceedings: 94, 445. Proceedings: 100, 128, 153, 372. Proceedings: 171. Proceedings: 26, 178, 365, 488. Proceedings: 42, 54, 86, 168, 276. Washington Academy of Sciences: Proceedings: 24, 52, 167, 441, 483. AUTHOR INDEX Apams, L. H. The cubic compressibility of certain substances. 381. | The influence of pressure on the solubility of sodium chloride in water. A new method for the measurement of the solubilities of electrolytes under pressure. 183. *The volume change of rubber under pressure. 43. AuicaTa, JosePH E. A Microfilaria from the blood of a wild rabbit. 298. Resistance of rats to superinfections with a nematode, Nippostrongylus muris, and an apparently similar re- sistance of horses to superinfections with nematodes. 259. Ames, JosePH, S. Certain aspects of Henry’s experiments on electromag- netic induction. 493. ASHBROOK, F.G. *Fur farming in Europe. 95. Atwoop, W. R. *Mid-Tertiary glacial deposits in southern France. 28. BaILEy, VERNON. *General features of the Upper Mississippi River Wild Life and Fish Refuge. 445. Baker, O. E. *Changes in diet affect agriculture. 442. Banta, A.M. *What the crustacean tells us about evolution. 52. Barty, Tom F. W. The spinel structure: anexample of variate atom equipoints. 255. Bartscu, Pauu. A new volutid marine mollusk, Aurinia schmittt. 529. 541 BarTRAM, Epwin B. Additional Costa Rican mosses, II. 288. Basster, R. 8S. IJndianites, new name for the Cambrian crustacean Indiana Ulrich and Bassler. 364. BEATTIE, R. Kent. *Botanical notes from Japan. 374. Brett, W. B. *Reestablishment of musk- oxenin Alaska. 99. Berry, Epwarp W. A_ Bothrodendron from Bolivia. 295. Berry, WILLARD. Contributions to the Paleontology of Peru, V. Nodosaria pozoensis W. Berry, n.sp. 41 5. Buackman, M. W. A revisional study of the genus Gnathotrichus Eichhoff in North America. 264. A revisional study of the genus Pseudopityophthorus Sw. in North America. 223. Buake, S. F. A new Limonium from Martin (12: —— Nine new American Asteraceae. 325. Borckner, C. *The radiation from metal surfaces under low-speed electron bombardment. 279. Borvsen, F. 8. *Recent developments in the hydrographic work of the Coast and Geodetic Survey with special refer- ence to the survey of Georges Bank. 59. Bow18, Wiutu1aM. *An outline of the or- ganization and purpose of the Union, and Proceedings of the Section of Geodesy. 86. 542 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 Bowlf£, WILLIAM. Shaping the earth. 103. Bowman, Paut W. *Pollen and peat. 3vA. Brapy, M. K. *The breeding of sala- manders. 451. BRoMBACHER, W. G. *Temperature co- efficient of the modulus of rigidity of instrument-diaphragm and spring ma- terials. 56. Bryant, H. C. *Fancy and fact in nat- ural history. 95. BucHanan, L. L. Synopsis of Perigaster (Coleoptera: Curculionidae). 320. Bucuer, W.H. *The mobile belts of the earth. 489. BuckxincHamM, D. E. *The fish poison Derris. 449. Burt, CHartes E. A report on some amphibians and reptiles from New York and New Jersey. 198. CaNnFIELD, R. H. *Internal friction in metals. 278. CuHaPin, Epwarp A. Adoretus luridus Blanchard and its near relatives in the Philippine Islands. 305. —— New species of melolonthine Scara- baeidae from the Philippine Islands. 309. CHEVERLANGE, Eig. *Exhibition of paintings of fishes of Tahiti. 449. Cuitwoop, B. G. Chondronema passali (Leidy, 1852) n. g. (Nematoda), with notes on its life history. 356. — Flagellate spermatozoa in a nema- tode (Trilobus longus). 41. CuHRISLER, V. L. *The measurement of sound absorption. 277. CuHrisTiE, J. R. Chondronema passali (Leidy, 1852) n. g. (Nematoda), with notes on its life history. 356. CuarKk, Austin H. *Notes on the behav- ior and migration of the milkweed butterfly. 171. Cocuran, DorisM. A newlizard (Anolis pinchott) from Old Providence Island. 354, New Bahaman reptiles. 39. Couns, Henry B., Jr. *Archeological explorations on St. Lawrence Island, Alaska. 237. Coox, Harotp 8. The antiquity of man as indicated at Frederick, Oklahoma: Areply. 161. Coox8, C. WytuEr. *Radial calcite con- cretions in marine beds in Georgia. 27. —— Seven coastal terraces in the south- eastern States. 503. Why the Mayan cities of the Petén District, Guatemala, were abandoned. 283. Cooper, G. A. Concerning the author- ship of the ‘‘Preliminary notice of the lamellibranch shells of the upper Helderberg, Hamilton, and Chemung groups, etc., part 2.’’ 459. Cusuman, R. A. Three new Braconidae parasitic on bark beetles. 301. Dane, C.H. *Uncompahgre Plateau and related structural features. 28. Davies, F. T. *Aurora australis ob- served on the Byrd Antarctic Expedi- tion. 280. Davis, H. S. *Progress in experimental fish culture. 450. Davis, Watson. *Recent biological liter- ature. 94. Day, A. L. *Borehole investigations in the geyser basin of Yellowstone Na- tional Park. 488. DE SirrerR, WituteEM. *The origin of the planetary system. 483. Diamonp, H. *Radio aids to air naviga- tion. 48. Ditmars, R. L. *Motion-picture studies of reptiles. 447. DrREcHSLER, C. A crown-rot of holly- hocks caused by Phytophthora mega- sperman.sp. 9513. DryprEn, A. L. Calvert (Miocene) tilting of the Maryland Coastal Plain. 131. Dyott, G.M. *Motion pictures of jungle life. 96. EstTERBROOK,L.M. *The Inter-American Conference on Agriculture. 94. Ewine, H. E. *The distribution and host relationships of ectoparasites, with special reference to chiggers. 177. FENNER, C. N. *Borehole investigations in the geyser basin of Yellowstone National Park. 488. . pEc. 19, 1931 Fisuer, W. S. A new longhorn beetle from Costa Rica (Coleoptera: Cer- ambycidae). 23. Fiemine, J. A. *Proceedings of the sec- tion of Electricity and Magnetism. 90. *Terrestrial magnetism. 44. Foster,M.D. *The effect of the drought upon the quality of the water of the the Potomac River. 179. Frost, S.W. *Animal life on Barro Colo- rado Island. 173. GaHAn, A.B. Oncertain hymenopterous parasites of stored-grain insects. 213. —— Two new hymenopterous parasites of Tachypterellus consors Dietz. 37. Garner, C. L. *An outline of the ex- panded program of geodetic work of the Coast and Geodetic Survey. 56. Gipson, R. E. The cubic compressiblity of certain substances. 381. *The volume change of under pressure. 48. GILLULY, JAMES. *Heavy-mineral assem- blages in some plutonic rocks from eastern Oregon. 370. Girty, Grorce H. New Carboniferous invertebrates. 390. GisH, O. H. *Atmospheric electricity. 47. GoLpMAN, E.A. Anew agouti from Costa Rica. 481. —— Anew kinkajou from Mexico. 482. New pocket gophers from Arizona and Utah. 416. —— Six white-footed mice (Peromyscus maniculatus group) from islands off the Pacific Coast. 530. Three new pumas. 209. — Two new desert foxes. 249. Gotpman, M. I. *Some biologic effects of the drought in tributaries of Ches- rubber apeake Bay. 180. GrauaM, H.W. *Biology and chemistry. 46. GRIFFITHS, Davip. *How we make more bulbs. 101. Griees, R. F. *Five thousand miles for a © liverwort. 373. Hau, R. E. The influence of pressure on the solubility of sodium chloride in AUTHOR INDEX 543 water. A new method for the meas- urement of the solubilities of elec- trolytes under pressure. 183. HamBLeToN, J. I. *The behavior of the honeybee. 965. Hanson, Matcom P. *Radio with the Byrd Antartic Expedition. 168 Heck, N.H. *Proceedings of the Section of Seismology. 88. *Some recent developments in the field of seismology. 367. HENDERSON-SmITH, J. *Cytological stud- ies of mosaic of tobacco. 375. Hurt, P. R. *A report on the redeter- mination of the constant of gravi- tation. 170. “The place of reason in nature. 55. Hitcucock, A. S. *A botanical trip to South and Hast Africa. 102. *Nomenclature at the International Botanical Congress. 94. *“The sessions on nomenclature. 153. Hitcucock, MarGArET R. The mastodon of Thomas Jefferson. 80. Horrman, W. A. *A consideration of educational, especially biological, progress in China, prefaced by some general remarks on the country and its people. 461. Horton, A. H. *The Potomac River and the drought of 19380. 178. Howe ti, A. H. *Exhibition of paintings of Florida birds. 445. HupparpD, B. R. *Geologic features of Aniakchak and Veniaminof craters, Alaska. 29. Humpurey, H. B. *Influence of vegeta- tion on stream flow during the drought. 179. *Regeneration 128. *The relation of trees and other veg- etation to stream flow. 450. *The relation of weather to the de- velopment of stem rust Puccinia gram- anis. 129. Huisurt, E. O. *The zodiacal light. 276. ——= in some conifers. 544 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 JOHNSTONE-WaALLACE, D. B. *Competi- tion as a factor in the success of grass and clover mixtures. 154. Jupson, L. V. *New instruments and methods in length measurements of high precision. 55. Kearney, THomas H. botanist’s point of view. 154. — Plants new to Arizona. (An anno- tated list of species added to the recorded flora of the State or other- wise interesting.) 63. Keruuvum, L. B. Revision of the names of three fossils from the Castle Hayne and Trent marls in North Carolina. 51. Krene, Y. L. New grasses from China. 155. —— The genus Chikusichloa of Japan and China. 526. Kervuutecan, G. H. *Measurement of the elastic hysteresis by means of tuning forks. 55. Kiuiurp, Enusworth P. New plants mainly from western South America— III. 347. — The genus Lozanella. 336. Kimpaut, H. H. *Proceedings of the Section of Meterology. 88. Kine, Purtie B. *Geology of the Mara- thon District, Texas. 365. LAMBERT, E. B. *Studies on the relation of temperature to the growth, parasit- ism, thermal death points, and control of Mycogene perniciosa. 100. LeLacueur, Empert A. Tidal phenom- ena in Long Island Sound. 239. Lronarp, E. C. The genus Mendoncia in Peru. 144. LiTTLEHALES, G.W. *Proceedings of the Section of Oceanography. 92. Lotxa, ALFRED J. Some elementary properties of moments-of-frequency distributions. 17. —— The extinction of families. I. 377, —— The extinction of families. II. 453. Lovueuiin, G. F. *Geology of Leadville and vicinity, areview of old and recent studies. 370. Lucas, C. R. *Commercial fish farming in the United States. 450. Lucker, JoHn T. Resistance of rats to superinfections with a nematode, *Cotton from a Nippostrongylus muris, and an appar- ently similar resistance of horses to superinfections with nematodes. 259. Mann, Wm. M. A new ant from Porto Rico. 440. Marsu, C. Dwicut. On a collection of Copepoda made in El Salvador by Samuel F. Hildebrand and Fred J. Foster of the U. S. Bureau of Fish- eries. 207. —— The copepod genera Broteas Lovén, Paradiaptomus Sars, Lovenula Meth- uen, and Adiaptomus Cooper. 397. Matuack, M. B. The juice sac of the orange with some observations on the plastids of citrus. 437. MERRIAM, JOHN C. *The unity of nature as illustrated by the Grand Canyon. 441. MerriLu, E. D. *Plants and animals of the Philippines and neighboring is- lands—How they came to be where they are. 4438. Mouter,F.L. *The radiation from metal surfaces under low-speed electron bombardment. 279. Morton, C. V. The genus Lozanella. 336. — Notes on yagé, a drug plant of southeastern Columbia. 485. Neuson, E. W. A new kinkajou from Mexico. 482. — Six new white-footed mice (Peromy- scus maniculatus group) from islands off the Pacific Coast. 530. — Three new pumas. 209. Nessit, R. A. *Biological aspects of conservation of marine fishery re- sources, New York and New Jersey. 99. Nuttine, P. G. Adsorption and base exchange. 33. Oman, P.W. New Jassinae, with notes on other species. 480. Pauu, J.H. *Meterology. 46. Prarson, T. Giupert. *Adventures in bird protection. 446. PERRIER, GEORGES. Raoul Gautier. 340. Peters, M. F. *An investigation of the effectiveness and reliability of electric sparks in automotive ignition. 56. pEc. 19, 1931 Prmerce. W. D. 176. Piper, A.M. *Observations in The Dalles region, Oregon, bearing on the history of the Columbia River. 371. Pittier, H. Berberis in Venezuela, new species of Ovzalis, Hxogonium, and others. 134. Posnygak, E. The spinel structure: An example of variate atom equipoints. 255. Price, Emmett, W. Metagonimoides ore- gonensis, a new trematode from a racoon. 405. PrytHercH, H. F. *Spawning, setting and development of the oyster. 98. Ratusun, Mary J. A new species of Pinnotherid crab from Costa Rica. 262. New crabs from the Gulf of Mexico. 125. Reep, J.C. *Heavy-mineral assemblages in some plutonic rocks from eastern Oregon. 370. RicHarpson, L. T. The heat of solution of some potash minerals. 248. Rouwer, S.A. *Remarks on the present status of some insect pests which are subject to federal quarantine. 172. Rooney, W. J. *EHarth-resistivity sur- vey at Huancayo, Peru, and relation of resistivity to earth-current poten- tialrecords. 42. *The mango weevils. —— Ross, C. P. *The physiography of south- central Idaho. 369. Rusety,.W. W. *The Illinois River, a problem in channel equilibrium. 366. Scumitt, W. L. *Exhibition of a rare isopod. 95. Scuuuttz, ApotpH H. *Man’s among the primates. 24. Scuuttz, E. 8. *Virus diseases of pota- toes. 375. Scowartz, BrensaAMIN. A Microflaria from the blood of a wild rabbit. 298. — Resistance of rats to superinfections with a nematode, Nippostrongylus muris, and an apparently similar resistance of horses to superinfections with nematodes. 259. ScorreLD, C. 8. *The effect of boron on citrus in California. 100. place AUTHOR INDEX 545 ScRIVENER, J. W. Notes on Gypona octolineata (Say). 222. SeecerR, R. J. The quantum theory of Born and Wiener. 315. SETzLER, Frank M. *The Mound- Builder cultures of the Upper Missis- sippi Valley. 342. SHAMEL, H. Haroutp. Akodon chacoensis, a new cricetine rodent from Argen- tina. 427. —— Bats from the Bahamas. 251. SHear, C.L. *The fungus foray. 153. Saenon, P. J. *The Flathead Mine, Montana, an unusual silver deposit. 181. SmitH, H. M. *Some new and curious Siamese fishes. 96. Snyper, W. F. *The measurement of sound absorption. 277. Souuz, F. N. *Oceanography. 46. SpeNcER, J. W. *Observations on Col- orado elk herds. 95. Spunar, Vay. Mar. On Fermat’s Last Theorem. 21. STEINER, G. Neotylenchus abulbosus n.g., n. sp. (Tylenchidae, Nematoda) the causal agent of a new nematosis of various crop plants. 536. — On the status of the nemic genera Aphelenchus Bastain, Pathoaphelen- chus Cobb, Paraphelenchus Micolet- zky, Parasttaphelenchus Fuchs, Ison- chus Cobb and Seinura Fuchs. 468. Stevens, R. E. Further studies of kolm. 409. STEVENSON, F.J. *Geneticsin relation to potato breeding. 375. Stites, C. W. *Is international zoologi- cal nomenclature practicable? Report on Padua Congress. 97. SwWALLEN, Jason R. Five new grasses from Colombia. 14. — Two new grassesfrom Mexico. 486. Swanton, JoHN R. The Caddo social organization and its possible histori- cal significance. 203. TarBETT, R. E. *Control over mosquito breeding. 449. TEICHERT, Curt. Recent German theor- ies about structural geology. 1. TERHUNE, H.W. *Wild-life protection in Alaska. 447. 546 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 Townsenp, C. H. *A recent expedition to the Galapagos Islands and studies of the Galapagos tortoises. 448. Tuve, M.A. *Artificial radium rays from high-voltage tubes. 167. Unter, F. M. *Waterfowl and reptile life of the Upper Mississippi River Wild Life and Fish Refuge. 445. Uuricu, E. O. *Highlights of the past two seasons’ work. I. Origin and stratigraphic horizon of the zine ores of the Mascot District of Kast Tennes- see. 30. — Indianites, new name for the Cam- brian crustacean Indiana Ulrich and Bassler. 364. Waker, E.H. Four new species of Myr- sinaceae from China. 477. Waker, W. M. *Archeological recon- naissance in the Hawaiian Islands. 343. Warp, Metpourne. *Natural history of the Barrier Reef of Australia. 96. *Wanderings in North Australia. 97. Watts, C. B. *The transit instrument and the synchronous motor. 48. Weuts, R. C. Further studies of kolm. 409. —— The heat of solution of some potash minerals. 243. *Van’t Hoff’s studies of minerals deposited from sea water. 372. Wenner, F. *Impressions of the excur- sions andentertainments, 93. WenseEL, H. T. *The Waidner-Burgess standard of light and the freezing point of platinum. 276. Wetmorn, ALEXANDER. *The Interna- tional Ornithological Congress. 94 Wuerry, Epear T. A new spiral-orchid from the Southern States. 49. — The eastern short-stemmed leather flowers. 194. Wricut, F. E. *Optical methods for re- ducing the effects of photographic- plate grain. 279. . Zins, E.G. *The geologist and analyst— astudy in cooperation. 26. Anthropology. Biology. Botany. SUBJECT INDEX *Man’s place among the primates. ApoupH H. Scuuttz. 24. The antiquity of man as indicated at Frederick, Oklahoma: a reply. Haroup 8. Coox. 161. Archeology. *Archeological explorations on St. Lawrence Island, Alaska. Henry B. Couuins, Jr. 287. *Archeological reconnaissance in the Hawaiian Islands. W. M. WaLKER. 343. *The Mound-Builder cultures of the Upper Mississippi Valley. Frank M. SETZLER. 342. Why the Mayan cities of the Petén District, Guatemala, were abandoned. C. WyTHE Cooke. 283. Astronomy. *The origin of the planetary system. WILLEM DE SITTER. 483. *The transit instrument and the syn- chronous motor. C. B. Warts. 48. Biogeography. *Plants and animals of the Philippines and neighboring islands— How they came to be where they are. BK. D.Mereritu. 443. “Biological aspects of conserva- tion of marine fishery resources, New York and New Jersey. R.A. NESBIT. 99. *Biology and GRAHAM. 46. *Fancy and fact in natural history. H.C. Bryant. 95. “Motion pictures of jungle life. Dyotr. 96. “Natural history of the Barrier Reef of Australia. MmLBoURNE Warp. 96. *Recent biological literature. Watson Davis. 94. “Wanderings in North Australia. ‘MELBOURNE WarD. 97. *A botanical trip to South and Kast Africa. A. S. Hircucocx. 102. 547 chemistry. H. W. Ge Mr. A crown-rot of hollyhocks caused by Phytophthora megasperma n. sp. C. DREcCHSLER. 513. Additional Costa Rican mosses, II. Epwin B. BAarTRAM. 288. A new Limonium from Haiti. BLAKE. 12. A new spiral-orchid from the Southern States. Epaar T.WHeERRy. 49. Berberis in Venezuela, new species of Oxalis, Exogonium, and others. H. PiTTiER. 184. *Botanical notes from Japan. BEATTIE. 374. *Competition as a factor in the success of grass and clover mixtures. D. B. JOHNSTONE-WALLACE. 154. *Cotton from a botanist’s point of view. Tuomas H. Kearney. 154. *Cytological studies of mosaic of tobacco. J. HENDERSON-SMITH. 375 Four new species of Myrsinaceae from China. E.H. Waker. 477. Five new grasses from Colombia. JASON R. SwaLuen. 14. *Genetics in relation to potato breeding. F.J.STEVENSON. 375. *How do we make more bulbs? Davip GRIFFITHS. 101. New grasses from China. 155. New plants mainly from western South America—III. ELLSWORTH Pe Kiiurp. 347. Nine new American Asteraceae. BuaKE. 325. *Nomenclature at the International Botanical Congress. A. 8S. Hitcu- cock. 94. Notes on yagé, a drug plant of south- eastern Columbia. C. V. Morton. Ss. . R. Kent Y. L. Kena. So he 4&5. Plants new to Arizona. THomas H. KEARNEY. 68. 548 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 *Pollen and peat. Paut W. BowMan. 374. *Regeneration in some conifers. H. B. HuMPHREY. 128. *Reports on the Botanical Congress at London. Botanica Society. 153. *Studies on the relation of temperature to the growth, parasitism, thermal death points, and control of Mycogone perniciosa. HK. B. Lampert. 100. The eastern short-stemmed leather flowers. EpGar T. WHERRY. 194. *The effect of boron on citrus in Cali- fornia. C.S.Scorretp. 100. *The fungus foray. C.L.SHar. 153. The genus Chikusichloa of Japan and China. Y.L.Kene. 526. The genus Lozanella. E. P. Kiuurp and C.V. Morton. 336. The genus Mendoncia in Peru. E. C. LEONARD. 144. *The Inter-American Conference on Agriculture. L. M. EstTERBROOKE. 94. The juice sac of the orange with some observations on the plastids of citrus. M.B.Matuack. 487. *The relation of weather to the develop- ment of stem rust Puccinia graminis. H.B.Humpurey. 129. “The sessions on nomenclature. A. 8. Hitcucock. 153. Two new grasses from Mexico. JASON R.SwWALuen. 486. *Virus diseases of potatoes. E. S. ScHuLtTz. 375. Chemistry. Further studies of kolm. R. C. Weis and R. E. Stevens. 409. Crystallography. The spinel structure: An example of variate atom equi- points. Tom F, W. Barts and HE. POSNJAK. 255. Hconomics. *Changes in diet affect agri- culture. O.E. Baker. 442. Entomology. Adoretus luridus Blanchard and its near relatives in the Philippine Islands. Epwarp A. CuHapin. 305. A new ant from Porto Rico. Wm. M. Mann. 440. A new longhorn beetle from Costa Rica (Coleoptera: Cerambycidae). W.S. FisHer. 238. A revisional study of the genus Gnatho- trichus Eichhoff in North America. M.W. BuackMANn. 264. A revisional study of the genus Pseudo- pityophthorus Sw. in North America. M. W. BLACKMAN. 223. *Control over mosquito breeding. R. E. TarBetrT. 449. New Jassinae, with notes on other species. P.W.Oman. 480. New species of melolonthine Scara- baeidae from the Philippine Islands. Epwarp A. CHaPiIn. 309. Notes on Gypona octolineata (Say). J. W.ScRIVENER. 222. *Notes on the behavior and migration of the milkweed butterfly. AusTIN H.Cuarxk. 171. On certain hymenopterous parasites of stored-grain insects. A. B. Ganan. Died, *Remarks on the present status of some insect pests which are subject to fed- eral quarantine. S.A. Ronwer. 172. Synopsis of Perigaster (Coleoptera: Curculionidae). L. L. BUucHANAN. 320. *The behavior of the honeybee. J. I. HAMBLETON. 95. *The distribution and host relationships of ectoparasites, with special refer- ence to chiggers. H.E.Ewine. 177. *The mango weevils. W. D. PIERCE. 176. Three new Braconidae parasitic on bark beetles. R.A.Cusuman. 301. Two new hymenopterous parasites of Tachypterellus consors Dietz. A. B. GAHAN. 37. Ethnology. The Caddo social organiza- tion and its possible historical signifi- cance. JOHN R. Swanton. 203. Evolution. *What the crustacean tells us about evolution. A. M. Banta. 52. Geodesy. *An outline of the expanded program of geodetic work of the Coast pc. 19, 1931 and Geodetic Survey. C.L. GARNER. 56. *An outline of the organization and pur- pose of the Union, and Proceedings of the Section of Geodesy. WILLIAM BowleE. 86. Geology. *Borehole investigations in the geyser basin of Yellowstone National Park. C.N. FENNER and A. L. Day. 488. Calvert (Miocene) tilting of the Mary- land Coastal Plain. A. L. DRyYpDEN, ras Lod. *Geologic features of Aniakchak and Veniaminof craters, Alaska. B. R. HvUBBARD. 29. *Geology of Leadville and vicinity, a review of old and recent studies. G. F. Loucauin. 370. *Geology of the Marathon District, Texas. Puitip B. KinGc. 365. *Heavy-mineral assemblages in some plutonic rocks from eastern Oregon. J.C. REED AND JAMES GILLULY. 370. *Mid-Tertiary glacial deposits in south- ern France. W.R.Atwoop. 28. *Origin and stratigraphic horizon of the zine ores of the Mascot District of East Tennessee. E. O. UutRicH. 30. *Radial calcite concretions in marine beds in Georgia. C. WytTHE Cooke. 27. Recent German theories about struc- tural geology. Curt TEIcHERT. 1. Seven coastal terraces in the southeast- ern States. C.WytTHECOooKE. 503. The antiquity of man as indicated at Frederick, Oklahoma: A reply. Harotp 8. Coox. 161. *The Flathead Mine, Montana, an un- usual silver deposit. P. J. SHENON. 181. *The geologist and analyst—a study in cooperation. E.G. Zins. 26. *The Illinois River, a problem in chan- nel equilibrium. W. W. Rusgy. 366. *The mobile belts of the earth. W. H. BUCHER. *Uncompahgre Plateau and _ related structural features. C. H. Dane. 28. SUBJECT INDEX 549 Geophysics. *A report on the redetermi- nation of the constant of gravitation. Po Rabeyis 170: *Atmospheric electricity. O.H. Gisu. 47. *Harth-resistivity survey at Huancayo, Feru, and relation of resistivity to earth-current potential records. W. J. Roonry. 42. *Impressions of the excursions and en- tertainments. F.WENNER. 93. *Proceedings of the Section of Electric- ity and Magnetism. J. A. FLEMING. 90. *Proceedings of the Section of Meteor- ology. H.H.KimBatu. 88. *Proceedings of the Section of Oceanog- raphy. G. W. LITTLEHALES. 92. *Proceedings of the Section of Seismol- ogy. N.H.He&cx. 88. Shaping the earth. WmILLiIam 103. *Some recent developments in the field of seismology. N.H.Hu8cxk. 367. *Terrestrial magnetism. J.A. FLEMING. 44, Tidal phenomena in Long Island Sound. EmBERT A. LELACHEUR. 239. Herpetology. A new lizard (Anolis pin- choti) from Old Providence Island. Doris M. Cocuran. 354. *A recent expedition to the Galapagos Islands and studies of the Galapagos tortoises. C. H. TowNsEND. 448. A report on some amphibians and rep- tiles from New York and New Jersey. CHARLES E. Burt. 198. *Motion-picture studies of reptiles. R. L. Dirmars. 447. New Bahama reptiles. RAN. 39. *The breeding of salamanders. Brapy. 451. *Waterfowl and reptile life of the Upper Mississippi River Wild Life and Fish Refuge. F.M.Uunupr. 445. Hydrology. *Influence of vegetation on stream flow during the drought. H. B. HumpHrRey. 179. *Some biologic effects of the drought in tributaries of Chesapeake Bay. M. I.Goutpman. 180. BowleE. Doris M. Cocu- M. K. 550 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, NO. 21 *The effect of the drought upon the quality of the water of the Potomac River. M.D. Fostrer. 179. *The Potomac River and the drought of 1930. A.H. Horton. 178. *The relation of trees and other vegeta- tion to stream flow. H. B. HUMPHREY. 450. Ichthyology. *Commercial fish farming in the United States. C.R.Lucas. 450. *Hixhibition of paintings of fishes from Tahiti. Ein CHEVERLANGER. 449. *Progress in experimental fish culture. H.S8. Davis. 450. *Some new and curious Siamese fishes. H.M.Smiru. 96. Mammalogy. Akodon chacoensis, a new cricetine rodent from Argentina. H. HAROLD SHAMEL. 427. A new agouti. from Costa Rica. E. A. GOLDMAN. 481. A new kinkajou from Mexico. E. W. Newson and E.A.GouLpMAN. 482. Bats from the Bahamas. H. Haroup SHAMEL. 251. *Fur farming in Europe. BROOK. 95. New pocket gophers from Arizona and Utah. E.A.Goupman. 416. *Observations on Colorado elk herds. J.W.SpPENCER. 95. *Reestablishment of muskoxen in Alaska. W.B. Bru. 99. Three new pumas. E. W. NELSON and E. A. GoLpMAN. 209. Two new desert foxes. 249. Six new white-footed mice (Peromyscus maniculatus group) from islands off the pacific Coast. E. W. Nr.son and E. A. GotpMan. 530. Mathematics. On Fermat’s Last Theorem III. Vau. Mar. Spunar. 21. The quantum theory of Born and Wiener. R.J.SEncer. 315. Meteorology. *Aurora australiso bserved on the Byrd Antartic Expedition. F. T. Davins. 280. *Meteorology. J.H. Pau. 46. *The zodiacal light. E. O. HuLsurt. 276. F, G. AsH- E. A. GOLDMAN. Miscellaneous. *A consideration of edu- cational, especially biological, prog- ress in China, prefaced by some general remarks on the country and its people. W.A.Horrman. 451. *Five thousand miles for a liverwort. R. F.Griaes. 373. } *General features of the Upper Missis- sippi River Wild Life and Fish Refuge. VERNON BartEy. 445. *The fish poison Derris. INGHAM. 449, “The Joseph Henry lectureship. 344. *“The place of reason in nature. PAUL R. Hey. 55. *The unity of nature as illustrated by the Grand Canyon. Joun C. Merriam. 441. *Wild-life protection in Alaska. TERHUNE. 447. Necrology. ACHESON, EDWARD GOODRICH. 346. AINSLIE, GEORGE Goopine. 48. CLARKE, FRANK WIGGLESWORTH. 346. FARRINGTON, ARTHURM. 376. GAUTIER, RAOUL. 282, 340. GIDLEY, JAMES WILLIAMS. 476. HopGxins, Howarp Lincoun. 180. OakLEy, RUSSELL ARTHUR. 376. Paut, Henry Martyn. 182. PRITCHARD, FREDERICK J. 48. SPILLMAN, WILLIAM JASPER. 346. Oceanography. *Oceanography. BIN: Soute. 46. *Recent developments in the hydrogra- phic work of the Coast and Geodetic Survey with special reference to the survey of Georges Bank. F. S. BorpENn. 59. | Ornithology. *Adventures in bird protec- tion. T.GILBERT PEARSON. 446. *Exhibition of paintings of Florida birds A.H.Hower.u. 445. *The International Ornithological Con- gress. ALEXANDER WETMORE. 94. *Waterfowl and reptile life of the Upper Mississippi River Wild Life and Fish Refuge. F.M.Uuurr. 445. Paleobotany. A Bothrodendron from Boli- EpWARD W. BERRY. 295. D. E. Bucx- H.W. vila. DEC. 19, 1931 Paleontology. Concerning the authorship of the Preliminary notice of the lamelli- branch shells of the upper Helderberg, Hamilton, and Chemung groups, etc., part 2. G.A.Cooprmr. 459. Nodosaria pozoensis W. Berry, 0. sp. WILLARD Berry. 415. Indianites, new name for the Cambrian crustacean /ndiana Ulrich and Bassler E. O. Utricuoand R.S. Basster. 364. New Carboniferous invertebrates—III. GrorGce H.Girty. 390. Revision of the names of three fossils from the Castle Hayne and Trent marls in North Carolina. L. B. Keuuum. 51. The mastodon of Thomas Jefferson. MareGarer R. Hitcucock. 80. Physical chemistry. Adsorption and base exchange. P.G.NurtTine. 33. The heat of solution of some potash minerals. L. T. RicHAaRDSON and R.C. WEeEtts. 2438. The influence of pressure on the solubil- ity of sodium chloride in water. A new method for the measurement of the solubilities of electrolytes under pressure. L. H. Apams and R. E. Hauy. 183. *Van’t Hoff’s studies of minerals de- posited from sea water. R.C.WELLs. 372. Physiography. *Observations in The Dalles region, Oregon, bearing on the history of the Columbia River. A. M.Prrrer. 371. *The physiography of south-central Idaho. C.P.Ross. 369. Why the Mayan cities of the Petén District, Guatemala, were abandoned. C. WYTHE CooKE. 283. Physics. *Atmosphericelectricity. O.H GisH. 47. *An investigation of the effectiveness and reliability of electric sparks in automotive ignition. M. F. Prrsrs. 56. *Artificial radium rays from _high- voltage tubes. M.A. Tuve. 167. Certain aspects of Henry’s experiments on electromagnetic induction. Jos- EPH S.AmES. 493. SUBJECT INDEX 551 *Internal friction in metals. R. H. CANFIELD. 278. *Measurement of the elastic hysteresis by means of tuning forks. G. H. KEULEGAN. 55. *New instruments and methods in length measurements of high precision L. V. Jupson. 55. *Optical methods for reducing the ef- fects of photographic-plate grain. F. E. Wricut. 279. *Radio aids to air navigation. MOND. 48. *Radio with the Byrd Antarctic Expedi- tion. Matcotm P. Hansom. 168. *Temperature coefficient of the modulus of rigidity of instrument-diaphragm and spring materials. W. G. Brom- BACHER. 56. The cubic compressibility of certain substances. L. H. Apams and R. E. GIBSON. 381. *The measurement of sound absorption. V. L. Curisuter and W. F. Snypmr. ariel The quantum theory of Born and Wiener. R. J. SEEGER. 315. *The radiation from metal surfaces under low-speed electron bombard- ment. F.L. MouHuEr and C. BorcxK- NER. 279. *The volume change of rubber under pressure. R. E. Gipson and L. H. ApaAms. 48. *The Waidner-Burgess standard of light and the freezing point of platinum. H. T. WENSEL. 276. Population analysis. The extinction of ED rA— families, I. Atrrep J. LorKa. Sale The extinction of families. II. 453. Scientific notes and news. 32, 47, 61, 154, 182, 206, 237, 253, 314, 344, 375, 407, 451, 475, 491. Statistics. Some elementary properties of moments-of-frequency distributions. AS J Oma Ui: Zoology. A Microfilaria from the blood of a wild rabbit. BENJAMIN SCHWARTZ and JosepH E. AuicaTa. 298. A new marine mollusk, Aurinia schmitit. PauL BarRtTscH. 529. 552 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 21, No. 21 A new species of Pinnotherid crab from Costa Rica. Mary J. RatTHBun. 262. Animal life on Barro Colorado Island. S.W.Frost. 173. Chondronema passali (Leidy, 1852) n. g. (Nematoda), with notes on its life history. J. R. Curistie and B. G. CuHItwoop. 356. Copepoda from El Dwicut MarsxH. 207. *Exhibition of a rare isopod. W. L. Scumitt. 95. Flagellate spermatozoa in a nematode (Trilobus longus). B. G. Currwoop. Al. *Is international zoological nomen- clature practicable? Report on Padua Congress. C. W. Stites. 97. Metagonimoides oregonensis, a new trem- atode from a raccoon. EMMETT W. Pricge. 405. Neotylenchus albulbosus n. g., nN. sp. (Tylenchidae, Nematoda) the causal Salvador. C. agent of a new nematosis of various crop plants. G. STEINER. 536. New crabs from the Gulf of Mexico. Mary J. Ratupun. 125. On the status of the nemic genera Aphelenchus Bastain, Pathoaphelen- chus Cobb, Paraphelenchus Micoletzky Parasitaphelenchus Fuchs, Isonchus Cobb and Seinura Fuchs. G. STEINER. 468. Resistance of rats to superinfections with a nematode, Nippostrongylus muris, and an apparently similar resistance of horses to superinfec- tions with nematodes. BENJAMIN ScuowarTz, JospepH HE. AuicaTa, and Joun T. Lucker. 259. *Spawning, setting and development of the oyster. H.F. PrytTHEercu. 98. The copepod genera Broteas Lovén, Paradiaptomus Sars, Lovenula Schmeil, Metadiaptomus Methuen, and Adiap- tomus Cooper. C. Dwiagut Marsu. 397. OFFICIAL COMMUNICATIONS _ THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS Wednesday, December 23 The Medical Society Saturday, December 26 The Biological Society Wednesday, December 30 The Medical Society Friday, January 1 The Geographic Society The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if sent to the editors by the eleventh and twenty-fifth day of each month. OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY President: N. A. Coss, Bureau of Plant Industry. Corresponding Secretary: Paunt E. Hows, Bureau of Animal Industry. Recording Secretary: CHarLes THom, Bureau of Chemistry and Soils. Treasurer: Hunry G. Avurs, Coast and Geodetic Survey. Soc a ee PP ats This JouRNAL is indexed i in the International Index to = Pellet RETF ea oe, Meteast ath Ms fi Fo) eae Cee cy hone phe ti ky “i eel “as TITTTATTTT TTR ra bill whee a Mal . a ee td yd ¥yy, PAI AWA amtinas Beane sane Cae 2 TINN | | svc upon sind Ae adi deacons af ie f ate ay er” ~-rA 2.9% aks Pe ei oe ar n Ap Mos yee ens aacsarar: MEER SMA ty pm qaur tye marnel Ti a ~Aeay se a Ae esterday) agian ie qigngh TARA, Ran set Anat an - hie eal beret annnnasnan aiptalassen, " Sa \ yMNS YYSAT 9 ve i maeeaerrcriTrn Ths LY ay oon _ssacannathBanepneuee! Pre a RaQ, Ad oie ha rere sg Pele! f HT UT at aime, al : hb, Writyrry TTT AALS Peak, © Rh ig, a Atdiaahsn Pebabalal Lo Leal Shhh ee emedoi mel >! HURL man oN shoe o in oA ened, Maa | oad nami ae NW me RaanAa laf achlscd tana saiheea eats 08 Ble.sh.. , a) ~4@ as aaa oanbancal RRLADAE bs Pool aada tT) be eRe ea liene tide ag PASM net fii aaa fae eB If dE SN hw Vee dein er tt E wenn AA, ce A ane hi ALet 44 “*"Prwve, _< Mu peat Bean Veo t'es. mann p0Oa, ~ ae = a as id Ny Ji | Se EAE 3° 04 s @ v sea, recent OO Naa saa? hay bee seas &) Nae : nish pet ri nye: a 3 Fe rere tt q Mhehiee, G * ts 4 ar abe rp Pe THT iki Patron - LEE Mel Wales rs al - o> Sis re eR. 5 ery > . 5 4 . ie a! att “o enna | A met > o | } 4 ¢ Raf’ \ | é ry q ‘ mt Ae ar’ bby ry FP lotaaet Sl Cal | pn PUAN onann Bow Paa.. oo. init we f 2 s ne x ait ae! ree oe Py NN ey f ‘a ney a a Be | Suey At. 4 Ht ‘YY A ve Pitta tina ant aes a cain A F ul Mal wd ON Ny Nalabs Freee ary | id Manoa WAM EOWA mytiaa, 9 oY as iT ’ _/* onea) 11 als THT ETT VP parla oO Len Tp ey 4) af co way! nd bu fin a ai ee wi PBNAN ’. aan Ba. | wal aNd Ap a pik~* \ yar a , > Pibied eae, - No Po Tod + a SESS Mane? 1} pi atl A all Ina - ean aaa: my A RQ eH ‘ a. ‘ re Net a tae Brecht SO Lorene a aR! we TARSAL Vist ae di, - het Tory Neg ie, aot DeobbaiaesT | fueaue , ry A Mele ei loled bly ie meee TTT TT akn Mig ® HI aw. 4 | | ap . Nam NK mii ght allthis xo tean TURTLE ACR ga ~ ott + Dan ‘s ghee cts MARA Pop, we aa TREE iy ya | Ags! Boe, 1 , nMigenake Nan oT on ud Pian 7h, 3 Paya ige TTY a ie Pld pRIAPP RAS “oi eee Tp pe sane: POS SS a, ‘ ous, ASARARAR A, a al Re | AAA, : ha Dean “Supp d li ai alta aamaaey Manas, Nid HER abba, en bans a bl as an ‘\> \,a oe PRAL TUS PEE LAY tw Wanaaasnraisiga,” ow oer ™ Sage= YY ry bp jist i fetnce’ Neo ae MS Wir. _ sew f Paes ronda PVE Vannes, pani iy ROY spaaandali ge staal Chee jn/**8 ‘ahd TY aaa! sae Ps 4 taste ee Siena =” AB snagae eke ane eee Nate 2 pimlya S| { a 3 = a =~ ‘ | er seas ee ee al Stay iv i te 1 ‘he hi 2h Ny 2 Th nner ae ecttel namang Qa Baas Uy) SRR we A Phe Ae. “a, yy: ‘Bap “ac axa nr WKY, bt gies qhgr qh TRA | ‘aaattSea wor ~ eppee {en HLL | aonnmsalpfilangsan : ‘+ zak Man mah VISA 9) 4 _apagan Pigg vee rere TT Peer a samt => a mpninnnrat aid ae Bs, suid at pA pl. ao gone af PET ela | | Ky wet : ELLE | piadane wags ‘ ~ ~» 2 ~ ae a = \e Pe i, & Gata; EPP t | crete pellaiay ote eat HATE Ne Aru t Agata SRIABAAR Fa aM Manaiiatailll WY Pete At ARR ene, mit)? a - Sa a) } slaeialial “| Bool Rs , dB ay ins ! bar eA ‘ <4.) es" SSSR . JT 5 ieee Coed em er a 3 Fe: | Nay AA | bl ME N Apron Ly, | if “a Th perhisb rennin me YT Mh wry. Ne x4 a > - ite Jah, pats 8 «a ‘=e ~* 1 Re Pred Poet tp $ EARS) * Aecak bet aa = caine er RAAB anton yen mia "ip AP aie bl Ly ts anally bbe in, ang snd? Ae gene an as 28 a. ese Seat ryt mat idan Gd eal “SAU AR) aa MANRAN ap wereais Nh obit oad. Wud a Prawns Vn TTT inc Maan *AARAL | ray & pp tte. Namanasar ridin, bs el Ph 4. es “Nas baal a Sanat aac ices Sncaat ine CONE von aan acet hs 1 e ladl ed a eonsds seyyet de de be be] % a we in Bbie es yur Maret elaine lei vray panaaoag ol =| onp™ | x Ap = epeeeeeks y~ a IAN og, ’ Ms 2 > > ee Lop Pant “ enaeaaaant peereatnill “e AT iat tt TH RRL Amann aw NG Sp dosh paar Nye . Cry at a erty SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES a wl UU aaa Se sate : 3 9088 01303 1752 cmp anet ; rar : . Seah erposvel . : cy 7 . ' " -<— » pis ‘ ‘1 = - rt ee de ; ; * 4 * rv “ss r e s : , us we . A 4 a . . ot - i ‘ 4 ad tant 0 : ‘ 7 y ernie ull. o 4 ; Pin} - > rs au” 3 i) : Y « ante " nL) ot ¢ ‘ . . : é P ; of . +o . ‘ ’ v t Seen oF pewened : 5 ‘ ‘ Ret & veh ee 7 4 ot ye wow ¥ “ P ‘ ‘ . to tp NN ee ak ae ts NE ‘3 —— oad + = you ve . paydody Ln . . “4 ‘ i ‘ ‘ : ‘ wae . . ’ « ‘ . ‘ abcigat - : F 4 vee 4 . ts . * - . rer ee As cep eeee | 40 hae? . - pmb er Mita © race : mph gree ¥ ANTE ' i) on ee ae Bd . - suet “ou awe Pause " s ' ‘ wa ae y oeewined wee yo . -% ‘ eee am # rer LL a7 RopRcaNN «FROG > : - iow : «nr ea we ara tee ‘ = J v4 < ‘ ; ae ‘ e « on ae ue ‘ « * +a \ ‘ : ’ ¥ eta waned See es e * . , bd . ‘ tg Hew ND HY neat 1 Gee Kee artic , Hood « bree ’ ’ ' ee mee ry ‘ * ‘ ‘ " ‘ ‘ 4 y arnt ¥ baby ian . * soe ve . « ’ +4 aa ‘ ‘ ‘ . > sa Son byt pe sew CAVE OH oe . whip * oo " nee ath. a ’